JP7771012B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that allows games to be played.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines and slot machines, are equipped with movable bodies that can be operated, and can perform movable body effects by moving the movable bodies while variable symbol displays are being performed.

Some gaming machines of this type are capable of executing an initial operation (long initial operation) that causes the movable body to operate in the same way as the performance operation when the power is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, or an initial operation (short initial operation) that causes the movable body to operate by omitting some of the performance operation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Furthermore, some conventional gaming machines are capable of executing variable displays and are controllable to a jackpot gaming state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to the player. When a new start win occurs and a reserved memory containing information related to the variable display is generated, they are capable of displaying an appearance animation that gradually displays the reserved display based on the reserved memory (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-113217 JP 2016-97173 A

There was room for improving the marketability of gaming machines with the functions and configurations described in Patent Documents 1 and 2.

This invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

(A) A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
a transmitting means for transmitting start information corresponding to a variable display pattern including a specific variable display pattern;
receiving means for receiving the start information;
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
Reserved storage means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
A movable body and
a movable body control means,
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation operation control to operate the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally when power is turned on,
the effect execution means is capable of performing an action promotion effect that prompts a player to take an action during variable display based on the specific variable display pattern;
The specific variable display pattern is
A first part until the action prompting performance is executed;
A second part is executed after the first part, and a result of the action prompting performance is notified.
The invention comprises:
The movable body control means
The confirmation operation control can be performed using a first operation control pattern that operates the movable body for a first period and a second operation control pattern that operates the movable body for a second period that is shorter than the first period,
a first movable body control pattern for performing the confirmation operation control using the first operation control pattern when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display, and then the power is turned on and the receiving means does not receive start information corresponding to the specific variable display pattern;
a second movable body control pattern that, when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display and then the power is turned on and the receiving means receives start information corresponding to the specific variable display pattern , controls the movable body so that the confirmation operation control is performed with the second operation control pattern during execution of the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern and the confirmation operation control is completed before the second part is started;
The confirmation operation control can be performed in a plurality of patterns including
The performance execution means
During the variable display, it is possible to execute a movable body effect using the movable body, and to display an effect display corresponding to the movable body effect,
When the variable display that executes the movable body performance is started while the confirmation operation control is being performed, the confirmation operation control is continued, and the movable body performance is restricted during the confirmation operation control to display the effect display,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information about variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
When the variable display is completed, the game control means can execute the next variable display if there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means
When the reserved memory is stored, a reserved memory performance can be executed,
When the reserved memory is stored, one of a plurality of types of reserved displays including a normal reserved display and a special reserved display that has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the normal reserved display can be displayed;
When the hold memory is stored, the normal hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a normal start mode, a normal completion mode, and a plurality of normal intermediate modes including a normal pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the normal completion mode,
When the reserved memory is stored, the special reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a special start mode, a special completion mode, and a plurality of special intermediate modes including a special pre-completion mode which is the mode immediately before the special completion mode,
The reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display can be moved from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to the position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the number of reserved memories N, which is a variable display in a situation where N number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed stepwise from the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changed to the normal completion mode over the predetermined period, and the normal hold display is displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the special start mode is gradually changed to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then the special hold display is changed to the special completion mode, and this change is carried out over the predetermined period to display the special hold display;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the normal start mode to a normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, and when the next variable display is started in a situation where the normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode is reached, the display is changed to the normal completion mode based on that timing and the normal hold display is displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the special start mode to a special midway mode different from the special pre-completion mode, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the special midway mode different from the special pre-completion mode is reached, the mode is changed to the special completion mode based on that timing and the special hold display is displayed ,
In either case, when a new reserved memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than a predetermined period, or when a new reserved memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than a predetermined period, the reserved memory performance can be executed over a special period,
The display area used for the change in which the normal hold display is started in the normal start mode, gradually changed from the normal start mode to the normal midway mode, and then changed to the normal completion mode is larger than the display area used for displaying the normal hold display during the period from when the normal hold display is displayed in the normal completion mode to when the hold shift starts,
The display area used for the change in which the special hold display is started in the special start mode, gradually changed from the special start mode to the special intermediate mode, and then changed to the special completion mode is larger than the display area used for the display of the special hold display during the period from when the special hold display is displayed in the special completion mode to when the hold shift starts.
It is characterized by:

The present invention may have only the specific features of the invention set forth in the claims of the present invention, or it may have both the specific features of the invention set forth in the claims of the present invention and features other than those specific features.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. This is a diagram showing the numerical range of a jackpot and the numerical range of a miss with time reduction in the variable display of the first special chart in normal state or time reduction state. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. A front view showing a pachinko gaming machine in characteristic section 131SG. This is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in the pachinko gaming machine in the characteristic section 131SG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table, (C1) and (C2) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table, and (D) is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. An explanatory diagram showing a time-saving number determination table for each transition trigger. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern type determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. This is an explanatory diagram showing the expectation level of the reach effect of the super reach. This is an explanatory diagram showing the difference in expectation level between the reach effects of super reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance control command. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a game control data storage area. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance control data storage area. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number value determination process when a prize is won. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal special symbol processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal special symbol processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. FIG. 2 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. An explanatory diagram showing the execution rate of the pre-reading preview performance. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display start setting process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the determination ratio of the stopping symbols. An explanatory diagram showing the performance control patterns for each variation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing the performance control patterns for each variation pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the flow of effects during variable display in the normal state. This figure shows the flow of presentation during variable display in time-saving state A and special state. A diagram showing the flow of presentation during variable display in time-saving state B. A figure showing the progression of images when the low base weak reach A performance is executed. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base weak reach A performance. A figure showing the progression of images when the low base weak reach B performance is executed. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base weak reach B performance. A figure showing the progression of images when the low base strong reach A performance is executed. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strong reach A performance. This figure shows the progression of images showing a bad example of a low-base strong reach A presentation. A figure showing the progression of images when the low base strong reach B performance is executed. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strong reach A performance. A figure showing the transition of images when the low-base strongest reach effect is executed. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low-base strongest reach effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the transition of an image in a modified example of the title display part. This figure shows the progression of images when high-base super reach A to D effects are executed. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of high base super reach A to D effects. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the position where title characters are displayed in the display area of the image display device. An explanatory diagram showing the presentation time of the super reach presentation. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the presentation times of super reach presentations. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the title characters and decorative patterns of the super reach performance. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution status of the expectation level suggestion display. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the transition of images when a selection effect is executed. An explanatory diagram showing the number of operations required to switch to the next title in the selection effect and the execution rate of the super reach effect when the selection effect is executed. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of effects that can be performed during variable display. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the execution rate of effects that can be executed during variable display. A figure showing the display status of the explanation displayed in the explanation display performance. This is a timing chart showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display performance. A diagram showing the execution status of the title color change effect. A diagram showing the timing at which the color of the title characters changes in the title color change effect. A diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion performance A. A diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion presentation B. A diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion presentation C. A diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion performance D. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating a display mode of an operation prompting image. A diagram showing the execution status of the jackpot start effect. A diagram showing the display status of the remaining number of times until Yu-time. A diagram showing the execution status of the Yu-time start effect. There is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the title text of the super reach effect, the explanatory text, the title text of the jackpot start effect, and the operation prompt text. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the title characters of the Super Reach effect and the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the arrangement of game effect lamps. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to an LED driver. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by timer management of a child table. FIG. A figure showing a brightness data table used in super reach effects. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table for weak reach common titles. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of a child table for weak reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of weak reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of weak reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of weak reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the parent table for the title common chance up red. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of the title common chance up red child table. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the title common chance up red. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the title common chance up red. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the title common chance up red. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table for the title common chance up money. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of a title-wide chance-up golden child table. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the title common chance up money. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the title common chance up money. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the title common chance up money. This figure shows the settings of the parent table for the weak reach system weak reach A introduction. A diagram showing the settings of a child table for the weak reach system weak reach A introduction. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach A is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach A is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach A is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach A is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach A is introduced in the weak reach system. This figure shows the settings of the parent table for the weak reach system weak reach B introduction. A diagram showing the settings of a child table for the weak reach system weak reach B introduction. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach B is introduced in the weak reach system. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach B is introduced in the weak reach system. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach B is introduced in the weak reach system. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach B is introduced in the weak reach system. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach B is introduced in the weak reach system. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach B is introduced in the weak reach system. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table of strong reach common titles. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of a child table for a strong reach common title. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of a grandchild table for strong reach common titles. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of a grandchild table for strong reach common titles. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of a grandchild table for strong reach common titles. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the settings of a grandchild table for strong reach common titles. This figure shows the setting contents of the parent table for the strong reach system strong reach A introduction. A diagram showing the settings of a child table for the strong reach system with strong reach A introduced. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when strong reach A is introduced in the strong reach system. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when strong reach A is introduced in the strong reach system. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when strong reach A is introduced in the strong reach system. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when strong reach A is introduced in the strong reach system. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when strong reach A is introduced in the strong reach system. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when strong reach A is introduced in the strong reach system. This is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table for the strong reach system strong reach B introduction. A diagram showing the settings of a child table for the strong reach system strong reach B introduction. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strong reach system strong reach B is introduced. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strong reach system strong reach B is introduced. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strong reach system strong reach B is introduced. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strong reach system strong reach B is introduced. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strong reach system strong reach B is introduced. This figure shows the settings of the parent table for the strongest reach title introduction of the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the child table for the strongest reach title introduction of the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. A diagram showing the settings of the parent table of high base reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the child table of the high base reach common title. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of high base reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of high base reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of high base reach common titles. This figure shows the settings of the parent table for the introduction of high base reach type reach A. A diagram showing the settings of the child table for the introduction of high base reach type reach A. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when high base reach type reach A is introduced. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when high base reach type reach A is introduced. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when high base reach type reach A is introduced. This figure shows the settings of the parent table for the introduction of high base reach type reach B. A diagram showing the settings of the child table for the introduction of high base reach type reach B. This figure shows the settings of the parent table for the introduction of high base reach type reach C. A diagram showing the settings of the child table for the introduction of high base reach type reach C. A diagram showing the settings of the parent table for the introduction of high base reach reach D. A diagram showing the settings of the child table for the introduction of high base reach reach D. This figure shows the relationship between the timing and brightness data that make up the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance control command. 10A is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable display result designation command, and FIG. 10B is a diagram illustrating an example of a game state background designation command. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2, (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special pattern), (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table (for the second special pattern), and (E) is an explanatory diagram showing a small jackpot type determination table. An explanatory diagram of the types of jackpots. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a game control data storage area. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data holding area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received at the time of starting winning. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number value determination process when a prize is won. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal special symbol processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. This is a flowchart showing an example of processing during small win release. This is a flowchart showing an example of small win end processing. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an initial operation control process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an origin placement control process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an operation check control process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an operation check control process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a switching control table. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams of control during an execution period of confirmation control and control during an execution period of post-confirmation operation control. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display start setting process. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. 1A shows a state in which the on-board movable body is located at the origin position, and FIG. 1B shows a state in which the on-board movable body is located at the performance position. 1A shows the state in which the under-board movable body is located at the origin position, and FIG. 1B shows the state in which the under-board movable body is located at the performance position. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which the frame-mounted movable body and the chance button are located at the origin position, and (B) is a diagram showing a state in which they are located at the performance position. A diagram showing a list of effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU. (A) is a diagram showing the effects that can be executed during the variable display period of the SP reach, and (B) is a diagram showing a list of effects that can be executed in the jackpot game state. A diagram showing an example of the operation of the pre-reading movable object announcement. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the start notice operation. A diagram showing an example of the operation of movable object preview and pseudo consecutive preview. A figure showing an example of the reach warning and button warning operations. A figure showing an example of the operation of SP reach notice. A diagram showing an example of the operation of a jackpot presentation. A figure showing an example of the operation of a jackpot effect (promotion effect). FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of state transition operation control. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of a customer waiting demo performance. 1A is a diagram illustrating the operation of a movable body, and FIG. 1B is a diagram illustrating the manner in which a lamp and sound are emitted in response to the operation of the movable body. 10A to 10J are diagrams illustrating an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control during cold start processing. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow when a power interruption occurs. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow when a power interruption occurs. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow when a power interruption occurs. This is a timing chart for when a moving body preview is performed after initial operation by cold start. This is a timing chart for limiting movable body advance notice during initial operation due to cold start. This is an explanatory diagram showing the situation when a starting win occurs during initial operation due to a cold start. This is an explanatory diagram showing the situation when a starting win occurs during initial operation due to a cold start. This is a timing chart for when a movable body preview is performed after initial operation by hot start. This is a timing chart for limiting movable body advance notice during initial operation due to cold start. This is a timing chart for limiting movable body advance notice after initial operation due to cold start. This is a timing chart for limiting the look-ahead movable body advance notice during the initial operation due to a cold start. This is a timing chart when a start winning occurs during the initial operation and variable 2 display that executes a movable body preview is started during the initial operation period in response to the start winning. This is a timing chart when a start winning occurs during the initial operation and a variable display that executes a movable body preview is started during the initial operation period in response to the start winning. This is a timing chart when a start winning occurs after the initial operation and a variable display that executes a movable body preview is started during the initial operation period in response to the start winning. This is a timing chart when a start winning occurs during the initial operation and a variable display that executes a movable body preview is started during the initial operation period in response to the start winning. This is a timing chart showing a case where the movable body moves to the performance position as an initial operation, and a case where the movable body does not move to the performance position as an initial operation. As a performance action of the moving object announcement, the moving object may move to the performance position, and as a performance action of the moving object announcement, the moving object may move to the performance position. This is a timing chart of a movable body preview when the movable body stops on its way from the origin position to the performance position as an initial operation. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation due to a cold start. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. This is a timing chart of a demonstration effect when a movable body stops midway from the origin position to the effect position during initial operation. This figure shows an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of a jackpot fluctuation. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a fanfare performance. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of the fanfare performance. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of operation when operation confirmation control is executed for fanfare performance. 1A is a diagram showing the relationship between an on-board movable body and various displays, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the relationship between an under-board movable body and various displays. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a round of play. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of one round of play. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of a special interval. A diagram showing an example of the operation of operation confirmation control as a modified example when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of a special interval. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the start of a round of play in which a promotion effect is executed. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of the final round of play. A figure showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance. A figure showing an example of the operation of a movable body when a power outage occurs during time reduction and operation confirmation control is started based on the power being turned on afterwards. 1A is a diagram showing the relationship between an on-board movable body and various displays, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the relationship between an under-board movable body and various displays. This figure shows an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of a fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the button notice is executed. This figure shows an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of a fluctuation before the fluctuation for which a start-time notice is executed. This figure shows an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of a fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the pseudo-continuous notification is executed. A figure showing an example of the operation of a movable body when a power outage occurs during normal fluctuation and operation confirmation control is started based on the power being turned on afterwards. 1A is a diagram showing the relationship between an on-board movable body and various displays, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the relationship between an under-board movable body and various displays. This figure shows an example of the operation of a movable body when a power outage occurs during a jackpot and operation confirmation control is initiated based on the power being turned on afterwards. 1A is a diagram showing the relationship between an on-board movable body and various displays, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the relationship between an under-board movable body and various displays. A figure showing an example of the operation of a movable body when a power outage occurs during time reduction and operation confirmation control is started based on the power being turned on afterwards. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an initial operation performed during a cold start. 10A and 10B are timing charts showing an initial operation by a cold start and a timing chart showing an initial operation by a hot start. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 10 is a timing chart showing an initial operation by hot start. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of the relationship between an initialization notification image and operation confirmation control. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of the relationship between an initialization notification image and operation confirmation control. 10A to 10D are diagrams illustrating an example of the operation of the operation check control during cold start processing as a modified example. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing examples of the presentation operation of the win/lose button presentation as a modified example. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of operation when an error occurs in the operation confirmation control. 1 is a front view showing a gaming machine according to an embodiment. FIG. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the circuit configuration of the main board. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a VRAM. FIG. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a miss effect determination table. An explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern type determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern in the normal state, (B) is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern in the special state. (A) to (F) are explanatory diagrams of the fluctuation pattern determination table for losses. (A) to (D) are explanatory diagrams of the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses. (A) to (C) are explanatory diagrams of the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses. (A) to (C) are explanatory diagrams of the fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpots. 10 is an explanatory diagram of each game state. FIG. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the special pattern unit, (B) is an explanatory diagram of the variable display of the special pattern, (C) is an explanatory diagram of the display unit for performance, and (D) is an explanatory diagram of the variable display of the sub-pattern. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a game control data storage area. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an input port. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an output port. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data holding area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received at the time of starting winning. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing two-byte buffers formed in a RAM used in the switch process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a switch process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a random number update process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a start port switch passing process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a winning effect processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal special symbol processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol buffer shift process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a display process. An explanatory diagram of the lighting control mode of each hold indicator. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol display control process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a display control process. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the timing of command transmission when a starting winning occurs and the timing of starting light control of the reserve display, (B) is an explanatory diagram of the timing of command transmission at the start of variable display and the timing of starting light control in the reserve display after the number of reserved memories has been subtracted, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of the timing of starting light control of the special pattern at the start of variable display and the timing of starting subtraction of the variable display time. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of triggers for changing the presentation mode in the presentation mode determination process. An explanatory diagram of whether or not a hold change effect will be executed and the determination ratio of the effect pattern. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a flash effect process when a prize is won. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the ratio for determining whether or not to execute a flash effect when a prize is won. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a button vibration effect process. An explanatory diagram of the lighting control mode of each sub-hold indicator. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display start setting process. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the processing cycle of the CPU and the CPU for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the animation execution period for each performance mode. (A1) and (A2) are explanatory diagrams of the display mode of the image display device in presentation mode A, (B1) and (B2) are explanatory diagrams of the display mode of the image display device in presentation mode B, (C1) and (C2) are explanatory diagrams of the display mode of the image display device in presentation mode C, and (D1) and (D2) are explanatory diagrams of the display mode of the image display device in presentation mode D. An explanatory diagram showing the appearance animation in presentation mode A. An explanatory diagram showing the appearance animation in presentation mode A. An explanatory diagram showing the movement of the hold display in the appearance animation in presentation mode A. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a shift animation. An explanatory diagram showing the appearance animation in presentation mode B. An explanatory diagram showing the appearance animation in presentation mode B. An explanatory diagram showing the appearance animation in presentation mode C. An explanatory diagram showing the appearance animation in presentation mode D. 10A is an explanatory diagram showing the dwell animation in presentation mode A, and FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram showing the dwell animation in presentation mode B. FIG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the ending animation in presentation mode A, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the ending animation in presentation mode B, (C) is an explanatory diagram showing the ending animation in presentation mode C, and (D) is an explanatory diagram showing the ending animation in presentation mode D. An explanatory diagram showing the shift animation in presentation mode A. An explanatory diagram showing the shift animation in presentation mode A. An explanatory diagram showing the shift animation in presentation mode B. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display mode of the active display area and the pending display area in each presentation mode, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the animation in each presentation mode. This is an explanatory diagram of the animation that appears when a pending memory occurs when the number of pending memories is one or more. This is an explanatory diagram of the animation that appears when a pending memory occurs when the number of pending memories is one or more. This is an explanatory diagram of the animation that appears when a pending memory occurs when the number of pending memories is 0. This is an explanatory diagram of the animation that appears when a pending memory occurs when the number of pending memories is 0. This is an explanatory diagram of a case where a new pending memory occurs during a variable display with 1 to 3 pending memories, and the appearance animation starts more than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display. This is an explanatory diagram of a case where a new pending memory occurs during a variable display with 1 to 3 pending memories, and the appearance animation starts less than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display. This is an explanatory diagram showing when a new pending memory occurs during the shift animation after the variable display of pending memories from 1 to 3 has ended and the next variable display has begun. This is an explanatory diagram showing the case where a pending memory occurs within 33 ms after the variable display of pending memories from 1 to 3 has ended and the next variable display has begun. This is an explanatory diagram showing the case where a new pending memory occurs less than 33 ms before the start of the next variable display after the variable display of pending memories from 1 to 3 has ended. This is an explanatory diagram showing when a new start win occurs while the number of reserved memories is variable and displayed as four. This is an explanatory diagram showing the case where a new reserved memory occurs in the shift animation of the next variable display after the variable display of four reserved memories has ended. This is an explanatory diagram showing when a new start winning occurs during the pattern determination period after the variable display of the number of reserved memories is completed to four. This is an explanatory diagram showing the case where a new pending memory occurs within 33 ms from the start of the next variable display after the variable display of four pending memories has ended. This is an explanatory diagram of a case where a new pending memory occurs during a variable display with 0 pending memories, and the appearance animation starts more than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display. This is an explanatory diagram of a case where a new pending memory occurs during a variable display with 0 pending memories, and the appearance animation starts less than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display. This is an explanatory diagram showing the case where a new reserved memory occurs less than 33 ms after the end of the pattern determination period for a variable display with 0 reserved memories. This is an explanatory diagram showing the case where a new reserved memory occurs less than 33 ms before the end of the pattern determination period for a variable display with 0 reserved memories. This is an explanatory diagram showing the occurrence of a new reserved memory at a timing of 33 ms or more after the end of the pattern determination period for a variable display with 0 reserved memories. This is an explanatory diagram regarding the timing of starting variable display when there are 0 pending memories and a new pending memory occurs when variable display is not being executed. This is an explanatory diagram regarding the timing of starting variable display when there are 0 pending memories and a new pending memory occurs when variable display is not being executed. This is an explanatory diagram regarding the display timing of the hold indicator and hold display when there are 0 hold memories and a new hold memory occurs when variable display is being executed. This is an explanatory diagram regarding the display timing of the hold indicator and hold display when there is one hold memory and a new hold memory occurs when variable display is being executed. This is an explanatory diagram regarding the display timing of the hold indicator and hold display when there are 0 hold memories and a new hold memory occurs when variable display is being executed. This is an explanatory diagram regarding the display timing of the hold indicator and hold display when there are 0 hold memories and a new hold memory occurs when variable display is being executed. A comparison diagram of each performance. This is an explanatory diagram for storing random numbers extracted during the start port switch passing process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a special buffer shifting process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a special buffer shifting process. This is an explanatory diagram showing when a new pending memory occurs during a shift animation in presentation mode C or presentation mode D. This is an explanatory diagram showing when a new pending memory occurs during a shift animation in presentation mode C or presentation mode D. This is an explanatory diagram showing when a new pending memory occurs during a shift animation in presentation mode C or presentation mode D. This is an explanatory diagram of what happens when reserved storage occurs continuously. This is an explanatory diagram showing the occurrence of a new reserved memory when there are 0 reserved memories and variable display is not being executed.

[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special design, second special design),
The feature of this invention is that decorative identification information (decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), and in the title display part in the specific reach, a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed so as to use the display position of the decorative identification information (decorative pattern) that has become a reach state.
According to this feature, when decorative identification information is displayed in a reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative identification information has become a reach state. Therefore, by displaying the title display corresponding to the specific reach using the display position of the decorative identification information that has become a reach state in the title display part of the specific reach, attention can naturally be drawn to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of form 1-2 is the gaming machine according to form 1-1,
The decorative identification information is displayed in a reach mode of a first size (decorative pattern (large)) before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), and then the decorative identification information (decorative pattern (large)) displayed in the reach mode is displayed in a second size (decorative pattern (small)) smaller than the first size, and the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is displayed so as to use the display position of the decorative identification information (decorative pattern (small)) displayed in the second size.
According to this feature, the decorative identification information that was displayed in the first size becomes the second size, attracting the player's attention, and by using the display position of the decorative identification information in the second size to display a title display corresponding to a specific reach, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of form 1-3 is the gaming machine according to form 1-1 or 1-2,
In the title display part in the specific reach, at the timing when the decorative identification information (decorative pattern) that has become a reach state is displayed, a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative identification information (decorative pattern) that has become a reach state.
According to this feature, at the timing when decorative identification information that has become a reach state is displayed in the title display part of a specific reach, the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative identification information that has become a reach state, making it easier to draw attention to the title display.

A gaming machine of form 1-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-3,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) and a second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach,
The title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach are characterized in that they appear overlapping with one of the decorative identification information (the decorative pattern on the left) of the decorative identification information that has become a reach state.
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach appear overlapping with one of the decorative identification information of the decorative identification information that has reached the reach state, making it easier to draw attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-5 is the gaming machine according to aspect 1-4,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a third reach (low base strongest reach effect) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect),
The title display corresponding to the third reach is characterized in that it appears overlapping with both decoration identification information (decorative patterns on both sides) that have become reach states.
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the third reach, which has a higher expectation of being controlled to a more advantageous state than the first reach and the second reach, appears overlapping with the decorative identification information of both of the reach states, so that the title display corresponding to the third reach can be displayed in a more impactful manner.

A gaming machine according to aspect 1-6 is the gaming machine according to aspect 1-5,
The title display corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), the title display corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect), and the title display corresponding to the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) are characterized in that they appear overlapping with one of the decorative identification information (decorative pattern on the left) or both of the decorative identification information (decorative patterns on both sides) of the decorative identification information that has reached the reach state, and then are displayed in a fixed position, and are displayed overlapping with part of the decorative identification information (decorative patterns on both sides) that has reached the reach state even during the period when they are displayed in the fixed position.
According to this feature, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title display even after the title display has been displayed in its fixed position.

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of form 2-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means;
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the gaming medium (gaming ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole), it is determined whether or not the gaming medium (gaming ball) is controlled to the advantageous state;
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special design, second special design),
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
In the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), second decoration identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part, and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the second decoration identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
The second decorative identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), and in the title display part, the title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the second decorative identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state.
According to this feature, when decorative identification information is displayed in a reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative identification information has become a reach state. Therefore, by using the display position of the decorative identification information that has become a reach state in the title display part in the first reach and second reach to display the title display corresponding to the first reach and second reach, the player can naturally pay attention to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be displayed in an optimal manner.

The gaming machine of form 2-2 is the gaming machine according to form 2-1,
The feature of this invention is that the expectation level controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) differs between when the first decorative identification information (odd number decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state and when the second decorative identification information (even number decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state.
According to this feature, when decorative identification information is displayed in a reach state, the degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on which decorative identification information has become the reach state, making it easier to draw attention to the title display.

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means;
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the gaming medium (gaming ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole), it is determined whether or not the gaming medium (gaming ball) is controlled to the advantageous state;
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to PB2-12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to PB1-13) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-13 to PB2-15) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-11 to PB1-13) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-13 to PA2-15) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strongest reach presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strongest reach presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The third reach (low-base strongest reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special design, second special design),
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
In the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), second decoration identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part, and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the second decoration identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
The second decoration identification information (even-numbered decorative symbols) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the second decoration identification information (even-numbered decorative symbols) that has become the reach state,
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach effect), and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
The second decorative identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach presentation), and in the title display part, the title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the second decorative identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state.
According to this feature, when decorative identification information is displayed in a reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative identification information has become a reach state. Therefore, by using the display position of the decorative identification information that has become a reach state in the title display part in the first reach, second reach, and third reach, the title display corresponding to the first reach, second reach, and third reach can be displayed, which naturally draws attention to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be displayed in an optimal manner.

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special design, second special design),
Displaying decorative identification information (decorative patterns) in a reach state before a title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), and displaying a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach in the title display part in the specific reach so as to use the display position of the decorative identification information (decorative patterns) that has become a reach state,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, when decoration identification information is displayed in a reach state, the player focuses on which decoration identification information has reached the reach state, so by displaying the title display corresponding to the specific reach using the display position of the decoration identification information that has reached the reach state in the title display part of the specific reach, the player can naturally focus on the title display as well. Furthermore, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the light-emitting means can emit light in an appropriate lighting mode corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in an appropriate manner.

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of form 5-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the gaming medium (gaming ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole), it is determined whether or not the gaming medium (gaming ball) is controlled to the advantageous state;
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to PB1-7) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to 9) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern (variation pattern designation command designating PA2-3) is determined, a second command is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-5 to PB7) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-7 to PA2-9) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach B presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach B presentation),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach B effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach B effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach B effect) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach B effect),
The first reach (low base weak reach B effect) and the second reach (low base strong reach B effect) are reaches in which a plurality of characters are used,
The first reach (low base weak reach B effect) is a reach in which a first character in the first reach (ally character "Yume Yume") and a second character in the first reach (enemy character "Boingo") are used, and it is announced that the first character (ally character "Yume Yume") will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The second reach (low base strong reach B effect) is a reach in which a first character in the second reach (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") and a second character in the second reach (enemy character "Robo") are used, and it is announced that the first character (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means (image display device 5)
The introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach B performance) starts with a display in which the first character in the second reach (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") is positioned in the foreground and the second character in the second reach (enemy character "Robo") is positioned in the background,
The introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach B presentation) is characterized in that it starts with a display in which the first character in the first reach (ally character "Yume Yume") is not in the foreground and the second character in the second reach (enemy character "Boingo") is not in the background.
According to this feature, for the second reach, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, the first character, which is notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, starts from an arrangement in which the first character is at the front and the second character is at the back, which allows the player to empathize and makes it easier for the player to intuitively recognize that the degree of expectation is high, resulting in an appropriate title display.

A gaming machine of form 5-2 is the gaming machine according to form 5-1,
The first characters are characters who receive a benefit if they win a battle (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana");
The second character is a character (enemy character "robot") to which no benefit is given if the character wins the battle,
At the start of the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach B presentation), the first characters (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") are displayed in a position in front with their backs to the player, and the second character (enemy character "Robo") is displayed in a position in the back with their backs to the player, with the first and second characters facing each other.
According to this feature, for the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation, the player's direction and the first character's direction are the same, making it easier for the player to empathize with the character and to recognize that the expectation is high.

The gaming machine of form 5-3 is the gaming machine according to form 5-1 or 5-2,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach B presentation), the first character (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") and the second character (enemy character "Robo") are displayed at a position including the display area where the title display (title characters) was displayed in the title display part.
According to this feature, when the title display disappears, a player who has been paying attention to the title display will naturally turn his or her gaze to the first and second characters.

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the gaming medium (gaming ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole), it is determined whether or not the gaming medium (gaming ball) is controlled to the advantageous state;
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern (variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2, PA2-3) is determined, a second command is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) has a higher expectation of being controlled into the advantageous state (jackpot game state) than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects),
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) has a longer execution time than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects),
The first reach and the second reach are reaches in which dialogue subtitles are used,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), a title display (title characters) and dialogue subtitles are displayed,
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the dialogue subtitles that were displayed in the title display part of the first reach are continuously displayed,
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), no dialogue subtitles are displayed, but the title display (title text) is displayed.
According to this feature, during the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation and a long execution time, the title display and dialogue subtitles are displayed so as not to overlap as much as possible, while during the first reach, which has a relatively low expectation and a short execution time, even if the dialogue subtitles and title display overlap, the title display is ended first so that the player can also pay attention to the dialogue subtitles, making it possible to provide the title display and dialogue subtitles to the player in an appropriate manner, and as a result, the title display can be performed in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 6-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 6-1,
When the title display (title characters) and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the first reach are displayed in the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the performance scene is not switched in the subsequent introductory part until the display of the dialogue subtitles that were displayed simultaneously with the title display (title characters) has ended.
According to this feature, when the title display corresponding to the first reach and the dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part in the first reach, the scene of the performance does not change in the subsequent introductory part until the display of the dialogue subtitles that were displayed simultaneously with the title display has ended, so that the viewer can focus on the title display and then on the dialogue subtitles.

The gaming machine of aspect 6-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 6-1 or 6-2,
When a title display (title characters) and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the first reach are displayed in the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles is output, while audio corresponding to the title display (title characters) is not output.
According to this feature, when a title display and dialogue subtitles are displayed simultaneously, the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles is output, while the audio corresponding to the title display is not output, making it easier to hear the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles.

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of form 7-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The title display of the specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect) is composed of multiple characters ("Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!", "Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B to D)"),
The display means (image display device 5) starts displaying the title display (title characters) of the specific reach in the title display part of the specific reach at a first size (enlarged size) in which only a part of the plurality of characters is visible, and then gradually reduces the display size from the first size to a second size (reduced size) in which all of the plurality of characters are visible, and displays the title display (title characters) of the specific reach;
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (strongest reach titles for the strongest reach series, and common titles for the high base reach series);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of strongest reach of the strongest reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A (introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D)).
According to this feature, in the title display part in a specific reach, the display is performed at a first size in which only some of the characters are visible, and then the size gradually decreases until all the characters are visible, thereby attracting the player's attention to the title display. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in an appropriate light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in an appropriate manner.

A gaming machine of aspect 7-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 7-1,
Before the title display part of the specific reach (low base strongest reach effect) starts, a movable object (movable body 32) is moved to overlap the front side of the display means (image display device 5),
During the period from when the movable object moves to when it returns to its initial position (falling effect), a background corresponding to the movement of the movable object (background dedicated to the falling effect) is displayed, and when the movable object returns to its initial position, the title display (title characters) begins to be displayed at a first size (enlarged size) in which not all of the multiple characters are visible and the display area of the display means is filled so that the background becomes invisible, and then the title display at a second size (reduced size) and the background corresponding to the title display (background dedicated to the title display) are displayed.
According to this feature, the method of displaying the reach title makes an impact, while at the same time switching the background can be performed without creating a sense of incongruity, and the title display can be presented to the player in an appropriate manner.

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of form 8-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the success or failure of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The title display of the specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect) is composed of multiple characters ("Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!", "Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B to D)"),
The display means (image display device 5) ends the title display part in the specific reach by enlarging and displaying the plurality of characters (enlarging the characters until the entire display area is filled with some of the title characters) from a state in which the plurality of characters are displayed (a state in which the characters are displayed in a reduced size at a fixed position) and displays a display corresponding to the introduction part in the specific reach (the background at the start of the introduction part) so that it can be seen,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (strongest reach titles for the strongest reach series, and common titles for the high base reach series);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of strongest reach of the strongest reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A (introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D)).
According to this feature, the player pays attention to the title display during the title display part, and by using the title display appropriately, the player can seamlessly switch to the display corresponding to the next introductory part. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the light-emitting means can emit light in an appropriate light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed appropriately.

[Form 9]
The gaming machine of form 9-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the gaming medium (gaming ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole), it is determined whether or not the gaming medium (gaming ball) is controlled to the advantageous state;
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The execution time (T1-1 to T2-2) of the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) and the execution time (T2-1 to T2-3) of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) are different,
The title display part is made up of a first part (title start period) from the start of displaying the title display until it is displayed at a fixed position, a second part (title display period) displayed at the fixed position, and a third part (title end period) from the display at the fixed position until it ends,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), a title display (title characters) is displayed so that the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period), and the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period);
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), the title display (title characters) is displayed so that the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period), and the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period).
According to this feature, even if the execution times of the title display parts differ between the first reach and the second reach, the second part displayed in the fixed position is made the longest, thereby drawing attention to the type of title display. Furthermore, even if the execution times of the title display parts differ between the first reach and the second reach, the first part, which takes place before the title display in the fixed position, is made longer than the third part, which takes place from the display in the fixed position until the display ends, thereby making it possible to tease which title display will be displayed. Furthermore, even if the execution times of the title display parts differ between the first reach and the second reach, the title display parts can be made easier to understand by making the relationship between the execution times of the first, second, and third parts the same.

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the gaming medium (gaming ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole), it is determined whether or not the gaming medium (gaming ball) is controlled to the advantageous state;
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern in normal state) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern in normal state) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern in probability variable state) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern in probability variable state) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state,
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern in a normal state) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a deviation variation pattern in a normal state) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating a jackpot variation pattern in a probability variation state) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern in a probability variation state) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach effect in a normal state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the advantageous state will be controlled by the second reach (super reach effect in the probability variable state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (super reach effect in a normal state) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The execution time (T1-1 to T2-1 to T3) of the title display part in the first reach (super reach effect in normal state) and the execution time (T4) of the title display part in the second reach (super reach effect in probability variable state) are different,
The first reach (super reach effect in normal state) is a reach executed in normal state, and the second reach (super reach effect in probability variable state) is a reach executed in a special state (probability variable state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The title display part is made up of a first part (title start period) from the start of displaying the title display until it is displayed at a fixed position, a second part (title display period) displayed at the fixed position, and a third part (title end period) from the display at the fixed position until it ends,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the first reach (the super reach effect in the normal state), a title display (title characters) is displayed so that the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period), and the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period);
In the title display part in the second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state), the title display (title characters) is displayed so that the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period), and the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period).
According to this feature, even if the execution times of the title display parts differ between the first reach executed in the normal state and the second reach executed in the special state, the second part displayed in the fixed position is made the longest, thereby drawing attention to the type of title display. Furthermore, even if the execution times of the title display parts differ between the first reach executed in the normal state and the second reach executed in the special state, the first part, which takes place before the title display in the fixed position, is made longer than the third part, which takes place from the display in the fixed position until the display ends, thereby making it possible to tease which title display will be displayed. Furthermore, even if the execution times of the title display parts differ between the first reach executed in the normal state and the second reach executed in the special state, the title display parts can be made easier to understand by making the relationship between the execution times of the first part, second part, and third part the same.

A gaming machine according to aspect 10-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 10-1,
The execution time (T4) of the title display part in the second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state) is shorter than the execution time (T1-1 to 2, T2-1 to 3, T3) of the title display part in the first reach (super reach effect in a normal state).
According to this feature, the execution time of the title display part in the second reach executed in the special state is relatively short, so the special state can be advanced at a good pace, while the execution time of the title display part in the first reach executed in the normal state is relatively long, so it can be well hyped.

[Form 11]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The title display part is made up of a first part (title start period) from the start of displaying the title display until it is displayed at a fixed position, a second part (title display period) displayed at the fixed position, and a third part (title end period) from the display at the fixed position until it ends,
the display means (image display device 5) displays a title display (title characters) in a title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect) so that the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period), and the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period);
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, by making the second part displayed in the fixed position the longest, attention can be drawn to the type of title display. Furthermore, by making the first part, which is displayed in the fixed position, longer than the third part, which is displayed from the fixed position until the display ends, it is possible to arouse interest in which title display will be displayed. Furthermore, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the light-emitting means can be illuminated in a suitable lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be displayed in a suitable manner.

[Form 12]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects) can be displayed in a first mode (white mode), and the title display corresponding to the specific reach can be displayed in a second mode (red mode) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first mode,
In the title display part (title display part shown in FIG. 11-43) in the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects), an expectation suggestion display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in a first size, and then a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in a second size larger than the first size,
In both cases of displaying the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach in the first mode (white mode) and displaying the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach in the second mode (red mode), the expectation suggestion display is displayed in a common mode,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (strongest reach titles for the strongest reach series, strong reach common titles for the strong reach series),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (strong reach system strong reach C introduction, strongest reach system strongest reach introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction).
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the specific reach is larger in size than the expectation suggestion display, and its appearance suggests the expectation, so it attracts the player's attention, but by displaying the expectation suggestion display before the title display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the expectation suggestion first. Also, whether the title display is displayed in the first appearance or the second appearance, the expectation suggestion display is displayed in a common manner, so the player can focus their attention on the appearance of the subsequent title display.

[Form 13]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to PB1-7) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to PB2-9) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-8 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-10 to PB2-12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state is determined,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-5 to PB7) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-7 to PA2-9) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-8 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-10 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach B presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach C presentation),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach C presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base strong reach B effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach C effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach C effect) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base strong reach B effect),
The display means
In the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach B performance), an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the first mode (3.5 stars),
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach C effect), the expectation suggestion display is displayed in the second mode (four stars),
A highlight display is displayed so that it is common between the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach B effect) and the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach C effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach B effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach B title) for the title display part of the first reach,
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach C effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach C title) for the title display part of the second reach,
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base strong reach B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach B introduction) for the introductory part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach C presentation), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach C introduction) for the introductory part of the second reach.
According to this feature, development costs can be reduced by using the same highlighting whether the expectation level indication is displayed in the first mode in the title display part of the first reach or the second mode in the title display part of the second reach. Furthermore, in the title display parts of the first reach and the second reach, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display of the first reach or the second reach that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part of the first reach or the second reach, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

A gaming machine of aspect 13-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 13-1,
The expectation suggestion display is composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects),
The first reach (low base strong reach B effect) is indicated by N (N is an integer) + 0.5 (3.5) objects,
The second reach (low base strong reach C effect) is indicated by N+1 (4) objects,
The expectation suggestion display is characterized in that each object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, and the highlighting is performed in a common manner whether one object is highlighted or 0.5 objects are highlighted.
According to this feature, whether one object is highlighted or 0.5 objects are highlighted, the highlighting is performed in a common manner, thereby reducing development costs.

A gaming machine of aspect 13-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 13-2,
The expectation suggestion display is characterized in that the time period during which one object (star-shaped object) is highlighted and the time period during which 0.5 objects (star-shaped objects) are highlighted are the same.
According to this feature, the time for highlighting one object and the time for highlighting 0.5 objects are common, thereby reducing development costs.

A gaming machine according to aspect 13-4 is the gaming machine according to aspect 13-2 or 13-3,
The expectation level indication display is characterized in that a common emphasis sound (expectation level indication sound) is output whether one object (star-shaped object) is highlighted or 0.5 objects (star-shaped objects) are highlighted.
According to this feature, the same sound is output whether one object is highlighted or 0.5 objects are highlighted, thereby reducing development costs.

[Form 14]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, high base reach A to D effects) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reaches (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, high base reach A to D effects) are configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, high base reach A to D effects), an expectation suggestion display consisting of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) can be displayed,
In the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, high base reach A to D effects), the first object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, then, while continuing to highlight the first object (star-shaped object), the second object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, and then the highlighting of the first object (star-shaped object) is ended and the third object (star-shaped object) is highlighted.
According to this feature, in the title display part in a specific reach, it is possible to display an expectation suggestion display consisting of multiple objects, and in the expectation suggestion display, the highlighting of the second object begins before the highlighting of the first object ends, but the highlighting of the third object does not begin until the highlighting of the first object ends, making it easier to recognize the number of objects suggesting the expectation.

A gaming machine of aspect 14-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 14-1,
The expectation level suggestion display is characterized in that an emphasis sound (expectation level suggestion sound) is output each time an object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, and after the output of the emphasis sound (expectation level suggestion sound) for highlighting one object (star-shaped object) has finished, an emphasis sound (expectation level suggestion sound) for highlighting the next object is output.
According to this feature, the emphasis sound for highlighting one object and the emphasis sound for highlighting the next object do not overlap, making it easier to recognize the number of objects that suggests the degree of expectation.

A gaming machine of aspect 14-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 14-1 or 14-2,
The expectation suggestion display is composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) and characters (characters "expectation");
The object (star-shaped object) is highlighted in a size that overlaps with the text (text "Expectation Level").
According to this feature, by highlighting the objects, it is possible to draw attention to both the multiple objects and the characters that make up the expectation suggestion display.

[Form 15]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, high base reach A to D effects) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reaches (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, high base reach A to D effects) are configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display multiple pending displays corresponding to variable displays that have not yet started,
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, high base reach A to D effects), an expectation suggestion display consisting of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) can be displayed,
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance), the hold display is not displayed at the same time as the expectation suggestion display,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a common title for strong reach systems, a common title for strongest reach systems, and a common title for high base reach systems);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of strongest reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, in the title display part of a specific reach, an expectation indication display composed of multiple objects is displayed, while by not displaying the hold indication simultaneously with the expectation indication display, it is possible to prevent the hold indication from being mistakenly recognized as an expectation indication display. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

A gaming machine of aspect 15-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 15-1,
The maximum number of active displays corresponding to the pending display and the variable display that has been started is characterized by being equal to the maximum number (five) of objects (star-shaped objects) that make up the expectation indication display.
According to this feature, even if a specific reach occurs when the maximum number of pending displays and active displays are displayed, it is possible to prevent the pending displays and active displays from being mistakenly recognized as the maximum number of objects that make up the expectation indication display being displayed.

A gaming machine of aspect 15-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 15-1 or 15-2,
The hold display is terminated when the display means (image display device 5) displays in monochrome before the title display part starts.
This feature allows the hold display to end without any discomfort.

[Form 16]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the gaming medium (gaming ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole), it is determined whether or not the gaming medium (gaming ball) is controlled to the advantageous state;
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to 4/PB1-14) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 6/PA2-16) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to 7/PB1-15) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to 9/PA2-17) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-8 to 10/PB1-16) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-10 to 12/PA2-18) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state is determined,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-4/PB1-14) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-6/PA2-16) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-5 to PB1-7/PB1-15) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-7 to PA2-9/PA2-17) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-8 to PB1-10/PB1-16) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-10 to 12/PA2-18) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A presentation/high base reach A presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A presentation/high base reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach B effect / high base reach B effect),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach B presentation/high base reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base strong reach A effect/high base reach A effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state will be achieved is announced,
The second reach (low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The third reach (low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach A effect/high base reach A effect), an expectation suggestion display consisting of a first number (3) of objects (star-shaped objects) can be displayed,
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect), an expectation suggestion display consisting of a second number (3.5) of objects (star-shaped objects) that is greater than the first number can be displayed,
In the title display part of the third reach (low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect), an expectation suggestion display consisting of a third number (4) of objects (star-shaped objects) which is greater than the second number can be displayed,
the difference between the first number and the second number is the same as the difference between the second number and the third number (0.5);
The difference between the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect) is executed and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect) is executed is greater than the difference between the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect) is executed and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the first reach (low base strong reach A effect/high base reach A effect) is executed.
According to this feature, when the number of objects displayed as an expectation suggestion display in the title display part increases from the first number to the second number, the increase in the number of objects is the same as when it increases from the second number to the third number, but when it increases from the second number to the third number, the increase in the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is greater than when it increases from the first number to the second number.Therefore, as the number of objects increases, it can be expected that the number of objects will be controlled to an advantageous state more than the number of objects that has increased, while when the number of objects is small, excessive expectations of being controlled to an advantageous state are not raised.

A gaming machine of aspect 16-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 16-1,
The plurality of fluctuation patterns include a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to 13/PB1-17) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled by the advantageous state, and an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-13 to 15/PA2-19) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled by the advantageous state,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-11 to PB1-13/PB1-17) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-13 to 15/PA2-19) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strongest reach effect / high base reach D effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strongest reach effect/high base reach D effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The fourth reach (low base strongest reach effect/high base reach D effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled is notified,
The display means is capable of displaying an expectation suggestion display constituted by a fourth number (4.5) object (star-shaped object) that is greater than the third number in a title display part in the fourth reach (low base strongest reach effect/high base reach D effect),
The difference between the third number and the fourth number (0.5) is smaller than the difference between the first number and the third number (1);
The difference between the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the fourth reach (low base strongest reach effect/high base reach D effect) is executed and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect) is executed is greater than the difference between the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect) is executed and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the first reach (low base strong reach A effect/high base reach A effect) is executed.
According to this feature, the increase in the number of objects displayed as an expectation suggestion display in the title display part is smaller when the number of objects increases from the third number to the fourth number than when it increases from the first number to the third number, but the increase in the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is greater when it increases from the third number to the fourth number than when it increases from the first number to the third number, so the more the number of objects increases, the more it can be expected that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state even if the number of added objects is small.

A gaming machine of aspect 16-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 16-2,
The difference between the third number and the fourth number is 0.5, and the difference between the first number and the third number is 1.
According to this feature, it can be expected that the number of objects displayed as an expectation suggestion display in the title display part will be controlled in a more advantageous state when it increases from the third number by 0.5 to the fourth number, rather than when it increases from the first number by 1 to the third number.
A gaming machine of aspect 16-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 16-1 to 16-3,
The difference between the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (high base reach C presentation) is executed in a special state (probable change state) that is more advantageous than the normal state and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (high base reach B presentation) is executed is greater than the difference between the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C presentation) is executed in the normal state and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low base strong reach B presentation) is executed.
According to this feature, it can be expected that a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state will be controlled to be an advantageous state when the number of objects displayed as an expectation suggestion display in the title display part increases.

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) are both reaches that are executed in a normal state, and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) has a higher expectation of being controlled into the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects),
The title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is longer than the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects),
The display means (image display device 5)
An expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects),
The expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach common title) for the title display part of the first reach,
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (common title for strong reach systems) for the title display part of the second reach,
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) for the introductory part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, the title display part in the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation, is longer than the title display part in the first reach, which has a relatively low expectation, and while an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the second reach, an expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach, so the player can intuitively recognize that the expectation is higher in the second reach than in the first reach. Furthermore, in the title display parts in the first reach and the second reach, the light-emitting means is controlled using brightness data tables for the title displays of the first reach and the second reach that are different from the brightness data tables for the introductory parts of the first reach and the second reach, so the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

A gaming machine of aspect 17-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 17-1,
The title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is composed of a prologue part (prologue display period) and a character display part (title start period, title display period, title end period),
The title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) does not have a prologue part (prologue display period), and is composed only of character display parts (title start period, title display period, title end period),
The character display part of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects).
According to this feature, since the character display part of the title display part in the second reach is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the first reach, it is possible to intuitively recognize that the second reach has a higher expectation than the first reach.

A gaming machine of aspect 17-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 17-1 or 17-2,
The reach is executed in the normal state, and includes a third reach (low base strongest reach effect) that has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect),
The title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is composed of a prologue part (prologue display period) and a character display part (title start period, title display period, title end period),
The title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) does not have a prologue part (prologue display period), and is composed only of character display parts (title start period, title display period, title end period),
The character display part of the title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect).
According to this feature, since the character display part of the title display part in the third reach is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the second reach, it is possible to intuitively recognize that the third reach has a higher expectation than the second reach.

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-2, 5, 8) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2 to 3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2, 5, 8) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 to PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) can be executed,
When the second command is received, the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) can be executed,
When the third command is received, the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) can be executed,
When the fourth command is received, the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) can be executed,
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) are both reaches that are executed in a normal state,
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is a reach that does not result in a notification that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) as a result of the effect, and may result in a notification that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) as a result of the effect, or may result in another reach (super reach effect) being executed.
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is a reach that has, as a result of the effect, a case where it is announced that it will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) and a case where it is announced that it will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until it is announced whether or not the other reach will be executed,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
An expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects),
The expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach common title) for the title display part of the first reach,
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (common title for strong reach systems) for the title display part of the second reach,
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) for the introductory part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, while an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part of the second reach, which may directly notify that control will be made into an advantageous state, an expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part of the first reach, which does not directly notify that control will be made into an advantageous state, so that it is possible to prevent excessive expectations from being created by the first reach. Furthermore, in the title display parts of the first reach and the second reach, the light-emitting means is controlled using brightness data tables for the title displays of the first reach and the second reach that are different from the brightness data tables for the introductory parts of the first reach and the second reach, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be made to be suitable.

A gaming machine of aspect 18-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 18-1,
The title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is characterized in that it is possible to display the title display (title text) in a confirmed state (gold) that confirms that another reach (super reach effect) will be executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention even to the title display part in the first reach where the expectation indication display is not displayed.

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that a specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled is notified,
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach) may be executed via a selection effect using a title display (title characters) corresponding to multiple reaches (super reach effects) including the specific reach,
The display means
It is possible to display an expectation suggestion display together with the title display (title characters) in the title display part and the selection performance of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach),
When displaying the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach), the expectation suggestion display composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) is displayed in stages,
When the expectation indication display is displayed in the selection performance, the expectation indication display made up of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) is not displayed in stages.
According to this feature, when the expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part of a specific reach, the expectation suggestion display made up of multiple objects is displayed in stages, whereas when the expectation suggestion display is displayed in the selection performance, the expectation suggestion display made up of multiple objects is not displayed in stages, so that the annoyance caused by the expectation suggestion display being displayed in stages not only in the title display part but also in the selection performance that precedes it can be eliminated.

A gaming machine of aspect 19-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 19-1,
The selection effect is an effect that changes in stages from a low-expectation reach (super reach effect) to a high-expectation reach (super reach effect) by operating the effect operation means (push button 31B),
The time required for the selection effect to change by one level (the minimum time required to switch to the title image of the next super reach effect) may be shorter than the time required for the expectation suggestion display of the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach) to display by one level (the time required for the star-shaped object to change from black to highlighted and then to gold).
This feature allows for a sense of speed to be imparted to the gradual changes in the selection presentation.

A gaming machine of aspect 19-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 19-2,
The selection effect is an effect that changes step by step from the current reach (super reach effect) to a reach (super reach effect) with one step higher expectation, and is characterized in that the number of times the effect operating means (push button 31B) is operated to change to the next step increases with each step change.
According to this feature, the higher the expectation of reaching a winning jackpot, the more impatient the player can be.

A gaming machine of aspect 19-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 19-1 to 19-3,
When the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach) is selected by the selection effect, the game starts from the title display part.
According to this feature, even when a specific reach is executed via a selection effect, it starts from the title display part, so that it is easy for the player to determine which reach has ultimately been executed.

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
After it is notified that the specific reach (super reach effect) will control the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
The advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) is displayed in a manner with larger movement than the title display (title character of the super reach effect) corresponding to the specific reach,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the title display is performed is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is one in which it has already been announced that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and by moving the advantageous state name display more significantly, the game player can celebrate being controlled to an advantageous state. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 20-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 20-1,
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach B, C effect, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D), when the title display (title character) is displayed, a background dedicated to the title display is displayed,
The background of the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) is characterized by being displayed in a manner with greater movement than the background dedicated to the title display.
According to this feature, the background of the advantageous state name display can also be moved more dramatically to celebrate being controlled into an advantageous state.

[Form 21]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introductory part (operation prompting performance B, D) of the specific reach (super reach performance), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) that prompts the player to take an action can be displayed,
The promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is displayed in a manner with larger movement than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, the prompting character display displayed in the introductory part prompts the player to take an action, and by moving it more than the title display displayed in the title display part, it is possible to intuitively prompt the player to take an action. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

A gaming machine of aspect 21-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 21-1,
In the introductory part of the specific reach (super reach effect), a special prompting character display (operation prompting character (large)) that prompts the player to take an action and suggests a more advantageous situation than the prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) can be displayed;
The feature is that both the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) and the special promotion character display (operation promotion character (large)) are displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, whether the prompting character display or the special prompting character display is moved more than the title display displayed in the title display part, the player can be intuitively encouraged to take action.

A gaming machine of aspect 21-3 is a gaming machine according to aspect 21-1 or 21-2,
The number of characters (3) of the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is less than the number of characters (7 to 13) of the title display (title character).
According to this feature, the number of characters in the promotional character display is smaller than the number of characters in the title display, so that the content of the characters can be recognized even if the user moves the display widely.

[Form 22]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display an explanatory character display (explanatory character) that is different from the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) and that explains the content of the specific reach,
The explanatory character display (explanatory character) is displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, by displaying the additional explanatory text display in a manner that moves more rapidly than the title display, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that explanatory text display has been added in addition to the title display. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can emit light in a suitable lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

A gaming machine of aspect 22-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 22-1,
The explanatory text display (explanatory text) is characterized by the content suggesting that the specific reach (super reach effect) is advantageous.
This feature can draw more attention to the fact that the explanatory text display has been added.

[Form 23]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects),
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title letters) corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is displayed in a larger font size than the title display (title letters) corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach common title) for the title display part of the first reach,
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (common title for strong reach systems) for the title display part of the second reach,
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) for the introductory part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part of the second reach (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation, is displayed in larger font size than the title display corresponding to the first reach, which has a relatively low expectation, so that the title display alone can intuitively recognize that the second reach has a higher expectation than the first reach. Also, in the title display parts of the first reach and the second reach, the light-emitting means is controlled using brightness data tables for the title displays of the first reach and the second reach that are different from the brightness data tables for the introductory parts of the first reach and the second reach, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in an appropriate light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 23-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 23-1,
The number of characters (10) constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is greater than the number of characters (7, 8) constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach B, C effect), but the display area (display area size) of the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach B, C effect) is larger than the display area (display area size) of the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect).
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the second reach occupies a larger display area per character, so that the player can intuitively recognize that the second reach has a higher expectation than the first reach.

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is composed of multiple characters,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special design, second special design),
The decoration identification information (decorative pattern (large)) of a first size is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), and then the decoration identification information (decorative pattern (small)) of a second size smaller than the first size is displayed in a reach state;
At least one character of the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is displayed in a size larger than the second size (decorative pattern (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, at least one character of the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in a size larger than the decorative identification information reduced to the second size, so that the title display can be focused on in the title display part. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

A gaming machine of aspect 24-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 24-1,
The present invention is characterized in that all characters of the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) are displayed in a size smaller than the first size (decorative pattern (large)) and larger than the second size (decorative pattern (small)).
According to this feature, the decorative identification information can be reliably recognized when a reach state is reached, and thereafter the decorative identification information is reduced in size and each character that makes up the title display is displayed in a size larger than the decorative identification information, so that attention can be drawn to the title display in the title display part.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introductory part (operation prompting performance B, D) of the specific reach (super reach performance), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) that prompts the player to take an action can be displayed,
After it is notified that the specific reach (super reach effect) will control the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
The advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start performance) is displayed larger than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the promotion character display is performed is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is a situation in which it has already been notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display larger than the promotion character display, it is possible to celebrate the game being controlled to an advantageous state. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed suitably.

The gaming machine of aspect 25-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 25-1,
The advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is composed of a first character string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") and a second character string ("BONUS");
The first character string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") is displayed in the first position (the upper fixed position), and then the second character string ("BONUS") is displayed in the second position (the lower fixed position);
After the second character string ("BONUS") is displayed at the second position (lower fixed position), the first character string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") displayed at the first position (upper fixed position) and the second character string ("BONUS") displayed at the second position (lower fixed position) are gradually enlarged and displayed,
the first character string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") and the second character string ("BONUS") are displayed in the smallest character size when displayed at the first position (top fixed position) and the second position (bottom fixed position);
The size of the characters when the first character string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") and the second character string ("BONUS") are displayed at the first position (upper fixed position) and the second position (lower fixed position) is larger than the size of the characters that make up the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)).
According to this feature, the characters that make up the advantageous state name display are always displayed larger than the characters that make up the promotion character display, so that being controlled in an advantageous state can be more congratulated.

The gaming machine of aspect 25-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 25-1 or 25-2,
The smallest character among the character strings constituting the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start performance) is larger than the largest character among the character strings constituting the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)).
According to this feature, the smallest character among the characters constituting the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the largest character among the characters constituting the promotion character display, so that no matter which character you focus on, the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the promotion character display, making it possible to more congratulate yourself on being controlled into an advantageous state.

A gaming machine of aspect 25-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 25-1 to 25-3,
A special prompt character display (large operation prompt character) that suggests a more advantageous situation than the prompt character display (small operation prompt character) can be displayed;
The special prompt character display (operation prompt character (large)) is characterized by being displayed larger than the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect).
According to this feature, the special promotion character display, which suggests a more advantageous situation than the promotion character display, can be displayed larger than the advantageous state name display, allowing the player to sense the advantageous situation.

A gaming machine of aspect 25-5 is the gaming machine according to aspect 25-4,
The smallest character among the character strings constituting the special promotion character display (operation promotion character (large)) is larger than the largest character among the character strings constituting the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start performance).
According to this feature, the smallest character among the character strings constituting the special promotion character display is displayed larger than the largest character among the character strings constituting the advantageous state name display, so that no matter which character the player focuses on, the special promotion character display is displayed larger than the advantageous state name display, allowing the player to sense the advantageous situation.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
After it is notified that the specific reach (super reach effect) will control the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
The advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is displayed larger than the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the title display is performed is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is one in which it has already been announced that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display larger than the title display, it is possible to celebrate the game being controlled to an advantageous state. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 26-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 26-1,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a plurality of types of specific reaches with different title displays (title characters),
The advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is characterized by being displayed larger than the title display (title characters) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach, so that the player can celebrate being controlled into an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of aspect 26-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 26-2,
The smallest character among the character strings constituting the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) is larger than the largest character among the character strings constituting the title display (title character) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, the smallest character among the characters constituting the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the largest character among the characters constituting the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach, so that no matter which character you focus on, the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the title display corresponding to the specific reach, making it possible to more congratulate yourself on being controlled into an advantageous state.

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of form 27-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
Before the title display part (operation prompting performance A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) to prompt the player to take action can be displayed,
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is displayed larger than the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, the promotional text display is displayed before the title display part, and the title display that is displayed afterwards is displayed larger than the promotional text display, thereby drawing attention to the title display. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, resulting in suitable title display.

The gaming machine of aspect 27-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 27-1,
After the prompt character display (operation prompt character (small)) is displayed, the game progresses to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), and the title display part of the specific reach begins.
According to this feature, the promotional text display is displayed before the title display part in the series of steps, and the title display to be displayed thereafter is displayed larger than the promotional text display, thereby drawing attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of aspect 27-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 27-1 or 27-2,
The smallest character among the character strings constituting the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is larger than the largest character among the character strings constituting the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)).
According to this feature, the smallest character among the character strings constituting the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed larger than the largest character among the character strings constituting the promotion character display, so that no matter which character is focused on, the title display can be focused on.

[Form 28]
The gaming machine of form 28-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
Before the title display part (operation prompting performance A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) to prompt the player to take action can be displayed,
After it is notified that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) will control the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
The advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is displayed larger than the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect),
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is displayed larger than the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the title display is performed is one in which it is not yet clear whether the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is one in which it has already been announced that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display larger than the title display, it is possible to celebrate the game being controlled to an advantageous state. Furthermore, by displaying a promotional character display before the title display part and displaying the title display displayed thereafter larger than the promotional character display, it is possible to draw attention to the title display. Furthermore, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be illuminated in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, resulting in a suitable title display.

The gaming machine of aspect 28-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 28-1,
After the prompt character display (operation prompt character (small)) is displayed, the game progresses to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), the title display part in the specific reach starts, and after it is announced that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) will control the game to the advantageous state, the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) is displayed.
According to this feature, a promotional character display is displayed before the title display part in a series of events, and the title display that is displayed afterwards is displayed larger than the promotional character display, thereby drawing attention to the title display, and after it is notified that a specific reach will result in control to an advantageous state, a display of the advantageous state name is displayed larger than the title display, allowing the player to celebrate being controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 29]
The gaming machine of form 29-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
After it is notified that the specific reach (super reach effect) will control the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
The advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is displayed for a longer time than the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the title display is performed is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is one in which it has already been announced that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display for a longer period of time than the title display, it is possible to celebrate the game being controlled to an advantageous state. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

A gaming machine of aspect 29-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 29-1,
The time from when all the characters constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) are displayed until at least a part of the character string disappears is longer than the time from when a part of the character string constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is displayed until all of the character string disappears.
According to this feature, the time during which the congratulatory advantageous state name display is clearly visible is made longer than the time during which the title display, the purpose of which is to increase the possibility of being controlled into an advantageous state, is displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

The gaming machine of aspect 29-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 29-1 or 28-2,
After the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is displayed, the advantageous state name display is switched to an operation suggestion display (right hit promotion image (small) and right hit promotion image (large)) that suggests an operation method during the advantageous state, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the switch to the operation suggestion display, control is performed to gain an advantage by operating the operation method suggested by the operation suggestion display (an operation method for shooting the game ball toward the right game area 2R),
The time required to switch from the advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start effect) to the operation suggestion display (right hit promotion image (small) and right hit promotion image (large)) is shorter than the time required to end the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, the advantageous state name display switches to the operation suggestion display in a short time, and then after a predetermined period of time has passed, control is performed to give an advantage by operating using the operation method suggested by the operation suggestion display, thereby preventing the player from being disadvantaged by changing the operation method during the period when the advantageous state name display ends.

[Form 30]
The gaming machine of form 30-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introductory part (operation prompting performance B, D) of the specific reach (super reach performance), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) that prompts the player to take an action can be displayed,
After it is notified that the specific reach (super reach effect) will control the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
The advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start performance) is displayed for a longer time than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the promotion character display is performed is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is a situation in which it has already been notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display for a longer period of time than the promotion character display, it is possible to celebrate the game being controlled to an advantageous state. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed suitably.

The gaming machine of aspect 30-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 30-1,
The prompt character display (operation prompt character (small)) is displayed until the prompted action is performed or until the valid time for the prompted action has elapsed;
The time for which the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) is displayed is characterized by being longer than the time for which the prompted action is not taken and the effective time for the prompted action has elapsed after the prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) is displayed.
According to this feature, after the prompting character display is displayed, the advantageous state name display is displayed for a longer period of time than the period of time when the prompted action is not taken, thereby making it possible to celebrate the player being controlled into the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of aspect 30-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 30-1 or 30-2,
The time from when all the characters constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) are displayed until at least a part of the character string disappears is longer than the time when the prompt character display (operation prompt character (small)) is displayed.
According to this feature, the time during which the congratulatory advantageous state name display is clearly visible is made longer than the time during which the promotional text display, which is intended to encourage the player to take action, is displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

A gaming machine of aspect 30-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 30-1 to 30-3,
A special prompt character display (large operation prompt character) that suggests a more advantageous situation than the prompt character display (small operation prompt character) can be displayed;
The promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is a promotion character (character that encourages operation) displayed without accompanying a promotion introduction display (promotion introduction effect),
The special operation prompt display (operation prompt character (large)) is displayed after the prompt introduction display (promotion introduction effect) is displayed, and the prompt character (character encouraging the operation) is displayed,
The advantageous state name display (title character of the big win start performance) is displayed for a longer time than the special prompt character display (operation prompt character (large)).
According to this feature, the time for which the congratulatory advantageous state name display is displayed is longer than the time for which the special promotion character display accompanied by the promotion introduction display is displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

[Form 31]
The gaming machine of form 31-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
Before the title display part (operation prompting performance A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) to prompt the player to take action can be displayed,
A title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is displayed for a longer time than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, the promotional text display is displayed before the title display part, and the subsequent title display is displayed for a longer period of time than the promotional text display, thereby drawing attention to the title display. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, thereby enabling the title display to be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 31-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 31-1,
The time from when all the characters constituting the title display (title characters) are displayed until at least a part of the characters disappears is longer than the time when the promotion character display (operation promotion characters (small)) is displayed.
According to this feature, the time during which the title display is clearly visible is made longer than the time during which the promotional text display, which is intended to encourage the player to take an action, is displayed, thereby drawing attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of aspect 31-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 31-1 or 31-2,
A special prompt character display (large operation prompt character) that suggests a more advantageous situation than the prompt character display (small operation prompt character) can be displayed;
The promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is a promotion character (character that encourages operation) displayed without accompanying a promotion introduction display (promotion introduction effect),
The special operation prompt display (operation prompt character (large)) is displayed after the prompt introduction display (promotion introduction effect) is displayed, and the prompt character (character encouraging the operation) is displayed,
The time period during which the title display (title characters) is displayed is longer than the time period during which the special prompt character display (operation prompt characters (large)) is displayed.
According to this feature, the title display can be drawn to by making the time for which the title display is displayed longer than the time for which the special promotion character display accompanying the promotion introduction display is displayed.

[Form 32]
The gaming machine of form 32-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
Before the title display part (operation prompting performance A) in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) to prompt the player to take action can be displayed,
After it is notified that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) will control the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
The advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is displayed for a longer time than the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect),
A title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is displayed for a longer time than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the title display is performed is one in which it is not yet clear whether the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is one in which it has already been announced that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display for a longer period of time than the title display, it is possible to celebrate the game being controlled to an advantageous state. Furthermore, by displaying a promotional character display before the title display part and displaying the subsequent title display for a longer period of time than the promotional character display, it is possible to draw attention to the title display. Furthermore, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be illuminated in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, resulting in a suitable title display.

[Form 33]
The gaming machine of form 33-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to PB2-12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-14) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-16) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-15 to PB1-17) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-17 to PB2-19) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state are determined as one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA, PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-14) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-16) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-15 to PB1-17) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-17 to PA2-19) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (high base reach A presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (high base reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (high base reach B to D performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (high base reach B to D performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The third reach (high base reach A effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The fourth reach (high base reach B to D effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) are reaches executed in a normal state,
The third reach (high base reach A effect) and the fourth reach (high base reach B to D effect) are reaches that are executed in a special state (probable change state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects),
The fourth reach (high base reach B to D effect) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the third reach (high base reach A effect),
The third reach (high base reach A effect) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect),
The display means
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), an expectation suggestion display consisting of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) can be displayed,
The expectation suggestion display can be displayed in the title display part in the third reach (high base reach A performance),
The expectation suggestion display can be displayed in the title display part in the fourth reach (high base reach A performance),
The feature of this invention is that the expectation indication display is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance).
According to this feature, the first reach in the normal state has a lower expectation level than the second reach in the normal state, so the expectation level suggestion display is displayed for the second reach, but the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed for the first reach, thereby preventing excessive expectations of the first reach controlling the game to an advantageous state. On the other hand, the third reach in the special state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, has a lower expectation level than the fourth reach in the special state, but is higher expectation level than the first reach in the normal state, so by displaying the expectation level suggestion display for both the third reach and the fourth reach, it is possible to expect that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state in both the third reach and the fourth reach.

[Form 34]
The gaming machine of form 34-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern in normal state) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern in normal state) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern in probability variable state) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern in probability variable state) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state,
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern in a normal state) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a deviation variation pattern in a normal state) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating a jackpot variation pattern in a probability variation state) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern in a probability variation state) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach effect in a normal state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the advantageous state will be controlled by the second reach (super reach effect in the probability variable state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (super reach effect in a normal state) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) is a reach executed in the normal state,
The second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state) is a reach executed in a special state (probability variable state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The title display part in the second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state) is shorter than the title display part in the first reach (super reach effect in a normal state),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part of the first reach (the super reach effect in the normal state), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title) for the title display part of the first reach,
In the title display part in the second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (high base reach common title) for the title display part of the second reach,
In the introductory part of the first reach (the super reach presentation in the normal state), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part of the first reach (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction),
In the introductory part of the second reach (super reach presentation in a probability variable state), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (introduction of high base reach type reach A, introduction of high base reach type reach B, introduction of high base reach type reach C, introduction of high base reach type reach D) for the introductory part of the second reach.
According to this feature, the title display part of the second reach in the special state is shorter than the title display part of the first reach in the normal state, allowing the special state to progress at a good tempo. Also, in the title display parts of the first reach and the second reach, the light-emitting means is controlled using brightness data tables for the title display of the first reach and the second reach that are different from the brightness data tables for the introductory parts of the first reach and the second reach, respectively, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 34-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 34-1,
The frequency with which the second reach (super reach effect in the special state) occurs in the special state (probable chance state) is higher than the frequency with which the first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) occurs in the normal state.
According to this feature, even if the frequency of the second reach occurring in the special state increases, the special state can be progressed at a good pace.

[Form 35]
The gaming machine of form 35-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the gaming medium (gaming ball) enters the starting area (first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole), it is determined whether or not the gaming medium (gaming ball) is controlled to the advantageous state;
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to PB2-12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to PB1-13) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-13 to PB2-15) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-11 to PB1-13) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-13 to PA2-15) is transmitted to the performance control means,
It can be controlled to a plurality of states including a normal state, a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and a special state after a specific number of times is reached (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) in which the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result (a special display result of "jackpot"), which is controlled based on the variable display being executed a specific number of times (900 times),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strongest reach presentation),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strongest reach presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
The first reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strongest reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base strongest reach effect) has a higher expectation of becoming the advantageous state than the first reach (low base strong reach A to C effect),
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach is displayed in a first display operation mode (a display mode in which the title characters are displayed while moving from the left side to the center of the display area),
In the title display part of the second reach (low-base strongest reach presentation), a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach is displayed in a second display operation mode (a display mode in which the title characters are displayed reduced from an enlarged display) different from the first display operation mode,
When the special state (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) is entered after the specific number of times has been reached, a display indicating that the special state will be entered after the specific number of times has been reached (title characters of the Yu-time start effect) is displayed in the second display operation mode (a display mode in which the title characters are displayed reduced from an enlarged display).
According to this feature, when the special state is entered after a specific number of times has been reached, the display indicating that the special state will be entered after a specific number of times has been reached is displayed in the same second display operation mode as the title display of the second reach, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, so that the player can recognize that the special state after a specific number of times has a high degree of advantage.

The gaming machine of aspect 35-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 35-1,
When the display (title characters of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the special state (time-shortening state B (Yu-time)) will be entered after the specific number of times has been reached is ended, the display is ended in the same display operation mode as the display operation mode (display mode in which the title characters are erased while expanding) when ending the title display (title characters) of the title display part in the second reach (low-base strongest reach effect).
According to this feature, even when the display indicating that control will be made to a special state after a specific number of times is reached is ended, it is ended in the same display operation mode as when ending the title display of the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation, so that it can be recognized that the special state after a specific number of times is highly advantageous.

[Form 36]
The gaming machine of form 36-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
It can be controlled to a plurality of states including a normal state, a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and a special state after a specific number of times is reached (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) in which the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result (a special display result of "jackpot"), which is controlled based on the variable display being executed a specific number of times (900 times),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
When the specific number of times is reached and the special state (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) is controlled, a display (title character of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the specific number of times is reached and the special state is controlled can be displayed,
The size of the characters constituting the display (title characters of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the game will be controlled to a special state after the specific number of times has been reached is larger than the size of the characters constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, the situation in which the title display is performed in a specific reach is one in which it is not yet clear whether the player will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times is one in which the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times, and by making the size of the characters constituting the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times larger than the size of the characters constituting the title display corresponding to the specific reach, it is possible to celebrate the player being controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 36-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 36-1,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a plurality of types of specific reaches with different title displays (title characters),
The characters constituting the display (title characters of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the game will be controlled to a special state after the specific number of times has been reached are characterized by being larger than the characters constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, the characters constituting the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times are displayed larger than the characters constituting the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach, thereby allowing the player to celebrate being controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times.

The gaming machine of aspect 36-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 36-2,
The smallest character among the character strings constituting the display (title character of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the special state will be entered after the specific number of times has been reached is larger than the largest character among the character strings constituting the title display (title character) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, the smallest character among the characters constituting the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times is displayed larger than the largest character among the characters constituting the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach, so no matter which character you focus on, the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times is displayed larger than the title display corresponding to the specific reach, making it even more congratulatory that the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times.

[Form 37]
The gaming machine of form 37-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
It can be controlled to a plurality of states including a normal state, a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and a special state after a specific number of times is reached (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) in which the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result (a special display result of "jackpot"), which is controlled based on the variable display being executed a specific number of times (900 times),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
When the specific number of times is reached and the special state (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) is controlled, a display indicating that the specific number of times is reached and the special state is controlled (title characters of the Yu-time start effect) can be displayed.
The display time of the display (title character of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the state will be controlled to a special state after the specific number of times has been reached is longer than the display time of the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, the situation in which the title display is performed in a specific reach is one in which it is not yet clear whether the player will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times is one in which the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times, and by displaying the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times longer than the title display corresponding to the specific reach, the player can celebrate being controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 37-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 37-1,
The time from when all the characters constituting the display (title characters of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the state will be controlled to a special state after the specific number of times is reached to when at least a part of the characters disappears is longer than the time from when part of the characters constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is displayed to when all of the characters disappear.
According to this feature, the time during which the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after reaching a certain number of congratulatory times is clearly visible is longer than the time during which the title display, whose purpose is to increase the possibility of being controlled to an advantageous state, is displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

[Form 38]
The gaming machine of form 38-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
It can be controlled to a plurality of states including a normal state, a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and a special state after a specific number of times is reached (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) in which the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result (a special display result of "jackpot"), which is controlled based on the variable display being executed a specific number of times (900 times),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the normal state, after the specific number of times has been reached, a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state (characters indicating the number of times remaining until the play time) can be displayed,
The size of the characters constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is larger than the size of the characters constituting the display (characters of the remaining number of times until the play time) indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, by making the size of the characters constituting the title display corresponding to the specific reach larger than the size of the characters constituting the display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times has been reached, it is possible to draw attention to the title display corresponding to the specific reach. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in an appropriate light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 38-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 38-1,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) and a second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach,
The display showing the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (characters indicating the remaining number of times until Yu-time) is displayed while the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is being executed, but is not displayed while the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects) is being executed.
According to this feature, in the first reach, which has a low expectation, the number of times remaining until the special state is reached after the specific number of times is reached is displayed, making it possible to make the player aware of the number of times until the special state is reached after the specific number of times is reached, while in the second reach, which has a high expectation, the number of times remaining until the special state is reached after the specific number of times is not displayed, making it possible to draw attention to the presentation and alleviating the player's disappointment when the number of times remaining until the special state is reached after the specific number of times is low.

The gaming machine of aspect 38-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 38-2,
When it is notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) without displaying again the display (characters of the remaining number of times until the play time) indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached,
When it is notified that the advantageous state will not be achieved in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state is reached after the specific number of times has been reached (characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time) is displayed again after the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effects).
According to this feature, when it is notified that the advantageous state will be reached in the second reach, the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached is not displayed again, thereby alleviating the player's disappointment when there are only a few times left until the special state after the specific number of times is reached. Also, when it is notified that the advantageous state will not be reached in the second reach, the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached is displayed again after the second reach ends, so the player can feel relieved quickly when there are only a few times left until the special state after the specific number of times is reached.

[Form 39]
The gaming machine of form 39-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
It can be controlled to a plurality of states including a normal state, a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and a special state after a specific number of times is reached (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) in which the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result (a special display result of "jackpot"), which is controlled based on the variable display being executed a specific number of times (900 times),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
At the timing (operation prompting effects A to D) related to the specific reach (super reach effect), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) that prompts the player to take an action can be displayed,
In the normal state, after the specific number of times has been reached, a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state (characters indicating the number of times remaining until the play time) can be displayed,
The size of the characters constituting the prompt character display (operation prompt character (small)) is larger than the size of the characters constituting the display (characters of the remaining number of times until the play time) indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times has been reached,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, by making the size of the characters constituting the prompting character display that prompts the player to take an action at a timing related to a specific reach larger than the size of the characters constituting the display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state is reached after the specific number of times has been reached, it is possible to draw attention to the prompting character display and effectively prompt the player to take an action. Also, in the title display part, since the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, it is possible to make the light-emitting means emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, it is possible to display the title in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 39-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 39-1,
When the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is displayed before the title display part (operation promotion effect A) in the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect), a display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (remaining number of times until play time character) is displayed at the same time,
When the prompt character display (operation prompt character (small)) is displayed in the introductory part (operation prompt effect D) of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects), the display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached (characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time) is not displayed.
According to this feature, before the development into a specific reach, the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached is displayed at the same time as the promotion character display, so that the player can be made aware of the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached, and by not displaying the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached in the operation promotion display of the introductory part, it is possible to notify whether or not the player is being controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 40]
The gaming machine of form 40-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the determination, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means,
It can be controlled to a plurality of states including a normal state, a state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the normal state, and a special state after a specific number of times is reached (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) in which the result of the variable display does not become a specific display result (a special display result of "jackpot"), which is controlled based on the variable display being executed a specific number of times (900 times),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
After it is notified that the specific reach (super reach effect) will control the advantageous state, an advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed,
In the normal state, after the specific number of times has been reached, a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state (characters indicating the number of times remaining until the play time) can be displayed,
Before displaying the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start effect), the display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (characters of the remaining number of times until the play time) is ended,
The size of the characters constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) is larger than the size of the characters constituting the display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (characters of the remaining number of times until the play time),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is a situation in which it has already been notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and therefore a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times has been reached is unnecessary, and therefore the display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times has been reached is terminated before the advantageous state name display is displayed, and the size of the characters constituting the advantageous state name display is made larger than the size of the characters constituting the display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times has been reached, thereby allowing the game player to celebrate being controlled to the advantageous state. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 40-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 40-1,
Regardless of the number of times remaining until the special state (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) after reaching the specific number of times, the size of the characters constituting the display (characters of the remaining number of times until Yu-time) indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after reaching the specific number of times is the same,
The size of the characters constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start effect) is larger than the size of the characters constituting the display showing the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times has been reached (characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time).
According to this feature, regardless of the number of times remaining until the special state is reached after the specific number of times has been reached, the size of the characters constituting the advantageous state name display can be made larger than the size of the characters constituting the display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state is reached after the specific number of times has been reached, thereby allowing the player to celebrate being controlled to the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of aspect 40-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 40-1 or 40-2,
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is characterized in that it determines a special fluctuation pattern (time-saving B start fluctuation pattern) when the game medium (game ball) first enters the start area (first start winning port, second start winning port) in a special state (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) after a specific number of times has been reached.
According to this feature, when the game medium first enters the starting area in the special state after reaching a specific number of times, a presentation according to the special variation pattern can be executed.

[Form 41]
The gaming machine of form 41-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) can be changed from a first mode (white mode) to a second mode (red or gold mode) and displayed.
In the title display part that displays the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), when the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is changed from the first mode (white mode) to the second mode (red or gold mode), the time during which the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is displayed in the second mode (red or gold mode) is longer than the time during which the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is displayed in the first mode (white mode),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, when the title display corresponding to a specific reach is changed from the first mode to the second mode in a title display part that displays a title display corresponding to the specific reach, the change to the second mode can be reliably recognized by making the time during which the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the second mode longer than the time during which the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the first mode. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode corresponding to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 41-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 41-1,
In the title display part that displays the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) may be changed from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red or gold aspect), or may remain unchanged in the first aspect (white aspect),
When changing the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) from the first mode (white mode) to the second mode (red or gold mode), at a specific timing (when a time t1 has elapsed since the start of the title display period), the title display (title letters) is changed from the first mode (white mode) to the second mode (red or gold mode) and a specific sound effect (specific sound) is output,
When the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is not changed from the first state (white state), when the specific timing is reached (when time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period), the specific sound effect (specific sound) is output without being changed from the first state (white state).
According to this feature, a specific sound effect is output when the title display corresponding to a specific reach changes from the first state to the second state at a specific timing, and also when the title display remains in the first state at the specific timing and does not change, so that the output of the specific sound effect can give the player hope that the display will change to the second state.

A gaming machine of aspect 41-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 41-1 or 41-2,
The second aspect includes a plurality of aspects (red and gold aspects),
When the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is changed from the first mode (white mode) to the second mode (red, gold mode), a specific sound effect (specific sound) is output regardless of the type of second mode (red, gold mode) to which it is changed.
According to this feature, when the title display corresponding to a specific reach changes from the first state to the second state at a specific timing, a specific sound effect is output regardless of the type of second state to which it is changed, so that the output of the specific sound effect can draw attention to the type of second state to which it is changed.

[Form 42]
The gaming machine of form 42-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
a display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) can be changed from a first mode (white mode) to a second mode (red mode) and displayed.
The title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) can be changed and displayed from the first mode (white mode) to a third mode (gold mode) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state than the second mode (red mode),
In the title display part that displays the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects), in either case where the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is changed from the first mode (white mode) to the second mode (red mode) or the third mode (gold mode), the display is characterized in that it is changed from the first mode (white mode) to a common display mode (a mode that appears to glow) and then changed to the second mode (red mode) or the third mode (gold mode).
According to this feature, in the title display part that displays the title display corresponding to a specific reach, whether the title display corresponding to the specific reach is changed from the first mode to the second mode or from the first mode to the third mode, the display is changed to a common display mode and then to the second mode or the third mode. Therefore, by changing from the first mode to the common display mode, the player can expect to see a change to the third mode, which has a higher expectation than the second mode, until the change from the common display mode to the second mode or the third mode.

The gaming machine of aspect 42-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 42-1,
The common display mode is a mode in which the characters constituting the title display (title characters) are illuminated, and is characterized in that when the light clears, the characters change to the second mode (red mode) or the third mode (gold mode).
According to this feature, the characters constituting the title display light up, thereby encouraging the change to the second or third mode.

[Form 43]
The gaming machine of form 43-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns is determined, including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach (low base weak reach B effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A effect) and the title display part in the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), a brightness data table for a common title display part (weak reach common title) is used to control the light emitting means,
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach A performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction) for the introductory part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach B introduction) for the introductory part of the second reach.
According to this feature, by using a common brightness data table corresponding to the title display part for two different reaches, an increase in cost and capacity can be prevented, and by using a brightness data table corresponding to each introductory part, the period until notification of whether or not an advantageous state has been achieved can be appropriately stimulated, resulting in an appropriate title display.

[Form 44]
The gaming machine of form 44-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-4) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 6) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to PB1-7/PB1-8 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to 9/PA2-10 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state is determined,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB4) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-6) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-5 to PB1-7 / PB1-8 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-7 to 9/PA2-10 to 12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect / low base strong reach C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect / low base strong reach C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The third reach is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach (low base strong reach A presentation), and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The fourth reach is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The third reach (low base strong reach A effect) and the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect) have a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A effect) and the second reach (low base weak reach B effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A effect) and the title display part in the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach common title) for the first title display part which is common to both the first reach and the second reach,
In the title display part in the third reach (low base strong reach A effect) and the title display part in the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach common title) for the second title display part which is common to the third reach,
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach A performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction) for the introductory part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach B introduction) for the introductory part of the second reach,
In the introductory part of the third reach (low base strong reach A performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach A introduction) for the introductory part of the third reach,
In the introductory part of the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part of the fourth reach (strong reach system strong reach B introduction/strong reach system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, by using a common brightness data table corresponding to the title display part for the high expectation 2 reach and the low expectation 2 reach, an increase in cost and capacity is prevented, and by using a brightness data table corresponding to each of the introductory parts, the period until notification of whether or not an advantageous state will be achieved can be appropriately stimulated, resulting in an appropriate title display.

[Form 45]
The gaming machine of form 45-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-4) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a sixth fluctuation pattern (PB1-J) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state. A fluctuation pattern is determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 6), a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to 7/PB1-8 to 10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled by the advantageous state, an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to 9/PA2-10 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled by the advantageous state, a ninth fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to 13) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled by the advantageous state, and a tenth fluctuation pattern (PA2-13 to 15) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled by the advantageous state,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB4) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-6) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-5 to PB1-7 / PB1-8 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-7 to 9/PA2-10 to 12) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the ninth variation pattern is determined, a ninth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-11 to PB1-13) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the tenth variation pattern is determined, a tenth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-13 to PA2-15) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect / low base strong reach C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect / low base strong reach C effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the ninth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the tenth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fifth reach (low base strongest reach presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The second reach is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The third reach is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach (low base strong reach A presentation), and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The fourth reach is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The fifth reach is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fifth reach (low-base strongest reach presentation), and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The third reach (low base strong reach A effect) and the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect) have a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A effect) and the second reach (low base weak reach B effect),
The fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect) has a higher expectation of being controlled into the advantageous state than any of the first reach (low base weak reach A effect), the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), the third reach (low base strong reach A effect), and the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A effect) and the title display part in the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach common title) for the first title display part which is common to both the first reach and the second reach,
In the title display part in the third reach (low base strong reach A effect) and the title display part in the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach common title) for the second title display part which is common to the third reach,
In the title display part of the fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strongest reach title of the strongest reach system) for the third title display part for the fifth reach,
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach A performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction) for the introductory part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach B introduction) for the introductory part of the second reach,
In the introductory part of the third reach (low base strong reach A performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach A introduction) for the introductory part of the third reach,
In the introductory part of the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach B introduction/strong reach system strong reach C introduction) for the introductory part of the fourth reach,
In the introductory part of the fifth reach (low base strongest reach presentation), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction) for the introductory part of the fifth reach.
According to this feature, by using a common brightness data table corresponding to the title display part for the high expectation 2 reach and the low expectation 2 reach, an increase in cost and capacity can be prevented, and by using a brightness data table corresponding to each of the introductory parts, it is possible to appropriately stimulate the period until notification of whether or not an advantageous state will be achieved, and further, by providing a dedicated brightness data table for the title display part and the introductory part for the reach with the highest expectation, interest is heightened, and as a result, an appropriate title display can be achieved.

[Form 46]
The gaming machine of form 46-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) can be changed from a first state (white) to a second state (red or gold) and displayed.
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), when the title display (title characters) is not changed to the second mode (red or gold), the light emitting means is controlled using a first brightness data table (weak reach common title (white)),
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), when the title display (title characters) is changed to a second mode (red or gold), the light emitting means is controlled using a second brightness data table (weak reach common title (red) or weak reach common title (gold)),
In the introductory part of the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), regardless of whether the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach has changed to the second form (red or gold), the light emitting means is controlled using a common brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, whether the title display is not changed to the second mode in the title display part of a specific reach or whether it is changed to the second mode, the brightness data table corresponding to each introductory part is common, thereby preventing an increase in cost and capacity, and by using the brightness data table corresponding to each title display part, it is possible to appropriately present the title display whether it is not changed to the second mode or whether it is changed to the second mode, and as a result, an appropriate title display can be achieved.

[Form 47]
The gaming machine of form 47-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart), and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
Display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light-emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning slot, second start winning slot), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effects) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of whether or not the advantageous state is controlled is notified,
The title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is
A first part (title start period) from the start of displaying the title display corresponding to the specific reach to the display at a fixed position;
A second part (title display period, title end period) after the title display corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is displayed at the fixed position,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table configured with brightness data;
In the first part (title start period) of the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the first part (weak reach title start),
In the second part (title display period, title end period) of the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the second part (weak reach title display),
In the introductory part of the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, by using a brightness data table corresponding to the first part from when the title display starts to be displayed until it is displayed in the fixed position in a specific reach, a brightness data table corresponding to the second part after the title display is displayed in the fixed position, and a brightness data table corresponding to the introductory part, it is possible to suitably stimulate the period during which the title display is performed and the period until it is announced whether or not an advantageous state will be achieved, and as a result, it is possible to perform a suitable title display.

[Example]
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the following examples.

[Basic explanation]
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which also applies to the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

[Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1]
1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is broadly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that forms the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls, which serve as gaming media, are launched into this gaming area by a predetermined ball launching device.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. When special symbols or the normal symbols described below vary, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. When decorative symbols described below vary, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variation also includes the display of a certain symbol flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that variable display is sometimes referred to as variable display or variation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as the "first special symbol," and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as the "second special symbol." A special symbol game using the first special symbol is also referred to as the "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbol is also referred to as the "second special symbol game." There may be only one type of special symbol display device that variably displays special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or organic EL (electroluminescence) display, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, a variable display of multiple types of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers, etc.) as decorative identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that the special symbol games and variable display of decorative symbols that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is currently being executed. The pending display and active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to a variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also referred to as the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each consisting of multiple LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first hold memories by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second hold memories by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning opening, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable prize ball device 6B (a standard electric device) forms a second start prize opening that changes between a closed and an open state due to the solenoid 81 (see Figure 3). The variable prize ball device 6B, for example, comprises an electric tulip-type device with a pair of movable pieces. When the solenoid 81 is off, the movable pieces are in a vertical position, bringing the tip of the movable pieces close to the prize ball device 6A, creating a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the second start prize opening (also referred to as the second start prize opening being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is on, the movable pieces of the variable prize ball device 6B are in a tilted position, creating an open state in which game balls can enter the second start prize opening (also referred to as the second start prize opening being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start prize opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three) are paid out, and the second special game can be initiated. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed and an open state, and is not limited to devices equipped with an electric tulip-type device.

General winning openings 10 are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, three locations at the bottom left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), and are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 with a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the large prize opening.

When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, 14) are paid out as prize balls. When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a gaming ball enters, for example, the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10.

When a game ball enters any of the prize slots, including the general prize slot 10, it is also referred to as a "win." In particular, a win at a start slot (first start slot, second start slot) is also referred to as a start slot.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, at the bottom left of the play area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and displays a variety of normal symbols as normal identification information that differs from special symbols. Normal symbols are represented by numbers from "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". Normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This type of variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

To the right of the image display device 5, there is a passing gate 41 through which the game ball can pass. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending indicator 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls as they flow down, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3 for playing and outputting sound effects, etc. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

A movable body 32 (described below) that operates in response to the effects is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in Figure 1). The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, along with the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c described above, may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are each constructed using an LED.

A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. The ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is operated by the player or the like to launch gaming balls toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

A ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) separate from the upper tray, from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. Operation of the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see Figure 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, which the player can press to issue a specific command. Operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see Figure 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11 housed in a board case 201. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching between the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. The setting switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing setting values such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the ball payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and setting switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is located in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is located to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and display changeover switch 31 are located directly in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratios, winning combination ratios, and base wins. The consecutive win ratio is the proportion of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning slot (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls. The winning combination ratio is the proportion of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning slot (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning slot (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls. The base wins is the proportion of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls that have been shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a with a glass window, which allows the gaming area to be opened and closed. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the circuit board case 201, which includes the setting key 51 and setting switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

[Outline of game progress]
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 while the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on that passage cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on that passage is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed, the normal symbol display result will be "normal winning." On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the normal symbol display result will be "normal losing." When a "normal winning" occurs, opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when a special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on that start winning cannot be played immediately), the execution of the special game based on that entry will be suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In a special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot," and if a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a stopped symbol, it is a "miss." Note that "misses" in this pachinko gaming machine 1 include "misses with time reduction," in which the next variable display is controlled to a high base state (time-reduced state) without going through a jackpot game.

Once the display result in the special game shows "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, which is advantageous for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or until the number of game balls entering the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). This predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can win prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is advantageous to the player. The more rounds played in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of jackpot opening modes (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot (normal state, time-saving state, probability variable state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set accordingly. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may enter a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the special symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning slot by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state and by increasing the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in a regular symbol game compared to the normal state. The time-saving state is advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of fluctuation of special symbols (especially the second special symbol).

In the probability variable state (probability variable state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is implemented, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for players, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuations, but also makes it easier to win a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability variation state will continue until one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined number of special games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. A state in which the condition for the special game to end is played a predetermined number of times is also called a count-cut state (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability variation state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a gaming state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot gaming state that are advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability variable state. It is a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability that the displayed result in a normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the displayed result in a special game will be a "jackpot," is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified recovery process is not executed after power is turned on).

A state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and a state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability/high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability/high base state, and the normal state is a low probability/low base state. A high probability state and a low base state is also called a high probability/low base state.

The game state may also change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within the jackpot opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special state after the jackpot game state.

[Progress of the production, etc.]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (such as notifying the progress of the game or adding excitement to the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. These effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed by audio output from the speakers 8L, 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or by using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 begin to display variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. At the timing when the display result (also called the confirmed special symbol) in the first or second special symbol game is statically displayed, the confirmed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols is also statically displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins to when it ends, the variable display of the decorative symbols may assume a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, as described below.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach mode is reached during the variable display of decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. Pachinko gaming machine 1 executes multiple types of reach effects, with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the effect mode. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot," a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is displayed stopped and aligned on a predetermined effective line in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" where the game state is controlled to a probability jackpot after the jackpot gaming state ends, odd-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line-up, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (regular jackpot)" where the game state is not controlled to a probability jackpot after the jackpot gaming state ends, even-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line-up. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (regular symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot."

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. Other effects, such as preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability, are executed during the variable display of decorative symbols. Preview effects include preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the currently executing variable display, and pre-read preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is reserved). Pre-read preview effects may also be executed that change the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode that is different from normal.

Furthermore, the image display device 5 may temporarily stop the decorative symbols while they are being displayed in a variable manner, and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo-consecutive effect that makes a single variable display appear as multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot gaming state, a jackpot effect is executed to notify the player of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot effect may include an effect to notify the number of rounds or an upgrade effect to indicate that the value of the jackpot gaming state is increasing.

Also, for example, when a special game or the like is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

[Board configuration]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source, such as an external power source like a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the program stored in ROM 101 to control the progress of the game (processing that realizes the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in ROM 101 (such as data on variation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) is used, and RAM 102 is used as the main memory. RAM 102 serves as backup RAM, where the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if part or all of the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or part of the program stored in ROM 101 may be deployed to RAM 102 and executed on RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specified computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals that control (drive) the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first hold display device 25A, second hold display device 25B, normal symbol hold display device 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switches (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), and count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal that stops control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal turns off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and turns on when the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value for a period of time that exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal turns on, for example, in response to pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 or solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of its control of the game's progress, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the game's progress, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. These presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various decisions made by the main board 11 (e.g., the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable patterns used when executing the special game (details will be described later)), the game status (e.g., the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot slot, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, error notifications, and notifications of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes programs stored in ROM 121, and performs processing to execute performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). During this processing, various data (such as data from various tables) stored in ROM 121 is used, and RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute an effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes presentations based on instructions to execute presentations from the presentation control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying the image display unit 5 with a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 also supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the audio control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal that designates the lamp on/off state) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and turn the game effect lamp 9 on/off. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal that operates the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to the drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the on/off of the lamp.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to perform control of audio output, turning on/off of lamps (such as supplying sound designation signals and lamp signals), and control of the movable body 32 (such as supplying signals to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (performance random numbers) used to execute various performances. The performance random numbers may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, sound control board 13, and lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

[Operation]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

[Major operations of the main board 11]
First, we will explain the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main processing shown in Figure 4, the CPU 103 first disables interrupts (step S1). Next, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). These initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and making RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are met (step S3). The recovery conditions can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is available, and the backup RAM is normal. When power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example, is pressed, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is sufficient to determine in step S3 that the recovery conditions are not met. The backup data only needs to be able to be saved in RAM 102, which serves as backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is sufficient to check or inspect the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc., to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is met (Step S3; Yes), recovery processing (Step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (Step S5). The recovery processing of Step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the power supply was stopped.

If the recovery condition is not met (Step S3: No), an initialization process (Step S6) is performed, followed by a setting change process (Step S7). The initialization process of Step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the clearing process sets initial values in the work area.

The setting confirmation process in step S5 determines whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is pressed ON. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, the setting confirmation condition can only be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, so the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set therein can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may enter a game stop state in which the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is halted. In the game stop state, the firing of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle and the detection of game balls by various switches are halted, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to display a frozen losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with this may also end.

The setting change process in step S7 determines whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

If the setting change conditions are met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting values set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and the values displayed on the display monitor 29 are updated sequentially each time operation of the setting change switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an arcade attendant or the like, the setting values displayed on the display monitor 29 are stored (updated and memorized) in the backup area of RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be placed in a play-stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying play-stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, it may perform control to notify the user that the setting is being checked or changed. For example, it may display a specific image on the image display device 5, output a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or cause a light-emitting element such as the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a specific manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, allowing control to the setting change state. If the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, allowing control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off when power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the setting change state is not controlled. If the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, it sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time interval (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and enables the interrupt (step S10). After that, it enters a loop process. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

After executing this game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 5. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 5 begins, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined main error processing to diagnose abnormalities in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and, if necessary, issue a warning based on the diagnosis results (step S22). After this, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined information output processing to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start wins), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the game has entered a probability variable state) to be supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 is able to manage the execution and reservation of special symbol games, control the jackpot gaming state, control the gaming state, and so on.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, it is possible to execute the normal symbol game and manage reserves based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), as well as control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol win." The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reserve display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. Then, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a presentation control command to be sent during each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, the set presentation control command is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the presentation control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

The start winning determination process detects the occurrence of a start winning, stores pending information in a specified area of RAM 102, and updates the number of pending memories. When a start winning occurs, a random number value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and variation pattern, and this is stored as pending information. A process may also be executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random number value. After the pending information and number of pending memories are stored, transmission settings are made to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the determination results, such as the occurrence of a start winning, the number of pending memories, and the predictive determination. The performance control command thus transmitted and set for the start winning is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in Figure 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag stored in RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), transmission settings are made to transmit the corresponding effect control command to the effect control board 12.

The normal special symbol processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special symbol processing, a determination is made as to whether to start the first or second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. Furthermore, in the normal special symbol processing, whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is to be a "jackpot" and, if so, the type of jackpot, is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed based on a random number value for determining the display result. Furthermore, in the normal special symbol processing, a fixed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "1," and the normal special symbol processing ends. The special symbol game using the second special symbol may be executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also known as special symbol 2 priority consumption). Additionally, the order in which game balls enter the first and second starting winning slots may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision value compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern to determine one of several types of fluctuation pattern based on the results of a pre-determined decision on whether or not the display result will be a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol change process includes processes for making settings to change the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and for measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol change time corresponding to the change pattern. When the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change reaches the special symbol change time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stop process includes a process for stopping the variation of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and setting the device to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special symbol that will result in the display of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", the game state is also updated if the game is in a time-saving state or a special probability state and the end of the number-cutting period is confirmed. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-jackpot opening process of step S114 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "4." This pre-jackpot opening process includes processing to start the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and set the large prize opening to an open state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot." When the large prize opening is set to an open state, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door. At this time, the maximum opening period for the large prize opening to be set and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set, depending on the type of jackpot, for example. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5," and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "5." This jackpot opening process includes processes such as measuring the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state, processes such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door are executed, and then the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "6" and the jackpot opening process ends.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds that open the jackpot entry port has been executed has reached the set upper limit, and a process to set the jackpot game state to end when the upper limit has been reached. If the number of rounds executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5", while if the number of rounds executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7". Once the value of the special symbol process flag has been updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes waiting for the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending presentation, which serves as a presentation operation to notify the end of the jackpot game state, is executed, and making various settings to start special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0" and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the normal special symbol processing of the special symbol process, the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate change by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value consists of six levels, from 1 to 6, with 6 representing the highest probability of winning a jackpot, and the probability of winning a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, a setting value of 6 provides the highest advantage to the player, and the advantage decreases progressively as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the probability of winning a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the payout rate may also change according to the setting value. While the probability of winning a jackpot remains constant regardless of the setting value, the number of rounds in a jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to set one of several setting values that differ in the degree of advantage to the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 7 shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table. Figure 7(A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 7(B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result determination table, a win determination value that is compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value used to determine the display result, and its value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. A common display result determination table may be used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

As shown in Figure 7(A), when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can range from 0 to 65535. Of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 used to determine the special symbol display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot," 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "miss with time-saving," and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss." Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the aforementioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot," and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss." Note that when the setting value for the first variable special symbol is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the situation is as shown in Figure 7(A).

As shown in Figure 7(B), when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can range from 0 to 65535. Of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 used to determine the special symbol display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot," 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "miss with time-saving," and the rest of the numerical range is assigned to "miss." Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the aforementioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot," and the rest of the numerical range is assigned to "miss." Note that when the setting value for the variable special symbol in the second special symbol is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the results are as shown in Figure 7(B).

Here, if we look at the numerical range of hit determination values assigned to "jackpot" and "miss with time-saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in Figure 8, in the display result determination table for the first special symbol when the game state is normal or time-saving, the hit determination value range of 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"); whereas, for setting values 2 to 6, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to a numerical range corresponding to each setting value, starting from 1238, so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special symbol display result determination table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the setting value is 1, of the hit determination values that can take on a value between 0 and 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to a "jackpot," while when the setting value is 2 or higher, of the jackpot determination values, values within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to a "jackpot." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, with 1020 as the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value), the probability of a jackpot increases as the set value increases, as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases.

Furthermore, in the first special symbol display result determination table when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of 65317 to 65535 among the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range for the time-saving loss determination value used to determine a time-saving loss regardless of the setting value. Focusing on the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, when the setting value is 6, the hit determination value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range for the jackpot determination value, and the time-saving loss determination value is set to the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for time-saving losses (time-saving loss reference value), in a numerical range different from the range of jackpot determination values for the setting value of 6 (1020 to 1346). This prevents the numerical range of the time-saving loss determination value from overlapping with the range of jackpot determination values that changes depending on each setting value.

In addition, in the first special chart display result determination table when the game state is in the probability variable state, the range of 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"); whereas, for setting values 2 to 6, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to a numerical range corresponding to each setting value, starting from 1347, so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5, and 1347 to 1674 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in the probability variable state, when the setting value is 1, of the hit determination values that can take on a value between 0 and 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to a "jackpot," while when the setting value is 2 or greater, of the jackpot determination values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to a "jackpot." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1347 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, with 1020 as the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value), the probability of a jackpot increases as the set value increases, as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases.

In the second special chart display result determination table when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"); whereas, for setting values 2 to 6, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to a numerical range corresponding to each setting value, starting from 1238, so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game state is normal or time-saving, in the second special symbol display result determination table, of the hit determination values that can take on a value between 0 and 65535, when the set value is 1, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to a "jackpot," while when the set value is 2 or greater, of the jackpot determination values, values within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to a "jackpot." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, with 1020 as the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value), the probability of a jackpot increases as the set value increases, as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases.

Furthermore, in the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of 65317 to 65425 among the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving loss determination value for determining a time-saving loss regardless of the setting value. Focusing on the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, when the setting value is 6, the hit determination value is set to 1020 to 1346 among the jackpot determination value numerical range, and the time-saving loss determination value is set to the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for time-saving losses (time-saving loss reference value), in a numerical range different from the range of jackpot determination values for the setting value of 6 (1020 to 1346). This prevents the numerical range of the time-saving loss determination value from overlapping with the range of jackpot determination values that changes depending on each setting value.

In the display result determination table for the second special symbol when the game state is in a probability variable state, the hit determination value range of 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The other features of the display result determination table for the second special symbol are the same as those of the display result determination table for the first special symbol.

As described above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the common numerical range for a time-saving miss is set to 65317 to 65535 regardless of the setting value, whether the game state is normal or time-saving. When the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the common numerical range for a time-saving miss is set to 65317 to 65425 regardless of the setting value, whether the game state is normal or time-saving. In other words, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the rate at which the variable display result is a time-saving miss is the same regardless of the setting value, preventing the setting value from excessively increasing gambling. Furthermore, for time-saving misses to which a common judgment value is assigned for each setting value, the numerical range is set to a continuous range from 65317, the time-saving miss reference value, regardless of the setting value, thereby reducing the processing load on the CPU 103 related to determining whether the variable display result is a time-saving miss.

Note that while this pachinko gaming machine 1 has six settable values, from 1 to 6, the number of settable values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or fewer, or seven or more. Furthermore, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value is suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute any setting suggestion effect at different rates depending on the set value.

[Major operations of the performance control board 12]
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 9. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 9 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting registers for the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. It also executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its origin position and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, the register settings of the CTC. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns on. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 automatically disables the interrupt. However, if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable command (DI command). In response to the interrupt due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a specified command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, the performance control command is captured from a specified input port included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The captured performance control command is stored in a performance control command reception buffer, for example, provided in RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then enables interrupts and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read effect control commands are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a specified area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 may be turned on, so that the effect control process process can confirm which effect control command was received and the content specified by the effect control command. Furthermore, if the effect control command specifies the game status, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game status.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). The performance control process controls the operation of various performance devices, such as the display of performance images in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving of the movable body 32. In addition, the control content of performance operations using the various performance devices is judged, determined, and set in accordance with the performance control commands sent from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 is updated by software. Then, processing returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to step S73.

Figure 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 9 as the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in Figure 10, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a preview setting process (step S161). In the preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, and settings are made to execute a preview performance based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the initial winning. In addition, processing is executed to display a hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processing steps S170 to S175, depending on the value of a performance process flag stored in RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". This variable display start setting process determines the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (confirmed decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various effects such as reach effects and various preview effects will be executed, their mode, and the start timing of execution, based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) that reflects the determined results is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing of step S172 is executed when the effect process flag value is "2." In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, drive the movable body 32, output audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to an instruction (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13, and turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs in response to an instruction (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. After performing these effect controls, the CPU 120 stops the display of the final decorative pattern, which is the result of the display of the decorative pattern, for example, in response to reading an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the effect control pattern or receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the stop display of the final decorative pattern. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a static state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3" and the variable display effect processing ends.

The special symbol win wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special symbol win wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether a presentation control command specifying the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. When a presentation control command specifying the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Furthermore, if a command specifying the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving said command has elapsed, the display result in the special symbol game is determined to be a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to its initial value of "0". Once the value of the presentation process flag has been updated, the special symbol win wait process ends.

The jackpot presentation processing of step S174 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "6." In this jackpot presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern, etc., corresponding to the presentation content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. Furthermore, in the jackpot presentation processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the end of the jackpot gaming state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5," which corresponds to the ending presentation processing, and the jackpot presentation processing ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. The presentation process flag value is then updated to its initial value of "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

[Variations of the basic description]
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible within the scope of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol showing "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing that symbol. Furthermore, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display stops (the display result may not show the symbol showing "-").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (for example, slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 via a removable recording medium, but may also be distributed by being pre-installed on a storage device of the computer device. Furthermore, by providing a communications processing unit, the programs and data for realizing the present invention may also be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communications line, etc.

Games can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by downloading programs and data via a communication line, temporarily storing them in internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line. Furthermore, the game can also be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In this specification, expressions used to compare various percentages, such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high," "low," and "different") may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%."

[Explanation of characteristic portion 131SG]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with respect to the characteristic section 131SG. In the description of each step in the flowchart of the characteristic section 131SG, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "131SG S1," and "Normal Reach" may be abbreviated as "N Reach" and "Super Reach" as "SP Reach." In the characteristic section 131SG, "variable" may be referred to as "variable display." Furthermore, components similar to those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description or that have similar functions but differ in form or location are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the following description, the near side of FIG. 11-1 is the front (front face) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the far side is the back (rear) side, and the description will be based on the up, down, left, and right directions when viewing the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front side. In this embodiment, the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the surface facing the player playing the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Unlike the description in Figure 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is not one that can be set to one of multiple setting values (e.g., 1 to 6) that have different display rates for the jackpot display result, and is described as a gaming machine that does not have a "miss with time reduction" as a variable display result, and has a jackpot probability set to approximately 1/319.

Furthermore, after the gaming machine is powered on (when RAM clear processing is executed) or after a jackpot occurs, if the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (900 times in this embodiment) in succession in a low probability state but the next jackpot does not occur, the machine may be controlled to time-saving state B (also called rescue time-saving state or rescue time-saving) out of the multiple types of time-saving states. This rescue time-saving state is provided to rescue players who have not won a jackpot despite playing for a long period of time (for example, to reduce investment in games), and in this embodiment is a gaming state also called "play time."

In this embodiment, if the game is controlled to a jackpot game state of jackpot A out of multiple types of jackpots, 110 variable displays are made in time-saving state A (low probability/high base state) out of multiple types of time-saving states, leaving 790 variable displays remaining from the end of time-saving state A until the rescue time-saving state is reached. On the other hand, if the game is controlled to a jackpot game state of either jackpot B or jackpot C out of multiple types of jackpots, 110 variable displays are made in the probability variable state (high probability/high base state), leaving 900 variable displays remaining from the end of the probability variable state until the rescue time-saving state is reached. Also, in this embodiment, the number of variable displays in time-saving state B (low probability/high base state) based on the value of the rescue time-saving count counter reaching "0" is 1100.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-1, a first special symbol reserved memory display area 130SG005D is provided in the lower left of the image display device 5, which can display a reserved display corresponding to a first special symbol reserved memory that has been started but for which a variable display has not yet been executed, and a second special symbol reserved memory display area 130SG005U is provided in the lower right of the image display device 5, which can display a reserved display corresponding to a second special symbol reserved memory that has been started but for which a variable display has not yet been executed. And, an active display area 130SG005F is provided in the lower center of the image display device 5, which can display a reserved display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed as an active display.

In addition, the right side of the image display device 5 can display a fourth symbol 131SG005J to notify the player that a variable display is being executed, and a small symbol 131SG005M, which is variable displayed in the same way as the variable display of the decorative symbol in the center of the image display device 5.The top right corner of the image display device 5 can display a remaining number of times to reach the rescue time reduction display 131SG005Z, which indicates the remaining number of variable displays until control is given to time reduction state B (rescue time reduction state) described below.

In addition, the left side of the image display device 5 on the gaming board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is formed as a left gaming area 2L where gaming balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the gaming board 2 is formed as a right gaming area 2R where gaming balls can flow down. Gaming balls that are weakly launched by the launching device flow down a first path as the left gaming area 2L, and gaming balls that are strongly launched by the launching device flow down a second path as the right gaming area 2R.

Furthermore, a first reserved memory display area 131SG005D is provided at the bottom left of the image display device 5, which indicates the number of reserved memories for the first special design by the number displayed on the reserved display, and a second reserved memory display area 131SG005U is provided at the bottom right of the image display device 5, which indicates the number of reserved memories for the second special design by the number displayed on the reserved display. Furthermore, an active display area 131SG005F is provided at the bottom center of the image display device 5, which displays the reserved display corresponding to the currently active variable display as the active display.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 has a first large winning opening and a second large winning opening formed in the direction in which the gaming balls flow downstream. The first large winning opening is operable by solenoid 131SG082A (see Figure 11-2) to open and close a large winning opening door (not shown), thereby changing between an open state where gaming balls can enter and a closed state where gaming balls cannot enter. The second large winning opening is operable by solenoid 131SG082B (see Figure 11-2) to open and close a large winning opening door (not shown), thereby changing between an open state where gaming balls can enter and a closed state where gaming balls cannot enter.

Furthermore, a first count switch 131SG023A capable of detecting game balls is provided in the first large prize opening, and a second count switch 131SG023B capable of detecting game balls is provided in the second large prize opening.

In other words, game balls flowing down the left game area 2L (first path) can win in the general prize opening 10 and the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A, while game balls flowing down the right game area 2R (second path) can win in the second start prize opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B, the general prize opening 10, and the first or second large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7, and can also pass through the passing gate 41.

In this embodiment, the switch circuit 110 is connected to the first count switch 131SG023A, the second count switch 131SG023B, and the jackpot start switch 131SG024 built into the jackpot start gate 131SG042.

Multiple obstacle nails are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. As a result, game balls flowing down the left game area 2L cannot win in the second start winning slot or the large winning slot, and game balls flowing down the right game area 2R cannot win in the first start winning slot.

As shown in Figure 11-2, at a predetermined position on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment (for example, the lower left position of the game area), there are a first special symbol display device 131SG004A capable of variable display of the first special symbol, a second special symbol display device 131SG004B capable of variable display of the second special symbol, a first reserve indicator 131SG025A capable of displaying the first reserved memory number, a second reserve indicator 131SG025B capable of displaying the second reserved memory number, a normal symbol display device 131SG020 capable of variable display of normal symbols, a normal symbol reserve indicator 131SG025C capable of displaying the normal symbol reserve number, and a jackpot indicator. The game information display unit includes a round indicator 131SG131 that can display the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during play, a right-hit lamp 131SG132 that lights up in game states in which the game ball is shot toward the right game region 2R, such as in a jackpot game state, a high probability/high base state (probability variable state), or a low probability/high base state (time-saving state), a probability variable lamp 131SG133 that lights up when the game is in a high probability/high base state (probability variable state), and a time-saving lamp 131SG134 that lights up in the high probability/high base state (probability variable state) and the low probability/high base state (time-saving state). Note that, when the game state is normal, the right-hit lamp 131SG132 exceptionally lights up from the moment the variable display stops if the variable display results in a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 11-2, the main board 11 is equipped with an information output circuit for outputting game information (signals) to an external device, such as a management computer of the gaming facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, via a terminal board (not shown).

In this embodiment, the second large prize opening is provided with a V prize opening and a discharge outlet located downstream of the V prize opening. A variable V prize opening device (V lid) is also provided upstream of the V prize opening. The variable V prize opening device is switched between a closed and an open state by a solenoid. In other words, when the variable V prize opening device is in the open state, game balls flowing down the second large prize opening can pass through the V prize opening, but when the variable V prize opening device is in the closed state, they cannot pass through the V prize opening and instead flow down to the discharge outlet.

As shown in Figure 11-2, the main board 11 is provided with a V switch 131SG023B1 that can detect, via the switch circuit 110, that a gaming ball has passed through the V entry port located downstream of the second large entry port, and an ejection switch 131SG023B2 that can detect that a gaming ball has passed through the ejection port.

The performance control board 12 is also connected to a vibration motor 61 built into the push button 31B and a movable body motor 207 for operating the movable body 32. The lamp control board 14 is also connected to a right-hit LED 131SG031 for prompting a right-hit operation, a first special symbol LED 131SG032 that lights up during the variable display of the first special symbol, a second special symbol LED 131SG033 that lights up during the variable display of the second special symbol, a first hold LED 131SG034A that lights up when the first hold memory number is 1 to 2, and a first hold LED 131SG035A that lights up when the first hold memory number is 3 to 4. 31SG034B, a second hold LED 131SG035A that lights up when the second hold memory count is 1 to 2, a second hold LED 131SG035B that lights up when the second hold memory count is 3 to 4, a button LED 62 built into the push button 31B, a movable body LED 208 built into the movable body 32, and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 are connected.

Figure 11-3(A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating random number values counted on the main board 11. As shown in Figure 11-3(A), in this embodiment, the main board 11 is controlled to count numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, as well as the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern, the random number value MR5 for determining the normal symbol display result, and the random number value MR6 for determining the initial value of MR5. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random number values MR1 to MR6 may be counted by the CPU 103 using different random counters updated by software, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built into the gaming control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip separate from the gaming control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called gaming random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random number values MR1 to MR6 are set to the ranges shown in Figure 11-3 (A), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ranges of these random number values MR1 to MR6 may be varied depending on the settings set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of games in the pachinko game machine 1. The CPU 103 also executes a random number generation program, enabling it to generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores not only the game control program but also various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various judgments and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting multiple control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variable pattern judgment table that stores multiple variable patterns that determine the variable display modes of each symbol in variable displays such as special symbols and normal symbols.

Figure 11-3 (B) shows an example of the configuration of the special symbol display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common special symbol display result determination table is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special symbol display result determination tables may be used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The special symbol display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to treat the variable display result as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot game state before the determined special symbol that will be the variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, based on the random number value MR1 used to determine the special symbol display result.

In the special symbol display result determination table in this embodiment, a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is assigned to the special symbol display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is normal state, time-saving state (low probability state), or probability variable state (high probability state).

In the special symbol display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is the determination data assigned to the decision result of whether to treat the special symbol display result as a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot game state. In the special symbol display result determination table in this embodiment, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values are assigned to the "jackpot" special symbol display result than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in a probability variable state (high probability state) where probability variable control is performed in pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability of determining that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot game state is higher (approximately 1/80.02 in this embodiment) than the probability of determining that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot game state when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (approximately 1/319.68 in this embodiment). In other words, in the special chart display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the determination data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that there is a higher probability of determining that the gaming state will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state compared to when the gaming state is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

The determination tables stored in ROM 101 include the first special symbol display result determination table and the second special symbol display result determination table shown in Figure 7, as well as the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in Figure 11-3 (C1) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in Figure 11-3 (C2), as well as a variation pattern type determination table, a variation pattern determination table, a normal symbol display result determination table (not shown), and a normal symbol variation pattern determination table (not shown).

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) does not change depending on the setting value, but it may also be configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) changes depending on the setting value.

[Jackpot type determination table]
11-3(C1) and 11-3(C2) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 11-3(C1) is a table for determining the jackpot type using reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning slot (i.e., when the first special symbol is variably displayed). Also, FIG. 11-3(C1) is a table for determining the jackpot type using reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning slot (i.e., when the second special symbol is variably displayed).

The jackpot type determination table is a table that is referenced when a decision is made to use the variable display result as a jackpot pattern, and determines the type of jackpot as either jackpot A or jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) used to determine the jackpot type.

Now, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained using Figure 11-3 (D). In this embodiment, the jackpot types provided are jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, for which time-saving control is executed for a maximum of 110 variable displays after the jackpot gaming state ends. Furthermore, these jackpots A, B, and C are also jackpots for which probability variable control is executed for a maximum of 110 variable displays after the jackpot gaming state ends, when the gaming ball enters the V entry port after entering the second large entry port in the first round of the jackpot gaming state.

In this embodiment, the open state of the variable V ball entry device (V lid) includes a short open state (e.g., 0.1 seconds), in which the open state lasts for a short period of time, and a long open state (e.g., 15 seconds), in which the open state lasts for a long period of time. Jackpot A causes the variable V ball entry device to enter a short open state in the first round of the jackpot gaming state, and jackpots B and C cause the variable V ball entry device to enter a long open state in the first round of the jackpot gaming state.

The jackpot game state resulting from "Jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in rounds two through six. Furthermore, with "Jackpot A," the variable V prize entry device enters a short open state in the first round, making it extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and since the probability variation control cannot be expected to be executed, it essentially results in a normal jackpot.

The jackpot game state resulting from "Jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in rounds two through six. Furthermore, with "Jackpot B," the variable V prize entry device enters a long open state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get a game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and it is expected that the probability variable control will be executed, resulting in a virtual probability variable jackpot.

The jackpot game state resulting from "Jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an opening state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an opening state advantageous to the player in rounds two through ten. Furthermore, with "Jackpot C," the variable V prize entry device enters a long opening state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get a game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and it is expected that probability variable control will be executed, resulting in a virtual probability variable jackpot.

In this embodiment, three types of jackpots, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, are provided as examples, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or fewer types of jackpots, or four or more types, may be provided.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-3 (C1), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 149 is assigned to jackpot A, and 150 to 299 is assigned to jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-3 (C2), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot B, and 100 to 299 is assigned to jackpot C.

In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, there is a 50% chance that the game ball will enter the V entry slot in the first round of the jackpot game state, and both probability variable control and time-saving control will be implemented after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, there is a 100% chance that the game ball will enter the V entry slot in the first round of the jackpot game state, and both probability variable control and time-saving control will be implemented after the jackpot game ends.

In this embodiment, even in the case of jackpot A, it is possible but extremely rare for a V win to occur when the V lid is in a short open state, so in the case of jackpot A, it will be explained as if no V win occurs and the special rate control is not executed. Also, even in the case of jackpot B or jackpot C, it is possible but extremely rare for a V win not to occur when the V lid is in a long open state, so in the case of jackpot B or jackpot C, it will be explained as if a V win occurs and the special rate control is executed.

In this embodiment, the type of jackpot is determined using MR2, a random number value used to determine the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of jackpot may also be determined using MR1, a random number value used to determine the special chart display result.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, the jackpot types for the second special symbol are jackpots B and C, which allow 110 rounds of probability variable control and time-saving control after the jackpot gaming state ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to provide a jackpot D, in which time-saving control is performed 1,009 times (probability variable state: 110 times + time-saving state A: 899 times) after the jackpot gaming state ends. This increases interest because it is almost certain that the next jackpot will occur. Furthermore, even if no jackpot occurs in the 110-round probability variable state after the end of jackpot D and the probability variable control ends, after no jackpot occurs in time-saving state A (low probability/high base state), 899 variable displays are performed, and then just one variable display is performed in the normal state, which further increases interest because control is entered into time-saving state B (rescue time-saving state) described below.

[Time-saving count]
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the number of time reductions for each transition trigger. As shown in FIG. 11-4, in this embodiment, if a jackpot A occurs and the game ball does not enter the probability variable area, (1) the time reduction control is performed 110 times, and (2) the low probability control is performed 110 times, and the game enters the probability variable area (in this embodiment, it is controlled to a time reduction state A (in this embodiment, it is controlled to a battle rush (Battle Rush) with 110 time reductions). Also, if either a jackpot B or a jackpot C occurs and the game ball enters the probability variable area, (1) the time reduction control is performed 110 times, and (2) the probability variable control is performed 110 times, and the game enters the probability variable area (in this embodiment, it is controlled to a super battle rush (Battle Rush) with 110 time reductions). In addition, if 900 variable displays are performed in a low probability state without being controlled to a jackpot, (1) time-saving control is performed 1100 times, and (2) low probability control is performed 1100 times, and the game is controlled to time-saving state B (in this embodiment, a play time with 1100 time-saving times). However, even if 900 variations are performed again in a low probability state without being controlled to a jackpot after the end of time-saving state B, the game will not be controlled to time-saving state B again based on this.

The rescue time reduction achievement rate is the rate at which the game is controlled to the time-shortened state via rescue time reduction. The time-shortened state via rescue time reduction is controlled by performing variable display n times (900 times in this example) without being controlled to the jackpot game state, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K can be calculated as follows:

K={(1-ML)^n}×100
(K = rescue time reduction achievement rate, ML = jackpot probability, n = variable display number)

Specifically, for example, if the jackpot probability ML in this embodiment is approximately 1/319, the rescue time reduction achievement rate K will be 5.9%. Furthermore, in the case of gaming machines that allow for setting values, if the rescue time reduction achievement rate is set higher the lower the jackpot probability setting, the player can be rescued even if the jackpot probability setting is low.

[Fluctuation pattern]
11-5 and 11-6 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the fluctuation patterns in this embodiment. The fluctuation patterns in this embodiment are roughly divided into a loss fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is a loss and a jackpot fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 11-5, miss fluctuation patterns can be broadly divided into non-reach miss fluctuation patterns where no reach effects are executed and a miss occurs (fluctuation pattern type: non-reach), normal reach fluctuation patterns where a normal reach reach effect is executed and a miss occurs (fluctuation pattern type: normal reach), low base weak super reach fluctuation patterns where a low base weak super reach A reach effect or a low base weak super reach B reach effect is executed in a normal state (low base state) and a miss occurs (fluctuation pattern type: low base weak super reach), and normal state (low base The fluctuation pattern of low base strong super reach A (fluctuating pattern type: low base strong super reach A) in which the reach effect of low base strong super reach A is finally executed and results in a miss in the normal state (low base state), the fluctuation pattern of low base strong super reach B (fluctuating pattern type: low base strong super reach B) in which the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is finally executed and results in a miss in the normal state (low base state), the fluctuation pattern of low base strong super reach C (fluctuating pattern type: low base strong super reach C) in which the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is finally executed and results in a miss in the normal state (low base state). The fluctuation pattern of the low base strongest super reach C in which the reach effect of the low base strongest super reach is finally executed in the normal state (low base state) and results in a miss (fluctuation pattern type is the fluctuation pattern of the low base strongest super reach); the fluctuation pattern of the high base super reach A in which the reach effect of the high base super reach A is finally executed and results in a miss in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state (high base state) (fluctuation pattern type is the fluctuation pattern of the high base super reach A); the fluctuation pattern of the high base super reach B in which the reach effect of the high base super reach B is finally executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state (high base state) There are various fluctuation patterns available: a high base Super Reach B fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern type: high base Super Reach B fluctuation pattern) in which a reach effect of high base Super Reach C is ultimately executed in time-saving state A or probability variable state (high base state) and results in a miss; a high base Super Reach C fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern type: high base Super Reach C fluctuation pattern) in which a reach effect of high base Super Reach D is ultimately executed in time-saving state A or probability variable state (high base state) and results in a miss; and a high base Super Reach D fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern type: high base Super Reach D fluctuation pattern) in which a reach effect of high base Super Reach D is ultimately executed in time-saving state A or probability variable state (high base state).

Four types of non-reach fluctuation patterns are available: PA1-1, where the special chart fluctuation time is 12,000 ms and no reach effects are executed when the number of reserved memories of the variable display target special chart is two or less in normal state; PA1-2, where the special chart fluctuation time is 5,000 ms and no reach effects are executed when the number of reserved memories of the variable display target special chart is three in normal state; PA1-3, where the special chart fluctuation time is 2,000 ms and no reach effects are executed during time-saving control (time-saving state A or special probability state); and PA1-4, where the special chart fluctuation time is 500 ms and no reach effects are executed during time-saving control (time-saving state B).

For normal reach fluctuation patterns, there is one type of fluctuation pattern, PA2-1, in which the special chart fluctuation time is 20,000 ms and the normal reach reach effect is executed, resulting in a miss.

There are two types of fluctuation patterns for the low base weak super reach fluctuation pattern type: PA2-2, where the special chart fluctuation time is 43,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed, resulting in a miss; and PA2-3, where the special chart fluctuation time is 53,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed, resulting in a miss.

There are three types of fluctuation patterns for the fluctuation pattern type low base strong super reach A: PA2-4, where the special chart fluctuation time is 63,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong super reach A, resulting in a miss; PA2-5, where the special chart fluctuation time is 73,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong super reach A, resulting in a miss; and PA2-6, where the special chart fluctuation time is 40,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed and the reach effect of low base strong super reach A is executed, resulting in a miss.

There are three types of fluctuation patterns for the fluctuation pattern type low base strong super reach B: PA2-7, where the special chart fluctuation time is 78,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong super reach B, resulting in a miss; PA2-8, where the special chart fluctuation time is 83,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong super reach B, resulting in a miss; and PA2-9, where the special chart fluctuation time is 45,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed and the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is executed, resulting in a miss.

There are three types of fluctuation patterns for the fluctuation pattern type low base strong super reach C: PA2-10, where the special chart fluctuation time is 88,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong super reach C, resulting in a miss; PA2-11, where the special chart fluctuation time is 93,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong super reach C, resulting in a miss; and PA2-12, where the special chart fluctuation time is 50,000 ms and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed and the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is executed, resulting in a miss.

There are three types of fluctuation patterns for the low base strongest super reach fluctuation pattern type: PA2-13, where the special chart fluctuation time is 98,000 ms and a reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed followed by a reach effect of low base strongest super reach, resulting in a miss; PA2-14, where the special chart fluctuation time is 103,000 ms and a reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed followed by a reach effect of low base strongest super reach, resulting in a miss; and PA2-15, where the special chart fluctuation time is 60,000 ms and a reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed and a reach effect of low base strongest super reach is executed, resulting in a miss.

For the high base Super Reach A variation pattern, there is one variation pattern, PA2-16, where the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms and the reach effect of the high base Super Reach A is executed, resulting in a miss. For the high base Super Reach B variation pattern, there is one variation pattern, PA2-17, where the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms and the reach effect of the high base Super Reach B is executed, resulting in a miss. For the high base Super Reach C variation pattern, there is one variation pattern, PA2-18, where the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms and the reach effect of the high base Super Reach C is executed, resulting in a miss. For the high base Super Reach D variation pattern, there is one variation pattern, PA2-19, where the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms and the reach effect of the high base Super Reach D is executed, resulting in a miss.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-6, the jackpot fluctuation patterns are similar to the miss fluctuation patterns in that they include the following fluctuation patterns: non-reach, normal reach, low base strong super reach A, low base strong super reach B, low base strong super reach C, low base strongest super reach, high base super reach A, high base super reach B, high base super reach C, and high base super reach D.

More specifically, as shown in Figure 11-6, the non-reach variation pattern type has one variation pattern, PB1-18, in which the special chart variation time is 500 ms + 15,000 ms and no reach effects are executed during time-saving control (time-saving state B).

For normal reach fluctuation patterns, there is one type of fluctuation pattern, PB1-1, in which the special chart fluctuation time is 20,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and a normal reach reach effect is executed, resulting in a jackpot.

For the low base strong Super Reach A variation pattern type, there are three variation patterns: PB1-2, where the special chart variation time is 63,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak Super Reach A is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach A, resulting in a jackpot; PB1-3, where the special chart variation time is 73,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak Super Reach B is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach A, resulting in a jackpot; and PB-4, where the special chart variation time is 40,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak Super Reach A or low base weak Super Reach B is not executed, and the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach A is executed, resulting in a jackpot.

For the low base strong super reach B variation pattern type, there are three variation patterns: PB1-5, where the special chart variation time is 78,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong super reach B, resulting in a jackpot; PB1-6, where the special chart variation time is 83,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong super reach B, resulting in a jackpot; and PB1-7, where the special chart variation time is 45,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed, and the reach effect of low base strong super reach B is executed, resulting in a jackpot.

There are three types of fluctuation patterns for the low base strong super reach C fluctuation pattern type: PB1-8, where the special chart fluctuation time is 88,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong super reach C, resulting in a jackpot; PB1-9, where the special chart fluctuation time is 93,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strong super reach C, resulting in a jackpot; and PB1-10, where the special chart fluctuation time is 50,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed, and the reach effect of low base strong super reach C is executed, resulting in a jackpot.

There are three types of fluctuation patterns for the low base strongest super reach fluctuation pattern type: PB1-11, where the special chart fluctuation time is 98,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strongest super reach, resulting in a jackpot; PB1-12, where the special chart fluctuation time is 103,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak super reach B is executed followed by the reach effect of low base strongest super reach, resulting in a jackpot; and PB1-13, where the special chart fluctuation time is 60,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach effect of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed, and the reach effect of low base strongest super reach is executed, resulting in a jackpot.

For the high base Super Reach A variation pattern, there is one variation pattern, PB1-14, in which the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the high base Super Reach A reach effect is executed, resulting in a jackpot. For the high base Super Reach B variation pattern, there is one variation pattern, PB1-15, in which the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the high base Super Reach B reach effect is executed, resulting in a jackpot. For the high base Super Reach C variation pattern, there is one variation pattern, PB1-16, in which the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the high base Super Reach C reach effect is executed, resulting in a jackpot. The variation pattern type for High Base Super Reach D is a special chart variation time of 30,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and one variation pattern, PB1-17, is provided, in which the reach effect of High Base Super Reach D is executed and a jackpot is achieved.

[Fluctuation pattern type determination table/fluctuation pattern determination table]
The judgment table stored in ROM 101 includes a plurality of fluctuation pattern type judgment tables for determining the type of fluctuation pattern according to the game status and the variable display result, and a plurality of fluctuation pattern type judgment tables for determining the fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the fluctuation pattern type judgment table, the game status, the variable display result, and the number of reserved memories of special patterns that execute the variable display (number of reserved memories that are subject to variable display).

In the variation pattern setting process in this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table is selected according to the game status and variable display results. Next, the selected variation pattern type determination table is compared with the random number value MR3 read in step 131SGS55 of the normal special symbol processing to determine the variation pattern type.

For example, if the game status is normal and the variable display result is a miss, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 11-7 (A) is selected, and the value of the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is compared with the value of the random number value MR3 to determine the fluctuation pattern type. If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 3299, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 3300 to 4053, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4054 to 4073, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base weak super reach", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4074 to 4081, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach A", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4082 to 4089, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach B", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4090 to 4094, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach C", and if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strongest super reach".

In addition, if the game state is in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state and the variable display result is a miss, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 11-7 (B) is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is compared with the value of the random number value MR3 to determine the fluctuation pattern type. If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 3849, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 3850 to 4048, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4049 to 4066, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach A", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4067 to 4083, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach B", if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4084 to 4094, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach C", and if the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach D".

Also, if the game state is time-saving state B and the variable display result is a loss, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in Figure 11-7 (C) is selected, and the loss fluctuation pattern determination table C is compared with the value of random number value MR3 to determine the fluctuation pattern type. If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach."

Also, if the game status is normal and the variable display result is a jackpot, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 11-7 (D) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern type is determined by comparing this jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A with the value of random number value MR3. If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 1298, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach." If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 1299 to 1934, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach A." If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 1935 to 2676, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach B." If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 2677 to 3706, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach C." If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 3707 to 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strongest super reach."

Also, if the game state is in time-saving state A or probability variable state and the variable display result is a miss, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 11-7 (E) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern type is determined by comparing the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B with the value of random number value MR3. If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 25, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach." If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 26 to 975, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach A." If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 976 to 2075, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach B." If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 2076 to 3380, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach C." If the value of random number value MR3 is in the range of 3381 to 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach D."

Also, if the game state is time-saving state B and the variable display result is a miss, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in Figure 11-7 (F) is selected, and the value of the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is compared with the value of the random number value MR3 to determine the fluctuation pattern type. If the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach."

After determining the type of variation pattern as described above, one of the variation pattern determination tables shown in Figures 11-8 to 11-10 is selected depending on the game status, the variable display result, and the number of reserved special symbols that will execute the variable display (number of reserved symbols for variable display), and the selected variation pattern determination table is compared with the random number value MR3 read in step 131SGS55 of the normal special symbol processing to determine the type of variation pattern.

For example, if the variable display result is a miss, the game status is normal, and the number of variable display target reserved memories is 0 to 2, the miss variation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 11-8 (A) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined by comparing the miss variation pattern determination table A with the value of the random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is a non-reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-1 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined variation pattern type is a normal reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined variation pattern type is a low base weak super reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-2 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 199, and the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-3 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 200 to 255.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach A, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-5. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach B, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-7; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-8; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-9.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-10; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-11; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-12. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strongest super reach, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-13; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-14; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 1743 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-15.

Also, if the variable display result is a miss, the game status is normal, and the number of variable display target reserved memories is three, the miss variation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 11-8 (B) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined by comparing the miss variation pattern determination table B with the value of random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is a non-reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-2 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined variation pattern type is a normal reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach A, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 173 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-5. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach B, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-7; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-8; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-9.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-10; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-11; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-12. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strongest super reach, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-13; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-14; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-15.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is time-saving state A or a probability variable state, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in Figure 11-9 (A) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C with the value of random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined fluctuation pattern type is non-reach, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA1-3 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is normal reach, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-1 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach A, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-16 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach B, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-17 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach C, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-18 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach D, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-19 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is time-saving state B, the miss variation pattern determination table D shown in Figure 11-9 (B) is selected, and the value of the random number value MR4 is compared with the miss variation pattern determination table D to determine the variation pattern. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is non-reach, and the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-4.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game status is normal, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 11-10 (A) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A with the value of random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined fluctuation pattern type is a normal reach, and the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-1.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach A, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-2; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-3; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-4. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach B, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-5; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-6; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-7.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strong super reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-8; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-9; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-10. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is low base strongest super reach, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-11; if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-12; and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-13.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is time-saving state A or a probability variable state, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 11-10 (B) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B with the value of random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined fluctuation pattern type is a normal reach, and the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-1.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach A, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-14 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach B, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-15 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach C, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-16 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach D, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-17 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is time-saving state B, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in Figure 11-10 (C) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C with the value of random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined fluctuation pattern type is non-reach, and the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-18.

[Super Reach Performance Expectations]
The expected probability of a jackpot when the variation pattern type and variation pattern are determined as described above is as shown in Figures 11-11 (A) to (C). The expected probability of a jackpot for a Super Reach effect is the percentage of a jackpot when the corresponding Super Reach effect is executed, and is a value calculated by dividing the percentage of a jackpot when the corresponding Super Reach effect is executed by the sum of the percentage of a jackpot when the corresponding Super Reach effect is executed and the percentage of a miss when the corresponding Super Reach effect is executed.

As shown in Figure 11-11 (A), of the Super Reach reach effects that are executed when the game is in the normal state, the reach effects of low base weak Super Reach A and low base weak Super Reach B do not directly lead to a jackpot, so the expected jackpot probability is 0% for each. However, the reach effects of low base weak Super Reach A and low base weak Super Reach B can develop into reach effects of other Super Reaches (low base strong Super Reach A-C, low base strongest Reach), and the expected probability of development from low base weak Super Reach A to reach effects of other Super Reaches is approximately 44%, and the expected probability of development from low base weak Super Reach B to reach effects of other Super Reaches is approximately 68%. The expected rate of development of a Super Reach effect is the rate at which the corresponding Super Reach effect will develop into another Super Reach effect when executed, and is a value calculated by dividing the rate at which the corresponding Super Reach effect will develop into another Super Reach effect by the sum of the rate at which the corresponding Super Reach effect will develop into another Super Reach effect and the rate at which the corresponding Super Reach effect will be executed and not develop into another Super Reach effect.

In addition, among the Super Reach reach effects that are executed when the game state is normal, the expected jackpot rate for the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach A is approximately 20%, the expected jackpot rate for the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach B is approximately 25%, the expected jackpot rate for the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach C is approximately 35%, and the expected jackpot rate for the reach effect of low base strongest Super Reach is approximately 55%. Furthermore, the expected jackpot probability for the reach effects of low base strong Super Reach A to C and low base strongest Super Reach differs depending on whether it develops from low base weak Super Reach A, develops from low base weak Super Reach B, or is executed directly without going through low base weak Super Reach A or B. The expected jackpot probability for the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach A developed from low base weak Super Reach A is approximately 19%, the expected jackpot probability for the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach A developed from low base weak Super Reach B is approximately 20%, the expected jackpot probability for the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach A executed directly without going through B is approximately 21%, the expected jackpot probability for the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach B developed from low base weak Super Reach A is approximately 24%, and the expected jackpot probability for the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach B developed from low base weak Super Reach B is approximately 20%. The expected jackpot rate for a reach effect is approximately 25%, the expected jackpot rate for a reach effect of low base strong Super Reach B executed directly without going through B is approximately 27%, the expected jackpot rate for a reach effect of low base strong Super Reach C developed from low base weak Super Reach A is approximately 33%, the expected jackpot rate for a reach effect of low base strong Super Reach C developed from low base weak Super Reach B is approximately 35%, the expected jackpot rate for a reach effect of low base strong Super Reach C executed directly without going through B is approximately 37%, the expected jackpot rate for a reach effect of low base strongest Super Reach developed from low base weak Super Reach A is approximately 53%, the expected jackpot rate for a reach effect of low base strongest Super Reach developed from low base weak Super Reach B is approximately 55%, and the expected jackpot rate for a reach effect of low base strongest Super Reach executed directly without going through B is approximately 57%.

As shown in Figure 11-11 (B), when the game state is time-saving state A, the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base super reach A is approximately 14%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base super reach B is approximately 16%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base super reach C is approximately 27%, and the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base super reach D is approximately 70%.

As shown in Figure 11-11 (C), when the game state is in a probability variable state, the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base super reach A is approximately 40%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base super reach B is approximately 45%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base super reach C is approximately 60%, and the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base super reach D is approximately 90%.

As described below, in Super Reach effects, an expectation suggestion display can be displayed that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot for the corresponding Super Reach effect using the number of stars. As shown in Figure 11-11 (A), among the Super Reach effects executed when the game state is normal, no expectation suggestion display is displayed in the reach effects of low base weak Super Reach A and B, but the expectation suggestion display in the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach A displays 3 stars, the expectation suggestion display in the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach B displays 3.5 stars, the expectation suggestion display in the reach effect of low base strong Super Reach C displays 4 stars, and the expectation suggestion display in the reach effect of low base strongest Super Reach displays 4.5 stars. As shown in Figures 11-11 (B) and (C), when the game state is in time-saving state A or probability variable state, the expectation suggestion display for the reach presentation of high base super reach A displays 3 stars, the expectation suggestion display for the reach presentation of high base super reach B displays 3.5 stars, the expectation suggestion display for the reach presentation of high base super reach C displays 4 stars, and the expectation suggestion display for the reach presentation of high base super reach D displays 4.5 stars.

In the Super Reach reach effect that is executed when the game state is normal and in the Super Reach reach effect that is executed when the game state is in a special state, the same number of stars may be displayed in the expectation indication display, but as shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), even if the number of stars displayed in the expectation indication display is the same, the suggested jackpot expectation is not the same. In cases where the number of stars displayed in the expectation indication display is the same, the Super Reach reach effect that is executed when the game state is in a special state suggests a higher jackpot expectation than the Super Reach reach effect that is executed when the game state is normal.

Furthermore, whether it is a Super Reach reach effect that is executed when the game state is normal, or a Super Reach reach effect that is executed when the game state is in a special state, the suggested probability of a jackpot increases for every 0.5 increase in the number of stars displayed in the expectation suggestion display, and as shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), in the expectation suggestion display of a Super Reach reach effect in either game state, the greater the increase in the suggested probability of a jackpot. Furthermore, as shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), the increase in jackpot expectation when the number of stars displayed in the expectation suggestion display increases from 3 to 3.5 is the same for both the Super Reach reach presentation executed when the game state is normal and the Super Reach reach presentation executed when the game state is in a special probability state; however, the increase in jackpot expectation when the number of stars displayed in the expectation suggestion display increases from 3.5 to 4, or from 4 to 4.5, is greater for the Super Reach reach presentation executed when the game state is in a special probability state than for the Super Reach reach presentation executed when the game state is normal.

[Performance control command]
FIG. 11-13(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command in this embodiment. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1," and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0." Note that the command format shown in FIG. 11-13(A) is only an example, and other command formats may also be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in Figure 11-13 (A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern (variation time) of decorative symbols and the like that are variably displayed in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions given by the performance control command. Note that the variation pattern specification command sets different EXT data depending on the specified variation pattern, etc.

Command 8C00H is a variable display result specification command, and is a presentation control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. For example, as shown in Figure 11-13 (B), the variable display result specification command sets different EXT data depending on the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot," and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of several types of jackpot type will be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot."

For example, as shown in Figure 11-13 (B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command in which the variable display result is "miss." Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A." Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B." Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C."

Command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that specifies the stopping (confirmation) of the variable display of decorative patterns in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5.

Command 9000H is an initialization specification (power-on specification) command for displaying the initial screen when power is turned on in the image display device 5. Command 9200H is a power outage recovery specification command for displaying a power outage recovery screen on the image display device 5 indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered from a power outage (power outage) state.

Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is not performed (low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed (high base state, time-saving state).

Command A0XXH is a jackpot start command (also known as a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a jackpot gaming state. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a jackpot end command that specifies the display of a presentation image at the end of a jackpot gaming state.

For the jackpot start command and jackpot end command, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result, for example by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. Alternatively, for the jackpot start command and jackpot end command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. For the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, different EXT data is set depending on the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state (for example, "1" to "10").

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies that the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been met, based on the occurrence of a start prize (first start prize) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the first start port formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been met, based on the occurrence of a start prize (second start prize) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first special reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special memory numbers can be identifiably displayed in the first reserved memory display area 132SG005D, etc. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second special reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special memory numbers can be identifiably displayed in the second reserved memory display area 132SG005U, etc. The first reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a first start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the first start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a second start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the second start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port. Additionally, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first or second start condition is met (when the pending memory number decreases).

Instead of the first pending memory count notification command or the second pending memory count notification command, a total pending memory count notification command may be sent to notify the total number of pending memories. In other words, the total pending memory count notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that specifies the winning result at the time of the initial winning. Command C6XXH is a variable category designation command that specifies the variable category of the winning result at the time of the initial winning.

Command D100H is a jackpot start switch passing notification command that notifies the player that the game ball has passed through the jackpot start switch 131SG024 when the variable display result is a jackpot, i.e., notifies the start of the jackpot game. Command D200H is a V win notification command that notifies the player that the game ball has passed through the V switch 131SG023B1 during the jackpot game state, i.e., notifies the player that the game state will be controlled to a special state after the jackpot game ends.

Command E1XXH is a remaining time-saving count notification command that notifies the number of remaining time-saving control attempts in the time-saving state (time-saving state A) excluding rescue time-saving. Command E2XXH is a remaining chance-change count notification command that notifies the number of remaining chance-change control attempts in the chance-change state.

Command F100H is a right-hit LED on notification command that notifies the right-hit LED 131SG031 to light up. Command F101H is a right-hit LED off notification command that notifies the right-hit LED 131SG031 to light up.

Command 91XXH is a command to specify the number of times rescue time reduction is performed upon power recovery, and is a performance control command that converts the value of the rescue time reduction counter into hexadecimal and specifies it when power is restored. For example, as shown in Figure 11-13 (C), the command to specify the number of times rescue time reduction is performed upon power recovery sets different EXT data depending on each digit (first, second, third, fourth digit) of the value (four-digit value) of the rescue time reduction counter when power is restored.

For example, as shown in Figure 11-13 (C), commands 9100H to 910FH are recovery time reduction command 1, which specify the first digit of the value of the recovery time reduction. Commands 9110H to 911FH are recovery time reduction command 2, which specify the second digit of the value of the recovery time reduction. Commands 9130H to 913FH are recovery time reduction command 3, which specify the third digit of the value of the recovery time reduction. Commands 9140H to 914FH are recovery time reduction command 4, which specify the fourth digit of the value of the recovery time reduction.

Command 94XXH is a rescue time reduction count specification command, and is a presentation control command that specifies the remaining number of variable displays (126 or fewer) until rescue time reduction occurs. For example, as shown in Figure 11-13 (D), the rescue time reduction count specification command sets different EXT data depending on the remaining number of variable displays (126 or fewer) until rescue time reduction occurs.

For example, as shown in Figure 11-13 (D), command 9400H is a rescue time reduction count A specification command that specifies that the rescue time reduction has been reached. Command 9401H is a rescue time reduction count B specification command that specifies that 1 to 125 times remain until the rescue time reduction is reached. Command 947EH is a rescue time reduction count C specification command that specifies that 126 times remain until the rescue time reduction is reached. Command 947FH is a rescue time reduction count D specification command that specifies that 127 or more times remain until the rescue time reduction is reached.

Command 96XXH is a rescue time reduction count 2 specification command, and is a presentation control command that specifies the remaining number of variable displays (in units of 100) until the rescue time reduction occurs. With the rescue time reduction count 2 specification command, for example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of variable displays (in units of 100) until the rescue time reduction occurs is set in the EXT data of the rescue time reduction count 2 specification command. For example, if the remaining number of variable displays until the rescue time reduction occurs is 100, command 9601H is sent as the rescue time reduction count 2 specification command, and if the remaining number of variable displays is 700, command 9607H is sent as the rescue time reduction count 1 specification command. Command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration display specification command that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

[Game control data storage area]
The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 11-2 may be a backup RAM, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. In other words, even if power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is interrupted, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply capacitor discharges and the backup power supply is no longer able to supply power). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game status, i.e., the control status of the game control means (e.g., special game process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid balls should be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control status of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control status to its pre-power outage state based on that data when power is restored after a power outage or other event. Furthermore, the data corresponding to the control status and the data indicating the number of unpaid balls are defined as data indicating the game progress status.

This RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 131SG150, as shown in FIG. 11-14, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area 131SG150 shown in FIG. 11-14 includes a first special symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151A, a second special symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151B, a regular symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 131SG152, a game control timer setting unit 131SG153, a game control counter setting unit 131SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 131SG155.

The first special symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151A stores reserved data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) that has not yet started, but in which a game ball has passed (entered) the first start entry port formed by the winning ball device 6A, resulting in a start entry (first start entry). As an example, the first special symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151A associates reserved numbers with the order of entry into the first start entry port (the order of detection of game balls), and stores, as reserved data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern type, and the random number value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the establishment of the first start condition upon the game ball's passage (entry), until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "4"). The upper limit of reserved data (reserved memory) that can be stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit 131SG151B is always 4, regardless of the game status. In this way, the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 131SG151A indicates that the execution of a special symbol game using the first special symbol is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special symbol display result) in this special symbol game.

The second special symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151B stores reserved data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) that has not yet started but in which a game ball has passed (entered) the second start entry port formed by the variable prize ball device 6B, resulting in a start entry (second start entry). As an example, the second special symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151B associates reserved numbers with the order of entry into the second start entry port (the order of detection of game balls), and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern, extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the establishment of the second start condition upon the game ball's passage (entry), until the number of reserved data reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "4"). The upper limit of reserved data (reserved memory) that can be stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit 131SG151B is always four, regardless of the game status. In this way, the reserved data stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit 131SG151B indicates that the execution of a special symbol game using the second special symbol is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special symbol display result) in this special symbol game.

In other words, in this embodiment, a maximum of four reserved memories can be stored as first special chart reserved memories (reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151A), and a maximum of four reserved memories can be stored as second special chart reserved memories (reserved memories that can be stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151B).

In addition, the hold information (first hold information) based on the fulfillment of the first start condition when the gaming ball passes through (enters) the first start entry port, and the hold information (second hold information) based on the fulfillment of the second start entry when the gaming ball passes through (enters) the second start entry port, may be stored in a common hold memory unit in association with the hold number. In this case, start entry port data indicating whether the gaming ball passed through (enters) the first or second start entry port may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number.

When variable display is being executed, if a second special symbol reserved memory exists during normal special symbol processing (see FIG. 6), the CPU 103 first reads random number values MR1 to MR4 from the second special symbol reserved memory unit 131SG151B and then shifts the contents of the second special symbol reserved memory unit 131SG151B. In other words, if random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as reserved memory for reserve number 1 in the second special symbol reserved memory unit 131SG151B, the CPU 103 reads out the values of random number values MR1 to MR4 stored as reserved memory for reserve number 1, erases the reserved memory for reserve number 1, and re-stores the reserved memory stored as reserved memory for reserve number 2 as reserved memory for reserve number 1, the reserved memory stored as reserved memory for reserve number 3 as reserved memory for reserve number 2, and the reserved memory stored as reserved memory for reserve number 4 as reserved memory for reserve number 3.

Furthermore, if no reserved memory is stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151B, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a first special chart reserved memory exists. If a first special chart reserved memory exists, the CPU 103 reads out the random number values MR1 to MR4 from the first special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151A and then shifts the memory contents of the first special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151A. In other words, if the random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as the reserved memory for reserve number 1 in the first special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151A, the CPU 103 reads out the values of the random number values MR1 to MR4 stored as the reserved memory for reserve number 1, erases the reserved memory for reserve number 1, and re-stores the reserved memory stored as the reserved memory for reserve number 2 as the reserved memory for reserve number 1, the reserved memory stored as the reserved memory for reserve number 3 as the reserved memory for reserve number 2, and the reserved memory stored as the reserved memory for reserve number 4 as the reserved memory for reserve number 3.

The CPU 103 then determines the variable display result based on the random number value MR1 read from the first special symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151A or the second special symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151B (and also determines the type of jackpot based on the random number value MR2 if the variable display result is a jackpot), and then in the variation pattern determination process (see Figure 6), determines the variation pattern type using a variation pattern type determination table that differs depending on the game state, variable display result, and the number of reserved memories of special symbols that will execute the variable display, and then determines the variation pattern using a variation pattern determination table that differs depending on the determined variation pattern type, game state, number of reserved memories, etc.

In other words, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 is able to determine the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process based on the number of reserved memories subtracted by 1 from the number of reserved memories immediately before the variable display.

The normal symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151C stores reserve information for normal symbol games in which a gaming ball has been detected by the gate switch 21 but which have not yet been started by the normal symbol display device 20. For example, the normal symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151C associates the gaming balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the gaming ball as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 131SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 131SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 131SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 131SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 131SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for calculating count values used to control the progress of play in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 131SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 131SG154 may be provided with a random counter that counts some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them using software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 131SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, such as numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR6, as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly in accordance with the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software that updates the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or software that updates the random count value by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

[Performance control data storage area]
The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 131SG190, for example, as shown in Fig. 11-15(A), as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 131SG190 shown in Fig. 11-15(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 131SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 131SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 131SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 131SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 131SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated in response to performance operation states, such as the display state of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, and performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 131SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 131SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 131SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 131SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 131SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 131SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 131SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 131SG194A shown in Figure 11-15 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 131SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 131SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum total number of reserved memories for the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4"). In addition, the start winning time receiving command buffer 131SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum total number of reserved memories for the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4"). When a start win occurs at the first start win slot or the second start win slot, a set of four commands - a start win slot designation command (first start win slot designation command or second start win slot designation command), a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a reserved memory count notification command (first reserved memory count notification command or second reserved memory count notification command) - is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage areas corresponding to the first and second special symbol reserved memories in the start win reception command buffer 131SG194A correspond to the reserved memory counts, and storage areas (entries) are reserved for storing these start win slot designation commands, pattern designation commands, variable category designation commands, reserved memory count notification commands, and reserved display flags separately for the first and second special symbol reserved memories.

When the start conditions are met and the variable display of the top-level reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, the contents (data) of the reserved memory for which the start conditions are met are copied to the active display buffer 131SG194B in Figure 11-15 (C), and the contents of the copied reserved memory are deleted from the start winning time received command buffer 131SG194A. The contents of the storage areas lower than the deleted reserved memory are then shifted one by one to the higher storage areas.

As mentioned above, when the variable display of the reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") begins, the contents (data) of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met are copied into the active display buffer 131SG194B. Therefore, as shown in Figure 11-15 (C), a storage area similar to that of the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A is provided. In other words, an area for storing the start winning specification command, an area for storing the pattern specification command, an area for storing the variable category command, an area for storing the reserved memory count notification command, and an area for storing the reserved display flag is provided.

In this embodiment, if a start win occurs when variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, the start win designation command, pattern designation command, variable category command, and reserved memory count notification command based on the start win are stored in the active display buffer 131SG194B without passing through the start win reception command buffer 131SG194A. The reserved display flag is set when the performance control CPU 120 executes the advance notice setting process (S161) described below.

The contents of the active display buffer 131SG194B are cleared (deleted) during the special symbol hit waiting process that is executed when variable display ends.

The pending display flag is a flag that indicates the display mode of the pending display or the active display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed. Details will be provided later, but in this embodiment, the display mode of these pending displays and active displays (the value of the pending display flag) can indicate the probability of being controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

[Starting winning determination process]
11-16 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. 6. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the first starting gate switch 22A, which corresponds to the first starting gate formed by the winning ball device 6A, is on based on a detection signal from the first starting gate switch 22A (131SGS101). If the first starting gate switch 22A is on (131SGS101; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the first special symbol reserved memory count, which is the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "4") (131SGS102). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved first symbol memories by, for example, reading the first reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 131SG154. When the number of reserved memories of the first special chart in 131SGS102 is not the upper limit value (131SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 is set to "1" (131SGS103).

When the first start opening switch 22A in 131SGS101 is off (131SGS101; N) or when the number of reserved first special symbols in 131SGS102 has reached the upper limit (131SGS102; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second start opening switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is on (131SGS104) based on a detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B. If the second start opening switch 22B is on (131SGS104; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second special symbol reserved number, which is the number of reserved symbols for the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., the upper limit of "4") (131SGS105). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved second special symbols by, for example, reading the second reserved symbol count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved symbol count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 131SG154. When the second reserved symbol count is not the upper limit value in 131SGS105 (131SGS105; N), for example, the value stored in the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 is set to "2" (131SGS106).

After executing either process 131SGS103 or 131SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the value stored in the start port buffer, is updated by adding 1 (131SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1," the first reserved symbol count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2," the second reserved symbol count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is met. Furthermore, the second reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is met. At this time, the total reserved symbol count is also updated to increase by 1 (131SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 131SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the processing of 131SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, the random number value MR3 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 131SG154 (131SGS109). The numerical data indicating each of the extracted random numbers and the start port buffer value are stored by being set as reserve information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special symbol reserve memory unit (131SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or a "small hit," and further to determine the type of big hit or small hit when the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." The random number value MR3 for determining the type of variation pattern and the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern are used to determine the variation pattern, including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 131SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display results of the special symbol or decorative symbol and the variable display mode, including the variable display time.

Following the processing of 131SGS110, a setting for sending a start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is made (131SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1," the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, thereby setting up to send a first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2," the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, thereby setting up to send a second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process has finished.

Following the processing of 131SGS111, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number determination process (131SGS112). Then, the CPU 103 performs settings for sending a pending memory count notification command to the performance control board 12, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory count notification command table in ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (131SGS113). The pending memory count notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control process of S27 shown in Figure 4 after the special symbol process process has ended.

After executing the processing of 131SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (131SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (Y in 131SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (131SGS115), and then processing of 2390SGS104 proceeds. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 131SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (131SGS116), and then the start winning processing ends. This ensures that processing based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect valid game ball start winnings.

[Random value determination process when winning]
FIG. 11-17(A) is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed by the 131SGS112 of FIG. 11-17 as a random number value determination process at the time of winning. In this embodiment, when the variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol is initiated, the normal special symbol process (FIG. 6) determines whether or not to control the special symbol display result (the variable display result of the special symbol) as a "jackpot" and to set the game state to a jackpot. Furthermore, the variable pattern setting process (FIG. 6) determines a variable pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. Separately from these determinations, when a game ball is detected in the starting winning slot (first starting winning slot or second starting winning slot), the CPU 103 executes the random number value determination process at S112 at the time of winning to determine whether or not a jackpot symbol is to be derived and displayed as the special symbol display result. As a result, before the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns based on the detection of the game ball entering the starting winning port begins, that is, before it is determined whether or not a jackpot will be reached at the start of the variable display, it is determined that the special pattern display result will be a "jackpot," and based on this determination result, the presentation control CPU 120, etc., will execute advance warnings such as panel display presentations and hold warning presentations, as will be described later.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in Figure 11-17, the CPU 103 first identifies the game status (step 131SGS121) and selects the display result determination table shown in Figure 11-3 (B) (step 131SGS122). Then, in step 131SGS123a, the CPU 103 compares the random number value MR1 extracted in step 131SGS109 with the display result determination table, and determines whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range.

If the random number value MR1 is outside the range for determining a jackpot, i.e., if the variable display result is a miss, a symbol designation command corresponding to the miss is set to be sent (step 131SGS126a). Then, it is determined whether the game state is normal (step 131SGS126b). If the game state is normal, the miss variable pattern type determination table A shown in Figure 11-7 (A) is selected, and the process proceeds to step 131SGS131 (step 131SGS126c).

If the gaming state is not the normal state, it is further determined whether the gaming state is in time-saving state B (step 131SGS126d). If the gaming state is not time-saving state B, that is, if the gaming state is time-saving state A or a special state, the loss fluctuation pattern type determination table B shown in Figure 11-7 (B) is selected and the process proceeds to step 131SGS131 (step 131SGS126e). If the gaming state is time-saving state B, the loss fluctuation pattern type determination table C shown in Figure 11-7 (C) is selected and the process proceeds to step 131SGS131 (step 131SGS126f).

Also, in step 131SGS123a, if the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination value range, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a symbol designation command corresponding to a jackpot (step 131SGS129). Then, it determines whether the game state is normal (step 131SGS130a). If the game state is normal, it selects jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table A shown in FIG. 11-7(D). If the game state is time-saving state A or high probability state, it selects jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table B shown in FIG. 11-7(E). If the game state is time-saving state B, it selects jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table C shown in FIG. 11-7(F), and proceeds to step 131SGS131 (steps 131SGS130b, 131SGS130d, and 131SGS130e).

In step 131SGS131, the CPU 103 compares the selected fluctuation pattern type determination table with the random number value MR3 extracted in step 131SGS109 and determines the fluctuation category from non-reach, super reach, or other (normal reach). For example, if the random number value MR3 is a fluctuation pattern type of non-reach, the fluctuation category is determined to be non-reach; if the random number value MR3 is a fluctuation pattern type of normal reach, the fluctuation category is determined to be other (normal reach); and if the random number value MR3 is any of low base weak super reach A/B, low base strong super reach A, low base strong super reach B, low base strong super reach C, low base strongest super reach, high base super reach A, high base super reach B, high base super reach C, or high base super reach D, the fluctuation category is determined to be super reach. Then, the system sets up the transmission of a variable category designation command (one of those shown in Figure 11-17 (B)) according to the determination result, and ends the winning random number determination process (step 131SGS132).

The commands set for transmission are sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in Figure 5.

[Game control main processing]
11-18 is a flowchart showing the game control main process in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the processes in steps S1 to S7, S8 to S9, and S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, when a performance control command instructing restoration from a power outage is sent in step S7, the CPU 103 checks the value of the rescue time reduction counter, which counts the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction occurs, converts the current value of the rescue time reduction counter into a hexadecimal number, sets the value, and transmits a rescue time reduction count designation command upon restoration to the performance control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0013).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the current value of the rescue time reduction counter and controls the transmission of a rescue time reduction count designation command to the presentation control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0014). For example, if the current value of the rescue time reduction counter is between 1 and 125, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 9401H as the rescue time reduction count designation command. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the RAM clear process is not performed when the gaming machine is turned on and the recovery process is executed, a rescue time reduction count designation command is transmitted, and the remaining number of variable display times until the current rescue time reduction is notified.

In this embodiment, when power is restored after a power outage, a command specifying the number of times to shorten the recovery time and a command specifying the number of times to shorten the recovery time are sent separately from the command at the time of restoration, but this is not limited to this configuration. For example, the EXT data of the command at the time of restoration (e.g., a power-on command) sent in step S7 may be configured to be set to a value corresponding to the number of times remaining until the time shortening is reached.

In addition, if a RAM clear is requested in step S3, if there is no backup data in step S4, or if an abnormality is detected in the backup RAM in step S5, the initialization process in step S8 executes a clearing process on the area including the area for the rescue time reduction counter.

Furthermore, when a presentation control command instructing initialization is sent in step S9, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time reduction counter to "900" (step 131SGS0015). Therefore, in this embodiment, if a RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "900." That is, in this embodiment, if a jackpot does not occur even after 900 variable displays have been executed after the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, rescue time reduction will occur and the machine will be controlled to time reduction state B. Note that in this embodiment, since the presentation control command instructing initialization sent in step S9 corresponds to the initial value ("900") set in the rescue time reduction counter, the CPU 103 can also determine the initial value to set in the rescue time reduction counter based on the transmission of the presentation control command instructing initialization.

Next, the CPU 103 checks the value of the rescue time reduction counter (which is "900" in this embodiment), converts the current value of the rescue time reduction counter into a hexadecimal number, sets the value, and transmits a command to specify the number of rescue time reductions during recovery to the performance control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0016).

In this way, the rescue time reduction counter is set before the timer interrupt process, which is the game progress process, is executed. This means that the variable display will not start before the rescue time reduction counter is set, and the number of times until the rescue time reduction can be managed reliably.

In this embodiment, the rescue time reduction counter is initially set to "900" when the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, but this is not a limitation; the rescue time reduction counter may be configured not to be initially reset when the RAM clear process is executed. In this configuration, gameplay can be started from the value of the rescue time reduction counter from the previous day, which reduces the investment required to trigger the rescue time reduction, and the configuration can be designed to avoid any disadvantage to the player.

Furthermore, when configured as described above, the system may be configured so that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is not performed only when the clear switch is detected to be on (step S3; Yes) and the RAM clear process is performed, and so that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is performed when a RAM abnormality is detected (steps S4, S5; No) and the RAM clear process is performed.

[Time-saving flag, probability flag]
In this embodiment, when any of the conditions for controlling to the time-saving state is satisfied, a time-saving flag can be set. The time-saving flag includes a time-saving flag A and a time-saving flag B. In the following description, erasing (or clearing) a flag may be referred to as resetting the flag.

Time-saving flag A is set when control is in time-saving state A via jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C. This time-saving flag A is set when the jackpot game state of jackpot A ends, and is cleared when time-saving state A ends (when a jackpot occurs during time-saving state A, or when 110 times of time-saving control end and control returns to normal state).

Time-saving flag B is set when the game is in time-saving state B, which is controlled via rescue time-saving. This time-saving flag B is set when 900 variable displays that do not result in a jackpot pattern are executed after RAM is cleared, or when 900 variable displays that do not result in a jackpot pattern are executed in a low-probability state after the jackpot game state ends, and is cleared when time-saving state B ends (when a jackpot occurs during time-saving state B, when 1100 time-saving controls end and the game is controlled to the normal state, etc.).

The probability variable flag is set when the game is controlled to the probability variable state. In this embodiment, if a V win occurs in the first round of a jackpot game, the game state is controlled to the probability variable state when the jackpot game ends, and the probability variable flag is set accordingly. This probability variable flag is cleared when the probability variable state ends (when a jackpot occurs during the probability variable state, when the 110th probability variable control is executed and the game is controlled to the normal state, etc.). For example, the probability variable flag is cleared when a YES determination is made in step 131SGS69A of Figure 11-20 (described below), indicating that this is the 110th time since the variable display has been controlled to the probability variable state.

[Special pattern normal processing]
11-19 and 11-20 are flowcharts showing the normal special symbol processing (step S110) in the special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total reserved memory count (step 131SGS51). Specifically, it checks the count value of the total reserved memory count counter, which counts the total number of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count. If the total reserved memory count is not zero, the CPU 103 checks whether the second reserved memory count is zero (step 131SGS52). Specifically, it checks whether the value of the second reserved memory count counter, which counts the second reserved memory count, is zero. If the second reserved memory count is not zero, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) to data indicating "second" (step 131SGS53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (i.e., if only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special pattern pointer (step 131SGS54).

In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps SGS52 to S54 in step 131, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied with priority over the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to the embodiment shown in the accompanying drawings. For example, the system may be configured to execute variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol in the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot.

Next, CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in RAM 102 corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores them in the random number buffer area of RAM 102 (step 131SGS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st," CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1, and stores them in the random number buffer area of RAM 102. Furthermore, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd," CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1, and stores them in the random number buffer area of RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 131SGS56). Specifically, if the special symbol pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. Furthermore, if the special symbol pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1," the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer of RAM 102 corresponding to first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the storage area corresponding to first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2," the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer of RAM 102 corresponding to second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the storage area corresponding to second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) are extracted will always match the order of the first pending memory number (or second pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total number of pending memories by 1. That is, it decrements the count value of the total number of pending memories counter by 1 (step 131SGS57). The CPU 103 also stores the value of the total number of pending memories counter before the count value was decremented by 1 in a specified area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step S131SGS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step S131SGS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination extracted in the start-up winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value with the random number for hit determination and determines that a jackpot has occurred if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes the jackpot determination process. In this case, if the probability variable flag indicating a probability variable state is not set (if the state is low probability), the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination using the low-probability jackpot determination value. Furthermore, if the probability variable flag is set (if the state is high probability), the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination using the high-probability jackpot determination value. If the value of the random number for determining a win matches one of the jackpot determination values, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol has been selected as a jackpot.

If it is determined that a jackpot has occurred (step 131SGS63; Yes), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step 131SGS64). Then, the CPU 103 determines the type of jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C) corresponding to the value that matches the value of the type-determining random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 131SGS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the type-determining random number extracted in the start-up winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and determines the type of jackpot. Then, the process proceeds to step 131SGS70. On the other hand, if it is not determined that a jackpot has occurred (step 131SGS63; No), the process proceeds to step 131SGS66.

In this embodiment, by performing normal special symbol processing, a rescue time-saving condition (reducing the value of the rescue time-saving counter to "0") can occur to control to rescue time-saving regardless of the variable display result (jackpot, miss). In this embodiment, time-saving state A is entered based on the occurrence of jackpot A, and time-saving state B is entered based on the fact that no next jackpot occurs even after a predetermined number of variable displays (900 in this embodiment) have been completed. However, it is anticipated that the variable display result of a variable display for which the rescue time-saving condition is met will be a jackpot. Therefore, when the variable display result of a variable display for which the rescue time-saving condition is met is a jackpot, control is configured to enter time-saving state A based on the jackpot occurring.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time-saving count counter, which counts the number of times the variable display is executed during the time-saving state, is 0 (step 131SGS66). If the value of the time-saving count counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving count counter (step 131SGS67) and checks whether the value of the time-saving count counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 131SGS68). If the value of the time-saving count counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time-saving end flag indicating that the time-saving state will end when the variable display ends (step 131SGS69).

In this embodiment, steps 131SGS66 to 131SGSS69 are executed to decrement the time-saving count counter before counting the number of variable displays up to the rescue time-saving feature from step 131SGS71 onward, but this processing configuration is not limited to this. For example, the time-saving count counter may be decremented after counting the number of variable displays up to the rescue time-saving feature from step 131SGS71 onward. In this case, for example, in the case of a variable display that results in a rescue time-saving feature, if the time-saving count counter is set to "110" (see step 131SGS172) and then the decrement process is executed, the value of the time-saving count counter will be decremented by one. Therefore, in the case of a variable display that results in a rescue time-saving feature, the time-saving count counter may be incremented by one again after the decrement process. Alternatively, the time-saving count counter may be set to "111" in advance, which is one more than the value of the time-saving count counter.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the probability variable flag is set (step 131SGS69A). If the probability variable flag is set (i.e., if the game is in a probability variable state), the process proceeds to step 131SGS84. In this embodiment, by executing the processing of step 131SGS69A, if the game is in a probability variable state, the processing of steps 131SGS70 and subsequent steps (particularly the processing of step 131SGSS71) is not performed. Therefore, even if a variable display is executed when the game state is in a probability variable state (in this embodiment, during Extreme Battle Rush), the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not decremented. If the probability variable flag is not set (i.e., if the game is not in a probability variable state), the process proceeds to step 131SGSS70.

In this embodiment, when the probability variable flag is set, the process proceeds to step 131SGSS84 without executing the processing from step 131SGSS70 onwards. However, this is not limited to this configuration. When the probability variable flag is set, the process proceeds to step 131SGSS70 but the processing of step 131SGSS71 may not be executed. In other words, the value of the rescue time reduction counter may not be updated, but a rescue time reduction count designation command or rescue time reduction count 2 designation command corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter that has not been updated may be sent.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 131SGS70; Yes). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 131SGS70; Yes), the process proceeds to step 131SGS84. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 at this point, this means that the game has already been controlled to the time reduction state (time reduction state B) via the rescue time reduction (the game is controlled to time reduction state B, or the game is controlled to the normal state after 1,100 fluctuations in time reduction state B), and a jackpot has not yet occurred, which would have triggered the setting of the rescue time reduction counter to 900. Furthermore, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0 (step 131SGS70; No), the value of the rescue time reduction counter is decremented by 1 (step 131SGS71). Furthermore, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of step 131SGS71, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or greater (step 131SGS72). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (step 131SGS72; No), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data and performs control to send a rescue time reduction number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 131SGS73). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1, the CPU 103 performs control to send command 9401H as the rescue time reduction number designation command. On the other hand, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 126, the CPU 103 performs control to send command 947EH as the rescue time reduction number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 131SGS74). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after the subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 131SGS84. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a rescue time reduction determination flag indicating that a rescue time reduction has occurred and that control will be made to time reduction state B at the end of the fluctuation (step 131SGS75). The CPU 103 then proceeds to step 131SGS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or greater (step 131SGS72; Yes), CPU 103 uniformly sets 7FH as the EXT data and controls the transmission of command 957FH to the performance control CPU 120 as a rescue time reduction count designation command (step 131SGS76). Next, CPU 103 checks whether the remaining variable display count until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100 (in this embodiment, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800) (step 131SGS77). Whether the remaining variable display count until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the rescue time reduction counter. If the remaining variable display count until the rescue time reduction is reached is in units of 100, CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data and performs control to send a rescue time reduction count 2 designation command to performance control CPU 120 (step 131SGS78). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 100, CPU 103 performs control to send command 9601H as a rescue time reduction count 2 designation command. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 800, CPU 103 performs control to send command 9608H as a rescue time reduction count 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 131SGS84.

In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) counts the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction and sends a rescue time reduction number designation command or a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, but this is not limited to this configuration. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction and execute the hype effects and countdown effects described below.

Also, for example, if the rescue time reduction counter is set (to "900") at the time of rescue time reduction so that rescue time reductions can occur continuously, the rescue time reduction count designation command or rescue time reduction count 2 designation command may be sent only the first time rescue time reduction occurs, and the rescue time reduction count designation command or rescue time reduction count 2 designation command may not be sent the second or subsequent time rescue time reduction occurs.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stopping symbol of the special symbol according to the result of the determination of the jackpot type (step 131SGS84). In this case, for example, if it determines that it will be a jackpot A, it determines the stopping symbol of the special symbol to be "2." If it determines that it will be a jackpot B, it determines the stopping symbol of the special symbol to be "3." If it determines that it will be a jackpot C, it determines the stopping symbol of the special symbol to be "7." If it determines that it will be a miss, it determines the stopping symbol of the special symbol to be "-." The CPU 103 also stores the determined stopping symbol of the special symbol in a stopping symbol memory area provided in RAM 102 (step 131SGS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (step S111) (step S131SGS86).

[Special symbol stop processing]
11-21 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the symbol determination period timer is running (step 131SGS131). If the symbol determination period timer is not running, the CPU 103 performs a derived display of the special symbol stop symbol (step 131SGS132). Then, it determines whether the jackpot flag is set (step 131SGS133).

If the jackpot flag is set, game status flags such as the time-saving A flag, time-saving B flag, and probability variable flag are cleared (step 131SGS134), the time-saving count counter is cleared (step 131SGS135), and a jackpot start command corresponding to the jackpot type is set for transmission, proceeding to step 131SGS147 (step 131SGS136). Note that the set jackpot start command is sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see Figure 5).

Furthermore, if the jackpot flag is not set in step 131SGS133, the CPU 103 determines whether the rescue time-saving determination flag is set (step 131SGS140). If the rescue time-saving determination flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 131SGS147. If the rescue time-saving determination flag is set, the rescue time-saving determination flag is cleared and the time-saving B flag, indicating time-saving state B, is set (steps 131SGS141 and 131SGS142). Furthermore, the time-saving count counter is set to 1100, which corresponds to time-saving state B (rescue time-saving), and a time-saving state B designation command is set for transmission (steps 131SGS143 and 131SGS144). The time-saving state B designation command that has been set for transmission is transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see FIG. 5).

In addition, the right-hit lamp 131SG132 starts to light up, and the transmission of the right-hit LED lighting notification command is set up (steps 131SGS145 and 131SGS146). The right-hit LED lighting notification command that has been set up for transmission is sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see Figure 5).

Then, the pattern determination period timer is set to a value corresponding to the pattern determination period of 0.5 seconds, and a pattern determination command is set to be sent, and the process proceeds to step 131SGS149 (step 131SGS147, step 131SGS148). The pattern determination command set to be sent is sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see Figure 5).

In step 131SGS149, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a game state designation command according to the game state, and ends the special symbol stop processing. The game state designation command that has been set for transmission is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control processing (see Figure 5).

If the symbol determination period timer is running in step 131SGS131, the CPU 103 decrements the symbol determination period timer by 1 (step 131SGS150) and determines whether the symbol determination period timer has timed out (step 131SGS151). If the symbol determination period timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 terminates the special symbol stop processing. If the symbol determination period timer has timed out, the CPU 103 determines whether the derived stopped symbol is a losing symbol (step 131SGS152). If the derived stopped symbol is a losing symbol, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing and terminates the special symbol stop processing (step 131SGS153). If the derived stopped symbol is a jackpot symbol, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-jackpot release processing and terminates the special symbol stop processing (step 131SGS154).

[state transition]
Next, the state transitions in this embodiment will be described. Figures 11-22 are state transition diagrams for explaining the state transitions in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 11-22, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), if a jackpot B occurs and the game ball passes through the high probability area (V switch 131SG023B1), the game is controlled to the high probability state, and if a jackpot A occurs, the game is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot (low probability/high base state)). Although not shown, even if a jackpot B occurs and the game ball does not pass through the high probability area (V switch 131SG023B1), the game is also controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot). Furthermore, even if the result is a miss, if the rescue time-saving mode is activated (if the number of variable displays reaches 900 without the next jackpot occurring after the RAM clear process or the end of the special probability mode, or if the number of variable displays reaches 790 without the next jackpot occurring after the end of 110 variable displays in time-saving mode A), the game will be controlled to time-saving mode B (a time-saving mode via rescue time-saving mode (low probability/high base mode)).

Also, as shown in Figure 11-22, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs in the probability variable state (high probability/high base state) and the gaming ball passes through the probability variable area, the game will be controlled back to the probability variable state. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the gaming ball does not pass through the probability variable area, the game will be controlled to time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot).

Also, as shown in Figure 11-22, in time-saving state A (low probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the gaming ball passes through the probability variable area, the state will be controlled to the probability variable state. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the gaming ball does not pass through the probability variable area, the state will be controlled back to time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot). Also, in time-saving state A, if 110 variable displays end without a jackpot occurring, the state will be controlled to the normal state.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-22, in time-saving state B (low probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the gaming ball passes through the probability variable area, the game will be controlled to the probability variable state. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the gaming ball does not pass through the probability variable area, the game will be controlled back to time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot). Also, in time-saving state B, if 1,100 variable displays end without a jackpot occurring, the game will be controlled to the normal state. Furthermore, even if a miss occurs, if the rescue time-saving state is entered (if the number of variable displays reaches 900 without the next jackpot occurring after the RAM clear process or the end of the probability variable state, or if the number of variable displays reaches 790 without the next jackpot occurring after the end of 110 variable displays in time-saving state A), the game will be controlled to time-saving state B (time-saving state via rescue time-saving).

In this embodiment, if a jackpot occurs during time-saving state B and the game ball does not enter the variable probability area, the game will automatically transition to time-saving state A, but this control method is not limited to this. For example, the current remaining number of time-saving times can be compared with the number of time-saving times (110 in this embodiment) that would occur if the game ball did not enter the variable probability area (V switch 131SG023B1), and if the current remaining number of time-saving times is greater, the game will continue in time-saving state B.

In this embodiment, although it is possible to execute a variable display of the first special symbol during the time-saving state or the probability variable state, this would be a disadvantageous gameplay for the player, so the state transitions are explained without assuming that the variable display of the first special symbol will be executed during the time-saving state or the probability variable state.

[Performance control process processing/preview notice]
As shown in Figures 11-23 and 11-24, in the advance notice setting process of this embodiment, the display mode of the active display and the reserved display is determined by setting the reserved display flag to either 0 or 2 at the timing when a start winning occurs (the timing when the start winning entry designation command, pattern designation command, variable category command, and reserved memory number notification command are newly stored as reserved memory in the start winning entry reception command buffer shown in Figure 11-15 (B)), and the display mode of these active display and reserved display can suggest the rate at which the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state.

For example, as shown in Figure 11-24, if the variable display result indicated by the pattern designation command is "miss" and the variable category indicated by the variable category command is "non-reach," it is determined with a 95% probability that the pre-reading preview will not be executed (the value of the hold display flag is set to "0"), it is determined with a 5% probability that the pre-reading preview will be executed using presentation pattern α (the value of the hold display flag is set to "1"), and it is determined with a 0% probability that the pre-reading preview will be executed using presentation pattern β (the value of the hold display flag is set to "2").

Also, if the variable display result indicated by the pattern designation command is "miss" and the variable category indicated by the variable category command is "other (normal reach)", it is determined with a 90% probability that the pre-reading preview will not be executed (the value of the pending display flag is set to "0"), it is determined with a 10% probability that the pre-reading preview will be executed in presentation pattern α (the value of the pending display flag is set to "1"), and it is determined with a 0% probability that the pre-reading preview will be executed in presentation pattern β (the value of the pending display flag is set to "2").

Furthermore, if the variable display result indicated by the pattern designation command is "miss" and the variable category indicated by the variable category command is "super reach," the predictive preview will not be executed (the value of the pending display flag will be set to "0") 70% of the time, the predictive preview will be executed in presentation pattern α (the value of the pending display flag will be set to "1") 20% of the time, and the predictive preview will be executed in presentation pattern β (the value of the pending display flag will be set to "2") 10% of the time.

Furthermore, if the variable display result indicated by the symbol designation command is "jackpot," it is determined that the pre-reading preview will not be executed (the value of the pending display flag is set to "0") with a probability of 5%, that the pre-reading preview will be executed using presentation pattern α (the value of the pending display flag is set to "1") with a probability of 30%, and that the pre-reading preview will be executed using presentation pattern β (the value of the pending display flag is set to "2") with a probability of 65%.

Furthermore, after the execution of the advance notice setting process, the following processes are executed: pending display/active display update process (131SGS162), remaining number of times rescue time reduction etc. has been reached display update process (step 131SGS163), and rescue time reduction arrival notification effect execution process (step 131SGS164). The pending display/active display update process executes processes such as starting to display the pending display or active display in a display mode corresponding to the value of the pending display flag, erasing the active display from the active display area 131SG005F at the end of the variable display, and hiding or starting to display the pending display or active display depending on the progress of the effect during the variable display. The remaining number of times rescue time reduction has been reached display update process executes processes such as updating the value of the remaining number of times rescue time reduction has been reached display 131SG005Z (see Figure 11-1) displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of each variable display, and starting to hide or display the remaining number of times rescue time reduction has been reached display 131SG005Z depending on the progress of the effect during the variable display. The rescue time-saving arrival notification display execution process executes processing to execute a rescue time-saving arrival notification display that notifies players that they have been controlled to time-saving state B, starting from the timing at which the variable display ends when the number of variable displays reaches 900.

[Variable display start setting process]
FIG. 11-25 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11. In this process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is set (step 131SGS601). If the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the various command data stored in the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A in association with buffer number "1-1" is copied to the active display buffer 131SG194B (step 131SGS602). The first special symbol reserved memory (various command data stored in association with buffer numbers "1-1" through "1-4") in the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A is shifted up one position at a time (step 131SGS603). At this time, the various command data stored in buffer number "1-1" is erased because there is no destination to shift it to.

Furthermore, in step 131SGS601, if the first variable display start command reception flag is not on, it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is set (step 131SGS604). If the second variable display start command reception flag is set, the various command data stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the start winning time reception command buffer 131SG194A is copied to the active display buffer 131SG194B (131SGS605). Furthermore, the second special symbol reserved memory (various command data stored in association with buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") in the start winning time reception command buffer 131SG194A is shifted up one position at a time (step 131SGS606). At this time, the various command data stored in buffer number "2-1" is erased because there is no destination to shift it to.

If the second special chart variable display start command reception flag is not on, the variable display start setting process ends.

After executing step 131SGS603 or step 131SGS6060, the performance control CPU 120 reads a variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 131SGS607). Furthermore, it determines the stopping pattern of the decorative symbols based on the read variation pattern designation command and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (step 131SGS608).

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-26, if the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable pattern is a non-reach (non-reach miss), the stopped symbols are determined to be a "non-reach" combination such as "124" or "578" (non-reach mode, non-reach miss mode) with a 100% probability. Also, if the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable pattern is a normal reach (normal reach miss), the stopped symbols are determined to be an even number "reach" combination such as "242" or "676" (even number reach mode, even number reach miss mode) with a 95% probability, and to be an odd number "reach" combination other than 7 such as "131" or "545" (odd number reach mode, odd number reach miss mode) with a 5% probability.

Also, if the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable pattern is a super reach (super reach miss), the stopping symbol is determined to be an even number "reach" combination such as "242" or "676" (even number reach mode, even number reach miss mode) with an 80% probability, an odd number other than 7 "reach" combination such as "131" or "545" (odd number reach mode, odd number reach miss mode) with a 19% probability, and a 7 symbol "reach" combination such as "767" or "787" (7 reach mode, 7 reach miss mode) with a 1% probability.

If the variable display result is a "jackpot," the stopped symbols are determined to be a "reach" combination of even numbers such as "222" or "666" (even number reach mode, even number reach jackpot mode) with a 20% probability, a "reach" combination of odd numbers other than 7 such as "111" or "555" (odd number reach mode, odd number reach jackpot mode) with a 50% probability, and a "reach" combination of the 7 symbols "777" ("7" reach mode, "7" reach jackpot mode) with a 30% probability.

In other words, the likelihood of a jackpot is highest when the decorative symbol is a "7" symbol, followed by a reach with an odd symbol other than a "7", a reach with an even symbol, and a non-reach, in that order (expected jackpot likelihood based on decorative symbol: reach with a "7" symbol > reach with an odd symbol other than a "7" > reach with an even symbol > non-reach). For this reason, in this embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the decorative symbol will be in a reach state and which symbol will be in a reach state.

In this embodiment, the expected probability of a jackpot differs depending on whether the decorative symbols are an even-numbered combination or an odd-numbered combination, but the present invention is not limited to this. The expected probability of a jackpot may be the same regardless of the decorative symbol combination that results in a jackpot, or the expected probability of a jackpot when a jackpot is reached may differ depending on the size of the numbers indicated by the decorative symbols.

Returning to Figure 11-25, after determining the decorative symbol to be stopped, the effect control CPU 120 executes a variable display preview effect determination process (step 131SGS609) to determine whether or not to execute a variable display preview effect that suggests the variable display result may be a jackpot during the variable display.

Then, the presentation control CPU 120 selects a process table (presentation control pattern) according to the variable pattern, game status, variable display result, and the result of the variable display preview presentation determination process (step 131SGS610), and starts the process timer (step 131SGS611).

Each process table has a performance control pattern set. Specifically, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) in accordance with the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (131SGS612). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the on/off of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display so that decorative patterns are variably displayed according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one with the variation pattern specification command, but the performance control CPU 120 may also select a variation pattern to use from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern specification command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern specification command (131SGS613). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (131SGS614). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Each time the predetermined time elapses, the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display status of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to VRAM. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (S172) (131SGS615).

In addition, during the variable display performance processing, the values of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are each set to -1. Then, control of the performance device is executed according to the value of the process timer, the variable display of the decorative pattern is realized as described above according to the value of the variable display control timer, the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped according to the value of the variable display time timer, and the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value according to the special pattern hit waiting processing (S173).

[About the effects during variable display]
When the CPU 120 for effect control receives a first variable display start command or a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the variable display start waiting process of step S170, it determines the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (confirmed decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not to execute a reach effect, the form, the execution start timing, etc. based on the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command and the variable display results such as special patterns and decorative patterns specified by the variable display result specification command in the subsequent variable display start setting process of step S171, sets an effect control pattern that reflects the determined results, etc., and controls the variable display of the decorative pattern, reach effects, etc. based on the set effect control pattern.

[About the performance control pattern]
As shown in Figures 11-27 and 11-28, the performance control patterns are set for each of the variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4, PA2-1 to PA2-19, and PB1-1 to PB1-18.

Non-reach patterns 1 to 4 are set as presentation control patterns corresponding to variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4, in which the decorative symbols do not reach a reach state and result in a non-reach miss. Variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 are variation patterns designated in the normal state, PA1-3 is a variation pattern selected in time-saving state A or probability variable state, and PA1-4 is a variation pattern selected in time-saving state B. In the corresponding non-reach patterns 1 to 4, the time until the variable display of the decorative symbols ends is set to differ depending on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern.

The effect control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-1 is a pattern in which a normal reach effect ("Normal" in the diagram) is executed, in which the decorative symbol becomes a reach state, and then the reach is lost. Variation pattern PA2-1 is a variation pattern specified in the normal state, time-saving state A, and probability variable state.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-2 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance ("low base weak A" in the diagram) is executed, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-3 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance ("low base weak B" in the diagram) is executed, followed by a reach miss.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-4 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, followed by a low base strong reach A reach performance ("low base strong A" in the diagram), followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-5 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, followed by a low base strong reach A reach performance, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-6 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base strong reach A reach performance is executed, followed by a reach miss.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-7 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, followed by a low base strong reach B reach performance ("low base strong B" in the diagram), followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-8 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, followed by a low base strong reach B reach performance, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-9 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base strong reach B reach performance is executed, followed by a reach miss.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-10 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, followed by a low base strong reach C reach performance, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-11 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, followed by a low base strong reach C reach performance, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-12 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base strong reach C reach performance is executed, followed by a reach miss.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-13 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, followed by a low base strongest super reach reach performance ("low base strongest" in the diagram), followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-14 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, followed by a low base strongest super reach reach performance, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-15 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base strongest super reach reach performance is executed, followed by a reach miss.

Fluctuation patterns PA2-2 to PA2-15 are all fluctuation patterns specified in normal conditions.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-16 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a high base reach A reach performance ("High Base A" in the diagram) is executed, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-17 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a high base reach B reach performance ("High Base B" in the diagram) is executed, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-18 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a high base reach C reach performance ("High Base C" in the diagram) is executed, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-19 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a high base reach D reach performance ("High Base D" in the diagram) is executed, followed by a reach miss.

Patterns PA2-16 to PA2-19 are all selected in time-saving mode A and special mode.

The effect control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-1 is set to execute a normal reach effect followed by a jackpot.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-2 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base weak super reach A reach effect is executed, followed by a low base strong reach A reach effect, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-3 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base weak super reach B reach effect is executed, followed by a low base strong reach A reach effect, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-4 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base strong reach A reach effect is executed, followed by a jackpot.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-5 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base weak super reach A reach effect is executed, followed by a low base strong reach B reach effect, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-6 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base weak super reach B reach effect is executed, followed by a low base strong reach B reach effect, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-7 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base strong reach B reach effect is executed, followed by a jackpot.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-8 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base weak super reach A reach effect is executed, followed by a low base strong reach C reach effect, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-9 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base weak super reach B reach effect is executed, followed by a low base strong reach C reach effect, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-10 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base strong reach C reach effect is executed, followed by a jackpot.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-11 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base weak super reach A reach effect is executed, followed by a low base strongest super reach reach effect, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-12 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base weak super reach B reach effect is executed, followed by a low base strongest super reach reach effect, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-13 is set to be a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a low base strongest super reach reach effect is executed, followed by a jackpot.

Fluctuation patterns PB1-1 to PB1-13 are all fluctuation patterns selected under normal conditions.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-14 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a high base reach A reach effect is executed, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-15 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a high base reach B reach effect is executed, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-16 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a high base reach C reach effect is executed, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-17 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a high base reach D reach effect is executed, followed by a jackpot.

Variation patterns PB1-14 to PB1-17 are all selected in time-saving mode A and special mode.

The effect control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PB1-18 is a pattern that results in a jackpot without executing the reach effect of normal reach or super reach. Variation pattern PB1-18 is the variation pattern selected in time-saving state B.

[About the flow of the effects during variable display]
11-29 is a diagram showing the flow of the effect during variable display in the normal state. The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specifying command is PA1-1 or PA1-2, controls so that the decorative pattern does not become a reach state but becomes a non-reach miss.

The presentation control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-1 or PB1-1, executes a normal reach presentation in which the decorative symbols are in a reach state, and then controls the presentation so that the reach is missed if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-1, and so that a jackpot is reached if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-1.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-2, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base weak super reach A reach effect, and then notifies the user of a miss as the result of the low base weak super reach A reach effect, causing the reach to be a miss.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PA2-3, it executes a normal reach effect, then executes a low base weak super reach B reach effect, and then notifies the user of a miss as the result of the low base weak super reach B reach effect, causing the reach to be a miss.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-4 or PB1-2, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base weak super reach A reach effect, and then executes a low base strong super reach A reach effect. After that, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-4, a miss is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach A reach effect, and control is performed so that the reach is a miss; if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-2, a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach A reach effect, and control is performed so that a jackpot is achieved.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-5 or PB1-3, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base weak super reach B reach effect, and then executes a low base strong super reach A reach effect. After that, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-5, a miss is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach A reach effect, and control is performed so that the reach is a miss; if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-3, a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach A reach effect, and control is performed so that a jackpot is achieved.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-6 or PB1-4, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base strong super reach A reach effect, and then controls the low base strong super reach A reach effect to result in a miss if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-6, and controls the low base strong super reach A reach effect to result in a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-4, it controls the low base strong super reach A reach effect to result in a jackpot if a jackpot is announced, and a jackpot is achieved.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-7 or PB1-5, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base weak super reach A reach effect, and then executes a low base strong super reach B reach effect. After that, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-7, a miss is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach B reach effect, and control is performed so that the reach is a miss; if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-5, a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach B reach effect, and control is performed so that a jackpot is achieved.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-8 or PB1-6, it executes a normal reach effect, then executes a low base weak super reach B reach effect, and then executes a low base strong super reach B reach effect. After that, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-8, a miss is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach B reach effect, and control is performed so that the reach is a miss; if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-6, a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach B reach effect, and control is performed so that a jackpot is achieved.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-9 or PB1-7, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base strong super reach B reach effect. If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-9, the low base strong super reach B reach effect is controlled to announce a miss as the effect result, resulting in a reach miss; if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-7, the low base strong super reach B reach effect is controlled to announce a jackpot as the effect result, resulting in a jackpot.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-10 or PB1-8, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base weak super reach A reach effect, and then executes a low base strong super reach C reach effect. After that, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-10, a miss is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach C reach effect, and control is performed so that the reach is a miss; if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-8, a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach C reach effect, and control is performed so that a jackpot is achieved.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-11 or PB1-9, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base weak super reach B reach effect, and then executes a low base strong super reach C reach effect. After that, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-11, a miss is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach C reach effect, and control is performed so that the reach is a miss; if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-9, a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base strong super reach C reach effect, and control is performed so that a jackpot is achieved.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-12 or PB1-10, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base strong super reach C reach effect. If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-12, the effect results in a miss for the low base strong super reach C reach effect, and the effect is controlled so that the reach is a miss; if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-10, the effect results in a jackpot for the low base strong super reach C reach effect, and the effect is controlled so that a jackpot is announced.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-13 or PB1-11, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base weak super reach A reach effect, and then executes a low base strongest super reach reach effect. Then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-13, a miss is announced as the result of the low base strongest super reach reach effect, and control is performed so that the reach is a miss; and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-11, a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base strongest super reach reach effect, and control is performed so that a jackpot is achieved.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-14 or PB1-12, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a low base weak super reach B reach effect, and then executes a low base strongest super reach reach effect. Then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-14, a miss is announced as the result of the low base strongest super reach reach effect, and control is performed so that the reach is a miss; and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-12, a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base strongest super reach reach effect, and control is performed so that a jackpot occurs.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-15 or PB1-13, it executes a normal reach reach effect, and then executes a low base strongest super reach reach effect. If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-15, the effect of the low base strongest super reach reach effect is controlled so that a miss is announced and the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-13, the effect of the low base strongest super reach reach effect is controlled so that a jackpot is announced and the jackpot is achieved.

In this way, under normal conditions, a jackpot is announced as the result of the reach performance of low base weak super reach A and B, and is not controlled to a jackpot. Only the reach performance of low base strong super reach A-C, which is executed via the reach performance of low base weak super reach A and B, low base strongest reach, and low base strong super reach A-C, which is executed without going through the reach performance of low base weak super reach A and B, and low base strongest super reach, will announce a jackpot as the result of the performance and be controlled to a jackpot.

Figure 11-30 shows the flow of effects during variable display in time-saving state A and probability variable state. The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in time-saving state A and probability variable state, and when the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command is PA1-3, it controls the decorative pattern so that it does not become a reach state but becomes a non-reach miss.

The presentation control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-1 or PB1-1, executes a normal reach reach presentation, and then controls the presentation so that the reach is missed if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-1, and controls the presentation so that the reach is missed if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-1.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-16 or PB1-14, it executes a normal reach reach effect, and then executes a high base super reach A reach effect. Then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-16, it controls so that a miss is announced as the result of the high base super reach A reach effect, resulting in a reach miss; and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-14, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the result of the high base super reach A reach effect, resulting in a jackpot.

The presentation control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-17 or PB1-15, it executes a normal reach reach presentation, then executes a high base super reach B reach presentation. If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-17, the high base super reach B reach presentation results in a miss, and the CPU 120 controls the high base super reach B reach presentation to result in a reach miss; if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-15, the high base super reach B reach presentation results in a jackpot, and the CPU 120 controls the high base super reach B reach presentation to result in a jackpot.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-18 or PB1-16, it executes a normal reach reach effect, then executes a high base super reach C reach effect, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-18, it controls so that a miss is announced as the result of the high base super reach C reach effect, resulting in a reach miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-16, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the result of the high base super reach C reach effect, resulting in a jackpot.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-19 or PB1-17, it executes a normal reach reach effect, and then executes a high base super reach D reach effect. If the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-19, the high base super reach D reach effect is controlled to announce a miss and result in a reach miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-17, the high base super reach D reach effect is controlled to announce a jackpot and result in a jackpot.

In this way, in the time-saving mode A and the probability variable mode, the result of a jackpot or miss is announced in the normal presentation or in the reach presentation of high-base super reaches A to D, which are controlled after the normal presentation, and then the presentation is controlled to a jackpot or miss; no further reach presentation is executed from the high-base super reaches A to D, which are controlled after the normal presentation.

Figure 11-31 shows the flow of effects during variable display in time-saving state B. The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in time-saving state B, and when the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command is PA1-4, it controls the decorative pattern so that it does not become a reach state but becomes a non-reach miss.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in time-saving state B, and if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-18, it controls the decorative symbols so that they do not become ready to win and result in a jackpot.

In this way, in time-saving state B, the game is controlled so that misses and jackpots always result in a non-reach state.

[About the Super Reach Effects]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute reach effects for super reaches during variable display. The reach effects for super reaches include reach effects for low base weak super reaches A and B, low base strong super reaches A to C, and low base strongest super reaches that are executed in the normal state as described above, as well as reach effects for high base super reaches A to D that are executed in the time-saving state A and the probability variable state. In the following, the reach effects of normal reaches and super reaches may be simply referred to as normal reach effects and super reach effects, respectively; the reach effects of low base weak super reach A, low base weak super reach B, low base strong super reach A, low base strong super reach B, low base strong super reach C, and low base strongest super reach may be simply referred to as low base weak reach A effects, low base weak reach B effects, low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, low base strong reach C effects, and low base strongest reach effects, respectively; and the reach effects of high base super reach A, high base super reach B, high base super reach C, and high base super reach D may be simply referred to as high base reach A effects, high base reach B effects, high base reach C effects, and high base reach effects, respectively.

The Super Reach effect is an effect that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, and also announces the final result of whether or not a jackpot will occur (for Low Base Weak Super Reach A and B, the result will be whether the jackpot will develop into Low Base Strong Super Reach A-C or Low Base Strongest Super Reach, or whether it will be a miss).

In addition, each type of Super Reach effect has a title assigned to it, and each Super Reach effect is made up of a title display part where the title of the Super Reach effect is displayed, and an introductory part that follows the title display part and ends when the result of the effect is announced.

[Variations of Low Base Weak Reach A and B Effects]
In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern for executing the low base weak reach A effect or the low base weak reach B effect does not include a fluctuation pattern in which a jackpot occurs without developing into another super reach effect after the execution of the low base weak reach A effect or the low base weak reach B effect, but it may also be a fluctuation pattern PB1-JA in which a jackpot occurs without developing into another super reach effect after the execution of the low base weak reach A effect, or a fluctuation pattern PB1-JB in which a jackpot occurs without developing into another super reach effect after the execution of the low base weak reach B effect.

In this configuration, the presentation control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-JA, it executes a normal reach presentation, then executes a low base weak reach A presentation, and controls so that a jackpot is announced as the presentation result of the low base weak reach A presentation, resulting in a jackpot; and when it receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-JB, it executes a normal reach presentation, then executes a low base weak reach B presentation, and controls so that a jackpot is announced as the presentation result of the low base weak reach B presentation, resulting in a jackpot. Therefore, in this configuration, in the introductory part of the low base weak reach A effect, it is either announced whether or not the effect will result in a jackpot, or it will develop into another super reach effect, and in the introductory part of the low base weak reach B effect, it is either announced whether or not the effect will result in a jackpot, or it will develop into another super reach effect.

Furthermore, the configuration may not include a variation pattern that develops into another super reach effect after the execution of the low base weak reach A or B effect. In such a configuration, during the introductory part of the low base weak reach A or B effect, it will be announced whether or not the effect will result in a jackpot.

Furthermore, in the following examples, a configuration may be applied that includes a variation pattern that results in a jackpot after the execution of a low base weak reach A or B effect without developing into another super reach effect.In this case, the configuration determines the probability of a jackpot for the low base strong reach A-C effects and the low base strongest reach effect, so that the jackpot expectation for the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach A effect is higher than the jackpot expectation for the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach A effect.

[About the low base weak reach A effect]
Figure 11-32 is a diagram showing the progression of the image displayed on the image display device 5 when the low base weak reach A effect is executed, and Figure 11-33 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base weak reach A effect.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state and, when a variation pattern corresponding to a low-base weak super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, it starts varying the relatively large decorative symbols (decorative symbols (large)). As shown in FIG. 11-32 (a1), at a predetermined timing, the decorative symbols (large) of the type specified by the variable display result specification command stop in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the image display device 5, resulting in a normal reach effect. Thereafter, it executes the operation prompt effect A described below. As shown in FIG. 11-32 (a2), it executes a white flash effect in which the entire display area is displayed in white while maintaining the pending and active displays in the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and active display area 131SG005F, and then starts the title display part of the low-base weak reach A effect.

As shown in Figures 11-32 (a1) to (a3), the background (daytime sky background) displayed during the changing of the decorative pattern (large) in the normal state before the white flash performance changes to the background (corridor background) of the low-base weak reach A performance after the white flash performance, and the decorative pattern (large) displayed in reach mode before the white flash performance changes to reach mode of a decorative pattern (small) that is smaller than the decorative pattern (large) after the white flash performance.

As shown in Figure 11-33, the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect includes a title start period from when part of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" of the low base weak reach A effect is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until they are displayed in their regular position, a title display period during which the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" are displayed in their regular position, and a title end period from when the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" that were displayed in their regular position disappear and switch to the introductory part.

When the effect control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect, it first starts displaying the title start period. During the title start period of the low base weak reach A effect, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a3) to (a4), part of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" appears from the left side of the display area, overlapping with the left-hand small decorative pattern of the reach mode, and then the entire title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" moves toward its fixed position and stops at that position. When the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" are stopped at their fixed position, part of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" is displayed overlapping with both the left-hand small decorative patterns of the reach mode.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode will be any of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the illustration), but during the title start period of the low base weak reach A performance, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode are any of the numbers "1" to "9," part of the title text "Catch the Bakuchu!" will appear overlapping with the left small decorative symbol on the left and right of the reach mode, and when the title text "Catch the Bakuchu!" is stationary in its fixed position, part of the title text "Catch the Bakuchu!" will be displayed overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title display period. During the title display period of the low-base weak reach A effect, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a4) to (a5), the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears behind the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" displayed in a fixed position, and a subtitle "Try and catch him if you can!" corresponding to the scene in which the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears is displayed below the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!", and the audio of the subtitled line is output from speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, as shown in Figure 11-33, no audio is output reading the title. Also, as shown in Figure 11-33, the title display period of the low-base weak reach A effect runs for a longer period of time than the title start period of the low-base weak reach A effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the effect control CPU 120 transitions to displaying the title end period. During the title end period of the low base weak reach A effect, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a5) to (a6), the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" displayed in their fixed position are moved from their fixed position to the right of the display area until all of the title characters disappear. As shown in Figure 11-33, the title end period of the low base weak reach A effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base weak reach A effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Also, as shown in Figure 11-33, the expectation indication display, described below, is not displayed during the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect.

After the title end period ends, the effect control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A effect. As shown in Figures 11-32 (a6) to (a7), the background at the start of the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A effect is the same as the background of the title display part (the background of the hallway), the animated scene that started in the title display part (the scene featuring the enemy character "Bakuchu") also continues throughout the introductory part, the line displayed in the title display part "Try and catch him if you can!" also continues to be displayed, and the audio of the line output from speakers 8L and 8R also continues to be output. Then, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a7) to (a8), when the audio output of the line displayed in the title display part "Try and catch him if you can!" ends, the scene switches to the next animated scene in the introductory part (a scene in which the ally character "Yume Yume" chases the enemy character "Bakuchu").

When a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern that develops from a low base weak super reach A to one of low base strong super reaches A-C or a low base strongest super reach, the effect control CPU 120 executes a drop effect in which the movable body 32 falls at the end of the introductory part, and then develops the effect into a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, a low base strong reach C effect, or a low base strongest reach effect. On the other hand, when a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern that results in a reach miss after a low base weak super reach A, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the user that the ally character "Yume Yume" is unable to capture the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part, and the low base weak reach A effect does not result in a jackpot. Then, the image display device 5 displays a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a reach miss of the type designated by the variable display result designation command.

In a configuration including a variation pattern in which a jackpot is reached after the execution of a low base weak reach A effect without progressing to another super reach effect, when a variation pattern in which a jackpot is reached after the execution of a low base weak reach A effect after a low base weak super reach A is specified by a variation pattern specification command without progressing to another super reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 will notify the player that the ally character "Yume Yume" has captured the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part and that the low base weak reach A effect has resulted in a jackpot (the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state), and then cause the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating the type of jackpot specified by the variable display result specification command.

[About the low base weak reach B effect]
Figure 11-34 is a diagram showing the progression of the image displayed on the image display device 5 when the low base weak reach B effect is executed, and Figure 11-35 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base weak reach B effect.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state and specifies a variable pattern corresponding to a low-base weak super reach B using the variable pattern specification command, it starts varying the decorative symbols (large) and, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (b1), executes a normal reach effect in which the decorative symbols (large) of the type specified by the variable display result specification command stop in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the image display device 5 at a predetermined timing, resulting in a reach state. It then executes operation prompt effect A, described below, and, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (b2), executes a white flash effect in which the entire display area is displayed in white while maintaining the pending and active displays in the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and active display area 131SG005F, and then starts the title display part of the low-base weak reach B effect.

As shown in Figures 11-34 (b1) to (b3), the background (daytime sky background) displayed during the change of the decorative symbol (large) in the normal state before the white flash effect changes to the background of the low-base weak reach B effect after the white flash effect (a background in which the characters "Yume Yume" and "Boingo" face each other on either side of a hockey table), and the decorative symbol (large) displayed in reach mode before the white flash effect changes to the reach mode of a decorative symbol (small) that is smaller than the decorative symbol (large) after the white flash effect.

As shown in Figure 11-35, the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect includes a title start period from when part of the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" of the low base weak reach B effect is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until it is displayed in its regular position, a title display period during which the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is displayed in its regular position, and a title end period from when the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" that was displayed in its regular position disappears and switches to the introductory part.

When the effect control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect, it first starts displaying the title start period. During the title start period of the low base weak reach B effect, as shown in Figures 11-34 (b3) to (b4), part of the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" appears from the left side of the display area, overlapping with the left small decorative pattern of the left and right small decorative patterns of the reach state, and then the entire title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is moved toward its home position and stopped there. When the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is stopped in its home position, part of the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is displayed overlapping with both the left and right small decorative patterns of the reach state.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode will be any of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the illustration), but during the title start period of the low base weak reach B performance, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode are any of the numbers "1" to "9," part of the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" will appear overlapping with the left small decorative symbol on the left and right of the reach mode, and when the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is stationary in its fixed position, part of the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" will be displayed overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title display period. During the title display period of the low base weak reach B effect, as shown in Figures 11-34 (b4) to (b5), a subtitle "Let's have a hockey match! I won't lose!", corresponding to a scene in which the ally character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Boingo" face off on either side, is displayed below the title text "Bilibili Hockey Showdown," and the audio of the subtitled line is output from speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, as shown in Figure 11-35, no audio is output reading the title. Also, as shown in Figure 11-35, the title display period of the low base weak reach B effect runs for a longer time than the title start period of the low base weak reach B effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the effect control CPU 120 transitions to displaying the title end period. During the title end period of the low base weak reach B effect, as shown in (b5) to (b6), the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown," which are displayed in their fixed position, are moved from their fixed position to the right side of the display area until all of the title characters disappear. As shown in Figure 11-35, the title end period of the low base weak reach B effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base weak reach B effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Also, as shown in Figure 11-35, the expectation indication display, described below, is not displayed during the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect.

After the title end period ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the low base weak reach B performance. As shown in Figures 11-34 (b6) to (b7), the background at the start of the introductory part of the low base weak reach B performance is the same as the background of the title display part (the background showing the characters "Yume Yume" and "Boingo" facing each other on either side of a hockey table), the video scene that started in the title display part (the scene showing the friendly character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Boingo" facing each other on either side) also continues throughout the introductory part, the line that was displayed in the title display part "Let's play hockey! I won't lose!" also continues to be displayed, and the audio of the line output from speakers 8L and 8R also continues to be output. Then, as shown in Figure 11-34 (b7) to (b8), when the audio output of the line displayed in the title display part, "Let's play hockey! I won't lose!", ends, the video switches to the next scene in the introductory part (a scene in which the teammate character "Yume Yume" hits the puck back).

When a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern that develops from a low base weak super reach B to one of low base strong super reaches A-C or a low base strongest super reach, the effect control CPU 120 executes a drop effect in which the movable body 32 falls at the end of the introductory part, and then develops the effect into a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, a low base strong reach C effect, or a low base strongest reach effect. On the other hand, when a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern that results in a reach miss after a low base weak super reach B, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the user that the ally character "Yume Yume" is unable to win against the enemy character "Boingo" at the end of the introductory part, and the low base weak reach B effect does not result in a jackpot, and then displays on the image display device 5 a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a reach miss of the type designated by the variable display result designation command.

In a configuration including a variation pattern in which a jackpot is reached without progressing to other super reach effects after the execution of a low base weak reach B effect, when a variation pattern in which a jackpot is reached without progressing to other super reach effects is specified by a variation pattern specification command after the execution of a low base weak reach B effect, the effect control CPU 120 will notify the player that the ally character "Yume Yume" wins the game against the enemy character "Boingo" at the end of the introductory part and that a jackpot has been reached as a result of the low base weak reach B effect (the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state), and then cause the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating the type of jackpot specified by the variable display result specification command.

[About the low base strong reach A effect]
Figure 11-36 is a diagram showing the progression of the image displayed on the image display device 5 when the low base strong reach A effect is executed, and Figure 11-37 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strong reach A effect.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state and a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strong super reach A is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops from a normal reach via a low base weak super reach A or a low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach specification, it executes a low base weak reach A specification or a low base weak reach B specification, and develops it into a low base strong reach A specification. Also, when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strong super reach A is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops directly from a normal reach, after executing the normal reach specification, it executes a selection specification described below, and develops it into a low base strong reach A specification.

When a low-base weak reach A effect or a low-base weak reach B effect develops, the effect control CPU 120 executes a drop effect in which the movable body 32 drops at the end of the low-base weak reach A effect or the low-base weak reach B effect, and then starts the title display part of the low-base strong reach A effect. In the drop effect, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (c1), while maintaining the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach state, and the hold and active displays in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the background at the end of the low-base weak reach A effect or the low-base weak reach B effect switches to a background dedicated to the drop effect (a background with patterns radiating from the center), and then drops the movable body 32, and then raises the movable body 32 to its initial position.

In addition, when a direct progression from a normal reach occurs, the effect control CPU 120 executes the selection effect described below, as shown in Figure 11-36 (c1'), and then starts the title display part of the low-base strong reach A effect. Details of the selection effect will be described later, but when the selection effect begins, the hold and active displays in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

As shown in Figure 11-37, the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect includes a prologue display period before the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu together!" of the low base strong reach A effect are displayed, a title start period from when part of the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu together!" is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until they are displayed in their regular position, a title display period during which the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu together!" are displayed in their regular position, and a title end period from when the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu together!" that were displayed in their regular position disappear and switch to the introductory part.

When the effect control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect, it first starts displaying the prologue display period.

During the prologue display period of the low base strong reach A effect, which transitions from the drop effect, the background dedicated to the drop effect (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode, and the pending and active displays in the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and active display area 131SG005F are maintained, and the ally character "Yume Yume" is then displayed on a layer in front of the background dedicated to the drop effect (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the pending and active displays, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

In addition, during the prologue display period of the low base strong reach A effect transitioned from the selection effect, the selection result image of the selection effect (here, the result image of the low base strong reach A effect) and the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode are maintained, and the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection effect, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

After the prologue display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title start period.

As shown in Figures 11-36 (c1) to (c3), during the prologue display period following the drop effect, the background dedicated to the drop effect (a background with patterns spreading radially from the center) that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of ally character "Yume Yume" switches to the background for the low-base strong reach A effect (a background in which the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Jam" are displayed in the hallway) after the prologue display period ends, and the pending and active displays that were displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of ally character "Yume Yume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends. Note that the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode remains even after the prologue display period ends.

Also, although not shown, during the prologue display period following the selection effect, the selection result image displayed before the display area was completely filled with the enlarged display of ally character "Yume Yume" during the selection effect switches to the background of the low-base strong reach A effect (the background where ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Jam" are displayed in the hallway) after the prologue display period ends. Furthermore, the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach state remains even after the prologue display period ends, and the pending and active displays that were hidden during the selection effect remain hidden.

During the title start period of the low-base strong reach A effect, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c3) to (c4), part of the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chuu!" appears from the left side of the display area, overlapping with the left-hand small decorative symbol (small) of the reach mode, and then the entire title text "Two people, catch the explosive chuu!" moves toward its fixed position and stops in that position. When the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chuu!" is stopped in its fixed position, part of the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chuu!" is displayed overlapping with both the left-hand small decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode will be any of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the illustration), but during the title start period of the low base strong reach A performance, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode are any of the numbers "1" to "9," part of the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chuu!" will appear overlapping with the left small decorative symbol on the left and right of the reach mode, and when the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chuu!" is stationary in its fixed position, part of the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chuu!" will be displayed overlapping with both of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Two people, catch a Bakuchu!" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title display period. During the title display period of the low-base-strong reach A effect, first, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (c4), the title characters "Two people, catch a Bakuchu!" are displayed in a fixed position with the expectation indicator hidden, and this state is maintained for a predetermined time. During this time, as shown in FIG. 11-37, audio reading the title is output from speakers 8L and 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (c5) to (c6), an expectation indicator is displayed below the title characters "Two people, catch a Bakuchu!" in a size smaller than the title characters "Two people, catch a Bakuchu!". As shown in FIG. 11-37, the title display period of the low-base-strong reach A effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low-base-strong reach A effect (see FIG. 11-47 and FIG. 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the effect control CPU 120 transitions to displaying the title end period. During the title end period of the low base strong reach A effect, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c6) to (c7), the title text "Catch the Bakuchu Together!" displayed in its fixed position is moved from its fixed position to the right of the display area until all of the title text disappears. The expectation indication display is also moved to the right of the display area along with the title text until all of it disappears. As shown in Figure 11-37, the title end period of the low base strong reach A effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strong reach A effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Also, as shown in Figure 11-37, during the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect, dialogue subtitles are not displayed, as in the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and no dialogue audio is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

After the title end period ends, the effect control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the low-base-strong reach A effect. As shown in Figures 11-36 (c3) to (c8), the background at the start of the introductory part of the low-base-strong reach A effect is the same as the background after the title start period in the title display part (the background where the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Jam" are displayed in the hallway), and the video scene that started in the title display part (the scene where the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Jam" are displayed in the hallway) also continues throughout the introductory part. Also, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c8) and 11-37, after the introductory part starts, the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears, and a subtitle corresponding to the scene in which the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears, "Try and catch me if you can!", is displayed, and the audio of the subtitled line is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low base strong reach A performance, during the title display part, speakers 8L and 8R output audio reading the title, but subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not displayed, and audio of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part is not output from speakers 8L and 8R. After the introductory part begins, subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introductory part are displayed, and audio of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introductory part is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

When a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern resulting in a jackpot after a low base strong super reach A, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the player that the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Jam" will capture the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a jackpot as the result of the low base strong reach A effect (controlling the game to a jackpot game state), and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a jackpot of the type designated by the variable display result designation command. On the other hand, when a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a reach miss after a low base strong super reach A, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the player that the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Jam" will not capture the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a jackpot as the result of the low base strong reach A effect, and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a reach miss of the type designated by the variable display result designation command.

[About the expected probability indication for low base strong reach A effects]
In the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, the image display device 5 displays the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chocolate!" along with an expectation suggestion display in a smaller size than the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chocolate!" As shown in Figure 11-36 (c5), the expectation suggestion display displayed in the title display part is composed of five star-shaped objects and the text "Expectation" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation, and the expectation is suggested by the number of star-shaped objects whose color has changed from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

In the normal state when the low base strong reach A performance is executed, an object indicating the number of reserved balls and an object indicating an active display may be displayed on the image display device 5. Meanwhile, the expectation level indication displayed in the title display part also indicates the expectation level using multiple objects, so if the reserve and active displays and the expectation level indication display are displayed simultaneously in the title display part, there is a risk that the objects that make up the reserve and active displays may be mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display. For this reason, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance in which the expectation level indication display is displayed, the reserve and active displays are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation level indication display, thereby preventing the objects that make up the reserve and active displays from being mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display.

In addition, since it is rare for a game ball to enter the second start entry port under normal circumstances, when the number of reserved balls in the first special chart is at its maximum (four) and is being variable displayed, up to five objects may be displayed as reserved and active displays, which matches the number of objects indicating maximum expectation in the expectation indication display. However, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, the reserved and active displays are not displayed at the same time as the expectation indication display. Therefore, even if the low base strong reach A performance is executed in a situation where a maximum of five objects are displayed as reserved and active displays, it is possible to prevent confusion between the objects displayed as reserved and active displays and the objects in the expectation indication display, and to prevent the expectation indication display from being mistakenly interpreted as indicating maximum expectation.

In the example shown in Figure 11-36, the pending display and active display are displayed during the prologue display period before the expectation level suggestion display is displayed in the title display part. However, the pending display and active display may be hidden from the start of the prologue display period. Even in this configuration, it is possible to prevent the objects that make up the pending display and active display from being mistaken for objects in the expectation level suggestion display.

Furthermore, when a low base strong reach A effect is executed, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c2) to (c3), during the prologue display period, the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a background dedicated to the falling effect (a background with a pattern spreading radially from the center) and on a layer in front of the pending display and active display, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled, and the pending display and active display that were displayed before the display area was completely filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends, so that the pending display and active display can be hidden without any sense of incongruity. In the example shown in Figure 11-36, characters are displayed on a layer in front of the pending and active displays, and are enlarged until the entire display area is filled, thereby hiding the pending and active displays that were displayed before the display area was filled. However, when a low base strong reach A effect is executed, a monochrome display effect can be executed in which the entire display area is displayed in a monochrome color such as white, except for the decorative symbols (small) of the reach pattern, thereby erasing the pending and active displays that were displayed before the monochrome display effect. Even with this configuration, the pending and active displays can be hidden without creating a sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect, as shown in FIG. 11-36(c4), the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chocolate!" is displayed in a fixed position for a predetermined time with the expectation indication hidden, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-36(c5) to (c6), the expectation indication is displayed below the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chocolate!". At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-36(c5), in the initial stage, all five star-shaped objects that make up the expectation indication are displayed in black, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-36(c6), the color of three of the five star-shaped objects that correspond to the low base strong reach A effect is changed from black to gold, thereby suggesting the expectation of a jackpot in the low base strong reach A effect.

When a low base weak reach A presentation or a low base weak reach B presentation develops into a low base strong reach A presentation, as shown in Figures 11-38 (x1) to (x2), if there are any remaining reserved numbers, the reserved and active displays are displayed during the prologue display period until the entire display area is filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume." In the subsequent title display part, the expectation indication display is hidden, and the title text "Catch the Bakuchu together!" is not displayed in its fixed position. Instead, as shown in Figures 11-38 (x3) to (x4), five star-shaped objects that constitute the expectation indication display are displayed simultaneously with the title text "Catch the Bakuchu together!". If the color of the star-shaped objects is then changed from black to gold, the objects that constitute the expectation indication display will be displayed immediately after the objects that constitute the reserved and active displays are hidden, which could result in confusion between the reserved and active displays and the expectation indication display. In contrast, in the example shown in Figure 11-36, after the expectation indication display is hidden during the prologue display period, the expectation indication display is hidden during the title display period, and the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chocolate!" is displayed in a fixed position and maintained for a predetermined time, and then the expectation indication display is displayed below the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chocolate!", thereby preventing the pending display and active display from being confused with the expectation indication display.

[About the low base strong reach B effect]
Figure 11-39 is a diagram showing the progression of the image displayed on the image display device 5 when the low base strong reach B effect is executed, and Figure 11-40 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strong reach B effect.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state and a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strong super reach B is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops from a normal reach via a low base weak super reach A or a low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach specification, it executes a low base weak reach A specification or a low base weak reach B specification, and develops it into a low base strong reach B specification. Also, when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strong super reach B is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops directly from a normal reach, after executing the normal reach specification, it executes a selection specification described below, and develops it into a low base strong reach B specification.

When a low-base weak reach A effect or a low-base weak reach B effect develops, the effect control CPU 120 executes a drop effect in which the movable body 32 drops at the end of the low-base weak reach A effect or the low-base weak reach B effect, and then starts the title display part of the low-base strong reach B effect. In the drop effect, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d1), while maintaining the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach state, and the hold and active displays in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the background at the end of the low-base weak reach A effect or the low-base weak reach B effect switches to a background dedicated to the drop effect (a background with patterns radiating from the center), and then drops the movable body 32, and then raises the movable body 32 to its initial position.

In addition, when a direct progression from a normal reach occurs, the effect control CPU 120 executes the selection effect described below, as shown in Figure 11-39 (d1'), and then starts the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect. Details of the selection effect will be described later, but when the selection effect begins, the hold and active displays in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

As shown in Figure 11-40, the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect includes a prologue display period before the title characters "Shinku Robo Battle" of the low base strong reach B effect are displayed, a title start period from when part of the title characters "Shinku Robo Battle" are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until they are displayed in their regular position, a title display period during which the title characters "Shinku Robo Battle" are displayed in their regular position, and a title end period from when the title characters "Shinku Robo Battle" that were displayed in their regular position disappear and switch to the introductory part.

When the effect control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect, it first starts displaying the prologue display period.

During the prologue display period of the low base strong reach B effect, which transitions from the drop effect, the background dedicated to the drop effect (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode, and the pending and active displays in the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and active display area 131SG005F are maintained, and the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a layer in front of the background dedicated to the drop effect (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the pending and active displays, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

In addition, during the prologue display period of the low base strong reach B effect transitioned from the selection effect, the selection result image of the selection effect (here, the result image of the low base strong reach B effect) and the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode are maintained, and the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection effect, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

After the prologue display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title start period.

As shown in Figures 11-39 (d1) to (d3), during the prologue display period following the drop effect, the background dedicated to the drop effect (a background with patterns radiating from the center) that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of ally character "Yume Yume" switches to a background dedicated to the title display of the low-base strong reach B effect (a background with ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and enemy character "Robo" displayed on the left and right) after the prologue display period ends, and the pending and active displays that were displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of ally character "Yume Yume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends. Note that the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends.

Also, although not shown, during the prologue display period transitioning from the selection effect, the selection result image of the selection effect that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of ally character "Yume Yume" switches to a background dedicated to the title display of the low base strong reach B effect (a background where ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and enemy character "Robo" are displayed on the left and right) after the prologue display period ends. Furthermore, the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode remains even after the prologue display period ends, and the pending and active displays that were hidden during the selection effect remain hidden.

During the title start period of the low base strong reach B effect, as shown in Figures 11-39 (d3) to (d4), part of the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" appear from the left side of the display area, overlapping with the left-hand small decorative pattern of the reach mode, and then the entire title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" move toward their fixed position and come to a standstill in that position. When the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" are stationary in their fixed position, part of the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" are displayed overlapping with both the left-hand small decorative patterns of the reach mode.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode will be any of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the illustration), but during the title start period of the low base strong reach B performance, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode are any of the numbers "1" to "9," part of the title letters "Gekishin Robo Battle" will appear overlapping with the left small decorative symbol on the left and right of the reach mode, and when the title letters "Gekishin Robo Battle" are stationary in their fixed position, part of the title letters "Gekishin Robo Battle" will be displayed overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title display period. During the title display period of the low base strong reach B effect, first, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d4), the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" are displayed in a fixed position with the expectation level indication hidden, and this state is maintained for a predetermined time. During this time, as shown in FIG. 11-40, audio reading the title is output from speakers 8L and 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d5) to (d6), an expectation level indication is displayed below the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" in a size smaller than the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle." As shown in FIG. 11-40, the title display period of the low base strong reach B effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low base strong reach B effect (see FIG. 11-47 and FIG. 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the effect control CPU 120 transitions to displaying the title end period. During the title end period of the low base strong reach B effect, as shown in Figures 11-39 (d6) to (d7), the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle," which are displayed in their fixed position, are moved from their fixed position to the right of the display area until all of the title characters disappear. The expectation indication display is also moved to the right of the display area along with the title characters until all of the title characters disappear. As shown in Figure 11-40, the title end period of the low base strong reach B effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strong reach B effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Also, as shown in Figure 11-40, during the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect, dialogue subtitles are not displayed, as in the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and no dialogue audio is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

After the title end period ends, the effect control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the low base strong reach B effect. As shown in Figures 11-39 (d3) to (d8), the background at the start of the introductory part of the low base strong reach B effect is different from the background dedicated to title display in the title display part (a background in which the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are displayed on the left and right). At the start of the introductory part, the background dedicated to title display in the title display part switches to the background at the start of the introductory part of the low base strong reach B effect (a background in which the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" face off in town). The introductory part of the low base strong reach B effect starts with an animated scene in which the enemy character "Robo" faces forward in a position farther back from the player, and the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" face off in a position nearer to the player with their backs to each other. At this time, both the enemy character "Robo," located at the back as seen from the player, and the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana," located at the front as seen from the player, are displayed in positions that overlap with the regular positions where the title text "Shocking Robo Battle" was displayed during the title display period of the title display part. Also, as shown in Figures 11-39 (d8) and 11-40, after the start of the introductory part, a subtitle for the line "I won't lose!" is displayed, corresponding to the scene in which the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" face off against the enemy character "Robo," and the audio of the line displayed in the subtitles is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low base strong reach B performance, the title is read aloud from speakers 8L and 8R during the title display part, but subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not displayed, and the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not output from speakers 8L and 8R. After the introductory part begins, subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introductory part are displayed, and the lines corresponding to the scene in the introductory part are output from speakers 8L and 8R.

When a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern resulting in a jackpot after a low base strong super reach B, the presentation control CPU 120 notifies the player that the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" win the battle against the enemy character "Robo" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a jackpot as the presentation result of the low base strong reach B presentation (the game is controlled to a jackpot game state), and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a jackpot of the type designated by the variable display result designation command. On the other hand, when a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a reach miss after a low base strong super reach B, the presentation control CPU 120 notifies the player that the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" lose the battle against the enemy character "Robo" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a low base strong reach B presentation result that the jackpot is not, and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a reach miss of the type designated by the variable display result designation command.

[About the expected probability indication for low base strong reach B effects]
In the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, the image display device 5 displays the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle" together with an expectation suggestion display in a smaller size than the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle." The expectation suggestion display displayed in the title display part is composed of five star-shaped objects and the text "Expectation" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation, as shown in Figure 11-39 (d5), and the expectation suggestion display is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects whose color has changed from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

In the normal state when the low base strong reach B performance is executed, an object indicating the number of reserved balls and an object indicating an active display may be displayed on the image display device 5. If the reserved and active displays and the expectation level indication display are displayed simultaneously in the title display part, there is a risk that the objects that make up the reserved and active displays may be mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display. For this reason, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance where the expectation level indication display is displayed, the reserved and active displays are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation level indication display, thereby preventing the objects that make up the reserved and active displays from being mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect, the pending and active displays are not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display. Therefore, even when the low base strong reach B effect is executed in a situation where a maximum of five objects are displayed as pending and active displays, it is possible to prevent confusion between the objects displayed as pending and active displays and the objects in the expectation level suggestion display, and to prevent the expectation level suggestion display from being mistakenly recognized as being at its maximum.

Furthermore, in the low base strong reach B performance, the pending display and active display may be hidden from the start of the prologue display period, and even in this configuration, it is possible to prevent the objects constituting the pending display and active display from being mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display.

Furthermore, when a low-base strong reach B effect is executed, as shown in Figures 11-39 (d2) to (d3), the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a background dedicated to the drop effect (a background with a pattern radiating from the center) and on a layer in front of the pending and active displays during the prologue display period, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled. Furthermore, the pending and active displays that were displayed before the display area was filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends, allowing the pending and active displays to be hidden without creating a sense of incongruity. Furthermore, when a low-base strong reach B effect is executed, a monochrome display effect can be executed in which the entire display area is displayed in a monochrome color such as white, except for the decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode, thereby erasing the pending and active displays that were displayed before the monochrome display effect. Even with this configuration, the pending and active displays can be hidden without creating a sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the low-base-strong reach B effect, as shown in FIG. 11-39(d4), the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle" is displayed in a fixed position for a predetermined time with the expectation indicator hidden. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-39(d5)-(d6), the expectation indicator is displayed below the title text "Gekishin Robo Battle." At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-39(d5), in the initial stage, all five star-shaped objects constituting the expectation indicator are displayed in black. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-39(d6), the color of 3.5 of the five star-shaped objects corresponding to the low-base-strong reach B effect is changed from black to gold, thereby indicating the expectation of a jackpot in the low-base-strong reach B effect. This prevents confusion between the pending and active indicators and the expectation indicator.

[About the low base strong reach C effect]
As the low base strong reach C effect has many things in common with the aforementioned low base strong reach B effect, we will omit the diagram for the low base strong reach C effect.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state and a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strong super reach C is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops from a normal reach via a low base weak super reach A or a low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach effect, it executes a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect, and develops it into a low base strong reach C effect. Also, when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strong super reach C is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops directly from a normal reach, after executing the normal reach effect, it executes a selection effect described below, and develops it into a low base strong reach C effect.

When a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect develops, the effect control CPU 120 executes a drop effect in which the movable body 32 drops at the end of the low base weak reach A effect or the low base weak reach B effect, and then starts the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect. During the drop effect, the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach state, and the hold and active displays in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are maintained. Then, the background at the end of the low base weak reach A effect or the low base weak reach B effect is switched to a background dedicated to the drop effect (a background with patterns radiating from the center), and the movable body 32 is dropped, and then the movable body 32 is raised to its initial position.

In addition, when a direct progression from a normal reach occurs, the effect control CPU 120 executes the selection effect described below, and then starts the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect. Details of the selection effect will be described later, but when the selection effect begins, the hold and active displays in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

The title display part of the low base strong reach C effect includes a prologue display period before the title characters "Great Earthquake Robot Battle" of the low base strong reach C effect are displayed, a title start period from when part of the title characters "Great Earthquake Robot Battle" are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until they are displayed in their regular position, a title display period during which the title characters "Great Earthquake Robot Battle" are displayed in their regular position, and a title end period from when the title characters "Great Earthquake Robot Battle" that were displayed in their regular position disappear and switch to the introductory part.

When the effect control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect, it first starts displaying the prologue display period.

During the prologue display period of the low base strong reach C effect, which transitions from the drop effect, the background dedicated to the drop effect (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode, and the pending and active displays in the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and active display area 131SG005F are maintained, and the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a layer in front of the background dedicated to the drop effect (background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), the pending and active displays, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

In addition, during the prologue display period of the low base strong reach C effect transitioned from the selection effect, the selection result image of the selection effect (here, the result image of the low base strong reach C effect) and the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode are maintained, and the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection effect, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

After the prologue display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title start period.

During the prologue display period following the fall effect, the background dedicated to the fall effect (a background with patterns radiating from the center) that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of ally character "Yume Yume" switches to the background for the low-base strong reach B effect (a background with ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" and enemy character "Dai Robo" displayed on the left and right) after the prologue display period ends, and the pending and active displays that were displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of ally character "Yume Yume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends. Note that the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode will remain even after the prologue display period ends.

Also, although not shown, during the prologue display period transitioning from the selection effect, the selection result image of the selection effect that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of ally character "Yume Yume" switches to a background dedicated to the title display of the low base strong reach C effect (a background where ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" and enemy character "Dai Robo" are displayed on the left and right) after the prologue display period ends. Furthermore, the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode remains even after the prologue display period ends, and the pending display and active display that were hidden during the selection effect remain hidden.

During the title start period of the low base strong reach C performance, part of the title text "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" appears from the left side of the display area, overlapping with the left-hand decorative pattern (small) of the left and right decorative patterns in the reach mode, and then the entire title text "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" moves toward its fixed position and stops in that position. When the title text "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" is stopped in its fixed position, part of the title text "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" is displayed overlapping with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode will be any number between "1" and "9" ("2" in the illustration), but during the title start period, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode are any number between "1" and "9," part of the title text "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" will appear overlapping with the left small decorative symbol on the left and right of the reach mode, and when the title text "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" is stationary in its fixed position, part of the title text "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" will be displayed overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Dai Geki Shock Robot Battle" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title display period. During the title display period of the low base strong reach C effect, first, the title characters "Dai Geki Shock Robot Battle" are displayed in a fixed position for a predetermined time with the expectation level indication display hidden, and during this time, audio reading the title is output from speakers 8L and 8R. Next, an expectation level indication display is displayed below the title characters "Dai Geki Shock Robot Battle" in a size smaller than the title characters "Dai Geki Shock Robot Battle." The title display period of the low base strong reach C effect is executed for a longer period of time than the title start period of the low base strong reach C effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the effect control CPU 120 transitions to displaying the title end period. During the title end period of the low base strong reach C effect, the title characters "Great Shock Robot Battle", which are displayed in their fixed position, are moved from their fixed position to the right of the display area until all of the title characters disappear. In addition, the expectation level indication display is also moved to the right of the display area along with the title characters until all of it disappears. The title end period of the low base strong reach C effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strong reach C effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Furthermore, during the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect, dialogue subtitles are not displayed, as in the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and dialogue audio is not output from speakers 8L and 8R.

After the title end period ends, the effect control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the low base strong reach C effect. The background at the start of the introductory part of the low base strong reach C effect is different from the background dedicated to title display in the title display part (a background where the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Dai Robo" are displayed on the left and right), and at the start of the introductory part, it switches from the background dedicated to title display in the title display part to the background at the start of the introductory part of the low base strong reach C effect (a background where the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Dai Robo" face off in town). The introductory part of the low base strong reach C effect starts with an animated scene in which the enemy character "Dai Robo" is facing forward on the far side from the player's perspective, and the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" are facing each other on the near side from the player's perspective. At this time, both the enemy character "Big Robo", located at the back as seen from the player, and the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana", located at the front as seen from the player, are displayed in positions that overlap with the regular positions where the title text "Great Shock Robot Battle" was displayed during the title display period of the title display part. Also, after the introductory part begins, a subtitle for the line "I'll never lose!" is displayed in accordance with the scene in which the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" face off against the enemy character "Big Robo", and the audio of the line displayed in subtitles is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low base strong reach C performance, the title is read aloud from speakers 8L and 8R during the title display part, but subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not displayed, and the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the title display part is not output from speakers 8L and 8R. After the introductory part begins, subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the introductory part are displayed, and the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the introductory part is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

When a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern resulting in a jackpot after a low base strong super reach C, the presentation control CPU 120 notifies the player that the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" win the battle against the enemy character "Dai Robo" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a jackpot as the presentation result of the low base strong reach C presentation (the game is controlled to a jackpot game state), and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a jackpot of the type designated by the variable display result designation command. On the other hand, when a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a reach miss after a low base strong super reach C, the presentation control CPU 120 notifies the player that the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" lose the battle against the enemy character "Dai Robo" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a reach miss as the presentation result of the low base strong reach C presentation, and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a reach miss of the type designated by the variable display result designation command.

[About the expected probability indication for low base strong reach C effects]
In the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, an expectation suggestion display is displayed on the image display device 5 in a smaller size than the title characters "Great Shock Robot Battle" along with the title characters "Great Shock Robot Battle." The expectation suggestion display displayed in the title display part is made up of five star-shaped objects and the characters "Expectation" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation, and the expectation is suggested by the number of star-shaped objects whose color has changed from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

In the normal state when the low base strong reach C effect is executed, an object indicating the number of reserved balls and an object indicating an active display may be displayed on the image display device 5. If the reserved and active displays and the expectation level indication display are displayed simultaneously in the title display part, there is a risk that the objects that make up the reserved and active displays may be mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display. For this reason, in the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect where the expectation level indication display is displayed, the reserved and active displays are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation level indication display, thereby preventing the objects that make up the reserved and active displays from being mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect, the pending and active displays are not displayed at the same time as the expectation suggestion display. Therefore, even when the low base strong reach C effect is executed in a situation where a maximum of five objects are displayed as pending and active displays, it is possible to prevent confusion between the objects displayed as pending and active displays and the objects in the expectation suggestion display, and to prevent the expectation suggestion display from being mistakenly perceived as having the highest expectation.

Furthermore, in the low base strong reach C performance, the pending display and active display may be hidden from the start of the prologue display period, and even in this configuration, it is possible to prevent the objects constituting the pending display and active display from being mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display.

In addition, when a low-base strong reach B effect is executed, the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a background dedicated to the drop effect (a background with a pattern radiating from the center) and on a layer in front of the pending and active displays during the prologue display period, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled. The pending and active displays that were displayed before the display area was filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends, allowing the pending and active displays to be hidden without creating a sense of incongruity. Furthermore, when a low-base strong reach C effect is executed, a monochrome display effect can be executed in which the entire display area is displayed in a monochrome color such as white, except for the decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode, thereby erasing the pending and active displays that were displayed before the monochrome display effect. Even with this configuration, the pending and active displays can be hidden without creating a sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect, the title text "Great Shock Robot Battle" is displayed in a fixed position for a predetermined time with the expectation indication hidden, and then the expectation indication is displayed below the title text "Great Shock Robot Battle." At this time, in the initial stage, all five star-shaped objects that make up the expectation indication are displayed in black, and then the color of four of the five star-shaped objects that correspond to the low base strong reach C effect is changed from black to gold, suggesting the expectation of a jackpot in the low base strong reach C effect. This prevents the pending and active displays from being confused with the expectation indication.

[About the Low-Base Strongest Reach Performance]
FIG. 11-41 is a diagram showing the transition of the image displayed on the image display device 5 when the low-base strongest reach effect is executed, and FIG. 11-42 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low-base strongest reach effect.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state and a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strongest super reach is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops from a normal reach via a low base weak super reach A or a low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach specification, it executes a low base weak reach A specification or a low base weak reach B specification, developing it into a low base strongest reach specification. Also, when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strongest super reach is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops directly from a normal reach, after executing the normal reach specification, it executes a selection specification described below, developing it into a low base strongest reach specification.

When a low-base weak reach A effect or a low-base weak reach B effect develops, the effect control CPU 120 executes a drop effect in which the movable body 32 drops at the end of the low-base weak reach A effect or the low-base weak reach B effect, and then starts the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect. In the drop effect, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e1), while maintaining the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach state, and the hold and active displays in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the background at the end of the low-base weak reach A effect or the low-base weak reach B effect switches to a background dedicated to the drop effect (a background with patterns radiating from the center), and then drops the movable body 32, and then raises the movable body 32 to its initial position.

In addition, when a direct progression from a normal reach occurs, the effect control CPU 120 executes the selection effect described below, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e1'), and then starts the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect. Details of the selection effect will be described later, but when the selection effect begins, the hold and active displays in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

As shown in Figure 11-42, the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect includes a title start period from when part of the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!" of the low-base strongest reach effect is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until it is displayed in its regular position, a title display period during which the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!" is displayed in its regular position, and a title end period from when the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!" that was displayed in its regular position disappears and switches to the introductory part.

When the effect control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect, it first starts displaying the title start period.

During the title start period of the low-base strongest reach effect, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e3), the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" are displayed at an enlarged size so that only a portion of the characters is visible in the display area, while the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode are maintained. At this time, the display area is completely filled with a portion of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!". In addition, the portion of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" that is displayed in the display area appears overlapping both of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode. Then, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e4), the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" are gradually reduced in size, and the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" are stopped in their fixed position, with the reduced size so that all of the characters are visible in the display area. When the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" is reduced in size and stationary in its fixed position, part of the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" for the low-base strongest reach effect is displayed overlapping with both of the small decorative patterns on the left and right of the reach effect.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode will be any of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the illustration), but during the title start period of the low-base strongest reach performance, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode are any of the numbers "1" to "9," the enlarged title text "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" will appear overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode, and the reduced title text "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" that is stationary in its fixed position will be displayed with a portion overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode.

As shown in Figures 11-41 (e1) to (e4), during the title start period transitioning from the falling effect, the background dedicated to the falling effect (a background with a pattern spreading radially from the center) that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with part of the enlarged title text "Six people, catch the Bakuchu!" is switched to a background dedicated to displaying the title of the low-base strongest reach effect (a background in which six ally characters and the enemy character "Bakuchu" are displayed on the left and right), while the entire display area is filled with part of the enlarged title text "Six people, catch the Bakuchu!", and when the title text "Six people, catch the Bakuchu!" is stationary in a reduced size in its fixed position, the background dedicated to displaying the title of the low-base strongest reach effect is displayed as its background. Additionally, during the title start period that transitions from the drop effect, the pending and active displays that were displayed before the entire display area was filled with part of the enlarged title text "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!" are hidden while the entire display area is filled with part of the enlarged title text "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!". Note that the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach mode will remain even after the title start period ends.

Furthermore, during the title start period following the selection effect, the selection result image (here, the title image of the low-base strongest reach effect) of the selection effect that was displayed before the display area was completely filled with part of the enlarged title text "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" is switched to a background dedicated to displaying the title of the low-base strongest reach effect (a background in which six friendly characters and the enemy character "Bakuchu" are displayed on the left and right), while the display area is completely filled with part of the enlarged title text "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!", and when the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" is stationary in its fixed position at a reduced size, the background dedicated to displaying the title of the low-base strongest reach effect is displayed as its background. Note that the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the reach mode is maintained even after the end of the title start period, and the pending and active displays that were hidden during the selection effect remain hidden.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" in a reduced size in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to the display of the title display period. During the title display period of the low-base strongest reach effect, first, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e4), the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" are displayed in a fixed position with the expectation indication display hidden for a predetermined time, and during this time, as shown in FIG. 11-42, audio reading the title is output from speakers 8L and 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e5) to (e6), an expectation indication display is displayed below the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" in a smaller size than the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!". As shown in FIG. 11-42, the title display period of the low-base strongest reach effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low-base strongest reach effect (see FIG. 11-47 and FIG. 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the effect control CPU 120 transitions to displaying the title end period. During the title end period of the low-base strongest reach effect, as shown in Figures 11-41 (e6) to (e7), the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!", which are displayed in a reduced size and at a fixed position, are enlarged until the entire display area is filled with part of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!". In this case, the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" are not enlarged in the opposite manner to when they are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, but are enlarged in a manner different from the reverse manner to when they are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, until the entire display area is filled with part of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!". In other words, the trajectory of each part of the title characters as the title characters "Catch the Explosive Chew with Six People!" shrink during the title start period is different from the trajectory of each part of the title characters as the title characters "Catch the Explosive Chew with Six People!" expand during the title end period. Therefore, the display area is completely filled with parts of the title characters "Catch the Explosive Chew with Six People!" in a manner that differs from the manner in which the display area is completely filled at the start of the title start period. As shown in Figure 11-42, the title end period of the low-base strongest reach effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low-base strongest reach effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Also, as shown in Figure 11-42, during the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect, dialogue subtitles are not displayed, as in the low-base weak reach A effect and the low-base weak reach B effect, and dialogue audio is not output from speakers 8L and 8R.

After the title end period ends, the effect control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the low-base strongest reach effect. As shown in Figures 11-41 (e4) to (e8), the background at the start of the introductory part of the low-base strongest reach effect (a background in which six ally characters chase the enemy character "Bakuchu" in the city) is different from the background dedicated to title display in the title display part (a background in which six ally characters and the enemy character "Bakuchu" are displayed on the left and right). After the title end period ends and the background dedicated to title display is completely filled with part of the title text "Catch Bakuchu with six people!" during the title end period, it switches to the background at the start of the introductory part of the low-base strongest reach effect. The introductory part of the low-base strongest reach effect starts with a video scene in which six ally characters chase the enemy character "Bakuchu." Furthermore, as shown in Figures 11-41 (e8) and 11-42, after the introductory part begins, a subtitle is displayed in response to the scene in which six friendly characters chase the enemy character "Bakuchu", saying "Try and catch him if you can!", and the audio of the subtitled line is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low-base strongest reach performance, during the title display part, speakers 8L and 8R output audio reading the title, but subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not displayed, and speakers 8L and 8R do not output audio of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part. After the introductory part begins, subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introductory part are displayed, and audio of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introductory part is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

When a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern resulting in a jackpot after a low-base strongest super reach, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the player that the six ally characters will capture the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a jackpot as the result of the low-base strongest reach effect (controlling the game to a jackpot game state), and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a jackpot of the type designated by the variable display result designation command. On the other hand, when a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern resulting in a reach miss after a low-base strongest super reach, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the player that the six ally characters will not capture the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a low-base strongest reach effect not resulting in a jackpot, and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a reach miss of the type designated by the variable display result designation command.

[About the low-base strongest reach effect expectation indication]
In the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation, the image display device 5 displays the title text "Catch the explosive chuu with six people!" along with an expectation suggestion display in a smaller size than the title text "Catch the explosive chuu with six people!" As shown in Figure 11-41 (e6), the expectation suggestion display displayed in the title display part is composed of five star-shaped objects and the text "Expectation" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation, and the expectation is suggested by the number of star-shaped objects whose color has changed from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

In the normal state when the low-base strongest reach effect is executed, an object indicating the number of reserved balls and an object indicating an active display may be displayed on the image display device 5. If the reserved and active displays and the expectation level indication display are displayed simultaneously in the title display part, there is a risk that the objects that make up the reserved and active displays may be mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display. For this reason, in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect where the expectation level indication display is displayed, the reserved and active displays are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation level indication display, thereby preventing the objects that make up the reserved and active displays from being mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display.

In addition, in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect, the pending and active displays are not displayed at the same time as the expectation suggestion display. Therefore, even when the low-base strongest reach effect is executed in a situation where a maximum of five objects are displayed as pending and active displays, it is possible to prevent confusion between the objects displayed as pending and active displays and the objects in the expectation suggestion display, and to prevent the expectation suggestion display from being mistakenly perceived as having the highest expectation.

Furthermore, when a low-base strongest reach effect is executed, as shown in Figures 11-41 (e2) to (e4), the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" is displayed in an enlarged size during the title start period, so that only a portion of the text is visible in the display area. It is then reduced to a size where all of the text is visible in the display area. When the background dedicated to the title display of the low-base strongest reach effect is displayed, the pending and active displays that were displayed before the title start period are hidden, so that the pending and active displays can be hidden without creating a sense of incongruity. Furthermore, when a low-base strongest reach effect is executed, a monochrome display effect can be executed in which the entire display area is displayed in a monochrome color such as white, except for the decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode, thereby erasing the pending and active displays that were displayed before the monochrome display effect. Even with this configuration, the pending and active displays can be hidden without creating a sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e4), the title text "Catch the Explosive Chew with Six Players!" is displayed in a fixed position for a predetermined time with the expectation indication hidden. Then, as shown in Figures 11-41 (e5) to (e6), the expectation indication is displayed below the title text "Catch the Explosive Chew with Six Players!". In this case, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e5), in the initial stage, all five star-shaped objects constituting the expectation indication are displayed in black. Then, as shown in Figure 11-41 (e6), the color of 4.5 of the five star-shaped objects corresponding to the low-base strongest reach effect is changed from black to gold, thereby indicating the expectation of a jackpot in the low-base strongest reach effect. This prevents confusion between the pending and active displays and the expectation indication.

[Modifications of the title display part]
Figure 11-43 shows the image transition in modified title display parts of low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, low base strong reach C effect, and low base strongest reach effect.

When the effect control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the corresponding Super Reach effect, it first executes a blackout effect, displaying the entire display area in black, except for the display of the decorative symbols (small) on the left and right of the Reach state, as shown in Figure 11-43 (f1). If the pending and active displays were displayed before the blackout effect was executed, the pending and active displays will be hidden when the blackout effect begins.

After the blackout effect continues for a predetermined period of time, the effect control CPU 120 displays an expectation indication display (in FIG. 11-43 (f2), an expectation indication display for the low-base strongest reach effect) while maintaining the background of the entire display area in black, as shown in FIG. 11-43 (f2).

The effect control CPU 120 then displays the expectation indication display with the background of the entire display area displayed in black for a predetermined period of time, and displays the title character of the corresponding super reach effect (the title character of the low-base strongest reach effect in Figures 11-43 (f3) (f5)) in a fixed position at a size larger than the expectation indication display, as shown in Figures 11-43 (f3) (f5).

When the title letters of the corresponding Super Reach effect are displayed in their regular positions, portions of the title letters are displayed overlapping both of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the Reach state. The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the Reach state will be any of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the illustration), but whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the Reach state are any of the numbers "1" to "9," when the title letters of the corresponding Super Reach effect are displayed in their regular positions, portions of the title letters are displayed overlapping both of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the Reach state.

In addition, the title characters are displayed in either a white mode (Figure 11-43 (f3)) or a red mode (Figure 11-43 (f5)). Whether the title characters are displayed in a white mode or a red mode is determined in the variable display preview effect determination process of step 131SGS609 described above. In the variable display preview effect determination process, when a variable pattern including the execution of a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, a low base strong reach C effect, or a low base strongest reach effect is identified, it is determined whether the title characters are displayed in a white mode or a red mode with a probability corresponding to whether a jackpot has occurred, and it is also determined whether the title characters are displayed in a white mode or a red mode with a probability such that the rate of a jackpot when the title characters are displayed in a red mode is higher than the rate of a jackpot when the title characters are displayed in a white mode. Therefore, when the title text is displayed in red during the title display part of the corresponding Super Reach effect, the likelihood of a jackpot is higher than when the title text is displayed in white.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the expectation indication display and the title text of the corresponding Super Reach effect, and then, as shown in Figures 11-43 (f4) and (f6), while maintaining the expectation indication display and the title text of the corresponding Super Reach effect, displays a background corresponding to the title display part of the corresponding Super Reach effect and outputs audio reading the title from speakers 8L and 8R. Meanwhile, in the title display part, dialogue subtitles are not displayed, as in the low base weak reach A effect and low base weak reach B effect, and dialogue audio is not output from speakers 8L and 8R. Furthermore, in the title display part, the title text is displayed for a longer period of time after the start of the blackout effect than the time until the title text is displayed (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 transitions to the title end period. Note that the control of the title end period is the same as for each of the super reach effects described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In this modified version of the title display part, the title text of the corresponding Super Reach effect is larger than the expectation level indication display, and the expectation level is indicated by whether it is white or red, which attracts the player's attention. However, by displaying the expectation level indication display before the title text, the player's attention can be drawn to the expectation level indication first.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-43 (f2), whether the title characters are displayed in white or red, if the type of super reach effect is the same, the expectation level indication is displayed in the same manner. This allows the player to pay attention to whether the title characters are displayed in white or red after the expectation level indication is displayed.

[About high base reach A to D effects]
Figure 11-44 is a diagram showing the transition of the image displayed on the image display device 5 when the high base reach A to D effects are being executed, and Figure 11-44 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the high base reach A to D effects. Note that the high base reach A to D effects are all the same except for the type of enemy character that appears, the title name, and the expectation level suggested by the expectation level suggestion display. Therefore, the high base reach A effect will be explained here, and an explanation of the high base reach B to D effects will be omitted.

The effect control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and when a variation pattern corresponding to a high-base super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, it starts varying the decorative pattern (large), and as shown in Figure 11-44 (g2), executes a normal reach effect in which the decorative pattern (large) of the type specified by the variable display result specification command stops at the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R on the image display device 5 at a predetermined timing, resulting in a reach mode. Then, the title display part of the high-base reach A effect begins.

As shown in Figure 11-45, the title display part of the high base reach A effect includes a title start period from when part of the title characters "Battle Reach A" of the high base reach A effect is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until they are displayed in their regular position, a title display period during which the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in their regular position, and a title end period from when the title characters "Battle Reach A" that were displayed in their regular position disappear and switch to the introductory part.

When the effect control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the high base reach A effect, it first starts displaying the title start period.

During the title start period of the high-base reach A effect, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g2), the display of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state is maintained, and the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed at an enlarged size so that only a portion of the characters is visible in the display area. At this time, the display area is displayed so that part of the title characters "Battle Reach A" fills the entire display area. In addition, the portion of the title characters "Battle Reach A" that is displayed in the display area appears to overlap both of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state. Then, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g3), the title characters "Battle Reach A" are gradually reduced in size, and the reduced size title characters "Battle Reach A" are stopped in their fixed position so that all of the characters are visible in the display area. When the title text "Battle Reach A" is displayed in a reduced size and stationary in a fixed position, part of the title text "Battle Reach A" is displayed overlapping both of the small decorative patterns on the left and right of the reach state.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode will be any of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the illustration), but during the title start period of the high base reach A performance, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode are any of the numbers "1" to "9," the enlarged title letters "Battle Reach A" will appear overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode, and the reduced title letters "Battle Reach A" that are stationary in their fixed position will appear overlapping with parts of both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode.

As shown in Figures 11-44 (g1) to (g3), the background (night sky background) displayed during the fluctuation of the decorative pattern (large) in the time-saving state A or the probability variation state before the display area is completely filled with a portion of the enlarged title characters "Battle Reach A" switches to a background dedicated to the title display of the high base reach A effect (a background in which the ally character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Masked Man" are displayed on the left and right) while the display area is completely filled with a portion of the enlarged title characters "Battle Reach A," and when the title characters "Battle Reach A" are stationary in a reduced size and in their fixed positions, a background dedicated to the title display of the high base reach A effect is displayed as its background. Furthermore, the pending display and active display that were displayed before the display area is completely filled with a portion of the enlarged title characters "Battle Reach A" are hidden while the display area is completely filled with a portion of the enlarged title characters "Battle Reach A." Furthermore, the display of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode will remain even after the title start period ends.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Battle Reach A" in a reduced size at the fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to the title display period. During the title display period of the high base reach A effect, first, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g3), the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in the fixed position with the expectation indication display hidden for a predetermined time, and during this time, as shown in Figure 11-45, audio reading the title is output from speakers 8L and 8R. Next, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g4) to (g5), an expectation indication display is displayed below the title characters "Battle Reach A" in a smaller size than the title characters "Battle Reach A." As shown in Figure 11-45, the title display period of the high base reach A effect is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the high base reach A effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the effect control CPU 120 transitions to the display of the title end period. During the title end period of the high base reach A effect, as shown in Figures 11-44 (g5) to (g6), the title characters "Battle Reach A," which are displayed in a reduced size and at a fixed position, are enlarged until the entire display area is filled with parts of the title characters "Battle Reach A." In this case, the title characters "Battle Reach A" are not enlarged in the opposite manner to when the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, but are enlarged in a manner different from the opposite manner to when the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, until the entire display area is filled with parts of the title characters "Battle Reach A." In other words, the trajectory taken by each part of the title characters as they shrink during the title start period is different from the trajectory taken by each part of the title characters as they expand during the title end period. Therefore, unlike the state in which the display area is completely filled at the start of the title start period, the display area is completely filled with part of the title characters "Battle Reach A." As shown in Figure 11-45, the title end period of the high bass reach A effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the high bass reach A effect (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Also, as shown in Figure 11-45, in the title display part of the high bass reach A effect, dialogue subtitles are not displayed, as in the low bass weak reach A effect and the low bass weak reach B effect, and dialogue audio is not output from speakers 8L and 8R.

The performance control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the high bass reach A performance after the end of the title end period. As shown in Figures 11-44 (g3) to (g7), the background at the start of the introductory part of the high bass reach A performance (the background showing the ally character "Yume Yume" fighting the enemy character "Masked Man") is different from the background dedicated to title display in the title display part (the background showing the ally character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Masked Man" on the left and right). After the title end period ends and the background dedicated to title display is completely filled with part of the title characters "Battle Reach A" during the title end period, it switches to the background at the start of the introductory part of the high bass reach A performance. The introductory part of the high bass reach A performance starts with a video scene showing the ally character "Yume Yume" fighting the enemy character "Masked Man." Also, as shown in Figures 11-44 (g7) and 11-45, after the introductory part begins, a subtitle for the line "Fight!" is displayed in response to a scene in which the ally character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Masked Man" are fighting, and the audio of the line displayed in the subtitles is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the high bass reach A performance, during the title display part, audio is output from speakers 8L and 8R reading the title, but subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not displayed, and audio of the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the title display part is not output from speakers 8L and 8R. After the introductory part begins, subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the introductory part are displayed, and audio of the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the introductory part is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

When a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern resulting in a jackpot after a high base super reach A, the presentation control CPU 120 notifies the player that the ally character "Yume Yume" wins the fight against the enemy character "Masked Man" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a jackpot as the presentation result of the high base reach A presentation (the game is controlled to a jackpot game state), and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a jackpot of the type designated by the variable display result designation command. On the other hand, when a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a reach miss after a high base super reach A, the presentation control CPU 120 notifies the player that the ally character "Yume Yume" is defeated by the enemy character "Masked Man" at the end of the introductory part, resulting in a jackpot as the presentation result of the high base reach A presentation, and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a reach miss of the type designated by the variable display result designation command.

[About the expected probability indication for high base reach A to D effects]
The expectation suggestion displays for the high base reach A to D effects are all the same except for the differences in the expectation suggested by the expectation suggestion displays. Therefore, here we will explain the expectation suggestion displays for the high base reach A effect and omit explanations of the expectation suggestion displays for the high base reach B to D effects.

In the title display part of the high base reach A performance, the image display device 5 displays the title text "Battle Reach A" along with an expectation level indication in a smaller size than the title text "Battle Reach A." The expectation level indication displayed in the title display part, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g5), consists of five star-shaped objects and the text "Expectation Level" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation level, and the expectation level is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects that have changed color from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

When in time-saving state A or probability variable state in which the high base reach A effect is executed, an object indicating the number of reserved balls and an object indicating an active display may be displayed on the image display device 5. If the reserved and active displays and the expectation indication display are displayed simultaneously in the title display part, there is a risk that the objects that make up the reserved and active displays may be mistaken for objects in the expectation indication display. For this reason, in the title display part of the high base reach A effect in which the expectation indication display is displayed, the reserved and active displays are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation indication display, thereby preventing the objects that make up the reserved and active displays from being mistaken for objects in the expectation indication display.

Furthermore, since it is almost impossible for a game ball to enter the first start entry slot in the time-saving mode A or the probability variable mode, when the number of reserved balls in the second special chart is at its maximum (four) and is being displayed in a variable manner, up to five objects may be displayed as reserved and active displays, which matches the number of objects indicating the highest level of expectation in the expectation indication display. However, in the title display part of the high base reach A effect, the reserved and active displays are not displayed at the same time as the expectation indication display. Therefore, even if the high base reach A effect is executed in a situation where up to five objects are displayed as reserved and active displays, it is possible to prevent confusion between the objects displayed as reserved and active displays and the objects in the expectation indication display, and to prevent the expectation indication display from being mistakenly interpreted as the highest level of expectation.

Furthermore, when a high base reach A effect is executed, as shown in Figures 11-44 (g1) to (g3), the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in an enlarged size during the title start period, so that only a portion of the characters are visible in the display area. They are then reduced in size so that all characters are visible in the display area. When the background dedicated to the title display of the high base reach A effect is displayed, the hold and active displays that were displayed before the title start period are hidden, so that the hold and active displays can be hidden without creating a sense of incongruity. Furthermore, when a high base reach A effect is executed, a monochrome display effect can be executed in which the entire display area is displayed in a monochrome color such as white, except for the decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode, thereby erasing the hold and active displays that were displayed before the monochrome display effect. Even with this configuration, the hold and active displays can be hidden without creating a sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the high base reach A effect, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g3), the title letters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in a fixed position for a predetermined time with the expectation indication display hidden, and then, as shown in Figures 11-44 (g4) to (g5), the expectation indication display is displayed below the title letters "Battle Reach A." At this time, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g4), in the initial stage, all five star-shaped objects constituting the expectation indication display are displayed in black, and then, as shown in Figure 11-44 (g5), the color of three of the five star-shaped objects corresponding to the high base reach A effect (3.5 for the high base reach B effect, 4 for the high base reach C effect, and 4.5 for the high base reach D effect) is changed from black to gold, thereby indicating the expectation of a jackpot in the high base reach A effect. This prevents confusion between the pending and active displays and the expectation level indication display.

[Title text display position]
FIG. 11-46 is a diagram showing the position where the title characters are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. In FIG.

As shown in Figures 11-46 (A) and (B), the image display device 5 has a rectangular display area 5L. However, since the game board 2 is placed in front of it, the visible area of the display area 5L of the image display device 5 is the area that is visible through the opening 24 formed in the game board 2, i.e., the area that is not covered by the components that make up the game board 2.

As mentioned above, the effect control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" in a fixed position during the title display period of the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect. In this case, the fixed position where the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" are displayed is the position where the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" overlap with the intersection of the diagonal lines of the display area 5L of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-46(A), and the position where the title characters overlap with the intersection of the diagonal lines of the visible square area 5S, which is the largest rectangular area within the visible area of the image display device 5 that is not obstructed by components of the game board 2, as shown in FIG. 11-46(B).

Similarly, the title text for the low base weak reach B effect is "Bilibili Hockey Showdown", the title text for the low base strong reach A effect is "Two people catch the explosive chocolate!", the title text for the low base strong reach B effect is "Shocking Robot Battle", the title text for the low base strong reach C effect is "Super Shocking Robot Battle", the title text for the low base strongest reach effect is "Six people catch the explosive chocolate!", the title text for the high base reach A effect is "Battle Reach A", the title text for the high base reach B effect is "Battle Reach B", and the title text for the high base reach C effect is " For both the title characters "Battle Reach C" and the title characters "Battle Reach D" for the high base reach D effect, the fixed position at which the title characters are displayed during the title display period is where the title characters overlap with the intersection of the diagonal lines of the display area 5L of the image display device 5, as shown in Figure 11-46 (A), and where the title characters overlap with the intersection of the diagonal lines of the visible square area 5S, which is the largest rectangular area within the visible area of the image display device 5 that is not obstructed by components of the game board 2, as shown in Figure 11-46 (B).

Gaming machines are often subject to design changes during the development stage, and changes to the design of the gaming board 2 can change the area of the display area 5L of the image display device 5 that is covered by the components that make up the gaming board 2, thereby changing the visible area of the display area 5L. Gaming machines installed in gaming parlors are sometimes taken back, refurbished, and resold, and in such cases, changes to the design of the gaming board 2 can change the area of the display area 5L of the image display device 5 that is covered by the components that make up the gaming board 2, thereby changing the visible area of the display area 5L. In such cases, if the placement of the title characters in the super reach effect is determined based on the display area 5L of the image display device 5, there is a risk that the display position of the title characters will be significantly off from the center of the visible area.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, in the title display part of any Super Reach performance, the fixed position at which the title characters are displayed during the title display period is a position where the title characters overlap with the intersection of the diagonal lines of the display area 5L of the image display device 5, and also overlap with the intersection of the diagonal lines of the visible square area 5S, which is the largest rectangular area within the visible area of the image display device 5 that is not obstructed by components of the game board 2.As a result, the title characters displayed at the fixed position during the title display period are displayed at a position where they overlap with both the intersection of the diagonal lines of the display area 5L and the intersection of the diagonal lines of the visible square area 5S.This prevents the display position of the title characters from deviating significantly from the center of the visible area, even if the design of the game board 2 is changed due to design changes or when the game machine is reused.

[Super Reach performance duration]
Figure 11-47 is a diagram showing the presentation time of each super reach presentation, and Figure 11-48 is a diagram showing one form of the relationship between the presentation times of each super reach presentation.

As shown in Figure 11-47, the overall presentation time of the low base weak reach A presentation (the time from the start of the title display part to the end of the introductory part) is T1-1, the presentation time of the title display part is Tt1, of which the presentation time of the title start period is Tt1a, the presentation time of the title display period is Tt1b, and the presentation time of the title end period is Tt1c.

The overall presentation time for the low base weak reach B presentation is T1-2, the presentation time for the title display part is Tt1, of which the presentation time for the title start period is Tt1a, the presentation time for the title display period is Tt1b, and the presentation time for the title end period is Tt1c.

Note that while the overall presentation times for the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect are different, the presentation time for the title display part, as well as the presentation time for the title start period, title display period, and title end period, are all the same.

As shown in Figure 11-47, the overall presentation time of the low base strong reach A presentation is T2-1, the presentation time of the title display part is Tt2, of which the presentation time of the title start period is Tt2a, the presentation time of the title display period is Tt2b, and the presentation time of the title end period is Tt2c.

The overall presentation time for the low base strong reach B presentation is T2-2, the presentation time for the title display part is Tt2, of which the presentation time for the title start period is Tt2a, the presentation time for the title display period is Tt2b, and the presentation time for the title end period is Tt2c.

The overall duration of the low base strong reach C effect is T2-3, the duration of the title display part is Tt2, of which the duration of the title start period is Tt2a, the duration of the title display period is Tt2b, and the duration of the title end period is Tt2c.

Note that while the overall presentation times for the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect are different, the presentation time for the title display part, and the presentation time for the title start period, title display period, and title end period are all the same.

The overall presentation time for the low base strongest reach presentation is T3, the presentation time for the title display part is Tt3, of which the presentation time for the title start period is Tt3a, the presentation time for the title display period is Tt3b, and the presentation time for the title end period is Tt3c.

The overall presentation time for high base reach presentations A to D is T4, and the presentation time for the title display part is Tt4, of which the presentation time for the title start period is Tt4a, the presentation time for the title display period is Tt4b, and the presentation time for the title end period is Tt4c.

Comparing the overall presentation time of super reach effects during a low base (normal state) in this configuration, as shown in Figure 11-48 (A), the overall presentation time (T2-1, T2-2, T2-3) of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect, which have higher jackpot expectations than the low base weak reach A effect and low base weak reach B effect, is longer than the overall presentation time (T1-1, T1-2) of the low base weak reach A effect and low base weak reach B effect, and the overall presentation time (T3) of the low base strongest reach effect, which has higher jackpot expectations than the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base weak reach C effect, is set longer than the overall presentation time (T2-1, T2-2, T2-3) of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect.

In addition, of the low base weak reach A and low base weak reach B effects, the low base weak reach B effect, which has a higher expectation of developing into another super reach effect than the low base weak reach A effect, has an overall presentation time (T1-2) that is set longer than the overall presentation time (T1-1) of the low base weak reach A effect. Furthermore, the overall presentation time (T2-3) of the low base strong reach C effect, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A effect and the low base strong reach B effect, out of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect, is longer than the overall presentation time (T2-1, T2-2) of the low base strong reach A effect and the low base strong reach B effect, and the overall presentation time (T2-2) of the low base strong reach B effect, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A effect, out of the low base strong reach A effect and the low base strong reach B effect, is set longer than the overall presentation time (T2-1) of the low base strong reach A effect.

When comparing the presentation times for the title start period, title display period, and title end period in the title display part in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 11-48 (B), for all super reach presentations (low base weak reach A, B presentations, low base strong reach A-C presentations, low base strongest reach presentations, and high base reach A-D presentations), the presentation time for the title display period (Tt1b/Tt2b/Tt3b/Tt4b) is longer than the presentation time for the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a/Tt4a) and the presentation time for the title end period (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c/Tt4c), and the presentation time for the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a/Tt4a) is set longer than the presentation time for the title end period (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c/Tt4c).

When comparing the presentation time of the title display part in the super reach effect in this form, as shown in Figure 11-48 (C), the presentation time (Tt2) of the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect, which have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A effect and low base weak reach B effect, is longer than the presentation time (Tt1) of the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect and low base weak reach B effect, and the presentation time (Tt3) of the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base weak reach C effect, is set longer than the presentation time (Tt2) of the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect. Additionally, the presentation time (Tt4) of the title display part of the high base reach A-D effects is set shorter than the presentation time (Tt1, Tt2, Tt3) of the title display part of the low base weak reach A-B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects, and low base strongest reach effects.

In this embodiment, when comparing the presentation times of the title start period and title display period in the low base strongest reach presentation and the high base reach A to D presentation, as shown in Figure 11-48 (D), the presentation time (Tt3a) of the title start period in the low base strongest reach presentation is set longer than the presentation time (Tt4a) of the title start period in the high base reach A to D presentation, and as shown in Figure 11-48 (E), the presentation time (Tt3b) of the title display period in the low base strongest reach presentation is set longer than the presentation time (Tt4b) of the title display period in the high base reach A to D presentation.

In this embodiment, when comparing the presentation times of the title start periods of super reach presentations (low base weak reach A, B presentations, low base strong reach A-C presentations, low base strongest reach presentation) during a low base (normal state), as shown in Figure 11-48 (F), the presentation time (Tt2a) of the title start periods of the low base strong reach A presentation, low base strong reach B presentation, and low base strong reach C presentations, which have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A presentation and low base weak reach B presentation, is longer than the presentation time (Tt1a) of the title start periods of the low base weak reach A presentation and low base weak reach B presentation, and the presentation time (Tt3a) of the title start period of the low base strongest reach presentation, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A presentation, low base strong reach presentation B, and low base weak reach C presentation, is set longer than the presentation time (Tt2a) of the title start periods of the low base strong reach A presentation, low base strong reach B presentation, and low base strong reach C presentation.

In this embodiment, when comparing the presentation times of the title display periods in the super reach presentations (low base weak reach A, B presentations, low base strong reach A-C presentations, low base strongest reach presentation) during a low base (normal state), as shown in Figure 11-48 (G), the presentation time (Tt2b) of the title display period of the low base strong reach A presentation, low base strong reach B presentation, and low base strong reach C presentation, which have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A presentation and low base weak reach B presentation, is longer than the presentation time (Tt1b) of the title display period of the low base weak reach A presentation and low base weak reach B presentation, and the presentation time (Tt3b) of the title display period of the low base strongest reach presentation, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A presentation, low base strong reach presentation B, and low base weak reach C presentation, is set longer than the presentation time (Tt2b) of the title display period of the low base strong reach A presentation, low base strong reach B presentation, and low base strong reach C presentation.

In this embodiment, when comparing the presentation times of the title end periods of super reach presentations (low base weak reach A, B presentations, low base strong reach A-C presentations, low base strongest reach presentation) during a low base (normal state), as shown in Figure 11-48 (H), the presentation time (Tt2c) of the title end period of the low base strong reach A presentation, low base strong reach B presentation, and low base strong reach C presentation, which have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A presentation and low base weak reach B presentation, is longer than the presentation time (Tt1c) of the title end period of the low base weak reach A presentation and low base weak reach B presentation, and the presentation time (Tt3c) of the title end period of the low base strongest reach presentation, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A presentation, low base strong reach presentation B, and low base weak reach C presentation, is set longer than the presentation time (Tt2c) of the title end period of the low base strong reach A presentation, low base strong reach B presentation, and low base strong reach C presentation.

In this mode, when comparing the presentation time of the text display period of the title display part (the period in the title display part that does not include the prologue period described below, and is the combined period of the title start period, title display period, and title end period) in the super reach presentations (low base weak reach A, B presentations, low base strong reach A-C presentations, low base strongest reach presentations) during a low base (normal state), as shown in Figure 11-48 (I), the low base strong reach A presentation has a higher chance of winning than the low base weak reach A presentation and the low base weak reach B presentation. The presentation time (Tt2d) for the character display period of the low base strong reach B effect and the low base strong reach C effect is longer than the presentation time (Tt1d) for the character display period of the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and the presentation time (Tt3d) for the character display period of the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect and the low base weak reach C effect, is set longer than the presentation time (Tt2d) for the character display period of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect and the low base strong reach C effect.

In this embodiment, when comparing the presentation times of the title start period and title display period in super reach effects (low base weak reach A, B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects, low base strongest reach effects) during a low base (normal state), as shown in Figure 11-48 (J) (K), in all super reach effects (low base weak reach A, B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects, low base strongest reach effects) during a low base (normal state), the presentation time of the title display period (Tt1b/Tt2b/Tt3b) is longer than the presentation time of the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a), and the presentation time of the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a) is set longer than the presentation time of the title end period (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c).

In this mode, when comparing the overall presentation time of the super reach effects (low base weak reach A, B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects, low base strongest reach effects) during a low base (normal state) with the super reach effects (high base reach A-D effects) during a high base (time-saving state A and special state), as shown in Figure 11-48 (L), the overall presentation time (T4) of the super reach effects (high base reach A-D effects) during a high base (time-saving state A and special state) is set shorter than the overall presentation time (T1-1, T1-2, T2-1, T2-3, T3) of the super reach effects (low base weak reach A, B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects, low base strongest reach effects) during a low base (normal state).

[About the title text of the Super Reach performance]
Figure 11-49 is a diagram showing one form of the relationship between the title characters and decorative patterns in the title display part in the super reach performance.

As shown in Figure 11-49 (A), the title text for the low-base weak reach A effect is "Catch the Bakuchu!", the title has 10 characters, the font size of the title characters (standard size per character) is FJ, and the display area size in which the title characters are displayed (the size of the area containing all title characters) is EJA.

The title text for the low base weak reach B effect is "Bilibili Hockey Showdown," the title has 10 characters, the font size of the title text is FJ, and the display area size in which the title text is displayed is EJB.

The title text for the low base strong reach A effect is "Catch the Bakuchu together!", the title has 13 characters, the font size of the title text is FK, and the display area size in which the title text is displayed is EKA.

The title of the low base strong reach B effect is "Shocking Robot Battle," the title has seven characters, the font size of the title is FK, and the display area size in which the title is displayed is EKB.

The title of the low base strong reach C effect is "Great Shock Robot Battle," the title has eight characters, the font size of the title is FK, and the display area size in which the title is displayed is EKC.

The title of the Low Base Strongest Reach performance is "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!", the title has 13 characters, the font size of the title is FSK, and the display area size in which the title is displayed is ESK.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-49 (A), the font size of the decorative pattern (large) before the Super Reach performance develops is KD, and the font size of the decorative pattern (small) after the Super Reach performance develops is KS.

Comparing the font sizes of the title characters in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 11-49 (B), the font size FK of the title characters in the low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, and low base strong reach C effects, which have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A effects and low base weak reach B effects, is larger than the font size FJ of the title characters in the low base weak reach A effects and low base weak reach B effects. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters making up the title characters in the low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, and low base strong reach C effects is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters making up the title characters in the low base weak reach A effects and low base weak reach B effects.

In addition, the font size FSK of the title characters of the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher chance of winning than the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base weak reach C effect, is larger than the font size FK of the title characters of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the low base strongest reach effect is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-49 (B), the font size FJ of the title characters in the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, the font size FK of the title characters in the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance and the low base strong reach C performance, and the font size FSK of the title characters in the low base strongest reach performance are all smaller than the font size KD of the decorative pattern (large) before the performance develops into a super reach performance, and larger than the font size KS of the decorative pattern (small) after the performance develops into a super reach performance. Furthermore, the size of the largest character making up the title characters in the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, the size of the largest character making up the title characters in the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect and the low base strong reach C effect, and the size of the largest character making up the title characters in the low base strongest reach effect are all smaller than the size of the smallest character that can be made up of the decorative pattern (large) before the effect develops into a super reach effect, and the size of the smallest character making up the title characters in the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, the size of the smallest character that can be made up of the title characters in the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect and the low base strong reach C effect, and the size of the smallest character that can be made up of the title characters in the low base strongest reach effect are all larger than the size of the largest character that can be made up of the decorative pattern (small) after the effect develops into a super reach effect.

Comparing the display area sizes of the title characters in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 11-49 (C), the display area sizes EKA, EKB, and EKC of the title characters for the low base strong reach A, low base strong reach B, and low base strong reach C effects, which have a higher chance of winning than the low base weak reach A and low base weak reach B effects, are larger than the display area sizes EJA, EJB of the title characters for the low base weak reach A and low base weak reach B effects, and the display area size ESK of the title characters for the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher chance of winning than the low base strong reach A, low base strong reach B, and low base weak reach C effects, is larger than the display area sizes EKA, EKB, and EKC of the title characters for the low base strong reach A, low base strong reach B, and low base strong reach C effects.

[About the expected level indication]
Figure 11-50 is a diagram showing the execution status of the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the super reach effect.

As shown in Figure 11-50 (A), the expectation indication displayed in the title display section consists of five star-shaped objects and the word "expectation" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation level. The expectation level is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects whose color has changed from black to gold among the five.

When displaying the expectation level indication, the performance control CPU 120 first displays five star-shaped objects in black, as shown in Figure 11-50 (A), and displays the word "expectation level" to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation level. Then, the performance control CPU 120 gradually changes the color of the multiple star-shaped objects that are to change from black to gold, starting from the left. Furthermore, when changing a star-shaped object from black to gold, the performance control CPU 120 highlights the corresponding star-shaped object and then changes it back to its normal gold color.

At this time, as shown in Figure 11-50 (B), the performance control CPU 120 enlarges the star-shaped object that is changing color, changes its color to white so that it shines from the center to the periphery, and then changes the entire enlarged object to white until the outline disappears, and then displays the star-shaped object with all or half of it changed to gold. In particular, for the second and third star-shaped objects, the CPU 120 enlarges the enlarged star-shaped object to a size where part of it overlaps with part of the word "Expectation Level," which indicates that the star-shaped object indicates the expectation level. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 highlights the object in a common manner whether changing the entire star-shaped object from a black to gold or changing half of the star-shaped object to gold.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-50 (A), when changing multiple star-shaped objects to gold, the performance control CPU 120 starts highlighting the star-shaped object one block away at the timing (t1) before the highlighting of the star-shaped object that started highlighting first ends and returns to normal display. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 does not start highlighting the star-shaped object two blocks away until the highlighting of the star-shaped object that started highlighting first ends at the timing (t2), and starts highlighting the star-shaped object two blocks away at the timing (t2) when the highlighting of the star-shaped object that started highlighting first ends. In other words, the highlighting of two adjacent star-shaped objects overlaps, but three star-shaped objects are not highlighted simultaneously and overlap each other.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-50 (A), the performance control CPU 120 outputs an expectation level indication sound from speakers 8L and 8R at the timing when the highlighting of a star-shaped object begins, and when multiple star-shaped objects are changed to gold, it ends the output of the expectation level indication sound associated with the highlighting of the star-shaped object that began highlighting earlier before the highlighting of the next star-shaped object begins, so that the sound is not output overlapping with the expectation level indication sound associated with the highlighting of the next star-shaped object.

[About selection effects]
11-51 is a diagram showing the execution status of the selection effect. The selection effect is an effect that specifies which type of super reach effect will be executed when a low base strong reach A to C effect or a low base strongest reach effect is executed directly from a normal reach effect without going through a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect.

When a selection effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes a normal reach effect as shown in FIG. 11-51 (h1), and then displays a window in the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-51 (h2), displaying the title of the selection effect in that window. The title of the selection effect displays the message "Upgrade your reach!", suggesting that a selection effect will be executed.

Next, as shown in Figures 11-51 (h2) to (h8), the effect control CPU 120 displays in the window a title image of the super reach effect and an operation prompt image consisting of a button image imitating the push button 31B and the operation prompt text "Press repeatedly!" to encourage continuous operation of the push button 31B. The title image of the super reach effect is an image with the same content as the display content during the title display period in the title display part of each super reach effect, and the title images of the low base strong reach effects A to C and the low base strongest reach effect also display an indication of the expected level.

The effect control CPU 120 first displays the title image of the Super Reach effect in the window as the title image of the Super Reach effect, which has a jackpot expectation of 0 and the lowest expectation of development to other Super Reach effects. Each time an operation of the number of times push button 31B corresponding to the title image of the displayed Super Reach effect is detected, the CPU 120 switches to the title image of the next Super Reach effect until it shows the title image of the Super Reach effect corresponding to the type of variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command.

As shown in Figures 11-51 (h2) to (h8), the title images of the Super Reach effects displayed in the window switch in the following order: the title image of the low base weak reach A effect, which has the lowest expectation of development into other Super Reach effects, followed by the title image of the low base weak reach B effect, which has a higher expectation of development into other Super Reach effects than the low base weak reach A effect, the title image of the low base strong reach A effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A and B effects, the title image of the low base strong reach B effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A effect, the title image of the low base strong reach C effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach B effect, and the title image of the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach C effect.

Then, when the title image of the super reach effect corresponding to the type of variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command appears, the effect control CPU 120 detects operation of the number of times push button 31B corresponding to the displayed title image of the super reach effect, and displays a confirmation image in which the operation prompt image disappears and only the title image of the super reach effect is displayed in the window, as shown in Figure 11-51 (h9), notifying the player that the super reach effect of the displayed title image will be executed, and then transitions to the title display part of that super reach effect.

As shown in Figure 11-52, push button 3B was operated three times to switch from the title image of the low base weak reach A effect to the title image of the low base weak reach B effect, push button 31B was operated four times to switch from the title image of the low base weak reach B effect to the title image of the low base strong reach A effect, push button 31B was operated eight times to switch from the title image of the low base strong reach A effect to the title image of the low base strong reach B effect, and push button 31B was operated eight times to switch from the title image of the low base strong reach B effect to the title image of the low base strong reach B effect. The number of times push button 31B is operated to switch to the title image of the Reach C effect is 10, and the number of times push button 31B is operated to switch from the title image of the low base strong Reach C effect to the title image of the low base strongest Reach effect is 15; the higher the developmental attitude of the Super Reach effect of the title image being switched to other Super Reach effects or the higher the expected jackpot, the more times push button 31B must be operated to switch to the next title image, and the more times push button 31B must be operated.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-52, when a selection effect is executed, the low base weak reach A and B effects will never be executed, and a super reach effect with a jackpot expectation level equal to or higher than the low base strong reach A effect will always be executed. The probability that the low base strong reach A effect will be executed is approximately 32.18%, the probability that the low base strong reach B effect will be executed is approximately 30.16%, the probability that the low base strong reach C effect will be executed is approximately 30.30%, and the probability that the low base strongest reach effect will be executed is approximately 7.36%.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 will also display an expectation suggestion display in the title images of the low base strong reach A-C effects and the low base strongest reach effect in the selection effect, just like the title display part. However, the expectation suggestion display in the title display part displays five star-shaped objects in black, and multiple star-shaped objects that change from black to gold gradually change from black to gold in order from the left, whereas the expectation suggestion display displayed in the selection effect displays the number of star-shaped objects out of the five that indicates the expectation of the corresponding super reach effect in gold from the start.

The minimum time required for the title image of the Super Reach effect displayed during the selection effect to switch to the title image of the next Super Reach effect is the number of times corresponding to the title image of the Super Reach effect multiplied by the time required for one operation of push button 31B. The time required for one operation of push button 31B is approximately 80 ms, and to switch from the title image of the Low Base Weak Reach A effect to the title image of the Low Base Weak Reach B effect, push button 31B must be operated three times, and the minimum time required for this is approximately 240 ms.

On the other hand, the time it takes for the star-shaped object in the expectation suggestion display in the title display part to change from black to highlighted and then to gold, i.e., the time it takes for the suggested expectation level to change by one level, is approximately 300 ms, which is set longer than the minimum time required to switch from the title image of the low base weak reach A effect to the title image of the low base weak reach B effect. Therefore, in the selection effect, the effect control CPU 120 can switch the title image of the low base weak reach A effect to the title image of the low base weak reach B effect in a time shorter than the time it takes for the expected level suggested in the expectation suggestion display in the title display part to change by one level.

[About effects that can be performed during variable display]
11-53 is a diagram showing effects that can be executed during variable display. As shown in FIG. 11-53, effects that can be executed during variable display include explanatory text display effects, title color change effects, and operation prompt effects A to D.

The explanatory text display effect can be executed during the prologue display period in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, and displays explanatory text suggesting a high chance of a jackpot.

The title color change effect is an effect that can be performed during the title display period in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, and is an effect that changes the color of the title text from the initial white to red or gold.

Operation prompt effect A is an effect that can be executed in a normal reach effect, and displays an operation prompt image that prompts the operation of push button 31B, and notifies the player whether or not the effect will progress to a low-base weak reach effect A or B depending on the operation of push button 31B. Note that operation prompt effect A may also be configured to progress not only to a low-base weak reach effect A or B, but also to a low-base strong reach effect A-C or a low-base strongest reach effect depending on the operation of push button 31B.

Operation prompt effect B is an effect that can be executed at the end of the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, and displays an operation prompt image (small) or operation prompt image (large) that prompts the operation of push button 31B, and notifies the player whether or not the effect will develop into one of the low base strong reach A to C effects depending on the operation of push button 31B. Furthermore, in a configuration in which the low base weak reach A and B effects are notified of a jackpot as a result of the effect, operation prompt effect B may be configured to notify the player of whether or not a jackpot has occurred depending on the operation of push button 31B.

Operation prompt effect C is an effect that can be executed in the middle of the introductory part of the low-base strong reach effects A to C and the strongest reach effect. It displays an operation prompt image that prompts you to operate the push button 31B, and displays one of several types of cut-in images depending on the operation of the push button 31B.

Operation prompt effect D is an effect that can be executed at the end of the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, and displays an operation prompt image (small) or operation prompt image (large) that prompts the user to operate push button 31B, and notifies the user of the result of the effect, whether or not a jackpot has been achieved, depending on the operation of push button 31B.

The effect control CPU 120 determines during the preview effect determination process of the variable display start setting process whether to execute an explanatory text display effect during variable display, whether to execute a title color change effect and which color to change to, whether to execute operation prompt effect A, whether to display either an operation prompt image (small) or an operation prompt image (large) in operation prompt effect B, whether to execute operation prompt effect C and whether to display either a cut-in image (A) or a cut-in image (B), and whether to display either a operation prompt image (small) or an operation prompt image (large) in operation prompt effect D.

As shown in Figure 11-54 (A), in the preview effect determination process, if a variation pattern in which the low base strong reach A to C effects are executed is identified, a decision is made as to whether or not to execute the explanatory text display effect. In this case, if a variation pattern in which the effect results in a miss is identified, there is an 80% chance that it will not be executed, and a 20% chance that it will be executed. Furthermore, if a variation pattern in which the effect results in a jackpot is identified, there is a 20% chance that it will not be executed, and an 80% chance that it will be executed. In this way, if a variation pattern in which the effect results in a jackpot is identified, there is a higher chance that the explanatory text display effect will be executed than if a variation pattern in which a miss is identified. Therefore, the execution of the explanatory text display effect during the prologue display period in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects suggests a high possibility of a jackpot.

In this embodiment, the explanatory text display effect is executed during the prologue display period in the title display part, and the execution time of the low base strong reach A-C effect and the execution time of the title display part remain unchanged regardless of whether the explanatory text display effect is executed in the title display part of the low base strong reach A-C effect. However, the variation patterns in which the low base strong reach A-C effects are executed may include a first variation pattern and a second variation pattern with a longer variation time than the first variation pattern, and if the first variation pattern is specified, the explanatory text display effect is not executed, and if the second variation pattern is specified, the explanatory text display effect is executed using a variation time longer than the first variation pattern. In such a configuration, whether or not to execute the explanatory text display effect is not determined in the preview effect determination process, but rather whether or not to execute the explanatory text display effect is determined depending on whether the first variation pattern or the second variation pattern is specified. In this case, by determining the first and second variation patterns so that the likelihood of a jackpot is higher when the explanatory text display effect is executed than when the explanatory text display effect is not executed, the execution of the explanatory text display effect in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects suggests that there is a high possibility of a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 11-54 (B), in the preview effect determination process, when a variation pattern in which a low-base weak reach A or B effect is executed is identified, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a title color change effect, and if so, what color to change to. In this case, when a variation pattern in which the effect result is a miss is identified, non-execution (white) is determined 80% of the time, execution (red) is determined 20% of the time, and execution (gold) is not determined. Furthermore, when a variation pattern in which the effect develops into a low-base strong reach A-C effect or a low-base strongest reach effect is identified, non-execution (white) is determined 20% of the time, execution (red) is determined 75% of the time, and execution (gold) is determined 5% of the time. In this way, when a variation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect is identified, the execution of the title color change effect is decided at a higher rate than when a variation pattern that results in a miss is identified, so the change in color of the title letters in the title display part of the low base strong reach A and B effects suggests that there is a high possibility of development into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect. Furthermore, since execution (gold) is decided only when a variation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect is identified, the change in color of the title letters to gold in the title display part of the low base strong reach A and B effects confirms development into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect.

Furthermore, in a configuration that includes a variation pattern that results in a jackpot without developing into another super reach effect after the execution of a low base weak reach A or B effect, when a variation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, the execution of a title color change effect may be decided at a higher rate than when a variation pattern that results in a miss is identified, and the color of the title letters in the title display part of the low base strong reach A or B effect may change to indicate the high possibility of a jackpot. Also, in such a configuration, execution (gold) may be decided only when a variation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, and a jackpot may be confirmed when the color of the title letters in the title display part of the low base strong reach A or B effect changes to gold.

As shown in Figure 11-54 (C), in the preview effect determination process, if a variation pattern that results in a miss from a normal reach effect or a variation pattern that develops from a normal reach effect to a low-base weak reach A or B effect is identified, a decision is made as to whether or not to execute operation prompt effect A. In this case, if a variation pattern that results in a miss is identified, there is a 50% chance that it will not be executed, and a 50% chance that it will be executed. Furthermore, if a variation pattern that develops into a low-base weak reach A or B effect is identified, there is a 100% chance that it will be executed. In this way, execution is always decided when a variation pattern that develops into a low-base weak reach A or B effect is identified, and execution may also be decided when a variation pattern that results in a miss is identified. Therefore, executing operation prompt effect A in a normal reach effect suggests the possibility of it developing into a low-base weak reach A or B effect.

As shown in Figure 11-54 (D), in the preview effect determination process, if a variation pattern is identified in which the result of the low base weak reach A or B effect is a miss, or a variation pattern in which the low base weak reach A or B effect develops into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect, it is determined whether to display a small operation prompt image or a large operation prompt image. In this case, if a variation pattern in which the result is a miss is identified, a small operation prompt image is determined 90% of the time, and a large operation prompt image is determined 10% of the time. Furthermore, if a variation pattern in which the result develops into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect is identified, a small operation prompt image is determined 10% of the time, and a large operation prompt image is determined 90% of the time. In this way, when a fluctuation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect is identified, the large operation prompt image is determined at a higher rate than when a fluctuation pattern that results in a miss is identified. Therefore, when a large operation prompt image is displayed in operation prompt effect B at the end of the introductory part of a low base weak reach A or B effect, it is suggested that there is a higher possibility of the effect developing into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect than when a small operation prompt image is displayed.

As shown in Figure 11-54 (E), in the preview effect determination process, when a variation pattern in which a low-base strong reach A-C effect or a low-base strongest reach effect is executed is identified, a determination is made as to whether to execute operation prompt effect C, and whether to display cut-in image (A) or cut-in image (B) if operation prompt effect C is executed. In this case, when a variation pattern in which the effect result is a miss is identified, non-execution is determined 50% of the time, execution (cut-in image (A)) is determined 30% of the time, and execution (cut-in image (B)) is determined 20% of the time. Furthermore, when a variation pattern in which the effect result is a jackpot is identified, non-execution is determined 5% of the time, execution (cut-in image (A)) is determined 30% of the time, and execution (cut-in image (B)) is determined 65% of the time. In this way, when a variation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, the execution of operation prompt effect C is determined at a higher rate than when a variation pattern that results in a miss is identified, and therefore, the execution of operation prompt effect C at the end of the introductory part of the low base strong reach A-C effects suggests that there is a high possibility of a jackpot. Furthermore, when a variation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, the cut-in image (B) out of cut-in image (A) and cut-in image (B) is displayed at a higher rate than when a variation pattern that results in a miss is identified, and therefore, the operation prompt effect C is executed at the end of the introductory part of the low base strong reach A-C effects, and it suggests that there is a higher possibility of a jackpot when cut-in image (B) is displayed than when cut-in image (A) is displayed.

As shown in Figure 11-54 (F), in the preview effect determination process, when a variation pattern in which a low-base strong reach A-C effect or a low-base strongest reach effect is executed is identified, it is determined whether to display a small operation prompt image or a large operation prompt image. In this case, when a variation pattern in which the effect result is a miss is identified, a small operation prompt image is determined 90% of the time, and a large operation prompt image is determined 10% of the time. Furthermore, when a variation pattern in which the effect result is a jackpot is identified, a small operation prompt image is determined 10% of the time, and a large operation prompt image is determined 90% of the time. In this way, when a variation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, the large operation prompt image is determined at a higher rate than when a variation pattern that results in a miss is identified. Therefore, when a large operation prompt image is displayed in operation prompt image D at the end of the introductory part of the low base strong reach A-C effects and the low base strongest reach effect, it is suggested that there is a higher chance of a jackpot than when a small operation prompt image is displayed.

[About the explanatory text display]
FIG. 11-55 is a diagram showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display performance, and FIG. 11-56 is a timing chart showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display performance.

During the prologue display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects, the effect control CPU 120 displays the ally character "Yume Yume" as shown in Figures 11-55 (A) to (I), and then enlarges and displays the ally character "Yume Yume" until the entire display area is filled.When an explanatory text display effect is performed during the prologue display period, the explanatory characters that make up the explanatory text, "Surprise!", "Peach tree", and "Great luck!", are displayed in order on a layer in front of the background that the ally character "Yume Yume" enlarges and displays. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 first displays the explanatory text "Surprise!", moving it quickly from the right side of the display area toward the center and to the left (Fig. 11-56(t1)), as shown in Fig. 11-55(A), then, when it reaches the center, moves it slowly to the left (Fig. 11-56(t2)), as shown in Fig. 11-55(B), and then, as shown in Fig. 11-55(C), moves it quickly again to the left until it disappears from the display area (Fig. 11-56(t3)).

Next, as shown in Figure 11-55(D), the performance control CPU 120 displays the explanatory text "Peach Tree" while moving it quickly to the left from the right side of the display area toward the center (Figure 11-56(t4)), and when it reaches the center, as shown in Figure 11-55(E), it displays it while moving it slowly to the left (Figure 11-56(t5)), and then, as shown in Figure 11-55(F), it displays it while moving it quickly to the left again until it disappears from the display area (Figure 11-56(t6)).

Next, as shown in Figure 11-55(G), the performance control CPU 120 displays the explanatory text "Lucky!" while moving it quickly to the left from the right side of the display area toward the center (Figure 11-56(t7)), and when it reaches the center, as shown in Figure 11-55(H), it displays it while moving it slowly to the left (Figure 11-56(t8)), and then, as shown in Figure 11-55(I), it displays it while moving it quickly to the left again until it disappears from the display area (Figure 11-56(t9)).

[About the title color change effect]
FIG. 11-57 is a diagram showing the execution status of the title color change effect, and FIG. 11-58 is a diagram showing the timing at which the color of the title characters changes in the title color change effect.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute a title color change effect in which the white title text changes to red or gold in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects.

During the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the effect control CPU 120 causes some of the white title characters to appear from the left side of the display area during the title start period, move toward a fixed position, and stop them in that position. Then, during the title display period, the effect control CPU 120 displays the white title characters stationary in their fixed positions, as shown in Figure 11-57(A). Then, if the execution of a title color change effect has not been determined, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a specific sound from speakers 8L and 8R after time t1 has elapsed since the start of the title display period, and maintains the white title characters stationary in their fixed positions, as shown in Figures 11-57(B) and (C). Then, during the title end period, the white title characters displayed in their fixed positions move from their fixed positions to the right side of the display area until all of the title characters disappear.

On the other hand, if the execution of a title color change effect has been determined, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a specific sound from speakers 8L and 8R after time t1 has elapsed since the start of the title display period, and changes the title characters displayed in their fixed positions to appear to glow, as shown in Figure 11-57(D). After time t2 has elapsed, if a change to red has been determined, the title characters change to red, as shown in Figure 11-57(E). If a change to gold has been determined, the title characters change to gold, as shown in Figure 11-57(F). Thereafter, during the title end period, the title characters are moved from their fixed positions to the right side of the display area, maintaining the changed color displayed in their fixed positions, until all of the title characters have disappeared. If the title characters change from appearing to glow to red or gold, the title characters change to red or gold when the light on the title characters clears.

As shown in Figures 11-58 (A) and (B), the presentation time T1 of the title start period of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B presentations is set to 500 ms, the presentation time T2 of the title display period is set to 2200 ms, and the presentation time T3 of the title end period is set to 300 ms. During the title display period, the time t1 from the start of the title display period to the title characters changing to a state where they appear to glow is set to 800 ms, the time t2 from the title characters changing to a state where they appear to glow to the title characters changing to red or gold is set to 200 ms, and the time t3 from the title characters changing to red or gold to the end of the title display period is set to 1200 ms.

For this reason, as shown in Figure 11-58 (C), when the color of the title characters changes from white to red or gold, the time (t3) during which the title characters are displayed in their changed red or gold form during the title display period is longer than the time (t1) during which the title characters are displayed in their white form during the title display period, and the time (t3 + T3) during which the title characters are displayed in their changed red or gold form during the title display part is longer than the time (T1 + t1) during which the title characters are displayed in their white form during the title display part.

[About Operation Promotion A]
Figure 11-59 shows the execution status of operation promotion presentation A.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute operation prompt effect A, which prompts the player to operate the push button 31B, during normal reach effects.

When it has been decided to execute operation prompt effect A, as shown in Figures 11-59 (A) and (B), during the execution of a normal reach effect in which the decorative pattern (large) is in a reach state, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation prompt image (small) consisting of a button image (small) that resembles the push button 31B and operation prompt text (small) "Press!" that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B.

The button image (small) has a remaining time meter that indicates the remaining time of the valid period during which operation of the push button 31B is valid. If operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches 0, or if the remaining time meter reaches 0, the effect control CPU 120 executes a whiteout effect in which the entire display area is displayed in white, as shown in Figure 11-59 (C), and then executes a low base weak reach A or B effect, as shown in Figure 11-59 (D).

On the other hand, in the case of a variation pattern that results in a loss, the performance control CPU 120 erases the operation prompt image (small) and stops the decorative pattern (large) in a loss state, as shown in Figure 11-59 (E).

[About Operation Promotion Presentation B]
Figure 11-60 shows the execution status of operation promotion presentation B.

In low-base weak reach A and B effects, the effect control CPU 120 can execute operation prompt effect B, which prompts the player to operate the push button 31B, at the end of the introductory part.

When the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute operation prompt performance B and to display a small operation prompt image, it displays a small operation prompt image consisting of a small button image resembling push button 31B and small operation prompt text "Press!" encouraging the player to operate push button 31B at the end of the introductory part, as shown in Figure 11-60 (A).

Furthermore, when the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute operation prompt performance B and to display an operation prompt image (large), it displays an operation prompt image (large) at the end of the introductory part, as shown in Figures 11-60(B) and (C), which is an image resembling push button 31B and is larger than the small button image, and which consists of operation prompt text (large) "PRESS!" encouraging the player to operate push button 31B. In this case, unlike when displaying an operation prompt image (small), the performance control CPU 120 displays multiple button images (large) with a transparent background and combines these multiple button images (large) into a single large button image, and then displays an operation prompt image (large) consisting of a button image (large) and operation prompt text (large) "PRESS!" encouraging the player to operate push button 31B.

Both the small button image and the large button image have a remaining time meter formed on them, and if the operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches 0, or if the remaining time meter reaches 0, and the fluctuation pattern develops into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 erases the small operation prompt image or large operation prompt image as shown in Figure 11-60 (D) and executes a drop effect in which the movable body 32 falls, and then executes a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect as shown in Figure 11-60 (E).

On the other hand, in the case of a variation pattern that results in a loss, the performance control CPU 120 erases the small operation prompt image or large operation prompt image, as shown in Figure 11-60 (F), and executes a blackout performance in which the entire display area goes dark, and then notifies the player of a loss as the performance result, as shown in Figure 11-60 (G).

[About operation promotion effect C]
Figure 11-61 is a diagram showing the execution status of operation prompting effect C.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute operation prompt effect C, which prompts the player to operate the push button 31B, in the middle of the introductory part of the low-base strong reach A-C effects and the low-base strongest reach effect.

When it has been decided to execute operation prompting effect C, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting image (small) consisting of a button image (small) resembling the push button 31B and operation prompting text (small) "Press!" encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B in the middle of the introductory part, as shown in Figures 11-61 (A) and (B).

The performance control CPU 120 has determined that a cut-in image (A) will be displayed. If operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches zero, the operation prompt image (small) is erased as shown in Figure 11-61(C), and a cut-in image (A) showing the ally character "Nana" is displayed, and then the introductory part continues as shown in Figure 11-61(F).

The performance control CPU 120 also determines that a cut-in image (B) will be displayed. If operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches zero, the operation prompt image (small) is erased as shown in Figure 11-61 (D), and a cut-in image (B) showing the ally character "Jam" is displayed, and then the introductory part continues as shown in Figure 11-61 (F).

In addition, whether it has been determined that cut-in image (A) or cut-in image (B) should be displayed, if operation of push button 31B is not detected before the remaining time meter reaches zero, the performance control CPU 120 will erase the operation prompt image (small) while continuing the performance of the middle part of the introductory part, as shown in Figure 11-61 (E), and will continue the introductory part as shown in Figure 11-61 (F).

[Regarding Operation Promotion Effects D]
Figure 11-62 is a diagram showing the execution status of operation prompting effect D.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute operation prompt effect D, which prompts the player to operate the push button 31B, at the end of the introductory part of the low-base strong reach A-C effects and the low-base strongest reach effect.

When it has been determined that a small operation prompt image should be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays a small operation prompt image consisting of a small button image resembling the push button 31B and small operation prompt text "Press!" encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B at the end of the introductory part, as shown in Figures 11-62 (A) and (B).

Furthermore, when it has been determined that a large operation prompt image will be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays a large operation prompt image at the end of the introductory part, as shown in Figures 11-62(A)(G), which is an image resembling push button 31B and is larger than the small button image, and which includes large operation prompt text "Press!" encouraging the player to operate push button 31B. Unlike when a small operation prompt image is displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays multiple large button images with a transparent background and performs a promotional introduction performance (see Figure 11-60(B)) in which these multiple large button images are combined into a single large button image, and then displays a large operation prompt image consisting of a large button image and large operation prompt text "Press!" encouraging the player to operate push button 31B.

If the operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches 0, or if the variation pattern indicates a jackpot when the remaining time meter reaches 0, the effect control CPU 120 executes a rainbow effect in which a rainbow pattern swirls across the entire display area while the operation prompt image (small) or operation prompt image (large) gradually disappears, as shown in Figure 11-62 (C) (H), and then announces a jackpot as the effect result, as shown in Figure 11-62 (D) (I).

On the other hand, in the case of a variation pattern that results in a loss, the performance control CPU 120 erases the small operation prompt image or the large operation prompt image, as shown in Figure 11-62 (E) (J), and executes a blackout performance in which the entire display area goes dark, and then notifies the player of a loss as the performance result, as shown in Figure 11-62 (F) (K).

[About the operation promotion image]
11-63 is a diagram showing the display mode of the operation prompt image. The performance control CPU 120 displays the button images that make up the operation prompt image (small) and the operation prompt image (large) while continuously moving alternately left and right as shown in FIG. 11-63(A), and also displays them while continuously changing between a state in which the button is not pressed and a state in which the button is pressed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 11-63(B), the interval at which the button image moves left and right is different from the interval at which the button changes from a state in which the button is not pressed to a state in which the button is pressed. Therefore, the movement of the button image moving left and right and the movement at which the button changes from a state in which the button is not pressed to a state in which the button is pressed are not synchronized, resulting in a complex movement.

[About the jackpot start effect]
Figure 11-64 shows the execution status of the jackpot start effect.

As shown in Figure 11-64 (A), after the decorative symbol (large) stops in a jackpot state, the effect control CPU 120 executes the jackpot start effect when it receives a jackpot start command that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of the jackpot game state.

As shown in Figures 11-64(B) to (G), the presentation control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image of flickering flames as the background during the jackpot start presentation, and as shown in Figure 11-64(B), first displays the first half of the jackpot title "BIG BONUS (REG BONUS)" - "BIG (REG)" - in an enlarged size, and then, as shown in Figure 11-64(C), gradually reduces the first half of the title "BIG (REG)" until it is reduced in size so that the entire title is visible in the display area, and displays it in a fixed position near the top center of the display area.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-64(D), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the latter half of the title letters "BONUS" in the title letters "BIG BONUS (REG BONUS)" in an enlarged size, and then, as shown in Figure 11-64(E), gradually reduces the size of the latter half of the title letters "BONUS" until it is reduced so that the entire latter half is visible in the display area, and displays it in its usual position below the center of the display area (below the first half of the title letters "BIG").

In this embodiment, if the jackpot type is a 6-round jackpot game state, the title text will be "REG BONUS," and if the jackpot type is a 10-round jackpot game state, the title text will be "BIG BONUS."

Next, as shown in Figures 11-64(E) to (G), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the entire title text "BIG BONUS" in a fixed position, then gradually enlarges the title text "BIG BONUS", and then, as shown in Figure 11-64(H), starts the jackpot presentation and switches the display on the image display device 5 to the background of the jackpot game state.

When the performance control CPU 120 starts the jackpot performance, it first displays a right-hit promotion image (large) and a right-hit promotion image (small) to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, as shown in Figure 11-64 (H).

The right-hit promotion image (small) consists of the message "Right Hit" (small) that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and an arrow image (small) that indicates the right direction. As shown in Figures 11-64 (H) (I), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the right-hit promotion image (small) in a position toward the top right of the display area from the start of the jackpot presentation until the end of the jackpot game state.

The right hit promotion image (large) is a message encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R. It is composed of the message "Right Hit" (large), which is larger in size than the right hit promotion image (small), and an arrow image (large), which is an arrow pointing to the right and is larger in size than the arrow image (small). As shown in Figures 11-64 (H) (I), the presentation control CPU 120 repeatedly displays the right hit promotion image (large) in a manner that moves from the left side of the display area to the right side only for the first certain amount of time during the period from the start of the jackpot presentation until the end of the jackpot game state.

In addition, when the jackpot game state is entered, after the title text is displayed in the jackpot start effect, the effect switches to the jackpot mid-game, and a right-hit prompt image (small) and a right-hit prompt image (large) are displayed, suggesting the operation method for the jackpot game state (an operation method for shooting the game ball toward the right game area 2R). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 switches to the jackpot mid-game and displays the right-hit prompt image (small) and the right-hit prompt image (large) a predetermined time before the timing at which control is exercised on the main board 11 that gives an advantage by operating the game ball toward the right game area 2R. Therefore, a predetermined period of time after the right-hit prompt image (small) and the right-hit prompt image (large) are displayed, control is exercised that gives an advantage by operating the game ball toward the right game area 2R.

In addition, after the title characters are displayed during the jackpot start effect, when the jackpot start effect ends, the title characters are erased, and a switch is made to the next effect, the effect control CPU 120 erases the title characters of the jackpot start effect and switches to the next effect in a shorter time than when the title characters are erased during the title end period in the title display part of the super reach effect.

In particular, after the presentation control CPU 120 displays the title text in the jackpot start presentation, it switches to the jackpot mid-presentation in one frame (the smallest unit of image update) and displays a right-hit prompt image (small) and a right-hit prompt image (large). The title display portion of the super reach presentation is configured to erase the title text over a certain period of time, rather than one frame, by providing a title end period. However, if the title text is similarly erased over a certain period of time when the presentation switches to the jackpot mid-presentation and displays a right-hit prompt image (small) and a right-hit prompt image (large) after the title text is displayed in the jackpot start presentation, there is a risk that a player may attempt to launch the game ball toward the right play area 2R during the period in which the title text is being erased. However, if the game ball is launched toward the right play area 2R at this timing, the game ball will be wasted because the control that would be advantageous for launching the game ball toward the right play area 2R has not yet begun. In response to this, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the title text during the jackpot start presentation, and then switches to the jackpot mid-presentation in one frame (the smallest unit of image update) and displays the right hit prompt image (small) and right hit prompt image (large), thereby reducing the generation of wasted game balls.

[Display of remaining spins until Yu-time]
When the game control microcomputer 100 performs 900 variable displays without being controlled to a jackpot in a low probability state, it controls to a time-shortened state B (in this embodiment, a play time with 1100 time-shortened times) in which (1) time-shortened control is performed 1100 times and (2) low probability control is performed 1100 times.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can display on the image display device 5 the remaining number of times to reach rescue time reduction (hereinafter referred to as the remaining number of times until Yu-time) 131SG005Z (see Figure 11-1), which is the remaining variable display number of times until control is switched to time reduction state B (Yu-time).

As shown in Figure 11-65(A), in normal conditions when a normal reach effect, low base weak reach A or B effect, low base strong reach A-C effect, or low base strongest reach effect is not being executed, the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of times remaining until Yu-Time in the upper left corner of the display area. The number of times remaining until Yu-Time 131SG005Z is displayed as "XXX times remaining" (XXX is a number between 0 and 900 depending on the number of times remaining). In this case, whether the number of times remaining until Yu-Time is between 0 and 900, the number of times remaining until Yu-Time 131SG005Z is displayed in characters of the same font size.

As shown in Figure 11-65 (B), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to display the remaining number of plays until Yu-Time 131SG005Z even during the normal reach presentation in which the decorative symbol (large) is in a reach state.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-65(C), when a normal reach effect develops into a low base weak reach A or B effect, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z even while the low base weak reach A or B effect is being executed. In this case, as shown in Figures 11-65(D)(E), if a miss is announced as the result of the low base weak reach A or B effect, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z even after the low base weak reach A or B effect has ended.

In addition, the system is configured so that a jackpot can be announced as a result of the low base weak reach A and B effects, and when a jackpot is announced as a result of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the remaining number of times until Yu-time 131SG005Z continues to be displayed until the low base weak reach A and B effects end, and the remaining number of times until Yu-time 131SG005Z is erased at the end of the low base weak reach A and B effects. Furthermore, the remaining number of times until Yu-time 131SG005Z may be erased at the point when the content indicating that a jackpot has been confirmed as a result of the low base weak reach A and B effects is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11-65(F), when a normal reach effect or a low base weak reach A or B effect develops into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 erases the remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z upon the start of the low base strong reach A-C effect or the low base strongest reach effect. In this case, if the effect develops from a normal reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 erases the remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z at the start of the selection effect. When developing from a low base weak reach A or B effect, if the effect is a low base strong reach A-C effect, the effect control CPU 120 erases the remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z along with the pending and active displays during the prologue display period of the title display part. In the case of a low base strongest reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 erases the remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z at the start of the title display part.

Furthermore, when progressing from a low base weak reach A or B effect, the hold display and active display, as well as the remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z, can be erased at the timing when the drop effect begins as a result of the execution of operation prompt effect B (the timing shown in Figure 11-60 (D)). This allows the timing for erasing the hold display, active display, and remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z to be consistent regardless of whether the effect progresses to a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect.

Then, if a miss is announced as the result of the low base strong reach A-C effect or the low base strongest reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 will display the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until Yu-Time again after the low base strong reach A-C effect or the low base strongest reach effect has ended, as shown in Figures 11-65(G)(H). On the other hand, if a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base strong reach A-C effect or the low base strongest reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 will leave the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until Yu-Time is cleared until the next time the normal state is reached, as shown in Figures 11-65(I)(J).

Furthermore, if operation prompt effect A is configured to develop into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect in response to operation of push button 31B, remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z will continue to be displayed while operation prompt effect A is being executed, and remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z will be erased upon the start of the low base strong reach A-C effect or the low base strongest reach effect. With this configuration, remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z will be displayed in operation prompt effect A, but remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z will not be displayed in operation prompt effects C and D in the subsequent low base strong reach A-C effect or the low base strongest reach effect.

[About the Yu-time start effect]
When the game control microcomputer 100 performs 900 variable display cycles without being controlled by a jackpot in a low probability state, it controls to time-shortened state B (Yu-time). At this time, the game control microcomputer 100 turns on the right-hit lamp 131SG132 and sends a right-hit LED lighting notification command, as shown in Figure 11-66 (C). After that, the performance control CPU 120 stops the variable display when the number of remaining cycles until Yu-time is 0, as shown in Figures 11-66 (A) and (B). Upon receiving the right-hit LED lighting notification command, it displays a right-hit promotion image (small) that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, as shown in Figure 11-66 (C). The timing for lighting the right hit lamp 131SG132 and the timing for displaying the right hit promotion image (small) are almost simultaneous, but the game control microcomputer 100 lights up the right hit lamp 131SG132 and then sends a right hit LED lighting notification command, and in response, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the right hit promotion image (small), so the right hit lamp 131SG132 lights up before the right hit promotion image (small) is displayed.

When time-saving state B (Yu-time) begins, the game control microcomputer 100 keeps the right-hit lamp 131SG132 lit until time-saving state B (Yu-time) ends. The right-hit promotion image (small) is composed of the message "Right Hit" (small) encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and an arrow image (small) indicating the right direction. As shown in Figures 11-66 (C) to (H), when time-saving state B (Yu-time) begins, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the right-hit promotion image (small) in a position toward the top right of the display area until time-saving state B (Yu-time) ends.

When the variable display stops and the number of remaining plays until Yu-Time is 0, and a game state designation command specifying time-saving state B (Yu-Time) is received, the effect control CPU 120 executes the Yu-Time start effect as shown in Figures 11-66 (D) to (G).

The Yu-Time start effect includes a title start period from when part of the Yu-Time title text "Yu-Time Entering" is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until it is displayed in its regular position, a title display period during which the title text "Yu-Time Entering" is displayed in its regular position, and a title end period from when the title text "Yu-Time Entering" that was displayed in its regular position disappears and switches to the Yu-Time effect.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title text "Entering Yu-Time" in the same manner as when it displays the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" during the title start period, title display period, and title end period of the Yu-Time start effect in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect.

Specifically, during the title start period, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Yu-time Enter" at an enlarged size so that only a portion of the characters is visible in the display area, as shown in Figure 11-66 (D). At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Yu-time Enter" so that the entire display area is filled with a portion of the title characters. Thereafter, the presentation control CPU 120 gradually reduces the title characters "Yu-time Enter" as shown in Figures 11-66 (D) (E), and freezes the title characters "Yu-time Enter" in a fixed position at a reduced size so that all of the characters are visible in the display area.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the title text "Yu-time Enters" in a reduced size at a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to the title display period. During the title display period, the effect control CPU 120 displays the title text "Yu-time Enters" in a fixed position and stops it there, as shown in Figures 11-66 (E) and (F).

After the title display period ends, the presentation control CPU 120 transitions to the display of the title end period. During the title end period, as shown in Figures 11-66 (F) (G), the presentation control CPU 120 enlarges the title characters "Yu-Time Entering", which are displayed in a reduced size and at a fixed position, until the entire display area is filled with parts of the title characters "Yu-Time Entering". In this case, the title characters "Yu-Time Entering" are not enlarged in the opposite manner to when the title characters "Yu-Time Entering" are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, but are enlarged in a manner different from the reverse manner to when the title characters "Yu-Time Entering" are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, until the entire display area is filled with parts of the title characters "Yu-Time Entering". In other words, the trajectory taken by each part of the title characters as they shrink during the title start period is different from the trajectory taken by each part of the title characters as they expand during the title end period. Therefore, the display area is completely filled with part of the title text "Entering Yu-Time," which is different from the way the display area is completely filled at the start of the title start period. After that, as shown in Figure 11-66 (H), the background changes to the Yu-Time effect, and the Yu-Time effect begins.

During the Yu-Time start effect, the effect control CPU 120 displays a right-hit promotion image (large) that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, in addition to the right-hit promotion image (small), and also displays an addiction warning image (message "Be careful not to get addicted!") below the display area.

The right-hit promotion image (large) is a message encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R. It is composed of the message "Right Hit" (large), which is larger in size than the right-hit promotion image (small), and an arrow image (large), which is an arrow pointing to the right and is larger in size than the arrow image (small). The effect control CPU 120 repeatedly displays the right-hit promotion image (large) in a manner that moves from the left side to the right side of the display area throughout the period during which the Yu-time start effect is being executed, as shown in Figures 11-66 (D) to (G).

In addition, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to time-saving state B, and if the variable display result is a miss, it selects variable pattern PA1-4 with a special chart variable time of 500 ms to perform variable display, and is controlled to time-saving state B, and if the variable display result is a jackpot, it selects variable pattern PB1-18 with a special chart variable time of 500 ms + 15,000 ms to perform variable display, and the presentation control CPU 120 is configured to execute the Yu-time start presentation during the period when variable display according to these variable patterns is being performed when control of time-saving state B begins, but the game control microcomputer The microcomputer 100 may be configured to select a time-saving B start variable pattern having a variable time longer than that of variable pattern PA1-4 and corresponding to the Yu-Time start effect when the first variable display controlled to time-saving state B, i.e., when the first variable display based on the first game ball entering the first or second start winning slot after control is set to time-saving state B, results in a miss, and the effect control CPU 120 executes the Yu-Time start effect during the period when the variable display based on the time-saving B start variable pattern is being displayed in the first variable display controlled to time-saving state B. In this configuration, if the first variable display controlled to time-saving state B results in a jackpot, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variable display using variable pattern PB1-18, which has a special symbol variable time of 500 ms + 15,000 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the Yu-Time start effect and stops the decorative symbol (large) in a jackpot mode.

[Title characters, etc. 1]
Figure 11-67 is a diagram showing one form of the relationship between the title characters of the title display part in the super reach effect, the explanatory characters of the explanatory text display effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompting characters (small) in the operation prompting effect (small), and the operation prompting characters (large) in the operation prompting effect (large).

As shown in Figure 11-67 (A), the title characters of the Super Reach effect are displayed in a stationary state during the title display period, with the background image being either a still image (low base strong reach B and C effects, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A-D effects) or a moving image (low base weak reach A and B effects, low base strong reach A effect). Furthermore, the number of characters in the title characters of the Super Reach effect is 7 to 13, the display time of the title characters of the Super Reach effect (the time from when all the characters making up the title characters are displayed until at least a portion of the characters are no longer displayed) is LR, the font size of the title characters of the Super Reach effect is FR, and the display area size in which the title characters of the Super Reach effect are displayed is ER.

As shown in Figure 11-67(A), the explanatory text is displayed in an active state, with the background image being an active image. The number of explanatory text characters is 3 to 6, the display time (the time from when all characters constituting the explanatory text are displayed until at least a portion of the character string is no longer displayed) of the explanatory text (one of the three explanatory text characters) is LS, the font size of the explanatory text is FS, and the display area size in which the explanatory text (one of the three explanatory text characters) is displayed is ES.

As shown in Figure 11-67 (A), the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed in an animated state, and the background image at that time is an animated image. The title characters of the jackpot start effect have eight characters, the display time of the title characters of the jackpot start effect (the time from when all the characters making up the title characters are displayed until at least a portion of the characters are no longer displayed) is LB, the font size of the title characters of the jackpot start effect is FB, and the size of the display area in which the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed is EB.

As shown in Figure 11-67 (A), the operation prompt text (small) is displayed in an operating state, and the background image at that time is an operation image. The operation prompt text (small) contains three characters, the display time of the operation prompt text (small) (the valid operation period of the push button 31B during which the operation prompt text (small) is displayed without the push button 31B being operated) is L1P, the font size of the operation prompt text (small) is F1P, and the display area size in which the operation prompt text (small) is displayed is E1P.

As shown in Figure 11-67 (A), the operation prompt text (large) is displayed in an operating state, and the background image at that time is the operation image. The operation prompt text (large) contains three characters, the display time of the operation prompt text (large) (the valid operation period of the push button 31B during which the operation prompt text (large) is displayed without the push button 31B being operated) is L2P, the font size of the operation prompt text (large) is F2P, and the display area size in which the operation prompt text (large) is displayed is E2P.

In this embodiment, when comparing the display times of the title character, explanatory character, title character, operation prompt character (small), and operation prompt character (large) of the super reach effect, as shown in Figure 11-67 (B), the display time LB of the title character of the jackpot start effect is longer than the display times LR, LS, L1P, and L2P of the title character, explanatory character, operation prompt character (small), and operation prompt character (large) of the super reach effect, the display time LR of the title character of the super reach effect is longer than the display times LS, L1P, and L2P of the explanatory character, operation prompt character (small), and operation prompt character (large), and the display times LS and L1P of the operation prompt character (small) and operation prompt character (large) are set longer than the display time LS of the explanatory character. Additionally, the display times LR, LB, L1P, and L2P for the title characters of the super reach effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompt characters (small), and the operation prompt characters (large) are all set longer than the display time required for all three explanatory characters that make up the explanatory text display effect to be displayed. Furthermore, the relationship between these display times holds regardless of the type of super reach effect.

In this embodiment, when comparing the font sizes of the title characters, explanatory characters, title characters of the jackpot start effect, operation prompt characters (small), and operation prompt characters (large) of the super reach effect, as shown in Figure 11-67 (C), the font size F2P of the operation prompt characters (large) is larger than the font sizes FR, FS, FB, and F1P of the title characters, explanatory characters, title characters of the jackpot start effect, and operation prompt characters (small) of the super reach effect. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (large) is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters, explanatory characters, title characters of the super reach effect, title characters, operation prompt characters (small), and operation prompt characters (large).

Furthermore, the font size FB of the title characters of the jackpot start effect is larger than the font sizes FR and F1P of the title characters, explanatory characters, and small operation prompt characters of the Super Reach effect. Furthermore, the title characters "BIG BONUS" of the jackpot start effect are first displayed with the first half "BIG" at the top of the fixed position, followed by the second half "BONUS" at the bottom of the fixed position, and then the title characters "BIG BONUS" are gradually enlarged. When the first half "BIG" is displayed at the top of the fixed position and the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position, the size of the characters comprising the title characters "BIG BONUS" is at its smallest. In this configuration, when the first half "BIG" is displayed at the top of the fixed position and the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position, the size of the title characters of the jackpot start effect when the first half "BIG" is displayed at the top of the fixed position and the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position is larger than the size of the title characters, explanatory characters, and small operation prompt characters of the Super Reach effect. Furthermore, when the first half of "BIG" is displayed above the fixed position and the second half of "BONUS" is displayed below the fixed position, the size of the smallest character that makes up the title of the jackpot start effect is larger than the size of the largest character that makes up the title, explanation character, operation prompt character (small), and operation prompt character (large) of the super reach effect.

In addition, the font size FR of the title characters of the Super Reach effect is larger than the font sizes FS and F1P of the explanatory characters and operation prompt characters (small). Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Super Reach effect is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the explanatory characters and operation prompt characters (small).

Furthermore, the font size FS of the explanatory characters is larger than the font size F1P of the operation prompt characters (small). Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the explanatory characters is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (small).

Furthermore, these font size and character size relationships apply regardless of the type of Super Reach performance.

In this embodiment, when comparing the display area sizes of the title characters, explanatory characters, title characters, operation prompt characters (small), and operation prompt characters (large) of the super reach effect, as shown in Figure 11-67 (D), the display area size E2P of the operation prompt characters (large) is larger than the display area sizes ER, ES, EB, and E1P of the title characters, explanatory characters, title characters, and operation prompt characters (small) of the super reach effect. Furthermore, the display area size EB of the title characters of the jackpot start effect is larger than the display area sizes ER, ES, and E1P of the title characters, explanatory characters, and operation prompt characters (small) of the super reach effect. Furthermore, the display area size ES of the explanatory characters is larger than the display area size E1P of the operation prompt characters (small). Furthermore, these display area size relationships hold regardless of the type of super reach effect.

[Title characters, etc. 2]
Figure 11-68 is a diagram showing one aspect of the relationship between the title characters of the title display part in the super reach performance, the title characters of the jackpot start performance, the operation prompt characters (small) in the operation prompt performance (small), the operation prompt characters (large) in the operation prompt performance (large), the title characters of the Yu-time start performance, and the remaining number characters that make up the number of times remaining until Yu-time.

As shown in Figure 11-68 (A), the display time of the title characters in the Super Reach effect (the time from when all the characters making up the title characters are displayed until at least part of the characters are no longer displayed) is LR, the font size of the title characters in the Super Reach effect is FR, and the size of the display area in which the title characters in the Super Reach effect are displayed is ER.

As shown in Figure 11-68 (A), the display time of the title characters of the jackpot start effect (the time from when all the characters making up the title characters are displayed until at least part of the characters are no longer displayed) is LB, the font size of the title characters of the jackpot start effect is FB, and the size of the display area in which the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed is EB.

As shown in Figure 11-68 (A), the display time of the operation prompt character (small) (the valid operation period of the push button 31B during which the operation prompt character (small) is displayed even if the push button 31B is not operated) is L1P, the font size of the operation prompt character (small) is F1P, and the display area size in which the operation prompt character (small) is displayed is E1P.

As shown in Figure 11-68 (A), the display time of the operation prompt character (large) (the valid operation period of the push button 31B during which the operation prompt character (large) is displayed even if the push button 31B is not operated) is L2P, the font size of the operation prompt character (large) is F2P, and the display area size in which the operation prompt character (large) is displayed is E2P.

As shown in Figure 11-68 (A), the display time of the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect (the time from when all the characters making up the title characters are displayed until at least a part of the characters are no longer displayed) is LY, the font size of the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect is FY, and the size of the display area in which the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect are displayed is EY.

As shown in Figure 11-68 (A), the font size of the remaining number of plays until Yu-time is FZ, and the size of the display area in which the remaining number of plays until Yu-time is displayed is EZ.

In this embodiment, when comparing the font sizes of the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompt character (small), the operation prompt character (large), the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect, and the characters for the number of times remaining until Yu-Time, as shown in Figure 11-68 (B), the font size F2P of the operation prompt character (large) is larger than the font sizes FR, FB, F1P, FY, and FZ of the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompt character (small), the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect, and the characters for the number of times remaining until Yu-Time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters composing the operation prompt character (large) is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters composing the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompt character (small), the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect, and the characters for the number of times remaining until Yu-Time (XXX times remaining (X is a number between 0 and 900)). Additionally, the size of the smallest character that makes up the operation prompt character (large) is larger than the size of the largest character that makes up the remaining number of times until Yu-time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until Yu-time is between 0 and 900.

Furthermore, the font size FB of the title characters of the jackpot start effect is larger than the font sizes FR, F1P, FY, and FZ of the title characters of the super reach effect, the operation prompt characters (small), the title characters of the Yu-time start effect, and the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters composing the title characters of the jackpot start effect is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters composing the title characters of the super reach effect, the operation prompt characters (small), the title characters of the Yu-time start effect, and the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters composing the title characters of the jackpot start effect is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters composing the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until Yu-time is between 0 and 900.

Furthermore, the font size FY of the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect is larger than the font sizes FR, F1P, and FZ of the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the operation prompt characters (small), and the remaining number of times until Yu-Time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the operation prompt characters (small), and the remaining number of times until Yu-Time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the remaining number of times until Yu-Time, regardless of whether the remaining number of times until Yu-Time is 0 to 900.

Furthermore, the font size FR of the title characters of the Super Reach effect is larger than the font sizes F1P and FZ of the operation prompt characters (small) and the remaining number of times until Yu-Time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Super Reach effect is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (small) and the remaining number of times until Yu-Time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Super Reach effect is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the remaining number of times until Yu-Time, regardless of whether the remaining number of times until Yu-Time is 0 to 900.

Furthermore, the font size F1P of the operation prompt characters (small) is larger than the font size FZ of the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (small) is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (small) is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until Yu-time is 0 to 900.

Furthermore, these font size and character size relationships apply regardless of the type of Super Reach performance.

In this embodiment, when comparing the display area sizes of the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompt character (small), the operation prompt character (large), the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect, and the character indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-Time, as shown in Figure 11-68 (C), the display area size E2P of the operation prompt character (large) is larger than the display area sizes ER, EB, E1P, EY, and EZ of the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompt character (small), the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect, and the character indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-Time. Furthermore, the display area size EB of the title characters of the jackpot start effect is larger than the display area sizes ER, E1P, EY, and EZ of the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the operation prompt character (small), the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect, and the character indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-Time. Furthermore, the display area size EY of the title character of the Yu-Time start effect is larger than the display area sizes ER, E1P, and EZ of the title character, operation prompt character (small), and remaining number of times until Yu-Time of the Super Reach effect. Furthermore, the display area size ER of the title character of the Super Reach effect is larger than the display area sizes E1P and EZ of the operation prompt character (small) and remaining number of times until Yu-Time. Furthermore, the display area size E1P of the operation prompt character (small) is larger than the display area size EZ of the remaining number of times until Yu-Time. Furthermore, these display area size relationships hold regardless of the type of Super Reach effect.

In this version, when comparing the display time of the title characters for the Super Reach effect and the Yu-Time start effect, as shown in Figure 11-68 (D), the display time LY of the title characters for the Yu-Time start effect is set longer than the display time LR of the title characters for the Super Reach effect. Furthermore, this relationship between these display times holds regardless of the type of Super Reach effect.

Comparing the display modes of the title characters in the Super Reach effect and the Yu-Time start effect in this form, as shown in Figure 11-68 (E), in the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A-C effects, the title characters are displayed while moving from the left side of the display area to the center during the title start period, and are erased while moving from the center to the right side of the display area during the title end period. On the other hand, in the low base strongest reach effect and the Yu-Time start effect, the title characters are displayed while shrinking during the title start period, and are erased while expanding during the title end period.

[LED placement]
The game effect lamps 9 in this embodiment include frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4.

As shown in Figure 11-69, LED frames LWL1-LWL12 are arranged above the image display device 5 of the gaming machine frame 3 and surround the left side of the gaming area, while LED frames LWR2-LWR12 are arranged to surround the right side of the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. Furthermore, LED logos LL1-LL4 are positioned corresponding to the "POWERFUL II" logo formed on the front of the movable body 32. Furthermore, LED decorations LS1-LS5 are arranged in positions corresponding to the decorative parts formed on the gaming area 2L. Furthermore, LED attacca lamps LA1-LA4 are arranged in positions near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

The frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 are full-color LEDs made up of RGB (red, green, blue) light-emitting elements. The logo LEDs LL1-LL4 are red LEDs that can emit a single red light, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 are white LEDs that can emit a single white light.

[Mechanism of output to LED driver (lamp driver)]
Figure 11-70 is a diagram illustrating the mechanism for outputting data to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 outputs brightness data to the LED driver (also referred to as a lamp driver) for turning on, blinking, or extinguishing one or more of the LEDs included in the game effect lamp 9. Hereinafter, the control of turning on, blinking, or extinguishing lamps such as LEDs by the effect control CPU 120 is also referred to as lamp control. Based on the brightness data received from the effect control CPU 120, the LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 that is the target of lamp control to turn on, blink, or extinguish the lamp. Each game effect lamp 9 turns on, blink, or extinguish based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

More specifically, the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 stores a brightness data table containing brightness data for controlling each game effect lamp 9. The brightness data table includes an error brightness data table used when an error occurs, an SP reach brightness data table used during a super reach, and a background brightness data table.

Furthermore, the background brightness data table includes a normal background brightness data table used in the low-probability, low-base state (normal state), a fanfare background brightness data table used in the fanfare state in which a fanfare effect is executed, a jackpot background brightness data table used during a round in the jackpot gaming state, an ending background brightness data table used in the ending state in which an ending effect is executed to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a time-saving background brightness data table used in the low-probability, high-base state (time-saving state).

The above-mentioned background brightness data tables are used without overlapping, and one of the background brightness data tables is used depending on which of the multiple game states, such as normal state, fanfare state, jackpot game state, ending state, and time-saving state, is controlled. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the background brightness data tables for each game state being controlled, and outputs brightness data based on that background brightness data table to the LED driver. This allows each game effect lamp 9 to be controlled depending on the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, a priority is set for each of the error brightness data table, SP reach brightness data table, and background brightness data table. Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-70, the error brightness data table, SP reach brightness data table, and background brightness data table have the highest priority when used.

For example, if the Super Reach effect develops while outputting brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table in the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 uses the SP Reach brightness data table corresponding to the Super Reach effect in preference to the normal background brightness data table, and outputs brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table to the LED driver. As a result, if the Super Reach effect develops while the game effect lamps 9 are being lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the normal background brightness data table, the game effect lamps 9 are lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the Super Reach effect based on the SP Reach brightness data table. Note that while brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table is being output to the LED driver, brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. However, when the Super Reach effect ends and the state returns to normal, brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table is output to the LED driver. If a jackpot is hit and the fanfare state is entered, brightness data based on the fanfare background brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the presentation control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the game state being controlled, while outputting brightness data to the LED driver using the background brightness data table corresponding to that game state being controlled. However, if the effect progresses to a Super Reach effect, the SP Reach brightness data table corresponding to that Super Reach effect is used preferentially over the background brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the presentation control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the lamp control time using the background brightness data table. In other words, even while the presentation control CPU 120 is controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the SP Reach brightness data table, it continues to update the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table. However, because the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the SP Reach brightness data table, the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. Then, after the Super Reach effect ends, the effect control CPU 120 begins outputting the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table to the LED driver again, starting from the continuation of the brightness data that was being updated.

Furthermore, for example, if an error occurs while outputting brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table during a Super Reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 uses the error brightness data table corresponding to the error in preference to the SP Reach brightness data table, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver based on the error brightness data table. As a result, if an error occurs while the game effect lamp 9 is being lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the Super Reach effect based on the SP Reach brightness data table, the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the error based on the error brightness data table. Note that while brightness data based on the error brightness data table is being output to the LED driver, brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver, but when the error is cleared and the game returns to a gaming state during a Super Reach effect, brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the currently controlled Super Reach effect, while outputting brightness data to the LED driver using the SP Reach brightness data table corresponding to that Super Reach effect. However, if an error occurs, the error brightness data table corresponding to that error is used in preference to the SP Reach brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the lamp control time using the SP Reach brightness data table. In other words, even while the effect control CPU 120 is controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the error brightness data table, it continues to update the brightness data contained in the SP Reach brightness data table. However, because the brightness data contained in the SP Reach brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the error brightness data table, the brightness data contained in the SP Reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. After the error is resolved, the performance control CPU 120 resumes outputting the brightness data contained in the SP reach brightness data table to the LED driver, starting from the continuation of the brightness data that it had been updating.

[Lighting mode of game effect lamp]
In this embodiment, the lamps of each game effect lamp 9 are controlled by the output of brightness data to the LED driver by the performance control CPU 120 as described above. In this embodiment, terms such as "off,""almostoff,""on," and "flashing" are used to describe the lighting of each game effect lamp 9. As described above, the "on" and "flashing" modes of each game effect lamp 9 are also referred to as "lighting modes."

The term "off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and its brightness is 0. The term "almost off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is lit but its brightness is extremely low (for example, brightness "1" as described below).

For example, if the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as brightness data is "000," the corresponding LED will be "off." Also, if the brightness data (RGB data) is "111," the corresponding LED will be lit in white at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of an LED when its RGB data is "111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

When the R (Red) data defined as the brightness data for logo LEDs LL1-LL4 is "0," logo LEDs LL1-LL4 are "off." Furthermore, when the brightness data (R data) for logo LEDs LL1-LL4 is "1," logo LEDs LL1-LL4 are lit at an extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of logo LEDs LL1-LL4 when their R data is "1" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

When the W (White) data, which is defined as the brightness data for decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, is "0," decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 are "off." Furthermore, when the brightness data (W data) for decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 is "1," decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 are lit at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of logo LEDs LL1-LL4 when their W data is "1" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

The term "lit" includes constant lighting, in which the game effect lamp 9 is always lit, wave lighting, in which the multiple lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are switched from off to on in sequence, and hazy lighting, in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing brightness. Specifically, "lit" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the brightness data is any of "2" to "F." Note that brightness data is hexadecimal data that can be specified from "0" to "F," with "0" being no brightness, "1" being the lowest brightness, and "F" being the highest brightness.

The term "flashing" refers to a state of the game effect lamp 9 other than the above-mentioned "off" and "on" states, including states in which the brightness of each lamp alternates between a first brightness and a second brightness higher than the first brightness. For example, "flashing" includes repeatedly turning on and off or nearly off, and specifically, "flashing" includes alternating over time between brightness data of "2" to "F" and brightness data of "0" or "1." As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the lamp lighting state includes hazy lighting. However, while hazy lighting is a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing brightness, flashing differs from hazy lighting in that all of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 alternate between turning on and off or nearly off.

[Explanation about the game effect lamp]
Next, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained with reference to Figures 11-71 to 12-36.

[Regarding lamp control of game effect lamps using brightness data tables]
The CPU 120 for controlling the presentation uses a brightness data table stored in the ROM 121 to control the lamps to turn on/blink/turn off one or more of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 by lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 123 sets the sub-variation time in accordance with the variation pattern command sent from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that is decremented by 1 every frame (33 ms) of the displayed image. When the sub-variation time reaches the timing to start displaying corresponding to each part (for example, various displays in each part of the super reach effect), the display control unit 123 controls the display of the image display device 5 based on the image data (video data, animation data) stored in ROM 121. The display control unit 123 sets an extension command (for example, extension command BXXX (where "X" is any alphanumeric character)) corresponding to the effect display (effect scene) to be displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the display control it is performing, and sends the extension command to the effect control CPU 120. Based on the extension command received from the display control unit 123, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the effect display (effect scene) for which display control is performed by the display control unit 123.

Figure 11-71 is a diagram illustrating an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. As shown in Figure 11-71, for example, when the display control unit 123 performs display control on the title display part of a low-base weak reach A effect, it sends an extension command (B421) to the effect control CPU 120 to specify the title display part of the low-base weak reach A effect. Based on the extension command received from the display control unit 123, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table (weak reach common title (parent)) corresponding to the title display part of the low-base weak reach A effect.

The parent table stores information specifying which lamps (illuminated locations) among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are subject to lamp control, information specifying the child table to be referenced during lamp control for the lamps subject to lamp control, and information specifying the maximum time for which lamp control is performed. Note that the parent table only stores information about lamps subject to lamp control; it does not store information about lamps that are not subject to lamp control.

For example, in the parent table shown in Figure 11-74, frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 (XD_A_LWU_1_B421), logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD_A_LLOGO_B421), decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD_A_LSLMP_B421), and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD_A_LATAK_B421) are specified as targets for lamp control. Furthermore, a child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and 600,000 ms (600,000/10) is specified as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed by this child table. A child table: XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, and 600,000 ms (600,000/10) is specified as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed by this child table. ) is specified, and child table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, with 600,000 ms (600,000/10) specified as the maximum time for lamp control by this child table, and child table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to attaka lamps LA1 to LA4, with 600,000 ms (600,000/10) specified as the maximum time for lamp control by this child table.

As shown in Figure 11-71, when the performance control CPU 120 controls a lamp specified in a parent table using a specified child table, for example, if 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the maximum time, it subtracts 1 from the counter every 10 ms to time this 600,000 ms (10 minutes). In other words, the performance control CPU 120 performs the counter subtraction process 60,000 times to time 600,000 ms (10 minutes). The performance control CPU 120 controls the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table until a maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) has been timed. Furthermore, if the performance control CPU 120 receives a new extended command after receiving an extended command but before a maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) has elapsed, it will stop the lamp control in progress and perform lamp control of the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table specified in the newly received extended command. Note that while it is not anticipated that a performance display (performance scene) will take 600,000 ms, the maximum time for lamp control using the child table is set to 600,000 ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for a performance display (performance scene). This means that even if the performance control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason, it can continue the lamp control in progress for a maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes).

The child table stores, for each lamp (illuminated location) among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 that is the target of lamp control, information specifying the grandchild table to be referenced during lamp control and information specifying the execution time for lamp control, in the order in which each lamp control is performed.

For example, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 and the execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and the grandchild table: The execution time for lamp control by the table is 500 ms, the execution time for lamp control by grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and this grandchild table is 230 ms, and the execution time for lamp control by grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table is 600,000 ms, which are specified as the order in which lamp control by these grandchild tables is executed.

In addition, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), the following execution times are specified in the order in which lamp control by these grandchild tables will be performed: grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 and lamp control by this grandchild table: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and lamp control by this grandchild table: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and lamp control by this grandchild table: 230 ms, and grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and lamp control by this grandchild table: 600,000 ms.

In addition, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), the following execution time is specified for lamp control by grandchild table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 and this grandchild table: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and this grandchild table: 230 ms, and grandchild table: X_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table: 600,000 ms, in the order in which lamp control by these grandchild tables is executed:

In addition, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to the Attacka lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), the following execution time is specified for grandchild table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 and lamp control by this grandchild table: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and lamp control by this grandchild table: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and lamp control by this grandchild table: 230 ms, and grandchild table: X_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and lamp control by this grandchild table: 600,000 ms, in the order in which lamp control by these grandchild tables is executed.

As shown in Figure 11-71, when the performance control CPU 120 controls a target lamp using a grandchild table specified by a child table, it performs lamp control of the target lamp using the grandchild table specified first, measures the execution time corresponding to this grandchild table, and then performs lamp control of the target lamp using the grandchild table specified next, and repeats this process for all specified grandchild tables in the specified order. For example, in the case of the child table shown in Figure 11-75, for frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 until 500 ms is first measured, then lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 until 500 ms is measured, then lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 until 230 ms is measured, and then lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 until 600,000 ms is measured. It is not anticipated that a performance display (performance scene) will take 600,000 ms, but by setting the maximum lamp control time using the last specified grandchild table to 600,000 ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for the performance display (performance scene), it is possible to continue the ongoing lamp control for up to 600,000 ms (10 minutes) even if the performance control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason.

In addition, in the child table, when frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 are the targets of lamp control, one grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 may be specified as the grandchild table corresponding to frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, as shown in Figure 11-75, or two grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1 and XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1 may be specified as shown in Figure 11-75. When one grandchild table is designated as the grandchild table corresponding to the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the performance control CPU 120 uses this one grandchild table to perform the same lamp control for both the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12. On the other hand, when two grandchild tables are designated as the grandchild tables corresponding to the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the two grandchild tables to perform lamp control for the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, and uses the other grandchild table to perform lamp control for the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12. Therefore, when one grandchild table is specified as the grandchild table corresponding to frame LEDLWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2-LWR12, common lamp control is performed for frame LEDLWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2-LWR12, whereas when two grandchild tables are specified, individual lamp control is performed for frame LEDLWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2-LWR12.

The grandchild table stores, for each lamp (illuminated location) that is the subject of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, brightness data that is referenced during lamp control and information specifying the execution time for lamp control, in the order in which each lamp control is performed.

For example, in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, corresponding to frame LED LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LED LWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1), the following is the data: brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 100 ms, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, The order in which lamp control using this brightness data is specified is: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 40 ms.

In addition, in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the following are specified for logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1): brightness data: 0x0000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 100 ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 40 ms, in the order in which lamp control using this brightness data will be performed.

In addition, in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the following values are specified for decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD___LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1): Brightness data: 0x00000, Execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 100 ms, Brightness data: 0x00000, Execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, Brightness data: 0x66666, Execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, Brightness data: 0x66666, Execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, Brightness data: 0x66666, Execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 40 ms, in the order in which lamp control using this brightness data will be performed.

In addition, in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the following are specified for Attacka lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD___LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1): brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 100 ms, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 40 ms.

In the brightness data for the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1) in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL1, the values in the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL2 and LWR2, the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL3 and LWR3, and the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL4 and LWR4. The values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL4 and LWR4, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL5 and LWR5, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL6 and LWR6, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL7 and LWR7, and the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL8 and LWR8.

Also, as in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-81, when different grandchild tables are specified for frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 (XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1) and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1), in the brightness data for frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 (XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1), the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 represent the RGB values of frame LEDLWL1. the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL2, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL3, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL4, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL5, and the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL6, The values of the fourth to sixth lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL7, the values of the first to third lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL8, and in the brightness data of frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1), the values of the first to third lowest digits of the data corresponding to number 2 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR2, and the values of the fourth to sixth lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR3. The values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR4, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR5, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR6, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR7, and the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR8.

Furthermore, in the brightness data for logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the value in the fourth lowest digit indicates the R (Red) value of logo LED LL1, the value in the third lowest digit indicates the R value of logo LED LL2, the value in the second lowest digit indicates the R value of logo LED LL3, and the value in the fourth lowest digit indicates the R value of logo LED LL4.

Furthermore, in the brightness data for decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the value in the fourth lowest digit indicates the W (White) value of decorative LED LS1, the value in the third lowest digit indicates the W value of decorative LED LS2, the value in the second lowest digit indicates the W value of decorative LED LS3, and the value in the fourth lowest digit indicates the W value of decorative LED LS4.

In the brightness data for Attacka Lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of Attacka Lamp LA1, the values in the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of Attacka Lamp LA2, the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of Attacka Lamp LA3, and the values in the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of Attacka Lamp LA4.

The brightness data value corresponds to the current value output to the lamp being controlled. The frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 are composed of LEDs consisting of three elements: "R," "G," and "B." The brightness data for each element corresponds to the current value output to that element. Specifically, the brightness data has 16 current values ranging from 0 to F. When brightness data is 0, the current value is the minimum (e.g., 0), and when brightness data is F, the current value is the maximum. For example, when brightness data "A" is output to the "R" element, a current corresponding to the "A" brightness data flows through the "R" element. When brightness data "1" is output to the "G" element, a current corresponding to the "1" brightness data flows through the "G" element. When brightness data "F" is output to the "G" element, a current corresponding to the "F" brightness data flows through the "G" element.

The frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 can emit light in various colors by passing current corresponding to brightness data through each RGB element. Furthermore, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 can light up in colors corresponding to each performance or character by emitting light based on brightness data. For example, when brightness data "F00" is output from an LED lamp to an LED, a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up red. Furthermore, when brightness data "F0F" is output from an LED lamp to an LED, a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up magenta. Furthermore, when brightness data "FF0" is output from an LED lamp to an LED, a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up yellow.

In addition, logo LEDs LL1-LL4 can emit red light at a brightness corresponding to the brightness data by passing a current corresponding to the brightness data through the R (Red) element, and decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 can emit white light at a brightness corresponding to the brightness data by passing a current corresponding to the brightness data equally through the three "R", "G", and "B" elements.

As shown in Figure 11-71, when the performance control CPU 120 controls the target lamp by referring to the brightness data in the grandchild table, it first outputs the specified brightness data to the LED driver, measures the execution time corresponding to this brightness data, and then outputs the next specified brightness data to the LED driver, and this process is carried out in the specified order for all specified brightness data. For example, in the child table shown in FIG. 11-75, for frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the following brightness data is output to the LED driver until 100 ms is first counted: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000. Then, until 120 ms is counted, the following brightness data is output to the LED driver: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000. Then, until 120 ms is counted, the following brightness data is output to the LED driver: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000. The CPU 120 outputs 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000 to the LED driver, then outputs the following brightness data to the LED driver until 120 ms is reached: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, and then outputs 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA to the LED driver until 40 ms is reached. The LED driver then passes a current corresponding to the received brightness data through the specified LED. This allows the performance control CPU 120 to control each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the performance control CPU 120 has timers corresponding to each of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table, and controls the lamps based on the parent table, child table, and grandchild table by decrementing the timers at regular intervals (e.g., every 10 ms).

Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table, and when it has completed outputting brightness data up to the last specified location in that grandchild table, if the timer value corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table still remains, it starts outputting brightness data again from the first specified location in that grandchild table. On the other hand, if the timer value corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table becomes 0 while the performance control CPU 120 is outputting brightness data based on a grandchild table, it sets a timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying that child table, and starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table specified by that child table. This switches the grandchild table, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table after the switch.

The timer management of child tables by the performance control CPU 120 will be explained with reference to the figure. Figure 11-72 is a diagram to explain an example of lamp control using a grandchild table with timer management of a child table. As shown in Figure 11-72, in child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, 500 ms is specified as the time when lamp control is first performed for frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 is specified, 500 ms is specified as the time when lamp control is second performed and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 is specified, 230 ms is specified as the time when lamp control is third performed and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 is specified, and 600,000 ms is specified as the time when lamp control is fourth performed and grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 is specified. In the second and fourth grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, the brightness data (RGB data) for frame LED LWL1 to LWL12 is "0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499", "0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388", "0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499", "0x499388, 0x4995AA, It is specified to be executed at 100 ms intervals in the order "0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA." For ease of explanation, the luminance data for the first 100 ms will be referred to as data 1, the luminance data for the second 100 ms as data 2, the luminance data for the third 100 ms as data 3, and the luminance data for the fourth 100 ms as data 4.

When the performance control CPU 120 controls lamps for the second specified grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 of the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, it times the specified 500 ms by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 ms, and outputs the brightness data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 until the time reaches 500 ms.However, if the time has not yet reached 500 ms after outputting data 1 to data 4, it again outputs the brightness data to the LED driver in order, starting with the first data 1. When the timer reaches 500 ms, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, and begins outputting brightness data based on the next grandchild table specified by the child table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for the fourth specified grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 of the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, it times the specified 600,000 ms by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 ms, and outputs the brightness data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 until the time reaches 600,000 ms.However, if the time has not yet reached 600,000 ms after outputting data 1 to data 4, it again outputs the brightness data to the LED driver in order, starting with the first data 1. When the time reaches 600,000 ms, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2. At this time, because no next grandchild table is specified in the child table, it will begin outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1, which was specified first in the child table. However, unless some abnormality occurs, the time will not reach 600,000 ms, and if the next extension command is received from the display control unit 123 before the time reaches 600,000 ms, it will begin outputting brightness data based on the parent table, child table, and grandchild table specified in the newly received extension command.

As shown in the parent table in Figure 11-74, the maximum lamp control time by a child table is specified as 600,000 ms (10 minutes), and this 10-minute data in the parent table serves as a malfunction countermeasure. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 switches parent tables to control lamps based on performance control commands from the main board 11, but even if a malfunction occurs while lamp control is being performed based on a certain parent table and the performance control CPU 120 does not receive a performance control command from the main board 11, lamp control will be performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, preventing different lamps from being controlled one after another from the point where the malfunction occurred.

Furthermore, as shown in the child table in Figure 11-75, the execution time for lamp control by the last-specified grandchild table is specified as 600,000 ms (10 minutes).The 10-minute data in such a child table serves to prevent lamp control from being performed again by the first-specified grandchild table of the child table when the value of the timer corresponding to the child table reaches 0, due to the parent table's timer still remaining.

Furthermore, in the grandchild table, 600,000 ms (10 minutes) may be specified as the execution time for lamp control that references the last specified brightness data. This configuration prevents the 10-minute data in the brightness data from causing lamp control to be performed again using the brightness data specified first in the grandchild table when the timer corresponding to the grandchild table reaches 0, due to the child table's timer still remaining. By specifying 10-minute brightness data at the end of the grandchild table in this way, the lamp is maintained at a fixed light emission, preventing problems with continuous changes in lamp illumination. Furthermore, specifying brightness data spanning 600,000 ms (10 minutes) at the end of the grandchild table specified last in the child table can more effectively prevent problems with continuous changes in lamp illumination.

[Brightness data table used for Super Reach effects 1]
Figure 11-73 is a diagram showing a brightness data table used in the super reach effect.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and as shown in Figure 11-73, whether the effect control CPU 120 is executing a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect, in the title display part it controls the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 using a common weak reach common title that defines the lighting mode of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects as a brightness data table.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the low base weak reach A or B effect, it executes a title color change effect in the title display part, and when changing the title characters to red, it controls the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 using the common title common chance up red, which defines the light emission mode when changing the title characters to red in the title color change effect, as a brightness data table, whether in the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect or the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect. In addition, when the title color change effect is executed in the title display part and changing the title characters to gold, it controls the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 using the common title common chance up gold, which defines the light emission mode when changing the title characters to gold in the title color change effect, as a brightness data table, whether in the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect or the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect.

The execution time of the introduction part differs between the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect. As shown in Figure 11-73, when a low base weak reach A effect is executed, in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a weak reach system weak reach A introduction, which defines the lighting pattern specific to the introduction part of the low base weak reach A effect as a brightness data table. When a low base weak reach B effect is executed, in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a weak reach system weak reach B introduction, which defines the lighting pattern specific to the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect as a brightness data table.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect, and the low base strong reach C effect. As shown in Figure 11-73, whether the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect, or the low base strong reach C effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the title display part using a common strong reach common title that defines the lighting mode of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects as a brightness data table.

The execution times for the introduction parts of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect differ, and as shown in Figure 11-73, when a low base strong reach A effect is executed, in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a strong reach system strong reach A introduction, which defines the lighting pattern unique to the introduction part of the low base strong reach A effect as a brightness data table; when a low base strong reach B effect is executed, in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a strong reach system strong reach B introduction, which defines the lighting pattern unique to the introduction part of the low base strong reach B effect as a brightness data table; and in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a strong reach system strong reach C introduction, which defines the lighting pattern unique to the introduction part of the low base strong reach C effect as a brightness data table.

As shown in Figure 11-73, when executing a low-base strongest reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the title display part and introduction part using a brightness data table for the strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction, which defines a series of lighting patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach effect.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for the high base reach A, high base reach B, high base reach C, and high base reach D effects, and as shown in Figure 11-73, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the title display part using a common high base reach common title that defines the lighting mode of the title display part of the high base reach A to D effects as a brightness data table, regardless of whether the high base reach A, B, C, or D effect is being executed.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for the high base reach A performance, high base reach B performance, high base reach C performance, and high base reach D performance, but as shown in Figure 11-73, when a high base reach A performance is executed, in the introductory part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach reach A introduction, which defines the lighting pattern specific to the introductory part of the high base reach A performance as a brightness data table, and when a high base reach B performance is executed, in the introductory part, the lighting pattern specific to the introductory part of the high base reach B performance as a brightness data table. When a high base reach C performance is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach system reach C introduction in which the light emission mode specific to the introduction part of the high base reach C performance is defined as a brightness data table, and when a high base reach D performance is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach system reach D introduction in which the light emission mode specific to the introduction part of the high base reach D performance is defined as a brightness data table.

In this way, whether a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect is executed, the title display part uses a common weak reach-type common title as the brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9, thereby saving storage capacity for the brightness data table. Meanwhile, in the introduction part, whether a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using separate weak reach-type weak reach A introduction and weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, respectively. This makes it possible to set the game effect lamp 9 to emit different light depending on the content of each effect in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the introduction part before the effect result is introduced in the super reach effect.

In this embodiment, whether a low base weak reach A effect is executed or a low base weak reach B effect is executed, the title display part uses a common weak reach common title as a brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. However, the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects is provided with a weak reach title start which defines a unique lighting pattern for the title start period from when part of the title characters are displayed until they are displayed in their fixed position, and a weak reach title display which defines a unique lighting pattern after the title display period in which the title characters are displayed in their fixed position. When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, By sending an extended command specifying the start of a reach-type title, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: weak reach-type title start, and when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display period of the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B performances, by sending an extended command specifying the weak reach-type title display, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: weak reach-type title display. Also, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a low-base weak reach A performance or a low-base weak reach B performance, a common brightness data table may be used for either the brightness data table: weak reach-type title start or the weak reach-type title display, and a separate brightness data table with individual contents set for the other may be used.

In addition, when executing the low base weak reach A or B effect, if a title color change effect is executed in the title display part, whether it is a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the common title common chance up red (title common chance up gold) brightness data table, thereby saving storage capacity for the brightness data table.

In addition, whether a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, or a low base strong reach C effect is executed, the title display part uses a common strong reach common title as the brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9, thereby saving storage capacity for the brightness data table. Meanwhile, in the introduction part, when a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, or a low base strong reach C effect is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a separate strong reach A introduction, strong reach B introduction, or strong reach C introduction, respectively. This makes it possible to set the game effect lamp 9 to emit different light depending on the content of each effect in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, or low base strong reach C effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the introduction part before the effect result is introduced in a super reach effect.

In this embodiment, whether a low base strong reach A effect is executed, a low base strong reach B effect is executed, or a low base strong reach C effect is executed, the title display part is configured to use a common strong reach common title as a brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. However, the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects is provided with a strong reach title start which defines a unique lighting pattern for the prologue display period and the title start period from when part of the title characters are displayed until they are displayed in the fixed position, and a strong reach title display which defines a unique lighting pattern after the title display period in which the title characters are displayed in the fixed position, and the display control unit 123 controls the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects. When display control of the title is started, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 by sending an extended command specifying the start of a strong reach title, using the brightness data table: strong reach title start, and when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display period of the title display part of the strong base weak reach A to C performance, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 by sending an extended command specifying the strong reach title display, using the brightness data table: strong reach title display. Furthermore, in such a configuration, depending on whether the effect is a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, or a low base strong reach C effect, a common brightness data table can be used for either the start of a strong reach title or the display of a strong reach title, and a separate brightness data table with individual content set for the other can be used.

In addition, the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects includes a strong reach prologue that defines a unique lighting pattern for the prologue display period, a strong reach title start that defines a unique lighting pattern for the title start period from when part of the title characters are displayed until they are displayed in their fixed position, and a strong reach title display that defines a unique lighting pattern for the title display period after the title characters are displayed in their fixed position.When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, it sends an extended command that specifies the strong reach prologue, and the effect control CPU 120 controls the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: strong reach prologue, and the display control unit 123 However, by sending an extended command specifying the strong reach title start when starting display control for the title start period of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performance, the performance control CPU 120 can use the brightness data table: strong reach title start to control the lamps of frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4, and by sending an extended command specifying the strong reach title display when the display control unit 123 starts display control for the title display period of the title display part of the strong base weak reach A to C performance, the performance control CPU 120 can use the brightness data table: strong reach title display to control the lamps of frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4. Furthermore, in such a configuration, depending on whether the effect is a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, or a low base strong reach C effect, at least one of the brightness data tables: strong reach prologue, strong reach title start, or strong reach title display may be a common brightness data table, and the remaining tables may be separate brightness data tables with individual content set for each.

In addition, the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects includes a strong reach prologue that defines a unique lighting pattern for the prologue display period, and a strong reach title display that defines a unique lighting pattern for the title start period from when part of the title characters are displayed until they are displayed in their fixed position.When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, it sends an extension command that specifies the strong reach prologue, and the effect control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: strong reach prologue. The display control unit 123 controls the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4, and when it starts display control of the title start period of the title display part of the low base strong reach A-C effects, it sends an extended command specifying the strong reach title display, so that the effect control CPU 120 controls the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4 using the brightness data table: strong reach title display. Also, in this configuration, depending on whether it is a low base strong reach A effect, a low base strong reach B effect, or a low base strong reach C effect, a common brightness data table may be used for one of the brightness data tables: strong reach prologue or strong reach title display, and a separate brightness data table with individual contents set for the other may be used.

In addition, whether a high base reach A performance, a high base reach B performance, a high base reach C performance, or a high base reach D performance is performed, the title display part uses a common high base reach common title as the brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9, thereby saving storage capacity for the brightness data table. On the other hand, in the introduction part, when a high base reach A performance, a high base reach B performance, a high base reach C performance, or a high base reach D performance is performed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a separate high base reach reach A introduction, high base reach B introduction, high base reach C introduction, or high base reach D introduction, respectively. This makes it possible to set the game effect lamp 9 to emit different light depending on the content of each performance in the introduction part of the high base reach A performance, high base reach B performance, high base reach C, or high base reach D performance, thereby enhancing the performance effect in the introduction part before the performance result is introduced in the super reach performance.

In this embodiment, whether a high base reach A performance is executed, a high base reach B performance is executed, a high base reach C performance is executed, or a high base reach D performance is executed, the title display part is configured to use a common high base reach series common title as a brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. However, the title display part of the high base reach A to D performances is provided with a high base reach series title start which defines a unique lighting pattern for the title start period from when part of the title characters are displayed until they are displayed in the fixed position, and a high base reach series title display which defines a unique lighting pattern after the title display period when the title characters are displayed in the fixed position, and the display control unit 123 controls the title display part of the high base reach A to D performances. When starting display control of the title, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance may use the brightness data table: high base reach title start to send an extended command specifying the start of a high base reach title, and may use the brightness data table: high base reach title start to control the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4, and when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display period of the title display part of the high base reach A to D performance, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance may use the brightness data table: high base reach title display to control the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4. Furthermore, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a high bass reach A performance, a high bass reach B performance, a high bass reach C performance, or a high bass reach D performance, the brightness data table may be a common brightness data table for either the high bass reach title start or the high bass reach title display, and a separate brightness data table with individual content set for the other.

In addition, when a low-base strongest reach effect is executed, the execution time of which is not shared with other super reach effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction, which defines the series of light emission patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach effect as a brightness data table, in the title display part and introduction part, thereby reducing the number of brightness data tables.

In this embodiment, whether a low base weak reach A effect or a low base weak reach B effect is executed, the title display part uses a common weak reach-type common title as the brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. However, when a low base weak reach A effect is executed, the title display part uses a weak reach-type weak reach A title that defines the lighting pattern specific to the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect as the brightness data table for the title display part to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. When a low base weak reach B effect is executed, the title display part uses a weak reach-type weak reach B title that defines the lighting pattern specific to the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect as the brightness data table for the title display part to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. This makes it possible to set the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 to different lighting patterns depending on the content of each effect in the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the title display part in the super reach effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, whether a low base strong reach A performance is executed, a low base strong reach B performance is executed, or a low base strong reach C performance is executed, the title display part uses a common strong reach common title as the brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. However, when a low base strong reach A performance is executed, the title display part uses a strong reach A title that defines the lighting pattern specific to the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance as the brightness data table for the title display part to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. When a low base strong reach B performance is executed, the title display part uses a strong reach A title that defines the lighting pattern specific to the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance as the brightness data table for the title display part. When controlling the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 using a strong reach series strong reach B title that defines a lighting pattern specific to the display part and executing a low base strong reach C effect, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 can be controlled using a strong reach series strong reach C title that defines a lighting pattern specific to the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect as the brightness data table for the title display part. This makes it possible to set the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 to different lighting patterns depending on the content of each effect in the title display parts of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the title display part in the super reach effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, whether a high base reach A performance is executed, a high base reach B performance is executed, a high base reach C performance is executed, or a high base reach D performance is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common high base reach series common title as the brightness data table in the title display part.When a high base reach A performance is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach series reach A title that defines the lighting mode specific to the title display part of the high base reach A performance as the brightness data table in the title display part, and when a high base reach B performance is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach series reach B title that defines the lighting mode specific to the title display part of the high base reach B performance as the brightness data table in the title display part. When a high base reach C effect is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a high base reach-type reach C title, which defines the lighting pattern specific to the title display part of the high base reach C effect as the brightness data table for the title display part, and when a high base reach D effect is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a high base reach-type reach D title, which defines the lighting pattern specific to the title display part of the high base reach D effect as the brightness data table for the title display part.This makes it possible to set the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 to different lighting patterns depending on the content of each effect in the title display parts of the high base reach A effect, high base reach B effect, high base reach C effect, and high base reach D effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the title display part in the super reach effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a low-base strongest reach effect is executed, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction in the title display part and introduction part, which defines a series of lighting patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach effect as a brightness data table. However, when a low-base strongest reach effect is executed, the game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a strongest reach system strongest reach title in the title display part brightness data table, which defines a lighting pattern unique to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect, and the game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a strongest reach system strongest reach introduction in the introduction part brightness data table, which defines a lighting pattern unique to the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, when low base weak reach A and B effects are executed, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a common weak reach-system common title as the brightness data table for the title display part, and the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using weak reach-system weak reach A introduction and weak reach-system weak reach B introduction as the brightness data tables for the introduction part. However, when a low base weak reach A effect is executed, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a weak reach-system weak reach A title introduction, which defines the series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base weak reach A, as the brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part, and when a low base weak reach B effect is executed, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a weak reach-system weak reach B title introduction, which defines the series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part, as the brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part. By doing this, the number of brightness data tables can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when low base strong reach A to C effects are executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common strong reach common title as the brightness data table for the title display part, and the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using strong reach A introduction, strong reach B introduction, and strong reach C introduction as brightness data tables for the introduction part. When a low base strong reach A effect is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a strong reach A title introduction, which defines a series of lighting patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strong reach A effect, as the brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part. When a low base strong reach B effect is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a strong reach B title introduction, which defines a series of lighting patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strong reach B effect, as the brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part. The game effect lamp 9 can be controlled using a strong reach-type strong reach B title introduction that defines a series of light emission patterns from the title display part to the introduction part, and when a low base strong reach C performance is executed, the game effect lamp 9 can be controlled using a strong reach-type strong reach C title introduction that defines a series of light emission patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strong reach C performance as a brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part, and when a low base strong reach D performance is executed, the game effect lamp 9 can be controlled using a strong reach-type strong reach D title introduction that defines a series of light emission patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strong reach D performance as a brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part, and by doing so, the number of brightness data tables can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when high base reach A to D effects are executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common high base reach common title as the brightness data table for the title display part, and the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using high base reach reach A introduction, high base reach reach B introduction, high base reach reach C introduction, and high base reach reach D introduction as the brightness data table for the introduction part.When a high base reach A effect is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a high base reach reach A title introduction, which defines a series of lighting patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the high base reach A effect, as the brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part.When a high base reach B effect is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a high base reach reach B title introduction, which defines a series of lighting patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the high base reach A effect, as the brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part. The lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high bass reach-type reach B title introduction, which defines a series of lighting modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the bass reach B effect; when a high bass reach C effect is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high bass reach-type reach C title introduction, which defines a series of lighting modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the high bass reach C effect as a brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part; and when a high bass reach D effect is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high bass reach-type reach D title introduction, which defines a series of lighting modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the high bass reach D effect as a brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part; by doing this, the number of brightness data tables can be reduced.

[Brightness data table used for Super Reach effects 2]
The following explains the settings of the brightness data table used for the super reach effect. As mentioned above, the brightness data table is made up of a parent table, a child table, and a grandchild table, but in the brightness data table explained below, only some of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table are shown, and the other tables may be omitted.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of low-base weak reach A and B effects]
Figure 11-74 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: weak reach common title used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B421 sent when performing display control of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, Figure 11-75 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: weak reach common title, and Figures 11-76 to 11-78 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: weak reach common title.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives extension command B421, it specifies the parent table for weak reach common titles based on extension command B421. As shown in Figure 11-74, the parent table for weak reach common titles is set to perform lamp control for frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 by referencing child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE for a maximum of 600,000 ms. When the performance control CPU 120 receives extension command B421, it performs lamp control for frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 by referencing child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE specified by the parent table for weak reach common titles.

Child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE contains the grandchild tables and execution times for frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 in the order of reference, as shown in Figure 11-75.

The performance control CPU 120 first controls the lamps by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 (Figure 11-76), which is the first table set in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE. As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 are turned off for 340 ms, and then the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 are lit in blue for 160 ms.

The performance control CPU 120 then times 500 ms, which is the execution time of grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1, and performs lamp control by referencing grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 (Figure 11-77), which is the second grandchild table set in child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE. As a result, frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 light up in a blue-based color, and the brightness changes every 100 ms.

The performance control CPU 120 then times 500 ms, which is the execution time of grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, and performs lamp control by referencing grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 (Figure 11-78), which is the third grandchild table in child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE. As a result, some of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 are turned off, while the rest are lit blue, with the off and lit areas changing every 30 ms or 20 ms.

The performance control CPU 120 then times 230 ms, which is the execution time of grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3, and performs lamp control by referencing grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 (Figure 11-77), which is the fourth grandchild table in child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE. As a result, frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 light up in a blue-based color, and the brightness changes every 100 ms.

Then, when the display control unit 123 receives an extension command (B400 or B40F) sent when controlling the display of the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the effect control CPU 120 switches to lamp control using a brightness data table based on the newly received extension command. As a result, frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 will continue to light up in a blue-based color and change brightness every 100 ms until a new extension command is received, and when a new extension command is received, they will switch to the lighting mode based on the received extension command.

As shown in Figure 11-74, the parent table for weak reach common titles has child tables set up that also reference logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4. These child tables also have grandchild tables, etc., that they reference set up in order of execution. These grandchild tables also have brightness data, etc., that they reference set up in order of execution. The performance control CPU 120 references the child table specified in the parent table, the grandchild table specified in the child table, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table, and controls the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 using the same procedure as above.

As a result, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4 will change from off to red until 500 ms have elapsed, then remain lit in red until 500 ms have elapsed, with the brightness changing every 100 ms, then change from red to almost off until 230 ms have elapsed, then remain lit in red again, with the brightness changing every 100 ms, until a new extended command is received.

In addition, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change from an off state to white until 500 ms has elapsed, then remain lit in white until 500 ms has elapsed, with the brightness changing every 100 ms, then change from white to nearly off until 230 ms has elapsed, then remain lit in white again, with the brightness changing every 100 ms, until a new extended command is received.

In addition, the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 will change from off to blue until 500 ms have passed, then stay lit in a blue-based light until 500 ms have passed, with the brightness changing every 100 ms, then go from blue to almost off until 230 ms have passed, then stay lit in a blue-based light again, and continue to change brightness every 100 ms until a new extended command is received.

As shown in Figure 11-152 (A), the title display part in the low-base weak reach A and B effects has a title start period of 500 ms from the start, followed by a title display period of 2,200 ms, followed by a title end period of 300 ms. Therefore, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table: weak reach common title. During the title start period (the period from the start of the title display part to 500 ms elapsed) when the title characters move from the left side of the display area toward their fixed position, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4 change from an off state to blue, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4 change from an off state to red, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 change from an off state to white (lamp control based on the grandchild table (1) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75). In addition, during the title display period when the title characters remain stationary in their fixed positions and the title end period (the period from the start of the title display period until the end of the title display part) when the title characters move from their fixed positions to the right, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 light up in blue until 500 ms have elapsed, and the brightness changes every 100 ms (lamp control by grandchild table (2) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then by 230 ms have elapsed, they go from blue to almost off, and then light up in blue again (lamp control by grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then they light up in blue again, and the brightness continues to change every 100 ms (lamp control by grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75). In addition, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 remain lit in red until 500 ms have elapsed, and the brightness changes every 100 ms (lamp control by grandchild table (2) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then, within 230 ms, they change from red to almost off and then turn red again (lamp control by grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then they remain lit in red again, and the brightness continues to change every 100 ms (lamp control by grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75). In addition, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 will light up in white until 500 ms has elapsed, with the brightness changing every 100 ms (lamp control according to grandchild table (2) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), then change from white to almost off and back to white within 230 ms (lamp control according to grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), after which they will again light up in white and continue to change brightness every 100 ms (lamp control according to grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75).

In addition, after 3000 ms has elapsed since the start of the title display part, the display control unit 123 receives an extended command (B400 or B40F) sent in conjunction with starting display control of the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, which ends lamp control based on the brightness data table: weak reach common title, and switches to lamp control based on the brightness data table corresponding to the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B performances.

In this way, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command B421, it controls the lamps based on the brightness data table: weak reach common title, in accordance with the extended command B421. As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 change color and pattern according to the title start period, in which the title characters move from the left side of the display area toward their fixed position, and the title end period, in which the title characters move from their fixed position toward the right side.

[Brightness data table used in title color change effect (red)]
Figure 11-79 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: title common chance up red used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B511 sent when performing display control of the title color change effect that changes the title text from white to red, Figure 11-80 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: title common chance up red, and Figures 11-81 to 11-83 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: title common chance up red.

When controlling the display of a title color change effect that changes the title characters from white to red in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the display control unit 123 sends an extension command 511 at the timing when the title characters change (1,300 ms after the start of the title display part).

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command B511, it specifies the parent table (Figure 11-79) for the title common chance up red based on the extended command 511, and controls the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child table (Figure 11-80) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figures 11-81 to 83) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

As a result, frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 will flash white at 40 ms intervals until 200 ms has elapsed, then they will light up in red until 1200 ms has elapsed, and their brightness will change at 20 ms intervals. After that, they will gradually turn off from red at 280 ms and remain off until a new extended command is received.

In addition, logo LEDs LL1-LL4 will remain off until 200 ms have elapsed, then remain lit in red until 1200 ms have elapsed, with the brightness changing at 20 ms intervals. After that, they will gradually turn off from red at 280 ms and remain off until a new extended command is received.

In addition, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will flash white at 40 ms intervals until 200 ms has elapsed, then remain lit in white until 1200 ms has elapsed, with their brightness changing at 20 ms intervals, then gradually turn off from white at 280 ms, and remain off until a new extended command is received.

As shown in Figure 11-152 (B), the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects consists of a title start period of 500 ms from the start, followed by a title display period of 2200 ms, and a title end period of 300 ms. Furthermore, when a title color change effect that changes from white to red is executed, the title characters are displayed in a manner that makes them appear to glow for 200 ms after 800 ms have elapsed since the start of the title display period, after which the title characters change to red, and then the transition to the title end period takes place after a further 1200 ms.

Therefore, after the start of the title display period, extended command B511 is received at the timing when the title color change effect is executed, and lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table: Title Common Chance Up Red, so that during the period in which the title characters are displayed in a manner that appears to glow (the period up to 200 ms after extended command B511 is received), frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 flash white, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are turned off, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 flash white (lamp control by grandchild table (5) specified by the child table in Figure 11-80). Furthermore, until the title characters change to red and the title end period begins (the period from 200 ms after receiving extension command B511 until another 1200 ms has passed), the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 light up in red and change brightness at 20 ms intervals, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 light up in red and change brightness at 20 ms intervals, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 light up in white and change brightness at 20 ms intervals (lamp control by grandchild table (6) specified by the child table in Figure 11-80). Additionally, during the title end period (the period 1,400 ms after receiving extension command B511) when the title characters move to the right from their original position and disappear, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12 and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4 gradually turn off from red, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4 gradually turn off from red, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 gradually turn off from white (lamp control is performed by the grandchild table (7) specified by the child table in Figure 11-80).

In addition, after 3000 ms has elapsed since the start of the title display part, the display control unit 123 receives an extended command (B400 or B40F) sent in conjunction with starting display control of the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, which ends lamp control based on the brightness data table: title common chance up red, and switches to lamp control based on the brightness data table corresponding to the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B performances.

[Brightness data table used in title color change effect (gold)]
Figure 11-84 is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table of the brightness data table: title common chance up gold used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B512 sent when performing display control of the title color change effect that changes the title text from white to gold, Figure 11-85 is a diagram showing the settings of the child table of the brightness data table: title common chance up gold, and Figures 11-86 to 11-88 are diagrams showing the settings of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: title common chance up gold.

When controlling the display of a title color change effect that changes the title text from white to gold in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the display control unit 123 sends an extension command 512 at the timing when the title text changes (1,300 ms after the start of the title display part).

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B512, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-84) for the title common chance up gold based on the extension command 512, and controls the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Fig. 11-85) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-86 to 88) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

As a result, frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 will flash white at 40 ms intervals until 200 ms has elapsed, then they will light up in yellow until 1200 ms has elapsed, and their brightness will change at 20 ms intervals. After that, they will gradually turn off from yellow at 280 ms, and will remain off until a new extended command is received.

In addition, logo LEDs LL1-LL4 will remain off until 200 ms have elapsed, then remain lit in red until 1200 ms have elapsed, with the brightness changing at 20 ms intervals. After that, they will gradually turn off from red at 280 ms and remain off until a new extended command is received.

In addition, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will flash white at 40 ms intervals until 200 ms has elapsed, then remain lit white until 1200 ms has elapsed, with their brightness changing at 20 ms intervals, then gradually turn off from white at 280 ms, and remain off until a new extended command is received.

As shown in Figure 11-152 (B), the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects consists of a title start period of 500 ms from the start, followed by a title display period of 2200 ms, followed by a title end period of 300 ms. Furthermore, when a title color change effect is executed in which the title changes from white to gold, the title characters are displayed in a manner that makes them appear to glow for 200 ms after 800 ms have elapsed since the start of the title display period, after which the title characters change to gold, and after a further 1200 ms the transition to the title end period begins.

Therefore, after the start of the title display period, extended command B512 is received at the timing when the title color change effect is executed, and lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table: Title Common Chance Up Gold, so that during the period in which the title characters are displayed in a manner that appears to glow (the period up to 200 ms after extended command B512 is received), frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 flash white, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are turned off, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 flash white (lamp control by grandchild table (8) specified by the child table in Figure 11-85). Furthermore, until the title characters change to gold and the title end period begins (the period from 200 ms after receiving extension command B512 until another 1200 ms has passed), the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 light up in yellow and change brightness at 20 ms intervals, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 light up in red and change brightness at 20 ms intervals, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 light up in white and change brightness at 20 ms intervals (lamp control by grandchild table (9) specified by the child table in Figure 11-85). Additionally, during the title end period (the period 1,400 ms after receiving extension command B512) when the title characters move from their fixed position to the right and disappear, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12 and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4 gradually turn off from yellow, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4 gradually turn off from red, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 gradually turn off from white (lamp control is performed by the grandchild table (10) specified by the child table in Figure 11-85).

In addition, after 3000 ms has elapsed since the start of the title display part, the display control unit 123 receives an extended command (B400 or B40F) sent in conjunction with starting display control of the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, which ends lamp control based on the brightness data table: title common chance up gold, and switches to lamp control based on the brightness data table corresponding to the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B performances.

[Modification of the brightness data table used in title color change effects]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for effect control uses the brightness data table: weak reach system common title to control the lamps of the frame LED LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamp LA1 to LA4 in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, regardless of whether or not a title change effect is performed, and when a title change effect is not performed, the CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: weak reach system common title to control the lamps of the frame LED LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LED LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamp LA1 to LA4. When lamp control is performed and a title change effect is performed, an extended command specifying title common chance up red or title common chance up gold, which is sent from the display control unit 123 at the timing of performing display control to change the color of the title characters, is received, and from the time the color of the title characters changes, lamp control of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 is performed using the brightness data table: title common chance up red or title common chance up gold.

In contrast to this, this modified example is provided with a brightness data table: weak reach common title (white) in which brightness data is set when no title change effect is performed in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B effects, a brightness data table: weak reach common title (red) in which brightness data is set when a title change effect is performed in which the title characters change to red in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B effects, and a brightness data table: weak reach common title (gold) in which brightness data is set when a title change effect is performed in which the title characters change to gold.When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of low base weak reach A and B effects, if no title change effect is performed, it sends an extended command specifying the weak reach common title (white), and the effect control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: weak reach common title (white) to display the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attack run When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, in the case of performing a title change performance in which the title characters are changed to red, by transmitting an extension command specifying the weak reach common title (red), the performance control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: weak reach common title (red) to control the lamps of the frame LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12, and the attack lamps LA1 to LA4. When lamp control is performed and the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, if a title change effect is performed in which the title text changes to gold, by sending an extension command specifying the weak reach common title (gold), the effect control CPU 120 will use the brightness data table: weak reach common title (gold) to control the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

This allows the effect control CPU 120 to control the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4 in lighting modes appropriate to the respective situations: when no title change effect is performed in the title display part of the base weak reach A and B effects, when a title change effect that changes the title characters to red is performed, or when a title change effect that changes the title characters to gold is performed.

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of the low base weak reach A effect]
Fig. 11-89 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach A introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B400 sent when performing display control of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A performance, Fig. 11-90 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach A introduction, and Figs. 11-91 to 11-95 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach A introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table have been omitted except for some setting contents.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B400, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-89) for the introduction of the weak reach system weak reach A based on the extension command B400, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Fig. 11-90) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-91 to 95) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-90 contains a grandchild table with an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene changes in the introductory part of the low base weak reach A effect, as well as an illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the effect scene.Furthermore, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-91 to 11-95 contain brightness data that indicates the illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters, etc., that appear in the effect scene.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, Logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and Decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the Low Base Weak Reach A performance.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect]
Fig. 11-96 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach B introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B40F sent when performing display control of the introduction part in the low base weak reach B performance, Fig. 11-97 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach B introduction, and Figs. 11-99 to 11-103 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach B introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table have been omitted except for some setting contents.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B40F, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-96) for the introduction of the weak reach system weak reach B based on the extension command B40F, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Fig. 11-97) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-98 to 103) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-97 contains a grandchild table with an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene changes in the introductory part of the low base weak reach B effect, as well as an illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the scene of the effect.Furthermore, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-98 to 103 contain brightness data that indicates the illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters, etc., that appear in the scene of the effect.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, Logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and Decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the Low Base Weak Reach B performance.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of low base strong reach A to C effects]
Figure 11-104 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: strong reach common title used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B517 sent when performing display control of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance, Figure 11-105 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: strong reach common title, and Figures 11-106 to 11-109 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: strong reach common title.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the expansion command B517, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-105) for the strong reach common title based on the expansion command B517, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Fig. 11-106) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-107-109) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-106 contains grandchild tables that set the execution time corresponding to the time when the scenes of the presentation change, such as the prologue display period, title start period, title display period, and title end period that make up the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C presentation, as well as the light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the presentation scene.Furthermore, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-107 to 109 contain brightness data that sets the light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the characters that appear in the presentation scene.

As a result, the light color and pattern of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, the Attack Lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change to match the scenes and characters appearing in the title display parts of the low base strong reach A-C effects.

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of the low base strong reach A effect]
Fig. 11-110 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach A introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B500 sent when performing display control of the introduction part in the low base strong reach A performance, Fig. 11-111 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach A introduction, and Figs. 11-112 to 11-117 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach A introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table have been omitted except for some setting contents.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command B500, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-110) for the strong reach system Strong Reach A introduction based on the extended command B500, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Fig. 11-111) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-112 to 117) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-111 contains a grandchild table with an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene changes in the introductory part of the low base strong reach A effect, as well as an illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the effect scene.Furthermore, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-112 to 117 contain brightness data that indicates the illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters, etc. that appear in the effect scene.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, Logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and Decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the Low Base Strong Reach A performance.

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of low base strong reach B effect]
Fig. 11-118 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach B introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B504 sent when performing display control of the introduction part in the low base strong reach B performance, Fig. 11-119 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach B introduction, and Figs. 11-120 to 11-124 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach B introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table have been omitted except for some setting contents.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the expansion command B504, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-118) for the strong reach system strong reach B introduction based on the expansion command B504, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Fig. 11-119) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-120 to 124) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-119 contains a grandchild table with an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene changes in the introductory part of the low base strong reach B effect, as well as an illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the scene of the effect.Furthermore, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-120 to 124 contain brightness data that indicates the illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters, etc., that appear in the scene of the effect.

As a result, the light color and pattern of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, the Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the low base strong reach B effect.

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of low base strong reach C effect]
When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extension command B505 transmitted when the display control unit 123 controls the display of the introductory part in the low base strong reach C performance, it specifies the parent table (not shown) of the strong reach system strong reach C introduction based on the extension command B505, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 by referring to the child table (not shown) specified by the parent table, the grandchild table (not shown) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table.

In particular, the child table for the introduction of a strong reach C in a strong reach series is set with a grandchild table that sets the execution time according to the time when the scene changes in the introductory part of the low base strong reach C effect, the light color according to the effect scene, and the light emission mode, and further, the grandchild table for the introduction of a strong reach C in a strong reach series is set with brightness data that sets the light emission color and light emission mode according to the characters that appear in the effect scene in the introductory part of the low base strong reach C effect.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, Logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and Decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the Low Base Strong Reach C effect.

[Brightness data table used in low-base strongest reach effects]
Fig. 11-125 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B600 sent when performing display control of the low-base strongest reach presentation, Fig. 11-126 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction, and Fig. 11-127 to Fig. 11-135 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the expansion command B600, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-126) for the strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction based on the expansion command B600, and controls the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Fig. 11-127) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-128 to 135) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-126 contains a grandchild table with the execution time corresponding to the time it takes for the low-base strongest reach effect to switch scenes from the title display part to the end of the introductory part, as well as the light color and light pattern corresponding to the effect scene.Furthermore, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-127 to 135 contain brightness data that determines the light color and light pattern corresponding to the characters that appear in the effect scene.

As a result, the light color and pattern of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, the Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the low-base strongest reach performance.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of high base reach A to D effects]
Figure 11-136 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: high bass reach common title used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B605 sent when performing display control of the title display part in the high bass reach A to D performances, Figure 11-137 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: high bass reach common title, and Figures 11-138 to 11-140 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: high bass reach common title.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the expansion command B605, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-136) of the high-base reach common title based on the expansion command B605, and controls the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Fig. 11-137) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-138-140) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-137 contains grandchild tables that set the execution time corresponding to the time when the performance scenes change, such as the title start period, title display period, and title end period that make up the title display part in the high base reach A to D performances, as well as the light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the performance scene.Furthermore, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-138 to 140 contain brightness data that sets the light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the characters that appear in the performance scenes.

As a result, the light color and pattern of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, the Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change to match the scenes and characters appearing in the title display parts of the high base reach A-D effects.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high-base reach A performance]
Fig. 11-141 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: high base reach type reach A introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B606 sent when performing display control of the introduction part in the high base reach A performance, Fig. 11-142 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: high base reach type reach A introduction, and Figs. 11-143 to 11-145 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: high base reach type reach A introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table have been omitted except for some setting contents.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the expansion command B606, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-141) for the introduction of high-base reach type reach A based on the expansion command B606, and controls the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Fig. 11-142) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-143 to 145) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-142 has a grandchild table set with an execution time corresponding to the time when the performance scene changes in the introductory part of the high base reach A performance, an illumination color corresponding to the performance scene, and an illumination mode.Furthermore, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-143 to 145 have brightness data set with an illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters, etc., appearing in the performance scene.

As a result, the light color and pattern of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, the Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the high base reach A performance.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high-base reach B performance]
Fig. 11-146 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: parent table of high bass reach type reach B introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B607 sent when performing display control of the introduction part in the high bass reach B performance, and Fig. 11-147 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: child table of high bass reach type reach B introduction. Note that the child table has been omitted except for some setting contents, and all grandchild tables have been omitted.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the expansion command B607, it specifies the parent table (Figure 11-146) for the introduction of high-base reach-type reach B based on the expansion command B607, and controls the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Figure 11-147) specified by the parent table, the grandchild table (not shown) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-147 has a grandchild table set with an execution time corresponding to the time when the performance scene changes in the introductory part of the high base reach B performance, an illumination color corresponding to the performance scene, and illumination mode.Furthermore, the grandchild table for the high base reach reach B introduction has brightness data that determines the illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters that appear in the performance scene in the introductory part of the high base reach B performance.

As a result, the light color and pattern of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, the Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the high base reach B performance.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high-base reach C performance]
Fig. 11-148 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: parent table of high bass reach type reach C introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B608 sent when performing display control of the introduction part in the high bass reach C performance, and Fig. 11-149 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: child table of high bass reach type reach C introduction. Note that the child table has been omitted except for some setting contents, and all grandchild tables have been omitted.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the expansion command B608, it specifies the parent table (Figure 11-148) for the introduction of high-base reach-type reach C based on the expansion command B608, and controls the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Figure 11-149) specified by the parent table, the grandchild table (not shown) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-148 has a grandchild table set with an execution time corresponding to the time when the performance scene changes in the introductory part of the high base reach C performance, an illumination color corresponding to the performance scene, and illumination mode.Furthermore, the grandchild table for the high base reach reach C introduction has brightness data that determines the illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters that appear in the performance scene in the introductory part of the high base reach C performance.

As a result, the light color and pattern of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, the Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the high base reach C performance.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high-base reach D performance]
Fig. 11-150 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: parent table of high bass reach type reach D introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B609 sent when performing display control of the introduction part in the high bass reach D performance, and Fig. 11-151 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: child table of high bass reach type reach D introduction. Note that the child table has been omitted except for some setting contents, and all grandchild tables have been omitted.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the expansion command B609, it specifies the parent table (Figure 11-150) for the introduction of high-base reach-type reach D based on the expansion command B609, and controls the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referencing the child table (Figure 11-151) specified by the parent table, the grandchild table (not shown) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-150 has a grandchild table set with an execution time corresponding to the time when the performance scene changes in the introductory part of the high base reach D performance, an illumination color corresponding to the performance scene, and illumination mode.Furthermore, the grandchild table for the high base reach reach D introduction has brightness data that determines the illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters that appear in the performance scene in the introductory part of the high base reach D performance.

As a result, the light color and pattern of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and LWR2-LWR12, the Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the high base reach D performance.

[Effect 1]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super reach effect after the decorative symbol displayed on the image display device 5 reaches a reach state. The super reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Then, before the title display part in the super reach effect, the decorative symbol is displayed in a reach state, and in the title display part, the title character corresponding to the super reach effect is displayed using the display position of the decorative symbol that has reached a reach state. In this way, when the decorative symbol reaches a reach state, the player will focus on which decorative symbol has reached a reach state. However, by displaying the title character corresponding to the super reach effect using the display position of the decorative symbol that has reached a reach state in the title display part of the super reach effect, attention can be naturally drawn to the title character, resulting in an optimal title display.

In addition, since the likelihood of a jackpot differs depending on whether the decorative symbol that has reached the reach state is an odd numbered symbol or an even numbered symbol, when a decorative symbol reaches the reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative symbol has reached the reach state, which will also draw more attention to the title text.

In addition, before the title display part of the Super Reach effect, a decorative symbol (large) is displayed in reach mode, and then the decorative symbol (large) displayed in reach mode is reduced in size to a smaller decorative symbol (small), and the title characters corresponding to the Super Reach effect are displayed in the display position of the reduced decorative symbol (small). In this way, the reduced display of the decorative symbol (large) attracts the player's attention, and by displaying the title characters corresponding to the Super Reach effect in the display position of the reduced decorative symbol (small), it is easier to draw attention to the title characters.

In addition, during the title display part of the Super Reach performance, when the decorative pattern that has reached the Reach state is displayed, the title text corresponding to the Super Reach performance is displayed so that it overlaps with the decorative pattern that has reached the Reach state, making it easier to draw attention to the title text.

In addition, the super reach effects include low base weak reach A and B effects, and low base strong reach A-C effects, which have a higher chance of winning than low base weak reach A and B effects.The title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects and the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A-C effects appear overlapping with one of the decorative patterns (the decorative pattern on the left) of the decorative patterns that have reached the reach state, making it easier to draw attention to the title display.

In addition, the Super Reach effect includes a Low Base Strongest Reach effect, which has a higher chance of winning than the Low Base Strong Reach A to C effects. The title characters corresponding to the Low Base Strongest Reach effect appear overlapping with both decorative patterns (decorative patterns on both sides) that have reached the reach state, allowing the title characters corresponding to the Low Base Strongest Reach effect to be displayed in a more impactful manner.

In addition, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A-C effects, and the title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach effect appear overlapping with one of the decorative patterns that have reached the reach state (the decorative pattern on the left) or both decorative patterns (the decorative patterns on both sides) and are then displayed in their fixed positions, and even while they are displayed in their fixed positions, they are displayed overlapping with part of the decorative patterns on both sides that have reached the reach state, making it easier to draw attention to the title characters even after they have been displayed in their fixed positions.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 2]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B effects and low base strong reach A to C effects after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 has reached a reach state. The low base weak reach A and B effects and low base strong reach A to C effects are configured to include both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. When an odd-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in reach mode before the title display part in the low base weak reach A, B performance, title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B performance are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the odd-numbered decorative pattern that has become reach mode; when an even-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in reach mode before the title display part in the low base weak reach A, B performance, title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B performance are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the even-numbered decorative pattern that has become reach mode; when an odd-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in reach mode before the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance, title letters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C performance are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the odd-numbered decorative pattern that has become reach mode; and when an even-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in reach mode before the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance, title letters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C performance are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the even-numbered decorative pattern that has become reach mode. By doing this, when a decorative pattern reaches a reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative pattern has reached the reach state, but by using the display position of the decorative pattern that has reached the reach state in the title display part of the low base weak reach A, B performance and the low base strong reach A to C performance to display the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B performance and the low base strong reach A to C performance, the player can naturally pay attention to the title letters as well, and as a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

In addition, since the likelihood of a jackpot differs depending on whether the decorative symbol that has reached the reach state is an odd numbered symbol or an even numbered symbol, when a decorative symbol reaches the reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative symbol has reached the reach state, which will also draw more attention to the title text.

[Effect 3]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B effects, low base strong reach A to C effects, and low base strongest reach effects after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 reaches a reach state. The low base weak reach A and B effects, low base strong reach A to C effects, and low base strongest reach effects are configured to include both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. When an odd-numbered decorative symbol is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the odd-numbered decorative symbol that has become a reach state, when an even-numbered decorative symbol is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the even-numbered decorative symbol that has become a reach state, when an odd-numbered decorative symbol is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C effects are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the odd-numbered decorative symbol that has become a reach state When an even numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C performances are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the even numbered decorative pattern that has become a reach state, when an odd numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance, title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach performance are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the odd numbered decorative pattern that has become a reach state, and when an even numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance, title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach performance are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the even numbered decorative pattern that has become a reach state. By doing this, when a decorative pattern reaches a reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative pattern has reached the reach state, but by using the display position of the decorative pattern that has reached the reach state in the title display part of the low base weak reach A, B effect, low base strong reach A to C effect, and low base strongest reach effect to display the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B effect, low base strong reach A to C effect, and low base strongest reach effect, the player can naturally pay attention to the title characters as well, and as a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

In addition, since the likelihood of a jackpot differs depending on whether the decorative symbol that has reached the reach state is an odd numbered symbol or an even numbered symbol, when a decorative symbol reaches the reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative symbol has reached the reach state, which will also draw more attention to the title text.

[Effect 4]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super reach effect after the decorative symbol displayed on the image display device 5 reaches a reach state. The super reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Then, before the title display part in the super reach effect, the decorative symbol is displayed in a reach state, and in the title display part, the title character corresponding to the super reach effect is displayed using the display position of the decorative symbol that has reached a reach state. In this way, when the decorative symbol reaches a reach state, the player will focus on which decorative symbol has reached a reach state. However, by displaying the title character corresponding to the super reach effect using the display position of the decorative symbol that has reached a reach state in the title display part of the super reach effect, attention can be naturally drawn to the title character, resulting in an optimal title display.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 5]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a low base weak reach B effect, which has a higher probability of winning than the low base weak reach B effect and the low base weak reach B effect. The low base weak reach B effect and the low base strong reach B effect are composed of both a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. In addition, in the low base weak reach B effect, the ally character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Boingo" are used, and the ally character "Yume Yume" announces that a jackpot will be reached, and in the low base strong reach B effect, the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are used, and the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" announce that a jackpot will be reached. In the introductory part of the low base strong reach B performance, the display starts with the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" positioned in the foreground and the enemy character "Robo" positioned in the background, and in the introductory part of the low base weak reach B performance, the display starts with the ally character "Yume Yume" positioned in the foreground and the enemy character "Boingo" positioned in the background (the ally character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Boingo" facing each other on the left and right). In this way, for the low base weak reach B performance, which has a relatively high probability of winning, the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana," who are notified of a jackpot, are positioned in the foreground and the enemy character "Robo" positioned in the background, allowing the player to empathize and making it easier for the player to intuitively recognize that the probability of winning is high, resulting in a more suitable title display.

Also, ally characters are characters who receive benefits if they win a battle, while enemy characters are characters who do not receive benefits if they win a battle. At the start of the introductory part of the low base strong reach B performance, ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" are displayed in a position in the foreground with their backs to you, and enemy character "Robo" is displayed in a position in the background facing you, with ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" facing off against enemy character "Robo." For the low base strong reach B performance, which has a relatively high expectation, the player and ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" are facing in the same direction, making it easier for the player to empathize and recognize that there is a high chance of winning.

In addition, during the introductory part of the low-base strong reach B performance, the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are displayed in a position that includes the display area where the title characters were displayed during the title display part, so when the title characters disappear, players who were focusing on the title characters will naturally turn their attention to the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo".

[Effect 6]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base weak reach A, B effects, and low base weak reach A, B effects, and low base strong reach A to C effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A, B effects and a longer effect time than the low base weak reach A, B effects. The low base weak reach A, B effects and low base strong reach A to C effects each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, the low base weak reach A, B effects and low base strong reach A to C effects all use dialogue subtitles. In the low base weak reach A, B effects, the title characters and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part, and the dialogue subtitles that were displayed in the title display part continue to be displayed in the introduction part, while in the low base strong reach A to C effects, the dialogue subtitles are not displayed in the title display part, and the title characters are displayed. By doing this, the low base strong reach A to C effects, which have a relatively high probability of winning and a long execution time, are displayed so that the title characters and dialogue subtitles do not overlap as much as possible, while in the low base weak reach A and B effects, which have a relatively low probability of winning and a short execution time, even if the dialogue subtitles and title characters overlap, the display of the title characters is finished first so that the player can also pay attention to the dialogue subtitles, making it possible to provide the title characters and dialogue subtitles to the player in an appropriate manner, and as a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

In addition, when the title text and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the scene will not change in the subsequent introductory part until the dialogue subtitles that were displayed simultaneously with the title text have finished displaying, so the viewer can focus on the title text and then the dialogue subtitles.

In addition, when title text and dialogue subtitles are displayed during the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles is output, while the audio corresponding to the title text is not, making it easier to hear the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles.

[Effect 7]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base strongest reach effect and the high base reach A to D effects. The low base strongest reach effect and the high base reach A to D effects are configured to include both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the title display of the low base strongest reach effect and the high base reach A to D effects is made up of multiple characters ("Catch the explosive chuu with six people!", "Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B to D)"). Then, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect and the high base reach A to D effects, the title characters start out being displayed at an enlarged size where only a portion of the multiple characters are visible, and the display size gradually decreases from the enlarged size, and the title characters are displayed at a reduced size where all of the multiple characters are visible. In this way, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect and the high base reach A to D effects, the multiple characters are displayed at an enlarged size where only a portion of the multiple characters are visible, and then the size gradually decreases until they are displayed at a reduced size where all of the characters are visible, which draws the player's attention to the title characters.

In addition, before the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect begins, the movable body 32 is moved so that it overlaps the front side of the image display device 5, and a background dedicated to the falling effect is displayed during the period in which the falling effect is executed from the time the movable body 32 moves until the movable body 32 returns to its initial position. When the movable body 32 returns to its initial position, the title characters are displayed at an enlarged size so that not all of the characters making up the title characters are visible and the display area is filled so that the background is no longer visible, and then the reduced-size title characters and a background dedicated to the title display are displayed. This makes an impact with the way the title characters are displayed, while at the same time allowing the background to be switched seamlessly, allowing the title characters to be viewed in an appropriate manner by the player.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the high base reach A to D presentations, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (common title for high base reach series), and in the introduction part of the high base reach A to D presentations, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of high base reach series reach A, introduction of high base reach series reach B, introduction of high base reach series reach C, introduction of high base reach series reach D). By doing this, in the title display part of the high base reach A to D effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

In addition, in the low-base strongest reach presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in the title display part and introduction part using a single brightness data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and introduction part. However, it is also possible to control the game effect lamp 9 in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation using a brightness data table for title display (a brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation (strongest reach type strongest reach title)), and control the game effect lamp 9 in the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach presentation using a brightness data table for the introduction part (a brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation (strongest reach type strongest reach introduction)). With this configuration, in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode corresponding to the title display, resulting in appropriate title display.

[Effect 8]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low-base strongest reach effects and high-base reach A-D effects. The low-base strongest reach effects and high-base reach A-D effects are comprised of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. The title display for the low-base strongest reach effects and high-base reach A-D effects is comprised of multiple characters ("Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!", "Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B-D)"). In the title display part for the low-base strongest reach effects and high-base reach A-D effects, the multiple characters are enlarged and displayed, ending the title display part, and the background at the start of the introductory part is displayed. This allows the player to focus on the title characters during the title display part, and the title characters can be used to seamlessly transition to the background corresponding to the next introductory part.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the high base reach A to D presentations, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (common title for high base reach series), and in the introduction part of the high base reach A to D presentations, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of high base reach series reach A, introduction of high base reach series reach B, introduction of high base reach series reach C, introduction of high base reach series reach D). By doing this, in the title display part of the high base reach A to D effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

In addition, in the low-base strongest reach presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in the title display part and introduction part using a single brightness data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and introduction part. However, it is also possible to control the game effect lamp 9 in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation using a brightness data table for title display (a brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation (strongest reach type strongest reach title)), and control the game effect lamp 9 in the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach presentation using a brightness data table for the introduction part (a brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation (strongest reach type strongest reach introduction)). With this configuration, in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode corresponding to the title display, resulting in appropriate title display.

[Effect 9]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low-base weak reach A and B effects and low-base strong reach A to C effects. The low-base weak reach A and B effects and low-base strong reach A to C effects each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, unlike the execution time (T1-1 to 2) of the title display part in the low-base weak reach A and B effects and the execution time (T2-1 to 3) of the title display part in the low-base strong reach A to C effects, each title display part is composed of a title start period from when the title characters start to be displayed in their designated position until they are displayed in their designated position, a title display period that is displayed in their designated position, and a title end period from when the title characters are displayed in their designated position until they end. Furthermore, in the title display part in the low-base weak reach A and B effects and in the title display part in the low-base strong reach A to C effects, the title characters are displayed so that the title display period is longer than the title start period and title end period, and the title start period is longer than the title end period. By doing this, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the low base weak reach A, B effects and the low base strong reach A-C effects, it is possible to draw attention to the type of title characters by making the title display period displayed in the fixed position the longest. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the low base weak reach A, B effects and the low base strong reach A-C effects, it is possible to motivate which title characters will be displayed by making the title start period until the title is displayed in the fixed position longer than the title end period from the display in the fixed position to the end of the display. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the low base weak reach A, B effects and the low base strong reach A-C effects, it is possible to make the title display part easier to understand by making the execution time relationship between the title start period, title display period, and title end period the same.

[Effect 10]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super reach effect both in the normal state and in a probability variable state, which is more advantageous than the normal state. The super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the probability variable state are both composed of a title display part in which the corresponding title characters are displayed and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, the execution time (T1-1 to T2-2, T2-1 to T2-3, T3) of the title display part in the super reach effect in the normal state differs from the execution time (T4) of the title display part in the super reach effect in the probability variable state. In both cases, the title display part is composed of a title start period from when the title characters start to be displayed in their designated position until they are displayed in their designated position, a title display period in which the title characters are displayed in their designated position, and a title end period from when they are displayed in their designated position until they end. Furthermore, in the title display part in the super reach effect in the normal state and in the title display part in the super reach effect in the probability variable state, the title characters are displayed so that the title display period is longer than the title start period and the title end period, and the title start period is longer than the title end period. By doing this, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the probability variable state, the title display period displayed in the fixed position is made the longest, thereby drawing attention to the type of title character. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the probability variable state, by making the title start period until it is displayed in the fixed position longer than the title end period from the display in the fixed position until the display ends, it is possible to motivate which title character will be displayed. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the probability variable state, by making the execution time relationship between the title start period, title display period, and title end period the same, the title display part can be made easier to understand.

In addition, the execution time (T4) of the title display part of the Super Reach effect in the probability variable state is shorter than the execution time (T1-1 to 2, T2-1 to 3, T3) of the title display part of the Super Reach effect in the normal state. Because the execution time of the title display part in the Super Reach effect executed in the probability variable state is relatively short, gameplay in the probability variable state can proceed at a good tempo, while the execution time of the title display part in the Super Reach effect executed in the normal state is relatively long, so it can be well-excited.

Furthermore, regardless of the type, the Super Reach effects executed in the probability variable state have a higher chance of winning than the low-base weak Reach A and B effects, which have a lower chance of winning among the Super Reach effects executed in the normal state. Even if the execution time of the title display part of the Super Reach effect executed in the probability variable state is relatively short, the execution of the Super Reach effect alone can give players hope of winning a jackpot.

In addition, the execution time of the Super Reach effect and the execution time of the title display part are the same regardless of the type of Super Reach effect executed in the probability variable state, but the Super Reach effect has a higher chance of winning than the low base weak Reach A and B effects, which have a lower chance of winning among the Super Reach effects executed in the normal state. Therefore, even if the execution time of the Super Reach effect and the execution time of the title display part are the same regardless of the type of Super Reach effect executed in the probability variable state, just the execution of the Super Reach effect can give the player hope of winning a jackpot.

Furthermore, among the super reach effects executed in normal mode, the execution time of the title display part in low base strong reach A-C effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than low base weak reach A and B effects, is set to be longer than the execution time of the title display part in low base weak reach AB effects, and the execution time of the title display part in low base strongest reach effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than low base strong reach A-C effects, is set to be longer than the execution time of the title display part in low base strong reach A-C effects. By doing this, in normal mode, the execution time of the title display part of super reach effects with a higher jackpot expectation is longer, which can effectively excite the player.

Furthermore, among the super reach effects executed in normal mode, the execution time of the title display period in which the title letters are displayed in a fixed position in the low base strong reach A-C effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B effects, is set to be longer than the execution time of the title display period in the low base weak reach AB effect, and the execution time of the title display period in the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A-C effects, is set to be longer than the execution time of the title display period in the low base strong reach A-C effects. By doing this, in normal mode, the super reach effects with a higher jackpot expectation have a longer execution time of the title display period in which the title letters are displayed in a fixed position, which can effectively excite the player.

[Effect 11]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach effect. The super reach effect includes both a title display part in which the corresponding title characters are displayed and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. The title display part is composed of a title start period from when the title characters start to be displayed in their designated positions until they are displayed in their designated positions, a title display period displayed in their designated positions, and a title end period from when the title characters are displayed in their designated positions until they end. In the title display part, the title characters are displayed so that the title display period is longer than the title start period and the title end period, and the title start period is longer than the title end period. By doing this, the title display period displayed in its designated position is made the longest, thereby drawing attention to the type of title characters. Furthermore, by making the title start period until the title characters are displayed in their designated positions longer than the title end period from when the title characters are displayed in their designated positions until they end, it is possible to tease the player about which title characters will be displayed. Even if the execution times of the title display parts differ between the super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the probability variable state, the title display part can be made easier to understand by making the execution time relationships between the title start period, title display period, and title end period the same.

[Effect 12]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low-base-strength reach A-C effects and low-base-strength reach effects. The low-base-strength reach A-C effects and low-base-strength reach effects each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. As shown in FIG. 11-43, in the title display part of the low-base-strength reach effect and the low-base-strength reach A-C effects, the title character can be displayed in white or in red, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the white color. In the title display part of the low-base-strength reach effect and the low-base-strength reach A-C effects, the corresponding expectation indication is displayed, and then the title character is displayed in a larger size than the expectation indication. In this case, whether the title character is displayed in white or red, the expectation indication is displayed in the same manner. By doing this, the title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach effects and low base strong reach A to C effects are larger in size than the expectation suggestion display, and the expectation is suggested by its appearance, so they attract the player's attention, but by displaying the expectation suggestion display before the title characters, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the expectation suggestion first. Also, whether the title characters are displayed in white or red, the expectation suggestion display is displayed in the same manner, so the player can be drawn to the appearance of the title characters that follow.

[Effect 13]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a low base strong reach B effect and a low base strong reach C effect, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach B effect. The low base strong reach B and C effects are composed of both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect, an expectation suggestion display is displayed in a first manner (3.5 stars), and in the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect, an expectation suggestion display is displayed in a second manner (4 stars). In this case, the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect and the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect are both highlighted in a common manner. By doing this, development costs can be reduced by making the highlighting a common mode whether the expectation level indication display is displayed in the first mode in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, or whether the expectation level indication display is displayed in the second mode in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance.

The expectation indication display is also made up of multiple star-shaped objects, and in the low-base strong reach B performance, the expectation is indicated by N (N is an integer) + 0.5 (3.5) objects, and in the low-base strong reach C performance, the expectation is indicated by N + 1 (4) objects, with each star-shaped object being highlighted, and the highlighting is done in a common manner whether one object is highlighted or 0.5 objects are highlighted. In this way, the highlighting is done in a common manner whether one star-shaped object is highlighted or 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted, thereby reducing development costs.

In addition, in the expectation suggestion display, the time for which one star-shaped object is highlighted and the time for which 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted are the same. By doing this, development costs can be reduced by making the time for which one star-shaped object is highlighted and the time for which 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted the same.

In addition, when displaying the expected level, a common expected level indication sound is output whether a single star-shaped object is highlighted or 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted. By doing this, a common expected level indication sound is output whether a single star-shaped object is highlighted or 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted, thereby reducing development costs.

The effect control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attack lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. It also controls the game effect lamps 9 in the title display part of the low-base strong reach B and C effects using a brightness data table for title display (strong base common title), and in the introductory part of the low-base strong reach B and C effects using the brightness data table for the respective introductory part (strong reach strong reach B introduction, strong reach strong reach C introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the low-base strong reach B and C effects, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, allowing the game effect lamps 9 to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed appropriately.

In addition, in the low base strong reach B and C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common brightness data table (strong base common title) in the title display part, but in the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for title display in the low base strong reach B effect (brightness data table (strong reach strong reach B title) composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect), and in the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect, the brightness data table for title display in the low base strong reach C effect is controlled using the brightness data table for title display in the low base strong reach C effect. The game effect lamp 9 may also be controlled using a brightness data table (a brightness data table (strong reach series strong reach C title) composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect). With this configuration, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using different title display brightness data tables for the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect and the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect, so the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display, resulting in appropriate title display.

[Effect 14]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low-base strong reach A-C effects, low-base strongest reach effects, and high-base reach A-D effects. The low-base strong reach A-C effects, low-base strongest reach effects, and high-base reach A-D effects are each composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, the title display part of the low-base strong reach A-C effects, low-base strongest reach effects, and high-base reach A-D effects can display an expectation suggestion display composed of multiple star-shaped objects. In the expectation suggestion display, the first star-shaped object is highlighted, then, while continuing to highlight the first star-shaped object, the second star-shaped object is highlighted, and then the highlighting of the first star-shaped object is ended and the third star-shaped object is highlighted. By doing this, in the expectation indication display, highlighting of the second star-shaped object begins before highlighting of the first star-shaped object ends, but highlighting of the third star-shaped object does not begin until highlighting of the first star-shaped object ends, making it easier to recognize the number of objects suggesting the expectation of a jackpot.

In addition, when displaying the degree of expectation, an expectation suggestion sound is output each time a star-shaped object is highlighted, and after the output of the expectation suggestion sound for highlighting one star-shaped object has finished, an expectation suggestion sound for highlighting the next object is output. By doing this, the emphasis sound for highlighting one object and the emphasis sound for highlighting the next object do not overlap, making it easier to recognize the number of objects suggesting the degree of expectation.

The expectation suggestion display is made up of multiple star-shaped objects and the text "Expectation" indicating that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation, and the star-shaped objects are highlighted in a size that overlaps with the text "Expectation." By highlighting the star-shaped objects in this way, attention can be drawn to both the multiple star-shaped objects that make up the expectation suggestion display and the text indicating that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation.

In this embodiment, when some of the multiple star-shaped objects are highlighted, the highlighting of the star-shaped objects is superimposed on text indicating that the star-shaped objects indicate the degree of expectation. However, it is also possible to configure the highlighting of all star-shaped objects to be superimposed on text indicating that the star-shaped objects indicate the degree of expectation.

[Effect 15]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, and high base reach A to D effects. The low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, and high base reach A to D effects are each composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, it is possible to display multiple hold displays corresponding to variable displays that have not yet started, and it is possible to display an expectation suggestion display composed of multiple star-shaped objects in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, and high base reach A to D effects. Furthermore, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects, and high base reach A to D effects, the hold display is not displayed simultaneously with the expectation suggestion display. By doing this, an expectation suggestion display made up of a plurality of objects is displayed in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, the low base strongest reach performances, and the high base reach A to D performances, but the hold display is not displayed simultaneously with the expectation suggestion display, so that it is possible to prevent the hold display from being mistakenly recognized as the expectation suggestion display.

In particular, the maximum number of pending displays and active displays corresponding to the variable displays that have been started will match the maximum number of star-shaped objects that make up the expectation suggestion display. Even if a low-base strong reach A-C effect, a low-base strongest reach effect, or a high-base reach A-D effect is executed when the maximum number of pending displays and active displays are displayed, it is possible to prevent the pending displays and active displays from being mistakenly recognized as the maximum number of star-shaped objects that make up the expectation suggestion display.

In addition, by erasing the hold display when a monochrome display effect is executed in which the display area is displayed in a monochrome color before the title display part begins, the hold display can be ended without any sense of incongruity.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects and high base reach A to D effects, it also uses a brightness data table for title display (strong base common title, high base The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A-C effects and high base reach A-D effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed appropriately.

In addition, in the low-base strongest reach presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in the title display part and introduction part using a single brightness data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and introduction part. However, it is also possible to control the game effect lamp 9 in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation using a brightness data table for title display (a brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation (strongest reach type strongest reach title)), and control the game effect lamp 9 in the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach presentation using a brightness data table for the introduction part (a brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation (strongest reach type strongest reach introduction)). With this configuration, in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode corresponding to the title display, resulting in appropriate title display.

[Effect 16]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base strong reach A-C effects and high base reach A-C effects. The low base strong reach A-C effects and high base reach A-C effects are each configured to include a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A effect/high base reach A effect, an expectation suggestion display made up of a first number (3) of star-shaped objects can be displayed, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect, an expectation suggestion display made up of a second number (3.5) of star-shaped objects that is greater than the first number can be displayed, and in the title display part of the low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect, an expectation suggestion display made up of a third number (4) of star-shaped objects that is greater than the second number can be displayed. The difference between the first number (3) and the second number (3.5) is the same (0.5) as the difference between the second number (3.5) and the third number (4), and the difference between the expected jackpot when a low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed and the expected jackpot when a low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect corresponding to the second number (3.5) is executed is greater than the difference between the expected jackpot when a low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect corresponding to the second number (3.5) is executed and the expected jackpot when a low base strong reach A effect/high base reach A effect corresponding to the first number (3). By doing this, when the number of star-shaped objects displayed as an expectation indication display in the title display part increases from the first number (3) to the second number (3.5), the increase in the number of star-shaped objects is the same as when it increases from the second number (3.5) to the third number (4), but the increase in the expectation of a jackpot is greater when it increases from the second number (3.5) to the third number (4) than when it increases from the first number (3) to the second number (3.5).Therefore, as the number of star-shaped objects increases, the player can expect to hit a jackpot greater than the number of increased star-shaped objects, while not being overly hopeful of a jackpot when the number of star-shaped objects is small.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a low-base strongest reach effect/high-base reach D effect, and is capable of displaying an expectation indication display consisting of a star-shaped object of the fourth number (4.5), which is greater than the third number (4), in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach effect/high-base reach D effect, and the difference (0.5) between the third number (4) and the fourth number (4.5) is smaller than the difference (1) between the first number (3) and the third number (4), and the low-base strongest reach effect corresponding to the fourth number (4.5) The difference between the probability of a jackpot when the lowest base strongest reach effect/high base reach D effect is executed and the probability of a jackpot when the low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed is greater than the difference between the probability of a jackpot when the low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed and the probability of a jackpot when the low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect corresponding to the first number (3) is executed. By doing this, the increase in the number of star-shaped objects displayed as an expectation indication display in the title display part is smaller when the number of star-shaped objects increases from the third number (4) to the fourth number (4.5) than when it increases from the first number (3) to the third number (4), but the increase in the expectation of a jackpot is greater when it increases from the third number (4) to the fourth number (4.5) than when it increases from the first number (3) to the third number (4). Therefore, the more star-shaped objects there are, the more likely a jackpot will occur even if the number of added star-shaped objects is small.

Furthermore, the difference between the third number (4) and the fourth number (4.5) is 0.5, and the difference between the first number (3) and the third number (4) is 1, so it can be expected that there will be a greater chance of a jackpot if the number of star-shaped objects displayed as an expectation suggestion display in the title display part increases by 0.5 from the third number (4) to the fourth number (4.5) than if the number increases by 1 from the first number (3) to the third number (4).

Furthermore, in a probability variable state that is more favorable than the normal state, the difference in the probability of a jackpot when a high base reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed and the probability of a jackpot when a high base reach B effect corresponding to the second number (3.5) is executed is greater than the difference in the probability of a jackpot when a low base strong reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed in the normal state and the probability of a jackpot when a low base strong reach B effect corresponding to the second number (3.5) is executed. By doing this, in a probability variable state that is more favorable than the normal state, it can be expected that a jackpot will occur when the number of star-shaped objects displayed as an expectation indication in the title display part increases.

[Effect 17]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low base strong reach A to C effects that have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base weak reach A and B effects under normal conditions. The low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects are each composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. The title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects has a longer execution time than the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, and an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects, while an expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects. By doing this, the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, which have a relatively high expectation, is longer than the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, which have a relatively low expectation, and while an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, an expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, so it can be intuitively recognized that the low base strong reach A to C performances have a higher expectation than the low base weak reach A and B performances.

In addition, the title display part in the low base strong reach A-C effects consists of a prologue display period and a title character display period in which the title characters are displayed (title start period, title display period, title end period), while the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects does not have a prologue display period and is composed only of the title character display period, and the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A-C effects is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects. By doing this, the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A-C effects is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, allowing the player to intuitively recognize that the low base strong reach A-C effects have a higher level of expectation than the low base weak reach A and B effects.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach effects A-C under normal conditions. The title display part in the low base strong reach effects A-C consists of a prologue display period and a title character display period in which the title characters are displayed (title start period, title display period, title end period). The title display part in the low base strongest reach effect does not have a prologue display period and is composed only of the title character display period. The title character display period in the title display part in the low base strongest reach effect is longer than the title character display period in the title display part in the low base strong reach effects A-C. By doing this, the title character display period in the title display part in the low base strongest reach effect is longer than the title character display period in the title display part in the low base strong reach effects A-C, allowing the player to intuitively recognize that the low base strongest reach effect has a higher expectation than the low base strong reach effects A-C.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B presentations and the low base strong reach A to C presentations, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data tables for the respective title displays (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title), and in the introduction parts of the low base weak reach A and B presentations and the low base strong reach A to C presentations, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data tables for the respective introduction parts (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

[Effect 18]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A, B effects and low base strong reach A to C effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than low base weak reach A, B effects under normal conditions. The low base weak reach A, B effects and low base strong reach A to C effects each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, in the low base weak reach A and B effects, there are cases where the effect result is an announcement of a jackpot, and cases where the effect results in an announcement of a miss, or cases where the effect develops into another super reach effect. In the low base strong reach A to C effects, there are cases where the effect result is an announcement of a jackpot, or cases where the effect results in an announcement of a miss. Furthermore, while an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects, an expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects. By doing this, an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances in which a jackpot will be directly announced, while an expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances in which a jackpot will not be directly announced, so that excessive expectations can be prevented from being created by the low base weak reach A and B performances.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to display the title text in a golden form, which confirms that the effect will develop into another super reach effect, so it is possible to draw the player's attention even in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, where no expectation indication is displayed.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B presentations and the low base strong reach A to C presentations, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data tables for the respective title displays (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title), and in the introduction parts of the low base weak reach A and B presentations and the low base strong reach A to C presentations, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data tables for the respective introduction parts (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

[Effect 19]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low-base strong reach A-C effects and low-base strongest reach. The low-base strong reach A-C effects and low-base strongest reach are configured to include both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, the low-base strong reach A-C effects and low-base strongest reach may be executed via a selection effect using title characters corresponding to multiple super reach effects, and it is possible to display an expectation suggestion display together with the title characters in the title display part and selection effect of the low-base strong reach A-C effects and low-base strongest reach. Furthermore, when displaying the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the low-base strong reach A-C effects and low-base strongest reach, an expectation suggestion display composed of multiple star-shaped objects is displayed in stages, and when displaying the expectation suggestion display in the selection effect, the expectation suggestion display composed of multiple star-shaped objects is not displayed in stages. By doing this, when the expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performances and the low base strongest reach, the expectation suggestion display made up of a plurality of star-shaped objects is displayed in stages, whereas when the expectation suggestion display is displayed in the selection performance, the expectation suggestion display made up of a plurality of star-shaped objects is not displayed in stages, so that the annoyance caused by the expectation suggestion display being displayed in stages not only in the title display part but also in the selection performance that precedes it can be eliminated.

In addition, the selection effect changes gradually from a Super Reach effect with a low probability of winning to a Super Reach effect with a high probability of winning by operating push button 31B. The time required for one change in the selection effect, i.e., the minimum time required to switch to the title image of the next Super Reach effect, may be shorter than the time required for one level of indication of the probability of winning in the title display part of the Low Base Strong Reach A-C effects and the Low Base Strongest Reach, i.e., the time it takes for the star-shaped object to change from black to highlighted and then to gold, giving a sense of speed to the gradual change in the selection effect.

Furthermore, the selection effect changes step by step from the current Super Reach effect to a Super Reach effect with one step higher chance of a jackpot, and the number of push button 31B operations required to change to the next step increases with each step. In this way, the higher the chance of a jackpot in the Super Reach effect, the more impatient the player becomes.

In addition, if a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach is selected through the selection effect, the title display part of that super reach effect will begin. By doing this, even if a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach is executed via the selection effect, the title display part will begin, making it easier for the player to determine which super reach effect was ultimately executed.

[Effect 20]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach effect. The super reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, after the super reach effect announces that a jackpot has been reached, the title character corresponding to the jackpot gaming state can be displayed in the jackpot start effect. The title character of the jackpot start effect is displayed in a manner that moves more dramatically than the title character of the super reach effect. In this way, the situation in which the title character is displayed in the super reach effect is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will be reached, whereas the situation in which the title character of the jackpot start effect is displayed is one in which it has already been announced that a jackpot will be reached. Therefore, the title character of the jackpot start effect moves more dramatically, allowing the player to celebrate the fact that the jackpot gaming state has been reached.

In this embodiment, the title characters are displayed in a static state in the title display part of the Super Reach effect, but the title characters may also be displayed in a moving manner in the title display part of the Super Reach effect. Even in this configuration, the title characters of the jackpot start effect can be displayed in a more dynamic manner than the title characters of the Super Reach effect, allowing you to celebrate the game being controlled to a jackpot game state.

In addition, in the title display part of the Super Reach effect, when the title characters are displayed, a background dedicated to the title display is displayed (Low Base Strong Reach B and C effects, Low Base Strongest Reach effect, High Base Reach A-D), and the background of the title characters in the jackpot start effect is displayed in a manner with greater movement than the background dedicated to the title display in the Super Reach effect. By doing this, the background of the title characters in the jackpot start effect also moves more greatly, allowing you to celebrate the fact that you have been controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

In this embodiment, the background dedicated to displaying the title in the Super Reach effect is a still image, but the background dedicated to displaying the title in the Super Reach effect may also be a moving image. Even in this configuration, the background of the title characters in the jackpot start effect is displayed in a manner with more movement than the background dedicated to displaying the title in the Super Reach effect, allowing you to celebrate being controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 21]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach effect. The super reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, in the operation prompting effects B and D in the introductory part of the super reach effect, small operation prompting characters that prompt the player to operate the push button 31B can be displayed. In this case, the small operation prompting characters are displayed in a manner that moves more than the title character corresponding to the super reach effect. In this way, the small operation prompting characters displayed in the introductory part prompt the player to take an action (operation), and by moving them more than the title character displayed in the title display part, the player can be intuitively prompted to take an action (operation).

Furthermore, in operation prompting effects B and D in the introductory part of the Super Reach effect, the player is prompted to operate push button 31B, and it is possible to display operation prompting characters (large) that suggest a more advantageous situation than operation prompting characters (small), and both operation prompting characters (small) and operation prompting characters (large) are displayed in a manner that causes greater movement than the title characters corresponding to the Super Reach effect. In this way, whether it is operation prompting characters (small) or operation prompting characters (large), by moving them more than the title characters displayed in the title display part, it is possible to intuitively encourage the player to take action (operate).

In this embodiment, the title characters are displayed in a stationary state in the title display part of the Super Reach effect, but the title characters may also be displayed in a moving manner in the title display part of the Super Reach effect. Even in this configuration, by displaying the operation prompt characters (small) in a manner that moves more than the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the player can be intuitively encouraged to take action (operate). Also, even in this configuration, by displaying both the operation prompt characters (small) and the operation prompt characters (large) in a manner that moves more than the title characters corresponding to the Super Reach effect, whether the operation prompt characters (small) or the operation prompt characters (large) move more than the title characters displayed in the title display part, the player can be intuitively encouraged to take action (operate).

In addition, the number of characters (3) in the small operation prompt text is less than the number of characters (7-13) in the title text of the Super Reach effect, so the content of the text can be recognized even if the small operation prompt text is moved widely.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 22]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach effect. The super reach effect is composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, in the title display part of the super reach effect, explanatory characters that explain the content of the super reach effect can be displayed. In this case, the explanatory characters are displayed in a manner that moves more than the title characters that correspond to the super reach effect. In this way, by displaying the additionally displayed explanatory characters in a manner that moves more than the title characters, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that explanatory characters have been added in addition to the title characters.

In this embodiment, the title characters are displayed in a static state in the title display part of the super reach effect, but the title characters may also be displayed in a moving manner in the title display part of the super reach effect. Even in such a configuration, by displaying the explanatory characters in a manner that moves more than the title characters in the super reach effect, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that explanatory characters have been added in addition to the title characters.

In addition, the explanatory text suggests that the Super Reach effect is advantageous, so the presence of the explanatory text can draw even more attention to it.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 23]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base strong reach A-C effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A-B effects and the low base weak reach A-B effects. The low base weak reach A-B effects and the low base strong reach A-C effects each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. The title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A-C effects are displayed in larger character size than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A-B effects. By doing this, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A-C effects, which have a relatively high expectation, are displayed in larger character size than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A-B effects, which have a relatively low expectation, so that the title characters alone can be used to intuitively recognize that the low base strong reach A-C effects have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A-B effects.

Furthermore, the number of characters (10) making up the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects is greater than the number of characters (7, 8) making up the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach B and C effects, but the display area size of the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach B and C effects is larger than the display area size of the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects. By doing this, the display area size occupied by one character is larger for the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach B and C effects, allowing the player to intuitively recognize that the low base strong reach B and C effects have a higher chance of winning than the low base weak reach A and B effects.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B presentations and the low base strong reach A to C presentations, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data tables for the respective title displays (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title), and in the introduction parts of the low base weak reach A and B presentations and the low base strong reach A to C presentations, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data tables for the respective introduction parts (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

[Effect 24]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super reach effect after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 reaches a reach state. The super reach effect is composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, before the title display part in the super reach effect, a decorative pattern (large) is displayed in a reach state, and then the decorative pattern (large) displayed in the reach state is reduced to a smaller decorative pattern (small). At this time, at least one character of the title character corresponding to the super reach effect is displayed in a size larger than the decorative pattern (small). By doing this, at least one character of the title character corresponding to the super reach effect is displayed in a size larger than the reduced decorative pattern (small), so that the title character can be focused on in the title display part.

In addition, all characters of the title letters corresponding to the Super Reach effect are displayed smaller than the decorative pattern (large) and larger than the decorative pattern (small). This ensures that the decorative pattern (large) can be recognized when the Reach state is reached, and then the decorative pattern (large) is reduced to a decorative pattern (small), and each character that makes up the title letters is displayed larger than the decorative pattern (small), so that attention can be drawn to the title letters in the title display part.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 25]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach effect. The super reach effect includes a title display part that displays corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, in operation prompting effects B and D in the introductory part of the super reach effect, small operation prompting characters can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Furthermore, after a jackpot is announced by the super reach effect, title characters corresponding to the jackpot gaming state can be displayed in the jackpot start effect. The title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed larger than the small operation prompting characters. In this way, the situation in which small operation prompting characters are displayed in the super reach effect indicates a situation in which it is not yet clear whether a jackpot has occurred, whereas the situation in which the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed indicates a situation in which a jackpot has already been announced. Displaying the title characters of the jackpot start effect larger than the small operation prompting characters allows the player to celebrate the jackpot gaming state.

The title characters for the jackpot start effect are composed of "BIG" or "REGULAR" and "BONUS." After "BIG" or "REGULAR" is displayed at the top of the fixed position, "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position. After "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position, "BIG" or "REGULAR" displayed at the top of the fixed position and "BONUS" displayed at the bottom of the fixed position are gradually enlarged. Furthermore, "BIG" or "REGULAR" and "BONUS" are displayed at their smallest size when displayed at the top and bottom of the fixed position, and the size of the characters when "BIG" or "REGULAR" and "BONUS" are displayed at the top and bottom of the fixed position is larger than the size of the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (small). By doing this, the characters that make up the title characters for the jackpot start effect are always displayed larger than the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (small), making it even more congratulatory to be controlled into the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, the smallest character in the string of characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start effect is larger than the largest character in the string of characters that make up the small operation prompt characters. By doing this, no matter which character you focus on, the title characters of the jackpot start effect will be displayed larger than the small operation prompt characters, making it even more congratulatory to be controlled into the jackpot game state.

It is also possible to display special prompt characters (large) that suggest a more advantageous situation than the small prompt characters. The large prompt characters are displayed larger than the title characters of the jackpot start effect, allowing the player to sense the advantageous situation.

In addition, the smallest character in the string of characters that make up the large operation prompt characters is displayed larger than the largest character in the string of characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start effect. This means that no matter which character the player focuses on, the large operation prompt characters will be displayed larger than the title characters of the jackpot start effect, making the player aware of the advantageous situation.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 26]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach effect. The super reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, after the super reach effect announces that a jackpot has been reached, the title characters corresponding to the jackpot gaming state can be displayed in the jackpot start effect. The title characters for the jackpot start effect are displayed larger than the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect. By doing so, the situation in which the title characters are displayed in the super reach effect is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will be reached, whereas the situation in which the title characters for the jackpot start effect are displayed is one in which it has already been announced that a jackpot will be reached. By displaying the title characters for the jackpot start effect larger than the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the game has been controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, the Super Reach effect includes multiple types of Super Reach effects with different title characters, and the title character of the jackpot start effect is displayed larger than the title character corresponding to any of the types of Super Reach effects, allowing you to celebrate the jackpot game state being controlled.

In addition, the smallest character in the string of characters that make up the title characters for the jackpot start effect is displayed larger than the largest character in the string of characters that make up the title characters corresponding to any type of super reach effect, so no matter which character you focus on, the title character for the jackpot start effect will be displayed larger than the title character that corresponds to the super reach effect, making it even more congratulatory that you have been controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 27]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, in the operation prompting effect A that is executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to display operation prompting characters (small) that prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Then, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed larger than the operation prompting characters (small). By doing this, the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed before the title display part, and the title characters that are displayed thereafter are displayed larger than the operation prompting characters (small), thereby drawing attention to the title characters.

Furthermore, after the operation prompt text (small) is displayed, the low base weak reach A and B effects develop, and the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects begins. By doing this, the operation prompt text (small) is displayed before the title display part in the series of events, and the title text that is displayed afterwards is displayed larger than the operation prompt text (small), thereby drawing attention to the title text.

In addition, the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B effects is displayed larger than the largest character among the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (small), so no matter which character you focus on, you can draw attention to the title characters.

The effect control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attack lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. It also controls the game effect lamps 9 in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach-type common title), and in the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects using the brightness data table for the respective introductory part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, allowing the game effect lamps 9 to emit light in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed appropriately.

[Effect 28]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. In addition, in the operation prompting effect A that is executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to display operation prompting characters (small) that prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. In addition, after the low base weak reach A and B effects announce that a jackpot will occur, it is possible to display the title characters of the jackpot start effect corresponding to the controlled jackpot game state. Then, the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed larger than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, and the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed larger than the operation prompting characters (small). By doing this, the situation in which the title letters are displayed in the low base weak reach A and B effects is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will occur, whereas the situation in which the title letters of the jackpot start effect are displayed is one in which it has already been announced that a jackpot will occur, and by displaying the title letters of the jackpot start effect larger than the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. Also, by displaying operation prompt letters (small) before the title display part and displaying the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects that are displayed afterwards larger than the operation prompt letters (small), it is possible to draw attention to the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects.

Furthermore, after the operation prompt character (small) is displayed, the low base weak reach A and B effects develop, the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects begins, and after the low base weak reach A and B effects announce that a jackpot has been reached, the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed. In this way, the operation prompt character (small) is displayed before the title display part in the series of events, and the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects that are displayed afterwards are displayed larger than the operation prompt character (small), thereby drawing attention to the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, and after the low base weak reach A and B effects announce that a jackpot has been reached, the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed larger than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, allowing the player to celebrate being controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

The effect control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attack lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. It also controls the game effect lamps 9 in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach-type common title), and in the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects using the brightness data table for the respective introductory part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, allowing the game effect lamps 9 to emit light in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed appropriately.

[Effect 29]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach effect. The super reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, after the super reach effect announces that a jackpot has been reached, the title character corresponding to the jackpot gaming state can be displayed in the jackpot start effect. The title character of the jackpot start effect is displayed for a longer period of time than the title character corresponding to the super reach effect. In this way, the situation in which the title character is displayed in the super reach effect is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will be reached, whereas the situation in which the title character of the jackpot start effect is displayed is one in which it has already been announced that a jackpot will be reached. By displaying the title character of the jackpot start effect for a longer period of time than the title character corresponding to the super reach effect, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the jackpot gaming state has been reached.

In addition, the time from when all of the characters making up the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed until at least a portion of those characters disappear is longer than the time from when part of the characters making up the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect are displayed until all of those characters disappear. By doing this, the time during which the title characters of the jackpot start effect, which has a celebratory meaning, are clearly visible is made longer than the time during which the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect, which are intended to increase the possibility of a jackpot, are displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, after the title letters of the jackpot start effect are displayed, the title letters of the jackpot start effect are switched to a right-hit promotion image (small) and a right-hit promotion image (large) which suggest the operation method during the jackpot game state, and after a predetermined period of time has passed since the switch to the right-hit promotion image (small) and right-hit promotion image (large), advantageous control is exercised by operating using the operation method suggested by the right-hit promotion image (small) and right-hit promotion image (large) (an operation method to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R), and the time it takes to switch from the title letters of the jackpot start effect to the right-hit promotion image (small) and right-hit promotion image (large) is shorter than the time it takes to end the title letters corresponding to the super reach effect. By doing this, the title text of the jackpot start effect switches to the right hit prompt image (small) and right hit prompt image (large) in a short time, and then after a predetermined period of time has passed, control is exercised that gives an advantage by operating using the operation method suggested by the right hit prompt image (small) and right hit prompt image (large), preventing the player from being disadvantaged by changing the operation method during the period when the title text of the jackpot start effect ends.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 30]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach effect. The super reach effect includes a title display part that displays corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, in operation prompting effects B and D in the introductory part of the super reach effect, small operation prompting characters can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Furthermore, after a jackpot is announced by the super reach effect, title characters corresponding to the jackpot gaming state can be displayed in the jackpot start effect. The title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed for a longer period of time than the small operation prompting characters. In this way, the situation in which the small operation prompting characters are displayed in the super reach effect is one in which it is not yet clear whether a jackpot has occurred, whereas the situation in which the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed is one in which it has already been announced that a jackpot has occurred. By displaying the title characters of the jackpot start effect for a longer period of time than the small operation prompting characters, the player can celebrate being controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

The small operation prompt text is displayed until the prompted operation is performed or the time for which the prompted operation is valid has elapsed, and the time for which the title text for the jackpot start effect is displayed is longer than the time from when the small operation prompt text is displayed until the time for which the prompted operation is valid has elapsed without the prompted operation being performed. By doing this, the title text for the jackpot start effect is displayed for a longer time than the time it is displayed without the prompted operation being performed after the small operation prompt text is displayed, allowing you to celebrate the game being controlled to a jackpot game state.

In addition, the time from when all of the characters making up the title character of the jackpot start effect are displayed until at least part of the character string disappears is longer than the time the small operation prompt characters are displayed. By doing this, the time the congratulatory title character of the jackpot start effect is clearly visible is longer than the time the small operation prompt characters, which are intended to encourage the player to operate the machine, are displayed, giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

It is also possible to display large operation prompt characters that suggest a more advantageous situation than small operation prompt characters. Small operation prompt characters are displayed without any prompt introduction effects, while large operation prompt characters are displayed after the prompt introduction effects have been executed. The time that the title characters for the jackpot start effect are displayed is longer than the time that large operation prompt characters are displayed. In this way, the time that the congratulatory advantageous state name display is displayed is longer than the time that large operation prompt characters accompanied by a prompt introduction display are displayed, giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 31]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, in the operation prompting effect A that is executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to display operation prompting characters (small) that prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Then, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed for a longer period of time than the operation prompting characters (small). By doing this, the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed before the title display part, and the title characters that are displayed thereafter are displayed for a longer period of time than the operation prompting characters (small), thereby drawing attention to the title characters.

In addition, the time from when all the characters making up the title are displayed until at least part of the characters disappears is longer than the time the action prompt characters (small) are displayed. By doing this, the time the title display is clearly visible is longer than the time the prompt characters, which are intended to encourage the player to take action, are displayed, drawing attention to the title characters.

It is also possible to display large operation prompt characters that suggest a more advantageous situation than small operation prompt characters. Small operation prompt characters are displayed without any prompt introduction, while large operation prompt characters are displayed after the prompt introduction has been executed. The title characters are displayed for a longer period than the large operation prompt characters. This allows the title display to be displayed for a longer period than the large operation prompt characters that accompany the prompt introduction, drawing attention to the title characters.

The effect control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attack lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. It also controls the game effect lamps 9 in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach-type common title), and in the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects using the brightness data table for the respective introductory part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, allowing the game effect lamps 9 to emit light in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed appropriately.

[Effect 32]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, in the operation prompting effect A, which is executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to display small operation prompting characters that prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Furthermore, after the low base weak reach A and B effects announce that a jackpot will occur, it is possible to display the title characters of the jackpot start effect corresponding to the controlled jackpot game state. The title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed for a longer period of time than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, and the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects are displayed for a longer period of time than the small operation prompting characters. By doing this, the situation in which the title letters are displayed in the low base weak reach A and B effects is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will occur, whereas the situation in which the title letters of the jackpot start effect are displayed is one in which it has already been announced that a jackpot will occur, and by displaying the title letters of the jackpot start effect for a longer period of time than the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the game has been controlled to a jackpot. Also, by displaying operation prompt letters (small) before the title display part and then displaying the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects for a longer period of time than the operation prompt letters (small), it is possible to draw attention to the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects.

The effect control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attack lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. It also controls the game effect lamps 9 in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach-type common title), and in the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects using the brightness data table for the respective introductory part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, allowing the game effect lamps 9 to emit light in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed appropriately.

[Effect 33]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B effects and low base strong reach A to C effects in the normal state, and can execute high base reach A to D effects in a probability variable state that is more advantageous than the normal state. The low base weak reach A and B effects, low base strong reach A to C effects, and high base reach A to D effects in the probability variable state are all composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the low base strong reach A to C effects have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B effects, the high base reach B to D effects have a higher jackpot expectation than the high base reach A effect, and the high base reach A effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B effects. Then, an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C effects, the high base reach A effect, and the high base reach B to D effects, but an expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects. By doing this, the low base weak reach A and B effects in the normal state have a lower jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A to C effects in the normal state, so by displaying an expectation suggestion display in the low base strong reach A to C effects but not displaying an expectation suggestion display in the low base weak reach A and B effects, excessive expectations of a jackpot due to the low base weak reach A and B effects are not created. On the other hand, although the high base reach A effect in a probability variable state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, has a lower expectation of a jackpot than the high base reach B to D effect in the probability variable state, it has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A and B effect in the normal state, so by displaying an expectation indication display in both the high base reach A effect and the high base reach B to D effect, it is possible to expect a jackpot in both the high base reach A effect and the high base reach B to D effect.

[Effect 34]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a super reach effect both in the normal state and in a probability variable state that is more advantageous than the normal state. The super reach effect in the normal state and the super reach effect in the probability variable state are both composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. The title display part of the super reach effect in the probability variable state is shorter than the title display part of the super reach effect in the normal state. By doing so, the title display part of the super reach effect in the probability variable state is shorter than the title display part of the super reach effect in the normal state, allowing for a fast-paced gameplay in the probability variable state.

In addition, even if the frequency with which Super Reach effects are executed in the probability variable state is higher than the frequency with which Super Reach effects are executed in the normal state, the title display portion of the Super Reach effects in the probability variable state is shorter than the title display portion of the Super Reach effects in the normal state, allowing play in the probability variable state to proceed at a good tempo.

The effect control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attack lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and also controls the brightness data tables for title display (weak reach common title, strong reach common title, high base reach common title, The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction) for the introduction part of the super reach effect. In this way, during the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 35]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base strong reach effect, which has a higher probability of winning than the low base strong reach effects A to C and the low base strong reach effects A to C. The low base strong reach effects A to C and the low base strong reach effects include both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, when the game control microcomputer 100 performs 900 variable displays in the normal state without being controlled to a jackpot, it controls to the time-saving state B (Yu-time), which is more advantageous than the normal state. In the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects, the title characters are displayed in a display mode in which the title characters are displayed while moving from the left side of the display area to the center, and in the title display part in the low base strongest reach effect, the title characters are displayed in a display mode in which the title characters are displayed reduced from an enlarged display, and when controlled to time-shortened state B (Yu-time), in the Yu-time start effect, the title characters of the Yu-time start effect are displayed in a display mode in which the title characters are displayed reduced from an enlarged display, similar to the title display part in the low base strongest reach effect. By doing this, when controlled to time-shortened state B (Yu-time), in the Yu-time start effect, the title characters of the Yu-time start effect are displayed in the same display mode as the title characters of the low base strongest reach effect, which has a relatively high expectation of a jackpot, so that it can be recognized that time-shortened state B (Yu-time) is highly advantageous.

In addition, when the title characters are erased in the Yu-Time start effect, they are erased in a display format in which they expand as they are erased, similar to when the title characters are erased in the title display part of the Low Base Strongest Reach effect. By doing this, even when the title characters are erased in the Yu-Time start effect, they are erased in the same display format as when the title characters are erased in the Low Base Strongest Reach effect, which has a relatively high expectation of a jackpot, so the player can recognize that time-saving state B (Yu-Time) is highly advantageous.

[Effect 36]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a Super Reach effect. The Super Reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, if the game control microcomputer 100 performs 900 variable displays in the normal state without being controlled to a jackpot, it controls the game to a time-saving state B (Yu-time), which is more advantageous than the normal state. When controlled to time-saving state B (Yu-time), the title character of the Yu-time start effect is displayed in the Yu-time start effect, and the size of the characters constituting the title character of the Yu-time start effect is larger than the size of the characters constituting the title character corresponding to the Super Reach effect. In this way, while the title character is displayed in the Super Reach effect when it is not yet clear whether a jackpot will occur, the title character of the Yu-time start effect is controlled to time-saving state B (Yu-time), and the characters constituting the title character of the Yu-time start effect are displayed larger than the characters constituting the title character corresponding to the Super Reach effect, allowing the player to celebrate being controlled to time-saving state B (Yu-time).

The Super Reach effect also includes multiple types of Super Reach effects with different title characters, and the characters that make up the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect are larger than the characters that make up the title characters corresponding to any of the types of Super Reach effects. By doing this, the characters that make up the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect are displayed larger than the characters that make up the title characters corresponding to any of the types of Super Reach effects, so you can celebrate being controlled to time-saving state B (Yu-Time).

In addition, the smallest character among the characters making up the title character of the Yu-Time start effect is larger than the largest character among the characters making up the title character corresponding to any type of Super Reach effect. By doing this, no matter which character you focus on, the title character of the Yu-Time start effect will be displayed larger than the title character corresponding to the Super Reach effect, making it even more congratulatory that you have been controlled to time-saving state B (Yu-Time).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 37]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a Super Reach effect. The Super Reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, when 900 variable displays are performed in the normal state without being controlled to a jackpot, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game to a time-saving state B (Yu-time), which is more advantageous than the normal state. When controlled to time-saving state B (Yu-time), the title character of the Yu-time start effect is displayed in the Yu-time start effect, and the display time of the title character of the Yu-time start effect is longer than the display time of the title character corresponding to the Super Reach effect. In this way, while the title character is displayed in the Super Reach effect when it is not yet clear whether a jackpot will occur, the title character of the Yu-time start effect is controlled to time-saving state B (Yu-time), and the title character of the Yu-time start effect is displayed longer than the title character corresponding to the Super Reach effect, allowing the player to celebrate the control to time-saving state B (Yu-time).

In addition, the time from when all of the characters making up the title character of the Yu-Time start effect are displayed until at least a portion of that character is no longer displayed is longer than the time from when part of the characters making up the title character corresponding to the Super Reach effect is displayed until all of that character is no longer displayed. By doing this, the time during which the title character of the Yu-Time start effect, which has a celebratory meaning, is clearly visible is longer than the time during which the title character corresponding to the Super Reach effect, which is intended to increase the possibility of a jackpot, is displayed, giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 38]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a Super Reach effect. The Super Reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, when 900 variable displays are performed in the normal state without being controlled by a jackpot, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game to a time-saving state B (Yu-time), which is more advantageous than the normal state. Furthermore, in the normal state, it is possible to display characters indicating the number of times remaining until the time-saving state B (Yu-time) is controlled. Furthermore, the size of the characters constituting the title character corresponding to the Super Reach effect is larger than the size of the characters constituting the characters constituting the characters constituting the number of times remaining until the Yu-time. In this way, the title character corresponding to the Super Reach effect is displayed larger than the characters constituting the characters constituting the characters constituting the number of times remaining until the Yu-time, thereby drawing attention to the title character corresponding to the Super Reach effect.

In addition, the Super Reach effect includes low base weak reach A and B effects, and low base strong reach A-C effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than low base weak reach A and B effects. The remaining number of plays until Yu-Time is displayed during low base weak reach A and B effects, but not during low base strong reach A-C effects. By doing this, the remaining number of plays until Yu-Time is displayed during low base weak reach A and B effects, which have a low jackpot expectation, making the player aware of the number of plays until time-saving state B (Yu-Time). Meanwhile, in low base strong reach A-C effects, which have a high jackpot expectation, the remaining number of plays until Yu-Time is not displayed, drawing attention to the content of the effect. Furthermore, since time-saving state B (Yu-Time) is more likely to result in a jackpot than normal state, this can alleviate the player's disappointment when there are few plays remaining until time-saving state B (Yu-Time).

In addition, if the selection effect progresses to a low base strong reach A-C effect without going through the low base weak reach A or B effect, the remaining number of plays until Yu-Time is not displayed even during the selection effect. This prevents the remaining number of plays until Yu-Time from interfering with the selection effect that confirms a super reach effect of low base strong reach A-C or higher, and also reduces the player's disappointment when there are only a few plays remaining until time-saving state B (Yu-Time).

In addition, when a jackpot is announced in the low base strong reach A-C effects, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state without displaying the remaining number of plays until Yu-Time again, and when a miss is announced in the low base strong reach A-C effects, the remaining number of plays until Yu-Time is displayed again after the low base strong reach A-C effects end. By doing this, when a jackpot is announced in the low base strong reach A-C effects, the remaining number of plays until Yu-Time is not displayed again, thereby mitigating the player's disappointment when there are few plays left until time-saving state B (Yu-Time). In addition, when a miss is announced in the low base strong reach A-C effects, the remaining number of plays until Yu-Time is displayed again after the low base strong reach A-C effects end, allowing the player to feel relieved quickly when there are few plays left until time-saving state B (Yu-Time).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, it also controls the brightness data table for title display (weak reach series common title, strong reach series common title, high base reach series The game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach A introduction, strong reach-type strong reach B introduction, strong reach-type strong reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach A introduction, high base reach-type reach B introduction, high base reach-type reach C introduction, high base reach-type reach D introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 39]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a Super Reach effect. The Super Reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, when 900 variable displays are performed in the normal state without being controlled by a jackpot, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game to a time-saving state B (Yu-time), which is more advantageous than the normal state. Furthermore, in operation prompting effects A to D executed at timings related to the Super Reach effect, small operation prompting characters can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Furthermore, in the normal state, characters indicating the number of times remaining until the game is controlled to the time-saving state B (Yu-time) can be displayed. Furthermore, the size of the characters constituting the small operation prompting characters is larger than the size of the characters constituting the number of times remaining until the game is controlled to the Yu-time. By doing so, the small operation prompting characters are displayed larger than the characters constituting the number of times remaining until the game is controlled to the Yu-time, thereby drawing attention to the small operation prompting characters and effectively encouraging the player to take action (operate).

Furthermore, when executing the low base strong reach A-C effects among the super reach effects, if the operation prompt character (small) is displayed in operation prompt effect A, which is executed before the title display part, the character indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-Time is displayed at the same time, whereas if the operation prompt character (small) is displayed in operation prompt effect D, which is executed at the end of the introductory part, the character indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-Time is not displayed. By doing this, before the development into the low base strong reach A-C effects, the character indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-Time is displayed at the same time as the prompt character display operation prompt character (small), making the player aware of the number of times remaining until time-saving state B (Yu-Time), and by not displaying the character indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-Time in the operation prompt character (small) in the introductory part, the player can focus on whether or not a jackpot will be announced.

Furthermore, when the low base strong reach A-C effects are executed, operation prompt A, which is executed before the title display part, displays only the small operation prompt characters out of the small operation prompt characters and the large operation prompt characters, which suggest a more favorable situation than the small operation prompt characters. Meanwhile, operation prompt D, which is executed at the end of the introductory part, can display both the small operation prompt characters and the large operation prompt characters. When the large operation prompt characters are displayed in the low base strong reach A-C effects, the characters showing the number of times remaining until Yu-time are not displayed at the same time. By doing this, in addition to being notified of whether a jackpot will occur, the large operation prompt characters are displayed, drawing attention to the fact that a more favorable situation is suggested.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach presentation, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title), and in the introduction part of the super reach presentation, it controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, during the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

[Effect 40]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach effect. The super reach effect includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. Furthermore, when 900 variable displays are performed in the normal state without being controlled to a jackpot, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game to a time-saving state B (Yu-time), which is more advantageous than the normal state. Furthermore, after a jackpot is announced by the super reach effect, the title character of the jackpot start effect corresponding to the controlled jackpot game state can be displayed. Furthermore, in the normal state, the remaining number of times until Yu-time can be displayed, indicating the number of times remaining until the game is controlled to the time-saving state B (Yu-time). Furthermore, before displaying the title character of the jackpot start effect, the remaining number of times until Yu-time is erased, and the size of the characters constituting the title character of the jackpot start effect is larger than the size of the characters constituting the remaining number of times until Yu-time. By doing this, the situation in which the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed is one in which it has already been announced that a jackpot will occur, and the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time are unnecessary, so the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time are erased before the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed, and the characters constituting the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed larger than the characters constituting the number of times remaining until Yu-time, so that it is possible to celebrate being controlled to a jackpot game state.

In addition, regardless of the number of times remaining until time-saving state B (Yu-time), the size of the characters that make up the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time is the same, and the size of the characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start effect is larger than the size of the characters that make up the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time. By doing this, regardless of the number of times remaining until time-saving state B (Yu-time), the characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed larger than the characters that make up the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time, so you can celebrate being controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, when the game control microcomputer 100 performs a variable display in response to the first entry of a game ball into the first start winning slot or the second start winning slot in time-shortened state B (Yu-time), it uses a time-shortened state B start variable display pattern with a longer variable period than the variable pattern normally used in time-shortened state B (Yu-time). By doing this, the Yu-time start effect can be executed during the variable period corresponding to the time-shortened state B start variable display pattern during the first variable period in time-shortened state B (Yu-time).

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach presentation, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title), and in the introduction part of the super reach presentation, it controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for the introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). By doing this, during the title display part of the super reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

[Effect 41]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low-base weak reach A and B effects. The low-base weak reach A and B effects include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. It is also possible to change the title characters corresponding to the low-base weak reach A and B effects from a white state to a red or gold state. When the title characters are changed from a white state to a red or gold state in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the title characters are displayed so that the time during which they are displayed in the red or gold state is longer than the time during which they are displayed in the white state. In this way, when the title characters are changed from a white state to a red or gold state in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the title characters in the red or gold state, i.e., the state after the change, are displayed longer than the title characters in the white state, i.e., the state before the change, so that the change from white to red or gold can be reliably recognized.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the title characters may change from a white state to a red or gold state, or may remain in a white state. If the title characters are changed from a white state to a red or gold state, a specific sound is output as the white state changes to a red or gold state when time t1 has elapsed since the start of the title display period. If the title characters remain in a white state, the white state remains unchanged when time t1 has elapsed since the start of the title display period, and a specific sound is output. In this way, a specific sound is output when the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects change from a white state to a red or gold state at a specific timing, and a specific sound is also output when the title characters remain in a white state at the specific timing. This creates the expectation that the title characters will change to a red or gold state when the specific sound is output.

In addition, when the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects change from a white state to another state, a specific sound is output whether they change to a red state or a gold state, so the output of the specific sound draws attention to the type of state they will change to.

The effect control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attack lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. It also controls the game effect lamps 9 in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach-type common title), and in the introductory part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects using the brightness data table for the respective introductory part (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction, weak reach-type weak reach B introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the low-base weak reach A and B effects, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, allowing the game effect lamps 9 to emit light in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed appropriately.

[Effect 42]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. In addition, it is possible to change the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects from a white state to a red state, or to a gold state that suggests a higher likelihood of a jackpot than the red state. In either case where the title characters are changed from a white state to a red state or a gold state in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the characters are displayed by changing from the white state to a common display state and then changing to the red state or the gold state. By doing this, whether the title characters are changed from a white form to a red form or from a white form to a gold form in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, they are changed to a common display form and then changed to a red form or a gold form, so that by changing from the white form to the common display form, until the change from the common display form to the red form or the gold form, players can expect until the end that they will change to the gold form which has a higher probability of winning than the red form.

Furthermore, a common display mode is one in which the characters that make up the title text glow, and when the light clears, they change to a red or gold color. By doing this, it is possible to encourage the characters that make up the title text to glow and change to a red or gold color.

[Effect 43]
In this embodiment, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B presentations. The low base weak reach A and B presentations are comprised of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introductory part until the presentation result is announced. The presentation control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table comprised of brightness data. The effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 using a common brightness data table for the title display part (weak reach-type common title) in both the title display part of the low base weak reach A effect and the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect, controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for the low base weak reach A effect (weak reach-type weak reach A introduction) in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A effect, and controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for the low base weak reach B effect (weak reach-type weak reach B introduction) in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B effect. In this way, by using a common brightness data table corresponding to the title display part for the two different super reach effects, an increase in cost and capacity is prevented, and by using a corresponding brightness data table for each of the introduction parts, the period until an announcement of whether or not a jackpot has been achieved can be suitably aroused, resulting in suitable title display.

[Effect 44]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A, B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, which have a higher probability of winning than the low base weak reach A, B effects. The low base weak reach A, B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. The presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for the common title display part (weak reach common title) in the title display part of the low base weak reach A presentation and in the title display part of the low base weak reach B presentation, and controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for the common title display part (strong reach common title) in the title display part of the low base strong reach A presentation, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B presentation and in the title display part of the low base strong reach C presentation, and controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for the low base weak reach A presentation (weak reach weak reach A introduction) in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A presentation. The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the low base weak reach B presentation (introduction of weak reach B in a weak reach system) in the introductory part of the low base strong reach A presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the low base strong reach A presentation (introduction of strong reach A in a strong reach system) in the introductory part of the low base strong reach B presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the low base strong reach B presentation (introduction of strong reach B in a strong reach system), and in the introductory part of the low base strong reach C presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the low base strong reach C presentation (introduction of strong reach C in a strong reach system). In this way, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part is common for two types of super reach effects with high expectations and two types of super reach effects with low expectations, thereby preventing an increase in cost and capacity, and by using the brightness data table corresponding to each of the introductory parts, it is possible to suitably stimulate the period until it is announced whether or not a jackpot has been achieved, and as a result, it is possible to perform a suitable title display.

[Effect 45]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base weak reach A and B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects that have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B effects, and low base strongest reach effects that have an even higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A-C effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects, and low base strongest reach effects each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the effect result is announced. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attack lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. The presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for a common title display part (weak reach type common title) in the title display part of the low base weak reach A presentation and in the title display part of the low base weak reach B presentation, controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for a common title display part (strong reach type common title) in the title display part of the low base strong reach A presentation, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B presentation and in the title display part of the low base strong reach C presentation, controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for title display for the low base strongest reach presentation (strongest reach type strongest reach title) in the title display part of the low base strongest reach presentation, and controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for title display for the low base weak reach A presentation (weak reach type weak reach title) in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A presentation. In the introduction part of the low base strong reach A presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base weak reach B presentation (weak reach system weak reach B introduction), in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach A presentation (strong reach system strong reach A introduction), in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach B presentation (strong reach system strong reach B introduction), in the introduction part of the low base strong reach C presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach C presentation (strong reach system strong reach C introduction), and in the introduction part of the low base strongest reach presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strongest reach presentation (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction). In this way, for the two types of super reach effects with high expectations and the two types of super reach effects with low expectations, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part is common, thereby preventing an increase in cost and capacity, and by using the brightness data table corresponding to each of the introductory parts, it is possible to suitably stimulate the period until it is announced whether or not a jackpot will be won, resulting in a suitable title display. Furthermore, the low-base strongest reach effect with the highest expectation is heightened by having dedicated brightness data tables for the title display part and the introductory part, resulting in a suitable title display.

[Effect 46]
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing low base weak reach A and B effects. The low base weak reach A and B effects are comprised of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introductory part until the effect result is announced. In addition, it is possible to change the display of the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects from a white state to a red state, or to a gold state that suggests a higher likelihood of a jackpot than the red state. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. When the color of the title letters is not changed in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table: weak reach common title (white) in which brightness data is set for when a title change effect is not performed; when the color of the title letters is changed to red or gold in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table: weak reach common title (red) or weak reach common title (gold) in which brightness data is set for when a title change effect is performed; and regardless of whether the color of the title letters is changed in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for the common introduction part (weak reach weak reach A introduction, weak reach weak reach B introduction). By doing this, whether the title characters are not changed to red or gold in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances or are changed to the second form, the brightness data table corresponding to each introductory part is made common, thereby preventing an increase in cost and capacity, and by using the brightness data table corresponding to each title display part, it is possible to perform the performance appropriately in either the case where the color of the title characters is not changed or where they are changed to red or gold, and as a result, an appropriate title display can be performed.

[Effect 47]
In this embodiment, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B presentations. The low base weak reach A and B presentations are comprised of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introductory part until the presentation result is announced. The presentation control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table comprised of brightness data. Furthermore, the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects includes a title start period from when the title characters start to be displayed in their designated positions until they are displayed in their designated positions, and a title display period and a title end period after the title characters are displayed in their designated positions. The effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 during the title start period of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects using a brightness data table (weak reach title start) that defines a light-emitting pattern specific to the title start period, and controls the game effect lamps 9 during the title display period and title end period using a brightness data table (weak reach title display) that defines a light-emitting pattern specific to the period after the title display period. In this way, by using the brightness data table corresponding to the title start period from when the title characters start to be displayed in their designated positions until they are displayed in their designated positions in the low base weak reach A and B effects, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display period and title end period after the title characters are displayed in their designated positions, and the brightness data table corresponding to the introductory part, the period during which the title characters are displayed and the period until the notification of whether or not a favorable state will be achieved can be favorably stimulated, resulting in favorable title display.

In addition, depending on whether it is a low base weak reach A presentation or a low base weak reach B presentation, a common brightness data table can be used for either the brightness data table corresponding to the title start period or the brightness data table corresponding to the title display period and title end period, and a separate brightness data table with individual contents set for the other period.By using a common brightness data table for either the title start period or the brightness data table corresponding to the title display period and title end period, increases in cost and capacity can be prevented, and by using the corresponding brightness data table for the other period, it is possible to appropriately present either a low base weak reach A presentation or a low base weak reach B presentation, resulting in an appropriate title display.

Although embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention are also included in the present invention.

The following describes further the implementation of the gaming machine according to the present invention based on the following examples.

(Feature 132SG form)
[Form A1]
The gaming machine of form A1-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Display means (e.g., image display device 5);
sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L and 8R);
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG01, the chance button 631B),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means
It is possible to execute a movable body effect using the movable body during the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 56, a part where a movable body announcement can be executed in which the on-board movable body 32A vibrates up and down),
The display means can display an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 60, an effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the movement of the on-board movable body 32A),
The sound output means can output a movable body effect sound corresponding to the movable body effect (for example, in the movable body preview shown in FIG. 60, the part where effect sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R),
The movable body control means
When the power is turned on, it is possible to perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process shown in Figures 42 and 43, which performs the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101).
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform performance movement control to move the movable body by a predetermined operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 58, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 moves the on-board movable body 32A up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position),
When the movable body performance is executed with a variable display that is started during a predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed at the time of power-on with initialization, when the movable body performance is executed during the predetermined period, the output of the performance movable control and the movable body performance sound is limited, while the display of the effect display is performed, and when the movable body performance is executed after the predetermined period, at least the performance movable control and the display of the effect display are performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 73, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, a start winning occurs during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, and based on the start winning, these on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG1 When a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the initial operation period of 01, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction and the output of the movable body prediction sound corresponding to the movable body prediction from the speakers 8L and 8R are not executed during the execution period of the movable body prediction, but the effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. 72, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, a start-up winning occurs after the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and when a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started based on the start-up winning, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction and the effect display 132SG407 are displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the movable body prediction.
When the power is turned on without initialization and the movable body performance is executed with a variable display that is started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, the performance movable control is limited when the movable body performance is executed during the predetermined period, while the effect display is displayed and the movable body performance sound is output, and when the movable body performance is executed after the predetermined period, the performance movable control, the effect display is displayed, and the movable body performance sound is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 77, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, a start winning occurs during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, and based on the start winning, during the initial operation period of these on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, When a variable display that executes a movable object prediction is started, the operation of the on-board movable object 32A as a movable object prediction is not executed during the execution period of the movable object prediction, but the effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5 and a movable object prediction sound corresponding to the movable object prediction is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As shown in FIG. 76, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, a start winning occurs after the initial operation period of the on-board movable object 32A, the below-board movable object 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable object 132SG101, and when a variable display that executes a movable object prediction is started based on the start winning, the operation of the on-board movable object 32A as a movable object prediction, the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5, and the output of a movable object prediction sound corresponding to the movable object prediction are executed during the execution period of the movable object prediction.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a movable body presentation is executed using a variable display that is started during confirmation movable control, a gaming machine can be provided that can indicate to the player that a movable body presentation has been executed by outputting an effect display or movable body presentation sound, while preventing the presentation movable control from interfering with the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form A1-2 is
When the movable body performance is executed, the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when it is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 56, when the movable body notice is executed, the expectation of a jackpot is set higher than when the movable body notice is not executed),
When the power is turned on with initialization, if the movable body effect is executed with a variable display that started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, when the movable body effect is executed during the predetermined period, the effect movable control and the output of the movable body effect sound are limited, and after the predetermined period ends, the effect movable control that is limited during the predetermined period is performed, while the movable body effect sound is not output (for example, as shown in Figure 73, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, a start-up winning occurs during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101, and based on the start-up winning, In this case, when a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction and the output of a movable body prediction sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the movable body prediction are not executed during the execution period of the movable body prediction, while after the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 is completed, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction is executed again, but the output of a movable body prediction sound in response to the movable body prediction from the speakers 8L and 8R is not executed.
When the power is turned on without initialization, if the movable body effect is executed with a variable display that started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, when the movable body effect is executed during the predetermined period, the effect movable control is limited, and after the predetermined period ends, the effect movable control limited during the predetermined period is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 77, during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101 when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, When a start winning occurs, and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101 based on the start winning, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction is not executed during the execution period of the movable body prediction, but the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction is executed again after the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101 is completed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the effect of the presentation is not reduced by limiting the control of the movable body presentation, which has a high expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form A1-3 is
The movable body includes a first movable body (e.g., an on-board movable body 32A) and a second movable body (e.g., a below-board movable body 32B),
When power is turned on, the movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control to move the first movable body and the second movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the first movable body and the second movable body are operating normally (for example, a part of the performance control CPU 120 that executes the operation confirmation control process shown in FIG. 43).
The confirmation movement control ends based on the completion of the movement of the second movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. 72, the initial movements of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 are the last to end upon completion of the initial movement of the below-board movable body 32B).
The movable body effect is an effect using the first movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. 60, the movable body notice is a part that operates the on-board movable body 32A),
When the power is turned on, if the movable body effect is executed with a variable display that is started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movement control is being performed, the effect movement control is limited when the movable body effect is executed during the predetermined period, and the effect movement control limited during the predetermined period is performed when the movement of the second movable body by the confirmation movement control is completed (for example, as shown in FIG. 73, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the frame-up movable body 32B, the If a start winning occurs during the initial operation period of the movable body 132SG101, and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101 based on the start winning, the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A as a movable body prediction is not executed during the execution period of the movable body prediction, and the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A is executed again after the initial operation of the under-board movable body 32B is completed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which, when the movement of the first movable body by the confirmation movable control is completed, the performance movable control using the first movable body is executed, so that it is not possible to distinguish between the confirmation movable control and the performance movable control.

The gaming machine of form A1-4 is
The presentation control means is capable of executing an initialization notification corresponding to the initialization when power is turned on accompanied by initialization (for example, as shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification, and an initialization notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R).
The execution period of the confirmation movable control and the execution period of the initialization notification overlap (for example, as shown in Figures 72 and 73, the initial operation period of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101 overlaps with the light emission period in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the on-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, and the initialization notification sound output period from the speakers 8L and 8R).
The execution period of the initialization notification is longer than the execution period of the confirmation movable control (for example, as shown in Figures 72 and 73, the light emission period in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the upper-board movable body LED 9d, the lower-board movable body LED 9e, the upper-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, and the period during which the initialization notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R are longer than the initial operation period of the upper-board movable body 32A, the lower-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the upper-frame movable body 132SG101).
After the execution period of the confirmation movable control has ended, if the movable body effect is executed with a variable display that was started during the execution period of the initialization notification, when the movable body effect is executed during the execution period of the initialization notification, the effect movable control and the display of the effect display are performed, but the movable body effect sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 78, even if a variable display that executes a movable body preview is started during the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the frame-top movable body 132SG101, if the execution period of the movable body preview is after the operation of each movable body has ended, the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A and the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5 are executed during the execution period of the movable body preview, but the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are not lit in a manner corresponding to the initialization notification, and the initialization notification sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even during the execution period of the initialization response notification, if the confirmation movement control has ended, the performance movement control is executed, thereby providing a gaming machine that does not reduce the performance effect of the movable body performance.

The gaming machine of form A1-5 is
The performance control means is capable of executing a pre-reading movable body performance that suggests that the movable body performance will be executed in a variable display prior to a variable display based on a specific variable display pattern in which the movable body performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 56, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a pre-reading movable body notice),
When the predictive movable body performance is executed, the movable body control means is capable of performing specific performance movement control to move the movable body by a specific action (for example, as shown in FIG. 58, the performance control CPU 120 controls the on-board movable body 32A to be a part that can move up and down multiple times between an origin position and an intermediate position as a predictive movable body notice),
The execution period of the variable display in which the pre-reading movable body performance is executed is shorter than the execution period of the confirmation movable control (for example, the special chart change time of the non-reach miss variable display is 12 seconds or less, and the period of the initial operation is 30 seconds),
When the power is turned on, if the start condition is met multiple times during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, and the predictive movable body performance is executed in a variable display that is started based on the establishment of the start condition, when the predictive movable body performance is executed during the predetermined period, the specific movable control is limited,
When the variable display in which the pre-reading movable body effect is executed during the specified period ends, the specific movable control limited to the specified period will not be performed after the end of the specified period (for example, as shown in Figure 79, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start and variable display occurs multiple times during the confirmation operation of each movable body as initial operation control, the execution of the pre-reading movable body announcement is decided, if the execution period of the pre-reading movable body announcement overlaps with the confirmation operation period of each movable body or the period of initial operation control, the display of the effect display 132SG407 is executed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the pre-reading movable body announcement, and after the end of the variable display, the presentation operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the pre-reading movable body announcement is not executed again).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the variable display is crossed, the restricted specific movable control is not executed during the confirmation movable control, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not confuse the player by moving the movable body excessively after the confirmation movable control ends.

The gaming machine of form A1-6 is
The performance control means is capable of executing, in one variable display, as the movable body performance, a first movable body performance (for example, the first movable body preview shown in FIG. 80) and a second movable body performance (for example, the second movable body preview shown in FIG. 80) which has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state when executed than the first movable body performance,
The movable body control means
When the first movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform a first performance movement control (for example, a part where the on-board movable body 32A is moved multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position) that moves the movable body by a first predetermined operation,
When the second movable body performance is executed, a second performance movement control (for example, a part where the on-board movable body 32A is moved multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position) can be performed to move the movable body by a second predetermined operation.
When the power is turned on, if the first movable body performance and the second movable body performance are executed in one variable display that is started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, when the first movable body performance is executed during the predetermined period, the first performance movable control is limited, and after the predetermined period ends, the first performance movable control that is limited during the predetermined period is performed,
If the second movable body performance is executed before the restricted first performance movable control is performed, the first performance movable control is not performed and the second performance movable control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 80, if the initial operation of the movable body has already been performed during the execution period of the first movable body preview, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview is executed after the initial operation of the movable body is completed, but if the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body preview has already been executed before the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview is not executed and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body preview continues to be executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the effect of the presentation is not reduced by the movement of the movable body in the first movable body presentation hindering the movement of the movable body in the second movable body presentation.

The gaming machine of form A1-7 is
Light-emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g);
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, the above-board movable body 32A is provided with the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body 32B is provided with the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body 132SG101 is provided with the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B is provided with the chance button LED 9g).
The movable body includes a first movable body (e.g., an on-board movable body 32A) and a second movable body (e.g., a below-board movable body 32B),
The movable body control means is capable of performing special effect movement control to move the second movable body by a special operation to notify that the movable body is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 56, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute a decisive effect of raising the under-board movable body 32B),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to make the light emitting means of the second movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 72, the performance control CPU 120 makes the under-board movable body 9e emit light in an initial highlighting mode (for example, red flashing as shown in FIG. 67(B)) when the under-board movable body 32B is initially operated),
It is possible to perform special light emission control to make the light emitting means of the second movable body, which is moved by the special effect movement control, emit light in a special light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (E5), the effect control CPU 120 controls the under-board movable body 9e to emit a predetermined light color (for example, a portion that emits light in a rainbow flash as shown in FIG. 67 (B9)) when the under-board movable body 32B rises),
When the special effect movable control is executed during the specific light emission control, the special light emission control is limited (for example, when the execution period of the deciding effect is reached during the initial operation of each movable body after a hot start, a part that limits the light emission (rainbow flash) of the under-board movable body LED9e in a manner corresponding to the deciding effect during the execution period of the deciding effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or special performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form A1-8 is
The operation mode of the second movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operation mode of the second movable body by the special performance movable control are common (for example, the initial operation and performance operation of the under-board movable body 32B are both operations between the origin position and the performance position),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the second movable body, which is movable by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the second movable body is completed (for example, as shown in FIG. 67(B) and FIG. 72, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 causes the under-board movable body LED 9e to emit light in an initial highlight mode (flashing red)),
It is possible to perform the special light emission control such that the light emitting means of the second movable body, which is movable by the special effect movable control, emits light in a first special light emission pattern during a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first special light emission pattern during a second period after the end of the first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 67(B), the effect control CPU 120 causes the under-board movable body LED 9e to flash in rainbows when the under-board movable body 32B advances, and causes the under-board movable body LED 9e to emit light in smooth rainbows when the under-board movable body 32B moves in a contrasting motion).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movable control or special movable control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form A1-9 is
the movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
Light-emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, an under-board movable body LED 9e, an on-board movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g);
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the first movable body and the second movable body (for example, a portion where an on-board movable body LED 9d is provided on the on-board movable body 32A and an on-board movable body LED 9e is provided on the below-board movable body 32B),
The movable body control means can move the second movable body after moving the first movable body as the confirmation movable control (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 operates the above-board movable body 32A as an initial operation and then operates the below-board movable body 32B as shown in Figures 72 and 73).
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to make the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moving due to the confirmation movement control, emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 72, the performance control CPU 120 makes the under-board movable body 9e emit light in an initial highlighting mode (for example, red flashing as shown in FIG. 67(B)) when the under-board movable body 32B is initially operating),
When the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, the specific light emission control is not performed on the light emitting means of the second movable body, and the specific light emission control is performed on the light emitting means of the first movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. 72, during the execution of the confirmation operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the above-board movable body LED 9d is made to emit light in an initial highlighting mode, and the below-board movable body LED 9e is made to emit light in an initialization notification mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a moving object that is moving through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form A1-10 is
The movable body is movable between an initial position (e.g., an origin position) and an advanced position (e.g., a performance position),
The movable body control means
When the power is turned on, if the movable body is not positioned at the initial position, it is possible to perform return control to move the movable body to the initial position (for example, the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the origin position control process shown in FIG. 41 ).
When the variable display is started, the return control can be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 41, from the timing when the variable display is started, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the processing of 132SGS410 to 132SGS427).
When the power is turned on, if the variable display is started during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, the return control is restricted (for example, if a start winning occurs during the initial operation of each movable body when the pachinko game machine 1 is started and the variable display based on the start winning occurs, the initial operation of each movable body is executed with priority over the operation of each movable body to its origin position).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the confirmation movable control is not interrupted by the return control.

The gaming machine of form A1-11 is
The movable body is movable between an initial position (e.g., an origin position) and an advanced position (e.g., a performance position),
The movable body control means
When the power is turned on, if the movable body is not positioned at the initial position, it is possible to perform return control to move the movable body to the initial position (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the origin position control process shown in FIG. 41 ).
When the variable display ends and the game is put into a standby state, the return control can be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 41, from the start timing of the customer waiting demo effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the processing of 132SGS410 to 132SGS427).
When the power is turned on, the variable display is started during the predetermined period during which the confirmation movable control is being performed, and if the variable display ends during the predetermined period and the game is put into the standby state, the return control is restricted (for example, if a customer waiting demo performance starts in response to the end of the variable display, a part that gives priority to the performance operation of the customer waiting demo performance of each movable body over the movement of each movable body to its origin position);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the confirmation movable control is not interrupted by the return control.

The gaming machine of form A1-12 is
The performance control means can execute the movable body performance multiple times during one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 81, the part where the first variable display notice and the second variable display notice are executed during one variable display),
When the power is turned on, if the movable body performance is executed with a variable display that was started during the specified period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, the performance movable control is restricted when the movable body performance is executed during the specified period (for example, as shown in FIG. 81, if the variable display is executed during the initial operation of each movable body, if the first movable body announcement is executed during the initial operation, the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is not executed).
When one of the movable body performances executed multiple times in one variable display is executed and the movement of the movable body by the performance movement control corresponding to that one movable body performance does not end normally, when the next movable body performance is executed, the performance movement control corresponding to the next movable body performance is performed (for example, as shown in Figure 82, even if the performance operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview does not end normally, when the execution period of the second movable body preview begins, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body preview is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can attempt a retry using the performance movable control corresponding to the next movable body performance even if the performance movable control corresponding to one movable body performance does not end normally.

The gaming machine of form A1-13 is
The performance control means is capable of executing, as the movable body performance, a first movable body performance (e.g., a first movable body announcement) and a second movable body performance (e.g., a second movable body announcement) which has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state when executed than the first movable body performance,
The movable body control means
When the first movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform first performance movement control that moves the movable body by a first predetermined action (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 moves the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position multiple times as a first movable body notice),
When the second movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform second performance movement control that moves the movable body by a second predetermined action (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 moves the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position multiple times as a second movable body notice),
When the power is turned on, if the first movable body performance and the second movable body performance are executed in a variable display that is started during a predetermined period in which the confirmation movable control is being performed, when the first movable body performance is executed during the predetermined period, the first performance movable control is restricted, and after the predetermined period ends, the first performance movable control that is restricted during the predetermined period is executed (for example, if the execution period of the first movable body announcement occurs during the initial operation of each movable body, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is not executed during the execution period of the first movable body announcement, and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is executed again after the initial operation of each movable body).
When the first movable body is moving due to the limited first performance movement control, when the second movable body performance is executed, the first performance movement control is interrupted and the second performance movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 83, when the execution period of the second movable body announcement occurs during the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement in the initial operation of each movable body, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is interrupted and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body announcement is started).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the effect of the presentation is not reduced by the movement of the movable body in the first movable body presentation hindering the movement of the movable body in the second movable body presentation.

The gaming machine of form A1-14 is
The movable body is movable between an initial position (e.g., an origin position) and an advanced position (e.g., a performance position),
a first detection means (e.g., origin position sensor 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) capable of detecting that the movable body is placed at an initial position;
Further provided is a second detection means (e.g., performance position sensor 132SG124, 132SG134, 132SG104, 635D) capable of detecting that the movable body is positioned at the advanced position,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body toward the advanced position over a first period based on the detection by the first detection means that the movable body is placed at the initial position, and for moving the movable body toward the initial position when the second detection means does not detect that the movable body has been placed at the advanced position during the first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 84, the performance control CPU 120 is a part that moves the movable body toward the origin position when the performance position sensor does not detect the movable body during the first period).
The performance movement control is a control that moves the movable body toward the advance position over a second period, and stops the movable body when the second detection means does not detect that the movable body has been placed at the advance position during the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 85, the performance control CPU 120 is a part that stops the operation of the movable body when the performance position sensor does not detect the movable body during the second period).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a movable body presentation is executed during play, even if the movement of the movable body corresponding to the movable body presentation is not performed normally, the movement of the movable body based on the confirmation movement control is not performed, so it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the reduction in the presentation effect of a movable body presentation that was not performed normally.

The gaming machine of form A1-15 is
The movable body control means
If the movable body is unable to operate normally for a specific period of time, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control can be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 86, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that an operation error has occurred when the movable body does not reach the performance position as an initial operation, and repeatedly performs the initial operation).
When a predetermined number of operation errors are determined, it is possible to perform error operation control to move the movable body for a longer operation period than the operation period of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation operation control (for example, as shown in FIG. 86, the performance control CPU 120 operates the movable body as a special initial operation by the fourth operation error determination (dead end determination)),
In the case where the error movement control is performed, when the movable body performance is executed, the performance movement control is restricted, while the effect display is displayed and the movable body performance sound is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 86, in the movable body performance after a dead end determination is made, the movement of the movable body is not executed, but the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5, the light emission in a manner corresponding to the movable body announcement by the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, and the sound output corresponding to the movable body announcement from the speakers 8L, 8R are executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents malfunctions caused by forcing the movable body to operate in a situation where the movable body cannot operate normally, while not reducing the presentation effect of the movable body presentation.

[Form A2]
The gaming machine of form A2-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG01, the chance button 631B),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process shown in Figures 42 and 43, thereby performing the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101).
The performance control means can perform demo display control to display a demonstration display on the display means when the power is turned on (for example, as shown in FIG. 87, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 displays a customer waiting demo performance on the image display device 5).
When a power outage occurs and the power is turned on, the movable body control means controls the movable bodies so that the confirmation movable control ends before the demo display control is performed (for example, as shown in Figures 87 to 89, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started after a power outage, the initial operation control of each movable body is executed and then the customer waiting demo performance is displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the demonstration display is not obstructed by the movable body that operates under the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form A2-2 is
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movable control for a predetermined period of time (for example, the performance control CPU 120 requires 30 seconds for the initial operation of each movable body),
The performance control means can perform the demo display control after a period at least as long as the predetermined period has elapsed since the confirmation movement control was completed (for example, a part in which a customer waiting demo performance is executed 30 seconds after the initial movement of each movable body is completed),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the demonstration display is not displayed immediately after the confirmation movable control, thereby preventing the visibility of the demonstration display from being hindered.

The gaming machine of form A2-3 is
The effect control means can perform the demo display control at different timings when the power is turned on with initialization and when the power is turned on without initialization (for example, the period from the completion of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo effect is executed differs depending on whether the pachinko game machine 1 is started up by a cold start or a hot start).
The movable body control means
The confirmation movement control can be performed in common when power is turned on with initialization and when power is supplied without initialization (for example, the period from the completion of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo performance is executed differs between when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and when it is started by a hot start).
When power is turned on with initialization, the movable body is controlled so that the confirmation movable control is completed before the demonstration display control is performed by the performance control means;
When power is turned on without initialization, the movable body is controlled so that the confirmation movable control is completed before the demonstration display control is performed by the performance control means (for example, in the case where the period from the completion of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo performance is performed differs between when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start and when it is started by a hot start, the customer waiting demo performance is performed after the completion of the initial operation of each movable body).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the demonstration display is not obstructed by the movable body that operates by the confirmation movable control, whether the power is turned on with initialization or without initialization.

The gaming machine of form A2-4 is
Light-emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g);
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Further provided with an operation means (e.g., a selection button 132SG35),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, the above-board movable body 32A is provided with the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body 32B is provided with the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body 132SG101 is provided with the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B is provided with the chance button LED 9g).
The brightness of the light-emitting means can be changed by operating the operation means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the volume/light intensity adjustment process shown in FIG. 39, and the light intensity (brightness) of the various lamps 9a to 9g can be adjusted by operating the selection button 132SG35).
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to make the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moving due to the confirmation movement control, emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 72, the performance control CPU 120 makes the under-board movable body 9e emit light in an initial highlighting mode (for example, red flashing as shown in FIG. 67(B)) when the under-board movable body 32B is initially operating),
When the operation means is operated during the specific light emission control, at least the light emitting means emitting light by the specific light emission control is restricted so that the brightness is not based on the operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 67(B) , when the initial operation of each movable body is performed, the light intensity (brightness) of the various lamps 9a to 9g cannot be adjusted by operating the selection button 132SG35).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body that moves due to the confirmation movement control is not changed, so it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause any problems in confirming the operation of the movable body.

The gaming machine of form A2-5 is
Light-emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g);
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Further provided with an operation means (e.g., a selection button 132SG35),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, the above-board movable body 32A is provided with the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body 32B is provided with the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body 132SG101 is provided with the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B is provided with the chance button LED 9g).
The brightness of the light-emitting means can be changed by operating the operation means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the volume/light intensity adjustment process shown in FIG. 39, and the light intensity (brightness) of the various lamps 9a to 9g can be adjusted by operating the selection button 132SG35).
The performance control means can display a changeable display indicating that the brightness of the light-emitting means can be changed by operating the operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 66 , a portion of the image display device 5 where a menu/volume/light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed),
The display of the changeable display is limited during the specified period, and the changeable display is displayed after the specified period has ended (for example, as shown in FIG. 66 , the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is not displayed on the image display device 5 during the initial operation of each movable body, and the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed on the image display device 5 during the initial operation of each movable body).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by displaying the changeable display during the confirmation movable control, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which attention to the confirmation movable control is not lost.

The gaming machine of form A2-6 is
The movable body includes a first movable body (e.g., an on-board movable body 32A) and a second movable body (e.g., a below-board movable body 32B),
Light-emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g);
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the first movable body and the second movable body (for example, a portion where an on-board movable body LED 9d is provided on the on-board movable body 32A and an on-board movable body LED 9e is provided on the below-board movable body 32B),
The movable body control means, as the confirmation movable control, moves the first movable body and then moves the second movable body (for example, as shown in Figures 72 and 73, the performance control CPU 120 moves the above-board movable body 32A as an initial operation and then moves the below-board movable body 32B).
The light emission control means is capable of performing specific light emission control to cause the light emission means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 72, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 causes the under-board movable body 9e to emit light in an initial highlighting mode (for example, red flashing as shown in FIG. 67(B)) when the under-board movable body 32B is initially operated),
When the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, the specific light emission control by the light emission control means is not performed on the light emitting means of the second movable body (for example, as shown in Figures 72 and 73, when the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A is performed, the below-board movable body LED 9e is not illuminated in an initial highlighting mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a moving object that is moving through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form A2-7 is
The performance control means
A movable body effect using the movable body can be executed during the demonstration display (for example, as shown in FIG. 66, a portion capable of executing an effect in which the on-board movable body 32A is moved between the origin position and the effect position during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect),
The display means can display an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 66, the part where the effect display 132SG407 is displayed on the image display device 5),
The movable body control means
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform a demo-in-motion control that moves the movable body in a motion manner common to the motion manner of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation motion control (for example, a part that moves the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position toward the performance position, and then moves the on-board movable body 32A from the performance position to the origin position).
If the movable body is unable to operate normally for a specific period of time, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control can be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 90, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 determines that an operation error has occurred when the movable body does not reach the performance position as an initial operation, and repeatedly performs the initial operation).
When a predetermined number of operation errors are determined, it is possible to perform error operation control to move the movable body for a longer operation period than the operation period of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation operation control (for example, as shown in FIG. 90, the performance control CPU 120 operates the movable body as a special initial operation by the fourth operation error determination (dead end determination)),
When the error movement control is performed, when the demonstration display is displayed, the movement control during the demonstration is restricted, while the effect display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 90, in the customer waiting demo performance after a dead end is determined, the movement of the movable body is not executed, but the display of the effect display 132SG407 on the image display device 5, and the light emission in a manner corresponding to the movable body announcement by the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents malfunctions caused by forcing the movable body to operate in a situation where the movable body cannot operate normally, while not reducing the presentation effect of the demonstration display.

[Form A3]
The gaming machine of form A3-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means is capable of performing a round game in which, during the advantageous state, the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) is set to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then the variable means is set to an inaccessible state in which the game medium cannot enter,
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The effect control means is capable of executing a fanfare effect during the advantageous state before control is exercised to play the round game,
The fanfare performance is as follows:
An introduction part (for example, an introduction part. See (F2) to (F6) of FIG. 63) that notifies about the advantageous state;
A launch direction notification part (for example, a right-hit notification part. See Figure 63 (F7) to (F8)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the player of the launch direction of the game medium;
It consists of
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the execution of the fanfare effect and the power is turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the launch direction notification part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the execution of the fanfare effect and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body control means controls the movable body so that the initial operation ends before the fanfare effect (right hit notification part) involving the operation of the on-board movable body 32A starts. See FIG. 91).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the operation direction notification part in the fanfare performance is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form A3-2 is
There are several types of advantageous states (for example, jackpots A to E),
In the introduction part, it is possible to notify which of the plurality of types of advantageous states is the advantageous state, and as the notification, it is possible to display an advantageous state name display (for example, a jackpot type display 132SG421) corresponding to the advantageous state being controlled, and to display an introduction display before the advantageous state name display (for example, an introduction display before the jackpot type display 132SG422) before the advantageous state name display is displayed,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so as to complete an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally before the advantageous state name display is displayed (for example, in the operation confirmation control, the initial operation is completed before the jackpot type display 132SG421 is displayed in FIG. 63 (F6)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes it possible to know which advantageous state the game will be controlled to, even if confirmation movable control is performed during the fanfare performance.

The gaming machine of form A3-3 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When the fanfare performance is executed, it is possible to perform fanfare light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is not moving is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare performance by the confirmation movement control,
The light emitting mode used in the specific light emitting pattern is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the fanfare performance (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the light emitting mode corresponding to the fanfare performance (introduction part)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that a movable body is under confirmation movement control even during a fanfare performance by using specific light emission control and fanfare light emission control.

The gaming machine of form A3-4 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
When the confirmation movement control is executed, it is possible to perform specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body moved by the confirmation movement control emits light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When the fanfare performance is executed, fanfare light emission control can be performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare performance,
the movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
When a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, the light emission control means causes the light emitting means of the first movable body to emit light according to the specific light emission control when the first movable body is moving according to the confirmation movement control, while causing the light emitting means of the second movable body to emit light according to the fanfare light emission control (for example, when the first movable body is moving, the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), while the movable body LED of the second movable body emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the fanfare performance (introduction part)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that a movable body is under confirmation movement control even during a fanfare performance.

The gaming machine of form A3-5 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
When the fanfare effect is executed, light emission control can be performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light at a first brightness in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect,
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control to make the light emitting means emit light at a second brightness in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect during the predetermined period in which the confirmation movement control is being performed (for example, while the frame LEDs 9a and 9b emit light at a first brightness in a light emission mode corresponding to the fanfare effect, during the movement confirmation control, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, and the above-frame movable body LED 9f emit light at a second brightness (low brightness) lower than the first brightness (high brightness). See FIG. 67(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form A3-6 is
the movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
the movable body control means, as the confirmation movable control, moves the first movable body and then moves the second movable body;
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, the specific light emission control is not performed on the light emitting means of the second movable body, and the specific light emission control is performed on the light emitting means of the first movable body (for example, when the first movable body is operating, the movable body LED of the second movable body does not emit light in the initial highlighting mode, and the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in the initial highlighting mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a moving object that is moving through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form A3-7 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body in the operation direction notification part,
The movable body control means is capable of performing special effect movement control to move the movable body by a special action when the movable body performance is executed,
The light emission control means
The specific light emission control can be performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode) until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform the special light emission control such that the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the special effect movement control, emits light in a first special light emission pattern during a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first special light emission pattern during a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the movable body LED of the movable body during the initial operation emits light in a common initial highlight mode (white lighting) when the movable body advances from the origin position to the effect position and when it retreats from the effect position to the origin position, while the movable body LED of the movable body operated by the effect operation control can emit light in different light emission modes when the movable body advances from the origin position to the effect position and when it retreats from the effect position to the origin position. See FIG. 67(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or special movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form A3-8 is
Light emitting means;
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R);
The first movable body and the second movable body are provided with the light emitting means (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body in the launch direction notification part,
When the movable body performance is executed, the movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movement control to move the movable body in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control,
The light emission control means
The specific light emission control can be performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode) until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform special light emission control such that the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the special effect movable control, emits light in a special light emission pattern over the execution period of the movable body effect,
The sound output means limits sound output when the movable body is moved by the confirmation movable control, and outputs a sound corresponding to the launch direction notification part when the movable body is moved by the special effect movable control (for example, in the movable body effect, light is emitted in a mode corresponding to the right hit notification part, which is different from the initial highlight mode (white lighting), and sound output is limited when the movable body moves by the initial operation, and in the movable body effect executed in the right hit notification part, a sound corresponding to the right hit notification part is output).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or special performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form A3-9 is
Further provided with a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
The performance control means
In the launch direction notification part, a movable body performance (see FIG. 63 (F7)) using the movable body can be executed,
The display means can display an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance,
The movable body control means
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform special performance movement control to move the movable body by a special action,
If the confirmation movement control cannot be completed normally for a specific period of time, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control can be performed again.
When the confirmation movement control is being performed over the specific period, when the movable body performance is executed, the special performance movement control is restricted, while the effect display is displayed (for example, when a movable body performance is executed in the right-hit notification part in a fanfare performance, the movable body is moved by a special action and an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance can be displayed, and if the movement confirmation control cannot be completed normally over the specific period, it can be determined that an action error has occurred and the movement confirmation control can be performed again, and when the movement confirmation control is being performed over the specific period, when the movable body performance is executed, the special action is restricted, while the effect display is displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can show the player that a movable body effect has been executed by an effect display, while preventing the confirmation movable control from being interfered with by the special effect movable control.

[Form A4]
The gaming machine of form A4-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG01, the chance button 631B),
Light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation operation control (for example, an operation confirmation control) that moves the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance movement control (for example, a movable body performance in a hit/miss button performance) that moves the movable body by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control, the movable body control means controls the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the movable body control means performs the performance movement control, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, which are movable bodies that perform initial operation, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but emit light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the performance operation control. See FIG. 67(B)).
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then can perform a round game by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The effect control means is capable of executing a fanfare effect during the advantageous state before control is exercised to play the round game,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately after the fanfare effect is started by the effect control means and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movement control ends before the end of the execution period of the fanfare effect (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately after the fanfare effect is started and the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a hot start, the operation confirmation control ends before the round effect corresponding to the round game starts. See FIG. 92).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the load on the gaming machine is reduced by reducing the power consumption when the power is turned on, while the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, preventing the movement of the movable body from being difficult to see due to glare.Furthermore, if the power is cut off at the same time as the fanfare effect is executed and the power is turned on, the confirmation movement control is terminated within the execution period of the fanfare effect, thereby providing a gaming machine that allows the player to enjoy an advantageous state without worrying about the movable body operating due to the confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form A4-2 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, a restoration display 132SG510) on the display means in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on; and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and then the power is turned on;
The light emission control means is capable of performing light emission control during recovery, in which the light emission means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on; and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and then the power is turned on;
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control in two cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and then the power is turned on (for example, a part capable of performing operation confirmation control in two cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and then the power is turned on).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the processing when the power is turned on is not complicated.

The gaming machine of form A4-3 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform a light emission control during recovery that causes the light emitting means of the movable body that is not moving due to the confirmation movement control to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery throughout the execution period of the fanfare effect,
The light emitting mode used in the specific light emitting pattern is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the restoration display (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode (off) corresponding to the restoration display),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the moving body that moves through the performance movement control even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form A4-4 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform fanfare light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect during the execution period of the fanfare effect,
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery, throughout the execution period of the fanfare effect,
The light emission control during recovery is performed at a lower brightness than the fanfare light emission control (for example, during power outage recovery, the part may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the performance movable control (movable body performance in the hit/miss button performance). See FIG. 67(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form A4-5 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) when a power outage occurs during the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform fanfare light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect during the execution period of the fanfare effect,
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare effect and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery, throughout the execution period of the fanfare effect,
The light emitting mode used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the restoration display is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect (for example, the mode corresponding to the restoration display (light off) is not used in the light emitting mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the fanfare effect (music during a jackpot)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify the user that power is being restored when the power is turned on, even if a fanfare performance was in progress before the power was cut off.

The gaming machine of form A4-6 is
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operation mode of the movable body by the performance movable control are common,
The light emission control means
The specific light emission control can be performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform the special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the effect movement control, emits light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first light emission pattern in a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the operation mode of each movable body by the operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by the effect movement control (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the effect position) are common, and the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting) until the initial operation is completed in the operation confirmation control, and in the effect movement control (for example, win/lose button effect), emits light in a rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, an advance movement period), and emits light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode in the second period (for example, a retreat movement period). See FIG. 67(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

[Form A5]
The gaming machine of form A5-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation operation control (for example, an operation confirmation control) that moves the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance movement control (for example, a movable body performance in a hit/miss button performance) that moves the movable body by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control, the movable body control means controls the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the movable body control means performs the performance movement control, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, which are movable bodies that perform initial operation, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but emit light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the performance operation control. See FIG. 67(B)).
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then can perform a round game by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The effect control means is capable of executing a fanfare effect during the advantageous state before control is exercised to play the round game,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movement control is completed before the easy-entry state ends (for example, a part that makes it possible to complete the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect and the power is turned on before the opening control of the large prize opening in the first round of play ends. See FIG. 93).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the load on the gaming machine is reduced by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on, while the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, preventing the movement of the movable body from being difficult to see due to the glare; furthermore, a gaming machine can be provided in which the power is cut off just before the fanfare performance ends, and the confirmation movement control when the power is turned on ends before the easy-to-enter state of the variable means ends (allowing the attacker to win even after the initial operation).

The gaming machine of form A5-2 is
The effect control means is capable of displaying, in a round game in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state for a specified period after the fanfare effect has ended, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right hit promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area (e.g., right game area, second path), and a round game-related display (e.g., round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, number of consecutive wins/total ball number display 132SG454, etc.) relating to the round game in a special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see FIGS. 94 and 95).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form A5-3 is
The effect control means can display, in a round of play after the fanfare effect has ended, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right-hit prompt display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area, and an awarded game value display (e.g., winning ball number display 132SG452, number of balls issued display 132SG453, etc.) regarding the awarded game value in a special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see FIGS. 94 and 95 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form A5-4 is
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
If a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform a round-time light-emitting control in which the light-emitting means of the movable body that is not moving is illuminated with a lamp pattern corresponding to the round of play by the confirmation movement control.
The light emitting mode used in the specific light emitting pattern is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the music (round performance) during the jackpot. See FIG. 67(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to a movable body that moves by confirmation movement control even during a round of play through specific light emission control.

The gaming machine of form A5-5 is
the movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
If a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during a round, causing the light emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round of play.
When the first movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, the light emitting means of the first movable body is caused to emit light by the specific light emitting control, while the light emitting means of the second movable body is caused to emit light by the in-round light emitting control (for example, when the first movable body is moved by the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), while the movable body LED of the second movable body emits light in a mode corresponding to the music (round performance) during a jackpot),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that the movable body is moving through confirmation movement control even during a round of play.

The gaming machine of form A5-6 is
The light emission control means
In a round game after the fanfare effect is executed, it is possible to perform a round light emission control in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round game,
If a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, the light emitting means can be made to emit light by the light emission control during the round.
The light emission control during a round, which is performed when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect and the power is turned on thereafter, has lower brightness than the light emission control during a round, which is performed when a power interruption does not occur immediately before the end of the fanfare effect (for example, the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of a movable body that has not performed the initial operation emits light in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot (round performance) in a round game in which the pachinko game machine 1 has not started up with a hot start after a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect, may be lower brightness than the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of a movable body that has not performed the initial operation emits light in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot (round performance)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form A5-7 is
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operation mode of the movable body by the performance movable control are common,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform the special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the effect movement control, emits light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first light emission pattern in a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the operation mode of each movable body by the operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by the effect movement control (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the effect position) are common, and the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting) until the initial operation is completed in the operation confirmation control, and in the effect movement control (for example, win/lose button effect), emits light in a rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, an advance movement period), and emits light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode in the second period (for example, a retreat movement period). See FIG. 67(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

[Form A6]
The gaming machine of form A6-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation operation control (for example, an operation confirmation control) that moves the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance movement control (for example, a movable body performance in a hit/miss button performance) that moves the movable body by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control, the movable body control means controls the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the movable body control means performs the performance movement control, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, which are movable bodies that perform initial operation, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but emit light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the performance operation control. See FIG. 67(B)).
The game control means is capable of setting the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter during the advantageous state,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power cut occurs at the same time as the easy-entry state is entered and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movement control is completed before the easy-entry state ends (for example, a part that makes it possible to complete the operation confirmation control when a power cut occurs immediately after the opening control of the large prize opening in the first round of play and the power is turned on, before the opening control of the large prize opening in the first round of play ends. See FIG. 96).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the load on the gaming machine is reduced by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on, while the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, preventing the movement of the movable body from being difficult to see due to glare; furthermore, a gaming machine can be provided in which the power is cut off as soon as the variable means enters an easy-to-enter state, and the confirmation movement control when the power is turned on is terminated before the easy-to-enter state of the variable means ends (allowing the attacker to win even after the initial operation).

The gaming machine of form A6-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, restoration display 132SG510) on the display means in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on; and when a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state and then the power is turned on;
The light emission control means is capable of performing light emission control during recovery, in which the light emission means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery, in the case where a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on, and in the case where a power outage occurs at the same time as the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state and then the power is turned on,
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control in two cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and when a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state and then the power is turned on (for example, a part that is capable of performing operation confirmation control in two cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and when a power outage occurs at the same time that the big prize opening is controlled to the open state and then the power is turned on).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the processing when the power is turned on is not complicated.

The gaming machine of form A6-3 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the easy-entry state of the variable means and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power outage occurs at the same time as the variable means enters the easy-to-enter state and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display, over the period from when the variable means enters the easy-to-enter state until when the variable means is controlled to enter an inaccessible state in which the game medium cannot enter,
The light emitting mode used in the specific light emitting pattern is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the restoration display (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the restoration display (off) see FIG. 67(B) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the movable body that moves through confirmation movement control even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form A6-4 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the easy-entry state of the variable means and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
In one round of play in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state for a specified period, it is possible to perform a round of light emission control in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round of play,
When a power outage occurs at the same time as the start of the one round of play and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery, for a period until the one round of play ends.
The light emission control during the recovery is performed at a lower brightness than the light emission control during the round (for example, during the power outage recovery, the part may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the performance movable control (movable body performance in the hit/miss button performance)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce power consumption when the power is turned on, thereby reducing the load on the gaming machine, while notifying the user that recovery is in progress.

The gaming machine of form A6-5 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during control of the variable means to set the variable means to the easy-entry state and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
In one round of play in which the variable means is in the easy-entry state for a specified period of time, it is possible to perform a round of light emission control in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round of play,
When a power outage occurs at the same time as the start of the one round of play and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display, for a period until the one round of play ends.
The light emitting mode used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the restoration display is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, the mode (light off) corresponding to the restoration display is not used in the light emitting mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the round performance (music during a jackpot). See FIG. 67(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify the player that power is being restored when the power is turned on, even if a round of play was in progress before the power outage.

[Form A7]
The gaming machine of form A7-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation operation control (for example, an operation confirmation control) that moves the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance movement control (for example, a movable body performance in a hit/miss button performance) that moves the movable body by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control, the movable body control means controls the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the movable body control means performs the performance movement control, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, which are movable bodies that perform initial operation, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but emit light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the performance operation control. See FIG. 67(B)).
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then can perform a round game by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in one round of play and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the end of the easy-entry state in the next round of play (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the first round of play and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, the opening control period of the large prize opening and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends within the period until the opening control of the large prize opening in the second round of play ends (see FIG. 63 (F10)). See FIG. 97).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the load on the gaming machine is reduced by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on, while the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, thereby preventing the movement of the movable body from being difficult to see due to the glare; furthermore, when the power is cut off just before the end of one round of play and the power is turned on, the confirmation movement control is terminated before the end of the next round of play, thereby providing a gaming machine in which the player can continue playing the round of play even after the confirmation movement control has ended.

The gaming machine of form A7-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The effect control means is capable of displaying, in a round game in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state for a specified period after the fanfare effect has ended, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right hit promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area (e.g., right game area, second path), and a round game-related display (e.g., round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, number of consecutive wins/total ball number display 132SG454, etc.) relating to the round game in a special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see FIGS. 94 and 95).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form A7-3 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The presentation control means is capable of displaying, in the next round of play that is started when the first round of play is completed, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right-hit prompt display 132SG430) that indicates the launch direction of the game medium in the specific display area, and an awarded game value display (e.g., winning ball number display 132SG452, number of balls issued display 132SG453, etc.) regarding the awarded game value in the special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see FIGS. 94 and 95 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form A7-4 is
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state of the variable means in one round of play and the power is then turned on, the movable body control means controls the variable means in one round of play to be in the impossible-entry state, and then moves the movable body by the confirmation movement control (see FIG. 97).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of form A7-5 is
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operation mode of the movable body by the performance movable control are common,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform the specific light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, emits light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform the special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the effect movement control, emits light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first light emission pattern in a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the operation mode of each movable body by the operation confirmation control and the operation mode of each movable body by the effect movement control (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the effect position) are common, and the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting) until the initial operation is completed in the operation confirmation control, and in the effect movement control (for example, win/lose button effect), emits light in a rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, an advance movement period), and emits light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode in the second period (for example, a retreat movement period). See FIG. 67(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

[Form A8]
The gaming machine of form A8-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, a confirmation operation control (for example, an operation confirmation control) is performed to move the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, a performance movement control (for example, a moving body performance in a winning/losing button performance or a promotion performance) is performed to move the moving body by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control, the movable body control means controls the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the movable body control means performs the performance movement control, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, which are movable bodies that perform initial operation, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but emit light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the performance operation control. See FIG. 67(B)).
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then can perform a round game by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs at the same time as control is made to the no-entry state in one round of play and power is then turned on, the movable body control means controls the movable body so that the confirmation movable control ends before the no-entry state ends (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the opening control of the large prize opening in the third round of play and then the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, the opening control of the large prize opening, the round interval period, and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends within the period until the end of the third special round interval period (see (F21) to (F29) of Figure 64). See Figure 98).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the load on the gaming machine is reduced by reducing the power consumption when the power is turned on, while the brightness of the light-emitting means provided on the movable body is set to the first brightness, preventing the movement of the movable body from being difficult to see due to the glare; furthermore, when the variable means becomes unable to enter during one round of play, the power is cut off at the same time, and the confirmation movement control when the power is turned on is terminated before the next round of play ends, thereby providing a gaming machine in which the player can continue playing a round of play even after the confirmation movement control has ended.

The gaming machine of form A8-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, restoration display 132SG510) on the display means in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on; and when a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state and then the power is turned on;
The light-emitting control means is capable of performing light-emitting control during recovery, in which the light-emitting means emits light in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the display during recovery, in the case where a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on, and in the case where a power outage occurs at the same time as the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state and then the power is turned on,
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control in the cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and where a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state and then the power is turned on (for example, a part that is capable of performing operation confirmation control in the cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and where a power outage occurs at the same time that the big prize opening is controlled to an open state and then the power is turned on).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the processing when the power is turned on is not complicated.

The gaming machine of form A8-3 is
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The performance control means is capable of displaying a recovery display (for example, a recovery display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of play, and when the power is subsequently turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
In the case where a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of play, and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display, for a period from the end of the one round of play until the start of the next round of play,
The light emitting mode used in the specific light emitting pattern is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the restoration display (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the restoration display (off). See FIG. 67(B) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the movable body that moves through confirmation movement control even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form A8-4 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means
In the case where the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of play and a power outage occurs at the same time, and then the power is turned on, it is possible to display a recovery display (for example, recovery display 132SG510) on the display means,
When the variable means is controlled to be in an entry-disabled state during one round of play, an interval performance can be executed;
The light emission control means
During the execution period of the interval performance, it is possible to perform interval light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the interval performance,
In the case where a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of play, and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display, for a period from the end of the one round of play until the start of the next round of play,
The light emission control during recovery is performed at a lower brightness than the light emission control during the interval (for example, during power outage recovery, the part may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the performance movable control (movable body performance in the hit/miss button performance)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce power consumption when the power is turned on, thereby reducing the load on the gaming machine, while notifying the user that recovery is in progress.

The gaming machine of form A8-5 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means
In the one round of play, when the variable means is controlled to be in an inaccessible state, a power outage occurs at the same time, and when the power is turned on after the power outage, it is possible to display a recovery display (for example, a recovery display 132SG510) on the display means,
When the variable means is controlled to be in an entry-disabled state during one round of play, an interval performance can be executed;
The light emission control means
During the execution period of the interval performance, it is possible to perform interval light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the interval performance,
In the case where a power outage occurs at the same time that the variable means is controlled to an inaccessible state during one round of play, and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, in which the light emitting means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display, for a period from the end of the one round of play until the start of the next round of play,
The light emitting mode used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the recovery display is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the interval effect (for example, the mode (off) corresponding to the recovery display is not used in the light emitting mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the interval effect (music during a jackpot)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify the user that recovery is in progress when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form A8-6 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The effect control means is capable of executing an interval effect that notifies whether the variable means is controlled to a special state when the variable means is controlled to an entry-prohibited state in the one round game,
The interval performance is as follows:
Introduction part (see Figure 64 (F21) to (F23)),
A result notification part (see (F24) to (F29) in FIG. 64) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It consists of
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so as to complete an operation for confirming that the movable body operates normally before the result notification part is started.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the interval presentation is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form A8-7 is
sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L and 8R);
Further comprising a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The effect control means is capable of executing an interval effect that notifies whether the variable means is controlled to a special state when the variable means is controlled to an entry-prohibited state in the one round game,
The interval performance is
Introduction part (see Figure 64 (F21) to (F23)),
A result notification part (see (F24) to (F29) in FIG. 64) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It consists of
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body in the result notification part,
When the movable body performance is executed, the movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movement control to move the movable body in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control,
The light emission control means
The specific light emission control can be performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform special light emission control such that the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the special effect movable control, emits light in a special light emission pattern over the execution period of the movable body effect,
The sound output means limits sound output when the movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, and outputs a sound corresponding to the movable body effect when the movable body is moved by the special effect movement control (for example, a movable body effect using the under-board movable body 32B can be executed as a promotion effect in the result notification part (see Figure 64 (F24)), and when the movable body effect is executed, it is possible to perform effect operation control in an operation mode common to the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B that operates by the operation confirmation control, and a part in which sound output is limited when the under-board movable body 32B operates by the operation confirmation control, and a sound corresponding to the movable body effect is output when the under-board movable body 32B operates in the movable body effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily distinguish whether confirmation movement control or special performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form A8-8 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The effect control means is capable of executing an interval effect that notifies whether the variable means is controlled to a special state when the variable means is controlled to an entry-prohibited state in the one round game,
The interval performance is as follows:
Introduction part (see Figure 64 (F21) to (F23)),
A result notification part (see (F24) to (F29) in FIG. 64) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It consists of
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means
In the result notification part, a movable body performance (see FIG. 64 (F24)) using the movable body can be executed,
The display means can display an effect display (see FIG. 64 (F24)) corresponding to the movable body performance,
The movable body control means
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform special performance movable control that moves the movable body in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the movable body that moves by the confirmation movable control,
If the confirmation movement control cannot be completed normally for a specific period of time, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control can be performed again.
In the one round game in which the interval performance is executed, a power outage occurs immediately before the control is made to the inaccessible state, and thereafter, when the confirmation movable control that is started when the power is turned on does not end normally, the timing at which it is determined that an operation error has occurred overlaps with the execution period of the movable body performance,
If the movable body presentation is executed during the specific period in which the confirmation movement control is being performed, the special presentation movement control is restricted, while the effect display is displayed (for example, if the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally over a specific period, it can be determined to be an operation error and the operation confirmation control can be performed again; if a power outage occurs just before the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state in one round of play in which an interval presentation is executed, and the operation confirmation control that starts when the power is turned on thereafter does not complete normally, the timing at which it is determined to be an operation error overlaps with the execution period of the promotion presentation, and if the promotion presentation is executed during the specific period in which the operation confirmation control is being performed, the movable body presentation may be restricted, while the effect display may be displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can show the player that a movable body effect has been executed by an effect display, while preventing the confirmation movable control from being interfered with by the special effect movable control.

The gaming machine of form A8-9 is
The operation mode of the movable body by the confirmation movable control and the operation mode of the movable body by the performance movable control are common,
The light emission control means
The specific light emission control can be performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode) until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform the special light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the effect movement control, emits light in a first special light emission pattern in a first period, and emits light in a second special light emission pattern having a light emission mode different from the first light emission pattern in a second period after the end of the first period (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) until the initial operation is completed in the operation confirmation control, and in the effect operation control (for example, in the case of successful promotion in the promotion effect), emits light in a rainbow flash mode in the first period (for example, advancement operation period), and emits light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode in the second period (for example, retreat operation period). See FIG. 67(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily determine whether confirmation movement control or performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

[Form A9]
The gaming machine of form A9-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then can perform a round game by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (e.g., jackpot A) and a second advantageous state (e.g., jackpot B) that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The effect control means is capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a promotion effect) that notifies which of the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is in a specific round of play,
The notification performance is
An introduction part (see, for example, Figure 64 (F21) to (F23)),
A result notification part (see, for example, (F24) to (F29) in FIG. 64) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It consists of
If the first advantageous state is reached, a performance corresponding to the first advantageous state is executed in the result notification part,
If the second advantageous state is reached, a performance corresponding to the second advantageous state is executed in the result notification part,
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the result notification part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the opening control of the large prize opening in the second round of play and the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a hot start, the opening control of the large prize opening, the round interval period, and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the result notification part of the promotion effect executed in the third round of play starts; see FIG. 100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the notification performance is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form A9-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The effect control means is capable of displaying, in a round game in which the variable means is controlled to the easy-entry state for a specified period after the fanfare effect has ended, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right hit promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area (e.g., right game area, second path), and a round game-related display (e.g., round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball number display 132SG453, number of consecutive wins/total ball number display 132SG454, etc.) relating to the round game in a special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see FIGS. 94 and 95).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form A9-3 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The presentation control means is capable of displaying, in the specific round of play, a launch direction indication display (e.g., right-hit promotion display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area (upper right side of the display screen), and an awarded game value display (e.g., winning ball number display 132SG452, number of balls issued display 132SG453, etc.) relating to the awarded game value in a special display area,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the special display area with respect to the specific display area (see FIGS. 94 and 95 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form A9-4 is
Light emitting means;
light emission control means;
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When the notification effect is executed, it is possible to perform notification light emission control in which the light emitting means of the movable body that is not moving due to the confirmation movement control emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the notification effect,
The light emitting mode used in the specific light emitting pattern is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the notification effect (for example, the initial highlighting mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part). See FIG. 67(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that a movable body is under confirmation movable control even during an announcement performance by using specific light-emitting control and notification light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form A9-5 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
If a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round game and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform notification light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the notification effect,
The light emission control means causes the light emission means of the movable body to emit light by the specific light emission control when a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play and the power is turned on thereafter, and when the movable body is moving due to the confirmation movement control (for example, when a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the third round of play and the power is turned on thereafter, and when the movable body is moving due to the movement confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable body that performs initial movement emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light emission) instead of a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part). See FIG. 67(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form A9-6 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
In the specific round game, it is possible to perform notification light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern (for example, a rainbow light emission mode) corresponding to the notification effect,
When a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round game and the power is turned on after that, the light emitting means can be made to emit light by the notification light emission control,
The notification light emission control that is performed when a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play and the power is then turned on has lower brightness than the notification light emission control that is performed when no power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play (for example, during the second round interval period or the third round of play, the operation confirmation control is started, and the initially operating movable bodies, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the frame-top movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light in the performance operation control (promotion performance). See FIG. 67(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form A9-7 is
The effect control means is capable of executing an action prompting effect that prompts the player to take an action during the execution period of the notification effect (see FIG. 64 (F23)),
The action prompting performance is executed in the introduction part (see (F21) to (F23) of FIG. 64),
When a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round of play and the power is then turned on, the movable body control means controls the movable body so that the confirmation movable control ends before the introduction part starts (for example, the operation prompt part of the introduction part of the promotion effect executed in the third round of play, i.e., the part where the initial operation of the movable body ends before the operation prompt effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 631B starts).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the action promotion effect in the introductory part is not obstructed by the movable body that operates by confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form A9-8 is
Light emitting means;
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R);
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The performance control means can execute a movable body performance using the movable body in the result notification part (see FIG. 64 (F24)),
When the movable body performance is executed, the movable body control means is capable of performing special performance movement control to move the movable body in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movement control,
The light emission control means
The specific light emission control can be performed to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern until the movement of the movable body is completed,
It is possible to perform special light emission control such that the light emitting means of the movable body, which is movable by the special effect movable control, emits light in a special light emission pattern over the execution period of the movable body effect,
The sound output means limits sound output when the movable body is moved by the confirmation movement control, and outputs sound corresponding to the movable body effect when the movable body is moved by the special effect movement control (for example, when performing an initial operation, the under-board movable body LED 9e emits light in a manner corresponding to the recovery display 132SG510 (for example, initial highlighting mode; white light), but the output of background sound (BGM) is limited, and when performing an effect operation in a promotion effect, the under-board movable body LED 9e emits light in a manner corresponding to the promotion effect (result notification part) (for example, rainbow mode, etc.), while a sound effect in a manner corresponding to the promotion effect (result notification part) is output).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily distinguish whether confirmation movement control or special performance movement control is being performed by using specific light-emitting control and special light-emitting control.

The gaming machine of form A9-9 is
The performance control means
In the result notification part, a movable body effect using the movable body can be executed,
The display means can display an effect display corresponding to the movable body performance,
The movable body control means
When the movable body performance is executed, it is possible to perform special performance movable control that moves the movable body in a common operation mode with the operation mode of the movable body that moves by the confirmation movable control,
If the confirmation movement control cannot be completed normally for a specific period of time, it is determined that an operation error has occurred, and the confirmation movement control can be performed again.
When a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific round game, and the confirmation movable control that starts when the power is turned on does not end normally, the timing at which it is determined that an operation error has occurred overlaps with the execution period of the movable body performance,
If the movable body performance is executed during the specific period in which the confirmation movement control is being performed, the special performance movement control is restricted, while the effect display is displayed (for example, if the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally over a specific period, it can be determined that an operation error has occurred and the operation confirmation control can be performed again; if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the third round performance in which a promotion performance is executed, and the operation confirmation control that is started when the power is turned on thereafter does not complete normally, the timing at which it is determined that an operation error has occurred overlaps with the execution period of the promotion performance, and if the promotion performance is executed during the specific period in which the operation confirmation control is being performed, the movable body performance can be restricted, while the effect display can be displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can show the player that a movable body effect has been executed by an effect display, while preventing the confirmation movable control from being interfered with by the special effect movable control.

[Form A10]
The gaming machine of form A10-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-to-enter state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then perform a round game multiple times by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The effect control means can execute an ending effect after the final round of play has ended (see FIG. 63 (F12) to (F14)),
The ending performance is as follows:
Introduction part (see Figure 63 (F12) and Figure 64 (F31)),
A special state notification part (for example, a time-saving state notification part. See Figures 63 (F13), 64 (F32), and (F34)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies about a special state that is controlled after the advantageous state;
It consists of
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is turned on thereafter, the confirmation movable control ends before the special state notification part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the 10th and final round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the ending period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the start of the time-shortened state notification part (see (F32) and (F34) in Figure 64) in which information on the time-shortened state is notified in the ending period; see Figure 101).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the special state notification part in the ending performance is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form A10-2 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
If a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform ending light emission control, which causes the light emitting means of the movable body that is not moving due to the confirmation movement control to emit light in a lamp pattern corresponding to the ending performance,
The light emitting mode used in the specific light emitting pattern is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the ending performance (for example, the initial highlighting mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part). See FIG. 67(B) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that a movable body is under confirmation movable control even during an ending performance by using specific light emission control and ending light emission control.

The gaming machine of form A10-3 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform ending light emission control, which causes the light emitting means of the movable body to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance.
the movable body includes a first movable body and a second movable body,
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is then turned on, and when the first movable body is moving due to the confirmation movement control, the light-emitting control means causes the light-emitting means of the first movable body to emit light due to the specific light-emitting control, while causing the light-emitting means of the second movable body to emit light due to the ending light-emitting control (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g of the movable bodies that perform the initial movement emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), while the movable body LEDs of the other movable bodies that are not operating emit light in a mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part). See FIG. 67(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can indicate that the movable body is moving through confirmation movement control even during the ending presentation.

The gaming machine of form A10-4 is
Light emitting means;
Further provided with a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, a frame-top movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
The light emission control means
When the ending performance is executed, it is possible to perform ending light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance,
When a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is then turned on, the light emitting means can be made to emit light by the ending light emitting control.
The ending light emission control that is performed when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the easy-entry state in the final round of play and the power is then turned on has lower brightness than the ending light emission control that is performed when a power outage does not occur immediately before the end of the ending presentation (for example, when the movable body is moving due to the operation confirmation control, the movable body LED 9d on the board, the movable body LED 9e below the board, the movable body LED 9f on the frame, and the chance button LED 9g that perform the initial operation emit light at low brightness in an initial highlight mode (white lighting) rather than in a mode corresponding to the ending presentation (introduction part). See FIG. 67(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

[Form A11]
The gaming machine of form A11-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
Light emitting means;
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body (for example, an above-board movable body LED 9d, a below-board movable body LED 9e, an above-frame movable body LED 9f, a chance button LED 9g),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation operation control (for example, an operation confirmation control) that moves the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally,
When informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to perform a performance movement control (for example, a movable body performance in a hit/miss button performance) that moves the movable body by an operation for informing that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
When the movable body control means performs the confirmation movable control, the movable body control means controls the light emitting means so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a first luminance;
When the movable body control means performs the performance movement control, the light emitting means is controlled so that the luminance of the light emitting means becomes a second luminance;
The first luminance is lower than the second luminance (for example, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, which are movable bodies that perform initial operation, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), but emit light at a lower luminance than when emitting light in the performance operation control. See FIG. 67(B)).
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-to-enter state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then perform a round game multiple times by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
the effect control means is capable of executing an ending effect after the final round of play is completed;
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance by the performance control means and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the end of the execution period of the ending performance (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the ending period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the start of the time-shortened state notification part (see (F32) and (F34) of Figure 64) in which information regarding the time-shortened state is notified; see Figure 102).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that reduces the load on the gaming machine by reducing the power consumption when the power is turned on, cuts off the power at the same time as the ending performance is executed, and ends the confirmation movement control when the power is turned on within the execution period of the ending performance (allowing the player to enjoy the high base state without worrying about the moving body operating due to the confirmation movement control).

The gaming machine of form A11-2 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, a restoration display 132SG510) on the display means in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on; and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and then the power is turned on;
The light emission control means is capable of performing light emission control during recovery, in which the light emission means emits light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery in the case where a power outage occurs during the variable display and then the power is turned on, and in the case where a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and then the power is turned on,
The movable body control means is capable of performing the confirmation movement control in the cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and where a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and then the power is turned on (for example, a part capable of performing operation confirmation control in the cases where a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on, and where a power outage occurs simultaneously with the large prize opening being controlled to an open state and then the power is turned on).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the processing when the power is turned on is not complicated.

The gaming machine of form A11-3 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, a restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the ending performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
It is possible to perform specific light emission control to cause the light emitting means of the movable body, which is moved by the confirmation movement control, to emit light in a specific light emission pattern (for example, an initial highlighting mode),
When a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance by the performance control means and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the recovery display throughout the execution period of the ending performance,
The light emitting mode used in the specific light emitting pattern is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the restoration display (for example, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the restoration display (off) see FIG. 67(B) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the movable body that moves through confirmation movement control even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form A11-4 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, a restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the ending performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
During the execution period of the ending performance, it is possible to perform ending light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance,
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery throughout the execution period of the ending performance,
The light emission control during recovery is performed at a lower brightness than the ending light emission control (for example, during power outage recovery, the part may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the light emission brightness of the movable body LED in the performance movable control (movable body performance in the hit/miss button performance). See FIG. 67(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the load by suppressing the power consumption when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form A11-5 is
The performance control means is capable of displaying a restoration display (for example, a restoration display 132SG510) on the display means when a power outage occurs during the ending performance and the power is then turned on,
The light emission control means
During the execution period of the ending performance, it is possible to perform ending light emission control to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ending performance,
If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the ending performance and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform light emission control during recovery, which causes the light emitting means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the display during recovery throughout the execution period of the ending performance,
The light emitting mode used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the restoration display is not used in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the ending presentation (for example, the mode corresponding to the restoration display (light off) is not used in the light emitting mode corresponding to the mode corresponding to the ending presentation (ending introduction). See FIG. 67(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can notify the user that recovery is in progress when the power is turned on, even if the ending presentation was in progress before the power outage.

[Form A12]
The gaming machine of form A12-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
There is a normal state (for example, a normal game state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The specific identification information includes first identification information (e.g., a first special symbol) and second identification information (e.g., a second special symbol),
the normal state is a state in which the variable display of the first identification information is easily executed,
the special state is a state in which the variable display of the second identification information is likely to be executed,
During the special state, information about the advantageous state (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls displayed 132SG454) can be displayed in the first display area of the display means,
During the special state, the second display area of the display means can display hold information (for example, the second hold memory number or the second hold display 132SG002) related to the variable display of the second identification information,
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the first display area with respect to the second display area (for example, when an initial operation is performed when a power outage occurs during time reduction, and then the machine is started up with a hot start and restored, each movable body is set to perform an initial operation so that the time during which the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the second reserved memory number (display area 5SL) or the second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012) and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shorter than the time during which the below-board movable body 32B overlaps with the jackpot information display regarding the jackpot (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454). See FIG. 103).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the second display area, which is a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control and has a greater impact on the game, is not obstructed as much as the visibility of the first display area.

The gaming machine of form A12-2 is
The information relating to the advantageous state displayed in the first display area does not change during the special state, while the reserved information displayed in the second display area can change during the special state (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls played display 132SG454 does not change during the time-saving state, while the second reserved memory count (display area 5SL) and the second reserved display 132SG002 are parts whose display mode can change even during the time-saving state due to changes in the number of winnings or advance notices, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of pending information, which may change due to a movable body operating through confirmation movable control, is not hindered as much as information regarding an advantageous state, which does not change.

The gaming machine of form A12-3 is
The range in which the movable body that moves due to the confirmation movable control overlaps with the first display area is larger than the range in which the movable body that moves due to the confirmation movable control overlaps with the second display area (for example, the range in which the movable body on the board 32A overlaps with the display area of the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls issued display 132SG454 due to the initial operation is larger than the range in which the movable body on the board 32A overlaps with the display area 5SL of the second pending memory number and the second pending display area 132SG012 of the second pending display 132SG002 due to the initial operation).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the second display area, which is a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control and has a greater impact on the game, is not obstructed as much as the visibility of the first display area.

[Form A13]
The gaming machine of form A13-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
the effect control means is capable of performing an action promotion effect that prompts a player to take an action during variable display based on a specific variable display pattern;
The specific variable display pattern is
A first part (for example, the period from (D1) to (D5) in FIG. 61) until the action prompting performance is executed;
A second part (for example, a result notification part of (D6) and (D7) of FIG. 61) that is executed after the first part and notifies the result of the action prompting performance;
The invention comprises:
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that the confirmation movable control ends before the second part starts when a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the specific variable display and the power is then turned on (for example, when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation before the variation in which the button notice is executed and the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the button notice (result notification part) starts. See FIG. 105).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the second part in the action promotion performance is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form A13-2 is
Further comprising a game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
The game control means is capable of transmitting specific information regarding the specific variation (for example, a winning effect designation command that designates button advance notice execution, etc.) to the effect control means,
The effect control means is capable of performing the action prompting effect based on the specific information transmitted from the game control means,
The movable body control means is capable of changing the control content of the confirmation movable control based on the specific information when a power outage occurs immediately before the specific variation is started and then power is turned on (for example, when a variation pattern designation command designating a specific variation pattern (with button advance notice) is received within a specified time (for example, 4000 ms) after receiving a power outage recovery designation command, the means may interrupt the initial operation currently being performed (approximately 20 seconds) and switch to a shortened initial operation having an operation period shorter than the initial operation currently being performed (for example, 5 seconds, etc.)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable confirmation movement control that takes into consideration the start of a specific fluctuation.

[Form A14]
The gaming machine of form A14-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
the effect control means is capable of executing a start effect (for example, a start notice) when a variable display based on a specific variable display pattern is started,
The start performance is as follows:
Introduction part (see Figure 59 (B2) to (B6)),
A result notification part (see (B3a) to (B6a) of FIG. 59) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It consists of
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the start of variable display based on the specific variable display pattern and the power is then turned on, the confirmation movable control ends before the result notification part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a variation before a variation in which a start notice is executed and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start, the movable body control means controls the movable body so that the initial operation ends before the start notice (result notification part) starts. See FIG. 106).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the start-up performance is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form A14-2 is
Further comprising a game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
The game control means can transmit specific information regarding the specific variation (for example, a winning effect designation command that designates the execution of a notice at the start of a game) to the effect control means,
The effect control means is capable of performing the start effect based on the specific information transmitted from the game control means,
The movable body control means is capable of changing the control content of the confirmation movable control based on the specific information when a power outage occurs immediately before the specific variation is started and the power is then turned on (for example, a part that may be configured so that the performance control CPU 120 can change the execution period of the initial operation based on a specific performance control command so that the initial operation is completed before the notification part is started as a result of the start-time notice),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable confirmation movement control that takes into consideration the start of a specific fluctuation.

[Form A15]
The gaming machine of form A15-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The effect control means is capable of executing a variable display of identification information based on a specific variable display pattern, and is capable of temporarily stopping the variable display of the identification information and then executing a variable display notification effect (for example, a pseudo consecutive announcement) that notifies the user that the variable display of the identification information will be executed again.
The reconfigurable display notification performance is
An introductory part (see (C3) to (C5) of FIG. 60) informing whether or not the re-variable display of the identification information is to be executed;
A result notification part (see (C6), (C10), and (C9) of FIG. 60) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part;
It consists of
The movable body control means controls the movable body so that, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the start of variable display of identification information based on the specific variable display pattern and the power is then turned on, the movable body control means controls the movable body so that the confirmation movable control ends before the result notification part starts (for example, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a variation before a variation in which a pseudo consecutive announcement is executed and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start, the movable body control means controls the movable body so that the initial operation ends before the pseudo consecutive announcement (result notification part) starts. See FIG. 107).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the result notification part in the re-variable display notification performance is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form A15-2 is
Further comprising a game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
The game control means can transmit specific information regarding the specific variation (for example, a winning effect designation command that designates the execution of a pseudo consecutive announcement) to the effect control means,
The presentation control means is capable of performing the re-variable display notification presentation (for example, a pseudo consecutive announcement) based on the specific information transmitted from the game control means,
The movable body control means is capable of changing the control content of the confirmation movable control based on the specific information when a power outage occurs immediately before the specific variation is started and then the power is turned on (for example, a part that may be configured so that the performance control CPU 120 can change the execution period of the initial operation based on a specific performance control command so that the initial operation is completed before the notification part of the result of the pseudo-consecutive preview is started).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable confirmation movement control that takes into consideration the start of a specific fluctuation.

[Form A16]
The gaming machine of form A16-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
There is a normal state (for example, a normal game state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The normal state is a state designed to launch the game medium toward the first game area (e.g., the left game area),
The special state is a state designed to launch the gaming medium toward the second gaming area (e.g., the right gaming area),
The display means, in the normal state, is capable of displaying a first game area side launch promotion display (for example, a left hit promotion display 132SG530) in a specific display area (upper right side of the display screen) to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the first game area, and is also capable of displaying a display corresponding to the normal state in a predetermined display area;
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that it does not overlap the specific display area more than the predetermined display area (for example, when a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state, and then the machine is started up by hot start and restored, and an initial operation is performed, the part is set so that the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the left hit prompt display 132SG530 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shortened. See Figures 108 and 109).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the first game area side promotion notification is not obstructed by a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form A16-2 is
The display means is capable of displaying a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) until the variable display ends when a power outage occurs during the variable display and the power is then turned on,
When the recovery display is displayed, it is possible to perform the first game area promotion notification (for example, left hit promotion display 132SG530),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately notify the direction in which gaming media are released even during recovery.

The gaming machine of form A16-3 is
As the first game area promotion notification, it is possible to display a first game area promotion notification display (for example, a left hit promotion display 132SG530) and output a first game area promotion notification sound,
When the confirmation movable control is performed based on power-on with initialization, the first game area promotion notification display is displayed in the specific display area, while the output of the first game area promotion notification sound is limited,
When the confirmation movement control is performed based on power-on without initialization, the first game area promotion notification display is displayed in the specific display area, and the first game area promotion notification sound is output (for example, the left hit promotion display 132SG530 is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen, while the left hit operation promotion notification sound is restricted, and when the operation confirmation control is performed based on starting up by hot start after a power outage, the left hit promotion display 132SG530 is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen, while the left hit operation promotion notification sound is output).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide an appropriate first game area promotion notification that takes into account the situation when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form A16-4 is
In the normal state, when a gaming medium enters a predetermined area (for example, a passing gate 41) provided on the second gaming area side, the first gaming area promotion notification (for example, a left-hit promotion display 132SG530) can be performed.
In the normal state, a special first game area promotion notification having a higher priority than the first game area promotion notification can be made based on the entry of a specific number of game media into the predetermined area,
The confirmation movement control makes it possible to issue the special first game area promotion notification for a period longer than the period during which the movable body is movable (for example, in the normal state, it is possible to issue a special left-hit operation promotion notification that has a higher priority than a left-hit operation promotion notification based on the entry of a specific number of game balls (for example, 5 balls) into the gate switch 21, and it is possible to issue a special left-hit operation promotion notification for a period longer than the period during which the movable body is operating (for example, 20 seconds) through the operation confirmation control).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the special first game area promotion notification is not hindered by a movable body that moves through confirmation movable control.

[Form A17]
The gaming machine of form A17-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5);
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
The game control means, during the advantageous state, can set the variable means (e.g., the special variable winning ball device 7) to an easy-entry state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter, and then can perform a round game by setting the variable means to an inaccessible state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter,
The display means
If a power outage occurs during the round game and then the power is turned on, it is possible to display a recovery display (for example, a recovery display 132SG510) in a predetermined display area,
Thereafter, in the predetermined display area, it is possible to display a display corresponding to the round game (for example, a round number display 132SG451, a winning ball number display 132SG452, a ball number display 132SG453, a consecutive number of games/total number of balls displayed display 132SG454, etc.),
When either the display corresponding to the round game or the display during recovery is displayed, a launch direction indication display (for example, a right-hit prompt display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium is displayed in the specific display area,
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the specific display area more than the predetermined display area (for example, when an initial operation is performed after a power outage occurs during a round game in a jackpot game state and then the power is started up by a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A operates so that it does not overlap in front of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, rather than being superimposed in front of the predetermined area (see Figure 94 (A)) in which information corresponding to the round game (for example, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) is displayed; see Figures 110 and 111).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed by a movable body that moves through confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form A17-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing predetermined movement control to move the movable body by a predetermined operation when the movable body performance is executed,
the movable body that is movable by the predetermined movement control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control is capable of moving the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined operation in the predetermined movable control (for example, after a power outage occurs during variable display in a normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operation manner that includes the performance operation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the movable body announcement in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, while after a power outage occurs during variable display in a jackpot or time-saving state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operation manner that does not include the performance operation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the movable body announcement that overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the specific display area is not obstructed by a movable body that moves under confirmation movement control.

[Form A18]
The gaming machine of form A18-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
The display means
If a power outage occurs and then the power is turned on, it is possible to display a restoration display (for example, restoration display 132SG510).
As the restoration in progress display, it is possible to display text information indicating that restoration is in progress in a predetermined display area,
Along with the recovery display, it is possible to display a launch direction indication display (for example, a right-hit prompt display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the gaming medium in a specific display area,
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the specific display area more than the predetermined display area (for example, when an initial operation is performed after a power outage occurs during a round of play in a jackpot game state and the initial operation is performed when the game is started up by a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A does not overlap the front side of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, rather than being superimposed on the front side of the recovery in progress display 132SG510. See Figures 110 and 111).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication, which has a large impact on the game and is a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control, is not obstructed more than the text information indicating that recovery is in progress.

The gaming machine of form A18-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing predetermined performance movement control to move the movable body by a predetermined operation when the movable body performance is executed,
The movable body that is movable by the predetermined performance movable control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control is capable of moving the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined operation in the predetermined effect movable control (for example, after a power outage occurs during variable display in a normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operation manner that includes the effect operation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the movable body preview in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, while after a power outage occurs during variable display during a jackpot or in a time-saving state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operation manner that does not include the effect operation (reciprocating operation between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the movable body preview that overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the specific display area is not obstructed by a movable body that moves under confirmation movement control.

The gaming machine of form A18-3 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing special effect movement control to move the movable body by a special action when the movable body performance is executed,
the movable body that is movable by the special movable control is superimposed on the predetermined display area,
the confirmation movement control is capable of moving the movable body in a manner including the special action in the special movement control,
When a power outage occurs during the advantageous state and the power is then turned on, the movable body that is moved by the special movable control stays in the predetermined display area for a longer period of time than the movable body that is moved by the confirmation movable control that is performed in that state (for example, the period of time that the under-board movable body 32B stays in the performance position that overlaps with the recovery display 132SG510 may be set to be shorter than the performance operation of the movable body performance in the initial operation).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a power outage occurs during an advantageous state and the power is then turned on, the movable body that moves due to the confirmation movable control is not superimposed on the specified display area for a long period of time, thereby providing a gaming machine that does not cause any problems in determining whether or not recovery is in progress.

[Form A19]
The gaming machine of form A19-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
a display means (for example, an image display device 5);
There is a normal state (for example, a normal game state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The display means
If a power outage occurs during the special state and the power is then turned on, a restoration display (e.g., restoration display 132SG510) can be displayed in a predetermined display area,
Thereafter, a display corresponding to the special state can be displayed in the predetermined display area,
When either the display corresponding to the special state or the restoration display is displayed, a launch direction indication display (for example, a right-hit prompt display 132SG430) indicating the launch direction of the game medium is displayed in the specific display area,
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The confirmation movable control is a control for moving the movable body so that it does not overlap the specific display area more than the predetermined display area (for example, when an initial operation is performed after a power outage occurs during variable display in a time-shortening state and then the initial operation is performed when the power is started by a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A is not superimposed on the front side of the predetermined area (see Figure 112 (B) (C)) where information corresponding to the time-shortening state (for example, the performance mode display 132SG221, the remaining time-shortening display 132SG201, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls output display 132SG454, etc.) is displayed, but is not overlapped on the front side of the specific area (see Figure 112 (A)) where the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control is displayed. See Figure 112).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication display, which is a movable body that moves by confirmation movement control and has a large impact on the game, is not obstructed as much as the recovery in progress display.

The gaming machine of form A19-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing predetermined performance movement control to move the movable body by a predetermined operation when the movable body performance is executed,
The movable body that is movable by the predetermined performance movable control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control is capable of moving the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined operation in the predetermined effect movable control (for example, the initial operation is performed in an operation manner that includes the effect operation (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the movable body preview in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right hit prompt display 132SG430, while the initial operation when the power is turned on after a power outage occurs during a jackpot or during variable display in the time-saving state is performed in an operation manner that does not include the effect operation (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) of the movable body preview that overlaps with the right hit prompt display 132SG430).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the specific display area is not obstructed by a movable body that moves under confirmation movement control.

[Form A20]
The gaming machine of form A20-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
A movable body and
A movable body control means;
a display means;
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
the display means is capable of displaying a launch direction indication display indicating a launch direction of the game medium in a specific display area in the special state, and is also capable of displaying information relating to the advantageous state in a predetermined display area;
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally when power is turned on,
the confirmation movement control is a control for moving the movable body so that the movable body does not overlap the specific display area more than the predetermined display area;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the launch direction indication, which has a large impact on the game and is a movable body that operates by confirmation movable control, is not obstructed more than the information regarding the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form A20-2 is
Further comprising a performance control means,
The performance control means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the movable body,
The movable body control means is capable of performing predetermined performance movement control to move the movable body by a predetermined operation when the movable body performance is executed,
The movable body that is movable by the predetermined performance movable control is superimposed on the specific display area,
The confirmation movable control can move the movable body in a manner that does not include the predetermined action in the predetermined performance movable control.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the visibility of the specific display area is not obstructed by a movable body that moves under confirmation movement control.

[Form A21]
The gaming machine of form A21-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG01, the chance button 631B),
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5);
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process shown in Figures 42 and 43, thereby performing the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101).
The game control means is capable of performing specific identification information light emission control to indicate the result of the variable display of the specific identification information by a plurality of light emitting means (for example, the CPU 103 is a part that can light up a plurality of lamps constituting a special pattern in a combination according to the variable display result when the variable display is stopped),
The display means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display (for example, a startup preparation display 132SG500 shown in FIG. 113(D)) when the power is turned on,
When the power is turned on,
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 114(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 114(A), the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are illuminated in a manner indicating a miss),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 114(A), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that power supply to the gaming machine has started through the startup preparation display, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows confirmation of specific identification light-emitting control, which has a high impact on gameplay, without being distracted by the movable body that operates through the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form A21-2 is
When the power is turned on,
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 114(B), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 114(B), the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are illuminated in a manner indicating a miss),
Thereafter, when the variable display is started based on the establishment of the start condition while the start preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the display means displays the restoration display (for example, as shown in FIG. 114(B), the portion where the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 114(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control is not started when a display corresponding to the variable display is displayed on the display means (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

The gaming machine of form A21-3 is
If a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on (for example, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 115(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 115(A), the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are illuminated in a manner indicating a miss),
Thereafter, when the variable display that was being executed before the power failure was not completed while the start-up preparation display was being displayed and before the confirmation movable control was performed, the display means displays a restoration display (for example, as shown in FIG. 115(A), the portion where the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 114(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.
The gaming machine of form A21-4 is
Further provided with a reservation storage means (for example, a special chart reservation storage unit 132SG151 shown in FIG. 20) capable of storing reservation information related to variable display,
If a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on (for example, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 115(B), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, the specific identification information light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 115(B), the special symbol lamps constituting the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are illuminated in a manner indicating a miss),
Thereafter, while the start-up preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, when the variable display that was being executed before the power outage is terminated and the variable display is started based on the hold information that was stored before the power outage, the display means displays the restoration in progress display (for example, as shown in FIG. 115(B), the portion where the restoration in progress display 132SG510 is displayed),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 115(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control is not started when a display corresponding to the variable display is displayed on the display means (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

[Form A22]
The gaming machine of form A22-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG01, the chance button 631B),
A light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5);
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process shown in Figures 42 and 43, thereby performing the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101).
The light emission control means can perform initialization-responsive light emission control to cause a plurality of light emission means to emit light in a manner corresponding to initialization (for example, as shown in Figures 72 and 73, a portion that causes frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an upper board movable body LED 9d, an under board movable body LED 9e, an upper frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g to emit light in an initialization notification manner).
The display means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display (for example, a startup preparation display 132SG500 shown in FIG. 113(D)) when the power is turned on,
When power is turned on with initialization (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 72, the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, the initialization-compatible light emission control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 72, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-mounted movable body LED 9e, the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are illuminated in an initialization notification mode).
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 72, the initial operations of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board face-line 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B are performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that power supply to the gaming machine has started through the startup preparation display, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows confirmation of the initialization-compatible light-emitting control without being distracted by the movable body operating through the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form A22-2 is
Further provided with light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, an under-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
If a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on (for example, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 116(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, a light emission control during recovery is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a pattern during recovery (for example, as shown in FIG. 116(A), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the state that recovery is being performed).
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 116(A), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control does not begin when the light-emitting means is emitting light in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the variable display (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

The gaming machine of form A22-3 is
Further provided with light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, an under-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
If a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on (for example, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start),
The startup preparation display is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 116(B), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, a light emission control during recovery is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a pattern during recovery (for example, as shown in FIG. 116(B), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the state that recovery is being performed).
Thereafter, when the variable display that was being executed before the power outage is terminated while the start-up preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, background display corresponding light emission control is performed, in which the light emission control means causes the light emission means to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the background display (for example, as shown in FIG. 116(B), a portion that causes the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the board movable body LED 9d, the board movable body LED 9e, the frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g to emit light in a manner corresponding to the background image).
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 116(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control does not begin when the light-emitting means is emitting light in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the variable display (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

The gaming machine of form A22-4 is
Further provided with light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, an under-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
When a power outage occurs during one of multiple round games and the power is then turned on (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start after a power outage occurs during a round game),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 117(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, a light emission control during recovery is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a pattern during recovery (for example, as shown in FIG. 117(A), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the state of recovery).
Thereafter, if the one round of play that was being executed before the power outage has not ended while the start preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movement control is performed, the light emission control during recovery continues (for example, as shown in FIG. 117(A), if the round of play that was executed before the power outage has not ended while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g continue to emit light in a manner corresponding to the fact that they are being restored).
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 116(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control is not started (when the light emitting means is emitting light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to round play (which would interfere with the confirmation work)).

The gaming machine of form A22-5 is
Further provided with light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 9a and 9b, an on-board movable body LED 9d, an under-board movable body LED 9e, an on-frame movable body LED 9f, and a chance button LED 9g),
When a power outage occurs during one of multiple round games and the power is then turned on (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start after a power outage occurs during a round game),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 117(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, a light emission control during recovery is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a pattern during recovery (for example, as shown in FIG. 117(A), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the state of recovery).
Thereafter, when the one round of play that was being executed before the power outage ends and the next round of play is started while the start preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movement control is performed, the light emission control during recovery continues (for example, as shown in FIG. 117(B) , when the round of play that was executed before the power outage ends while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g continue to emit light in a manner corresponding to the fact that they are being restored).
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 117(B), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the movement of the movable body due to the confirmation movement control is not started when the light-emitting means is emitting light in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to round play (which would interfere with the confirmation work).

[Form A23]
The gaming machine of form A23-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG01, the chance button 631B),
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5);
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process shown in Figures 42 and 43, thereby performing the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101).
The game control means
When the result of the variable display of the normal identification information is a predetermined display result, it is possible to control the normal variable means to be in an easy-to-enter state (for example, when the result of the variable display of the normal pattern is a win (normal pattern win), an opening control is executed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period),
When a power outage occurs when the normal variable means is in the easy-entry state and the power is turned on, it is possible to perform special control to return the normal variable means to the easy-entry state (for example, if a power outage occurs when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state based on the occurrence of a normal symbol win, a portion controls the variable winning ball device 6B to the open state again based on the pachinko game machine 1 being started by a hot start).
The display means is capable of displaying a startup preparation display (e.g., startup preparation display 132SG500) when the power is turned on,
When the power is cut off while the normal variable means is in the easy-entry state and then the power is turned on (for example, when the power is cut off when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, and then the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off and then started up by a hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 118(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Then, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 118(A), the variable winning ball device 6B is changed to the open state),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 118(A), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that power supply to the gaming machine has started by the start-up preparation display, and when the power is cut off when the normal variable means is in an easy-to-enter state, and when the power is turned on (power outage is restored), it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to quickly confirm that the normal variable means is in the same easy-to-enter state as before the power was cut off, without being distracted by the movable body that operates by the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form A23-2 is
When the power is cut off while the normal variable means is in the easy-entry state and then the power is turned on (for example, when the power is cut off when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, and then the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off and then started up by a hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 118(A), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Then, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 118(A), the variable winning ball device 6B is changed to the open state),
Thereafter, when the game medium enters the normal variable means, which is in the easy-to-enter state due to the special control, while the start-up preparation display is being displayed and before the confirmation movable control is performed, the display means displays a recovery display (for example, as shown in FIG. 118(A), the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed after a game ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B, which is in the open state),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 118(A), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of form A23-3 is
When a power outage occurs during the variable display of normal identification information, resulting in a predetermined display result, and the power is then turned on (for example, when the variable display of normal symbols has been executed before the power outage occurs and the pachinko game machine 1 has been started in a hot start mode),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 118(B), the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Thereafter, the normal variable means is controlled to be in the easy-entry state (for example, as shown in FIG. 118(B), the variable winning ball device 6B is changed to the open state),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 118(A), the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

[Form A24]
The gaming machine of form A24-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the on-frame movable body 132SG01, the chance button 631B),
A game control means (e.g., CPU 103),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5);
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
When the power is turned on, the movable body control means can perform confirmation movement control to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the operation confirmation control process shown in Figures 42 and 43, thereby performing the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101).
The game control means
During the advantageous state, it is possible to control the variable means to an easy-entry state in which the game medium is easy to enter (for example, a part that controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to an open state),
When a power interruption occurs while the variable means is in the easy-entry state, and the power is then turned on, it is possible to perform special control to return the variable means to the easy-entry state (for example, if a power interruption occurs while the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state, a portion controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state again based on the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 has been started by a hot start).
The display means
When the power is turned on, it is possible to display a startup preparation display (for example, the startup preparation display 132SG500 shown in FIG. 113(D)).
When a power outage occurs during the advantageous state and the power is then turned on, it is possible to display a restoration display (for example, as shown in FIG. 119, the portion where the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed),
When the power is cut off during the advantageous state while the variable means is in the easy-entry state and control is being performed, and then the power is turned on (for example, when a power cut occurs during a jackpot game while the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state as a round game, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 119, the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Then, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 119, the part that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state),
Thereafter, the restoration in progress display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 119, the restoration in progress display 132SG510 is displayed),
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 119, the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that power supply to the gaming machine has started by the start-up preparation display, and when the power is cut off when the variable means is in an easy-to-enter state, and when the power is turned on (power outage is restored), it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to quickly confirm that the variable means is in the same easy-to-enter state as before the power was cut off, without being distracted by the movable body that operates by the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form A24-2 is
In the advantageous state, it is possible to play multiple rounds of games (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, a portion in which 3 to 10 rounds of games can be played as a jackpot game),
In a round game, it is possible to control the variable means to the easy-entry state and control the variable means to the non-entry state (for example, a part that controls the special winning ball device 7 to an open state and a part that controls it to a closed state in a round game).
When the power is cut off while the variable means is in the easy-entry state and the power is then turned on (for example, when a power cut occurs during a jackpot game and the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state as a round game, and the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a hot start),
The startup preparation display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 119, the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed),
Then, the special control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 119, the part that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state),
Thereafter, when the special control in one round of play ends and control is performed to make the variable means in the next round of play unable to enter while the start-up preparation display is being displayed, the recovery display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 119, when the round of play ends and the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the wall s state while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed).
Thereafter, the confirmation movement control is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 119, the initial movement of each movable body is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

[Form A25]
The gaming machine of form A25-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
Movable bodies (for example, the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, the on-frame movable body 132SG101),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
the movable body control means is capable of performing confirmation movement control (e.g., operation confirmation control) to move the movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally when power is turned on,
The display means
When power is turned on with initialization (for example, a cold start process), an initialization display (for example, an initialization notification display 132SG600) indicating that initialization has been performed can be displayed.
When power is turned on with initialization,
The initialization display is displayed,
Thereafter, the confirmation movable control is performed,
After that, after the confirmation movable control is completed, the display of the initialization display is terminated (see FIGS. 120 and 121).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to quickly confirm that the gaming machine has been initialized without being distracted by the movable body that operates by the confirmation movable control, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not prevent confirmation of whether the visual initialization notification has been completed by the movable body that operates by the confirmation movable control.

The gaming machine of form A25-2 is
The period from power-on with initialization to the confirmation movement control being performed is longer than the period from power-on without initialization to the confirmation movement control being performed (for example, the period from power-on with initialization (startup with cold start processing) to the operation confirmation control being performed is longer than the period from power-on without initialization (startup with hot start processing) to the operation confirmation control being performed),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which, when the power is turned on to initialize the machine, confirmation movement control is immediately performed, so that the display of the initialization display does not become visibly observable.

The gaming machine of form A25-3 is
The initialization display is displayed for a predetermined execution period and is hidden after the end of the predetermined execution period;
Even if the start condition is met while the initialization display is being displayed, the initialization display is not hidden (for example, the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed for a predetermined execution period (for example, 30 seconds) and is hidden after the predetermined execution period ends, and even if a start winning occurs while the initialization notification display 132SG600 is being displayed, the initialization notification display 132SG600 is hidden and the variable display is not started).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of form A25-4 is
If the execution period of the variable display that is started based on the satisfaction of the start condition is longer than the execution period of the initialization display, the initialization display will continue to be displayed until the end of the execution period of the variable display (for example, if the execution period of the variable display that is started based on the occurrence of a start winning is longer than the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600, the initialization display will continue to be displayed until the end of the execution period of the variable display).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to perform the operation check control in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of form A25-5 is
If the execution period of the variable display that starts based on the establishment of the start condition is longer than the execution period of the initialization display, the initialization display continues to be displayed until the end of the execution period of the variable display (for example, after power-on without initialization (startup by hot start processing), the initialization notification display 132SG600 is not displayed, and the background display is performed based on the game status background designation command).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

[Form A26]
The gaming machine of form A26-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
A first movable body (for example, the chance button 631B),
A second movable body (for example, the on-board movable body 32A),
A movable body control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) is provided.
The distance between the first movable body and the second movable body is closer when the first movable body is located at the advanced position and the second movable body is located at the advanced position than when the first movable body is located at the initial position and the second movable body is located at the initial position (see Figure 122).
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation operation control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) that moves the first movable body and the second movable body by an operation to confirm that the first movable body and the second movable body are operating normally,
The confirmation movement control is a control in which the first movable body is moved from the initial position to the advanced position and the second movable body is moved from the initial position to the advanced position so that the movement periods of the first movable body and the second movable body overlap, and then the first movable body is moved from the advanced position to the initial position and the second movable body is moved from the advanced position to the initial position so that the movement periods of the first movable body and the second movable body do not overlap (for example, in the movement confirmation control, the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A simultaneously start moving from the origin position to the performance position so that their respective initial movement periods overlap (see FIG. 122(B)), and then the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position so that their respective initial movement periods do not overlap (see FIG. 122(C)), and then the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 122(D)).).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to simultaneously confirm that the first movable body can operate normally in the advanced position and that the second movable body can operate normally in the advanced position, thereby simplifying the confirmation work, and at the same time, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the movement of the first movable body from the advanced position to the origin position and the movement of the second movable body from the advanced position to the origin position, which are difficult to confirm, to be confirmed individually.

The gaming machine of form A26-2 is
Further provided with a performance control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120),
The performance execution means is capable of executing a movable body performance using the first movable body and the second movable body,
When the movable body performance is executed, the movement control means is capable of performing a performance movement control in which the first movable body is moved from an initial position to an advanced position and the second movable body is moved from the initial position to an advanced position so that the movement periods of the first movable body and the second movable body do not overlap, and thereafter the first movable body is moved from the advanced position to the initial position and the second movable body is moved from the advanced position to the initial position so that the movement periods of the first movable body and the second movable body overlap,
The confirmation movement control is a control for moving the first movable body and the second movable body in a manner that does not include the movement of the first movable body and the second movable body in the performance movement control (for example, for the on-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B that perform a performance movement in which the first movable body and the second movable body come into contact (or overlap), in the movement confirmation control, an initial movement is performed in an operation manner that does not include the performance movement described in Figures 123 (B) to (D) (for example, a manner in which the on-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B are moved forward separately)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of form A26-3 is
Further provided is a detection means (for example, a performance position sensor 132SG134) capable of detecting that the second movable body is disposed at the advanced position,
The movement of the first movable body arranged at the advance position in the confirmation movement control toward the initial position is performed on the condition that the second movable body is arranged at the advance position by the detection means (for example, a part that causes the movement of the first movable body (e.g., the on-board movable body 32A) arranged at the performance position in the movement confirmation control toward the origin position to be performed on the condition that the second movable body (e.g., the below-board movable body 32B) is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG134).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

The gaming machine of form A26-4 is
The movable body control means is capable of performing return control to move the movable body, including the first movable body and the second movable body, to the initial position when the movable body is not positioned at the initial position when the power is turned on (for example, before the long initial operation control is started, when the movable body, including the first movable body and the second movable body, is not positioned at the origin position, return control to move the movable body to the initial position (for example, a part where short initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101) is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

[Form A27]
The gaming machine of form A27-1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot) as a result of the variable display,
A first movable body (for example, the under-board movable body 32B),
A second movable body (for example, a frame-mounted movable body 132SG101),
a movable body control means,
The first movable body is provided on a game board (for example, a game board 2),
The second movable body is provided in a game frame (for example, an opening/closing door frame 3a),
The movable body control means
When power is turned on, it is possible to perform a confirmation movement control (e.g., an operation confirmation control) that moves the first movable body and the second movable body by performing an operation to confirm that the first movable body and the second movable body are operating normally,
As the confirmation movement control, an operation is performed to move the first movable body from the initial position to the advanced position, and while the first movable body is stopped at the advanced position, an operation is performed to confirm that the second movable body is operating normally (for example, while the under-board movable body 32B moves from the origin position to the performance position and stops at the performance position (see Figure 68 (F)), the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 moves from the origin position to the performance position, and then moves from the performance position to the origin position; see Figures 68 (G) to (I)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a gaming machine can be provided in which the first movable body being placed in the advance position during confirmation movable control indicates that the confirmation movable control has not ended, and the operation of the second movable body is started when the first movable body is placed in the advance position, so that the confirmation movable control of the second movable body is not overlooked.

The gaming machine of form A27-2 is
Further provided is a detection means (for example, a performance position sensor 132SG104) capable of detecting that the second movable body is placed in an initial position,
The movement of the first movable body arranged at the advance position in the confirmation movement control toward the initial position is performed on the condition that the second movable body is arranged at the initial position by the detection means (for example, the movement of the first movable body (e.g., the under-board movable body 32B) arranged at the performance position in the operation confirmation control toward the origin position is performed on the condition that the second movable body (e.g., the under-board movable body 32B) is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG104).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is capable of performing confirmation movable control in an appropriate manner.

An embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. In the following, the near side of Figure 12 will be referred to as the front (front face) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the far side will be referred to as the rear (rear face) side, and the description will be based on the up, down, left, and right directions when viewing the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front side. Note that the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment refers to the surface facing the player playing on the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, in describing each step in the flowchart, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "132SGS1," and "Normal Reach" may be abbreviated as "N Reach" and "Super Reach" as "SP Reach."

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
12 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is broadly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that forms the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls, serving as gaming media, are launched into this gaming area by a predetermined ball launching device. A door frame 3a with a glass window is provided on the gaming machine frame 3 so as to be rotatable about its left side. The door frame 3a is configured to open and close the gaming area, and the gaming area can be seen through the glass window when the door frame 3a is closed.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. When special symbols or the normal symbols described below vary, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. When decorative symbols described below vary, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variation also includes the display of a certain symbol flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that variable display is sometimes referred to as variable display or variation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as the "first special symbol," and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as the "second special symbol." A special symbol game using the first special symbol is also referred to as the "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbol is also referred to as the "second special symbol game." The special symbol display device that variably displays the special symbols may be of one type. The special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of multiple lamps (LEDs). When the variable display is stopped, the CPU 103 can light up these multiple lamps in a combination that corresponds to the variable display result.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or organic EL (electroluminescence) display, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, a variable display of multiple types of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers, etc.) as decorative identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that the special symbol games and variable display of decorative symbols that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is currently being executed. The pending display and active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to a variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also referred to as the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each consisting of multiple LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first hold memories by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second hold memories by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning opening, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (a standard electric device) forms a second start winning opening that changes between a closed state and an open state due to the solenoid 81 (see Figure 13). The variable winning ball device 6B, for example, includes a device with a movable piece that can move back and forth. When the solenoid 81 is off, the movable piece is retracted from the game board surface to a retracted position, making it difficult for game balls to flow down the top surface of the movable piece, resulting in a closed state where game balls cannot enter the second start winning opening (also referred to as the second start winning opening being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is on, the variable winning ball device 6B has a movable piece that protrudes forward from the game board surface to a protruding position, allowing game balls to flow down the top surface of the movable piece, resulting in an open state where game balls can enter the second start winning opening (also referred to as the second start winning opening being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above-mentioned device, as long as it can change between a closed state and an open state.

General winning openings 10 are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 12, three locations at the bottom left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), and are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out as prize balls.

To the right of the variable prize ball device 6B is a special variable prize ball device 7 with a large prize opening. The special variable prize ball device 7 has a large prize opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 13), and the large prize opening door forms the large prize opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door (for the special electric device) is in the off state, the large prize door closes the large prize door, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) the large prize door. On the other hand, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door is in the on state, the large prize door opens the large prize door, making it easier for game balls to enter the large prize door.

When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, 14) are paid out as prize balls. When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a gaming ball enters, for example, the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10.

When a game ball enters any of the prize slots, including the general prize slot 10, it is also referred to as a "win." In particular, a win at a start slot (first start slot, second start slot) is also referred to as a start slot.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 12, at the bottom left of the gaming area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and displays a variety of normal symbols as normal identification information that differs from special symbols. Normal symbols are represented by numbers ranging from "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". Normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This type of variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

Below the variable winning ball device 6B, a passing gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a regular game is played.

A regular symbol pending indicator 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls as they flow down, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R are provided at the upper left and right positions of the opening and closing door frame 3a to play and output sound effects, etc. Frame LEDs 9a and 9b are provided at the top and left and right sides of the opening and closing door frame 3a to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker LED 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in Figure 12), there are provided an above-board movable body 32A and an below-board movable body 32B that operate in accordance with the effects. Furthermore, the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B are provided with movable body LEDs 9d and 9e, the above-frame movable body 132SG121 is provided with an above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B is provided with a chance button LED 9g. The movable body LEDs 9d and 9e, the button LED 9g, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, and the attack LED 9c are sometimes collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9.

A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. The ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is operated by the player or the like to launch gaming balls toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

A ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided at a predetermined position on the opening and closing door frame 3a below the gaming area to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a designated ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) separate from the upper tray, from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

In addition, an operation unit 600 is provided in the center of the bottom of the opening and closing door frame 3a. The operation unit 600 includes a chance button 631B that can be pressed by the player, and a lever body 631A that can be pushed and pulled back and forth by the player and is rotatable. The chance button 631B can move up and down between an origin position and an operation detection position below the origin position, and can also move between the origin position and a protruding position that protrudes upward from the origin position. In addition, a cross key that constitutes the selection button 132SG35 for setting effects such as volume is provided in the upper tray portion of the opening and closing door frame 3a.

The operation unit 600 is provided with a button sensor 635B (see Figure 13) for detecting the player's operation (action) on the chance button 631B, an origin position sensor 635C (see Figure 13) for detecting whether the chance button 631B is located at the origin position, a protruding position sensor 635D (see Figure 13) for detecting whether the chance button 631B is located at the protruding position, a vibration motor 635E (see Figure 13) for vibrating the chance button 631B, an advance/retract motor 635F (see Figure 13) for moving the chance button 631B back and forth between the origin position and the protruding position, a push/pull sensor 625Y (see Figure 13) consisting of a push sensor and a pull sensor for detecting the forward/backward movement of the lever body 631A, and a protruding position sensor 625C for detecting whether the lever body 631A is located at the protruding position. The selection button 132SG35 is also provided with an up/down/left/right sensor 132SG36 (see Figure 13) consisting of an up sensor, a down sensor, a left sensor, and a right sensor that detects operation of the selection button 132SG35's cross key in the up/down/left/right directions.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a lever body 631A and a chance button 631B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

The opening and closing door frame 3a has three performance units: the first performance unit 132SG100 attached to the upper center, the second performance unit 132SG200 attached to the upper left, and the third performance unit 132SG300 attached to the upper right. The first performance unit 132SG100 is provided with a frame-mounted movable body 132SG121 that can move between the origin position and the performance position, as described below.

The back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11 housed in a board case (not shown). The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52 (see Figure 13). As will be described later, the jackpot probability is set to 1/200 in this feature section 132SG, but the present invention is not limited to this. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be placed in a setting change state by operating the setting change switch 52, and the jackpot probability may be changed by operating the setting key 51 in this setting change state.

A display monitor 29 (see Figure 13) is located in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see Figure 13) is located to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and display changeover switch 30 are located directly in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as the consecutive win ratio, winning combination ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the proportion of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning slot (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls. The winning combination ratio is the proportion of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning slot (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning slot (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls. The base is the proportion of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls that have been shot out.
The setting key 51 and setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed by the opening and closing door frame 3a.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball-hitting operation handle provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 while the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on that passage cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on that passage is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed, the normal symbol display result will be "normal winning." On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the normal symbol display result will be "normal losing." When a "normal winning" occurs, opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when a special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on that start winning cannot be played immediately), the execution of the special game based on that entry will be suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In a special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot," and if a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a stopped symbol, it is a "miss." Note that "misses" in this pachinko gaming machine 1 include "misses with time reduction," in which the next variable display is controlled to a high base state (time-reduced state) without going through a jackpot game.

Once the display result in the special game shows "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, which is advantageous for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or until the number of game balls entering the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). This predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and will hereinafter be referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (10 times, 3 times, etc.) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can win prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is advantageous to the player. The more rounds played in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of jackpot opening modes (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set accordingly. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may enter a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the special symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning slot by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state and by increasing the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in a regular symbol game compared to the normal state. The time-saving state is advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of fluctuation of special symbols (especially the second special symbol).

The time-saving state continues until one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined number of special games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. When the condition for the time-saving state is met, the predetermined number of special games have been played, this is also called a "time-saving state with a cut-off count" (time-saving with a cut-off count).

The normal state refers to a gaming state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot gaming state that are advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state. It is a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in a normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in a special game will be a "jackpot," is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified recovery process is not executed after power is turned on). A state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state.

(Progression of the production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (such as notifying the progress of the game or adding excitement to the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. These effects are described below. Note that these effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of these displays, they may also be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, the turning on and off of the game effect lamp 9, the movement of the movable body 32, or as effects using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 begin to display variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. At the timing when the display result (also called the confirmed special symbol) in the first or second special symbol game is statically displayed, the confirmed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols is also statically displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins to when it ends, the variable display of the decorative symbols may assume a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, as described below.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach mode is reached during the variable display of decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. Pachinko gaming machine 1 executes multiple types of reach effects, with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the effect mode. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot," a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is displayed stopped and aligned on a predetermined effective line in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. Other effects, such as preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability, are executed during the variable display of decorative symbols. Preview effects include preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the currently executing variable display, and pre-read preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is reserved). Pre-read preview effects may be executed that change the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode that is different from normal.

In addition, the image display device 5 may temporarily stop the decorative symbols while they are being displayed in a variable manner, and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo-consecutive effect that makes a single variable display appear as multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot gaming state, a jackpot effect is executed to notify the player of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot effect may include an effect to notify the number of rounds or an upgrade effect to indicate that the value of the jackpot gaming state is increasing.

In addition, during the first round of a jackpot (first jackpot) in normal mode, the large prize opening is opened in the jackpot opening pattern (always open), so the effect shown in Figure 63 (F8) is displayed.In the first round of a jackpot in time-saving mode, the large prize opening is opened in the small prize opening pattern (repeatedly opening and closing for a short period of time), so the effect shown in Figure 51 (C2) is displayed.In addition, during the second round of a jackpot in time-saving mode, the large prize opening is opened in the jackpot opening pattern (always open), so the displays, various lamps, and sounds will be different between the first and second rounds.

Also, for example, when a special game or the like is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 14. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a firing control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source, such as an external power source like a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 executes the program stored in ROM 101 to control the progress of the game (processing that realizes the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in ROM 101 (such as data on variation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) is used, and RAM 102 is used as the main memory. RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM, where the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if part or all of the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or part of the program stored in ROM 101 may be deployed to RAM 102 and executed on RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specified computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals that control (drive) the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first hold display device 25A, second hold display device 25B, normal symbol hold display device 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switches (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B) and count switches (first count switch 132SG023, second count switch 132SG024) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal that stops control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal turns off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and turns on when the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value for a period of time that exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal turns on, for example, in response to pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 or solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the opening and closing door frame 3a.

As part of its control of the game's progress, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the game's progress, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. These presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various decisions made by the main board 11 (e.g., the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable patterns used when executing the special game (details will be described later)), the game status (e.g., the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot slot, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, error notifications, and notifications of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes programs stored in ROM 121, and performs processing to execute performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). During this processing, various data (such as data from various tables) stored in ROM 121 is used, and RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute an effect based on detection signals (signals output when an operation by the player is detected, and which appropriately indicate the content of the operation) from the push/pull sensor 625Y, protruding position sensor 625C, button sensor 635B, origin position sensor 635C, protruding position sensor 635D, up/down/left/right sensor 132SG36, origin position sensors 132SG103, 132SG113, 132SG123, 132SG133, and effect position sensors 132SG104, 132SG114, 132SG124, 132SG134.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes presentations based on instructions to execute presentations from the presentation control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays effect images on the image display unit 5 by supplying the image display unit 5 with video signals corresponding to the effect to be executed based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 also supplies sound designation signals (signals designating the sound to be output) to the audio control board 13 and lamp signals (signals designating the lamp on/off state) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies signals to operate the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG121, and the chance button 631B to the drive circuits that drive each movable body or the vibration motor 635E, the advance/retract motor 635F, and the drive motors 132SG102, 132SG112, 132SG122, and 132SG132 of each movable body.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the on/off of the lamp.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to perform control of sound output, lamp on/off (such as supplying sound designation signals and lamp signals), and control of the above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, above-frame movable body 132SG121, and chance button 631B (such as supplying signals to operate each movable body).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (performance random numbers) used to execute various performances. The performance random numbers may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, sound control board 13, and lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 23. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning determination process (step S101).

The start winning determination process detects the occurrence of a start winning, stores pending information in a specified area of RAM 102, and updates the number of pending memories. When a start winning occurs, a random number value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and variation pattern, and this is stored as pending information. A process may also be executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random number value. After the pending information and number of pending memories are stored, transmission settings are made to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the determination results, such as the occurrence of a start winning, the number of pending memories, and the predictive determination. The performance control command for the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 (see Figure 23).

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag stored in RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), transmission settings are made to transmit the corresponding effect control command to the effect control board 12.

The normal special symbol processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). This normal special symbol processing determines whether to start the first or second special symbol game based on factors such as the presence or absence of pending information. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines (predetermines) whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and, if so, the type of jackpot, before the display result is derived and displayed, based on a random number value for determining the display result. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines a fixed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be displayed in the special symbol game in accordance with the determined display result. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "1," and the normal special symbol processing ends. The special symbol game using the second special symbol may be executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also known as special symbol 2 priority consumption). Additionally, the order in which game balls enter the first and second starting winning slots may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision value compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern to determine one of several types of fluctuation pattern based on the results of a pre-determined decision on whether or not the display result will be a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol change process includes processes for making settings to change the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and for measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol change time corresponding to the change pattern. When the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change reaches the special symbol change time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stop process includes a process for stopping the variation of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and setting the device to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special symbol that will result in the display of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", the game state is also updated if the game is in a time-saving state or a special probability state and the end of the number-cutting period is confirmed. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-jackpot opening process of step S114 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "4." This pre-jackpot opening process includes processing to start the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and set the large prize opening to an open state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot." When the large prize opening is set to an open state, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door. At this time, the maximum opening period for the large prize opening to be set and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set, depending on the type of jackpot, for example. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5," and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "5." This jackpot opening process includes processes such as measuring the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state, processes such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door are executed, and then the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "6" and the jackpot opening process ends.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds that open the jackpot entry port has been executed has reached the set upper limit, and a process to set the jackpot game state to end when the upper limit has been reached. If the number of rounds executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5", while if the number of rounds executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7". Once the value of the special symbol process flag has been updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes processes such as waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation, which serves as a presentation operation to notify players of the end of the jackpot game state, is executed, and making various settings to initiate variable rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

Figure 14 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this feature unit 132SG. A performance control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 14 is just one example, and other command formats may also be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in Figure 14, command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern specification command that specifies the variable pattern (variable display time) of decorative symbols and the like that are variably displayed in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions given by the performance control command. Note that the variable pattern specification command sets different EXT data depending on the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is a presentation control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. For example, as shown in Figure 15 (A), the variable display result notification command sets different EXT data depending on the determination result (pre-determined result) of whether the variable display result is a "miss," "jackpot," or "minor hit," and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of several types of jackpot type will be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot."

For example, as shown in Figure 15 (A), in the variable display result notification commands, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result will be "miss." Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "jackpot A." Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "jackpot B." Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "small hit" and the small hit type will be "small hit A." Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit B."

Command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that specifies the stopping (confirmation) of the variable display of decorative patterns in each of the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5.

Command 9000H is a power-on command that specifies that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cold started (the power was turned on with the clear switch 92 pressed down (step S6 was executed because the recovery condition was not met in step S3 of the game control main processing in Figure 23)).

Command 9200H is a power outage recovery command that specifies that the pachinko gaming machine has been hot started (the power was turned on without the clear switch 92 being pressed (step S4 was executed when the recovery condition was met in step S3 of the game control main processing in Figure 23).

Command 95XXH is a game state background designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game state background designation command is also a command that specifies that the background image displayed on the image display device 5 be updated to a background image that corresponds to the game state. With the game state background designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example.

As shown in FIG. 15(B), as a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state background designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is not performed (low base state, normal state). Command 9501H is a second game state background designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special symbol once after the end of jackpot play for jackpot A (high base state, time-saving state A). Command 9502H is a third game state background designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special symbol up to 685 times after the end of jackpot play for jackpot B (high base state, time-saving state C1). Command 9503H is a fourth game state background designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special symbol up to seven times after the end of jackpot play for jackpot C (high base state, time-saving state B). Command 9504H is a fifth game state background designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time-saving state B) in which time-saving control is performed on the variable display of the second special chart up to seven times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D. Command 9504H is a sixth game state background designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time-saving state C2) in which time-saving control is performed on the variable display of the second special chart up to 685 times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E.

Command A0XXH is a start-of-win command (also known as a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a jackpot or small win game state. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot or small win game state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-opening notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot or small win game state. Command A3XXH is a end-of-win command that specifies the display of a presentation image at the end of a jackpot or small win game state.

In the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result, for example by setting the same EXT data as in the variable display result notification command. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, different EXT data is set depending on the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state or small prize game state (for example, "1" to "10").

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies that the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been met, based on the occurrence of a start prize (first start prize) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the first start port formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been met, based on the occurrence of a start prize (second start prize) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first special reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special memory numbers can be identified and displayed in the reserved memory display area 132SG005D, etc. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second special reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special memory numbers can be identified and displayed in the reserved memory display area 132SG005D, etc. The first reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a first start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the first start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a second start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the second start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port. Additionally, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first or second start condition is met (when the pending memory number decreases).

Instead of the first pending memory count notification command or the second pending memory count notification command, a total pending memory count notification command may be sent to notify the total number of pending memories. In other words, the total pending memory count notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that specifies the winning result at the time of the initial winning. Command C6XXH is a variable category designation command that specifies the variable category of the winning result at the time of the initial winning.

Command D100H is a V-winning notification command that notifies that a V-winning has occurred, that is, that the second count switch 132SG024 has been turned on as a result of the game ball passing through it. Command D2XXH is a remaining second special pattern time-saving count notification command that notifies the number of remaining time-saving controls for the second special pattern in the time-saving state. Command D3XX is a prize ball count notification command that notifies the number of prize balls generated (awarded) as a result of the game ball entering the winning slot. Command E100H is a customer waiting demo specification command that specifies the execution of a customer waiting demo (demo performance).

Figure 16 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random number values counted on the main board 11. As shown in Figure 16, in this feature unit 132SG, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, the random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so that they can be counted on the main board 11. Note that other random number values may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by the CPU 103 using different random counters updated by software, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built into the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip separate from the game control microcomputer 100. These random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called gaming random numbers.

Figure 17 shows the variation patterns in this feature section 132SG. In this feature section 132SG, multiple variation patterns are prepared in advance to correspond to the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" or "reach," as well as the cases where the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "small hit." The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss." The variation pattern corresponding to the variable display result being a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. The variation pattern corresponding to the variable display result being a "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

Of these variation patterns, for the jackpot variation pattern, after the same special chart variable display time as the miss variation pattern, an additional 15 seconds of special chart display time is set aside to execute a congratulatory effect to celebrate the fact that the variable display result is a jackpot.

Here, the jackpot fluctuation pattern and the loss fluctuation pattern in this feature unit 132SG have the same period until the variable display result is announced, preventing the player from recognizing in advance whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a loss based on the length of the period until the variable display result is announced.

Note that the jackpot variation pattern in this feature unit 132SG exemplifies a form in which an additional 15-second special chart variable display time is provided for executing a congratulatory effect after the same special chart variable display time as the miss variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special chart variable display time for executing a congratulatory effect provided in the jackpot variation pattern is not limited to 15 seconds and may vary depending on the game status.

As shown in Figures 17(A) and 17(B), this feature section 132SG has multiple different variation patterns pre-set depending on the special symbol that executes the variable display.

As shown in Figure 17 (A), the fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol, such as the jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern, include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as Super Reach α or Super Reach β is executed, and a non-reach fluctuation pattern in which no reach effect is executed. Note that while this feature section 132SG has only one normal reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to the super reach, multiple normal reach fluctuation patterns may be established, such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. Furthermore, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns may also be established for the super reach fluctuation pattern.

The normal reach variation pattern, super reach α variation pattern, and super reach β variation pattern for the first special symbol also include a variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive effect is executed 1 to 3 times, in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and then re-variably displayed during variable display. In this feature unit 132SG, the number of times the pseudo consecutive effect is executed determines which of the normal reach, super reach α, or super reach β reach effects is executed. For example, if a pseudo consecutive effect is executed once during variable display, a normal reach reach effect is executed afterwards; if a pseudo consecutive effect is executed twice during variable display, a super reach α reach effect is executed afterwards; and if a pseudo consecutive effect is executed three times during variable display, a super reach β reach effect is executed afterwards.

Furthermore, of the reach effects that can be executed in the variable display of the second special symbol, the Super Reach β reach effect is set to have the highest jackpot expectation, while the Super Reach α reach effect is set to have a lower jackpot expectation than the Super Reach β reach effect. Furthermore, the normal reach reach effect is set to have a lower jackpot expectation than the Super Reach α reach effect (jackpot expectation of reach effects: Super Reach β > Super Reach α > Normal Reach). In other words, in this feature unit 132SG, the more pseudo consecutive effects executed during the variable display, the higher the jackpot expectation of that variable display.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 17 (B), the second special symbol fluctuation patterns in this feature unit 132SG include jackpot fluctuation patterns, small jackpot fluctuation patterns, and miss fluctuation patterns, which are non-reach fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns with special symbol variable display times that differ from the first special symbol fluctuation patterns (normal reach fluctuation patterns in which the reach performance of a normal reach is executed, and super reach γ fluctuation patterns in which the reach performance of a super reach γ is executed). Of these second special symbol fluctuation patterns, the super reach γ fluctuation pattern is set to have the highest jackpot expectation, and the non-reach fluctuation pattern is set to have the lowest jackpot expectation (jackpot expectation for second special symbols: super reach γ > normal reach > non-reach).

In addition, as described below, in this feature unit 132SG, rather than first determining the type of fluctuation pattern, such as the non-reach type, normal reach type, or super reach type, and then determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to that determined type, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern without determining the type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern type may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for determining the fluctuation pattern type, and then the fluctuation pattern to be executed may be determined from the fluctuation patterns belonging to that determined type.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of games in the pachinko game machine 1. The CPU 103 also executes a random number generation program, enabling it to generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores not only game control programs but also various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables, such as those shown in Figure 18, which are prepared so that the CPU 103 can make various judgments and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting multiple control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, as well as a variation pattern judgment table (see Figures 25 to 30) that stores multiple variation patterns that determine the variation modes of each symbol in variable displays such as special and normal symbols.

The determination tables stored in ROM 101 include, for example, display result determination table 1 shown in Figure 18(A), display result determination table 2 shown in Figure 18(B), jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol) shown in Figure 18(C), jackpot type determination table (for second special symbol) shown in Figure 18(D), small jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 18(E), as well as various first special symbol variation pattern determination tables (see Figures 25 and 30), various second special symbol variation pattern determination tables (see Figures 31 to 30), and regular symbol variation pattern determination tables (not shown).

Figures 18(A) and 18(B) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination table 1 and display result determination table 2. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101, and is a table in which a win determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. Display result determination table 1 sets the determination value for a big win and a small win when the variable display special symbol designation buffer (a value that specifies the special symbol that will be variable displayed and is set by the CPU 103 when normal special symbol processing is executed) is 1 (first), i.e., when the first special symbol is the target of variable display. Display result determination table 2 sets the determination value for a big win and a small win when the variable display special symbol designation buffer (a value that specifies the special symbol that will be variable displayed and is set by the CPU 103 when normal special symbol processing is executed) is 2 (second), i.e., when the second special symbol is the target of variable display.

As shown in Figure 18 (A), when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is set to 1, a judgment value corresponding to a big win is set, but a judgment value corresponding to a small win is not set. Therefore, when the first special symbol is the target of variable display, a big win is possible, but a small win will not occur. Furthermore, the probability of winning a big win when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is set to 1 is approximately 1/200.

Also, as shown in Figure 18 (B), when the variable display special designation buffer is set to the second setting, a judgment value corresponding to a big win and a judgment value corresponding to a small win are set. Furthermore, when the variable display special designation buffer is set to the second setting, the probability of winning a big win is approximately 1/200, and the probability of winning a small win is approximately 1/7.

In other words, when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is the first (when the special symbol that performs the variable display is the first special symbol), if the value of MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hits shown in FIG. 18(A), the CPU 103 determines that the variable display result is a big hit (Big Hit A or Big Hit B). Also, when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is the second (when the special symbol that performs the variable display is the second special symbol), if the value of MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hits shown in FIG. 18(B), the CPU 103 determines that the variable display result is a big hit (Big Hit B), and if the value of MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIG. 18(B), the CPU 103 determines that the variable display result is a small hit.

The "probabilities" shown in Figures 18(A) and 18(B) indicate the probability (percentage) of a big hit and the probability (percentage) of a small hit. Furthermore, deciding whether to have a big hit means deciding whether to control the game to a big hit gaming state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B a big hit pattern. Furthermore, deciding whether to have a small hit means deciding whether to control the game to a small hit gaming state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B a small hit pattern.

In addition, in this feature unit 132SG, the CPU 103 determines whether the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination tables shown in Figures 18(A) and 18(B). However, a big hit determination table and a small hit determination table may be provided separately, and the determination of a big hit may be made using a common table for the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern, regardless of the variable display special pattern designation buffer, and the determination of a small hit may be made using a separate table depending on the variable display special pattern designation buffer.

In addition, with this feature unit 132SG, when the variable display special chart designation buffer is set to first, no judgment values other than those corresponding to big wins are set as judgment values corresponding to small wins, meaning that small wins are not won. However, some of the judgment values other than those corresponding to big wins can be set as judgment values corresponding to small wins, allowing small wins to be won.

Figures 18(C) and 18(D) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in ROM 101. Of these, Figure 18(C) is a table used when determining the jackpot type using reserved memory based on the gaming ball entering the first start winning slot (i.e., when the first special symbol is variably displayed). Also, Figure 18(D) is a table used when determining the jackpot type using reserved memory based on the gaming ball entering the second start winning slot (i.e., when the second special symbol is variably displayed).

The jackpot type determination table is a table that is referenced to determine the type of jackpot—jackpot A or jackpot B—based on the random number (MR2) for determining the type of jackpot when a determination is made that the variable display result will be a jackpot pattern. In this feature unit 132SG, as shown in FIGS. 18(C) and (D), the jackpot type determination table (for the first special pattern) has two types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot B, while the jackpot type determination table (for the second special pattern) has only one type of jackpot, jackpot B. In other words, when the first special pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the jackpot that occurs will be either jackpot A or jackpot B, while when the second special pattern is displayed in a variable manner, only jackpot B will occur.

Figure 18 (E) is an explanatory diagram showing the small win type determination table stored in ROM 101. The small win type determination table is a table that is referenced when a determination is made that the variable display result will be a small win pattern, in order to determine the type of small win as small win A or small win B based on the random number (MR2) for determining the win type. Furthermore, in this feature unit 132SG, if the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 during the small hit game of small hit A, i.e., if a V-winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game of jackpot type C will be executed, if the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 during the small hit game of small hit B, i.e., if a V-winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game of jackpot type D or jackpot E will be executed, and if the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 during the small hit game of small hit B, i.e., if a V-winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game of jackpot type E will be executed. In other words, jackpots C to E are not determined by the random number value MR2 used to determine the type of jackpot extracted at the time of the initial winning, but by whether the game ball passes through the second count switch 132SG024 during play of small jackpot A or small jackpot B.

Here, the jackpot types in this feature section 132SG will be explained using Figure 19. In this feature section 132SG, the jackpot types are set to jackpot A through jackpot E, which will execute time-saving control after the jackpot gaming state ends.

Of these jackpots A through E, jackpot A is a jackpot in which the large prize entry port is repeatedly changed to a second state advantageous to the player three times (so-called three rounds). Furthermore, the interval period between each round in jackpot A is set to 0.5 seconds. Furthermore, after the jackpot gaming state ends, time-saving control is executed in time-saving state A until a special game is played once for the variable display of the second special symbol, and up to five times for the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol.

Jackpot B is a jackpot in which the large prize slot is changed to a second state advantageous to the player ten times (so-called 10 rounds). The interval period between each round in Jackpot B is set to 0.5 seconds. Furthermore, after the jackpot gaming state ends, time-saving control is executed in time-saving state C1 until a maximum of 685 special game games have been executed targeting the variable display of the second special symbol, or a maximum of 689 special game games have been executed targeting the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol.

Jackpot C is a jackpot in which three rounds (so-called three rounds) are repeated, changing the jackpot entry port to a second state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the interval period between each round in Jackpot C is set to 0.5 seconds for the first and second rounds, and 30 seconds for the third round. Furthermore, after the jackpot gaming state ends, time-saving control is executed in time-saving state B until a maximum of seven special game games have been played targeting the variable display of the second special symbol, or a maximum of 11 special game games have been played targeting the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol.

Jackpot D is a jackpot that is executed nine times (so-called nine rounds) to change the jackpot entry port to a second state that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the interval period between each round in jackpot D is set to 0.5 seconds for the first, second, and fourth through ninth rounds, with the interval period for the third round being set to 30 seconds. Furthermore, after the jackpot game state of jackpot D ends, time-saving control is executed in time-saving state B until a maximum of seven special game games have been executed targeting the variable display of the second special symbol, or until a maximum of 11 special game games have been executed targeting the variable display of the first and second special symbols.

Jackpot E is a jackpot that is executed nine times (so-called nine rounds) to change the jackpot entry port to a second state that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the interval period between each round in Jackpot E is set to 0.5 seconds for the first, second, and fourth through ninth rounds, with the interval period for the third round being set to 30 seconds. Furthermore, after the jackpot gaming state of Jackpot E ends, time-saving control is executed in time-saving state C2 until a maximum of 685 special game games have been executed targeting the variable display of the second special symbol, or until a maximum of 689 special game games have been executed targeting the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol.

As such, the interval period between the third round of jackpots C, E, and E is set to 30 seconds, and this feature unit 132SG can execute the promotion effect, described below, as an effect suggesting that the jackpot game will continue through the ninth round over those 30 seconds.

In addition, in each time-saving state, the probability of a "normal hit" increases, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole formed by variable winning ball device 6B. In other words, the occurrence of a second start winning makes it easier for the variable display of the second special symbol to be executed, making small hits more likely to occur than in the normal state. Therefore, in the time-saving state and the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times immediately after the time-saving state ends, a jackpot may occur as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, or a jackpot may occur when the game ball enters a V-shaped hole during a small hit game, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which jackpot game states are more likely to occur consecutively.

Furthermore, in time-saving state A after the end of jackpot play for jackpot A, the number of special games in which time-saving control targeting the second special symbol is executed is set to one, and therefore the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot or small jackpot for that one variable display of the second special symbol and any of the variable displays of the second special symbol based on up to four reserved memories that occur during that one variable display of the second special symbol (the total of the probability of a jackpot or small jackpot occurring in the total of five variable displays of the second special symbol mentioned above and the probability of a jackpot occurring when the game ball enters a V) is set to approximately 54%.

Furthermore, in the time-saving state after the end of jackpot play for jackpot D, the number of special games in which time-saving control targeting the second special symbol is executed is set to seven, so the percentage of variable display results in a jackpot or small jackpot for those seven variable displays of the second special symbol and any of the variable displays of the second special symbol based on up to four reserved memories that occur during those seven variable displays of the second special symbol (the sum of the percentage of jackpots or small jackpots occurring in the total of 11 variable displays of the second special symbol mentioned above and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball enters the V) is set to approximately 83%.

Furthermore, in time-saving state C2 after jackpot play on jackpot B or jackpot E ends, the number of special games in which time-saving control targeting the second special symbol is executed is set to 685, so the percentage of variable display results in a jackpot or small jackpot for those 685 variable displays of the second special symbol and for any of the variable displays of the second special symbol based on up to four reserved memories that occur during those 685 variable displays of the second special symbol (the sum of the percentage of jackpots or small jackpots occurring in the above total of 685 variable displays of the second special symbol and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball enters a V) is set to nearly 100%.

Note that while this feature section 132SG provides four types of jackpots, jackpot A through jackpot E, the present invention is not limited to this and there may be five or more types of jackpots, or three or fewer types.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 13 may be a backup RAM, partly or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a specified power supply board. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will be preserved for a specified period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply discharges and the backup power supply is no longer able to supply power). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game status, i.e., the control status of the game control means (such as a special chart process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid balls should be stored in the backup RAM. Data corresponding to the control status of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control status to its state before the power outage, etc., based on that data, when power is restored after a power outage, etc. Furthermore, the data corresponding to the control status and the data indicating the number of unpaid balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

This RAM 102 has a game control data holding area 132SG150, as shown in FIG. 20, which is an area for holding various data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area 132SG150 shown in FIG. 20 includes a special game reserve memory unit 132SG151, a regular game reserve memory unit 132SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 132SG152, a game control timer setting unit 132SG153, a game control counter setting unit 132SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 132SG155.

The special symbol reserve memory unit 132SG151 stores, in order of winning, reserved data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, resulting in a start winning (first start winning), but which have not yet started, and reserved data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, resulting in a start winning (second start winning), but which have not yet started.

As an example, the special chart reserve memory unit 132SG151 associates the order of winning (the order of game ball detection) at the first start winning slot or the second start winning slot with a reserve number, and stores numerical data indicating the start slot buffer value, the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 based on the first start condition being met when the game ball passes (enters), the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, as reserve data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "8"). The maximum number of reserve data items stored in response to winning at the first start winning slot and the maximum number of reserve data items stored in response to winning at the second start winning slot are each four.

The reserved data stored in the special symbol reserved memory unit 132SG151 thus indicates that the execution of a special symbol game using the first special symbol or a special symbol game using the second special symbol is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will occur based on the variable display results (special symbol display results) in these special symbol games.

In addition, the hold information (first hold information) based on the fulfillment of the first start condition when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first start entry port, and the hold information (second hold information) based on the fulfillment of the second start entry when the gaming ball passes (enters) the second start entry port, may be stored in separate hold memory units in association with hold numbers. Furthermore, when the hold information (first hold information) based on the fulfillment of the first start condition when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first start entry port, and the hold information (second hold information) based on the fulfillment of the second start entry when the gaming ball passes (enters) the second start entry port, are stored in separate hold memory units in association with hold numbers, one of the variable display based on the first hold information and the variable display based on the second hold memory information may be executed in priority over the variable display based on the other hold information.

The normal symbol reserve memory unit 132SG151C stores reserve information for normal symbol games in which a gaming ball has been detected by the gate switch 21 but which have not yet been started by the normal symbol display device 20. For example, the normal symbol reserve memory unit 132SG151C associates the gaming balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the gaming ball as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 132SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 132SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 132SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 132SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 132SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for calculating count values used to control the progress of play in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 may be provided with a random counter that counts some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them using software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, such as numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly in accordance with the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software that updates the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or software that updates the random count value by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 13 stores not only performance control programs but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared so that the performance control CPU 120 can make various judgments, decisions, and settings, as well as pattern data constituting various performance control patterns.

As an example, the ROM 121 stores a presentation control pattern table that contains multiple presentation control patterns that the presentation control CPU 120 uses to control presentation operations by various presentation devices (e.g., the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, decorative LEDs, presentation models, etc.). The presentation control patterns correspond to various presentation operations executed according to the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content of those operations. The presentation control pattern table may store, for example, presentation control patterns for when special charts are variable displayed, preview presentation control patterns, and various other presentation control patterns.

The special symbol variable display effect control pattern corresponds to multiple types of variation patterns and is composed of data indicating the control content of various effect operations, such as the variable display operation of decorative symbols, the effect display operation in reach effects, re-lottery effects, etc., or various effect display operations that do not involve the variable display of decorative symbols, during the period from when the special symbol begins to vary in the special symbol game to when the confirmed special symbol that results in the special symbol display is derived and displayed. The preview effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control content of the effect operation that becomes the preview effect executed in response to, for example, multiple preview patterns prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations executed depending on the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content.

The effect control patterns for variable display of special charts may include, for example, multiple types of reach effect control patterns that differ in the effect mode of each reach effect for each variable pattern that executes the reach effect.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 13 is provided with a performance control data holding area 132SG190, such as that shown in Figure 21(A), as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 132SG190 shown in Figure 21(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 132SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 132SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 132SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 132SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 132SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated in response to performance operation states, such as the display state of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, and performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 132SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 132SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 132SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 132SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 132SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 132SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 132SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature unit 132SG, data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 132SG194A, as shown in FIG. 21(B), is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 132SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 132SG194A has a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers "1" through "8") corresponding to the maximum total number of reserved memories for the first and second special symbol reserved memories (e.g., "8"), and a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer number "0") corresponding to the first special symbol being variably displayed. When a start winning occurs in the first or second start winning slot, a set of three commands is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12: a start slot winning designation command (first start slot winning designation command or second start slot winning designation command), a symbol designation command, and a reserved memory count notification command (first reserved memory count notification command or second reserved memory count notification command). The storage area of the start winning reception command buffer 132SG194A has a storage area (entry) reserved for associating the start winning designation command, pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and reserved memory count notification command, and storing the first special symbol reserved memory and the second special symbol reserved memory together.

When the start conditions are met and the variable display of the top-level reserved memory (buffer number "1") begins, the contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one by one, as described below. Furthermore, the contents of buffer number "0," which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start conditions are met, are cleared during the decorative pattern change stop process, which is executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, the start winning time reception command buffer 132SG194A of this feature unit 132SG has a memory area reserved for each buffer number for setting a hold display flag value indicating the display mode of the hold display or active display in the advance notice setting process (Figure 46) described below, and a memory area for setting a panel display flag value indicating the pattern (panel pattern) of the variable display corresponding panel or second special chart hold memory corresponding panel displayed on the image display device 5 in time-saving state A.

When a start win occurs, the performance control CPU 120 stores commands in the start win reception command buffer 132SG194A, starting from the first free entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number). When a start win occurs, commands from the start win designation command to the pending memory count notification command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when commands are received, the start win designation command, pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and pending memory count notification command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the end of the buffer numbers corresponding to the pending memories, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of decorative symbols begins, the commands stored in the start winning time receive command buffer 132SG194A shown in Figure 21(B) are deleted from the entry (buffer number "0") corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended, and the contents of the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to begin (entry corresponding to buffer number "1") and the contents of the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that just began are shifted. For example, when the variable display of decorative symbols ends in the storage state shown in Figure 21(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "1" are shifted to buffer number "0," the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1," and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3," "4," "5," etc. are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2," "3," "4," etc. Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing the commands related to the reserved memory currently being displayed.

In addition, in this feature section 132SG, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the command analysis process (S75), it determines whether or not it has received a start winning designation command, a designation command, or a pending memory count notification command, and if these commands have been received, it stores these commands as pending memories for each special symbol at the beginning of the free space in the start winning time reception command buffer 132SG194A.

(operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 22 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. Figure 23 is a flowchart showing the game control timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. Note that in the game control main process shown in Figure 22, the same process as the game control main process shown in Figure 4 is performed, and in the game control timer interrupt process shown in Figure 23, the same process as the game control timer interrupt process shown in Figure 5 is performed.

Figure 24 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process in this feature unit 132SG. In the special symbol process in this feature unit 132SG, the normal special symbol process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special symbol process, a determination is made as to whether to start the first or second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. Furthermore, in the normal special symbol process, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is to be a "big hit" or a "small hit," as well as the type of big hit if it is a "big hit," and the type of small hit if it is a "small hit," are determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special symbol process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a miss symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" and the normal special symbol processing ends. This feature unit 132SG stores the order in which the game balls enter the first and second start winning slots, and the conditions for starting the special symbol game are met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision value compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern to determine one of several types of fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result will be "big hit", "small hit", or "miss". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variable pattern specifies the execution time of the special symbol game (variable special symbol display time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol change process includes processes for making settings to change the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and processes for measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol variable display time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change reaches the special symbol variable display time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3." This special symbol stop process includes settings to stop the variation of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B and to stop and display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that will result in the display of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4." On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8." If the display result is a "miss," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0." If the display result is a "small hit" or "miss," the game state is also updated if the time-saving state is in effect and the end of the play count is confirmed. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-jackpot opening process of step S114 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "4." This pre-jackpot opening process includes processing to start the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and set the large prize opening to an open state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot." When the large prize opening is set to an open state, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door. At this time, the maximum opening period for the large prize opening to be set and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set, depending on the type of jackpot, for example. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5," and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "5." This jackpot opening process includes processes such as measuring the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 132SGS023. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state, processes such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door are executed, and then the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "6," and the jackpot opening process ends.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds that open the jackpot entry port has been executed has reached the set upper limit, and a process to set the jackpot game state to end when the upper limit has been reached. If the number of rounds executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5", while if the number of rounds executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7". Once the value of the special symbol process flag has been updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes waiting for the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending presentation, which serves as a presentation operation to notify the end of the jackpot game state, is executed, and making various settings to start special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0" and the jackpot end process ends.

Step 132: The pre-processing for opening a small win in SGS118 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "8". This pre-processing for opening a small win includes processing to set the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "9", and the pre-processing for opening a small win ends.

The small win opening process of step 132SGS119 is executed when the value of the special prize process flag is "9." This small win opening process includes measuring the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, determining whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 132SGS023, and determining whether game balls have been detected by the second count switch 132SG024. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special prize process flag is updated to "10" and the small win opening process ends.

The small win termination process of step 132SGS120 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "10." This small win termination process includes waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation announcing the end of the small win gaming state is executed has elapsed. Here, if a gaming ball is detected by the second count switch 132SG024 when the small win gaming state ends, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" and the small win processing ends. Furthermore, if a gaming ball is not detected by the second count switch 132SG024 when the small win gaming state ends, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small win gaming state was entered continues. When the waiting time at the end of the small win gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0" and the small win termination processing ends.

Figure 25 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process (S101) shown in Figure 24. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the first starting gate switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first starting gate formed by the winning ball device 6A, is on (132SGS101) based on a detection signal from the switch. If the first starting gate switch 22A is on (132SGS101; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the first special symbol reserved memory count, which is the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "4") (132SGS102). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved first symbol memories by, for example, reading the first reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 132SG154. When the number of reserved first special symbols in 132SGS102 is not the upper limit (132SGS102; N), for example, the value stored in the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 is set to "1" (132SGS103).

When the first start opening switch 22A in 132SGS101 is off (132SGS101; N) or when the number of reserved first special symbols in 132SGS102 has reached the upper limit (132SGS102; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second start opening switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is on (132SGS104) based on a detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B. If the second start opening switch 22B is on (132SGS104; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second special symbol reserved number, which is the number of reserved symbols for the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., the upper limit of "4") (132SGS105). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved second special symbols by, for example, reading the second reserved symbol count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved symbol count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 132SG154. When the second reserved symbol count in 132SGS105 is not the upper limit (132SGS105; N), for example, the value stored in the start buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 is set to "2" (132SGS106).

After executing either of the processes 132SGS103 or 132SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the value stored in the start port buffer, is updated by adding 1 (132SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1," the first reserved symbol count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2," the second reserved symbol count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is met. Furthermore, the second reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is met. At this time, the total reserved symbol count is also updated to increase by 1 (132SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 132SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the processing of 132SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 132SG154 (132SGS109). The numerical data indicating each of the extracted random numbers and the start opening buffer value are stored by being set as reserve information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special symbol reserve memory unit (132SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or a "small hit," and further to determine the type of big hit or small hit when the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern, including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 132SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode, including the variable display result and variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of 132SGS110, a setting for sending a start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is made (132SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1," the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, thereby setting up to send a first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2," the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, thereby setting up to send a second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 23 after the special symbol process processing has ended.

Following the processing of 132SGS111, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number determination process (132SGS112). Then, for example, by storing the storage address of the reserved memory number notification command table in ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the CPU 103 performs settings to send the reserved memory number notification command to the performance control board 12 (132SGS113). The reserved memory number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 23 after the special symbol process processing has ended.

After executing the processing of 132SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (132SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (Y in 132SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (132SGS115), and then processing of 2390SGS104 proceeds. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 132SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (132SGS116), and then the start winning processing ends. This ensures that processing based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect valid game ball start winnings.

Figure 26 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed by 132SGS112 in Figure 25 as a random number value determination process at the time of winning. In this feature unit 132SG, when the variable display of a special symbol or decorative symbol is initiated, the normal special symbol process (S110 in Figure 24) determines whether the special symbol display result (the variable display result of the special symbol) should be controlled as a "big hit" to a big hit game state or a "small hit" to a small hit game state. Furthermore, the variable pattern setting process (S111 in Figure 24) determines a variable pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. Separately from these determinations, when a game ball is detected in the starting winning slot (first starting winning slot or second starting winning slot), the CPU 103 executes the random number value determination process at S112 at the time of winning to determine whether a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol should be derived and displayed as the special symbol display result. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of a gaming ball entering the starting winning slot begins, in other words, before it is determined at the start of the variable display whether or not it will be a big hit or a small hit, it is determined that the special symbol display result will be a "big hit" or a "small hit," and based on this determination result, the presentation control CPU 120 and other devices will execute advance warnings such as panel display presentations and hold preview presentations, as described below.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 26, the CPU 103 first determines whether the game state is normal or time-saving (step 132SGS121). It then determines whether the set start opening buffer value is 1 (step 132SGS122a). If the start opening buffer value is 1, display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 18(A) is selected and the process proceeds to step 132SGS123a (step 132SGS122b). If the start opening buffer value is 2, display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 18(B) is selected and the process proceeds to step 132SGS123a (step 132SGS122c).

In step 132SGS123a, the CPU 103 compares the random number value MR1 extracted in step 132SGS109 with the selected display result determination table to determine whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range. If the random number value MR1 is outside the jackpot determination range, it determines whether the random number value MR1 is within the small jackpot determination range (step 132SGS123b).

In step 132SGS123b, if the random number value MR1 is outside the small win determination value range, i.e., if the variable display result is a miss, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a symbol designation command corresponding to the miss (step 132SGS126a). Then, it determines whether the start opening buffer value is 1 (step 132SGS126b). If the start opening buffer value is 1, if the game state is normal, it selects the first special symbol variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 29 (A). If the game state is either a time-saving state, it selects the first special symbol variation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 30 (A), and proceeds to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS126c).

Also, if the start port buffer value is 2, if the gaming state is time-saving state A, second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 31 (A) is selected; if the gaming state is time-saving state B, time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2, second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 32 (A) is selected; if the gaming state is time-saving state C2, time-saving state C2, or the eighth or subsequent variable display, second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table G shown in FIG. 29 (A) is selected, and proceed to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS126d).

Furthermore, in step 132SGS123b, if the random number value MR1 is within the small win determination value range, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a symbol designation command corresponding to a small win (step 132SGS127). Then, if the gaming state is time-saving state A, it selects second special symbol variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 31(C); if the gaming state is time-saving state B, time-saving state C1, or time-saving state C2, it selects second special symbol variation pattern determination table F shown in FIG. 32(C); or if the gaming state is normal state or time-saving state C2, it selects second special symbol variation pattern determination table I shown in FIG. 29(C), and proceeds to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS128).

Furthermore, in step 132SGS123a, if the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination value range, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a symbol designation command corresponding to a jackpot (step 132SGS129). Then, it determines whether the start port buffer value is 1 (step 132SGS130a). If the start port buffer value is 1, and the game state is normal, it selects first special symbol variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 29 (C). If the game state is either the time-saving state, it selects first special symbol variation pattern determination table E shown in FIG. 30 (B), and proceeds to step 132SGS131 (132SGS130b).

Also, if the start port buffer value is 2, when the game state is normal, if the game state is time-saving state A, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 31 (B) is selected; if the game state is time-saving state B, time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table E shown in Figure 32 (B) is selected; if the game state is normal or time-saving state C2, the eighth or subsequent variable display, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table J shown in Figure 33 (B) is selected, and proceed to step 132SGS131 (step 132SGS130c).

In step 132SGS131, the CPU 103 compares the selected fluctuation pattern determination table with the random number value MR3 extracted in step 132SGS109 to determine the fluctuation category from non-reach, super reach, or other (normal reach). Then, it sets up the transmission of a fluctuation category designation command (one of those shown in Figure 26 (B)) according to the determination result, and ends the random number value determination process when a win occurs (step 132SGS132).

The commands set for transmission in steps 132SGS124, 132SGS126a, 132SGS127, 132SGS129, and 132SGS132 are transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 23.

Figure 27 is a flowchart showing the normal special symbol processing (step S110) shown in Figure 24. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether there is any reserved memory in the special symbol reserved memory unit 132SGS151 (step 132SGS541). If there is no reserved memory in the special symbol reserved memory unit 132SGS151, demo display settings such as sending settings for a customer waiting demo designation command are made, and the normal special symbol processing ends (step 132SGS572). Note that the customer waiting demo designation command is sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control processing (see Figure 23).

If there is a reserved memory in the special chart reserved memory unit 132SGS151, the start port buffer value and random number values MR1 to MR3 are read and identified from the reserved number "1" in the special chart reserved memory unit 132SGS151 (step 132SGS542). The values of the number of reserved special charts to be displayed variably and the total number of reserved special charts are decremented by 1, and the contents of the special chart reserved memory unit 132SGS151 are shifted (step 132SGS543).

It also determines whether the start opening buffer value identified in step 132SGS542 is 1 (step 132SGS554a). If the start opening buffer value is 1, the variable display special designation buffer value is set to 1 (step 132SGS544b). If the start opening buffer value is 2, the variable display special designation buffer value is set to 2 (step 132SGS544c).

Next, a display result determination table is set according to the variable display special designation buffer value (step 132SGS555). The random number value MR1 read in step 132SGS542 is then compared with the display result determination table set in step 132SGS555 to determine whether the value of random number value MR1 is within the jackpot range (step 132SGS556). If the value of random number value MR1 is outside the jackpot range, it is further determined whether the value of random number value MR1 is within the small jackpot range (step 132SGS557). If the value of random number value MR1 is within the small jackpot range, i.e., if the variable display result is a small jackpot, a small jackpot flag is set (step 132SGS558). Then, a small win type determination table (see FIG. 18(E)) is selected (step 132SGS558a), and the small win type is determined by comparing the selected small win type determination table with the random number value MR2 read in step 132SGS542 (step 132SGS558b). A small win type buffer value corresponding to the determined small win type is then set, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS570 (step 132SGS558c). Note that if the value of the random number value MR1 is outside the range for a small win, i.e., if the variable display result is a miss, the process proceeds to step 132SGS570.

Furthermore, if the value of the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot range in step 132SGS556, that is, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is set (step 132SGS566). Then, a jackpot type determination table (see Figure 18(C) or Figure 18(D)) corresponding to the variable display special chart designation buffer is selected (step 132SGS567), and the jackpot type is determined by comparing the selected jackpot type determination table with the random number value MR1 read in step 132SGS542 (step 132SGS568). Then, a jackpot type buffer value corresponding to the determined jackpot type is set, and processing proceeds to step 132SGS570 (step 132SGS569).

In step 132SGS570, the CPU 103 determines the confirmed special symbol according to the variable display result. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value according to the variable pattern setting process, and the normal special symbol processing is terminated (step 132SGS571).

Figure 28 is a flowchart showing the variable pattern setting process (step S111) shown in Figure 24. In the variable pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special symbol (step 132SGS131). Whether the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special symbol can be determined, for example, by whether the variable display special symbol designation buffer value is 1. If it is the variable display of the first special symbol, a variable pattern determination table is selected from the variable pattern determination tables shown in Figures 29 and 30 according to the variable display result, game status, and number of reserved memories, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS135 (step 132SGS132).

For example, if the variable display result is a miss, the game state is normal, and the number of first special symbol reserved memories is two or less, first special symbol variation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 29 (A) is selected; if the variable display result is a miss, the game state is normal, and the number of first special symbol reserved memories is three or more, first special symbol variation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 29 (B) is selected; and if the variable display result is a jackpot, and the game state is normal, first special symbol variation pattern determination table C shown in Figure 29 (C) is selected.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is either a time-saving state, the first special symbol variation pattern determination table D shown in Figure 30 (A) is selected, and if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is either a time-saving state, the first special symbol variation pattern determination table E shown in Figure 30 (B) is selected.

Furthermore, if the variable display executed in step 132SGS131 is the variable display of the second special chart, a variable pattern determination table corresponding to the variable display result, game status, value of the time-saving status variable display count counter (number of variable displays in each time-saving status), etc. is selected from Figures 31 to 34, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS135 (step 132SGS134).

For example, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is time-saving state A, then the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 31 (A) is selected; if the variable display result is a big win and the game state is time-saving state A, then the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 31 (B) is selected; and if the variable display result is a small win and the game state is time-saving state A, then the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in Figure 31 (C) is selected.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is the 1st to 7th variable display and the 12th to 685th variable display in time-saving state B, time-saving state C1, or time-saving state C2, then variable pattern determination table D for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 32(A) is selected; if the variable display result is a big win and the game state is the 1st to 7th variable display and the 12th to 685th variable display in time-saving state B, time-saving state C1, or time-saving state C2, then variable pattern determination table E for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 32(B) is selected; and if the variable display result is a small win and the game state is the 1st to 7th variable display and the 12th to 685th variable display in time-saving state B, time-saving state C1, or time-saving state C2, then variable pattern determination table F for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 32(A) is selected.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is the normal state or the 8th to 10th variable display in the time-saving state C2, the second special symbol variable pattern determination table G shown in FIG. 33(A) is selected; if the variable display result is a big win and the game state is the normal state or the 8th to 10th variable display in the time-saving state C2, the second special symbol variable pattern determination table H shown in FIG. 33(A) is selected; and if the variable display result is a small win and the game state is the normal state or the 8th to 10th variable display in the time-saving state C2, the second special symbol variable pattern determination table I shown in FIG. 33(A) is selected.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is the 11th variable display in time-saving state C2, then the second special symbol variable pattern determination table J shown in Figure 34 (A) is selected; if the variable display result is a big win and the game state is the 11th variable display in time-saving state C2, then the second special symbol variable pattern determination table K shown in Figure 34 (B) is selected; and if the variable display result is a small win and the game state is the 11th variable display in time-saving state C2, then the second special symbol variable pattern determination table L shown in Figure 34 (C) is selected.

After executing step 132SGS132 or step 132SGS134a, the CPU 103 compares the selected variation pattern determination table with the random number value MR3 read in step 132SGS542 of the normal special symbol processing to determine the variation pattern (step 132SGS135). In the processing of step 132SGS135, the CPU 103 identifies a variation pattern that includes the random number value MR3 read in step 132SGS542 of the normal special symbol processing from the variation patterns included in the selected variation pattern determination table, and determines the identified variation pattern as the variation pattern that will execute the variable display.

Then, settings are made to start the variable display of the special symbol (step 132SGS136), and various commands for starting the variable display, such as a variable pattern specification command and a variable display result specification command according to the determined variable pattern, are set for transmission (step 132SGS137), and a variable display time timer according to the variable pattern is set (step 132SGS138). Finally, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value according to the special symbol variable processing, and the variable pattern setting process is terminated (step 132SGS139). The various commands set for transmission in step 132SGS137 are sent to the performance control board 12 in the command control process shown in FIG. 23.

In addition, with regard to the miss variation pattern in the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal control state, the allocation of random number value MR3 is set as shown in Figures 29 and 30, so the non-reach variation pattern is most likely to be determined, and the normal reach, Super Reach α, and Super Reach β variation patterns are least likely to be determined. On the other hand, with regard to the jackpot variation pattern in the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal control state, the allocation of random number value MR3 is set as shown in Figures 33 and 34, so the Super Reach β variation pattern is most likely to be determined, and the Super Reach α and normal reach variation patterns are least likely to be determined. For this reason, with regard to the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal state, when the variable display is executed in a non-reach variation pattern, the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (jackpot expectation probability) is lowest, and the normal reach, Super Reach α, and Super Reach β variation patterns are set to be most likely to be determined in that order. In other words, the shorter the special chart change time, the lower the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot, and the longer the special chart change time, the higher the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot.

Furthermore, among the multiple variation patterns, for variation patterns that execute a common reach effect, variation patterns that execute pseudo-consecutive effects are set to have a higher jackpot expectation. For example, for variation patterns that execute the reach effect of Super Reach β, variation patterns that execute pseudo-consecutive effects and variation patterns that do not execute pseudo-consecutive effects are provided, but the variation pattern of Super Reach β that executes pseudo-consecutive effects is set to have a higher jackpot expectation than the variation pattern of Super Reach β that does not execute pseudo-consecutive effects. Similarly, for variation patterns that execute the reach effect of Super Reach α, variation patterns that execute pseudo-consecutive effects and variation patterns that do not execute pseudo-consecutive effects are provided, but the variation pattern of Super Reach α that executes pseudo-consecutive effects is set to have a higher jackpot expectation than the variation pattern of Super Reach α that does not execute pseudo-consecutive effects. Furthermore, for variation patterns that execute the reach effect of normal Reach, variation patterns that execute pseudo-consecutive effects and variation patterns that do not execute pseudo-consecutive effects are provided, but the variation pattern of normal Reach that executes pseudo-consecutive effects is set to have a higher jackpot expectation than the variation pattern of normal Reach that does not execute pseudo-consecutive effects.

Figure 35 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) shown in Figure 24. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the symbol determination period timer described below is running (step 132SGS201). If the symbol determination period is not running, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B causes the stopped symbol of the special symbol to be derived and displayed (step 132SGS202), and sets up the transmission of a symbol determination command (step 132SGS203). The symbol determination command is transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in Figure 23.

The CPU 103 then determines whether the jackpot flag is set (step 132SGS204). If the jackpot flag is set, if any time-saving flags are set, the time-saving flags and other game state flags are cleared (step 132SGS205), and the value of the time-saving state variable display count counter is cleared (step 132SGS206). Furthermore, depending on the type of jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the transmission settings for the hit start 1 designation command or the hit start 2 designation command, and sets the transmission settings for the game state background designation command indicating that the game state is normal, and then proceeds to step 132SGS242 (steps 132SGS207, step 132SGS208). The hit start designation command and game state background designation command are transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 23.

Also, if the symbol determination period timer is running in step 132SGS201, the CPU 103 decrements the symbol determination period timer by 1 (step 132SGS209) and determines whether the symbol determination period timer has timed out (step 132SGS210). If the symbol determination period timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 terminates the special symbol stop processing. If the symbol determination period timer has timed out, the CPU 103 further determines whether the derivatively displayed stopped symbol is a losing symbol (step 132SGS211). If the derivatively displayed stopped symbol is a losing symbol, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing and terminates the special symbol stop processing (step 132SGS212). If the derivatively displayed stopped symbol is not a losing symbol, the CPU 103 determines whether the derivatively displayed stopped symbol is a jackpot symbol (step 132SGS213). If the derived and displayed stopped pattern is a jackpot pattern, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing and the special pattern stop processing is terminated (step 132 SGS214); if the derived and displayed stopped pattern is not a jackpot pattern, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small jackpot release pre-processing and the special pattern stop processing is terminated (step 132 SGS215).

Also, if the jackpot flag is not set in step 132SGS204, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the total time-saving count counter is 1 or greater (step 132SGS216). The total time-saving count counter is set to the sum of the maximum number of time-saving control cycles for the first special symbol and the maximum number of time-saving control cycles for the second special symbol in the time-saving state (either "5," "11," or "689").

If the value of the total time-saving count counter is 1 or greater, the value of the total time-saving count counter is decremented by 1 (step 132SGS217). Furthermore, it is determined whether the variable display special symbol designation buffer value is 1, i.e., whether the completed variable display is the variable display of the first special symbol (step 132SGS218). If the variable display special symbol designation buffer value is 1, the process proceeds to step 132SGS224. If the variable display special symbol designation buffer value is 2 (the completed variable display is the variable display of the second special symbol), the value of the second special symbol time-saving count counter is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS224 (step 132SGS219). The second special symbol time-saving count counter is a counter that is set to the maximum number of time-saving control times for the second special symbol (either "1," "7," or "685") during time-saving mode.

In step 132SGS224, the CPU 103 determines whether any time-saving flags are set (whether the system is controlled to any time-saving state). If no time-saving flags are set, the process proceeds to step 132SGS240. If any time-saving flags are set, the process further determines whether the value of the total time-saving count counter has reached 0, i.e., whether the variable display of the maximum number of time-saving control cycles has ended in the controlled time-saving state (step 132SGS225). If the value of the total time-saving count counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step 132SGS240. If the value of the total time-saving count counter is 0, the process clears the set time-saving flag (step 132SGS226), clears the value of the total time-saving count counter, and proceeds to step 132SGS240 (step 132SGS227).

In step 132SGS240, the CPU 103 determines whether the small hit flag is set. If the small hit flag is set, it sets the transmission of the hit start 3 designation command or the hit 4 start designation command according to the type of small hit, and proceeds to step 132SGS242. The hit start 3 designation command and the hit 4 start designation command are transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CP 103 executing the command control process shown in Figure 23. If the small hit flag is not set, it proceeds to step 132SGS242.

Then, in step 132SGS242, the CPU 103 sets the symbol determination period timer to a value corresponding to the symbol determination period (a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds in the case of this feature unit 132SG), and sets the transmission of a symbol determination period designation command corresponding to the set value. Furthermore, it sets the transmission of a game state background designation command corresponding to the game state, and ends the special symbol stop processing (step 132SGS243).

The symbol determination period designation command and game status background designation command are sent to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in Figure 23.

Figure 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in S119 of Figure 24 as the small win release processing. In the small win release processing, the CPU 103 first decrements the value of the release time timer by 1 (132SGS281). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the release time timer has timed out (132SGS282).

If the opening timer has timed out, the process proceeds to 132SGS293. If the opening timer has not timed out, the process determines whether it is time to open the large prize opening (132SGS283). If it is time to open the large prize opening, the CPU 103 controls the large prize opening to an open state by activating solenoid 132SG083 (132SGS284). Then, the process sets up the transmission of a command specifying that the large prize opening is open according to the round (132SGS285), and the process proceeds to 132SGS286. The command specifying that the large prize opening is open, set up for transmission in 132SGS285, is sent to the performance control board 12 by the command control process described above. If it is not time to open the large prize opening, the process proceeds to 132SGS286 without passing through 132SGS284 and 132SGS285.

In 132SGS286, the CPU 103 determines whether it is time to close the large prize opening (132SGS286). If it is time to close the large prize opening, the CPU 103 activates solenoid 132SG083 to control the large prize opening to a closed state (132SGS287). Then, it sets the transmission of a command to specify when the large prize opening is to be opened according to the round (132SGS288), and proceeds to 132SGS289. The command to specify when the large prize opening is open, set for transmission in 132SGS288, is transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the command control process described above. If it is not time to close the large prize opening, it proceeds to 132SGS289 without passing through 132SGS287 and 132SGS288.

In step 132SGS289, the CPU 103 determines whether the second count switch 132SG024 has been turned on (132SGS289). If the second count switch 132SG024 is not on, the small win release process is terminated. If the second count switch 132SG024 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the V winning flag, which indicates that the second count switch 132SG024 has already been turned on, i.e., that the gaming ball has passed through the second count switch 132SG024, has been set (132SGS290). If the V winning flag is set, the small win release process is terminated. If the V winning flag is not set, the CPU 103 sets the V winning flag (132SGS291).

Then, the CPU 103 sets up the transmission of a V winning notification command to the performance control board 12 (132SGS292). Note that the V winning notification command is transmitted to the performance control board 12 in the command control process described above.

Then, in 132SGS293, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "10," which corresponds to the small win end processing (S120) (132SGS293), and ends the small win release processing.

Figure 37 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed by 132SGS120 in Figure 24 as small win end processing. During small win end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the small win end display timer is operating (132SGS301). If the small win end display timer is not operating (132SGS301; N), the small win flag is cleared (132SGS302) and a win end designation command corresponding to the small win is set to be sent to the performance control board 12 (132SGS303). The win end designation command is sent to the performance control board 12 during the command control processing described above. Then, the small win end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the small win end display time (132SGS304), and the small win end processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the small win end display timer is running, the value of the small win end display timer is decremented by 1 (132SGS305). Then, it is determined whether the small win end display time has elapsed, that is, whether the small win end display timer has timed out (132SGS306). If the small win end display time has not elapsed, the CPU 103 determines whether the second count switch 132SG024 has been turned on (132SGS307). If the second count switch 132SG024 has not been turned on, the small win end processing is terminated. If the second count switch 132SG024 has been turned on, it determines whether the V winning flag has been set, indicating that the second count switch 132SG024 has already been turned on, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the second count switch 132SG024 (132SGS308). If the V prize flag is set, the small win end process ends; if the V prize flag is not set, the V prize flag is set (132SGS309).

Then, the CPU 103 sets up the transmission of a V winning notification command to the effect control board 12 (132SGS310) and ends the small win end processing. Note that the V winning notification command is sent to the effect control board 12 during the command control processing described above.

Also, when the small win end display time has elapsed in 132SGS306, CPU 103 determines whether the V prize flag is set (132SGS311). If the V prize flag is set, CPU 103 clears the V prize flag and sets the big win flag (132SGS312, 132SGS313). Then, CPU 103 determines the big win type from "Big Win C" to "Big Win E" based on the type of small win that resulted in the V prize (132SGS314). As shown in FIG. 18(E), if the small win type resulting from the V winning is a "small win A," the jackpot type is determined to be a "jackpot C." If the small win type resulting from the V winning is a "small win B," the jackpot type is determined to be a "jackpot D." If the small win type resulting from the V winning is a "small win C," the jackpot type is determined to be a "jackpot E." The determined jackpot type is stored in accordance with the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value in the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 132SG155 (132SGS315).

In addition, the time-saving flag and the time-saving state variable display count counter are cleared (steps 132SGS316, 132SGS317), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which corresponds to the pre-big win release processing (S114) (132SGS318), and the small win end processing is terminated.

In other words, this feature unit 132SG allows the game ball to pass through the second count switch 132SG024 not only during small win play, but also during the period after the small win play ends until the small win end display time has elapsed. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the big win slot just before the small win play ends, the game ball will pass through the second count switch 132SG024, and the big win play will be executed after the small win end processing has ended.

If the V prize flag is not set in 132SGS311, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" (132SGS319), which corresponds to the normal special symbol processing (S110), and ends the small win end processing.

Figure 38 is a flowchart of the jackpot end processing shown in Figure 24. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot end display timer is running (step 103SGS321). If the jackpot end display timer is not running, the CPU 103 clears the jackpot flag (step 132SGS322a) and sets the transmission of a jackpot end designation command corresponding to the jackpot type (step 132SGS322b). The jackpot end designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 12 in the command control processing described above. The CPU 103 then sets the jackpot end display timer to a value corresponding to the display time during which the jackpot end display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time), and ends the jackpot end processing (step 132SGS322c).

Also, if the jackpot end display timer is running in step 132SGS321, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 132SGS323), and it is determined whether the jackpot end display timer has timed out (step 132SGS324). If the jackpot end display timer has not timed out, the jackpot end processing is terminated. If the jackpot end display timer has timed out, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot A (step 132SGS325). If the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot A, the second special time-saving count counter is set to "1" and the total time-saving count counter is set to "5" (steps 132SGS326, 132SGS327). Then, the time-saving A flag is set, indicating that the game is in time-saving state A, and the process proceeds to step 132SGS339 (step 132SGS327a).

Furthermore, if the jackpot type of the jackpot in question is not jackpot A, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot in question is jackpot B or jackpot E (step 132SGS328). If the jackpot type of the jackpot in question is jackpot B or jackpot E, the second special chart time-saving count counter is set to "685" and the total time-saving count counter is set to "689" (steps 132SGS329, 132SGS330). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot in question is jackpot B (step 132SGS328). If the jackpot type is jackpot B, the time-saving C1 flag is set to indicate that the time-saving state is C1, and proceed to step 132SGS339b (step 132SGS330a). If the jackpot type is jackpot E, the time-saving C2 flag is set to indicate that the time-saving state is C2, and proceed to step 132SGS339b (step 132SGS330b).

Also, if the jackpot type of the jackpot is not jackpot B or jackpot E, the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot D, the second special time-saving count counter is set to "7", and the total time-saving count counter is set to "11" (steps 132SGS335 and 132SGS336). Then, the time-saving B flag is set, indicating that the game is in time-saving state B, and the program proceeds to step 132SGS339b (step 132SGS336a).

In step 132SGS339b, the CPU 103 sets up the transmission of a game status background designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot that was executed (step 132SGS339b). The game status background designation command is transmitted to the presentation control board 12 in the command control process described above. The CPU 103 also stores the game status background designation command that has been set up for transmission (step 132SGS340), and terminates the jackpot termination process.

(Major operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 39. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 39 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first performs a startup preparation display process (step 132SGS70) to display a startup preparation display on the image display device 5, and then performs a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting registers for the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. The initial operation control process also executes an initial operation control process (step S72). The initial operation control process executes control for initializing the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to its origin position and performing predetermined operation checks.

In this embodiment, the terms "display" and "image" are sometimes used, for example, the "boot preparation display" described in the embodiment is referred to as a "boot preparation image" in the drawings. However, since "display" and "image" are the same thing, "display" may also be referred to as "image" and "image" as "display."

Furthermore, the initialization process of step S71 prevents the startup preparation display displayed by the startup preparation display process of step SGS70 from being initialized. Furthermore, by displaying the startup preparation display, it is possible to quickly know that power has been supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and to confirm that the image display device 5 can display the display normally.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, the register settings of the CTC. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns on. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 automatically disables the interrupt. However, if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable command (DI command). In response to the interrupt due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a specified command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, the performance control command is captured from a specified input port included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The captured performance control command is stored in a performance control command reception buffer, for example, provided in RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then enables interrupts and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read effect control commands are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a specified area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 may be turned on, so that the effect control process process can confirm which effect control command was received and the content specified by the effect control command. Furthermore, if the effect control command specifies the game status, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game status.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, a power outage recovery display process (step 132SGS75b) is executed to display a power outage recovery display on the image display device 5 based on the power outage recovery designation command received from the CPU 103, and an initial operation control process (step 132SGS75c) is executed to execute the initial operation of each movable body when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started.

The startup preparation display process in this characteristic unit 132SG includes processing to set a cold start flag indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up with a cold start when it is determined that a power-on command has been received, and the power outage recovery display process in this characteristic unit 132SG includes processing to set a hot start flag indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up with a hot start when it is determined that a power outage recovery command has been received.

Furthermore, after the initial operation control processing, the performance control process processing is executed (step S76). The performance control process processing controls the operation of various performance devices, such as the display operation of performance images in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. Furthermore, judgments, decisions, and settings are made regarding the control content of performance operations using various performance devices in accordance with performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. Furthermore, after the effect random number value update process (step S77), a demo effect control process (step S78) for executing a demo effect on the pachinko gaming machine 1, a volume/light intensity adjustment process (step 132SGS79) for adjusting the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light intensity of each LED, and a background image update process (step 132SGS80) for updating the background image displayed on the image display device 5 based on the background image designation command received from the CPU 103 to a background image corresponding to the received background image designation command are executed. Then, processing returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to step S73.

In the demo performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer, such as a customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer, until the customer waiting demo performance begins based on receiving a customer waiting demo designation command, and may start the customer waiting demo performance when the timer expires without the variable display starting. If the variable display starts while the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer is operating or while the customer waiting demo performance is being executed, the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer may be cleared, the customer waiting demo performance may be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

As shown in FIG. 40, the initial operation control process broadly includes two processes: an origin placement control process (step 132SGS100) that places the movable bodies (above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, above-frame movable body 132SG101) provided on the pachinko gaming machine 1 at their respective origin positions, and an operation confirmation control process (step 132SGS200) that confirms the operation of these movable bodies (above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, above-frame movable body 132SG101).

Figure 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in the origin placement control processing in Figure 40. In the origin placement control processing shown in Figure 41, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the origin operation period timer is counting (step 132SGS401). If the origin operation period timer is not operating, it further determines whether the startup origin placement control completed flag is set (step 132SGS402). If the startup origin placement control completed flag is not set, it determines whether it is time to start a demo performance (step 132SGS403). Whether it is time to start a demo performance can be determined by, for example, determining whether the process timer for the demo performance is operating or whether the value of the process timer for the demo performance is a value corresponding to the start timing of the demo performance.

If it is not the start timing of the demo performance, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the variable display (132SGS404). Whether it is the start timing of the variable display can be determined, for example, by determining whether the process timer for the variable display of the decorative pattern is running, and whether the value of the process timer for the variable display of the decorative pattern is a value corresponding to the start timing of the variable display. If it is not the start timing of the variable display, the origin placement control process is terminated.

Then, if the start-up origin placement control completed flag is not set in step 132SGS402, if it is not the start timing of the demo performance in step 132SGS403, or if it is not the start timing of the variable display in step 132SGS404, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the detection status of the origin position sensor (origin position sensor 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) of the movable body to be controlled (step 132SGS410), and determines whether there is a movable body that is not detected by the origin position sensor (step 132SGS411). If there are any movable bodies not detected by the origin position sensor, these movable bodies not detected by the origin position sensor (non-detected movable bodies) are identified (step 132SG412), and movement control of the non-detected movable bodies toward the origin is initiated by means such as driving a motor corresponding to the non-detected movable body (step 132SGS413), and the process proceeds to step 132SGS414. Note that if there are no movable bodies not detected by the origin position sensor in step 132SGS411, i.e., if all movable bodies are positioned at their respective origin positions, the process proceeds to step 132SGS414 without executing steps 132SGS412 and 132SGS413.

In step 132SGS414, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the detected movable body (the movable body located at the origin position). Then, it sets the detection operation process data for the detected movable body (step 132SGS415), starts the timer count of the detection operation process timer, and starts operation control of the movable body (detected movable body), as well as display control of the image display device 5, sound output control of speakers 8L and 8Rk, and light emission control of each LED (step 132SGS416). Furthermore, it starts the timer count of the origin operation period timer, and ends the origin placement control process (step 132SGS417).

Also, if the origin operation period timer is counting in step 132SGS401, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the values of both the detection operation process timer and the origin operation period timer (step 132SGS420). It then determines whether the subtracted origin operation period timer has timed out (step 132SGS421). If the subtracted origin operation period timer has not timed out, it controls the operation based on the process data corresponding to the subtracted detection operation process timer value, and ends the origin placement control process (step 132SGS422).

Also, if the origin operation period timer has expired in step 132SGS421, the operation of each movable body is stopped (step 132SGS423), and the detection status of the origin position sensors (origin position sensors 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) of each movable body to be controlled is identified (step 132SGS424). It is then determined whether there are any movable bodies not detected by the origin position sensors (step 132SGS425).

If there are any movable bodies that are not detected by the origin position sensor, these movable bodies that are not detected by the origin position sensor (non-detected movable bodies) are identified (step 132SG426), and if the startup origin placement control completed flag is not set, the flag is set and the origin placement control process ends (step 132SGS427). Note that if there are no movable bodies that are not detected by the origin position sensor, the process of step 132SGS427 is executed and the origin placement control process ends.

Figures 42 and 43 are flowcharts showing an example of the processing executed in the operation confirmation control processing in Figure 40. As mentioned above, a cold start in this characteristic section 132SG refers to the pachinko gaming machine 1 being powered on with the clear switch 92 pressed down, i.e., the initialization processing (step S6) being executed in the game control main processing when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up. A hot start in this characteristic section 132SG refers to the pachinko gaming machine 1 being powered on with the clear switch 92 not pressed down, i.e., the recovery processing (step S4) being executed in the game control main processing when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up.

In the operation confirmation control process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the post-confirmation operation execution flag is set (step 132SGS501). If the post-confirmation operation execution flag is not set, it determines whether the operation confirmation execution flag is set (step 132SGS502). If the operation confirmation execution flag is not set, it determines whether the operation confirmed flag is set (step 132SGS503).

If the operation confirmation flag is set, the operation confirmation control process is terminated. If the operation confirmation flag is not set, it is further determined whether the startup origin placement control flag is set (step 132SGS504). If the startup origin placement control flag is not set, the operation confirmation control process is terminated. If the startup origin placement control flag is set, the operation confirmation in progress flag is set (step 132SGS505), and it is determined whether an undetected movable object is stored (step 132SGS506). If an undetected movable object is not stored, proceed to step 132SGS508. If an undetected movable object is stored, the operation of the undetected movable object is restricted before proceeding to step 132SGS508 (step 132SGS507).

In step 132SGS508, the presentation control CPU 120 identifies the startup type (whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started as a cold start or a hot start) and sets the operation confirmation process data (upper order) corresponding to the startup type. Furthermore, in step 132SGS508, it identifies whether the cold start flag or the hot start flag is set, and if the cold start flag is set, it identifies the startup type as a cold start and sets the operation confirmation process data (upper order) corresponding to the cold start; and if the hot start flag is set, it identifies the startup type as a hot start and sets the operation confirmation process data (upper order) corresponding to the hot start.

Then, the operation confirmation process timer (upper) starts counting, and the operation control of the movable body, display control of the image display device 5, sound output control from speakers 8L and 8R, and light emission control of each LED are started, and the operation confirmation control process ends (step 132SGS509).

If the operation confirmation in progress flag is set in step 132SGS502, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the operation confirmation process timer (upper) (step 132SGS510) and identifies the process data corresponding to the value of the operation confirmation process timer after the subtraction (step 132SGS511). It then determines whether the identified process data is completion data (step 132SGS512). If the identified process data is not completion data, it further determines whether the identified process data is data corresponding to the performance position (step 132SGS513). If the identified process data is not data corresponding to the performance position, it proceeds to step 132SGS515. If the identified process data is data corresponding to the performance position, it stores the performance results of the performance position sensor of the corresponding movable body and then proceeds to step 132SGS515 (step 132SGS514).

In step 132SGS515, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the process switching flag is set. If the process switching flag is set, the operation confirmation control process is terminated. If the process switching flag is not set, the CPU 120 further determines whether it is time to start the target variable display in which the movable body performance will be executed (step 132SGS516). If it is not time to start the target variable display in which the movable body performance will be executed, the CPU 120 controls the operation of the movable body, the display image on the image display device 5, the sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, and the illumination of each LED based on the process data identified in step 132SGS511, and terminates the operation confirmation control process (step 132SGS517).

Furthermore, if it is the start timing of the target variable display in which the movable body effect is executed, the activation type (whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was activated by a cold start or a hot start) is identified, and the lower-level switching control type associated with the switching control table shown in FIG. 44 is identified according to the identified activation type (step 132SGS518).

For example, as shown in FIG. 44, if the identified startup type is a cold start, image display control on the image display device 5 and LED light emission control are identified as the lower-level switching control types; if the identified startup type is a hot start, image display control on the image display device 5 and sound output control from speakers 8L and 8R are identified as the lower-level switching control types.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control to switch the control process data corresponding to the lower-level switching control type to lower-level process data among the process data identified in step 132SGS518 (step 132SGS219) and sets the process switching flag (step 132SGS520). It also executes control based on the non-switched process data among the process data identified in step 132SGS218, and terminates the operation confirmation control processing (step 132SGS521).

Also, in step 132SGS512, if the process data identified in step 132SGS511 is not completion data, the performance control CPU 120 stores the detected positions of the origin position sensors (origin position sensors 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) of each movable body (step 132SGS530), and identifies malfunctioning movable bodies from the detection results of the performance position sensors (performance position sensors 132SG124, 132SG134, 132SG104, 635D) and the origin position sensors (origin position sensors 132SG123, 132SG133, 132SG103, 635C) and stores them as operation-restricted movable bodies (step 132SGS531). Furthermore, the operation check in progress flag is cleared (step 132SGS532), and it is determined whether the process switching in progress flag is set (step 132SGS533).

If the process switching flag is not set, the operation confirmation flag is set (step 132SGS534), and control is executed to switch all control process data to performance control process data (lower), terminating the operation confirmation control processing (step 132SGS535). If the process switching flag is set, the process switching flag is cleared (step 132SGS536), and if the target type is a cold start, control is executed to switch the sound output control process data to performance control process data (lower) (step 132SGS536a). The chance button and on-board movable objects are identified as the movable objects to be operated, and post-confirmation operation process data (upper) is set (step 132SGS537). The post-confirmation operation process timer (upper) is started to count, and operation control and LED illumination control of the chance button and on-board movable objects are initiated (step 132SGS538). The post-confirmation operation execution flag is set, terminating the operation confirmation control processing (step 132SGS539).

Also, if the post-confirmation operation execution flag is set in step 132SGS501, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the post-confirmation operation process timer (upper) (step 132SGS540) and identifies the process data corresponding to the post-confirmation operation process timer value after the subtraction (step 132SGS541). It then determines whether the identified process data is completed data (step 132SGS542).

If the identified process data is not completion data, it is further determined whether the identified process data corresponds to a presentation position (step 132SGS543). If the identified process data is not data corresponding to a presentation position, the operation confirmation control process is terminated. If the identified process data is data corresponding to a presentation position, the detection results of the presentation position sensors (protruding position sensor 635D and presentation position sensor 132SG124) of the chance button 631B and on-board movable body 32A are stored, and the operation confirmation control process is terminated (step 132SGS544).

Furthermore, if the identified process data is completion data, the performance control CPU 120 stores the detection results of the origin position sensors (origin position sensor 635C and origin position sensor 132SG123) of the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A (step 132SGS545), and determines whether the chance button 631B is located at the origin position (step 132SGS546). If the chance button 631B is located at the origin position, the process proceeds to step 132SGS548; if the chance button 631B is not located at the origin position, the process stores the chance button 631B as a movement-restricted movable body and proceeds to step 132SGS548 (step 132SGS547).

In step 132SGS548, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position. If the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, the process proceeds to step 132SGS550. If the on-board movable body 32A is not located at the origin position, the on-board movable body 32A is stored as a movement-restricted movable body and the process proceeds to step 132SGS550 (step 132SGS549).

In step 132SGS550, the performance control CPU 120 executes control to switch the process data for movable body control and LED light emission control to performance control process data (lower level). It then clears the operation check execution flag and terminates the operation check control process (step 132SGS551).

By executing the origin placement control process and operation confirmation control process as described above, as shown in Figure 45 (A), during the execution period of switching control when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by a cold start, movable body control, sound output control, and LED light emission control are executed based on the operation confirmation process data (higher order), and display control is executed based on the presentation control process data (lower order).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 45 (B), during the execution period of switching control when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start, movable body control and LED light emission control are executed based on the operation confirmation process data (higher order), and display control and sound output control are executed based on the presentation control process data (lower order).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 45(C), during the execution period of post-confirmation operation control, operation control of the chance button 631B and on-board movable body (movable body control) and LED light emission control are executed based on post-confirmation operation process data (higher order), and display control and sound output control are executed based on performance control process data (lower order).

Figure 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 39 as the presentation control process. In the presentation control process shown in Figure 46, the presentation control CPU 120 first executes the advance notice setting process in this feature unit 132SG, based on the presentation control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the initial winning, to execute a hold display notice effect as an advance notice, which suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot based on the display mode of the hold display, and a panel image is displayed on the image display device 5 for one variable display of the second special pattern in time-saving state A and four variable displays of the second special pattern immediately thereafter, and the panel effect suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot at different rates depending on the display mode of these panel images. Furthermore, if it is decided to execute a pending display preview effect, a value corresponding to the determined display mode of the pending display is set as the pending display flag value corresponding to the pending memory to be displayed in the start winning time reception command buffer 132SGS194A, and if it is decided to execute a panel display effect, a value corresponding to the determined display mode of the panel display is set as the panel display flag value corresponding to the pending memory to be displayed in the start winning time reception command buffer 132SGS194A, thereby starting the display of these pending displays and panel displays (see Figure 21 (B)).

The effect control CPU 120 also executes a result effect execution process (step 132SGS162). In the result effect execution process, for example, the number of jackpot games that have occurred and the number of prize balls paid out since the first win occurs are counted, and when the last variable display in the time-saving state (time-saving state A is the four variable displays immediately after the end of the time-saving state) ends and control is returned to the normal state (during the pattern determination period), processing is performed to execute a result effect that displays the number of jackpot games that have occurred and the number of prize balls paid out on the image display device 5. Note that, in this feature unit 132SG, when controlled to time-saving state C2, there are exceptional cases in which a result effect is executed from the pattern determination period of the seventh variable display of the second special chart to the eleventh variable display.

The effect control CPU 120 also executes a break-in effect execution process (step 132SGS163). The break-in effect execution process executes a break-in effect that notifies players that the game has been controlled to a time-saving state, for example, from the ending effect of the jackpot game until the first variable display after the jackpot game.

After executing the processing of step 132SGS163, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processing steps S170 to S175, step 132SGS176, or step 132SGS177, depending on the value of the performance process flag stored in RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". This variable display start setting process determines the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (confirmed decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various effects such as reach effects and various preview effects will be executed, their mode, and the start timing of execution, based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) that reflects the determined results is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing of step S172 is executed when the effect process flag value is "2." In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, drive the movable body 32, output audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to an instruction (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13, and turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs in response to an instruction (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. After performing these effect controls, the CPU 120 stops the display of the final decorative pattern, which is the result of the display of the decorative pattern, for example, in response to reading an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the effect control pattern or receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the stop display of the final decorative pattern. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a static state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3" and the variable display effect processing ends.

The special symbol hit waiting process of step S173 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". During this special symbol hit waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 stops the variable display of the decorative symbol for the pattern confirmation period indicated by the symbol confirmation command, based on receiving a command (one of the first symbol confirmation command, second symbol confirmation command, third symbol confirmation command, or fourth symbol confirmation command) that specifies the static display of the confirmed decorative symbol received during the variable display performance process.

Furthermore, at the end of the pattern determination period, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether a presentation control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "6", which corresponds to the small win presentation processing. Furthermore, if a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has not been received and the waiting time for receiving that command has elapsed, it is determined that the display result in the special symbol game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to its initial value of "0". Once the value of the presentation process flag has been updated, the special symbol hit waiting process ends.

The jackpot presentation processing of step S174 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "6." In this jackpot presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern, etc., corresponding to the presentation content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. Furthermore, in the jackpot presentation processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the end of the jackpot gaming state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5," which corresponds to the ending presentation processing, and the jackpot presentation processing ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. The presentation process flag value is then updated to its initial value of "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

The small win presentation processing of step 132SGS176 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "6". During this small win presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern, etc., corresponding to the presentation content in the small win gaming state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win gaming state based on the set content. Furthermore, during the small win presentation processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the end of the small win gaming state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "7", which corresponds to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation processing is terminated.

The small win end presentation processing of step 132SGS177 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "7". In this small win end presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. The presentation process flag value is then updated to its initial value of "0", and the small win end presentation processing is terminated.

Figure 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process shown in Figure 46. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the variable display start command reception flag is set, that is, whether the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command has been received (step 132SGS601). If the variable display start command reception flag is set, the various command data stored in association with buffer numbers "1" to "8" of the special chart reserve memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 132SG194A is shifted up by one buffer number (step 132SGS602). Note that the contents of buffer number "0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased. Furthermore, if the variable display start command reception flag is not set, the variable display start setting process is terminated. After executing step 132SGS602, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 132SGS605) and determines the decorative pattern to be stopped according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (step 132SGS606).

The effect control CPU 120 then executes a remaining time-saving count display process (step 132SGS608) for displaying on the image display device 5 the remaining number of time-saving controls in the time-saving state (remaining time-saving counts), a time-saving end countdown display process (step 132SGS609) for displaying on the image display device 5 a countdown of the remaining number of times until the time-saving control ends (also called a countdown effect or time-saving end countdown) when the remaining number of time-saving controls in the time-saving state reaches a predetermined number, and a variable display preview effect determination process (step 132SGS610) for executing a variable display preview effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot during the variable display.

Then, the presentation control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern, game status, and variable display result (step 132SGS611) and starts the process timer (step 132SGS612).

In each process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the lever body 631A and chance button 631B are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Note that, as described below, this characteristic unit 132SG illustrates an example in which the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of time-saving plays in the time-saving state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to either time-saving state B, time-saving state C2, time-saving state B, or time-saving state C2, and power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to a power outage or the like during variable display, the display of the remaining number of time-saving plays may not resume during the variable display even if power is restored, but may resume at the start of the next variable display (when the value of the time-saving play counter is updated). Also, even when power supply is stopped while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to either time-saving state B, time-saving state C2, time-saving state B, or time-saving state C2, but there is no reserved memory and variable display is not being executed (during customer waiting mode), the display of the remaining number of time-saving plays may not resume even if power is restored, but may resume at the start of the next variable display or from the variable display after the value of the time-saving play counter is updated.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and the operation unit (chance button 631B, etc.)) in accordance with the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, and operation unit control execution data 1) (132SGS613). For example, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the on/off of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this feature section 132SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display so that decorative patterns are variably displayed according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one with the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may also select a variation pattern to use from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern specification command (132SGS614). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (132SGS615). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Each time the predetermined time elapses, the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display status of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (S172) (132SGS616).

In addition, during the variable display performance processing, the values of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are each set to -1. Then, control of the performance device is executed according to the value of the process timer, the variable display of the decorative pattern is realized as described above according to the value of the variable display control timer, the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped according to the value of the variable display time timer, and the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value according to the special pattern hit waiting processing (S173).

(Flow of the performance)
Next, the flow of the variable display effects in this feature section 132SG will be explained. First, as shown in FIG. 48, when the game state is normal, the progress of the variable display of the first special symbol starts the reach effect of the super reach effect, and after a predetermined period has elapsed, an operation prompt image prompting the player to operate the chance button 631B is displayed on the image display device 5 as part of the reach effect (X1 to X5). At this time, if the variable display result is a jackpot, when the player operates the chance button 631B or the operation acceptance period for the chance button 631B ends, a movable body effect is executed in which the under-board movable body 32B operates as part of the reach effect, and then the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a jackpot (X6 to X10). After that, the image display device 5 displays an information image informing the player that the variable display result has become a jackpot, and then a right hit information is displayed to inform the player that the jackpot game state is a state in which the game balls are shot toward the right game area to make them enter the big prize slot, and a round effect during the round game is displayed (X11 to X13).

If the jackpot game is a jackpot A jackpot game, as shown in Figures 49 and 50, when the jackpot game ends, a jackpot ending effect is displayed, followed by a break-in effect A, indicating that the game has been controlled to time-saving state A. During the execution of break-in effect A, if there is a reserved memory of the first special symbol, the variable display based on this reserved memory of the first special symbol is executed in an extremely short special symbol change time (0.5 seconds). In addition to being controlled to time-saving state A, break-in effect A also includes a right-hit notification (A1-A4) that notifies the player that time-saving state A is in a state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area, causing the game ball to enter the second start winning slot and causing the variable display of the second special symbol to be executed.

When the player hits the gaming ball toward the right gaming area in accordance with entry effect A, the gaming ball enters the second start winning slot, and the variable display of the second special symbol begins. At this time, a panel image corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as a panel effect. Then, when the player continues to hit the gaming ball toward the right gaming area and the gaming ball enters the second start winning slot, additional panel images corresponding to each reserved memory of the second special symbol are displayed on the image display device 5 as a panel effect. Note that a maximum of five of these panel images are displayed (A5 to A7) based on the variable display of the second special symbol currently being executed and the maximum number of reserved memories for the second special symbol ("4").

When one variable display of the second special symbol in time-saving state A ends, the game state is controlled from time-saving state A to normal state, and the variable display corresponding to the first reserved memory of the second special symbol begins. During this variable display, if the decorative symbols stop in a reach combination, an operation prompt image is displayed on the image display device 5 to encourage the player to operate the chance button 631B (A8-A10).

At this time, if the variable display result is a small win, when the player operates the chance button 631B, or when the operation acceptance period for the chance button 631B ends, a movable body effect is executed in which the under-board movable body 32B operates, and then the decorative symbols are displayed stopped in a combination indicating a small win. After that, an image (an image displaying "Aim for V!") instructing the player to shoot the gaming ball toward the right gaming area to have the gaming ball detected by the second count switch 130SG024 is displayed on the image display device 5 (B1-B3).

When the player hits a game ball toward the right game area during a small win game in accordance with the image and one of the game balls is detected by the second count switch 130SG024, the image display device 5 displays an image informing the player that the second count switch 130SG024 has detected a game ball during a small win game, i.e., that a V win has occurred, and then displays an image indicating that the game will be controlled to a big win game (B4-B5).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, when the player operates the chance button 631B or the operation acceptance period for the chance button 631B ends, the decorative symbols stop in a combination indicating a miss, and it is announced that the variable display result is a miss. After that, in the variable displays corresponding to the second to fourth reserved memories of the second special design, the image display device 5 notifies the player of the remaining number of variable displays for the second special design, and then an image similar to the first reserved memory of the second special design is displayed (B6-B8).

If all of the variable displays corresponding to the reserved memories of the second special symbol are misses, during the final symbol determination period for the variable display of the second special symbol, the image display device 5 displays an image indicating that all of the variable displays corresponding to the reserved memories of the second special symbol have ended (an image displaying "FINAL BATTLE END..."). Thereafter, while the dedicated stage image is displayed on the image display device 5, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed 10 times. Furthermore, while the dedicated stage image is displayed, an image instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area is also displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) (B9-B12).

In either of the time-saving states, when the player hits the game ball into the right game area, the game ball enters the second start winning hole, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. After the big win game via the small win of the second special symbol ends, the game is controlled to time-saving state B or time-saving state C2.
As will be described later, if power is interrupted and restored during the period shown in Figures 49(A1) to 49(A4), the image display device 5 displays the "Restoring" display until Figure 49(A5), and the movable body performs a 26-second initial operation. Also, if power is interrupted and restored immediately before the end of Figure 49(A4) (within 5 seconds of the end), and the display period of the startup preparation display overlaps with the period shown in Figure 49(A5), the image display device 5 displays the "Restoring" display from Figure 49(A6) onwards (the timing at which the "Restoring" display disappears is shown in Figures 50(B3) and (B7)), and the movable body performs a 26-second initial operation. Also, if power is interrupted and restored during Figure 49(A5), the image display device 5 displays the "Restoring" display until the variable display corresponding to the second panel is started, and the movable body performs a 26-second initial operation (the first time-saving variable time is longer than 26 seconds). Furthermore, if the power is cut off and then restored in Figure 49 (A10) (more than 5 seconds until the end of the fluctuation) (miss pattern), the image display device 5 displays the restoration display until Figure 49 (B7), and the movable body performs the normal initial operation until Figure 50 (B6), and the shortened initial operation from Figure 50 (B7) (taking into account the button effects). Furthermore, if the power is cut off and then restored in Figure 49 (A10) (win pattern), the image display device 5 displays the restoration display until Figure 50 (B3), and the movable body performs the normal initial operation until Figure 50 (B2), and the shortened initial operation from Figure 50 (B3) (taking into account the "Aim for V"). Note that the light emission mode of the under-board movable body LED 9e when the under-board movable body 32B is operating differs between the initial operation and Figure 50 (B1).

Also, if power is cut off and restored in Figure 50 (B2) (within 5 seconds until the end of the variable display) and the display period of the start-up preparation display overlaps with the period of Figure 50 (B5), the image display device 5 will allow the user to see "Aim for V" after the display period of the start-up preparation display has elapsed, and the movable body will change the initial operation after the start-up preparation display is hidden to a shortened mode based on the main command (small win start command or small win open command) received in Figure 50 (B3). Furthermore, the large prize opening will begin opening during the display period of the start-up preparation display. Also, if power is cut off and restored in Figure 50 (B3) (at the start (2 seconds left until the next round)), the image display device 5 will display a recovery display in a special mode (notifying that a small win has occurred) until the open command (second round) is received after the V win (round 1), and the movable body will perform the initial operation in the normal mode (which will end before the start of the next round), and the large prize opening will begin opening during the display period of the start-up preparation display.

When the game is controlled to time-saving state B after the end of a big win game, that is, when the variable display result is a small win and the small win type is small win A or small win B, as shown in Figure 51, first, the decorative symbols are displayed as a combination indicating a small win as a variable display of the second special chart. After that, an image (an image displaying "Aim for V!") is displayed on the image display device 5 instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area to have the game ball detected by the second count switch 130SG024. When the player hits a game ball toward the right game area during a small win game in accordance with the image and one of the game balls is detected by the second count switch 130SG024, the image display device 5 displays an image informing the player that the second count switch 130SG024 has detected a game ball during a small win game, i.e., that a V win has occurred, and then displays an image indicating that the game will be controlled to a big win game (the "FEVER" image) (C1-C4).

Next, when the jackpot game via the small jackpot ends, an ending effect is displayed on the image display device 5 according to the number of prize balls won in the jackpot game. Then, after the entry effect B is executed, in which a part of the image displayed on the image display device 5 differs depending on the number of times already controlled in the time-saving state, the first variable display of the second special symbol in the time-saving state B begins. Furthermore, during the time-saving state B, a variable display of decorative symbols is executed while a background image of a city at night (second background display) is displayed on the image display device 5 (C5-C8).

If seven variable displays (seven variable displays of the second special symbol) end without the variable display result being either a big win or a small win in time-saving state B, a result effect will begin during the symbol determination period of the seventh variable display. The result effect displays a value corresponding to the number of times the game has been controlled to a big win game state since the initial win or one of the time-saving states, as well as the total number of prize balls acquired. Furthermore, if there is a reserved memory of a second special symbol when the result effect begins, the variable display of the second special symbol will be executed up to four times in an extremely short special symbol change time (0.5 seconds) according to the remaining reserved memory of the second special symbol (remaining reserved memory) (C9-C11).

If none of the variable displays corresponding to the remaining reserved memory result in a big win or a small win, the image display device 5 begins displaying a stage background image, and also displays an image instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds). Thereafter, the stage background image is displayed on the image display device 5 until 10 variable displays are completed (C12-C14).

Furthermore, when the time-saving mode C2 is entered after a jackpot game via a small win ends, i.e., when the time-saving mode C2 is entered after a jackpot game of jackpot E ends, the following actions are performed, as when the time-saving mode B is entered: first, a combination of decorative symbols indicating a small win is displayed; the image display device 5 displays an image saying "Aim for V!"; an image notifying the player that a V has been won during the small win game; an image indicating that the game is entering a jackpot game (the "FEVER" image); an image corresponding to the number of balls won in the jackpot game; a break-in effect B in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 changes depending on the number of times the game has already been entered into the time-saving mode; and seven variable decorative symbol displays are performed while the second background display is displayed (C1-C9 in Figure 51).

As shown in Figure 52, when the seventh variable display of the decorative pattern (seven variable displays of the second special pattern) ends without the variable display result being either a big win or a small win, a result effect begins during the pattern determination period of the seventh variable display. The result effect displays a value corresponding to the number of times the game has been controlled to a big win game state since the initial win or one of the time-saving states, as well as the total number of prize balls acquired. Furthermore, during the execution period of the result effect, three variable displays of the decorative pattern (variable display of the second special pattern) are executed in an extremely short special pattern change time (0.5 seconds). If the variable display result is neither a big win nor a small win in the three variable displays of the decorative pattern (eighth to tenth variable displays), another variable display of the decorative pattern (eleventh variable display) is executed (D1 to D3).

If the variable display result in the 11th variable display is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the on-board movable body 32A moves and an illumination effect image corresponding to the movement of the on-board movable body 32A is displayed on the image display device 5. After the on-board movable body 32A falls, when the on-board movable body 32A returns to its standby position before falling (the upper position of the image display device 5), the image displayed on the image display device 5 is dimmed (displayed in black). After the dimming ends, an image indicating that the time-saving state has not yet ended is displayed on the image display device 5 (D4 to D6).

Furthermore, the image display device 5 displays an operation prompt image prompting the player to operate the chance button 631B. When the player operates the chance button 631B or the operation acceptance period for the chance button 631B ends, the image display device 5 executes a V-Stock effect, informing the player that the number of time-saving control cycles in the time-saving state is 685, i.e., that the variable display result during the time-saving state is essentially a big win or a small win. Thereafter, when the V-Stock effect ends with the completion of the eleventh variable display, the image display device 5 starts the twelfth and subsequent variable displays while displaying the second background display (D7-D9). In particular, as shown in Figures 52 (D2) to 52 (D8), in the transition from the result effect during time-saving state C2 to the V-Stock effect, unlike the result effect corresponding to time-saving state B, the right-hit notification image in the upper right corner of the image display device 5 is temporarily hidden to prevent the player from noticing in advance that the time-saving control continues even after the result effect ends. The right-hit notification image in the upper right corner of the image display device 5 will resume from the start of the 12th variable display.

[Display screen of image display device 5]
48 to 52, when the game state is the normal game state, an active display area 132SG013 is provided in the lower center of the display screen of the image display device 5, and a first hold display area 132SG011 corresponding to the first hold memory is provided on the left side thereof. For example, in response to the execution of variable display of the first special pattern, an active display 132SG003 is displayed in the active display area 132SG013, and in response to the value of the first hold memory count being 4, four first hold displays 132SG001 are displayed horizontally in the first hold display area 132SG011.

Furthermore, when the game state is in the time-saving state, an active display area 132SG013 is provided in the lower left corner of the display screen of the image display device 5, and above that a second hold display area 132SG012 corresponding to the second hold memory is provided (see FIG. 103). For example, in response to the variable display of the second special symbol being executed, active display 132SG003 is displayed in active display area 132SG013 provided at the left edge of the display area, and in response to the value of the second hold memory count being 4, four second hold displays 132SG002 are displayed vertically in second hold display area 132SG012.

In this embodiment, in order to consume winnings in order, if a second hold memory is stored in normal game mode, the second hold display 132SG002 is not displayed in the first hold display area 132SG011, and if a second hold memory is stored in time-saving mode, the first hold display 132SG001 is not displayed in the second hold display area 132SG012. However, for example, it may be possible to display both the first hold display 132SG001 and the second hold display 132SG002 in the first hold display area 132SG011.

In addition, a display area 5SL is provided in the upper left corner of the display screen of the image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4"), and a small pattern corresponding to the decorative pattern (for example, an arrow "↓↓↓"), and the small pattern is displayed variably in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The above-mentioned first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, reserved display, small symbols, error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, remaining time reduction display 132SG201, right-hit prompt display 132SG430, etc. may be displayed in front of (on a higher layer than) the effect images such as characters to prevent overlapping of the effect images and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, small symbols, and error display, while the decorative symbols may be displayed behind (on a lower layer than) the effect images to prevent overlapping of the decorative symbols and reducing the visibility of the effect images.

The small symbol is also referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is being variably displayed, and is variably displayed by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5. The variably displayed fourth symbol can be used to perform effects such as a momentary disappearance of the effect content, including the variable display of the decorative symbol, from the screen, or an effect in which the above-board movable body 32A or the below-board movable body 32B obscure all or part of the screen of the image display device 5, making it possible to determine whether or not the decorative symbol is currently being variably displayed, even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative symbol. Upon receiving the first variable display start command, the effect control CPU operates the image display device 5 to variably display the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Furthermore, upon receiving the second variable display start command, the effect control CPU operates the image display device 5 to variably display the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

In addition, the pattern displayed on a fourth pattern display device provided in a location other than the image display device 5 (such as the special variable winning ball device 7, which is a predetermined location on the game board 2), such as the first special symbol LED or second special symbol LED, is also referred to as the fourth symbol.

[Various movable bodies]
Next, each movable body will be explained based on Figures 53 to 55. Figure 53 is a diagram showing (A) a state in which the on-board movable body is located at the origin position, and (B) a state in which it is located at the effect position. Figure 54 is a diagram showing (A) a state in which the under-board movable body is located at the origin position, and (B) a state in which it is located at the effect position. Figure 55 is a diagram showing (A) a state in which the on-frame movable body and chance button are located at the origin position, and (B) a state in which they are located at the effect position.

As shown in Figures 53 and 54, an above-board movable body 32A and an below-board movable body 32B are provided on the front side of the gaming board 2. These above-board movable body 32A and below-board movable body 32B are also referred to as "board-side movable bodies" because they are provided on the gaming board 2. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 55, an above-frame movable body 132SG101 and a chance button 631B are provided on the opening and closing door frame 3a. These above-frame movable body 132SG101 and chance button 631B are also referred to as "frame-side movable bodies" because they are provided on the opening and closing door frame 3a. The board-side movable body is a movable body that is provided so that it cannot be touched by the player when the opening and closing door frame 3a is in the closed state, and the frame-side movable body is a movable body that is provided so that it can be touched by the player when the opening and closing door frame 3a is in the closed state.

As shown in Figure 53, the on-board movable body 32A is formed in a roughly trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and has a performance section 32a with the letters "XXX" displayed on the front, and support sections 32b that support the performance section 32a from the left and right sides. It is movable up and down by a drive mechanism (not shown) that includes a drive motor 132SG122 and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG122 to the on-board movable body 32A. In more detail, the on-board movable body 32A is movable between an origin position at the top front of the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in Figure 53(A), and a performance position at approximately the center front of the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in Figure 53(B); at the origin position, a portion (the lower part) overlaps the display area, and at the performance position, the entire area overlaps the display area.

The on-board movable body 32A is detected at the origin position by an origin position sensor 132SG123, and at the performance position by a performance position sensor 132SG124. Multiple on-board movable body LEDs 9d are also provided inside, and these on-board movable body LEDs 9d can emit light from the front.

As shown in Figure 54, the under-board movable body 32B is shaped roughly like a fist when viewed from the front, and has a performance section 32c with decoration displayed on the front, and a support section 32d that supports the performance section 32c from below. It is movable up and down by a drive mechanism (not shown) that includes a drive motor 132SG132 and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG132 to the under-board movable body 32B. In more detail, the under-board movable body 32B is movable between an origin position at the lower front of the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in Figure 54(A), and a performance position at approximately the center front of the display screen of the image display device 5 as shown in Figure 54(B). At the origin position, a portion (upper portion) overlaps the display area, and at the performance position, the entire area overlaps the display area.

The under-board movable body 32B is detected at the origin position by an origin position sensor 132SG133, and at the performance position by a performance position sensor 132SG134. Multiple under-board movable body LEDs 9e are also provided inside, and these under-board movable body LEDs 9e can emit light from the front.

As shown in Figure 55, the first effect unit 132SG100 has a plate-shaped base member 132SG105 that protrudes upward and forward from the upper edge of the opening and closing door frame 3a, and a frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 that is movable up and down on the front side of the base member 132SG105. The frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 is shaped to resemble a character (not shown) displayed in various effects on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and frame-mounted decorative parts 132SG111L, 132SG111R that are shaped to resemble the character's wings are movably mounted on the back side.

The first performance unit 132SG100 includes a drive mechanism (not shown) including a drive motor 132SG102 and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG102 to the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101, an origin position sensor 132SG103 for detecting that the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 is located at the origin position, a performance position sensor 132SG104 for detecting that the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 is located at the performance position, and a drive motor 132SG112 and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the drive motor 132SG112 to the frame-mounted decorative part 132SG It has a drive mechanism (not shown) including a power transmission member that transmits power to the frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L and 132SG111R, an origin position sensor 132SG113 for detecting that the frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L and 132SG111R are located at the origin position, a performance position sensor 132SG134 for detecting that the frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L and 132SG111R are located at the performance position, and a frame-top movable body LED 9f for illuminating the front of the frame-top movable body 132SG101 and the frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L and 132SG111R.

In this way, the frame-top movable body 132SG101 is capable of moving vertically between the origin position shown in Figure 55(A) and the performance position shown in Figure 55(B) at the upper front (above the glass window) of the opening and closing door frame 3a. Furthermore, the frame-top decorative parts 132SG111L, 132SG111R are capable of changing between a non-deployed state in which they are stored in the origin position on the left and right sides of the back of the frame-top movable body 132SG101 and a deployed state in which they protrude to spread out to the performance positions on the upper left and right sides of the back. They change from the non-deployed state to the deployed state in response to the upward movement of the frame-top movable body 132SG101, and change from the deployed state to the non-deployed state in response to the downward movement of the frame-top movable body 132SG101.

Also, as shown in Figure 55, the chance button 631B consists of a cylindrical member with an operation surface formed on the top, and is arranged so that it can move up and down relative to the base part 600A formed on the top of the operation unit 600. In detail, the chance button 631B is movable up and down between an origin position (see Figure 55 (A)) where the operation surface protrudes slightly upward from the base part 600A, and an operation detection position where the operation surface is lower than the origin position, and is biased upward so that it is always held in the origin position; when the player presses it, it moves from the origin position to the operation detection position, and the pressing operation is detected by the button sensor 635B.

The chance button 631B can be moved up and down between an origin position (see Figure 55(A)) and an effect position where the operation surface is higher than the origin position, by a drive mechanism (not shown) including an advance/retract motor 635F and a power transmission member that transmits the power of the advance/retract motor 635F to the chance button 631B. In other words, the chance button 631B can be changed by the advance/retract motor 635F between a first operable state in which it is located at the origin position and a second operable state in which it is located at the effect position, and can be pressed up to the operation detection position in either the first operable state or the second operable state.

The chance button 631B is detected by the origin position sensor 635C at the origin position, by the button sensor 635B at the operation detection position, and by the protrusion position sensor 635D at the performance position. Multiple chance button LEDs 9g are also provided inside, and these chance button LEDs 9g allow the operation surface to emit light.

In this embodiment, the board-side movable body provided on the game board 2 is exemplified by the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B, and the frame-side movable body provided on the opening and closing door frame 3a is exemplified by the chance button 631B and the above-frame movable body 132SG101. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the board-side movable body and frame-side movable body are not limited to those described above, and the number, position, shape, and operating mode of each can be changed in various ways.

[Various performances]
Next, various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be explained with reference to Figures 56 and 57. Figure 56 is a diagram showing a list of effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU. Figure 57 (A) is a diagram showing effects that can be executed during the variable display period of SP reach, and (B) is a diagram showing a list of effects that can be executed in the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in Figure 56, the effect control CPU 120 can execute multiple effects. In more detail, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "pre-reading movable object prediction" that suggests the reliability of a jackpot in the variable display (also called target variation) that is the subject of the pre-reading prediction before the variable display begins.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute "start-time announcement," "pseudo consecutive announcement," "moving object announcement," "reach announcement," and "button announcement" as advance announcement effects that indicate that the variable display will be controlled to a jackpot.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a "win/lose button presentation" as a deciding presentation that notifies players whether or not they will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state in a variable display based on a super reach jackpot variation pattern (for example, SP reach A to E, etc.).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the following jackpot effects during jackpot gaming: "fanfare effect," "round effect," "promotion effect," and "ending effect."

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute "time-saving effects" and "result effects" as time-saving effects that can be executed in the special states of time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and time-saving state C.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "customer waiting demo effect" as a standby effect that can be executed in a standby state where no game is being played.

As shown in Figure 57 (A), the "Start Notice," "Moving Object Notice/Pseudo-Continuous Notice," and "Reach Notice/Button Notice" are effects that can be executed, for example, before the variable display mode becomes the N Reach mode and the N Reach effect is executed, or before the variable display mode becomes the SP Reach mode and the SP Reach effect is executed. In addition, the "Win/Loss Button Effect" is an effect that can be executed in the latter half of the SP Reach effect.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57(B), the "fanfare effect" is executed during the fanfare period from when control of the jackpot game state begins until the start of round play, when the large prize opening is opened; the "round effect" is executed during the period when control of the large prize opening is being executed during round play, where the large prize opening alternates between open and closed states; the "interval effect" is executed during the period when control of the large prize opening is being executed during round play; and the "ending effect" is executed during the ending period from when round play ends until the jackpot game state ends. These fanfare period, round play period, and ending period are managed by the CPU 103. Note that in the first round of jackpots C, D, and E, the large prize opening is opened in a small prize opening pattern (repeatedly opening and closing for a short period of time).

In addition, the "promotion effect" is executed during the special round interval period from the end of the third round opening period of the large prize slot for jackpots C, D, and E until the start of the fourth round opening period.

(Predictive moving object announcement)
As shown in Figure 56, the "pre-reading movable body announcement" is an effect in which the movable body 32A on the board operates in multiple variable displays corresponding to reserved memories that were not the subject of the pre-reading announcement effect, which are executed before the variable display (hereinafter referred to as target change) of the reserved memory that was the subject of the pre-reading announcement effect is executed.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figure 58 (A1), if a start win occurs when the number of reserved memories for the first special pattern is "2" and the variable display is being executed, and a decision is made to execute a pre-read movable body announcement because the variable display based on the reserved memory prior to the start win is a non-reach miss (i.e., the special pattern change time is 12 seconds or less), then after the variable display is stopped (see Figure 58 (A2)), when the reserved memory is consumed and the variable display starts, the on-board movable body 32A will vibrate up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position, and effect display 132SG401 emphasizing the on-board movable body 32A will be displayed and sound effects will be output (see Figure 58 (A3)), and it will then return to the origin position before the variable display is stopped (see Figure 58 (A4)). This action is performed when the variable display that is executed before the start of the variable display (target change) based on the reserved memory that is the subject of the preview preview performance starts, and when the variable display (target change) based on the reserved memory that is the subject of the preview preview performance starts (see Figures 58 (A5) to (A7)).

In this embodiment, the pre-reading movable object announcement is shown as an example of a presentation pattern in which it continues across multiple variable displays until the target movement begins, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may also be possible to implement a presentation pattern with a low expectation level in which the pre-reading movable object announcement ends before the target movement begins. It may also be possible to implement multiple presentation patterns with different jackpot expectations depending on the movement speed of the on-board movable object 32A as it descends to the intermediate position and the display color of the effect display 132SG401.

(Notice at the start)
As shown in Figure 56, the "start notice" is an effect that indicates whether the display color of the active display 132SG003 will change when the variable display starts. The display color of the active display 132SG003 is white as the base color and can change to blue, green, and red, and the display color at the end of the start notice indicates the likelihood of a jackpot. In this embodiment, an effect pattern that ends in white, an effect pattern that ends in blue, an effect pattern that ends in green, and an effect pattern that ends in red are executable, with the effect patterns having the highest likelihood of a jackpot being white, blue, green, and red, in that order.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figure 59 (B1), when it is decided to execute a start notice upon the start of variable display, the entire display area is turned off or becomes dark with low brightness, and the character display 132SG402 "!!" is displayed approximately in the middle of the display area (see Figure 59 (B2)). Next, the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings are displayed in white and become brighter (see Figure 59 (B3)).

In the case of a presentation pattern that ends in white, the display color of the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings does not change or enlarge, and when a predetermined time has passed since the active display 132SG003 and its surroundings were displayed in white in Figure 59 (B3), a "?" character display 132SG403 is displayed above the active display 132SG003, indicating that the final display color will be white (see Figure 59 (B3a)).

In the case of an effect pattern that ends in blue, the display color of active display 132SG003 and its surroundings changes from white to blue and is enlarged (see Figure 59 (B4)). When a predetermined time has passed since active display 132SG003 and its surroundings turned white in Figure 59 (B3), active display 132SG003 breaks and the character display 132SG404 "!?" is displayed, indicating that the final display color will be blue (see Figure 59 (B4a)).

In the case of a presentation pattern that ends in green, the display color of active display 132SG003 and its surroundings gradually changes from white to blue to green and is enlarged (see Figures 59 (B4) (B5)). After a predetermined time has passed since active display 132SG003 and its surroundings turned white in Figure 59 (B3), active display 132SG003 breaks up and the word "heat" 132SG405 is displayed, indicating that the final display color will be green (see Figure 59 (B5a)).

In the case of an effect pattern that ends in red, the display color of the active display 132SG003 and its surrounding area gradually changes from white to blue, green, and red in order, and is enlarged (see Figures 59 (B4) to (B6)). After a predetermined time has passed since the active display 132SG003 was displayed in white in Figure 59 (B3), the word "Super Hot" 132SG406 is displayed above the active display 132SG003, indicating that the final display color will be red (see Figure 59 (B6a)).

In this way, the "start notice" includes an introductory part (see Figures 59 (B2) to (B6)) that serves as a period during which the hold display will change or not, and a result notification part (see Figures 59 (B3a), (B4a), (B5a), (B6a)) that serves as a period during which the result of the hold display change is notified.

In this embodiment, the example shows how the likelihood of a jackpot is suggested by changing the display mode, such as the display color and size, of the active display 132SG003. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the likelihood of a jackpot may be suggested by changing display modes other than the display color and size. Furthermore, the likelihood of a jackpot may be suggested by changing the display mode of not only the active display 132SG003, but also the first hold display 132SG001 and the second hold display 132SG002. Furthermore, the change patterns for the display color and size are not limited to those described above, and other change patterns may be possible.

(Movable object preview)
As shown in Fig. 56, the "movable object preview" is an effect in which the on-board movable object 32A vibrates up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position, and the chance button 631B vibrates, before the pseudo consecutive effect described later is executed in the variable display. The effect patterns of the movable object preview include a "vibration (small) pattern" in which the amplitude of the vertical vibration is small, and a "vibration (large) pattern" in which the amplitude of the vertical vibration is larger than the vibration (small) and the likelihood of a jackpot is high, and either non-execution, a "vibration (small) pattern," or a "vibration (large) pattern" is determined depending on the result of the variable display.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figure 60 (C1), when it is decided to execute a movable object preview upon the start of the variable display, at a predetermined timing before the pseudo consecutive performance begins, the on-board movable object 32A vibrates up and down multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position, and the chance button 631B vibrates (see Figure 60 (C2)). In addition, an effect display 132SG407 emphasizing the on-board movable object 32A is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and performance sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, an example has been given of a form in which a moving object announcement is made in a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive performance is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a moving object announcement may also be made in a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive performance is not performed (for example, a non-reach variable pattern).

In addition, it is possible to operate the vibration motor 635E (Pattern A) before the start of operation of the chance button 631B during the initial operation described below, or in conjunction with the advancement operation. Furthermore, as a performance during movement, the vibration motor 635E can be operated (Pattern B) to indicate the degree of expectation, or it can be operated (Pattern C) as decoration (entertainment) when a jackpot is hit or when the moving body is moving. Each of these Patterns A, B, and C has a different vibration pattern (strength of movement, rhythm of movement, and movement time), as well as a different lamp pattern (Pattern A: initial emphasis; Pattern B: rapid white flashing, rapid red flashing; Pattern C: rainbow colors, lighting in a color corresponding to the effect displayed when the moving body is moving) and sound output pattern (Pattern A: initialization notification or silence; Pattern B: background music during movement; Pattern C: celebratory sound upon jackpot, moving body performance sound).

As will be described later, the initial highlighting mode is a lighting pattern (brightness, lighting time, etc.) that is dedicated to initial actions, and is therefore not used in any performance action control (see Figure 67 (B)).

(Pseudo consecutive announcement)
As shown in Fig. 56, the "pseudo consecutive announcement" is an effect that suggests whether or not the variable display will resume after temporarily stopping the decorative symbols during the variable display of the decorative symbols, that is, whether or not one variable display will be made to look like multiple variable displays. The pseudo consecutive effects include a double pattern in which the variable display resumes twice, and a triple pattern in which the variable display resumes three times, which has a higher probability of winning than the double pattern, and either the double pattern or the triple pattern is determined depending on the variable display result.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 60 (C1), when a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is executed is initiated, if it is decided to execute a moving object prediction, the moving object prediction is executed (see FIG. 60 (C2)). After that, the decorative pattern that was variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 60 (C3)), and then a decorative pattern with a number one larger than the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 60 (C4)), and then a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is decelerated and displayed just before the stopped display position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 60 (C5)).

After that, in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is executed, a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is temporarily displayed at the stopped display position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 60 (C6)), and then the variable display of decorative patterns is resumed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 60 (C7)). On the other hand, in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is not executed, a decorative pattern with a number one larger than the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is temporarily displayed at the stopped display position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and a variable display result of a miss is displayed (see FIG. 60 (C10)).

Also, in Figure 60 (C7), after the variable display of decorative symbols is resumed, in the case of a double-pattern pseudo-consecutive announcement, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the decorative symbol that was variably displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in a stopped state (see Figure 60 (C8)), and a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in a stopped state in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, resulting in a reach mode (see Figure 60 (C9)), and the presentation develops into an SP reach mode. Also, in Figure 60 (C7), after the variable display of decorative symbols is resumed, in the case of a triple-pattern pseudo-consecutive announcement, the sequence of Figures 60 (C3) to (C7) is repeated, and then the presentation develops into a reach mode in Figures 60 (C8) and (C9), and the presentation develops into an SP reach mode.

In this way, the "pseudo consecutive announcement" includes an introductory part (see Figures 60 (C3) to (B5)) that serves as a period to tease whether or not the variable display will resume, and a result notification part (see Figures 60 (C6), (C10), and (C9)) that serves as a period to notify the result of whether or not the variable display has resumed.

(Reach notice)
As shown in Figure 56, the "reach preview" is a presentation that indicates whether or not a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L will be displayed in a stopped state in the right decorative pattern display area 5R after the variable display of the decorative pattern has begun and the decorative pattern that was displayed in a stopped state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L has been displayed in a stopped state, i.e., whether or not a reach state will occur.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (D1), after the variable display begins and the decorative symbol that was variably displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is displayed as a static symbol (see FIG. 61 (D2)), a decelerating display of a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol displayed as a static symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L begins just before the static display position in the variably displayed right decorative symbol display area 5R (see FIG. 61 (D3)). Then, if a player's operation is detected within a predetermined valid operation period after the decelerating display begins, or if no operation is detected and the valid operation period has elapsed, and a reach-win state is not reached, a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol displayed as a static symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L passes the static display position and the next decorative symbol is displayed as a static symbol (see FIGS. 61 (D4), (D5), (D7)). If a reach-win state is reached, a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol displayed as a static symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is displayed as a static symbol at the static display position (see FIGS. 61 (D4), (D5), (D6)).

Note that a reach mode is a mode (also known as a reach effect) in which, from the start of the variable display of decorative symbols (identification information) until the display result is derived and displayed, all decorative symbols (e.g., the left and right symbols) excluding one decorative symbol (e.g., the middle symbol) from the combination of multiple decorative symbols (e.g., "333") that make up the jackpot display result are displayed statically, and then the one decorative symbol (e.g., the middle symbol) is displayed variably.

(Button preview)
As shown in Figure 56, when the above-mentioned reach prediction is executed, the "button prediction" is executed during the period from when the deceleration display of the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern displayed in a stopped state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L begins in the right decorative pattern display area 5R until the specified operation valid period has elapsed, and is an effect that promotes button operation to determine whether or not the reach state will occur.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figures 61 (D4) to (D5), this is an operation prompt effect that encourages the operation of the chance button 631B from the start of the deceleration display of the decorative pattern until the lapse of a specified valid operation period. It begins with the display of an operation prompt display and a button image that resembles the chance button 631B, and ends when operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period has lapsed without any operation being detected, and the operation prompt display and button image are no longer displayed.

The button preview presentation patterns (operation prompting modes) include a "long press pattern" that prompts the player to press and hold the chance button 631B for a specified operation period, a "rapid press pattern" that prompts the player to repeatedly press the chance button 631B for a specified operation period, and a "single hit pattern" that prompts the player to press the chance button 631B once. Depending on the variable display result, either non-execution, "long press pattern," "rapid press pattern," or "single hit pattern" is determined. Note that the presentation patterns are not limited to the above, and four or more types may be set, or two or less types may be set. The operation prompting display is "Long press!" for the "long press pattern," "rapid press!" for the "rapid press pattern," and "Press!" for the "single hit pattern."

In this way, the "button announcement" includes an operation prompting part (see Figure 61 (D5)) that serves as a period for encouraging the operation of the chance button 631B, and a result notification part (see Figures 61 (D6) and (D7)) that serves as a period for notifying the result of whether or not the operation has resulted in a reach state.

(Win/lose button effect)
As shown in Figure 56, the "win/lose button effect" is an effect that prompts the user to operate a button at the end of the SP reach effect in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern to determine whether the variable display result will be a jackpot or not, and also notifies the user of the result of whether or not the result will be a jackpot.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (E1), a reach title, which is a type of SP reach presentation, is announced in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern, and after the SP reach presentation (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) has begun (see FIGS. 62 (E2) and (E3)), the presentation begins by displaying an operation prompt display 132SG411 consisting of the words "PRESS!!" to prompt the operation of the chance button 631B, and a button display 132SG412 imitating the chance button 631B, from the time the battle is concluded until a predetermined valid operation period has elapsed (see FIG. 62 (E4)).

Then, when operation of the chance button 631B is detected within the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period has elapsed without any operation being detected, the operation prompt display 132SG411 and button display 132SG412 are hidden and the game ends. If the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body LED 9e lights up in a predetermined light color, the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the effect position, the effect display 132SG413 highlighting the under-board movable body 32B is displayed, and a predetermined effect sound is output, indicating that the game has been controlled to a jackpot game state (see Figure 62 (E5)). After that, an image (not shown) indicating that the ally character has won the battle against the enemy character is displayed, and then the jackpot confirmation symbol combination is displayed, indicating that a jackpot has occurred (see Figures 62 (E6) to (E9)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the under-board movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the presentation position, and after a display 132SG414 is displayed indicating that the ally character has lost the battle with the enemy character, it is announced that the variable display result is a miss (see Figures 62 (E10) to (E12)).

Note that possible presentation patterns include one in which the chance button 631B remains in the origin position and an operation prompt is displayed, and one in which the chance button 631B moves from the origin position to a presentation position and an operation prompt is displayed, resulting in a higher chance of winning than when the chance button 631B is in the origin position. Furthermore, the presentation patterns are not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set, or only one type may be set.

In this way, the "win/lose button effect" includes an operation promotion part (see Figure 62 (E4)) that serves as a period for promoting the operation of the chance button 631B, and a result notification part (see Figures 62 (E5) and (E10)) that serves as a period for notifying the user of the variable display result of whether or not the result is a jackpot by the under-board movable body 32B.

(Fanfare performance)
As shown in Fig. 56, the "fanfare effect" is an effect that notifies information about the controlled jackpot during the period from when the jackpot game state is controlled to when the round game starts. Note that the information about the jackpot is, for example, information about the type of jackpot, the number of rounds, the number of balls dispensed, the game state after the jackpot ends (time-saving states A, B, C1, C2), etc., and may also include other information.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (F1), after a combination of jackpot confirmation symbols is displayed statically and the variable display result indicates a jackpot, the jackpot gaming state begins, and display 132SG420 indicating that a jackpot has started is displayed (see FIG. 63 (F2)). Furthermore, when the gaming state is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIGS. 65 (A1) and (A2), the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 rises from the origin position to the presentation position, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, it is maintained in the presentation position until the time-saving state ends.

Next, information indicating the jackpot type (jackpots A to E) is displayed. Specifically, in the case of a 10-round jackpot, the jackpot type display 132SG421 that makes up "BIG BONUS!!" is framed in from the right side of the display screen of the image display device 5 a predetermined number of times (e.g., one character) at a time and moved to the center of the display screen (see Figure 63 (F3) to (F6)). Also, in the case of a 3-round jackpot, the character images that make up "SMALL BONUS!!" are framed in from the right side of the display screen of the image display device 5 a predetermined number of times (e.g., one character) at a time and moved to the center of the display screen (not shown).

Next, the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the presentation position and displays a right-hit prompt display 132SG431 that encourages the player to shoot the game ball into the right game area (see Figure 63 (F7)), after which the on-board movable body 32A returns to the origin position and displays a right-hit prompt display 132SG432 that indicates that the player should aim for the big prize slot (see Figure 63 (F8)).

In this way, the "fanfare effect" includes an introductory part that serves as a period during which information regarding a jackpot is announced (see Figures 63 (F2) to (F6)), and an operation direction announcement part that announces the operation direction of the ball-hitting control handle, i.e., an operation to hit to the right (see Figures 63 (F7) and (F8)).

(Round performance)
As shown in Figure 56, the "round effect" is an effect in which winning information during a round is announced after the game is controlled to a jackpot game state and the fanfare period ends, and the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened during the round play.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figures 63 (F9) to (F11), during round play, the following are displayed: a character display 132SG450; a round number display 132SG451 indicating the number of rounds; a winning ball count display 132SG452 indicating the number of winning balls in that round; a ball count display 132SG453 indicating the number of balls paid out since the start of the jackpot game state to the present; a consecutive jackpot count/total ball count display 132SG454 indicating the number of consecutive jackpots and the total number of balls paid out during the jackpot streak; and a right-hit prompt display 132SG430 which prompts the player to perform a right-hit operation.

If a jackpot occurs during the time-saving mode, the "Aim for V!!" effect shown in Figure 51 (C2) will be executed during the operation direction notification part of Figure 63 (F8). The "Aim for V!!" effect will also continue during the round effect period of Figure 63 (F9).

The images displayed in the round presentation may also be moving images, and each round may include a picture-story presentation to explain the characters, explain the "FINAL BATTLE," or present a story. For example, if an explanation presentation for character A is being shown in the first round, an explanation presentation for character B will be shown in the second round. However, if power is lost during the first round and then restored, a "restoration" message will be displayed until the end of the first round, and then, when the second round begins, the explanation presentation for character A that was shown in the first round will be shown again. In the event of a power outage, the presentation control CPU 120 will not remember what was displayed before the power outage, so by displaying it from the beginning in the second round, consideration can be given to players who want to see character A's explanation presentation to the end.

In addition, a promotional video corresponding to the selected song may be displayed during the round performance. For example, if a promotional video corresponding to selected song A (up to the chorus) was displayed during the first round, and there was no change in the song, the promotional video corresponding to selected song A (chorus portion) would continue during the second round. However, if power is interrupted during the first round and power is restored, a message indicating that the power is being restored (and there is no sound) will be displayed until the end of the first round. After that, when the second round begins, the promotional video corresponding to selected song A (the verse) will be displayed again. Also, if selected song A is changed to selected song B during the first round, a promotional video corresponding to selected song B will be displayed during the first round, and then promotional video corresponding to selected song B will continue during the second round. However, if power is interrupted during the first round and power is restored, a message indicating that the power is being restored (and there is no sound) will be displayed until the end of the first round. After that, when the second round begins, the promotional video corresponding to selected song A will be displayed. If the power is interrupted, the presentation control CPU 120 will not remember what was displayed before the power interruption, so in the second round, a PV presentation based on the default selected song A will be displayed (for example, if the ball output display shows "150" during one round of play and the power is restored after a power interruption, the ball output display displayed during the next round of play will show "0").

(Promotion performance)
As shown in Figure 56, the "promotion effect" is a round promotion effect that notifies whether or not the round play will continue (round promotion) (whether or not the jackpot will be promoted to jackpot D or E (10 rounds), which has a larger number of rounds than jackpot C (3 rounds)) during the round interval in the third round play of jackpot C to E, in other words, when the variable display result of the second special pattern becomes a jackpot display result.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (F21), the background image is switched to the fourth background display 132SG350, and the character display 132SG352 and the planned ball number counter display 132SG351, which indicates the planned number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state, are displayed, and the promotion effect begins.

Next, an image of an ally character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and an additional ball count display 132SG353 (e.g., "+50") is displayed in response to the attack, and the displayed planned number of balls is added to the counter value displayed on the planned ball count counter display 132SG351 (see FIG. 64 (F22)). Then, when the counter value displayed on the planned ball count counter display 132SG351 reaches a predetermined value (e.g., "300"), a button display 132SG354 imitating the chance button 631B, an operation prompt display 132SG355 such as "Press!!", and a gauge display 132SG356 showing the remaining valid operation period are displayed, and an operation prompt effect is executed to encourage a single press of the chance button 631B (see FIG. 64 (F23)).

Next, if the jackpot type is jackpot D or jackpot E, when a press of the chance button 631B is detected before the specified valid operation period has elapsed, or when the valid operation period has elapsed without a press being detected, the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the performance position (see FIG. 64 (F24)), the ally character attacks, the counter value of the planned ball output counter display 132SG351 is displayed variably (see FIG. 64 (F24)), and the enemy character is displayed faded out (see FIG. 70 (F25)). Then, the planned ball output counter display 132SG351 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and a specified counter value (for example, "1500," the planned number of balls that can be obtained in the case of a "10R jackpot") is displayed as a static value, and it is announced that the jackpot has been upgraded to a 10-round jackpot (see FIG. 64 (F26)).

Furthermore, if the jackpot type is jackpot C, when a press of the chance button 631B is detected before the specified valid operation period has elapsed, or when the valid operation period has elapsed without a press being detected, an image (not shown) is displayed in which the under-board movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the performance position and the enemy character has not been defeated, indicating that it was not a 10-round jackpot, i.e., that promotion to a 10-round jackpot has failed (see Figure 64 (F27)).

In this way, the "promotion effect" includes an introductory part that hypes up whether or not the player will be promoted (see Figure 64 (F21) to (F23)), and a result notification part that notifies the player of whether or not they have been promoted (see Figure 64 (F24) to (F27)).

(Ending performance)
As shown in Figure 56, the "ending presentation" is a presentation in which the end of the jackpot is announced and information about the game state that will be controlled after the jackpot ends is announced.

Specifically, for example, as shown in Figures 63 (F12) to (F14), if the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot C, when the third round of play ends, a notification is displayed that the "FINAL BATTLE presentation" will begin after the jackpot ends (time-saving state A will be entered), and a right-hit prompting display 132SG430 is displayed, instructing the player to shoot the game ball into the right play area and aim for the variable winning ball device 6B.

Also, if the jackpot type is jackpot B, when the third round of play ends, it is announced that the "BATTLE RUSH effect" will start after the jackpot ends (time-saving state C1 will be entered) (see Figures 63 (F32) and (F34)).Also, if the jackpot type is jackpot C, when the promotion effect (promotion failure) ends, it is announced that the "BATTLE RUSH effect" will start after the jackpot ends (time-saving state B will be entered) (see Figures 64 (F32) and (F34)).Also, if the jackpot type is jackpot D or jackpot E, when the ninth round of play ends, it is announced that the "BATTLE RUSH effect" will start after the jackpot ends (time-saving state B or time-saving state C1 will be entered) (see Figures 64 (F32) and (F34)).

In this way, the "ending performance" includes an introductory part as an introductory period (see Figures 63 (F12) and 64 (F31)), a time-saving state notification part in which information regarding the time-saving state is notified (see Figures 63 (F13), 64 (F32), and (F34)), and an operation direction notification part in which the operation direction of the ball-hitting operation handle, i.e., an operation to hit to the right, is notified (see Figure 63 (F14)).

(Performance during time-saving)
As shown in FIG. 56, the "time-saving effect" is an effect that notifies that the "FINAL BATTLE effect" or the "BATTLE RUSH effect" is being executed, that is, that the game is being controlled to a time-saving state (see FIGS. 49 and 51).

(Results presentation)
As shown in Fig. 56, the "result effect" is an effect that notifies the player that the "FINAL BATTLE effect" or the "BATTLE RUSH effect" has ended, that is, that the control of the time-saving state has ended (see Figs. 50 and 51). Also, when the game state is controlled from the time-saving state to the normal state, as shown in Figs. 65(B1) and (B2), the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101 descends from the effect position to the origin position and is maintained at the origin position.

(Customer waiting demonstration)
As shown in Figure 56, the "customer waiting demo effect" is an effect that notifies the user that the device is in a customer waiting (waiting to play) state, and is an effect that starts when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the customer waiting demo designation command output from the main board 11 was received without receiving a control command such as a variable display start designation command.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (G1), when the power is turned on, the initial operation is initiated in the initial operation control process. When the initial operation is completed (see FIG. 66 (G2)), the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion indicator 132SG480 is displayed (see FIG. 66 (G3)). Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the power was turned on in FIG. 66 (G1) without any variable display, the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion indicator 132SG480 is hidden, and a customer waiting demo performance begins (see FIG. 66 (G4)).

In the customer waiting demo performance, after displaying moving images sequentially introducing the multiple ally characters A-D (which may include enemy character images) appearing in various performances and the content itself (see FIG. 66 (G4)-(G7)), an image of allied characters A-D gathered together remains displayed (see FIG. 66 (G8)), while the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the performance position, and after a predetermined time has passed, it rises back to the origin position (see FIG. 66 (G9)-(G10)). The first background display 132SG310, which shows a daytime city corresponding to the normal state as the background image, is displayed, and the performance ends (see FIG. 66 (G11)). When the customer waiting demo performance ends, the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed (see FIG. 66 (G12)).

If a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the customer waiting demo performance ended without any variable display being performed, the customer waiting demo performance will start again. Even after that, the customer waiting demo performance will be performed periodically as long as the standby state continues. The customer waiting demo performance may be performed multiple times repeatedly while in standby state, or may not be performed after being performed a predetermined number of times.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an example has been given of a form in which the various effects shown in Figure 56 can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and effects other than those described above may be executed. Furthermore, the execution mode of each effect can be changed in various ways, and the effect may be executed in a mode other than those described above.

[Initial operation control]
Next, the operation of the movable body, the lamp, and the sound will be described with reference to Fig. 67. Fig. 67 (A) is a diagram for explaining the operation of the movable body, and (B) is a diagram showing the lamp and sound modes according to the operation of the movable body.

As shown in Figure 67 (A), the performance control CPU 120 is capable of performing initial operation control, which causes the movable bodies (above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, above-frame movable body 132SG101) to perform their initial operation (initial operation) when the power is turned on (during cold start processing or hot start processing), and performance operation control, which causes the movable bodies (above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, above-frame movable body 132SG101) to operate in a manner appropriate to the performance during various performances.

"Initial operation control" includes "origin placement control (short initial operation control)," which includes non-detection operation control that returns the movable body to the origin position when it is located other than the origin position, and non-detection operation control that temporarily moves the movable body away from the origin position when it is located at the origin position and then returns it to the origin position from that position away from the origin position; and "operation confirmation control (long initial operation control)," which is a confirmation operation to confirm that the movable body is operating normally, in which the movable body is moved from the origin position to the performance position and then moved from the performance position to the origin position.

In more detail, if the movable body is not detected by the origin position sensor when executing the initial operation process, that is, if the movable body is in a position other than the origin position (for example, a specified position between the origin position and the performance position) for some reason (for example, if the movable body has moved from the origin position during transportation or installation on the play area, if it was unable to return to the origin position during the previous operation (for example, if an operation error (abnormal operation) occurs during performance execution, such as the movable body being unable to return to the origin or becoming unable to operate due to a motor out-of-step, malfunction, or jamming), or if it has moved from the origin position due to vibration of the gaming machine), the performance control CPU 120 executes non-detection operation control to return the movable body to the origin position. When this non-detection operation control is executed, the movable body is located away from the origin position, so the only operation is to move the movable body toward the origin position.

In addition, if the movable body is detected by the origin position sensor when the initial operation process is executed, the performance control CPU 120 executes detection operation control. For example, in cases where a predetermined range of movement (e.g., play) is set between the time the movable body is detected by the origin detection sensor and the time the movement of the movable body toward the origin position is restricted so that the movable body can be reliably detected by the origin detection sensor, the movable body may return to the origin and stop at a position further back than the position detected by the origin position sensor. Therefore, even if the movable body is detected by the origin detection sensor, detection operation control is executed to return the movable body to a more accurate origin position.

This detection operation control requires the movable body to be moved away from the origin position to temporarily cancel the detection state by the origin position sensor, and then returned to the origin position. However, since it is not necessary to move it to the performance position, the movable body is moved from the origin position to a detection operation position near the origin position, and then returned to the origin position. In other words, it is moved back and forth over a distance shorter than the long initial operation.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 executes non-detection operation control or detection operation control in the initial operation process, and then executes operation confirmation control processing. The operation confirmation control processing is an operation control to confirm that the movable bodies are operating normally, and therefore it is an operation control to move each movable body from its respective origin position to the performance position farthest from the origin position, and then return it to the origin position. In other words, the movement to the performance position is the maximum advance operation. Furthermore, the operation confirmation control processing for the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B is the same as the performance operation controls 3 and 4 described below, but the operation confirmation control processing for each movable body does not necessarily have to be the same as either of the performance operation controls.

"Performance operation control" is the operation control of movable bodies in various performances, and includes multiple types of operation control with different types of target movable bodies and different operation modes. In more detail, 1. "Prediction" is operation control that vibrates the on-board movable body 32A up and down between the origin position and the intermediate position before the target change begins, such as in the pre-read movable body announcement. 2. "Applicable" is operation control that vibrates the on-board movable body 32A up and down between the origin position and the intermediate position in the applicable change, such as in the movable body announcement, and vibrates the chance button 631B with the vibration motor 635E. 3. "Jackpot notification, round promotion, V promotion" is operation control that moves the under-board movable body 32B from the origin position to the performance position in the case of jackpot notification, round promotion, V promotion, etc., and then returns it to the origin position. 4. "Fanfare right hit, customer waiting demo effect" is an operation control that moves the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position to the effect position during fanfare right hit, customer waiting demo effect, etc., and then returns it to the origin position. 5. "Jackpot game state transition" is an operation control that moves the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position to the effect position when the game state transitions from the normal game state to the jackpot game state. 6. "Normal game state transition" is an operation control that moves the on-board movable body 32A from the effect position to the origin position when the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal game state. 7. "Operation promotion" is an operation control that moves the chance button 631B from the origin position to the effect position during the win/lose button effect.

In this embodiment, when the performance control CPU 120 executes non-detection operation control or detection operation control as short initial operation control, it controls the movable body so that it always operates at a single (constant) operation speed based on the minimum control speed (low speed) set in the operation confirmation control. Note that these minimum speeds are the minimum speeds in the operation confirmation control corresponding to the movable body, and are not common operation speeds when there are multiple movable bodies, so the minimum speed for each movable body may be different.

Specifically, the first movable body and the other second movable body differ in size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, and drive mechanism including the drive motor, so even if the same control speed is set, the actual operating speed of the movable body will differ. Furthermore, even if different control speeds are set for each movable body, the actual operating speed of the movable body will also differ. In this way, the minimum speed is an operating speed based on the control speed set for each movable body, and the movable body is controlled to operate at the minimum speed optimal for it, making it possible to reliably detect multiple movable bodies with different modes at the origin position.

In addition, the maximum control speed (high speed) set in the operation confirmation control is the same as the maximum control speed (high speed) set in the performance operation control (for example, the operation control when performing a movable body performance in which a movable body is operated in various performances such as the pre-reading performance, preview performance, deciding performance, and jackpot performance shown in FIG. 56), so the maximum speed in the operation confirmation control is the same as the maximum speed in the performance operation control.However, as long as it is possible to check whether the movable body is operating normally, the maximum speed in the operation confirmation control and the maximum speed in the performance operation control do not necessarily have to be the same speed.

(Operation confirmation control (long initial operation control))
Next, an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control executed by the performance control CPU 120 will be described with reference to Fig. 68. Fig. 68 (A) to (J) are diagrams showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control during cold start processing.

As shown in Figure 68 (A), when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 begins (when the power is turned on), if the CPU 103 executes the initialization process (cold start process) of step S6 in the game control main process, the presentation control CPU 120 first displays a predetermined startup preparation display 132SG500 on the display screen of the image display device 5.

Then, upon receiving a power-on command from the main board 11 after a predetermined time (e.g., 3000 ms) has elapsed since the power was turned on, an initialization notification is initiated indicating that a cold start process has been performed. Also, upon a predetermined time (e.g., 3000 ms) having elapsed since the initialization notification was initiated, initial operation control of the movable bodies (upper-board movable body 32A, lower-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, upper-frame movable body 132SG101) begins (see FIG. 68(B)). During the initialization notification, as described below, the lamps (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper-board movable body LED 9d, lower-board movable body LED 9e, upper-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) begin to light up in a predetermined initialization notification mode, and speakers 8L, 8R begin to emit a predetermined initialization notification sound (see FIG. 72).

In the initial operation control, first, short initial operation control is performed for each movable body (above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, above-frame movable body 132SG101), followed by operation confirmation control. Below, illustrations of the operation modes based on short initial operation control will be omitted, and only the operation modes based on operation confirmation control will be explained.

In the operation confirmation control, first, the chance button 631B moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Figure 68(B)), after which the on-board movable body 32A moves downward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Figure 68(C)). Next, the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 68(D)), after which the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 68(E)). Next, the below-board movable body 32B moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Figure 68(F)), after which the on-frame movable body 132SG101 moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see Figure 68(G)). Next, the frame-top movable body 132SG101 moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 68 (H)), and then the under-board movable body 32B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position, and the operation confirmation control ends (see Figure 68 (I)). After that, when a predetermined time (for example, approximately 10 seconds) has passed, the initialization notification ends and the operation confirmation control (initialization operation control) ends.

In this way, during operation confirmation control, the initial operation of each movable body is initiated in the order of chance button 631B, on-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, and above-frame movable body 132SG101. However, since the initial operation period of above-board movable body 32A overlaps with part of the initial operation period of chance button 631B, and the initial operation control of above-frame movable body 132SG101 overlaps with part of the initial operation period of below-board movable body 32B, the operation confirmation control period of multiple movable bodies can be shortened.

In addition, when the initial movement control of one movable body is being performed while the movement control of another movable body is being performed, while one movable body (e.g., chance button 631B, below-board movable body 32B) is stopped at the performance position, the other movable body (e.g., above-board movable body 32A, above-frame movable body 132SG101) moves to the performance position or origin position, so even when the initial movement control of two or more movable bodies is being performed in parallel, the movement of each movable body can be confirmed.

In addition, while an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control during cold start processing was explained above based on Figure 68, the operation confirmation control during hot start processing does not issue an initialization notification using a lamp or sound, but the operation confirmation control for the moving body is performed in the same manner as during cold start processing.

Also, as shown in Figure 67 (B), the movable body LED of a movable body that is not operating and is stopped during operation confirmation control flashes red during cold start processing (during initialization notification), is turned off during hot start processing (during recovery), and lights up in a "mode corresponding to the background image" during hot start processing (when variable display is stopped). On the other hand, the movable body LED of a movable body that is not operating and is stopped during performance operation control lights up in a "mode corresponding to the background image." Note that the background image (background display) may, for example, have background images A and B, and if background image A is displayed and there is a power outage and then recovery, background image A will always be displayed, and the lamp will always light up in a mode corresponding to background image A.

In addition, during operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the movable body during the advance operation moving from the origin position to the performance position and during the retreat operation moving from the performance position to the origin position lights up in "white" during cold start processing (during initialization notification), hot start processing (during recovery), and hot start processing (when variable display is stopped). On the other hand, during performance operation control (for example, operation control of the under-board movable body 32B in the win/lose button performance), the movable body LED of the movable body during the advance operation moving from the origin position to the performance position lights up in a first light-emitting mode (for example, a rainbow flash mode in which various colors corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are illuminated in sequence at predetermined intervals with extinguishing periods in between), whereas the movable body LED of the movable body during the retreat operation moving from the performance position to the origin position lights up in a second light-emitting mode (for example, a smooth rainbow mode in which various colors corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are illuminated in sequence at predetermined intervals).

In other words, while the operation mode of each movable body is the same for both operation confirmation control and presentation operation control, the movable body LED of each movable body emits light in the same manner (white illumination) for advancing and retreating operations in operation confirmation control (the first and second light emission modes are the same), while it emits light in different manners (rainbow flash and smooth rainbow) for advancing and retreating operations in presentation operation control (the first and second light emission modes are different). This makes it possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 that makes it easy to distinguish whether operation confirmation control or presentation operation control is being performed. In particular, in operation confirmation control, the light color and lighting mode do not constantly change, like rainbow flash or smooth rainbow, making it easier to confirm the operation of the movable body.

Note that in Figure 67 (B), rainbow flash and smooth rainbow are shown as examples of the first and second light emission modes of the movable body LED in performance operation control, but these light emission modes may differ depending on the type of performance.

In addition, the light emission brightness during operation confirmation control is lower than the light emission brightness during performance operation control, which reduces power consumption when the power is turned on and reduces the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, while the brightness of the movable body LED is set to a low level, preventing the movable body's operation from being difficult to confirm due to glare.

Also, as shown in Figure 67 (B), during cold start processing (during initialization notification) in operation confirmation control, a predetermined initialization notification sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R over the initialization notification period. The predetermined initialization notification sound is a sound that indicates that initialization notification is being executed, and is a different sound from the effect sound output during other effect operation control. Furthermore, during hot start processing (during recovery or when variable display is stopped), no sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R (silent).

In addition, the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion indicator 132SG480 (see Figure 66 (G3)) is displayed during the valid operation period when menu display and volume and light intensity adjustment operations are validly accepted. By operating the selection button 132SG35 while the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion indicator 132SG480 is displayed, it is possible to display a specified menu screen (not shown) or adjust the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light intensity (brightness) of the various lamps 9a to 9g.

In this embodiment, during the execution period of operation confirmation control (during cold start processing or hot start processing), the menu display and volume/light intensity adjustment are not controlled during the valid operation period. Therefore, even if the light intensity is adjusted using the selection button 132SG35 during operation confirmation control, the light intensity of the various lamps 9a-9g does not change, and they continue to emit light at the brightness currently being used. More specifically, during operation confirmation control, it is not possible to adjust the brightness of a movable body that is operating while emitting light in "low brightness" "white" (initial highlighting mode).

Furthermore, during hot start processing, it may be possible to adjust the volume and light intensity while the operation confirmation control is being executed, allowing players to quickly adjust to an environment that suits their preferences.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is not possible to display menus or adjust volume and light intensity while the operation confirmation control is being executed. However, after the operation confirmation control is completed, the menu/volume and light intensity adjustment display suggestion display 132SG480 is displayed, so that if the selection button 132SG35 is operated during the operation confirmation control, it is possible to confirm whether or not brightness adjustment was performed as a result of that operation.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a command to specify the start of a jackpot or a command to specify the opening of a large prize slot is received while the start preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, the display of a fanfare effect or a round effect may begin on a display layer lower than the recovery display 132SG510, and when the start preparation display 132SG500 is no longer displayed, the display of the fanfare effect or round effect may become visible partway through on the lower layer.

Furthermore, if a command to specify the start of a jackpot or a command to specify the opening of a large prize slot is received while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, the recovery display 132SG510 may be displayed until the next command (a command related to the start of a round of play) is received.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 69 to 71, power outages can occur in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at various times, such as when the variable display is stopped and the machine is in a game standby state, when the variable display is being executed, or when a jackpot game is being executed. Although not shown in detail, at any time a power outage occurs, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may start up using cold start processing or hot start processing, but the operating mode of each movable body, the light emission mode of each movable body LED, background sound, etc. may differ depending on the time the power outage occurred.

[Initial operation control during cold start and hot start]
Next, a description will be given of a case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by a cold start and a case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by a hot start. Note that a hot start will be described assuming that the gaming state is in the normal state.

Configuration A1 (Initial operation control during cold start)
72 and 73, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is started from the start timing on the image display device 5. When 3 seconds (3000 ms) have elapsed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 started to be displayed, the special symbol lamps constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B start to light up, and based on the fact that the performance control CPU 120 has received a power-on designation command, a first game state background designation command, and a customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, the chance button LED 9g, and the on-frame movable body LED 9f start to emit light in an initialization notification mode from the timing of receiving the power-on designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command, and the output of an initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R starts.

In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable unit LED 9d, the below-board movable unit LED 9e, the above-frame movable unit LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g in this feature unit 132SG light up during initialization notification. After turning off for one second from the time the performance control CPU 120 receives the power-on command, background image command, or customer waiting demo command, they repeatedly turn on and off in red (light emission).

Then, two seconds (2000 ms) after the effect control CPU 120 receives the power-on command, first game state background command, and customer waiting demo command from CPU 103, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5 ends, and the startup preparation display 132SG500 is replaced by a background image showing the variable display stopped in the normal state. From this point on, as initial operation control, the operation (confirmation operation) of the above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, and above-frame movable body 132SG101 is started.

First, four seconds after the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 ends (six seconds (6000 ms) after the power-on command, first game state background command, and customer waiting demo command are received), the chance button 631B begins advancing from its home position to its presentation position. The chance button LED 9g begins illuminating (white) in an initial highlighting mode from the start of this advancing motion. Once the chance button 631B has completed its movement to its presentation position, the chance button 631 remains in this presentation position for a predetermined period of time. After remaining in this position for the predetermined period of time, the chance button 631B retreats from its presentation position to its home position. The chance button LED 9g's illumination in the initial highlighting mode ends when the chance button 631's retreating motion ends, and it returns to illuminating in the initialization notification mode (see Figures 74 (A) to (C)).

Furthermore, at the end of the advancement movement of the chance button 631B, the on-board movable body 32A begins to advance from the origin position to the performance position. When the on-board movable body 32A begins to advance from the origin position to the performance position, the on-board movable body LED 9d begins to emit light (white light) in an initial highlighting mode from the start of the advancement movement. Then, after the predetermined period of time has passed, the on-board movable body 32A performs a retreat movement from the performance position to the origin position. Note that the on-board movable body LED 9d ends emitting light in the initial highlighting mode at the end of the retreat movement of the on-board movable body 32A, and returns to emitting light in the initialization notification mode.

Furthermore, at the end of the retraction operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B starts advancing from the origin position to the performance position. When the below-board movable body 32B starts advancing from the origin position to the performance position, the below-board movable body LED 9e starts emitting light in the initial highlight mode (white light) from the start of the advancing operation. Then, after the predetermined period of time has passed, the below-board movable body 32B executes the retraction operation from the performance position to the origin position. Note that the illumination of the below-board movable body LED 9e in the initial highlight mode ends at the end of the retraction operation of the below-board movable body 32B, and returns to illumination in the initialization notification mode.

Furthermore, while the under-board movable body 32B is stopped at the performance position, the above-frame movable body LED 9f emits light in an initial highlighting mode (illuminated in white) as the above-frame movable body 132SG101 advances from the origin position to the performance position and retreats from the performance position to the origin position. The above-frame movable body LED 9f emits light in the initial highlighting mode at the end of the retreating motion of the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and returns to emitting light in the initialization notification mode.

In addition, the operation (confirmation operation) of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 during a cold start in this feature part 132SG ends 20 seconds (20,000 ms) after the start of the advancement operation of the chance button 631B. Furthermore, after the operations (confirmation operations) of the above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, and above-frame movable body 132SG101 are completed, 4 seconds (4,000 ms) after the completion of the operations (confirmation operations) of the above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, and above-frame movable body 132SG101 are completed, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g cease to emit light in the initialization notification mode, and the output of the initialization notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R ceases, and all initial operation control is completed. In other words, the initial operation control during a cold start in this feature part 132SG is executed for 30 seconds (30,000 ms).

Here, we will explain the case where a starting win occurs after initial operation control, and a variable display is initiated in which a movable body prediction is executed based on that starting win. First, as shown in Figure 72, after initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, and the on-frame movable body LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the background image (a background image corresponding to the normal state), and the chance button LED 9g emits light in a default manner (e.g., white light emission). Additionally, the speakers 8L and 8R are in a state in which sound output is stopped.

When a starting win occurs in the above state and the variable display of the special and decorative symbols begins, the background image on the image display device 5 switches to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and speakers 8L and 8R begin to output background music corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state.

During the period in which the movable object prediction is being performed, the image display device 5 displays an effect image (movable object effect) corresponding to the movable object prediction. Furthermore, the on-board movable object 32A moves back and forth between the origin position and the intermediate position multiple times, and the chance button 631B vibrates continuously. In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable object LED 9d, the below-board movable object LED 9e, and the on-frame movable object LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the movable object prediction, and the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the movable object prediction (movable object prediction sound).

In the example shown in Figure 72, the movable object prediction is exemplified by displaying an effect image (effect display 132SG407) corresponding to the movable object prediction on the image display device 5, causing the on-board movable object 32A to move back and forth between the origin position and the intermediate position, vibrating the chance button 631B, outputting a sound (movable object prediction sound) corresponding to the movable object prediction from the speakers 8L and 8R, and causing the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable object LED 9d, below-board movable object LED 9e, and on-frame movable object LED 9f to emit light in a manner corresponding to the movable object prediction.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable object prediction may be exemplified by displaying an effect image (effect display 132SG407) corresponding to the movable object prediction on the image display device 5, and causing the on-board movable object 32A to move back and forth between the origin position and the intermediate position. Furthermore, the movable object warning may involve the display of an effect image (effect display 132SG407) corresponding to the movable object warning on the image display device 5, the reciprocating movement of the on-board movable object 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position, as well as one or more of the following: vibration of the chance button 631B, output of a sound (movable object warning sound) corresponding to the movable object warning from the speakers 8L and 8R, and illumination of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, on-board movable object LED 9d, below-board movable object LED 9e, and on-frame movable object LED 9f in a manner corresponding to the movable object warning.

Next, we will explain the case where a starting win occurs during initial operation control, and a variable display in which a movable body prediction is executed based on that starting win is initiated. First, as shown in Figure 73, when a starting win occurs during the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A (more precisely, when the on-board movable body 32A remains in the performance position), the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols begins from the timing of the starting win. At this time, the background image on the image display device 5 switches to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and speakers 8L and 8R begin to output background music corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state.

Furthermore, after the variable display starts, initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A continues to be executed, and after the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, initial operation control of the below-board movable body 32B and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 is executed.

If the movable body preview execution period occurs during the initial operation control period of these above-board movable bodies 32A and below-board movable bodies 32B, a movable body effect image will be displayed on the image display device 5 during the movable body preview execution period, while the initial operation control of the above-board movable bodies 32A, below-board movable bodies 32B, and above-frame movable body 132SG101 will continue to be executed (see Figures 74 (D) to (E)).

In addition, during the operation of each movable body, the illumination patterns of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g will follow the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state) displayed on the image display device 5 or the initial highlighting pattern of each movable body, and will not illuminate in an illumination pattern corresponding to the movable body preview.

Then, when the execution period of the movable object preview in the variable display ends and the movement of all movable objects has finished, the up and down movement of the on-board movable object 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position, and the vibration of the chance button 631B, which would have been executed during the execution period of the movable object preview, are executed from the timing when the movement ended (Figures 74 (F)-(J) and 75 (K)-(L)). Note that while the on-board movable object 32A is moving up and down, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable object LED 9d, below-board movable object LED 9e, on-frame movable object LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the movable object preview, but the speakers 8L, 8R output background music corresponding to the background image for the variable display in the normal state, and no sound corresponding to the movable object preview (movable object preview sound) is output.

(Initial operation control during hot start)
As shown in Figures 76 and 77, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start, the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 begins on the image display device 5 from the start timing. Three seconds (3000 ms) after the start-up preparation display 132SG500 begins displaying, the performance control CPU 120 receives a power outage recovery designation command, a first game state background designation command, and a customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103. Based on this, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-mounted movable body LED 9e, the chance button LED 9g, and the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f each begin emitting light in a manner corresponding to the background image in the normal state from the time of receiving the power outage recovery designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command. Note that no sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R (silence) from the time of receiving the power outage recovery designation command, the first game state background designation command, and the customer waiting demo designation command.

In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g in this feature unit 132SG emit light in accordance with the background image in the normal state, and after turning off for one second from the time the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery designation command, background image designation command, or customer waiting demo designation command, they emit light in an emission color (e.g., white) corresponding to the normal state. In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start in the time-saving state (low probability high base state) or the probability variable state (high probability high base state), the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in an emission color or emission pattern different from that in the normal state, corresponding to the background image in the time-saving state or the probability variable state.

Then, two seconds (2000 ms) after the effect control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command, the first game state background command, and the customer waiting demo command from CPU 103, the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5 ends, and the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is replaced by a background image showing a stopped variable display according to the normal state. From this point on, as initial operation control, the operation (confirmation operation) of the above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, chance button 631B, and above-frame movable body 132SG101 is started.

First, four seconds after the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 ends (six seconds (6000 ms) after the power-on command, first game state background command, and customer waiting demo command are received), the chance button 631B begins advancing from its home position to its presentation position. The chance button LED 9g begins illuminating in an initial highlight mode (white illumination) from the start of this advancing motion. Once the chance button 631B has completed its movement to its presentation position, the chance button 631 remains in this presentation position for a predetermined period of time. After remaining in this position for the predetermined period of time, the chance button 631B retreats from its presentation position to its home position. The chance button LED 9g's illumination in the initial highlight mode ends when the chance button 631's retreating motion ends, and the chance button LED 9g changes to its default illumination mode (e.g., white illumination).

Furthermore, at the end of the advancement movement of the chance button 631B, the on-board movable body 32A begins to advance from the origin position to the performance position. When the on-board movable body 32A begins to advance from the origin position to the performance position, the on-board movable body LED 9d begins to emit light (white light) in an initial highlighting mode from the start of the advancement movement. Then, after the predetermined period of time has passed, the on-board movable body 32A executes a retreat movement from the performance position to the origin position. Note that the on-board movable body LED 9d's illumination in the initial highlighting mode ends at the end of the retreat movement of the on-board movable body 32A, and returns to illumination in a mode corresponding to the background image in the normal state.

Furthermore, at the end of the retraction operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B begins to advance from the origin position to the performance position. When the below-board movable body 32B begins to advance from the origin position to the performance position, the below-board movable body LED 9e begins to emit light (white light) in an initial highlighting mode from the start of the advancing operation. Then, after the predetermined period of time has passed, the below-board movable body 32B executes a retraction operation from the performance position to the origin position. Note that the illumination of the below-board movable body LED 9e in the initial highlighting mode ends at the end of the retraction operation of the below-board movable body 32B, and the illumination returns to a mode corresponding to the background image in the normal state.

Furthermore, while the under-board movable body 32B is stopped at the performance position, the above-frame movable body LED 9f emits light in an initial highlight mode (illuminated in white) as the above-frame movable body 132SG101 advances from the origin position to the performance position and retreats from the performance position to the origin position. The above-frame movable body LED 9f emits light in an initial highlight mode at the end of the retreating movement of the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and returns to emitting light in a mode corresponding to the background image in the normal state.

Note that the operation (confirmation operation) of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 during a hot start in this characteristic part 132SG ends 20 seconds (20,000 ms) after the chance button 631B begins advancing. Note that, unlike when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are not illuminated in the form of an initialization notification, and the speakers 8L, 8R do not output an initialization notification sound. For this reason, the initial operation control during a hot start in this feature part 132SG is such that the operations (confirmation operations) of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 are executed over a period of 26 seconds, as shown in Figures 76 and 77.

Here, we will explain the case where a starting win occurs after initial operation control, and a variable display is initiated in which a movable body prediction is executed based on that starting win. First, as shown in Figure 76, after initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, the under-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the on-frame movable body 132SG101, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the on-board movable body LED 9d, the under-board movable body LED 9e, and the on-frame movable body LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state), and the chance button LED 9g emits light in a default manner (e.g., white light emission). In addition, the speakers 8L and 8R are in a state in which sound output is stopped (silent).

When a starting win occurs in the above state and the variable display of the special and decorative symbols begins, the background image on the image display device 5 switches to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and speakers 8L and 8R begin to output background music corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state.

During the period in which the movable object prediction is being performed, the image display device 5 displays an effect image (movable object effect) corresponding to the movable object prediction. Furthermore, the on-board movable object 32A moves back and forth between the origin position and the intermediate position multiple times, and the chance button 631B vibrates continuously. In addition, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the on-board movable object LED 9d, the below-board movable object LED 9e, and the on-frame movable object LED 9f emit light in a manner corresponding to the movable object prediction, and the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the movable object prediction (movable object prediction sound).

Next, we will explain the case where a starting win occurs during initial operation control, and a variable display in which a movable body prediction is executed based on that starting win is initiated. First, as shown in Figure 77, when a starting win occurs during the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A (more precisely, when the on-board movable body 32A remains in the performance position), the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols begins from the timing of the starting win. At this time, the background image on the image display device 5 switches to the background image for variable display in the normal state, and speakers 8L and 8R begin to output background music corresponding to the background image for variable display in the normal state.

Furthermore, after the variable display starts, initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A continues to be executed, and after the initial operation control of the on-board movable body 32A, initial operation control of the below-board movable body 32B and the on-frame movable body 132SG101 is executed.

If the movable body preview execution period occurs during the initial operation control period of these above-board movable bodies 32A and below-board movable bodies 32B, a movable body effect image will be displayed on the image display device 5 during the movable body preview execution period, while the initial operation control of the above-board movable bodies 32A, below-board movable bodies 32B, and above-frame movable body 132SG101 will continue to be executed.

In addition, during the operation of each movable body, the illumination patterns of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g will follow the background image (background image corresponding to the normal state) displayed on the image display device 5 or the initial highlighting pattern of each movable body, and will not illuminate in an illumination pattern corresponding to the movable body preview.

Then, when the execution period of the movable body preview in the variable display ends and the operation of all movable bodies ends (initial operation control ends), from the timing at which the operation ends, the up and down movement of the on-board movable body 32A between the origin position and the intermediate position and the vibration of the chance button 631B, which would normally be executed during the execution period of the movable body preview, are executed. Note that while the on-board movable body 32A is moving up and down, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g are illuminated in a manner corresponding to the movable body preview, but the speakers 8L, 8R output background music corresponding to the background image for the variable display in the normal state, and no sound corresponding to the movable body preview (movable body preview sound) is output.

As described above, this feature unit 132SG operates the on-board movable body 32A (and the below-board movable body 32B, the frame-mounted movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B) as initial operation control when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and when it is started by a hot start. Furthermore, if a start-up win occurs during the confirmation operation of each movable body during the initial operation control when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, and a variable display that executes a movable body preview based on the start-up win is initiated, if the execution period of the movable body preview and the confirmation operation period overlap, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A and the sound output from speakers 8L and 8R corresponding to the movable body preview are restricted as a performance operation for the movable body preview. Furthermore, if a start-up win occurs during the confirmation operation when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start, and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is initiated based on the start-up win, only the movement of the on-board movable body 32A is restricted as a performance operation for the movable body prediction.

By doing this, when a movable object prediction is executed using a variable display that is started during the confirmation operation of each movable object during initial operation control, the initial operation control is not hindered by the operation of the on-board movable object 32A as a performance operation of the movable object prediction, and the player can be notified that a movable object prediction has been executed by the display of a movable object effect on the image display device 5 and by the lighting of each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable object LED 9d, below-board movable object LED 9e, on-frame movable object LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) in accordance with the movable object prediction.

In this feature section 132SG, as shown in FIG. 77, a pachinko gaming machine 1 in which an electric step occurs during the execution of a variable display including the execution of a movable body preview is started with a hot start, and if the execution period of the movable body preview occurs during the initial operation of each movable body after the hot start, the operation of the above-board movable body 32A as the movable body preview is not executed during the execution period of the movable body preview. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 in which an electric step occurs during the execution of a variable display including a winning effect (i.e., a variable display of a jackpot) is started with a hot start, and if the execution period of the winning effect occurs during the initial operation of each movable body after the hot start, the operation of the below-board movable body 32B as the winning effect and the light emission (rainbow flash) of the below-board movable body LED 9e in a manner corresponding to the winning effect may be restricted during the execution period of the winning effect. In this way, it is possible to determine whether the below-board movable body 32B is operating as an initial operation or as a winning effect based on the light emission pattern of the below-board movable body LED 9e.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 41, this feature section 132SG illustrates an example in which the presentation control CPU 120 executes an origin placement control process at the start of variable display to place each movable body at its respective origin position, but the present invention is not limited to this. If a start win occurs during the initial movement of each movable body when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started and variable display based on this start win is initiated, the initial movement of each movable body may be executed with priority over the movement of each movable body to its origin position. This prevents the initial movement of each movable body from being interrupted by the movement of each movable body to its origin position.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 41, this feature section 132SG illustrates an example in which the effect control CPU 120 executes an origin placement control process at the start of the customer waiting demo effect to place each movable body at its respective origin position. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When a starting winning occurs during the initial operation of each movable body when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and a variable display based on the starting winning occurs, the variable display ends during the initial operation period, and the customer waiting demo effect starts in response to the end of the variable display, the performance operation of the customer waiting demo effect of each movable body may be executed with priority over the movement of each movable body to its origin position. This prevents the operation of the customer waiting demo effect of each movable body from being interrupted by the movement of each movable body to its origin position.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 1)
In addition, in this characteristic part 132SG, as shown in FIG. 73, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction is started during the operation of the movable body as initial operation control, if the execution period of the movable body prediction overlaps with the operation period of the movable body, only the display of the movable body effect is executed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the movable body prediction, and after the initial operation control is completed, the operation of the movable body that is the target of the movable body prediction (in the case of this characteristic part 132SG, the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B), the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, b. An example has been given of a form in which the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in a manner corresponding to the movable body preview, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example, as shown in Figure 78, even if a variable display that executes a movable body preview is started during the operation of a movable body as initial operation control, if the execution period of the movable body preview is after the operation of each movable body has ended, the target movable body (the above-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B) may be operated during the execution period of the movable body preview.

Furthermore, if the initial operation control period (operation control of each movable body, illumination of each LED in an initialization notification mode, and output of initialization notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R) ends during the execution period of the movable body preview, as shown in FIG. 78, from the time when the control of the initial operation ends to the time when the movable body preview ends, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g may be illuminated in a mode corresponding to the movable body preview, and a sound corresponding to the movable body preview may be output from speakers 8L and 8R.

As described above, during the initial operation control period, if the operation control of each movable body has ended but the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g continue to emit light in accordance with the initialization notification mode, and the speakers 8L and 8R continue to output an initialization notification sound, and a movable body preview is executed, the operation of the above-board movable body 32A and chance button 631B in accordance with the movable body preview is executed, while the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g do not emit light in accordance with the movable body preview mode, and the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sound in accordance with the movable body preview, thereby making it possible to avoid reducing the dramatic effect of the movable body preview.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 2)
In addition, in this characteristic part 132SG, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, and a variable display is started to execute a movable body prediction that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot during the confirmation operation of each movable body as an initial operation control, the operation of the movable body (on-board movable body 32A, chance button 631B), the display of movable body effects on the image display device 5, the illumination of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R have been described, but as a modified example, as shown in FIG. 79, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot is started during the confirmation operation of each movable body as an initial operation control, the operation of the movable body (on-board movable body 32A, chance button 631B), the display of movable body effects on the image display device 5, the illumination of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R have been described. In the case where a decision is made to execute a pre-read movable body preview due to multiple occurrences of variable display during the moving body confirmation operation, if the execution period of the pre-read movable body preview overlaps with the confirmation operation period or the initial operation control period for each movable body, only the display of movable body effects is executed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the pre-read movable body preview, and the operation of the target movable body (on-board movable body 32A and chance button 631B), the illumination of the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g in a manner corresponding to the pre-read movable body preview, and sound output from speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the pre-read movable body preview are not executed. Furthermore, if the variable display that is the subject of the pre-read movable body prediction is executed after the initial operation control is completed, during the execution period of the movable body prediction during the variable display, the image display device 5 displays a movable body effect image, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g emit light in a manner corresponding to the movable body prediction, and the speakers 8L, 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the movable body prediction.

By doing this, even if the period for executing the pre-read movable object prediction occurs during the confirmation operation of each movable object, the operation of the on-board movable object 32A or chance button 631B as the pre-read movable object prediction will not be executed, making it possible to prevent confusion for the player caused by excessive operation of the on-board movable object 32A or chance button 631B after the initial operation control has ended.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 3)
Furthermore, in this feature section 132SG, an example has been given of a form in which a movable body preview can be executed in which the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the intermediate position as an effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during the variable display, a movable body preview (second movable body preview) can be executed again after the movable body preview (first movable body preview) as an effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot, and the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot varies depending on the number of times the movable body preview is executed during the variable display (for example, the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot is higher when the second movable body preview is executed in addition to the first movable body preview than when only the first movable body preview is executed).

In addition, in cases where multiple movable body announcements (first movable body announcement and second movable body announcement) can be made during the variable display in this manner, as shown in Figure 80 as a modified example, when a start winning occurs during the initial motion control and a variable display that makes the first movable body announcement and the second movable body announcement is started based on the start winning, if the execution period of the first movable body announcement overlaps with the execution period of the initial motion control, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement may be executed after the initial motion control ends (the first movable body announcement may be re-executed). However, if the second movable body announcement has already started during the re-execution period of the first movable body announcement, the second movable body announcement that is currently being executed may be executed with priority, and the first movable body announcement may not be re-executed, as shown in Figure 80.

In this way, if the second movable body announcement is already being executed during the re-execution period of the first movable body announcement, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A due to the second movable body announcement is given priority, and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A is not executed even as the first movable body announcement, thereby preventing a decrease in the performance effect of the movable body announcement due to the operation of the on-board movable body 32A due to the second movable body announcement being hindered by the operation of the on-board movable body 32A due to the first movable body announcement.

In the example shown in Figure 80, a form in which the first movable body preview and the second movable body preview can be executed during one variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operating modes of the on-board movable body 32A as these first movable body preview and second movable body preview may be the same (for example, the first movable body preview and the second movable body preview both involve the on-board movable body 32A moving multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position), or the operating modes of the on-board movable body 32A as these first movable body preview and second movable body preview may be different (for example, the first movable body preview may involve the on-board movable body 32A moving multiple times between the origin position and the intermediate position, while the second movable body may involve the on-board movable body 32A moving multiple times between the origin position and the preview position).

(Initial Operation Control Modification 4)
Furthermore, in the case where multiple movable body announcements (first movable body announcement and second movable body announcement) can be made during the variable display as shown in Figure 80, as a modified example, as shown in Figure 81, when a start winning occurs during the initial operation control and a variable display that makes the first movable body announcement and the second movable body announcement is started based on the start winning, if the execution period of the first movable body announcement overlaps with the execution period of the initial operation control, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement can be controlled not to be executed, while only the second movable body announcement after the initial operation control can be controlled to be executed. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 82, when a start winning occurs after the initial operation control and a variable display that performs the first movable body prediction and the second movable body prediction is started based on the start winning, that is, when the operation of the on-board movable body 32A is executed as the first movable body prediction and the second movable body prediction during the variable display, if the operation of the on-board movable body 32A stops midway due to a loss of synchronism or the like during the execution period of the first movable body prediction, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A may be controlled to start as the second movable body prediction during the execution period of the second movable body prediction.

In this way, even if the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body preview does not end normally, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the next movable body preview, the second movable body preview, is executed, so that the operation of the on-board movable body 32A can be retried.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 5)
In addition, in Figure 80, when a start winning occurs during the initial operation control and a variable display that performs the first movable body prediction and the second movable body prediction is started based on the start winning, if the execution period of the first movable body prediction overlaps with the execution period of the initial operation control, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body prediction can be executed after the initial operation control ends, while if the re-execution period of the first movable body prediction is within the execution period of the second movable body prediction, priority is given to the execution of the second movable body prediction and the first movable body prediction is not re-executed.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example, as shown in Figure 83, if the execution period of the second movable body prediction occurs during the re-execution period of the first movable body prediction, the re-execution of the first movable body prediction may be interrupted at the start of the execution period of the second movable body prediction, and thereafter the on-board movable body 32A may be operated as the second movable body prediction.

In this way, if the execution period for the second movable body announcement begins during the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement is interrupted and the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body announcement is started, thereby preventing a reduction in the presentation effect caused by the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the first movable body announcement interfering with the operation of the on-board movable body 32A as the second movable body announcement.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 6)
Furthermore, in the characteristic section 132SG, an example has been given in which the on-board movable body 32A is operated between the origin position and the performance position as the initial operation control, while the on-board movable body 32A is operated between the origin position and the intermediate position as the performance operation of the movable body preview, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the on-board movable body 32A may be operated between the origin position and the performance position in both the initial operation control and the performance operation of the movable body preview.

Furthermore, in cases where the on-board movable body 32A is operated between the origin position and the performance position in both the initial operation control and the movable body preview performance operation, when the on-board movable body 32A is operated as the initial operation, the initial operation is continuously executed until the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 or the origin position sensor 132SG123, whereas when the on-board movable body 32A is operated as the on-board movable body preview performance operation, the operation of the on-board movable body 32A may be stopped in accordance with the process data for the movable body preview, regardless of whether the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 or the origin position sensor 132SG123.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 84(A) and 84(B) as a modified example, when operating the on-board movable body 32A as initial operation control, the performance control CPU 120 drives the drive motor 132SG122 in the forward direction based on the detection of the on-board movable body 32A by the origin position sensor, thereby moving the on-board movable body 32A toward the performance position over a first period (1000 ms). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 stops the forward drive of the drive motor 132SG122 on the condition that the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 (the on-board movable body 32A has moved to the performance position). Then, based on the detection of the on-board movable body 32A by the performance position sensor 132SG124, drives the drive motor 132SG122 in the reverse direction to move the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position. Furthermore, when the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the origin position sensor 132SG123 (when the on-board movable body 32A has moved to the origin position), the reverse rotation of the drive motor 132SG122 is stopped.

84(B), for example, if a step-out or the like occurs during the operation of the on-board movable body 32A toward the presentation position, causing the on-board movable body 32A to stop between the origin position and the presentation position, the presentation control CPU 120 continues the forward rotation of the drive motor 132SG122 beyond the first period because the presentation position sensor 132SG124 does not detect the on-board movable body 32A. At this time, if the presentation position sensor 132SG124 does not detect the on-board movable body 32A for a predetermined period (a period longer than the first period from the start of the initial operation control), the presentation control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error in the on-board movable body 32A, and operates the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position over 6000 ms by driving the drive motor 132SG122 in the reverse direction from the timing of determining the operation error. Then, when the origin position sensor 132SG123 detects the on-board movable body 32A, the driving of the driving motor 132SG122 is stopped.
Also, as shown in Figures 85(A) and 85(B), when the on-board movable body 32A is operated as a performance operation of the movable body preview, the performance control CPU 120 drives the drive motor 132SG122 in the forward direction based on the process data of the movable body preview, thereby moving the on-board movable body 32A toward the performance position over a second period that is longer than the first period. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 stops the on-board movable body 32A at the performance position by stopping the forward drive of the drive motor 132SG122 based on the process data of the movable body preview. At the same time, the performance position sensor 132SG124 detects the on-board movable body 32A. Then, while the on-board movable body 32A is stopped at the performance position, the performance control CPU 120 drives the drive motor 132SG122 in the reverse direction based on the process data of the movable body preview, thereby moving the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 stops the on-board movable body 32A at the origin position by stopping the reverse drive of the drive motor 132SG122 based on the movable body advance notice process data. At the same time, the on-board movable body 32A is detected by the origin position sensor 132SG123.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 85 (B), for example, if a step-out occurs while the on-board movable body 32A is moving toward the presentation position and the on-board movable body 32A stops between the origin position and the presentation position, the presentation control CPU 120 continues to drive the drive motor 132SG122 in the forward direction based on the movable body preview process data until the second period has elapsed. In other words, at the end of the second period, the presentation control CPU 120 stops the forward drive of the drive motor 132SG122 based on the movable body preview process data, regardless of whether the on-board movable body 32A has been detected by the presentation position sensor 132SG124.

If the on-board movable body 32A is not detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 for a predetermined period (a period longer than the second period from the start of initial operation control), the performance control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error in the on-board movable body 32A, and from the timing of the operation error determination, drives the drive motor 132SG122 in the reverse direction to move the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position over a period of 6000 ms. Then, based on the detection of the on-board movable body 32A by the origin position sensor 132SG123, the drive of the drive motor 132SG122 is stopped.

In this way, if a movable object prediction is executed during gameplay after the initial operation control has ended, even if the operation of the on-board movable object 32A corresponding to the movable object prediction is not performed normally, the operation of the on-board movable object 32A as the initial operation control (confirmation operation) is not executed, making it possible to reduce the reduction in the presentation effect of an abnormally performed movable object prediction.

(Initial Operation Control Modification 7)
Furthermore, in the above-mentioned variant example 6, an example was given of a form in which the performance control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error in the on-board movable body 32A if the on-board movable body 32A is not detected by the performance position sensor 132SG124 as part of the initial operation control, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the performance control CPU 120 determines that there is an operation error in the on-board movable body 32A as part of the initial operation control, it may not operate the on-board movable body 32A during the movable body preview execution period during variable display, but may only display the effect on the image display device 5, light up the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g), and output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the movable body preview.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 86 as variant example 7, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of operating the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position toward the performance position over 1000 ms as initial operation control, and is also capable of operating the on-board movable body 32A from the performance position toward the origin position over 2000 ms.

Furthermore, if the on-board movable body 32A stops between the performance position and the origin position as part of the initial operation control, the performance control CPU 120 will initially determine that this is an operation error, and then be able to execute the initial operation control multiple times.

Here, if the performance control CPU 120 executes four initial motion controls and determines that all of them result in an error, it stores the on-board movable body 32A as a motion-restricted movable body as a result of the fourth initial motion control (dead end determination). Then, as a special initial motion control, the performance control CPU 120 moves the on-board movable body 32A from the origin position toward the performance position over 3000 ms, and then moves the on-board movable body 32A toward the origin position over 6000 ms.

After that, when a starting winning occurs and a variable display that executes a movable body prediction based on that starting winning is initiated, the performance control CPU 120, based on the fact that the on-board movable body 32A is stored as an operation-restricted movable body, does not operate the on-board movable body 32A during the movable body prediction execution period, and only displays effects on the image display device 5, lights up the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g), and outputs sound corresponding to the movable body prediction from the speakers 8L, 8R.

As described above, by not operating the on-board movable object 32A that has been determined to be a dead end as a movable object preview, while displaying effects on the image display device 5, lighting up the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable object LED 9d, below-board movable object LED 9e, on-frame movable object LED 9f, chance button LED 9g), and outputting sound corresponding to the movable object preview from the speakers 8L, 8R, it is possible to prevent malfunctions caused by operating the on-board movable object 32A as a movable object preview, while minimizing a decrease in the visual effect of the movable object preview.

The configurations described in Modifications 1 to 7 above may be added to the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment. Alternatively, part of the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment may be changed to at least one of the configurations of Modifications 1 to 7. In other words, Modifications 1 to 7 above can be added or changed to the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment in any one of multiple forms, or in a combination of multiple forms.

Configuration A2 (Initial Operation Control Modification 8)
Furthermore, in the characteristic part 132SG, as shown in FIG. 27, when variable display is not executed, the CPU 103 outputs a customer waiting demo designation command to the presentation control board 12, thereby executing a customer waiting demo presentation on the image display device 5, as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a variant example 8, as shown in FIGS. 87, 88, and 89, in any of the cases where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start in a low probability low base state (normal state), or where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a high base state (time-shortened state), the presentation control CPU 120 receives a customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103 3000 ms after the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, while the customer waiting demo presentation itself may be started after the control period of the initial operation has ended.

By doing this, it is possible to prevent the movable body (on-board movable body 32A) operating as the initial operation control from obstructing the image of the customer waiting demo performance (demo movie shown in Figures 87, 88, and 89) displayed on the image display device 5, which would reduce the visibility of the image of the customer waiting demo performance.

Note that Figures 87, 88, and 89 illustrate an example in which a customer waiting demo performance is executed after the initial operation of each movable body is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The period from the initial operation of each movable body to the execution of the customer waiting demo performance may be set to 30 seconds or more, which is the period required for the initial operation of each movable body, thereby providing a sufficient period between the initial operation of each movable body and the customer waiting demo performance, and preventing the visibility of the customer waiting demo performance from being obstructed.

Furthermore, the period from the completion of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo effect is executed may be different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start or a hot start. Regardless of whether the period from the completion of the initial operation of each movable body until the customer waiting demo effect is executed differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start or a hot start, the customer waiting demo effect may be executed after the completion of the initial operation of each movable body, thereby preventing the customer waiting demo effect from being interrupted by the movable body operating as an initial operation.

(Initial Operation Control Variation 9)
In the above-described modified example, as shown in FIG. 86, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that the on-board movable body 32A is at a dead end, the on-board movable body 32A is not operated as a movable body notice, but an effect is displayed on the image display device 5, LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) are turned on, and sounds corresponding to the movable body notice are output from the speakers 8L, 8R. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, as shown in Figure 90 as variant example 9, if the performance control CPU 120 determines that the on-board movable body 32A is at a dead end, when the customer waiting demo performance is executed after the special initial operation is completed, the on-board movable body 32A may not be operated, but effects corresponding to the customer waiting demo performance may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, on-board movable body LED 9d, under-board movable body LED 9e, on-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) may be lit according to the customer waiting demo performance.

By doing this, it is possible to prevent malfunctions caused by forcing the on-board movable body 32A to operate excessively as part of the customer waiting demo performance when the on-board movable body 32A is not operating normally, while also reducing the performance effect of the customer waiting demo performance.

Form A3 (power cut just before the big hit fluctuation ends)
Next, the operation confirmation control when the power interruption occurs just before the end of the big win fluctuation will be described with reference to Fig. 91. Fig. 91 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when the power interruption occurs just before the end of the big win fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 91, after the variable display based on the jackpot variable pattern has begun, a combination of symbols that confirm a jackpot is statically displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and immediately before the variable display ends (for example, approximately 5,000 ms before the end of the variable display, such as when the variable display resumes and a re-lottery effect is executed after the combination of symbols that confirm a jackpot is temporarily statically displayed, or during the symbol confirmation display period, which is the minimum period from when decorative symbols are statically displayed in the variable display until the variable display of decorative symbols begins in the next variable display), if a power outage occurs and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started up in a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), the jackpot variable display will resume, but the variable display will immediately end and control of the jackpot gaming state will begin.

Therefore, while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing, the power outage recovery command and pattern confirmation command sent based on the recovery of the CPU 103 are received, and then the fanfare effect is started based on the effect control CPU 120 receiving the jackpot start command.

In more detail, until a predetermined time (e.g., approximately 1000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage recovery command and the pattern confirmation command were received, the illumination of the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, the upper frame movable element LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, and the output of background music (BGM), are restricted. In other words, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, the upper frame movable element LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are turned off, and background music (BGM) is not output.

After that, when a jackpot start command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, the above-frame movable element LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part), and background music (BGM) corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part) will begin to be output. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (e.g., 2000 ms) has elapsed since the jackpot start command was received, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 will end, and the display of the effect image corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part) will begin. Note that the effect image corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part) will be displayed as a black screen until a predetermined time (e.g., 1500 ms) has elapsed since its start.

Next, when a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage restoration command was received, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable body is initiated. After that, once the initial operation of each movable body is complete, the fanfare performance (introduction part) ends, and the fanfare performance (right-hit notification part) begins.

As shown in Figures 63 (F7) and (F8), in the right-hit notification part of the fanfare presentation, right-hit prompt displays 132SG431 and 132SG432 are displayed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball into the right play area, and a right-hit operation prompt is performed. Therefore, if the initial operation of the movable body is being performed when the right-hit notification part starts, the movable body operating due to the initial operation will obstruct the visibility of the right-hit notification part of the fanfare presentation, such as right-hit prompt display 132SG431, and there is a risk that the player will not perform the right-hit operation and will suffer a disadvantage.

Furthermore, in the right-hit notification part of the fanfare effect, as shown in Figure 63 (F7), when the right-hit promotion display 132SG431 is displayed, a movable body effect is executed in which the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the performance position. Therefore, if the initial operation of the movable body is being executed when the right-hit notification part starts, it becomes difficult to determine whether the movable body is operating as the initial operation or the right-hit operation promotion effect.

In this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the fanfare effect is executed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the fanfare effect (right-hit notification part) that involves the operation of the on-board movable body 32A begins. This prevents the movable body performing the initial operation from interfering with the visibility of the right-hit notification part in the fanfare effect, and prevents it from becoming difficult to distinguish whether the initial operation or the right-hit operation promotion effect is operating.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the fanfare effect is executed, the introductory part period and initial movement period of the fanfare effect are set so that the initial movement of the movable body is completed within the period from the start of the fanfare effect to the start of the right-hit promotion effect (see Figure 63 (F1) to (F6)).

In addition, during the introductory part of the fanfare effect, when announcing which of the multiple types of jackpots A to E has occurred, it is possible to display the jackpot type display 132SG421 corresponding to the jackpot type being controlled, and the pre-jackpot type display introduction display 132SG422 before the jackpot type display 132SG421 is displayed.In the operation confirmation control, the initial operation ends before the display of the jackpot type display 132SG421 in Figure 63 (F6), so even if operation confirmation control is performed during the fanfare effect, it is possible to know which type of jackpot has been controlled to.

In addition, when the fanfare effect is executed, the above-board movable body LED9d, below-board movable body LED9e, above-frame movable body LED9f, and chance button LED9g, which are performing their initial operation, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), while the above-board movable body LED9d, below-board movable body LED9e, above-frame movable body LED9f, and chance button LED9g, which are not operating under operation confirmation control, will light up in a light highlight mode corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part) (for example, blue-based colors for a 3R jackpot, red-based colors for a 10R jackpot, etc.), but the initial highlight mode (white light) is not used in the light highlight mode corresponding to the fanfare effect (introduction part). Therefore, it is possible to indicate that the movable body is under operation confirmation control even during the fanfare effect.

In addition, when the first movable body is moving due to the initial operation, the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in an initial highlighting mode (white light), while the movable body LED of the second movable body emits light in an illumination mode corresponding to the fanfare performance (introduction part), making it possible to indicate that the movable body is performing its initial operation even during the fanfare performance.

In addition, when a fanfare effect is being performed, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b emit light at a first brightness in a lighting pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect, while during operation confirmation control, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, and the above-frame movable body LED 9f emit light at a second brightness (low brightness) lower than the first brightness (high brightness), thereby reducing power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load.

In addition, the duty ratio of all movable body LEDs may be reduced from the time the power is turned on until the initial operation of all movable bodies is completed (until the last movable body to be initialized is placed at the origin position), or the duty ratio may be reduced until a predetermined time has elapsed.

Furthermore, when the first movable body is operating due to the initial operation, the movable body LED of the second movable body does not emit light in the initial highlight mode, and the movable body LED of the first movable body emits light in the initial highlight mode, making it possible to draw attention to the movable body that is operating due to the operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, the movable body LED of a movable body during initial operation emits light in a common initial highlight mode (white light) when the movable body advances from the origin position to the performance position and when it retreats from the performance position to the origin position. Meanwhile, the movable body LED of a movable body operated by performance operation control can emit light in different modes when the movable body advances from the origin position to the performance position and when it retreats from the performance position to the origin position. Specifically, during an advance operation, the movable body LED emits light in a first mode (e.g., a wave mode in which frame LEDs 9a, 9b, attacca LED 9c, movable body LEDs 9d, 9e, etc., are illuminated in stages from one side to the other at a predetermined cycle), and during a retreat operation, the movable body LED emits light in a second mode (e.g., a flash mode in which the LEDs flash at a fast cycle (e.g., every 30 ms)). This makes it easy to distinguish whether operation confirmation control or performance operation control is being performed based on the initial highlight mode (white light) and the mode corresponding to the performance.

In addition, in the movable body performance executed in the right-hit notification part of the fanfare performance, the on-board movable body 32A operates in the same operating mode as the initial operation (descending from the origin position to the performance position), and in the initial operation, the movable body LED lights up in an initial highlighting mode (white lighting), and in the movable body performance, it lights up in a mode corresponding to the right-hit notification part that is different from the initial highlighting mode (white lighting), and when the movable body operates in the initial operation, sound output is limited, and in the movable body performance executed in the right-hit notification part, a sound corresponding to the right-hit notification part is output. In this way, it is easy to determine whether operation confirmation control or performance operation control is being performed, based on the initial highlighting mode and the mode corresponding to the right-hit notification part.

In this embodiment, an example has been given in which the operating mode of the on-board movable body 32A in the movable body performance executed in the right-hit notification part is the same as the operating mode of the on-board movable body 32A in the initial operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. The operating mode of the on-board movable body 32A in the movable body performance and the operating mode of the on-board movable body 32A in the initial operation may only have some of the same operating mode, or may have all of the same operating mode. Furthermore, the operating modes of the two may all be different.

In addition, when a moving object effect is executed in the right-hit notification part of the fanfare effect, the moving object can be operated by a special action and an effect display corresponding to the moving object effect can be displayed. If the action confirmation control cannot be completed normally over a specific period of time, it can be determined to be an action error and the action confirmation control can be performed again. If the action confirmation control has been performed over a specific period of time, the special action can be restricted when the moving object effect is executed, while an effect display can be displayed. In this way, the initial action cannot be interfered with by the special action, and the player can be informed by the effect display that the moving object effect has been executed.

Form A4 (power cut immediately after fanfare performance begins)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of the fanfare effect will be described with reference to Fig. 92. Fig. 92 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of the fanfare effect.

As shown in Figure 92, after the variable display based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern ends with the static display of a combination of jackpot confirmed symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the symbol confirmation display period ends and the jackpot start command is received by the effect control CPU 120, which starts the jackpot fanfare effect. After a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare effect starts, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot gaming state resumes.

"Immediately after the fanfare effect begins" refers specifically to the timing immediately after CPU 103 begins controlling the jackpot, and immediately after the effect control CPU 120, upon receiving the jackpot start command transmitted based on CPU 103's recovery, begins the fanfare effect (introduction part). However, since only the power outage recovery command is transmitted upon CPU 103's recovery after hot start startup, the effect control CPU 120 cannot determine the current game state (e.g., whether or not it is in the fanfare period) until it receives the jackpot opening command. Therefore, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, the above-frame movable element LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g will be in a state corresponding to recovery (e.g., off), and the background music (BGM) will be in a state corresponding to recovery (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, a recovery display 132SG510 appears, displaying the words "Power being restored, please wait" against a black background, indicating that the power is being restored (see Figure 108), and the fact that the power is being restored is announced until the next command is received, that is, for the remaining period of the fanfare.

In addition, operation confirmation control is initiated during the remaining fanfare period announcing that the power outage is being restored, and ends before the fanfare period ends and the round of play begins. During operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g light up in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but at a lower brightness than when they light up during performance operation control.

After that, when a command specifying that the large prize opening is open is received for the first time, the performance control CPU 120 can determine that the first time has started, and so the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, and the above-frame movable element LED 9f will light up in a manner corresponding to the jackpot music that will be output during the jackpot, and background music (BGM) corresponding to the jackpot music will begin to be output. The chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner that indicates that the jackpot music can be selected from multiple songs.

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare effect begins and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, during the operation confirmation control that begins during the remaining period of the fanfare, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, which are the movable bodies that perform the initial operation, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), but at a lower brightness than when they light up during the effect operation control (movable body effect in the win/lose button effect).This reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and by making the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies lower brightness than when the effect operation control is executed, it is possible to prevent the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to confirm due to glare.

Furthermore, upon receiving a command indicating that the large prize opening has opened, effects corresponding to round play (light emission and sound output corresponding to the music played during a jackpot) are initiated. Specifically, during the round play period, the large prize opening is open for an extended period, allowing a large number of game balls to enter. This period is more advantageous to the player than the fanfare period or ending period of a jackpot, and therefore a lively round play effect is provided using images, lights, and sounds. However, by ending the operation confirmation control before the round play effect corresponding to this round play begins, players can enjoy the round play effect without having to worry about the moving body performing its initial operation.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately after the fanfare effect begins and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the fanfare effect period and initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the fanfare effect ends (see Figures 63 (F2) to (F6)).

The performance control CPU 120 also displays the recovery indicator 132SG510 on the image display device 5 in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of a fanfare performance and the power is then turned on. It is also capable of performing recovery illumination control to cause the operating upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, and upper frame movable body LED 9f to illuminate in a manner corresponding to the recovery indicator 132SG510 (for example, initial highlighting; white illumination). It is also possible to perform operation confirmation control in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of the fanfare performance and the power is then turned on. This prevents the processing at power-on from becoming too complicated.

In this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-mounted movable body LED 9e, the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are shown as being turned off during power outage recovery, except for the movable body that is performing initial operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LEDs may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the brightness of the light emitted by the movable body LEDs during performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

Furthermore, the image display device 5 displays a common recovery indicator 132SG510 in both cases: if a power outage occurs during variable display and then the power is turned on; and if a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of a fanfare effect and then the power is turned on. However, for example, if a power outage occurs during variable display in a low base state and then the power is turned on, the right-hit prompt indicator 132SG430 will not be displayed when the recovery indicator 132SG510 is displayed. However, if a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of a fanfare effect and then the power is turned on, the right-hit prompt indicator 132SG430 will be displayed when the recovery indicator 132SG510 is displayed. Although there are differences, as long as the display mode of at least the recovery indicator 132SG510 is the same, the display modes of the other indicators do not need to be the same.

In addition, if a power outage occurs during variable display in a high base state or during a jackpot and the power is then turned on, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is displayed at the same time as the recovery display 132SG510. However, for example, regardless of the game state, only the recovery display 132SG510 may be displayed when the power is turned on after a power outage, and it may not be necessary to determine whether or not to display the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 depending on the game state. Furthermore, the display mode of the recovery display 132SG510 may be different depending on whether a power outage occurs during variable display in a low base state and the power is then turned on, and whether a power outage occurs during variable display in a high base state or during a jackpot and the power is then turned on. In this case, it is preferable that the display mode encourages a right-hit operation when a power outage occurs during variable display in a high base state or during a jackpot and the power is then turned on.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during a fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, the performance control CPU 120 can display the recovery in progress display 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and cause the movable bodies that are performing their initial operations, such as the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, to light up in an initial highlight mode (white lit).If a power outage occurs simultaneously with the execution of a fanfare performance and the power is then turned on, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, that are not performing their initial operations, can light up in a mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off in this embodiment) throughout the execution period of the fanfare performance, and the initial highlight mode (white lit) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off).In this way, it is possible to draw attention to the movable bodies that are operating through operation confirmation control, even during recovery.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 causes the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable bodies performing initial operation to light up in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), it controls the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable bodies to light up at a lower brightness than the mode corresponding to the music during a jackpot (see Figure 67 (B)), making it possible to reduce power consumption when the power is turned on and reduce the load.

In addition, the mode corresponding to the restoration display (light off) is not used in the lighting mode corresponding to the fanfare effect (music played during a jackpot), so even if the fanfare effect was playing before the power outage, it is possible to notify the player that restoration is underway when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, the operation mode of each movable body under operation confirmation control is the same as the operation mode of each movable body under performance operation control (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the performance position), and the movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) until the initial operation is completed under operation confirmation control, and emit light in a rainbow flash mode during the first period (for example, the advance operation period) and in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode during the second period (for example, the retreat operation period). This makes it easy to distinguish whether operation confirmation control or performance operation control is being performed.

Form A5 (power cut just before the fanfare ends)
Next, the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of a fanfare effect will be described with reference to Figures 93 to 95. Figure 93 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of a fanfare effect. Figure 94 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the operation confirmation control is executed during a fanfare effect. Figure 95 (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the on-board movable body and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the below-board movable body and various displays.

As shown in Figure 93, after a power outage occurs just before the jackpot fanfare effect that started upon receiving a jackpot start command ends, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start mode (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot gaming state resumes.

"Immediately before the end of the fanfare effect" specifically refers to the timing immediately before the end of the fanfare effect (right-hit notification part) started by the effect control CPU 120 based on receiving a jackpot start command, in other words, the timing immediately before the end of the fanfare period during which the CPU 103 waits from the time it starts controlling the jackpot until it starts controlling the round of play (for example, the timing approximately 5000 ms before the end of the fanfare period).

In this case, after starting with a hot start, the presentation control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command sent when the CPU 103 recovers and the large prize opening open command corresponding to the first time. Based on this, throughout the round of play, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, and the upper frame movable element LED 9f will light up in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot, the attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the opening, the chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner suggesting music selection, and background music (BGM) will be output in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot.

When started with a hot start, if there is remaining time in the fanfare period (for example, approximately 1000 ms), the CPU 103 will receive a power outage recovery command based on its recovery, and then after the remaining time of 1000 ms has elapsed, the first corresponding command to specify that the large prize slot is open will be received. During the remaining time in the fanfare period, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and attacker LED 9c will be turned off, and background sound (BGM) will not be output. The movable body LEDs may also emit light in a manner corresponding to the recovery period.

Furthermore, after operation confirmation control of each movable body begins with the start of the first game, the operation confirmation control ends before the opening control of the large prize opening for that first game ends and the next round of play begins. During operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and attacker LED 9c emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during performance operation control.

After that, after receiving a command specifying after the large prize opening has been opened in the first round, the performance control CPU 120 receives a command specifying while the large prize opening is open in the second round. The frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, and the above-frame movable element LED 9f will then light up in an open mode to emphasize the opening for a predetermined period of time, and then light up in a mode corresponding to the jackpot music that is output during the jackpot, and background music (BGM) corresponding to the jackpot music will begin to be output. The chance button LED 9g will light up in a mode indicating that the jackpot music can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c will light up in a mode corresponding to the opening.

In this way, if a power outage occurs just before the end of the fanfare effect and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, during the operation confirmation control that begins during the round play period, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, which are the movable bodies that perform the initial operation, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), but they will light up at a lower brightness than when they light up during the performance operation control. This reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and by making the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies less bright than when the performance operation control is executed, it is possible to prevent the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to confirm due to glare.

In addition, the operation confirmation control in the event that the power is cut off and then turned back on just before the fanfare performance ends can be completed before the opening control of the large prize opening for the first round of play ends, so even after the initial operation has ended, players can aim to win at the large prize opening without being obstructed by the moving body.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the fanfare effect, the special prize opening opening control period and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the special prize opening opening control for the first play ends (see Figure 63 (F8) to (F9)).

Also, as shown in Figure 94 (A), in round play where the large prize opening is controlled to be open for a specified period after the fanfare effect has ended, images for the round effect are displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and a right-hit promotion display 132SG430 indicating the direction in which the game ball will be shot is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and round play-related displays related to the round game, such as the number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, and number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, are displayed on the upper side of the display screen.

Also, as shown in Figure 94 (A), when the on-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32a can move up and down in the shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the support part 32b can move up and down in the shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Also, when the below-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the shaded area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In detail, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is displayed in a position where only the support section 32b can overlap, the number of rounds display 132SG451 and the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454 are displayed in a position where the presentation section 32a and part of the support section 32b can overlap, and the number of winning balls display 132SG452 and the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453 are displayed in a position where the presentation section 32a can overlap.

Next, the relationship between the various displays when the upper and lower movable bodies 32A and 32B perform their initial operations will be explained with reference to Figures 95(A) and (B).

As shown in Figure 95 (A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, or number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figure 94 (A)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position and passes through the intermediate position, the presentation section 32a overlaps in front of the number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, and number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see these displays. Furthermore, the support section 32b overlaps in front of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 (see Figure 94 (B)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A passes through the intermediate position and descends to the presentation position, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 becomes visible, but because part of the consecutive wins/total balls dispensed display 132SG454 overlaps with the presentation section 32a on the front side, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the consecutive wins/total balls dispensed display 132SG454. However, because the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, and number of balls dispensed display 132SG453 do not overlap with either the presentation section 32a or the support section 32b, the player can see these displays (see Figure 94 (C)).

When returning from the presentation position to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with each display is the same; however, the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the origin position to the presentation position. Therefore, as shown in Figure 95 (A), the overlap time is longer during the retraction operation than during the advancement operation, and the time during which it is difficult for the player to see is also longer.

As shown in Figure 95 (A), when an initial operation is performed during a round of play, the time during which the above-board movable body 32A or the below-board movable body 32B overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see, is shorter than the time during which the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the jackpot information display (e.g., number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) related to the jackpot. Therefore, the visibility of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, which has a significant impact on play, is less likely to be obstructed by the above-board movable body 32A or the below-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation.

In other words, during round play, when the big prize opening is opened and the player has an advantage, if the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is covered by the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A or the under-board movable body 32B, the player may miss the opportunity to make the game ball enter the prize by performing a right-hit operation while the big prize opening is open, which may cause the player to suffer a disadvantage. Therefore, it is preferable that the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 maintains high visibility compared to other big prize information displays.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 95 (B), when the under-board movable body 32B is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, or number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figure 94 (A)).

Next, while the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and reaches the presentation position, and even after it reaches the presentation position, it does not overlap with any of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, or number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figures 94 (D) and (E)). Furthermore, the situation in which the under-board movable body 32B overlaps with each display remains the same when returning from the presentation position to the origin position.

As shown in Figure 95 (A), when an initial operation is performed during a round of play, the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see, is shorter than the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the jackpot information display (e.g., number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) related to the jackpot. Therefore, the visibility of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, which has a significant impact on play, is less likely to be obstructed by the on-board movable body 32A or below-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation.

Furthermore, while the initial operation is being performed, the under-board movable body 32B does not overlap with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 or the jackpot information display (for example, the number of rounds display 132SG451, the number of winning balls display 132SG452, the number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.), so it is visible to the player.

In other words, during round play, when the jackpot opening gives the player an advantage, if the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is covered by the initially operating on-board movable element 32A or the initially operating below-board movable element 32B, the player may miss the opportunity to make the game ball enter the jackpot by operating the right hand while the jackpot opening is open, which could put the player at a disadvantage. However, in this embodiment, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is obscured for a shorter period of time by the initially operating on-board movable element 32A or the initially operating below-board movable element 32B compared to other jackpot information displays, preventing the player from suffering any disadvantages.

In addition, during operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of a movable body undergoing initial operation lights up in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), while the movable body LED of a movable body not undergoing initial operation lights up in a mode corresponding to the music played during a jackpot (round performance). However, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the music played during a jackpot (round performance), making it possible to draw attention to movable bodies undergoing initial operation even during round play.

In addition, during operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the first movable body that is performing its initial operation lights up in an initial highlight mode (white light), while the movable body LED of the second movable body that is not performing its initial operation lights up in a mode that corresponds to the music played during a jackpot (round performance).However, when the first movable body is moving due to operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of the first movable body lights up in an initial highlight mode (white light), while the movable body LED of the second movable body lights up in a mode that corresponds to the music played during a jackpot (round performance), making it possible to draw attention to the movable body performing its initial operation even during round play.

In addition, in this embodiment, the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of a movable body that has not performed the initial operation lights up in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot (round performance) during a round play when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the fanfare performance ends is the same as the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of a movable body that has not performed the initial operation lights up in a manner corresponding to the music during a jackpot (round performance) during a round play when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the fanfare performance ends. is not limited to this, and in a round of play when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the fanfare effect ends, the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of a movable body that has not performed the initial operation lights up in a manner corresponding to the music played during a jackpot (round effect) may be lower than the light emission brightness when the movable body LED of a movable body that has not performed the initial operation lights up in a manner corresponding to the music played during a jackpot (round effect) in a round of play when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not started with a hot start after a power outage occurs just before the fanfare effect ends. By doing so, it is possible to reduce power consumption when the power is turned on and lighten the load.

Form A6 (power outage immediately after the start of one round of play)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a round of play will be described with reference to Fig. 96. Fig. 96 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a round of play.

As shown in Figure 96, after the jackpot fanfare has ended, a power outage occurs immediately after the round performance begins based on the reception of a command specifying that the jackpot opening is in progress, indicating that the first round of play (first round) has begun. Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start mode (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), control of the jackpot gaming state resumes.

"Immediately after the round effect has started" specifically includes the timing immediately after the effect control CPU 120 starts the round effect based on the receipt of a command specifying that the large prize opening is open, indicating that the first round of play has started, in other words, the timing immediately after the CPU 103 starts controlling the first round of play (for example, the timing immediately after the CPU 103 starts controlling the opening of the large prize opening in the round of play (for example, approximately 1000 ms later)).

In this case, after the hot start, only the power outage restoration command is sent upon recovery of the CPU 103. Therefore, the presentation control CPU 120 cannot determine the current game state (e.g., whether it is currently in a round of play) until it receives the command to restore the first large prize opening. Therefore, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, the upper frame movable element LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in a state corresponding to a restoration in progress (e.g., off), and the background music (BGM) is in a state corresponding to a restoration in progress (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 disappears at the startup timing, a restoration in progress display 132SG510 is displayed (see FIG. 108 ), displaying the words "Power restoration in progress. Please wait" on a black background, indicating that power is being restored. This notification is provided until the next command, the command to restore the first large prize opening, is received, i.e., until the first round of play ends.

Furthermore, operation confirmation control is initiated during the first round of play when it is announced that the power outage is being restored, and is completed before the end of the first round of play. During operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during performance operation control.

After that, when a command specifying that the period during which the large prize opening changed from an open state to a closed state is received, followed by a command specifying that the period during which the large prize opening changed from a closed state to an open state is received, the performance control CPU 120 can determine that the first round of play has ended and the second round of play has begun. As a result, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, and the above-frame movable element LED 9f will light up in a manner corresponding to the jackpot music output during a jackpot, and background music (BGM) corresponding to the jackpot music will begin to be output. The chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner indicating that the jackpot music can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the open state.

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of a round performance and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, during the operation confirmation control that begins during that round of play, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, which are the movable bodies that perform the initial operation, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), but at a lower brightness than when they light up during the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).This reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and by making the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies less bright than when performing the performance operation control, it is possible to prevent the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to see due to glare.

In addition, if the power is cut off and then turned on immediately after the opening control of the large prize opening during the first round of play has begun, the operation confirmation control can be completed before the opening control of the large prize opening during that first round of play ends. This means that even after the initial operation has ended, players can aim to win at the large prize opening without being obstructed by the moving body.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately after the opening control of the special prize opening in the first round of play has begun and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, the opening control period of the special prize opening and the initial operation period for one round of play are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the opening control of the special prize opening in that first round of play ends (see Figure 63 (F9)).

The performance control CPU 120 also displays the recovery in progress indicator 132SG510 on the image display device 5 in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during the variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to an open state and the power is then turned on. It is also capable of performing recovery light emission control, which causes the operating upper board movable element LED9d, lower board movable element LED9e, and upper frame movable element LED9f to emit light in a manner corresponding to the recovery in progress indicator 132SG510 (for example, initial highlighting; white light). This allows for operation confirmation control in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during the variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to an open state and the power is then turned on. This prevents the processing at power-on from becoming too complicated.

In this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-mounted movable body LED 9e, the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are shown as being turned off during power outage recovery, except for the movable body that is performing initial operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LEDs may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the brightness of the light emitted by the movable body LEDs during performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

In addition, if a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to the open state and the power is then turned on, the performance control CPU 120 can display the recovery in progress display 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and cause the movable bodies that are performing their initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, to light up in an initial highlight mode (white lit).If a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to the open state and the power is then turned on, the movable bodies that are not performing their initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, can light up in a mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off in this embodiment) for the period during which the large prize opening is controlled to the open state, and the initial highlight mode (white lit) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off).In this way, it is possible to draw attention to the movable bodies that are operating through operation confirmation control, even during recovery.

In addition, the mode corresponding to the restoration display (light off) is not used in the lighting mode corresponding to the round performance (music played during a jackpot), so it is possible to notify the player that restoration is underway when the power is turned on, even if the round performance was in progress before the power outage.

In addition, in the above-mentioned form A6, if a power outage occurs immediately after the second or subsequent round of play (R2-R10) has started, the operation will be the same as if a power outage occurred immediately after the control of the first round of play (opening of the large prize opening) has started, as described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Form A7 (power outage just before the end of one round of play)
Next, the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of one round of play will be described with reference to Fig. 97. Fig. 97 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of one round of play.

As shown in Figure 97, after a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the round performance that began based on the reception of a command specifying that the first round of play (first round) has begun, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot game state resumes.

More specifically, "immediately before the round effect ends" refers to the timing immediately before the round effect started by the effect control CPU 120 based on receiving the large prize opening open command indicating that the first round of play has begun ends, in other words, the timing immediately before the CPU 103 ends control of the first round of play (for example, the timing immediately before the control of opening the large prize opening in one round of play ends (e.g., approximately 5000 ms before), the timing when the number of winning balls reaches one ball before the upper limit (e.g., 10 balls) that is the condition for closing the large prize opening, the round interval period in the first round of play, etc.).

In this case, after starting up with a hot start, when the CPU 103 recovers, it receives a power outage recovery command and a command to specify when the first large prize opening is complete. The presentation control CPU 120 determines that it is the first round interval, and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and attack LED 9c become active (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) becomes active (e.g., silent). After the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 disappears, a recovery display 132SG510 appears, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that power is being restored (see FIG. 108). This notification continues until the next command, the second large prize opening command, is received, i.e., until the first round interval ends.

After that, when a second command to specify that the jackpot opening is in progress is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, and the upper frame movable element LED 9f will light up in an open emphasizing manner for the first predetermined time, and then light up in a manner corresponding to the music played during the jackpot (round performance), and the background sound (BGM) corresponding to the music played during the jackpot will begin to be output. Furthermore, the chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner indicating that the music played during the jackpot can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the opening.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the first round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control is initiated during the second round of play and ends before the end of the second round of play period. Note that operation confirmation control may also be initiated during the round interval period of the first round of play. Furthermore, during operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during performance operation control.

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the first round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control will begin during the second round of play that follows that round, and the movable bodies that perform the initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), but at a lower brightness than when they light up during the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).This reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and by making the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies lower brightness than when performing the performance operation control, it is possible to prevent the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to see.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the first round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the opening control period for the special prize opening and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the opening control of the special prize opening in the second round of play is completed (see Figure 63 (F10)).

In addition, in the above-mentioned form A7, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the second or subsequent round of play (2R to 10R), the operation will be the same as if a power outage occurred immediately after the control of the first round of play (opening of the large prize opening) began as described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Pattern A8 (power interruption immediately after the start of a special interval)
Next, the operation confirmation control when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of a special interval will be described with reference to Fig. 98. Fig. 98 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power interruption occurs immediately after the start of a special interval.

In this embodiment, if the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, the round interval period after the opening control of the large prize entry port has ended in all rounds of play is 0.5 seconds, whereas if the jackpot type is jackpot C, jackpot D, or jackpot E, the special round interval period after the opening control of the large prize entry port has ended in the third round of play is 30 seconds (see Figure 19), and during this special round interval period, a promotion effect (see Figures 64 (F21) to (F29)) is performed as a special interval effect.

As shown in Figure 98, after a power outage occurs just before the third round of jackpots C to E ends, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start mode (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot gaming state resumes.

"Immediately before the end of the third round of jackpots C to E" specifically refers to the timing immediately before the end of the round of jackpots initiated by the presentation control CPU 120 based on the receipt of the large prize opening opening command indicating that the third round of play has begun, in other words, the timing immediately before the CPU 103 ends control of the opening of the large prize opening in the third round of play (for example, the timing immediately before control of the opening of the large prize opening in the third round of play ends (for example, approximately 5000 ms before), or the timing when the number of winning balls reaches one ball before the upper limit (for example, 10 balls) that is the condition for closing the large prize opening).

In this case, after starting up with a hot start, when the CPU 103 recovers, it receives a power outage recovery command and a command to indicate when the third large prize opening is complete. The presentation control CPU 120 determines that the third special round interval is in progress, and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and attack LED 9c become active (e.g., off), and the background music (BGM) becomes active (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 disappears, a recovery display 132SG510 appears, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that power is being restored (see FIG. 108). This notification continues until the next command, the second large prize opening command, is received, i.e., until the third special round interval ends.

After that, when the fourth command to specify that the jackpot opening is in progress is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, and the upper frame movable element LED 9f will light up in an open emphasizing manner for the first predetermined time, and then light up in a manner corresponding to the music played during the jackpot (round performance), and the background sound (BGM) corresponding to the music played during the jackpot will begin to be output. Furthermore, the chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner indicating that the music played during the jackpot can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the opening.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the control to open the large prize slot during the third round of play, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control begins during the third special round interval period and ends before the end of the third special round interval period. Furthermore, during operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during performance operation control.

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the control to open the large prize slot during the third round of play, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, operation confirmation control will begin during the third special round interval, and the initial operating movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), but at a lower brightness than when they light up during the performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).This reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and by making the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies less bright than when performing the performance operation control, it is possible to prevent the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to see.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the opening control of the special prize opening during the third round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the opening control of the special prize opening, the round interval period, and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the end of the third special round interval period (see Figure 64 (F21) to (F29)).

In the above-mentioned form A8, an example was given of a form in which a special round interval is set after the opening control of the large prize opening in the third round of play has ended, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a special round interval may also be set after the opening control of the large prize opening in a round of play other than the third has ended.

The performance control CPU 120 also displays the recovery in progress indicator 132SG510 on the image display device 5 in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on; when a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state and the power is then turned on. It is also capable of performing recovery light emission control, which causes the operating upper board movable element LED9d, lower board movable element LED9e, and upper frame movable element LED9f to emit light in a manner corresponding to the recovery in progress indicator 132SG510 (for example, initial highlighting; white light). This allows for operation confirmation control in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state and the power is then turned on. This prevents the processing at power-on from becoming too complicated.

In addition, if a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to the closed state and the power is then turned on, the performance control CPU 120 can display the recovery in progress display 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and cause the movable bodies that are performing their initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, to light up in an initial highlight mode (white lit).If a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to the closed state and the power is then turned on, the movable bodies that are not performing their initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, can light up in a mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off in this embodiment) for the period during which the large prize opening is controlled to the closed state, and the initial highlight mode (white lit) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off).In this way, it is possible to draw attention to the movable bodies that are operating through operation confirmation control, even during recovery.

In addition, in this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are shown as being turned off during power outage recovery, except for the movable body that is performing initial operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LEDs may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the brightness of the light emitted by the movable body LEDs in the performance operation control (the movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

In addition, if a power outage occurs at the same time the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state and the power is then turned on, the effect control CPU 120 will display the recovery display 132SG510 on the image display device 5, and can execute an interval effect when the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state during one round of play.In the interval effect, the movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button 631B, and the attacker LED 9c, can be made to light up in a manner corresponding to the music played during a jackpot (interval effect), and the movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, which are performing their initial operation, can be made to light up in an initial highlighting manner (white light). Then, if a power outage occurs at the same time the big prize opening is controlled to a closed state (special round interval) during the third round of play and the power is then turned on, the movable bodies that have not yet performed their initial operation (the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button 631B, and the attacker LED 9c) can be made to light up in a manner corresponding to the recovery display (turned off in this embodiment) throughout the execution period of the third special round interval control, and the initial highlighting mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the interval presentation (music during a big win). This makes it possible to notify that recovery is in progress when the power is turned on.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a power outage recovery command and a command to specify after the third large prize opening are received upon recovery of the CPU 103, during the third special round interval period, the image display device 5 displays the recovery indicator 132SG510, and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c are turned on (for example, turned off) in a state corresponding to the recovery state, and the background music (BGM) is turned on in a state corresponding to the recovery state. In the example shown, the display changes to a recovery mode (for example, silent), and this recovery mode continues until the fourth command specifying that the large prize slot is open is received, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the interval presentation is made up of an introduction part (see FIG. 64 (F21) to (F23)) and a result notification part (see FIG. 64 (F24) to (F29)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part, it is preferable that the operation confirmation control be performed before the result notification part starts. This makes it possible to avoid the movable body performing the initial operation interfering with the visibility of the result notification part in the interval presentation.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a movable body presentation using the under-board movable body 32B as a promotion presentation in the result notification part (see Figure 64 (F24)), and when the movable body presentation is executed, it is possible to control the presentation operation in a manner that is common to the operation manner of the under-board movable body 32B that operates under operation confirmation control, and it is preferable that sound output is limited when the under-board movable body 32B operates under operation confirmation control, and that when the under-board movable body 32B operates in the movable body presentation, a sound corresponding to the movable body presentation is output. In this way, it is easy to distinguish whether operation confirmation control or presentation operation control is being performed.

Furthermore, in the movable body presentation in the result notification part, an effect display corresponding to the movable body presentation (see FIG. 64 (F24)) can be displayed. The operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under the operation confirmation control is the same as the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under the promotion presentation (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the presentation position). If the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally over a specific period of time, an operation error can be determined and the operation confirmation control can be performed again. If a power outage occurs just before the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state during a round of play in which an interval presentation is executed, and the operation confirmation control that begins when the power is then turned on does not complete normally, the timing at which the operation error is determined overlaps with the execution period of the promotion presentation. If a promotion presentation is executed during the specific period in which the operation confirmation control is being performed, the movable body presentation can be restricted while an effect display can be displayed. In this way, the promotion presentation can prevent the operation confirmation control from being interfered with, and the effect display can indicate to the player that the movable body presentation has been executed.

Furthermore, the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under operation confirmation control is the same as the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under the promotion effect (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the performance position), and the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button 631B of the movable body emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) until the initial operation is completed under operation confirmation control, and in performance operation control (for example, in the case of a successful promotion in the promotion effect), emit light in a rainbow flash mode during the first period (for example, the advancement operation period), and emit light in a smooth rainbow mode different from the rainbow flash mode during the second period (for example, the retreat operation period). This makes it easy to distinguish whether operation confirmation control or performance operation control is being performed.

In this embodiment, the movable body effect executed during the special round interval period after the opening control of the large prize opening in the third round of play has ended is an example in which the under-board movable body 32B rises to perform an advancement effect that notifies the player that the jackpot is a 10-round jackpot, which is more advantageous to the player than a 3-round jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various movable body effects can be applied in addition to the advancement effect described above.

For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine in which the game state after the jackpot ends in a probability variable state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than the normal state) based on the detection of the game ball passing through the second count switch 132SG024 during a specific round of play during a jackpot, as shown in Figure 99, the movable body effect executed during the special round interval period may be such that the under-board movable body 32B rises, thereby performing a V promotion effect to notify the player that the jackpot in question is a probability variable jackpot, which is more advantageous to the player than a non-probability variable jackpot (a jackpot in which the game state after the jackpot ends does not become a probability variable state).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 99, if this V promotion effect is composed of an introductory part and a result notification part that is executed after the introductory part and notifies the result of the introductory part, if a power outage occurs at the same time as the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state, and then the power is turned on, it is preferable that the operation confirmation control ends before the result notification part of the V promotion effect starts.

Form A9 (power interruption immediately before the start of a round game in which promotion effects are executed) <Modification>
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately before the start of a round game in which a promotion effect is executed will be described with reference to Fig. 100. Fig. 100 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately before the start of a round game in which a promotion effect is executed.

In this embodiment, an example has been given of a form in which a promotion effect (see Figure 64 (F21) to (F29)) is performed as a special interval effect during the special round interval period (30 seconds) after the opening control of the large prize opening has ended in the third round of play. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion effect described above may also be executable during a specific round of play period (for example, the period during which the opening control and closing control of the large prize opening are being performed in the third round of play), as shown in Figure 100.

In this case, the promotion effect is composed of an introduction part (see Figure 64 (F21) to (F23)) and a result notification part (see Figure 64 (F24) to (F29)) that is executed after the introduction part and notifies the result of the introduction part. If the jackpot type is jackpot A (3R jackpot), the result notification part will notify the player that it is a jackpot A in a promotion failure manner, and if the jackpot type is jackpot B (10R jackpot), which is more advantageous to the player than jackpot A (3R jackpot), the result notification part will notify the player that it is a jackpot B in a promotion success manner. In other words, it is preferable that the promotion effect be executable when the variable display result of the first special pattern is a jackpot (first hit).

As shown in Figure 100, after a power outage occurs just before the start of the third round of jackpots A and B, which executes the promotion effects, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot gaming state resumes.

The timing immediately before the start of the third round effect in which the promotion effect is executed refers, in more detail, to the timing immediately before the end of the round effect started by the effect control CPU 120 based on the receipt of the command specifying that the large prize opening is open, indicating that the second round of play has started; in other words, the timing immediately before the CPU 103 ends control of the opening of the large prize opening in the second round of play (for example, the timing immediately before the end of control of the opening of the large prize opening in the second round of play (for example, approximately 5000 ms before), the timing when the number of winning balls is one ball before the upper limit (for example, 10 balls) that is the condition for closing the large prize opening, the second round interval period, etc.).

In this case, after starting up with a hot start, when the CPU 103 recovers, it receives a power outage recovery command and a command to specify when the second large prize opening is about to begin. The presentation control CPU 120 determines that it is the second round interval, and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and attack LED 9c enter a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) enters a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 disappears, a recovery in progress display 132SG510 appears, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that power is being restored (see FIG. 108). This notification continues until the next command, the third large prize opening opening command, is received, i.e., until the second round interval ends.

After that, when the third command to specify that the large prize opening is open is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, and the above-frame movable element LED 9f will light up in an open emphasizing manner for an initial predetermined period of time, and then light up in a manner corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part), and the background sound (BGM) corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part) will begin to be output. Furthermore, the chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner indicating that the background sound (BGM) corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part) can be selected from multiple songs, and the attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the opening.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the control to open the large prize opening during the second round of play, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control is initiated during the second round interval period (during recovery) or the third round of play, and ends before the part announcing the results of the promotion effect executed during the third round of play begins. Furthermore, during operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during the effect operation control (promotion effect).

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the control to open the large prize slot during the second round of play, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, operation confirmation control will begin during the second round interval period or the third round of play, and the initial operating movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), but at a lower brightness than when they light up during the performance operation control (promotion effect). This reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and by making the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies less bright than when performing the performance operation control, it is possible to prevent the movable body operation from being too bright and difficult to see due to glare.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the opening control of the special prize opening during the second round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the opening control of the special prize opening, the round interval period, and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the result notification part of the promotion effect executed during the third round of play begins.

Note that, in the above-mentioned form A9, an example was given of a form in which the promotion effect is executed in the third round of play, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion effect may be executed in a round of play other than the third.

In addition, during operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of a movable body performing an initial operation lights up in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), while the movable body LED of a movable body not performing an initial operation lights up in a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part). However, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part), making it possible to draw attention to the movable body performing an initial operation even during the promotion performance.

In addition, if a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the third round of play and the power is then turned on, when the movable body is moving due to operation confirmation control, the initially operating movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light) rather than in a mode corresponding to the promotion effect (introduction part), thereby reducing power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the start of the third round of play and the power is then turned on, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the initial operation of the movable body will end before the operation prompt part of the introductory part of the promotion effect executed in the third round of play, that is, the operation prompt effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 631B, begins, so the visibility of the operation prompt effect in the introductory part will not be obstructed by the movable body operating under operation confirmation control.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 ensures that the operating mode (the mode in which the under-board movable body 32B moves from the origin position to the performance position) is the same when performing initial operation and when performing performance operation in a promotion performance; when performing initial operation, the under-board movable body LED 9e lights up in a mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display 132SG510 (for example, initial highlight mode; white light), but the output of background sound (BGM) is limited; and when performing performance operation in a promotion performance, the under-board movable body LED 9e lights up in a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (result notification part) (for example, rainbow mode), while sound effects in a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (result notification part) are output. This makes it easy to distinguish whether the initial operation or the promotion performance is being performed.

Furthermore, in the movable body presentation in the result notification part, an effect display corresponding to the movable body presentation (see FIG. 64 (F24)) can be displayed. The operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under the operation confirmation control is the same as the operation mode of the under-board movable body 32B under the promotion presentation (for example, the operation mode of moving from the origin position to the presentation position). If the operation confirmation control cannot be completed normally over a specific period of time, an operation error can be determined and the operation confirmation control can be performed again. If a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the third round presentation in which the promotion presentation is executed, and the operation confirmation control that is started when the power is then turned on does not complete normally, the timing at which the operation error is determined overlaps with the execution period of the promotion presentation. If the promotion presentation is executed during the specific period in which the operation confirmation control is being performed, the movable body presentation can be restricted while an effect display can be displayed. In this way, the promotion presentation can prevent the operation confirmation control from being interfered with, and the effect display can indicate to the player that the movable body presentation has been executed.

Form A10 (power outage just before the end of the final round of play)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the final round of play will be described with reference to Fig. 101. Fig. 101 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the final round of play.

As shown in Figure 101, after a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the round performance that began based on the reception of a command specifying that the 10th round of play (final round) for jackpots B, D, and E has begun, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot gaming state is resumed.

More specifically, "immediately before the end of the round effect" refers to the timing immediately before the end of the round effect initiated by the effect control CPU 120 based on the receipt of the command specifying that the large prize opening is open, indicating that the 10th round of play has begun, in other words, the timing immediately before the CPU 103 ends control of the 10th round of play (for example, the timing immediately before the end of control of the opening of the large prize opening in the final round of play (e.g., approximately 5000 ms before), the timing when the number of winning balls is one ball before the upper limit (e.g., 10 balls) that is the condition for closing the large prize opening, the round interval period in the 10th round of play, etc.).

In this case, after starting up with a hot start, when the CPU 103 recovers, it receives a power outage recovery command and a command to indicate when the 10th jackpot opening is complete. The presentation control CPU 120 determines that the 10th round interval is in progress, and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, chance button LED 9g, and attack LED 9c become active (e.g., off), and the background music (BGM) becomes active (e.g., silent). After the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 disappears, the recovery display 132SG510 appears, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that power is being restored (see FIG. 108). This notification continues until the next command, the jackpot end command, is received, i.e., until the 10th round interval ends.

After that, when a jackpot end command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, and the above-frame movable element LED 9f will light up in a manner corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part), and background music (BGM) corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part) will begin to be output. Furthermore, the chance button LED 9g and attacker LED 9c will light up in a manner corresponding to the default (for example, lit white or off).

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the 10th round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control is initiated during the ending period and ends before the end of the ending period. Note that operation confirmation control may also be initiated during the round interval period of the 10th round of play. Furthermore, during operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the 10th and final round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control is initiated during the ending period, and the initial operating movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light). However, since these emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance), power consumption is reduced when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and by making the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies less bright than when performing performance operation control, it is possible to prevent the movable body operation from becoming too bright to be easily confirmed.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the tenth and final round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the ending period and initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the start of the time-saving state notification part (see Figures 64 (F32) and (F34)) in which information regarding the time-saving state is notified during the ending period.

In addition, while the above-mentioned form A10 illustrates examples of operation in jackpots B, D, and E, where the final round is 10 rounds, the present invention is not limited to this. In the case of jackpots A and C, where the final round is 3 rounds, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the third and final round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the round play period and initial operation period may be designed so that the initial operation of the movable body ends before the start of the time-saving state notification part (Figure 63 (F13)) in which information regarding the time-saving state is notified. Furthermore, the final round is not limited to the above-mentioned 3 or 10 rounds, and can be modified in various ways.

In addition, during operation confirmation control, the movable body LED of a movable body performing an initial operation lights up in an initial highlight mode (white lighting), while the movable body LED of a movable body not performing an initial operation lights up in a mode corresponding to the promotion performance (introduction part). However, the initial highlight mode (white lighting) is not used in the mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part), making it possible to draw attention to movable bodies performing an initial operation even during the ending performance.

In addition, if a power outage occurs just before the end of the final round and the power is then turned on, when the movable body is moving due to operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g of the movable body that is performing the initial operation will light up in an initial highlight mode (white light), while the movable body LEDs of the other movable bodies that are not operating will light up in a mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part), making it possible to indicate that the movable body is moving due to operation confirmation control even during the ending performance.

In addition, if a power outage occurs just before the end of the final round and the power is then turned on, when the movable body is moving due to operation confirmation control, the movable bodies that perform the initial operation, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, will emit light at a low brightness in an initial highlight mode (white light) rather than in a mode corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part), thereby reducing power consumption when the power is turned on and reducing the load.

In addition to the movable body LEDs, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b are also designed to emit light at a lower brightness during the operation confirmation control period than when emitting light in a manner corresponding to the ending performance (introduction part). This makes it possible to reduce power consumption and lighten the load when the power is turned on without reducing the decorative effect.

Form A11 (power outage immediately after the start of the ending performance)
Next, the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance will be described with reference to Fig. 102. Fig. 102 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance.

As shown in Figure 102, after the round interval presentation ends in the 10th round (final round) of jackpots B, D, and E, a power outage occurs immediately after the ending presentation begins based on the receipt of a jackpot end command, and then the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), and control of the jackpot gaming state resumes.

"Immediately after the ending presentation has begun" specifically includes the timing immediately after the presentation control CPU 120 has begun the introductory part of the ending presentation based on the receipt of the jackpot end command, that is, the timing immediately after the CPU 103 has begun control of the ending period (for example, immediately after the completion of control over the closure of the jackpot opening in the final round of play (for example, approximately 1000 ms later)).

In this case, after starting up with a hot start, only the power outage restoration command is received as the CPU 103 recovers. Therefore, the presentation control CPU 120 cannot determine the current gaming state (whether it is in the ending period, etc.) until it receives the next command (e.g., a customer waiting demo command). Therefore, the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, the upper frame movable element LED 9f, the chance button LED 9g, and the attacker LED 9c will be in a state corresponding to the restoration in progress (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) will be in a state corresponding to the restoration in progress (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the start-up preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the time of startup disappears, the restoration in progress display 132SG510 will be displayed, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait a moment" against a black background, indicating that the power outage is being restored (see FIG. 108), and the fact that the power outage is being restored will be notified until the next command is received.

After that, when a customer waiting demo designation command is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable element LED 9d, the below-board movable element LED 9e, and the above-frame movable element LED 9f will light up in a manner corresponding to the high-base music (time-saving performance), and background music (BGM) corresponding to the high-base music (time-saving performance) will begin to be output. Furthermore, the chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner corresponding to the default (for example, lit white or off), and the attacker LED 9c will be turned off.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending presentation and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control is initiated during the ending period and ends before the ending period ends. Furthermore, during operation confirmation control, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light) during initial operation, but emit light at a lower brightness than when emitting light during presentation operation control (movable body presentation in the win/lose button presentation).

In this way, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, operation confirmation control is initiated during the ending period, and the initial operating movable bodies, the above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g, emit light in an initial highlight mode (white light), but at a lower brightness than when emitting light during performance operation control (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance). This reduces power consumption when the power is turned on, reducing the load on the pachinko gaming machine 1, while also preventing the movable body LEDs attached to the movable bodies from being too bright and making it difficult to confirm their operation.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending presentation and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the ending period and initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the time-saving state notification part (see Figures 64 (F32) and (F34)) in which information regarding the time-saving state is notified starts during the ending period.

In the above-mentioned form A10, examples of operation for jackpots B, D, and E, in which the final round is 10 rounds, were given, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the case of jackpots A and C, in which the final round is 3 rounds, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the third and final round of play and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the round play period and initial operation period may be designed so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed during the ending period before the start of the time-saving state notification part (Figure 63 (F13)), in which information regarding the time-saving state is notified.

Also, while the ending periods for jackpots B, D, and E (10-round jackpots) were explained above as an example, the same operation applies to the ending periods for jackpots A and C (3-round jackpots), so detailed explanations will be omitted.

The performance control CPU 120 also displays the recovery indicator 132SG510 on the image display device 5 in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of an ending performance and the power is then turned on. It is also capable of performing recovery illumination control to cause the operating upper-board movable body LED 9d, lower-board movable body LED 9e, and upper-frame movable body LED 9f to illuminate in a manner corresponding to the recovery indicator 132SG510 (for example, initial highlighting; white illumination). This allows for operation confirmation control in the following cases: when a power outage occurs during variable display and the power is then turned on; and when a power outage occurs immediately after the start of an ending performance and the power is then turned on. This prevents the processing at power-on from becoming too complicated.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance and the power is then turned on, the performance control CPU 120 can display the recovery in progress display 132SG510 on the image display device 5 and cause the movable bodies that are performing their initial operations, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, to light up in an initial highlight mode (white lit).If a power outage occurs immediately after the start of the ending performance and the power is then turned on, the movable bodies that are not performing their initial operations, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button 631B, can light up in a mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off in this embodiment) throughout the ending period, and the initial highlight mode (white lit) is not used in the mode corresponding to the recovery in progress display (off).In this way, it is possible to draw attention to the movable bodies that are operating through operation confirmation control, even during recovery.

In addition, in this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the above-board movable body LED 9d, the below-board movable body LED 9e, the above-frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are shown as being turned off during power outage recovery, except for the movable body that is performing initial operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LEDs may be made to emit light at a lower brightness than the brightness of the light emitted by the movable body LEDs in the performance operation control (the movable body performance in the win/lose button performance).

In addition, in this embodiment, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the board-mounted movable body LED 9d, the board-mounted movable body LED 9e, the frame-mounted movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are shown as being turned off during power outage recovery, except for the movable bodies performing initial operations. However, this light-emitting mode (turning off) is not used to control the performance operation (movable body performance in the win/lose button performance). By doing this, it is possible to notify that recovery is underway when the power is turned on, even if the ending performance was in progress before the power outage.

Forms A12 and A20 (relationship between initial operation and various displays during time reduction)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during time reduction will be explained based on Figures 103 and 104. Figure 103 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body when a power outage occurs during time reduction and operation confirmation control is started based on the subsequent power-on. Figure 104 (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the above-board movable body and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the below-board movable body and various displays.

As shown in Figure 103 (A), when the time-saving state is B, C1, or C2, a "BATTLE RUSH effect" is executed as a time-saving effect. In the BATTLE RUSH effect, the display screen of the image display device 5 displays a second background display 132SG320 depicting a night cityscape corresponding to the time-saving state, and an image of an ally character and an enemy character facing off against each other. In addition, a presentation mode display 132SG221 consisting of the words "BATTLE RUSH" is displayed at the top of the screen. Additionally, in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, a remaining time reduction indicator 132SG201 (in this example, the text "XX times remaining", where XX = 0 to 685) is displayed in accordance with the remaining variable display number controlled to the low probability/high base state, and in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-hit prompt indicator 132SG430 consisting of the text "right hit" and a right-pointing arrow is displayed, and in the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5, a consecutive win count/total ball count indicator 132SG454 is displayed, which indicates the number of consecutive jackpot wins and the total number of balls dispensed during the consecutive wins.

In addition, the display area 5SL at the top left of the screen displays small symbols corresponding to the first and second pending memory counts and decorative symbols, and on the left side of the screen, an active display area 132SG013 and a second pending display area 132SG012 corresponding to the second pending memory are arranged vertically; for example, active display 132SG003 is displayed in active display area 132SG013, and four second pending displays 132SG002 are displayed vertically in the second pending display area 132SG012, corresponding to the second pending memory count being 4.

As shown in Figure 103 (A), when the above-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32a can move up and down in the shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the support part 32b can move up and down in the shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Furthermore, when the below-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the shaded area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In more detail, the second hold display area 132SG012, which displays the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 and the second hold display 132SG002, is displayed in a position where only the support part 32b of the above-board movable body 32A can overlap, the display area 5SL, which displays the second hold memory count display, is displayed in a position where the effect part 32a and support part 32b can overlap, and the effect mode display 132SG221 is displayed in a position where the effect part 32a can overlap. On the other hand, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454 and the remaining time-reduction display 132SG201 are displayed in a position where they can overlap with the effect part 32c and part of the support part 32d of the below-board movable body 32B.

Next, the relationship between the various displays when the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B perform their initial operations will be explained based on Figures 104(A) and (B). Note that in Figures 104(A) and (B), the performance mode display 132SG221 and the remaining time reduction display 132SG201 are omitted.

As shown in Figure 104 (A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the following: right-hit prompt display 132SG430, second reserved memory count (display area 5SL), second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012), consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454, remaining time reduction display 132SG201, and presentation mode display 132SG221, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figure 104 (A)).

Next, as the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, first, the effect portion 32a overlaps the front side of the second pending memory count display (display area 5SL), making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the display (see Figure 103 (B)). After that, when the on-board movable body 32A moves to the intermediate position and the second pending memory count display becomes visible, the support portion 32b overlaps the front side of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 (see Figure 103 (C)).

Next, when the on-board movable body 32A passes the intermediate position and descends to the presentation position, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 becomes visible; however, because the presentation unit 32a overlaps with part of the front side of the second hold display 132SG002 (second hold display area 132SG012), it is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the second hold display 132SG002. However, because the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, second hold memory count display, consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454, remaining time-reduction display 132SG201, and presentation mode display 132SG221 do not overlap with either the presentation unit 32a or the support unit 32b, the player can see these displays (see Figure 103 (D)).

When returning from the presentation position to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with each display is the same; however, the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the origin position to the presentation position. Therefore, as shown in Figure 104 (A), the overlap time is longer during the retraction operation than during the advancement operation, and the time during which it is difficult for the player to see is also longer.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 104 (B), when the under-board movable body 32B is located in the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, second reserved memory count (display area 5SL), second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012), consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454, or remaining time-reduction display 132SG201, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figure 103 (D)).

Next, while the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and reaches the presentation position, and even after it reaches the presentation position, it does not overlap with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, second reserved memory count (display area 5SL), second reserved display 132SG002 (second reserved display area 132SG012), or presentation mode display 132SG221, so the player can see these displays. However, because the presentation part 32c and support part 32d overlap in front of part of the consecutive win count/total ball count display 132SG454 and the remaining time-reduction display 132SG201, it becomes difficult (or impossible) for the player to see these displays (see Figures 103 (D) and (E)). The same situation occurs when the under-board movable body 32B overlaps with each display when returning from the presentation position to the origin position.

In this way, if an initial operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage occurs during time-saving mode and the machine is started up with a hot start, each movable body is set to perform its initial operation so that the time during which the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the second hold memory number (display area 5SL) or second hold display 132SG002 (second hold display area 132SG012) and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shorter than the time during which the below-board movable body 32B overlaps with the jackpot information display (for example, number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454).As a result, the visibility of the second hold memory number (display area 5SL) and second hold display 132SG002 (second hold display area 132SG012), which have a significant impact on gameplay, is less likely to be obstructed by the above-board movable body 32A or below-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation.

In other words, in a time-saving mode where the player can benefit from the variable display of the second special symbol by hitting the right button, if the second pending memory count (display area 5SL) or second pending display 132SG002 (second pending display area 132SG012) is covered by the on-board movable body 32A performing its initial operation, the player may miss the opportunity to generate the second start winning by hitting the right button during the period in which it is possible to generate the second start winning, which may be to the player's detriment. Therefore, it is preferable that the second pending memory count (display area 5SL) and second pending display 132SG002 (second pending display area 132SG012) maintain visibility compared to other jackpot information displays.

Furthermore, while the consecutive win count/total ball output display 132SG454 does not change during the time-saving mode, the display mode of the second reserved memory count (display area 5SL) and second reserved display 132SG002 can change even during the time-saving mode due to changes in the number of winnings or advance notices. Therefore, the initial operation of the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B can prevent the visibility of the second reserved memory, which may change, from being obstructed compared to the unchanged consecutive win count/total ball output display 132SG454.

In addition, it is preferable that the range in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the number of consecutive games/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454 due to the initial operation be larger than the range in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the second pending memory number (display area 5SL) or the second pending display 132SG002 (second pending display area 132SG012) due to the initial operation.By doing this, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the second pending memory, which may change, from being obstructed more than the visibility of the number of consecutive games/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, which does not change, due to the on-board movable body 32A or the on-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 104 (A) and (B), if an initial operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage occurs during time-saving mode and the machine is started up with a hot start, each movable body is set to perform its initial operation so that the time during which the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shorter than the time during which the below-board movable body 32B overlaps with the jackpot information display (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls played display 132SG454) related to the jackpot. Therefore, the visibility of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, which has a significant impact on gameplay, is less likely to be obstructed by the above-board movable body 32A or below-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation.

In other words, in a time-saving state where the player can benefit from the variable display of the second special symbol by hitting the right button, if the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is covered by the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A or the below-board movable body 32B, the player may miss the opportunity to generate the second start winning by hitting the right button during the period in which it is possible to generate the second start winning, which may be to the player's detriment. Therefore, it is preferable that the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 maintains high visibility compared to other jackpot information displays.

Furthermore, if the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B operate in a manner common to the predetermined performance operation control in the operation confirmation control (for example, moving from the origin position to the performance position), if a power outage occurs during time reduction, and then the machine is started up with a hot start and restored, and an initial operation is performed, the above-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see, while the below-board movable body 32B is displaying jackpot information regarding the jackpot. If the time during which the movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is approximately the same as or longer than the time during which the movable body 32A overlaps with the jackpot information display (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454), the movable body 32A above the board and the movable body 32B below the board may be operated in such a way that the time during which the movable body 32A above the board overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shorter than the time during which the movable body 32B below the board overlaps with the jackpot information display (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454).

For example, the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B can be configured to move from the origin position during initial operation to a position that overlaps with the second pending memory count, second pending display 132SG002, and right-hit prompt display 132SG430, but can be configured to move to an intermediate position and then return to the origin position. This prevents the movable body operating during initial operation from interfering with the visibility of the second pending memory count, second pending display 132SG002, and right-hit prompt display 132SG430.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 104 (A) and (B), if an initial operation is performed when a power outage occurs during time-saving and the machine is started up with a hot start and then restored, the initial operation of each movable body is set so that the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shorter than the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the second hold memory number (display area 5SL) or the second hold display 132SG002 (second hold display area 132SG012) and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see. This makes it less likely that the visibility of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, which has a greater impact on gameplay than the second hold memory number or the second hold display 132SG002, will be obstructed.

Furthermore, in forms A12 and A20, the overlap between the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B and the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, the second hold memory count (display area 5SL), the second hold display 132SG002 (second hold display area 132SG012), and the jackpot information display (for example, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454) was explained. In this embodiment, the operation confirmation control compares the total overlap time with the various displays actually displayed when the movable body performs its initial operation. However, regardless of whether the various displays are displayed or not, it is sufficient that the overlap time with the display area in which the various displays are displayed when the movable body performs its initial operation satisfies the above relationship.

Form A13 (power interruption immediately before the end of the change before the button notice is executed)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation preceding the fluctuation in which the button notice is executed will be described with reference to Fig. 105. Fig. 105 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of the fluctuation preceding the fluctuation in which the button notice is executed.

As shown in Figure 105, after the variable display based on a predetermined losing variable pattern has begun, if a power outage occurs just before the variable display ends when a losing symbol combination is displayed statically in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, during the period when the losing symbol combination is temporarily displayed statically, or during the symbol confirmation display period, which is the minimum period from when decorative symbols are displayed statically in the variable display until the variable display of decorative symbols begins in the next variable display), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), if there is a pending memory, the variable display will resume, but the variable display will immediately end and the next variable display will begin.

Therefore, while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing, after the power outage recovery command and the symbol determination command transmitted based on the CPU 103's recovery are received, and until the next command, the variable display start command, is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, the upper frame movable element LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, the recovery in progress display 132SG510 is displayed, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that power is being restored (see FIG. 108), and the fact that power is being restored is notified until the next command is received, i.e., during the symbol determination display period.

Then, based on the reception of the variable display start command and the variation pattern command, the variable display preview effect determination process (step S132SG610) determines whether to execute a reach preview, which suggests whether a reach state will occur, and a button preview, which prompts the player to press a button to determine whether a reach state will occur. The variable display begins in a manner corresponding to the variation pattern and the determined preview effect, and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g light up in a manner corresponding to the variation (background), and background sound (BGM) corresponding to the variation (background) begins to be output. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (e.g., 2000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage recovery command was received, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 ends, and the display of an effect image corresponding to the variation (background) begins.

Next, when a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage restoration command was received, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable body is initiated. After that, once the initial operation of each movable body is completed, the result notification part begins, in which the results of the button preview are notified.

As shown in Figures 61 (D6) and (D7), the button preview (result notification part) notifies the player of whether or not a reach state has been reached as a result of the player operating the chance button 631B. Therefore, if the initial movement of the movable body is being performed when the result notification part starts, the visibility of the result notification part, such as the reach state being reached, will be hindered by the movable body moving due to the initial movement, and the player may misinterpret the result.

In this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation prior to the variation that results in the button preview, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the button preview (result notification part) begins, thereby preventing the visibility of the button preview (result notification part) from being obstructed by the movable body performing the initial operation.

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation preceding the variation in which the button notification is executed, the period from the start of the variation to the start of the button notification (result notification part) and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the button notification (result notification part) starts (see Figures 61 (D1) to (D5)).

In this embodiment, when a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a specified variable display, the number of reserved memories is 1 or more. Thereafter, when the power is turned on and the reserved memories are consumed to start the next variable display, it is determined that a button preview will be executed in that variable display. If it is determined that a button preview will be executed at the start of the variable display, the time from when the variable display starts to when the result notification part of the button preview is executed is set to be at least longer than the operation confirmation control period (e.g., approximately 20 seconds). Therefore, if a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a variation prior to the variation in which the button preview is executed, the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the button preview (result notification part) begins. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When a start winning occurs and the CPU 103 determines that a specific variation pattern in which a button preview is executed is a specific variation pattern, a specific presentation control command specifying specific information related to the specific variation pattern (e.g., a winning presentation designation command specifying the execution of a button preview) is transmitted. Based on the specific presentation control command, the presentation control CPU 120 may be able to change the execution period of the initial operation so that the initial operation is completed before the result notification part of the button preview begins.

For example, if a start winning occurs during a specified variable display and it is decided that a specific variable pattern in which a button preview is executed will be used, a winning performance designation command (specific information) specifying that this is a specific variable pattern (with button preview) will be sent.

Then, after a power outage occurs just before the end of the specified variable display, when the power is turned back on, a power outage recovery designation command, a pattern confirmation command (information on whether the special pattern was a hit or miss), a first reserved memory number notification command, and a second reserved memory number notification command are sent, and the initial operation begins. Next, the pattern is displayed statically based on the transmission of the performance pattern confirmation designation command, and after the pattern confirmation display period has elapsed, when the next variable display begins, the first reserved memory number notification command, the second reserved memory number notification command, the game status background designation command, the first (or second) variable display start designation command, the pattern confirmation command, and the variation pattern designation command are sent.

Here, if a fluctuation pattern designation command specifying a specific fluctuation pattern (with button warning) is received within a specified time (e.g., 4000 ms) after receiving a power outage recovery designation command, the initial operation currently being performed (approximately 20 seconds) may be interrupted and switched to a shortened initial operation with a shorter operating period (e.g., 5 seconds) than the initial operation currently being performed.

In more detail, the initial operation involves sequentially performing the maximum extension and retraction movements of each moving body (moving back and forth between the origin position and the performance position), while the shortened initial operation involves simultaneously performing the minimum extension and retraction movements of each moving body (e.g., returning to the origin immediately after passing through the origin position). Furthermore, when switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation, for example, if one moving body is in the middle of a maximum extension movement, that movement is interrupted and a retraction movement is performed, and once it returns to the origin position, the minimum extension and retraction movements of each moving body, including the one moving body, are simultaneously performed. Furthermore, if the timing of switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation occurs immediately before the end of the initial operation (e.g., 5 seconds before the end), the operation should not switch to the shortened initial operation even if a specific movement pattern designation command is received.

For example, a light gathering effect (light gathering at the center of the screen to form the button image) can be executed immediately before the button image is displayed in the action promotion effect. Because the light gathering effect uses a large portion of the screen (an image that starts from the edge of the screen), it can overlap with the execution period of the initial action, providing an appropriate indication that the button image will be displayed.

For example, when a button image is displayed in the action promotion effect, the button's LED can be illuminated (red ⇔ off in 150 ms cycles), and the illumination pattern in this illumination pattern is not included in the illumination pattern that highlights the moving body performing the initial operation.

In addition, for example, it is possible to vibrate the chance button 631B when the initial operation starts (to check the vibration motor 635E and notify that the initial operation has started), and it is also possible to vibrate the chance button 631B together with the display of a button image in the operation promotion effect (to indicate the expected degree of change), and at least one of the vibration duration, cycle, and light emission pattern of the button LED during vibration differs between the button vibration during the initial operation and the button vibration when the button image is displayed.

Form A14 (power interruption immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation for which the start notice is executed)
Next, the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a fluctuation preceding a fluctuation for which a start-time notice is executed will be described with reference to Fig. 106. Fig. 106 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control in the case where a power interruption occurs immediately before the end of a fluctuation preceding a fluctuation for which a start-time notice is executed.

As shown in FIG. 106, after the variable display based on a predetermined losing variable pattern has begun, if a power outage occurs just before the variable display ends when a losing symbol combination is displayed statically in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, approximately 5,000 ms before the end of the variable display, such as during the period when the losing symbol combination is temporarily displayed statically, or during the symbol confirmation display period, which is the minimum period from when decorative symbols are displayed statically in the variable display until the variable display of decorative symbols begins in the next variable display), and then the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up with a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), if there is a pending memory, the variable display will resume, but the variable display will immediately end and the next variable display will begin.

Therefore, while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing, after the power outage recovery command and the symbol determination command transmitted based on the CPU 103's recovery are received, and until the next command, the variable display start command, is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, the upper frame movable element LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, the recovery in progress display 132SG510 is displayed, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that power is being restored (see FIG. 108), and the fact that power is being restored is notified until the next command is received, i.e., during the symbol determination display period.

Then, based on the reception of the variable display start command and the variation pattern command, the variable display preview effect determination process (step S132SG610) determines whether to execute the start preview, and the variable display begins in a manner corresponding to the variation pattern and the determined preview effect. The frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable element LED 9d, lower board movable element LED 9e, upper frame movable element LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g illuminate in a manner corresponding to the specified display change in the start preview, and background sound (BGM) corresponding to the start preview begins to be output. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (e.g., 2000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage recovery command was received, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 ends, and the display of an effect image corresponding to the start preview (introduction part) begins.

Next, when a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage restoration command was received, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each movable body is initiated. After the initial operation of each movable body is completed, the result notification part begins, in which the results of the start-up warning are reported.

As shown in Figures 59 (B3a) to (B6a), the start notice (result notification part) notifies the player of results such as whether the pending display has changed and what color it has changed to. Therefore, if the initial movement of the movable body is being performed when the result notification part starts, the movable body, which moves due to the initial movement, will interfere with the visibility of the result notification part, such as whether the pending display has changed, and there is a risk that the player will misinterpret the result.

In this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation prior to the variation in which the start notice is executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the start notice (result notification part) begins, thereby preventing the movable body performing the initial operation from interfering with the visibility of the start notice (result notification part).

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation preceding the variation for which the start notice is executed, the period from the start of the variation to the start of the start notice (result notification part) and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the start of the start notice (result notification part) (see Figures 59 (B2) to (B6)).

In this embodiment, when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display, the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, and then, when the power is turned on and the reserved memories are consumed and the next variable display begins, a decision is made to execute a start notice for that variable display. If a decision is made to execute a start notice at the start of a variable display, the time from when the variable display begins to when the result notification part of the start notice is executed is set to be at least longer than the operation confirmation control period (e.g., approximately 20 seconds). Therefore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation preceding the variation in which the start notice (result notification part) is executed, the start notice (result notification part) is executed. Although an example has been given in which the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the notification part begins, the present invention is not limited to this. When a start winning occurs and the CPU 103 determines that a specific variation pattern in which a start warning is executed is present, a specific presentation control command specifying specific information regarding the specific variation pattern (for example, a winning presentation specification command specifying the execution of a start warning) may be transmitted, and the presentation control CPU 120 may be configured to be able to change the execution period of the initial operation based on the specific presentation control command so that the initial operation is completed before the notification part begins as a result of the start warning.

For example, if a start winning occurs during a specified variable display and it is decided that a specific variable pattern in which a start warning is executed will be used, a winning effect designation command (specific information) specifying that it is a specific variable pattern (with start warning) will be sent.

Then, after a power outage occurs just before the end of the specified variable display, when the power is turned back on, a power outage recovery designation command, a pattern confirmation command (information on whether the special pattern was a hit or miss), a first reserved memory number notification command, and a second reserved memory number notification command are sent, and the initial operation begins. Next, the pattern is displayed statically based on the transmission of the performance pattern confirmation designation command, and after the pattern confirmation display period has elapsed, when the next variable display begins, the first reserved memory number notification command, the second reserved memory number notification command, the game status background designation command, the first (or second) variable display start designation command, the pattern confirmation command, and the variation pattern designation command are sent.

Here, if a fluctuation pattern designation command specifying a specific fluctuation pattern (with warning at start) is received within a specified time (e.g., 4000 ms) after receiving a power outage recovery designation command, the initial operation currently being performed (approximately 20 seconds) may be interrupted and switched to a shortened initial operation with an operating period shorter than the initial operation currently being performed (e.g., 5 seconds).

In more detail, the initial operation involves sequentially performing the maximum extension and retraction movements of each moving body (moving back and forth between the origin position and the performance position), while the shortened initial operation involves simultaneously performing the minimum extension and retraction movements of each moving body (e.g., returning to the origin immediately after passing through the origin position). Furthermore, when switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation, for example, if one moving body is in the middle of a maximum extension movement, that movement is interrupted and a retraction movement is performed, and once it returns to the origin position, the minimum extension and retraction movements of each moving body, including the one moving body, are simultaneously performed. Furthermore, if the timing of switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation occurs immediately before the end of the initial operation (e.g., 5 seconds before the end), the operation should not switch to the shortened initial operation even if a specific movement pattern designation command is received.

For example, it is possible to vibrate the chance button 631B when the initial operation begins, and also to vibrate the chance button 631B when the active hold turns red in Figure 59 (B6) (for entertainment purposes), and at least one of the vibration period, cycle, and light emission pattern of the button LED during vibration is different between the button vibration during the initial operation and the button vibration when the color changes to red. If the button vibration when the color changes to red is performed during the initial operation, the button vibration when the color changes to red is limited, and the limited button vibration is performed after the initial operation is completed.

For example, it is possible to vibrate the chance button 631B when the initial operation starts, and it is also possible to make a button vibration warning (indicating a different level of expectation than the warning at the start) as shown in Figure 59 (B1), with the button vibration during the initial operation and the button vibration warning differing in at least one of the vibration period, cycle, and the illumination pattern of the button LED during vibration. If a button vibration warning is made during the initial operation, the button vibration warning is limited, and limited button vibration is made after the initial operation has finished.

Form A15 (power interruption immediately before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the pseudo-continuous notice is executed)
Next, the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the pseudo-sequential announcement is executed will be described with reference to Fig. 107. Fig. 107 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control when a power outage occurs just before the end of the fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the pseudo-sequential announcement is executed.

As shown in FIG. 107, after the variable display based on a predetermined losing variable pattern has begun, if a power outage occurs just before the variable display ends when a losing symbol combination is displayed statically in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, approximately 5,000 ms before the end of the variable display, such as during the period when the losing symbol combination is temporarily displayed statically, or during the symbol confirmation display period, which is the minimum period from when decorative symbols are displayed statically in the variable display until the variable display of decorative symbols begins in the next variable display), and then the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up in a hot start (hot start processing is executed when the power is restored (when the power is turned on)), if there is a pending memory, the variable display will resume, but the variable display will immediately end and the next variable display will begin.

Therefore, while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 from the startup timing, after the power outage recovery command and the symbol determination command transmitted based on the CPU 103's recovery are received, and until the next command, the variable display start command, is received, the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable element LED 9d, the lower board movable element LED 9e, the upper frame movable element LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g are in a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., off), and the background sound (BGM) is in a state corresponding to recovery in progress (e.g., silent). Furthermore, after the startup preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the startup timing disappears, the recovery in progress display 132SG510 is displayed, displaying the words "Power being restored. Please wait" against a black background, indicating that power is being restored (see FIG. 108), and the fact that power is being restored is notified until the next command is received, i.e., during the symbol determination display period.

After that, based on receiving the variable display start command and the variation pattern command, the variable display will begin in a manner corresponding to the variation pattern (pseudo-consecutive) in which the pseudo-consecutive preview indicating whether the variable display will resume will be executed and the determined preview effect (movable object preview), and the frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable object LED 9d, lower board movable object LED 9e, upper frame movable object LED 9f, and chance button LED 9g will light up in a manner corresponding to the background (variation), and the output of background sound (BGM) corresponding to the background (variation) will begin. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (e.g., 2000 ms) has elapsed since receiving the power outage recovery command, the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 will end, and the display of an effect image corresponding to the background (variation) will begin.

Next, when a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 ms) has elapsed since the power outage restoration command was received, operation confirmation control (initial operation) of each moving body is initiated. After that, once the initial operation of each moving body is completed, the result notification part begins, in which the results of the pseudo-continuous preview are announced.

As shown in Figures 60 (C6), (C10), and (C9), the pseudo consecutive prediction (result notification part) notifies the player of results such as whether the variable display has resumed. Therefore, if the initial movement of the movable body is being performed when the result notification part starts, the visibility of the result notification part, such as whether the variable display has resumed, will be hindered by the movable body moving due to the initial movement, and there is a risk that the player will misinterpret the result.

In this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation prior to the variation in which the pseudo consecutive prediction is executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then started with a hot start, the movable body is controlled so that the initial operation ends before the pseudo consecutive prediction (result notification part) begins, thereby preventing the movable body performing the initial operation from interfering with the visibility of the pseudo consecutive prediction (result notification part).

More specifically, in this embodiment, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation prior to the variation in which the pseudo-continuous prediction is executed, the period from the start of the variation to the start of the pseudo-continuous prediction (result notification part) and the initial operation period are set so that the initial operation of the movable body is completed within the period until the pseudo-continuous prediction (result notification part) starts (see Figures 59 (B2) to (B6)).

In this embodiment, the execution of the movable object prediction is determined together with the execution of the pseudo consecutive prediction, so the movable object prediction is executed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display began. However, since operation confirmation control is being executed, as explained in embodiment A1, the performance operations of the on-board movable object 32A and chance button 631B at the timing of the execution of the movable object prediction may be restricted, and only the effect display and sound effects corresponding to the movable object prediction may be output (see Figure 77). Also, in embodiment A1, the performance operations of the on-board movable object 32A and chance button 631B are executed after the initial operation is completed, but since the pseudo consecutive prediction (introduction part) has begun, the performance operations of the movable object prediction are restricted, but the performance operations of the movable object prediction may be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display, the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, and then, when the power is turned on and the reserved memories are consumed and the next variable display begins, it is decided that a pseudo-consecutive preview will be executed in that variable display.If it is decided to execute a pseudo-consecutive preview at the start of the variable display, the time from the start of the variable display to the execution of the result notification part of the pseudo-consecutive preview is set to be at least longer than the operation confirmation control period (for example, approximately 20 seconds).Therefore, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of the variation before which the pseudo-consecutive preview (result notification part) is executed, the pseudo-consecutive preview (result notification part) will be executed. Although an example has been given in which the initial operation of the movable body is completed before the notification part of the pseudo consecutive announcement is started, the present invention is not limited to this. When a start winning occurs and the CPU 103 determines that a specific variation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive announcement is executed is present, a specific presentation control command specifying specific information regarding the specific variation pattern (for example, a winning presentation specification command specifying the execution of a pseudo consecutive announcement) is sent, and based on the specific presentation control command, the presentation control CPU 120 may be able to change the execution period of the initial operation so that the initial operation is completed before the notification part of the result of the pseudo consecutive announcement is started.

For example, if a start winning occurs during a specified variable display and it is decided that a specific variable pattern in which a pseudo consecutive announcement is executed will be used, a winning effect designation command (specific information) specifying that this is the specific variable pattern (with pseudo consecutive announcement) will be sent.

Then, after a power outage occurs just before the end of the specified variable display, when the power is turned back on, a power outage recovery designation command, a pattern confirmation command (information on whether the special pattern was a hit or miss), a first reserved memory number notification command, and a second reserved memory number notification command are sent, and the initial operation begins. Next, the pattern is displayed statically based on the transmission of the performance pattern confirmation designation command, and after the pattern confirmation display period has elapsed, when the next variable display begins, the first reserved memory number notification command, the second reserved memory number notification command, the game status background designation command, the first (or second) variable display start designation command, the pattern confirmation command, and the variation pattern designation command are sent.

Here, if a fluctuation pattern designation command specifying a specific fluctuation pattern (with pseudo-consecutive warning) is received within a specified time (e.g., 4000 ms) after receiving a power outage recovery designation command, the initial operation currently being performed (approximately 20 seconds) may be interrupted and switched to a shortened initial operation with a shorter operating period (e.g., 5 seconds) than the initial operation currently being performed.

In more detail, the initial operation involves sequentially performing the maximum extension and retraction movements of each moving body (moving back and forth between the origin position and the performance position), while the shortened initial operation involves simultaneously performing the minimum extension and retraction movements of each moving body (e.g., returning to the origin immediately after passing through the origin position). Furthermore, when switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation, for example, if one moving body is in the middle of a maximum extension movement, that movement is interrupted and a retraction movement is performed, and once it returns to the origin position, the minimum extension and retraction movements of each moving body, including the one moving body, are simultaneously performed. Furthermore, if the timing of switching from the initial operation to the shortened initial operation occurs immediately before the end of the initial operation (e.g., 5 seconds before the end), the operation should not switch to the shortened initial operation even if a specific movement pattern designation command is received.

Also, for example, if a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a variation prior to the one in which a moving object announcement or pseudo consecutive announcement is executed, and then the power is turned on, the performance action in the moving object announcement that was executed or limited during the initial operation will be performed during the introductory part of the pseudo consecutive performance (a short initial operation is performed in Figure 60 (C4), and the performance action in the limited moving object announcement is performed in Figure 60 (C5)).

Configuration A16 (relationship between initial operation and various displays during recovery from normal fluctuation)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during recovery from normal fluctuation will be explained with reference to Figures 108 and 109. Figure 108 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body when a power outage occurs during normal fluctuation and operation confirmation control is started based on the subsequent power-on. Figure 109 (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the above-board movable body and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the below-board movable body and various displays.

As shown in Figure 108 (A), if a power outage occurs during the variable display of the normal game state and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up with a hot start, the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the time of start-up disappears, and then the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed, displaying the words "Power being restored, please wait" on a black background, indicating that the power outage is being restored, and it is notified that the power outage is being restored until the next command is received.

If, while the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed, the game ball is detected by a detection switch such as the gate switch 21 located in the game area (second path) on the right side of the image display device 5, and it is detected that the player is playing with a right-handed shot, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a left-handed shot promotion display 132SG530 in the upper right corner of the display screen, consisting of the words "Please return to left-handed shot" and a left-pointing arrow, encouraging the player to shoot the game ball into the game area (first path) on the left side of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figure 108 (A), when the above-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32a can move up and down in the shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the support part 32b can move up and down in the shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Furthermore, when the below-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the shaded area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In more detail, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed in a position where the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the performance part 32c of the below-board movable body 32B may overlap, and the left-hit promotion display 132SG530 is displayed in a position where part of the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the support part 32b may overlap.

Next, the relationship between the various displays when the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B perform their initial operations will be explained based on Figures 109(A) and (B). Figures 109(A) and (B) show the relationship between the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B and the left-hit prompt display 132SG530, and also allow comparison with the relationship with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 (see Figures 95 and 104), which is not actually displayed.

As shown in Figure 109 (A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with either the recovery display 132SG510 or the left-hit prompt display 132SG530, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figure 108 (A)).

Next, as the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, first, part of the effect portion 32a and the support portion 32b overlap in front of the left hit prompt display 132SG530, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the left hit prompt display 132SG530 (see Figure 108 (B)). After that, the on-board movable body 32A passes by and the left hit prompt display 132SG530 becomes visible, but when it descends to the effect position, the effect portion 32a overlaps in front of part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 (see Figure 108 (C)).

When returning from the presentation position to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with each display is the same; however, the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the origin position to the presentation position. Therefore, as shown in Figure 109 (A), the overlap time is longer during the retraction operation than during the advancement operation, and the time during which it is difficult for the player to see is also longer.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 109 (A), when the under-board movable body 32B is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with any of the left-hit prompt display 132SG530, recovery in progress display 132SG510, and right-hit prompt display 132SG430, so the player can see all of these displays (see Figure 108 (A)).

Next, while the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and reaches the presentation position, and after it has reached the presentation position, the presentation part 32a overlaps the front side of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510. However, since it does not overlap the left hit prompt display 132SG530, the player can see the left hit prompt display 132SG530 (see Figures 108 (D) and (E)). The same situation occurs when the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display when returning from the presentation position to the origin position.

In this way, if a power outage occurs during normal variable display, and then the initial operation is performed when the machine is started up with a hot start and restored, the time during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 and is difficult (or impossible) for the player to see is shortened. Specifically, the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 only when the on-board movable body 32A passes through the intermediate position, and does not overlap for the period during which the on-board movable body 32A is stopped at the presentation position or origin position, so the visibility of the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 is less likely to be obstructed by the on-board movable body 32A or the below-board movable body 32B performing the initial operation of the left-hit prompt display 132SG530.

Also, as shown in Figure 109 (A), the period during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 is longer than the period during which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430. However, the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is displayed during time-saving states and jackpot game states that are advantageous to the player. If the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is covered by the on-board movable body 32A performing its initial operation, the player may miss the opportunity to generate a win by performing a right-hit operation and suffer a disadvantage. Therefore, it is preferable that the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 maintains better visibility than the left-hit prompt display 132SG530.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 can display the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 and output a left-hit prompt sound as a left-hit operation prompt notification. When operation confirmation control is performed based on a cold start after a power outage, the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen, while the left-hit operation prompt sound is restricted. When operation confirmation control is performed based on a hot start after a power outage, the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen, while the left-hit operation prompt sound is output. In this way, it is possible to provide an appropriate left-hit operation prompt notification that takes into account the situation at power-on.

In addition, in normal operation, a left-hit operation promotion notification can be issued when a gaming ball enters the gate switch 21, etc., located on the right gaming area side. In normal operation, a special left-hit operation promotion notification can be issued, which has a higher priority than a left-hit operation promotion notification, based on a specific number of gaming balls (e.g., five) entering the gate switch 21. The special left-hit operation promotion notification can be issued for a longer period than the period (e.g., 20 seconds) during which the movable body operates due to operation confirmation control. This prevents the special left-hit operation promotion notification from being obstructed by a movable body that operates due to operation confirmation control.

Forms A17 and A18 (relationship between initial operation and various displays during recovery during a jackpot)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during recovery during a jackpot will be explained with reference to Figures 110 and 111. Figure 110 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body when a power outage occurs during a jackpot and operation confirmation control is started based on the subsequent power-on. Figure 111 (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the movable body on the board and various displays, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the movable body below the board and various displays.

As shown in Figure 110 (A), if a power outage occurs during a round of play in the jackpot game state and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up with a hot start, the start preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the time of start-up disappears, and then the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed, displaying the words "Power being restored, please wait" on a black background, indicating that the power outage is being restored, and it is notified that the power outage is being restored until the next command is received.

In addition, if a control command indicating a jackpot game state, such as an open command or an after-open command, is received along with a power outage recovery command, a right-hit prompt display 132SG430 will be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen while the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed, encouraging the player to shoot the game ball into the game area (second path) on the right side of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figure 108 (A), when the above-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32a can move up and down in the shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the support part 32b can move up and down in the shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Furthermore, when the below-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the shaded area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In detail, the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed in a position where the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the performance part 32c of the below-board movable body 32B may overlap, and the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is displayed in a position where part of the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the support part 32b may overlap.

Next, the relationship between the various displays when the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B perform their initial operations will be explained based on Figures 111(A) and (B).

As shown in Figure 111(A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap either the recovery display 132SG510 or the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figure 110(A)).

Next, as the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, first, the support part 32b overlaps the front side of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the left-hit prompt display 132SG530 (not shown). After that, the on-board movable body 32A passes by and the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 becomes visible, but when it descends to the presentation position, the presentation part 32a overlaps the front side of part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 (see Figure 110 (B)).

When returning from the presentation position to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with each display is the same; however, the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when it moves from the origin position to the presentation position. Therefore, as shown in Figure 111 (A), the overlap time is longer during the retraction operation than during the advancement operation, and the time during which it is difficult for the player to see is also longer.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 111(A), when the under-board movable body 32B is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with either the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 or the recovery in progress display 132SG510, so the player can see all of the displays (see Figure 110(A)).

Next, while the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and reaches the presentation position, and after it reaches the presentation position, the presentation part 32a overlaps the front side of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510. However, since it does not overlap with the right hit prompt display 132SG430, the player can see the right hit prompt display 132SG430 (see Figure 110 (C)). Note that the situation in which the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display remains the same when returning from the presentation position to the origin position.

In this way, if a power outage occurs during round play in a jackpot game state, and then the initial operation is performed when the device is started up with a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A operates so as not to overlap in front of the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, rather than being superimposed in front of the specified area (see Figure 94 (A)) where information corresponding to the round play (e.g., number of rounds display 132SG451, number of winning balls display 132SG452, number of balls dispensed display 132SG453, number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) is displayed, thereby making it less likely that the visibility of the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 will be obstructed. In other words, it is preferable that the period during which information corresponding to round play (for example, round number display 132SG451, winning ball number display 132SG452, ball count display 132SG453, number of consecutive wins/total ball count display 132SG454, etc.) overlaps in front of the specified area (see Figure 94 (A)) where it is displayed is shorter than the period during which it overlaps in front of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed during operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, after a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that includes a movable object preview performance (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, whereas, after a power outage occurs during variable display during a jackpot or in the time-saving state, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that does not include a movable object preview performance (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) that overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430.

In addition, if a round-play movable body effect is performed at the start of a round-play game, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on be performed in an operating mode that does not include the effect operation of the round-play movable body effect (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position).

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during round play in a jackpot game state, and then the initial operation is performed when the machine is started up with a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A operates so that it does not overlap in front of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control, rather than being superimposed in front of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it less likely that the visibility of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 will be obstructed. In other words, it is preferable that the period during which it overlaps in front of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed in the operation confirmation control is shorter than the period during which it is superimposed in front of the recovery in progress display 132SG510.

Furthermore, after a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that includes a movable object preview performance (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, whereas, after a power outage occurs during variable display during a jackpot or in the time-saving state, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that does not include a movable object preview performance (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) that overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430.

In addition, if a round-play movable body effect is performed at the start of a round-play game, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on be performed in an operating mode that does not include the effect operation of the round-play movable body effect (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position).

In addition, the time that the under-board movable body 32B spends in the presentation position overlapping the recovery display 132SG510 during initial operation may be shorter than the presentation operation of the movable body presentation. For example, when a power outage occurs while the variable display is not being executed and then the power is turned on, the time T1 that the movable body spends in the presentation position during initial operation and the time T2 that the movable body spends in the presentation position during the movable body presentation are preferably longer than the time T3 that the movable body spends in the presentation position during initial operation when the power is turned on after a power outage occurs while the variable display is being executed (T1 = T2 > T3). In this way, a movable body that operates due to the operation confirmation control that is performed when the power is turned on after a power outage occurs during an advantageous state is not superimposed on the recovery display 132SG510 for a long period of time, thereby providing a gaming machine that does not interfere with determining whether or not the machine is undergoing recovery.

Form A19 (relationship between initial operation and various displays during recovery during time reduction)
Next, the relationship between the initial operation and various displays during recovery during time reduction will be explained based on Fig. 112. Fig. 112 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the movable body when a power outage occurs during time reduction and the operation confirmation control is started based on the power being turned on afterwards.

As shown in Figure 112 (A), if a power outage occurs during variable display in the time-saving mode and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up with a hot start, the start-up preparation display 132SG500 displayed on the image display device 5 at the time of start-up disappears, and then the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed, displaying the words "Power being restored, please wait" on a black background, indicating that the power outage is being restored, and notifying the user that the power outage is being restored until the next command is received.

As shown in Figure 112 (A), when the above-board movable body 32A moves between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32a can move up and down in the shaded area E1 surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the support part 32b can move up and down in the shaded area E2 surrounded by a two-dot chain line. Furthermore, when the below-board movable body 32B moves up and down between the origin position and the performance position, the performance part 32c and the support part 32d can move up and down in the shaded area E3 surrounded by a two-dot chain line.

In detail, the recovery in progress display 132SG510 is displayed in a position where the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the performance part 32c of the below-board movable body 32B may overlap, and the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 is displayed in a position where part of the performance part 32a of the above-board movable body 32A and the support part 32b may overlap (see Figure 112 (C)).

As shown in Figure 112 (A), when the on-board movable body 32A is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with either the recovery display 132SG510 or the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, so the player can see all of the displays.

Next, when the initial operation of the on-board movable body 32A begins, the variable display is stopped based on the transmission of a symbol confirmation command, the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 ends, and the second background display 132SG320 is displayed. As the on-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position, the support portion 32b first overlaps the front side of the right hit prompt display 132SG430, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see the left hit prompt display 132SG530 (not shown). After that, the on-board movable body 32A passes through and the area where the right hit prompt display 132SG430 is displayed becomes visible, but when it descends to the presentation position, the presentation portion 32a overlaps the front side of part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 (see Figure 112 (B)).

When returning from the presentation position to the origin position, the situation in which the on-board movable body 32A overlaps with each display is the same; however, the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when moving from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the movement speed of the on-board movable body 32A when moving from the origin position to the presentation position. Therefore, the overlap time is longer during the retraction operation than during the advancement operation, and the time during which it is difficult for the player to see is also longer.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 112 (A), when the under-board movable body 32B is located at the origin position, it does not overlap with either the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 or the recovery in progress display 132SG510, so the player can see all of the displays.

Next, while the under-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position, passes through the intermediate position, and reaches the presentation position, and after it has reached the presentation position, the presentation part 32a overlaps the front side of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to see part of the recovery in progress display 132SG510. However, since it does not overlap with the right hit prompt display 132SG430, the player can see the right hit prompt display 132SG430 (see Figure 112 (C)). Note that the situation in which the under-board movable body 32B overlaps each display remains the same when returning from the presentation position to the origin position.

In this way, if a power outage occurs during the variable display in the time-saving state, and then the initial operation is performed when the machine is started up with a hot start and restored, the on-board movable body 32A operates so as not to overlap in front of the specific area (see Figure 112 (A)) in which the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 displayed during operation confirmation control, rather than being superimposed in front of the specified area (see Figure 112 (B) (C)) in which information corresponding to the time-saving state (e.g., presentation mode display 132SG221, remaining time-saving display 132SG201, number of consecutive wins/total number of balls issued display 132SG454, etc.) is displayed.As a result, when the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 ends and the normal state is restored, the visibility of the right-hit promotion display 132SG430 is less likely to be obstructed. In other words, it is preferable that the period during which information corresponding to the time-saving state (for example, the presentation mode display 132SG221, the remaining time-saving display 132SG201, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.) overlaps in front of the specified area (see Figures 112 (B) (C)) where it is displayed is shorter than the period during which it overlaps in front of the right-hit prompt display 132SG430 displayed during operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, after a power outage occurs during variable display in the normal state, the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that includes a movable object preview performance (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) in which the support part 32b overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, whereas, after a power outage occurs during variable display during a jackpot or in the time-saving state, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on is performed in an operating mode that does not include a movable object preview performance (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position) that overlaps with the right-hit prompt display 132SG430.

In addition, if a round-play movable body effect is performed at the start of a round-play game, it is preferable that the initial operation when the power is turned on be performed in an operating mode that does not include the effect operation of the round-play movable body effect (reciprocating movement between the origin position and the intermediate position).

Furthermore, in forms A17 to A19, we have explained the overlap between the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B and the right-hit prompt display 132SG430, the recovery in progress display 132SG510, and information corresponding to the time-saving state (for example, the performance mode display 132SG221, the remaining time-saving display 132SG201, the number of consecutive wins/total number of balls dispensed display 132SG454, etc.). In this embodiment, we have exemplified a form in which the operation confirmation control compares the total overlap time with the various displays actually displayed when the movable body performs its initial operation. However, regardless of whether the various displays are displayed or not, it is sufficient that the overlap time with the display area in which the various displays are displayed when the movable body performs its initial operation satisfies the above relationship.

Patterns A21 to A24 (Start-up order when initial operation control is executed)
In the characteristic part 132SG, as shown in Figures 72 and 73, when power is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start or hot start), an example is given in which the special symbol lamps that constitute the special symbol display devices 4A, 4B and each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) are simultaneously lit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing at which the special symbol lamps are lit when power is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the timing at which each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) are lit may be different.

For example, as shown in Figures 113 (A) to (G), when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the start-up preparation display 132SG500 first begins to be displayed on the image display device 5. After a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds, as in Figures 72 and 73) has elapsed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 began to be displayed, the special symbol lamps that make up the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B begin to light up (see Figures 113 (A) and (B)).

At this timing, the solenoids 81 and 82 are energized again, causing the variable prize ball device 6B and the special variable prize ball device 7 to return to their power-off states. That is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a normal or time-saving mode and no normal wins have occurred and then power is cut off before starting a hot start, or when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a jackpot gaming mode and then power is cut off during the interval period and then power is cut off before starting a hot start, the variable prize ball device 6B and the special variable prize ball device 7 are again in their closed states. Also, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a normal or time-saving mode and then powers off while a normal win has occurred and then powers off before starting a hot start, the variable prize ball device 6B is in its open state. Also, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a jackpot gaming mode and then powers off before starting a hot start while the special variable prize ball device 7 (large prize opening) is open, the special variable prize ball device 7 is in its open state.

After these special chart lamps light up and the variable winning ball device 6B and special variable winning ball device 7 are in their power-off state, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) begin to light up.

After this, as an initialization notification, the image display device 5 displays an initialization notification image, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper-board movable body LED 9d, lower-board movable body LED 9e, upper-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) light up in an initialization notification manner, and the speakers 8L, 8R start to output an initialization notification sound. After that, as initial operation control, confirmation operations are performed for the upper-board movable body 32A, lower-board movable body 32B, upper-frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B (Figures 113 (D) to (G)).

In particular, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered down and starts up by a cold start while in normal mode or time-saving mode and no variable display is being executed, as shown in FIG. 114(A), after power is cut off, the CPU 103 first sends a power-on command to the performance control CPU 120 (the performance control CPU 120 receives the power-on command) three seconds after the start of display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5. At this time, the special symbol display devices 4A, 4B are energized, causing the special symbol lamps that make up these special symbol display devices 4A, 4B to begin lighting up, and the solenoids 81, 82 are energized, causing the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 to return to their initial state (closed state).

At this time, the special symbol lamps that make up the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B initially light up in the manner in which the variable display result is a miss, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol lamps that make up the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B may light up in the manner in which the variable display result is a miss or in the manner in which the variable display result is different from any other variable display result.

In addition, after these special chart lamps are lit and the variable winning ball device 6B and special variable winning ball device 7 are reset to their initial states, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) begin to light up.

Then, when two seconds have passed since the performance control CPU 120 received the power-on command (five seconds have passed since the startup preparation display 132SG500 was displayed), the image display device 5 begins displaying the initialization notification display 132SG600, replacing the startup preparation display 132SG500. After the initialization notification display 132SG600 begins displaying, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) begin emitting light in an initialization notification mode, and confirmation operations are performed for the upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B as initial operations.

By doing this, the startup preparation display 132SG500 makes it easier for players and staff at the amusement parlor where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed to recognize that power has been turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and it also enables players and staff at the amusement parlor where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed to confirm that the special symbol lamp is lit, which has a significant impact on gameplay, without being distracted by the operation of checking each moving part.

Furthermore, in the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered down and hot started while in normal or time-saving mode and variable display is being executed, as shown in FIG. 114 (B), after power is lost, first, three seconds after the start preparation display 132SG500 begins to be displayed on the image display device 5, the CPU 103 sends a power outage recovery designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery designation command). At that time, the special symbol display devices 4A, 4B are energized, which starts the lighting of the special symbol lamps that make up these special symbol display devices 4A, 4B (and the variable display of special symbols by the flashing of the special symbol lamps), and the solenoids 81, 82 are energized, which returns the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 to the state they were in before power was lost. Furthermore, when two seconds have passed since the performance control CPU 120 received the power outage recovery command (five seconds have passed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was displayed), the image display device 5 begins to display the recovery in progress display 132SG510, replacing the start-up preparation display 132SG500. After that, the various LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) light up, and the upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B are checked as initial operations.

In addition, if the variable display that was running before the power outage stops while the startup preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, and a new variable display is started, the display of the recovery display 132SG510 will end when the new variable display stops, as shown in Figure 114 (B).

In other words, if the variable display of the special symbol is resumed when the launch preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5 with a state in which the number of pending memories is 0, and the resumed variable display stops while the launch preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, when a new variable display begins due to a new start winning, the launch preparation display 132SG500 will switch to displaying the recovery display 132SG510 during the new variable display. Furthermore, the display of the recovery display 132SG510 will end when the new variable display stops.

In the example shown in Figure 114 (B), while the recovery display 132SG510 is being displayed and the variable display is in progress, confirmation operations for the on-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the frame-top movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B are started as an initial operation.

As shown in Figure 114 (B), even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered down and hot started while the variable display is running in normal or time-saving mode, if the variable display that was running before the power was cut off does not stop while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5, then as shown in Figure 115 (A), the image display device 5 will start displaying the recovery in progress display 132SG510 in place of the start-up preparation display 132SG500, and then the variable display will stop (at the same time, the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 will end).

Also, as in Figure 114 (B), even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered down and hot started while the variable display is running in normal or time-saving mode, and the variable display that was running before the power was cut off stops while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is displayed on the image display device 5, if there is pending memory when the variable display stops, a new variable display will start based on the pending memory after the variable display stops while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, as shown in Figure 115 (B). In this case, the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 will end when the new variable display stops.

As described above, in the examples shown in Figures 114 (A), (B) and 115 (A), (B), the confirmation operation of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B will not be initiated when a background image or effect image corresponding to the variable display is displayed on the image display device 5, so it is possible to prevent the confirmation operation from being hindered by the background image or effect image corresponding to the variable display on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the example shown in Figure 115 (A), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the normal state or the time-saving state and the variable display is being executed, and the power is cut off and the machine is started with a hot start, if the variable display does not stop while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the lighting of each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) and the confirmation operation of the upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B as an initial operation are simultaneously started. The explanation is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off and hot started while the variable display is running in normal or time-saving mode, if the variable display does not stop while the start preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed, the lighting of each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) and the confirmation operation of the upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B as an initial operation may start at different times.

For example, as shown in FIG. 116(A), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in normal or time-saving mode and the variable display is running, if the power is cut off and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by a hot start, if the variable display does not stop while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) can be made to light up in a manner corresponding to the restoration being carried out while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is displayed (more precisely, for two seconds after the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage restoration command from the CPU 103), and the confirmation operations of the upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B can be started as an initial operation while the restoration display 132SG510 is displayed.

In addition, the lighting of each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, upper panel movable body LED 9d, lower panel movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) in a manner corresponding to the restoration in progress may continue even after the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 has ended, and may be ended, for example, when the confirmation operation for each movable body has ended.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 116 (A), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off and hot started while the variable display is running in the normal state or time-saving state, if the variable display stops while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed and a new variable display does not start, as shown in Figure 116 (B), the image display device 5 will begin displaying a background image corresponding to the variable display being stopped from the time the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 ends, and each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) will be lit in a manner corresponding to the background image.

In addition, the examples shown in Figures 114 to 116 describe cases where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start mode after a power outage occurs when the gaming state is normal or time-saving, that is, when variable display can be executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and power outages can also occur in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when it is in a jackpot gaming state in which variable display is not executed.

When a pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered down during a jackpot game and starts up in a hot start mode, if the power outage occurs while the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is open due to round play, as shown in Figure 117 (A), after the power outage, the CPU 103 first sends a power outage recovery command to the presentation control CPU 120 (the presentation control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command) three seconds after the start of display of the start preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5. At that time, the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are powered up, causing the special symbol lamps that make up these special symbol display devices 4A and 4B to light up (and the special symbol lamps to flash to display the special symbols variably), and the solenoids 81 and 82 are powered up, causing the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 to return to the state they were in before the power outage. In other words, the variable winning ball device 6B is closed, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is open.

Furthermore, when two seconds have passed since the performance control CPU 120 received the power outage restoration command (five seconds have passed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was displayed), the image display device 5 will begin displaying the restoration in progress display 132SG510 in place of the start-up preparation display 132SG500, and each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) will begin lighting up in a manner corresponding to the restoration being carried out.

While the recovery display 132SG510 is still displayed, confirmation operations for the on-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the frame-top movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B are executed as initial operations.

After the initial operation is complete and the round of play ends, the special variable winning ball device 7 changes from an open state to a closed state in response to the end of the round of play. Then, in response to the start of the next round of play, the special variable winning ball device 7 changes from a closed state to an open state, the image display device 5 begins to display an image corresponding to the round of play, and each LED (frame LED 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) begins to light up in a manner corresponding to the round of play.

In the example of Figure 117 (A), a power outage occurs during a round of play, and when the pachinko gaming machine is started up in a hot start, the round of play before the power outage ends after the start-up preparation display 132SG500 has finished displaying. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figure 117 (B), when a power outage occurs during a round of play, and when the pachinko gaming machine is started up in a hot start, the round of play before the power outage ends while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, and the next round of play begins (special variable winning ball equipment In the case where the device 7 changes from an open state to a closed state and then to an open state again, even after the display of the startup preparation display 132SG500 on the image display device 5 has finished, the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) can be lit in a manner corresponding to the recovery in progress until the confirmation operations of the upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B as the initial operation are completed.

As shown in Figures 117 (A) and (B), if a power outage occurs when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state (during a round of play) during a jackpot game, the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start, and when each LED (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, upper board movable body LED 9d, lower board movable body LED 9e, upper frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) is lit in a manner corresponding to the round of play, the upper board movable body 32A, lower board movable body 32B, upper frame movable body 132 Since the confirmation operations for SG101 and chance button 631B are not executed, it is possible to prevent the LEDs (frame LEDs 9a, 9b, above-board movable body LED 9d, below-board movable body LED 9e, above-frame movable body LED 9f, chance button LED 9g) from lighting up in a manner appropriate to the round of play, which would interfere with the work of checking whether the confirmation operations for above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, above-frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B are being executed correctly.

In addition, in the examples shown in Figures 114 to 116, we have described a case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a hot start after a power outage occurs when the gaming state is normal or time-saving. However, as shown in Figure 118 (A), if the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state before the power outage occurs, and the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed (in the example of Figure 118 (A), during the 2 seconds from when the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command until the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 ends), If a game ball enters ball device 6B, that is, if a second start-up win occurs while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is displayed, after the start-up preparation display 132SG500 has finished displaying, the image display device 5 will display the recovery display 132SG510 until the timing at which the variable display corresponding to the second start-up win is stopped, and while the recovery display 132SG510 is displayed, confirmation operations for the above-board movable body 32A, below-board movable body 32B, above-frame movable body 132SG101, and chance button 631B will be started as initial operation control.

In addition, in the example shown in Figure 118 (A), the variable winning ball device 6B was in an open state before the power outage occurred, and a gaming ball entered the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was being displayed (in the example of Figure 118 (A), during the 2 seconds from when the performance control CPU 120 received the power outage recovery command until the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 ended). However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the case where the variable display of normal symbols was being executed before the power outage occurred, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started with a hot start, and a normal symbol win occurred while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was being displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in Figure 118 (B), the initial operation control can be performed by controlling the variable winning ball device 6B to be in an open state from the timing before the confirmation operations of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B begin.

As described above, by executing the control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as shown in Figures 118(A) and 118(B), it is possible to preferably execute the confirmation operations of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B as initial operation control.

In the example of Figure 118 (A), after a gaming ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state, the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is switched to the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 may also be switched to the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 at the time when a gaming ball enters the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state.

Furthermore, Figures 117(A) and (B) illustrate a case where the power is interrupted when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a jackpot gaming state and starts up in a hot start, with the power interruption occurring when the special variable prize ball device 7 (large prize opening) is in an open state due to round play. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figure 119, in a case where the power is interrupted when the special variable prize ball device 7 (large prize opening) is in an open state due to round play, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up in a hot start. As a result, while the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is being displayed on the image display device 5 (in the example shown in FIG. 119, during the 2 seconds from when the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command until the start-up preparation display 132SG500 finishes displaying), if the special variable winning ball device 7 changes from the open state to the closed state again for the next round of play, the display of the recovery in progress display 132SG510 should begin after the display of the start-up preparation display 132SG500 finishes displaying.

As described above, by executing the control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as shown in Figure 119, it is possible to preferably execute the confirmation operations of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the above-frame movable body 132SG101, and the chance button 631B as initial operation control.

In addition, in form A3, a portion of the fanfare effect that starts while the launch preparation display 132SG500 is displayed is invisible to the player, and when the launch preparation display 132SG500 is no longer displayed, the fanfare effect can be seen from the continuation of the invisible portion. In contrast, in forms A21 to A24, the effect display corresponding to the variable display that started while the launch preparation display 132SG500 was displayed is made invisible by the display of a recovery indicator. In other words, the variable display is intentionally controlled to be invisible because important information related to whether or not a jackpot will be hit must not be incorrect. However, the fanfare effect is intentionally controlled to be visible because it includes an operation direction notification part that encourages right-hand hits, which are necessary for subsequent jackpot play.

Configuration A25 (Relationship between initialization notification image and initial operation) <Modification>
Next, the relationship between initialization notification display 132SG600 and operation confirmation control will be described with reference to Figures 121 and 122. Figure 121 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between initialization notification display 132SG600 and operation confirmation control. Figure 122 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between initialization notification display 132SG600 and operation confirmation control.

In the above embodiment, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up using the cold start process after a power outage, a power-on command, a game status background command (normal background), and a customer waiting demo command are transmitted based on the CPU 103 being restored after a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start-up timing and the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was displayed on the image display device 5. Then, based on receiving these effect control commands, the presentation control CPU 120 determines that power-on with initialization has been performed (started up using the cold start process), and causes the frame LEDs 9a and 9b, the upper board movable body LED 9d, the lower board movable body LED 9e, the upper frame movable body LED 9f, and the chance button LED 9g to illuminate in a predetermined initialization notification manner, and begins outputting an initialization notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (see Figures 72 and 73).

In addition, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start-up preparation display 132SG500 was displayed on the image display device 5, the start-up preparation display 132SG500 is hidden and the first background display 132SG310 is displayed based on the game status background designation command (normal background). However, in this modified example, when power is turned on with initialization, the initialization notification display 132SG600 as described in FIG. 113 is displayed when the initialization notification begins.

In this case, after the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 begins, the initial operation is initiated by the operation confirmation control, and after the initial operation is completed, the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 ends. This allows the user to quickly confirm that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been initialized without being distracted by the moving body operating under the operation confirmation control, and prevents the moving body operating under the operation confirmation control from interfering with the confirmation of whether the visual initialization notification has ended.

In addition, the period from power-on with initialization (startup with cold start processing) until operation check control is performed is longer than the period from power-on without initialization (startup with hot start processing) until operation check control is performed. This prevents the initialization notification display 132SG600 from becoming invisible due to operation check control being performed immediately after power-on with initialization.

Furthermore, the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed for a predetermined execution period (e.g., 30 seconds) and is hidden after the predetermined execution period has ended. Even if a start-up win occurs while the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed, it is preferable that the initialization notification display 132SG600 is hidden and the variable display is not initiated. This allows for optimal operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, if the execution period of the variable display that begins upon the occurrence of a start winning is longer than the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600, the initialization display may be configured to continue to be displayed until the end of the execution period of the variable display. This allows for optimal operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, if a start-up win occurs while the initialization notification display 132SG600 is displayed, the initialization notification display 132SG600 may be immediately hidden and an effect image corresponding to the variable display may be displayed.

Furthermore, after power-on without initialization (startup using hot start processing), the initialization notification display 132SG600 may not be displayed, and the background may be displayed based on the game status background designation command. This allows for optimal operation confirmation control.

Furthermore, as in this modified example, when power is turned on with initialization (startup with cold start processing), the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 begins, followed by initial operation via operation confirmation control, and after the initial operation is completed, the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 ends. In this case, as shown in FIG. 120, if a start-up win occurs after the initialization notification display 132SG600 has ended and it is decided that a movable object preview will be executed, while as shown in FIG. 121, if a start-up win occurs during the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600 and it is decided that a movable object preview will be executed, as described in embodiment A1, not only the performance operation due to the movable object preview but also the output of effect displays and sound effects are restricted during the display period of the initialization notification display 132SG600, and the performance operation due to the movable object preview is carried out after the display of the initialization notification display 132SG600 has ended.

Configuration A26 (operation confirmation control) <Modification>
Next, an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control executed by the presentation control CPU 120 will be described with reference to Figs. 122 to 123. Fig. 122 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing an example of the operation of the operation confirmation control during cold start processing as a modified example. Fig. 123 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing an example of the presentation operation of the win/lose button presentation as a modified example.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in Figures 68(A) to (J), when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 begins (when the power is turned on), the operation confirmation control executed by the performance control CPU 120 based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up through cold start processing (or hot start processing) first causes the chance button 631B to move upward from the origin position to the performance position and stop there (see Figure 68(B)), after which the on-board movable body 32A moves downward from the origin position to the performance position and stops there (see Figure 68(C)). Next, after the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 68(D)), the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 68(E)). Next, the under-board movable body 32B moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see FIG. 68(F)), after which the above-frame movable body 132SG101 moves upward from the origin position to the performance position and stops (see FIG. 68(G)). Next, the above-frame movable body 132SG101 moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see FIG. 68(H)), after which the under-board movable body 32B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position, and the operation confirmation control ends (see FIG. 68(I)). After that, when a predetermined time (e.g., approximately 10 seconds) has elapsed, the initialization notification ends and the operation confirmation control (initialization operation control) ends, but the operation mode of each movable body can be modified in various ways.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 122(A), when the on-board movable body 32A as the board-side movable body is located at the origin position and the chance button 631B as the frame-side movable body is located at the origin position, the distance L1 between the on-board movable body 32A and the chance button 631B is shorter than the distance L2 between the on-board movable body 32A as the board-side movable body and the chance button 631B as the frame-side movable body when the on-board movable body 32A as the board-side movable body is located at the performance position and the chance button 631B as the frame-side movable body is located at the performance position, as shown in Figure 122(B).

In this modified example, the on-board movable body 32A and chance button 631B, which have the above-mentioned relationship, may be configured such that during operation confirmation control, the chance button 631B and on-board movable body 32A simultaneously begin moving from the origin position to the performance position so that their respective initial operation periods overlap (see Figure 122 (B)). Thereafter, the chance button 631B moves downward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 122 (C)), and then the on-board movable body 32A moves upward from the performance position and stops at the origin position (see Figure 122 (D)), so that their respective initial operation periods do not overlap.

By doing this, it is possible to simultaneously confirm that the first movable body (e.g., chance button 631B) can operate normally in the presentation position, and that the second movable body (e.g., on-board movable body 32A) can operate normally in the presentation position, thereby simplifying the confirmation process, and at the same time making it possible to individually confirm the movement of the first movable body (e.g., chance button 631B) from the presentation position to the origin position, and the movement of the second movable body (e.g., on-board movable body 32A) from the presentation position to the origin position, which are difficult to confirm.

In this modified example, the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A simultaneously start moving from the origin position to the performance position, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as their initial operation periods overlap, for example, during the period from when one of the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A starts moving from the origin position to when it stops at the performance position, the other starts moving from the origin position to the performance position. In other words, it is sufficient that at least a portion of the advancement operation periods of the chance button 631B and the on-board movable body 32A overlap.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of the form in which the movable body below the board 32B rises from the origin position to the performance position during the win/lose button performance, but it is also possible to use a first movable body (e.g., the movable body above the board 32A) and a second movable body (e.g., the movable body below the board 32B). In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 123(A), in the win/lose button effect, when the operation prompt effect is being executed during the valid operation period or when the valid operation period has elapsed, the above-board movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the effect position (see FIG. 123(B)), and the below-board movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the effect position to lift the above-board movable body 32A, so that the effect operation periods of the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B do not overlap (see FIG. 123(C)). After that, the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B may simultaneously move from the effect position to the origin position so that the effect operation periods of the above-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B overlap (see FIG. 123(D)).

For the on-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B that perform a performance in which the first movable body and the second movable body come into contact (or overlap) in this manner, it is preferable that the initial operation be performed in the operation confirmation control in an operation mode that does not include the performance operations described in Figures 123 (B) to (D) (for example, a mode in which the on-board movable body 32A and the below-board movable body 32B perform an advance operation separately). This makes it possible to perform the operation confirmation control in an optimal manner.

In addition, a performance position sensor 132SG134 (see Figure 13) is provided that can detect when a second movable body (e.g., below-board movable body 32B) is positioned at the performance position, and the movement of a first movable body (e.g., above-board movable body 32A) positioned at the performance position during operation confirmation control toward the origin position is performed on the condition that the second movable body (e.g., below-board movable body 32B) has been detected by the performance position sensor 132SG134, thereby enabling operation confirmation control to be performed optimally.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on, if the movable bodies including the first movable body and the second movable body are not positioned at the origin position before the long initial operation control is started in the operation confirmation control, return control is performed to move the movable bodies to their initial positions (for example, short initial operation control of the above-board movable body 32A, the below-board movable body 32B, the chance button 631B, and the above-frame movable body 132SG101), thereby enabling the operation confirmation control to be performed optimally.

Configuration A27 (operation confirmation control)
Also, as shown in Figure 68, the under-board movable body 32B provided on the game board 2 and the above-frame movable body 132SG101 provided on the opening and closing door frame 3a are capable of performing initial operations, and when the under-board movable body 32B moves from the origin position to the performance position and stops at the performance position (see Figure 68 (F)), the above-frame movable body 132SG101 moves from the origin position to the performance position, and then moves from the performance position to the origin position (see Figures 68 (G) to (I)).

By doing this, the first movable body (e.g., under-board movable body 32B) placed at the performance position during the operation confirmation control indicates that the operation confirmation control has not ended, and by starting the operation of the second movable body (e.g., above-frame movable body 132SG101) when the first movable body (e.g., below-board movable body 32B) is placed at the performance position, it is possible to prevent the operation confirmation control of the second movable body (e.g., above-frame movable body 132SG101) from being overlooked.

Specifically, frame-side movable bodies such as the frame-top movable body 132SG101 and chance button 631B are easily tampered with because they can be touched by players. Therefore, if they fail to operate normally, just like board-side movable bodies such as the board-top movable body 32A and the board-bottom movable body 32B, and the board-side movable body is forced to start over from its initial operation, the board-side movable body can be intentionally put into a dead-end state (see Figure 124 (A)).

Therefore, for example, as shown in Figure 124 (B), if the frame-side movable body is unable to operate normally, the board-side movable body is retracted, and an error image regarding the malfunction of the frame-side movable body (for example, a caption such as "Please check the frame-side movable body", which is erased once the frame-side movable body is able to operate normally) is displayed on the background image on the display screen of the image display device 5, and if the frame-side movable body is unable to operate normally even after performing the initial operation (frame-side movable body only; operating mode is the same as when the power is turned on) upon error determination up to five times (more times than for the board-side movable body, and the conditions leading up to the dead end are stricter in consideration of the ease of tampering), only the frame-side movable body can be transitioned to a dead end state.

In addition, a performance position sensor 132SG104 (see Figure 13) is provided that can detect when a second movable body (e.g., above-frame movable body 132SG101) is positioned at a performance position, and the movement of a first movable body (e.g., below-board movable body 32B) positioned at a performance position during operation confirmation control toward the origin position is performed on the condition that the second movable body (e.g., below-board movable body 32B) has been detected by the performance position sensor 132SG104, thereby enabling operation confirmation control to be performed optimally.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention are also included in the present invention.

In addition, while the above embodiment uses a pachinko gaming machine 1 as an example of a gaming machine, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can also be applied to so-called enclosed gaming machines in which a predetermined number of gaming balls are enclosed and circulatable inside the gaming machine, and the number of loaned balls loaned in response to a loan request from a player and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winning are added, while the number of gaming balls used in play is subtracted and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, players are awarded scores or points rather than gaming balls, and these awarded scores or points correspond to the gaming value.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but this is not limited to spherical gaming media and may also be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine was used as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines in which, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using gaming value, one game ends when the variable display result is output to a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of individually identifiable symbols, and a prize can be awarded depending on the variable display result output to the variable display device.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning, as well as slot machines. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows games to be played, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and can also be a general gaming machine.

The following describes further the implementation of the gaming machine according to the present invention based on the following examples. Note that in the following examples, the "variable display" of special symbols and decorative symbols may be referred to as "variable display" or simply "variable."

[Form B1]
The gaming machine of form B1 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information about variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
When the variable display is completed, the game control means can execute the next variable display if there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means
When the hold memory is stored, the hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
It is possible to move the reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to the position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the number of reserved memories N, which is a variable display in a situation where N number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, and the hold display is displayed;
When a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on that timing and displayed;
When the N-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is completed and a new reserved memory is stored between the start timing of the reserved shift and the specified period has elapsed, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and is gradually changed from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the specified period.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a reserved memory stored during a variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state, so that subsequent movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and misidentification of the number of reserved memories is prevented. Also, by distinguishing whether or not the state changes to a completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be suitably shown the number of reserved memories and the gradual changes when a new reserved memory is stored. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual changes when a new reserved memory is stored can be more suitably shown to the player.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 196 to 198
In this embodiment,
The "advantageous state" corresponds to the "jackpot gaming state" in this embodiment.
The "game control means" corresponds to the "CPU 103" in this embodiment.
The "performance execution means" corresponds to the "performance control CPU 120" in this embodiment,
The "reserved storage means" corresponds to the "first special symbol buffer 001SG151" and the "second special symbol buffer 001SG151B" in this embodiment,
The "predetermined number" corresponds to "the number of first special chart reserved memories and the number of second special chart reserved memories being four" in this embodiment.
The "start mode" corresponds to the "hold display displayed as the image of the first frame of the appearance animation" in this embodiment,
The "completion mode" corresponds to the "hold display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation" in this embodiment,
The "mid-way state" corresponds to the "hold display displayed as the image of the second to nineteenth frames of the appearance animation" in this embodiment,
"Pending shift" corresponds to "shift animation" in this embodiment,
The "specific period" corresponds to the "330 ms display execution period of the shift animation" in this embodiment.
The "predetermined period" corresponds to the "660 ms display execution period of the appearance animation" in this embodiment.
The "hold display position" corresponds to the "hold memory display area 5U" in this embodiment.

[Form B2]
The gaming machine of form B2 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information about variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
When the variable display is completed, the game control means can execute the next variable display if there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means
When the hold memory is stored, the hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
It is possible to move the reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to the position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the number of reserved memories N, which is a variable display in a situation where N number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, and the hold display is displayed;
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the next variable display to start in a situation where the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on that timing and displayed,
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes in the start mode, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the number of reserved memories N is finished and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a reserved memory stored during a variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state, so that subsequent movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and misidentification of the number of reserved memories is prevented. Also, by distinguishing whether or not the state changes to a completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be suitably shown the number of reserved memories and the gradual changes when a new reserved memory is stored. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual changes when a new reserved memory is stored can be more suitably shown to the player.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 196, Figure 197, Figure 199, Figure 200

[Form B3]
The gaming machine of form B3 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information about variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
When the variable display is completed, the game control means can execute the next variable display if there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means
When the hold memory is stored, the hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
It is possible to move the reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to the position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the number of reserved memories N, which is a variable display in a situation where N number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, and the hold display is displayed;
When a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on that timing and displayed;
During the execution of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display when reserved memory is not stored,
When the period until the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is completed is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 ends is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored, the pending display is started in the start mode at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode is reached, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a reserved memory stored during a variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state, so that the subsequent movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and misconception of the number of reserved memories is prevented. Furthermore, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be suitably shown the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if there is not a predetermined period until the start of the next variable display when a new reserved memory is stored, the gradual change when the new reserved memory is stored is changed to a completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and misconception of the number of reserved memories is prevented, even when the number of reserved memories is 0.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 196, Figure 197, Figure 205, Figure 206

[Form B4]
The gaming machine of form B4 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information about variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
When the variable display is completed, the game control means can execute the next variable display if there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means
When the hold memory is stored, the hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
It is possible to move the reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to the position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the number of reserved memories N, which is a variable display in a situation where N number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, and the hold display is displayed;
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the next variable display to start in a situation where the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on that timing and displayed,
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes in the start mode, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the number of reserved memories N is finished and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period,
During the execution of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display when reserved memory is not stored,
When the period until the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is completed is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the end of the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and when a new pending memory is stored not immediately before the end of the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0, the pending display is started in the start state at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the start of the next variable display in a situation where the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the pending display is changed to the completion state based on that timing and displayed,
When the period until the end of the variable display of the number of reserved memories at 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and a new reserved memory is stored just before the end of the variable display of the number of reserved memories at 0, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the display is in the start mode, the reserved display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the end of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, the reserved display is displayed from the completion mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a reserved memory stored during a variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state, thereby preventing any subsequent movement of the reserved display position and preventing misconception of the number of reserved memories. Furthermore, by distinguishing whether or not a change to a completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be shown the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more clearly shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if a new reserved memory is stored within the predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when the new reserved memory is stored is changed to a completed state, thereby preventing any movement of the reserved display position and preventing misconception of the number of reserved memories, even when the number of reserved memories is 0.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 196, Figure 197, Figure 199, Figure 200, Figure 205 to Figure 208
In this embodiment,
"Just before the variable display ends when the number of reserved memories is 0" corresponds to "the timing less than 33 ms before the variable display ends when the number of reserved memories is 0."
"Immediately after the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 has ended" corresponds to "a timing less than 33 ms after the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 has ended."

[Form B5]
The gaming machine of form B5 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information about variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
When the variable display is completed, the game control means can execute the next variable display if there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means
When the hold memory is stored, the hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
It is possible to move the reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to the position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the number of reserved memories N, which is a variable display in a situation where N number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, and the hold display is displayed;
When a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on that timing and displayed;
When the N-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is completed and a new reserved memory is stored between the start timing of the reserved shift and the specified period has elapsed, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and is gradually changed from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state over the specified period, and the reserved display is displayed;
A display area used for changing the hold display from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes in a stepwise manner and then to the completion mode is larger than a display area used for displaying the hold display during a period from when the hold display is displayed in the completion mode to when the hold shift start timing is reached.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a reserved memory stored during a variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state, thereby preventing any subsequent movement of the reserved display position and preventing misidentification of the number of reserved memories. Furthermore, by distinguishing whether or not a change to a completed state occurs when the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be shown the number of reserved memories and the gradual changes when a new reserved memory is stored. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual changes when a new reserved memory is stored can be more clearly shown to the player. Furthermore, since newly stored reserved memories during the specific period from the start of the variable display until the reserve display position moves are initially displayed at the destination display position, there is no need to change the gradual changes to a completed state, allowing the player to see the gradual changes. Furthermore, even if a new reserved memory is displayed overlapping an already displayed reserved memory, the display area used for the gradual change of the new reserved memory is larger, allowing the player to recognize the reserved memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 180, Figure 196 to Figure 198

[Form B6]
The gaming machine of form B6 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information about variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
When the variable display is completed, the game control means can execute the next variable display if there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means
When the hold memory is stored, the hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
It is possible to move the reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to the position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the number of reserved memories N, which is a variable display in a situation where N number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, and the hold display is displayed;
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the next variable display to start in a situation where the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on that timing and displayed,
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes in the start mode, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the number of reserved memories N is finished and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period,
A display area used for changing the hold display from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes in a stepwise manner and then to the completion mode is larger than a display area used for displaying the hold display during a period from when the hold display is displayed in the completion mode to when the hold shift start timing is reached.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a pending memory stored between the start of a variable display and the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state, thereby preventing any subsequent movement of the pending display position and preventing misidentification of the number of pending memories. Furthermore, by distinguishing whether or not a change to a completed state occurs when the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be shown the number of pending memories and the gradual changes when a new pending memory is stored. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual changes when a new pending memory is stored can be more clearly shown to the player. Furthermore, since newly stored pending memories during the specific period from the start of the variable display to the movement of the pending display position are initially displayed at the new display position, there is no need to change the gradual changes to a completed state, allowing the player to see the gradual changes. Furthermore, even if a new pending display overlaps an already displayed pending display, the display area used for displaying the new pending display is larger, allowing the player to recognize the pending memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 180, Figure 196, Figure 197, Figure 199, Figure 200

[Form B7]
The gaming machine of form B7 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information about variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
When the variable display is completed, the game control means can execute the next variable display if there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means
When the hold memory is stored, the hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
It is possible to move the reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to the position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the number of reserved memories N, which is a variable display in a situation where N number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, and the hold display is displayed;
When a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on that timing and displayed;
When the N-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is completed and a new reserved memory is stored between the start timing of the reserved shift and the specified period has elapsed, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and is gradually changed from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state over the specified period, and the reserved display is displayed;
During the execution of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display when reserved memory is not stored,
When the period until the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is completed is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 ends is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored, the pending display is started in the start mode at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode is reached, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed,
A display area used for changing the hold display from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes in a stepwise manner and then to the completion mode is larger than a display area used for displaying the hold display during a period from when the hold display is displayed in the completion mode to when the hold shift start timing is reached.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a reserved memory stored during a variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state, so that the subsequent movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and misconception of the number of reserved memories is prevented. Furthermore, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be suitably shown the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if there is not a predetermined period until the start of the next variable display when a new reserved memory is stored, the gradual change when the new reserved memory is stored is changed to a completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and misconception of the number of reserved memories is prevented, even when the number of reserved memories is 0. Furthermore, since the reserved memory newly stored during the specific period from the start of the variable display to the movement of the reserved display position is displayed at the display position of the destination from the beginning, there is no need to change the gradual change to a completed state, and the player can see the gradual change, and even if the reserved display that was already displayed at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number moves and the newly displayed reserved display is superimposed on the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, the display area used by the newly displayed reserved display is larger, making it easy to see the newly displayed reserved display and preventing misrecognition. Furthermore, even if the timing of the new display of the reserved display superimposes on the reserved display already displayed, the display area used by the new reserved display is larger, so the player can recognize the reserved memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 180, Figure 196, Figure 197, Figure 205, Figure 206

[Form B8]
The gaming machine of form B8 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information about variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
When the variable display is completed, the game control means can execute the next variable display if there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means
When the hold memory is stored, the hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
It is possible to move the reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to the position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the number of reserved memories N, which is a variable display in a situation where N number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, and the hold display is displayed;
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the next variable display to start in a situation where the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on that timing and displayed,
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes in the start mode, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the number of reserved memories N is finished and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period,
During the execution of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display when reserved memory is not stored,
When the period until the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is completed is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the end of the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and when a new pending memory is stored not immediately before the end of the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0, the pending display is started in the start state at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the start of the next variable display in a situation where the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the pending display is changed to the completion state based on that timing and displayed,
When the period until the end of the variable display of the number of reserved memories at 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and a new reserved memory is stored just before the end of the variable display of the number of reserved memories at 0, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the display is in the start mode, the reserved display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the end of the reserved memory count 0 time variable display, the reserved display is displayed in the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display of the reserved memory count 0 time variable display from the completion mode,
A display area used for changing the hold display from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes in a stepwise manner and then to the completion mode is larger than a display area used for displaying the hold display during a period from when the hold display is displayed in the completion mode to when the hold shift start timing is reached.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a reserved memory stored during a variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state, thereby preventing any subsequent movement of the reserved display position and preventing misconception of the number of reserved memories. Furthermore, by distinguishing whether or not a change to a completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be shown the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more clearly shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if a new reserved memory is stored within the predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when the new reserved memory is stored is changed to a completed state, thereby preventing any movement of the reserved display position and preventing misconception of the number of reserved memories, even when the number of reserved memories is 0. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit, even if a predetermined variable display ends, the reserved memories are not stored until the next variable display begins, so gradual changes for new reserved memories are not performed, allowing the player to focus on the variable display results of the completed variable display. Newly stored reserved memories during the specific period from the start of the variable display until the reserved display position moves are displayed at the new display position from the beginning, so there is no need to change the gradual changes to a completed state, allowing the player to see the gradual changes. Furthermore, even if a reserved display that was already displayed at a predetermined number moves and a new reserved display that is displayed at the predetermined number overlaps it, the newly displayed reserved display uses a larger display area, making it easier to see and preventing misidentification. Furthermore, even if a new reserved display overlaps an already displayed reserved display, the display area used for the gradual change of the new reserved display is larger, so the player can recognize the reserved memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 180, Figure 196, Figure 197, Figure 199, Figure 200, Figures 205 to 208

[Form B9]
The gaming machine of form B9 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information about variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
When the variable display is completed, the game control means can execute the next variable display if there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means
When the hold memory is stored, the hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the reserved memory is stored, it is possible to execute a winning performance,
It is possible to move the reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to the position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the number of reserved memories N, which is a variable display in a situation where N number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, and the hold display is displayed;
When a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on that timing and displayed;
When the N-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is completed and a new reserved memory is stored between the start timing of the reserved shift and the specified period has elapsed, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and is gradually changed from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state over the specified period, and the reserved display is displayed;
The winning performance can be executed in any of the following cases: when a new reserved memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is longer than the predetermined period during execution of the variable display of the number of reserved memories N; when a new reserved memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period during execution of the variable display of the number of reserved memories N; and when a new reserved memory is stored after the variable display of the number of reserved memories N has ended and the specific period has elapsed since the start of the reserved shift.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a reserved memory stored during a variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state. This prevents subsequent movement of the reserved display position and prevents misidentification of the number of reserved memories. Furthermore, by distinguishing whether or not the number of reserved memories changes to a completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be shown the number of reserved memories and the gradual changes that occur when a new reserved memory is stored. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual changes that occur when a new reserved memory is stored can be more clearly shown to the player. Furthermore, for newly stored reserved memories during the specific period from the start of the variable display until the reserved display position moves, the reserved display is displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, so there is no need to change the gradual change to a completed state, allowing the player to see the gradual changes. Furthermore, because the winning effect can be executed regardless of whether or not the gradual change to a completed state occurs, the player can more easily recognize the reserved memories.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 196 to 198, Figure 216
In this embodiment,
The "prize winning effect" corresponds to the "prize winning flash effect."

[Form B10]
The gaming machine of form B10 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information about variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
When the variable display is completed, the game control means can execute the next variable display if there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means
When the hold memory is stored, the hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the reserved memory is stored, it is possible to execute a winning performance,
It is possible to move the reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to the position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the number of reserved memories N, which is a variable display in a situation where N number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, and the hold display is displayed;
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the next variable display to start in a situation where the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on that timing and displayed,
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes in the start mode, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the number of reserved memories N is finished and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period,
The winning performance can be executed in any of the following cases: when a new reserved memory is stored during execution of the variable display at N reserved memory times when the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than the predetermined period; when a new reserved memory is stored during execution of the variable display at N reserved memory times when the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the next variable display; when a new reserved memory is stored during execution of the variable display at N reserved memory times when the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the next variable display; and when a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the variable display at N reserved memory times has ended and the next variable display has started.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a reserved memory stored during a variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state. This prevents subsequent movement of the reserved display position and prevents misidentification of the number of reserved memories. Furthermore, by distinguishing whether or not the number of reserved memories changes to a completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be shown the number of reserved memories and the gradual changes that occur when a new reserved memory is stored. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual changes that occur when a new reserved memory is stored can be more clearly shown to the player. Furthermore, for newly stored reserved memories during the specific period from the start of the variable display until the reserved display position moves, the reserved display is displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, so there is no need to change the gradual change to a completed state, allowing the player to see the gradual changes. Furthermore, because the winning effect can be executed regardless of whether or not the gradual change to a completed state occurs, the player can more easily recognize the reserved memories.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 196, Figure 197, Figure 199, Figure 200, Figure 216

[Form B11]
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information about variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
When the variable display is completed, the game control means can execute the next variable display if there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means
When the hold memory is stored, the hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the reserved memory is stored, it is possible to execute a winning performance,
It is possible to move the reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to the position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the number of reserved memories N, which is a variable display in a situation where N number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, and the hold display is displayed;
When a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on that timing and displayed;
During the execution of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display when reserved memory is not stored,
When the period until the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is completed is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 ends is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored, the pending display is started in the start mode at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode is reached, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed,
The winning performance can be executed in any of the following cases: when a new reserved memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is longer than the predetermined period during execution of the variable display of the number of reserved memories N; when a new reserved memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period during execution of the variable display of the number of reserved memories N; when a new reserved memory is stored when the period until the end of the variable display of the number of reserved memories 0 is longer than the predetermined period during execution of the variable display of the number of reserved memories 0; and when a new reserved memory is stored when the period until the end of the variable display of the number of reserved memories 0 is shorter than the predetermined period during execution of the variable display of the number of reserved memories 0.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a reserved memory stored during a variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state, so that the subsequent movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and misconception of the number of reserved memories is prevented. Furthermore, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be suitably shown the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if there is not a predetermined period until the start of the next variable display when a new reserved memory is stored, the gradual change when the new reserved memory is stored is changed to a completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and misconception of the number of reserved memories is prevented, even when the number of reserved memories is 0. Furthermore, since the reserved memory newly stored during the specific period from the start of the variable display to the movement of the reserved display position is displayed at the display position of the destination from the beginning, there is no need to change the gradual change to a completed state, and the player can see the gradual change, and even if the reserved display newly displayed at the Nth position is superimposed when the reserved display already displayed at the Nth position moves, the newly displayed reserved display uses a larger display area, making it easier to see the newly displayed reserved display and preventing misidentification. Furthermore, since the winning effect can be executed regardless of whether the gradual change changes to a completed state, it is easier for the player to recognize the reserved memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 196, Figure 197, Figure 205, Figure 206, Figure 216

[Form B12]
The gaming machine of form B12 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information about variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
When the variable display is completed, the game control means can execute the next variable display if there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means
When the hold memory is stored, the hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the reserved memory is stored, it is possible to execute a winning performance,
It is possible to move the reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to the position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the number of reserved memories N, which is a variable display in a situation where N number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, and the hold display is displayed;
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the next variable display to start in a situation where the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on that timing and displayed,
If a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes in the start mode, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the number of reserved memories N is finished and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period,
During the execution of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display when reserved memory is not stored,
When the period until the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is completed is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the end of the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and when a new pending memory is stored not immediately before the end of the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0, the pending display is started in the start state at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the start of the next variable display in a situation where the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the pending display is changed to the completion state based on that timing and displayed,
When the period until the end of the variable display of the number of reserved memories at 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and a new reserved memory is stored just before the end of the variable display of the number of reserved memories at 0, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the display is in the start mode, the reserved display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the end of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, the reserved display is displayed in the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display from the completion mode,
When the N-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is being executed, a new reserved memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period; when the N-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is being executed, a new reserved memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display starts; when the N-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is being executed, a new reserved memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display starts; when the N-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is finished and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display starts; and when the 0-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is being executed. In this case, the winning performance can be executed in any of the following cases: when a new reserved memory is stored when the period until the end of the reserved memory number 0 o'clock variable display is longer than the predetermined period; when a new reserved memory is stored when the period until the end of the reserved memory number 0 o'clock variable display is shorter than the predetermined period during execution of the reserved memory number 0 o'clock variable display and not immediately before the end of the reserved memory number 0 o'clock variable display; when a new reserved memory is stored when the period until the end of the reserved memory number 0 o'clock variable display is shorter than the predetermined period during execution of the reserved memory number 0 o'clock variable display and just before the end of the reserved memory number 0 o'clock variable display; and when a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the end of the reserved memory number 0 o'clock variable display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a reserved memory stored during a variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state, thereby preventing any subsequent movement of the reserved display position and preventing misconception of the number of reserved memories. Furthermore, by distinguishing whether or not a change to a completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be shown the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more clearly shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if a new reserved memory is stored within the predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when the new reserved memory is stored is changed to a completed state, thereby preventing any movement of the reserved display position and preventing misconception of the number of reserved memories, even when the number of reserved memories is 0. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories reaches its upper limit, even if a predetermined variable display ends, the reserved memory is not stored until the next variable display begins, so the gradual change for the new reserved memory is not executed, allowing the player to focus on the variable display result of the completed variable display. Newly stored reserved memories during the specific period from the start of the variable display to the time the reserved display position moves are displayed at the new display position from the beginning, so there is no need to change the gradual change to a completed state, allowing the player to see the gradual change. Furthermore, even if a reserved display that was already displayed at the predetermined number moves and a new reserved display that is displayed at the predetermined number overlaps it, the newly displayed reserved display occupies a larger display area, making the newly displayed reserved display easier to see and preventing misidentification. Furthermore, because the winning effect can be executed regardless of whether the gradual change has changed to a completed state, the player can more easily recognize the reserved memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 196, Figure 197, Figure 199, Figure 200, Figures 205 to 208, Figure 216

[Form B13]
The gaming machine of form B13 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information about variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
When the variable display is completed, the game control means can execute the next variable display if there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means
When the reserved memory is stored, one of a plurality of types of reserved displays including a normal reserved display and a special reserved display that has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the normal reserved display can be displayed;
When the hold memory is stored, the normal hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a normal start mode, a normal completion mode, and a plurality of normal intermediate modes including a normal pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the normal completion mode,
When the reserved memory is stored, the special reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a special start mode, a special completion mode, and a plurality of special intermediate modes including a special pre-completion mode which is the mode immediately before the special completion mode,
The reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display can be moved from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to the position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the number of reserved memories N, which is a variable display in a situation where N number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed stepwise from the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changed to the normal completion mode over the predetermined period, and the normal hold display is displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the special start mode is gradually changed to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then the special hold display is changed to the special completion mode, and this change is carried out over the predetermined period to display the special hold display;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the normal start mode to a normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, and when the next variable display is started in a situation where the normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode is reached, the display is changed to the normal completion mode based on that timing and the normal hold display is displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the special start mode to a special midway mode different from the special pre-completion mode, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the special midway mode different from the special pre-completion mode, the mode is changed to the special completion mode based on that timing and the special hold display is displayed,
When the N-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is completed and a new reserved memory is stored between the start timing of the reserved shift and the specified period has elapsed, the normal reserved display is displayed by starting the normal reserved display at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number in the normal start mode, gradually changing from the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changing to the normal completion mode over the specified period, and displaying the normal reserved display;
When the N-time variable display of the number of reserved memories is completed and a new reserved memory is stored between the start timing of the reserved shift and the specified period has elapsed, the special reserved display is displayed by starting the special reserved display in the special start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, gradually changing from the special start mode to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changing to the special completion mode over the specified period, and displaying the special reserved display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a reserved memory stored during a variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state, thereby preventing any subsequent movement of the reserved display position and preventing misidentification of the number of reserved memories. Furthermore, by distinguishing whether or not a change to a completed state occurs when the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be shown the number of reserved memories and the gradual changes when a new reserved memory is stored. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual changes when a new reserved memory is stored can be more clearly shown to the player. Furthermore, for newly stored reserved memories during the specific period from the start of the variable display until the reserve display position moves, the reserve display is displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, so there is no need to change the gradual change to a completed state, allowing the player to see the gradual changes. Furthermore, even when a special reserve display is displayed, the same rules for the gradual change of the gradual display to the normal completion state or the special completion state and whether or not the change is executed apply as when a normal reserve display is displayed, making it easier for the player to recognize the reserved memories.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 193, Figure 196 to Figure 198
In this embodiment,
"Normal hold display" corresponds to "white hold display due to the decision not to execute the hold change performance" in this embodiment,
"Special hold display" corresponds to "blue and red hold display due to the decision to execute hold change performance" in this embodiment,
The "normal start mode" corresponds to the "white hold display displayed as the first frame image of the appearance animation when it is determined that the hold change performance will not be performed" in this embodiment.
The "normal completion mode" corresponds to the "hold display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation when it is determined that the hold change performance will not be performed" in this embodiment.
The "normal mid-way state" corresponds to the "hold display displayed as the image of the second to nineteenth frames of the appearance animation due to the decision not to execute the hold change performance" in this embodiment.
The "special start mode" corresponds to the "blue or red hold display displayed as the first frame image of the appearance animation when the execution of the hold change performance is decided" in this embodiment,
The "special completion mode" in this embodiment corresponds to the "blue or red pending display that is displayed as the image of the 20th frame of the appearance animation and the image of the 1st frame of the shift animation when the execution of the pending change performance is decided."
The "special intermediate mode" in this embodiment corresponds to the "blue or red hold display that is displayed as an image from the second frame to the nineteenth frame of the appearance animation when it is decided not to execute the hold change effect."

[Form B14]
The gaming machine of form B14 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information about variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
When the variable display is completed, the game control means can execute the next variable display if there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means
When the reserved memory is stored, one of a plurality of types of reserved displays including a normal reserved display and a special reserved display that has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the normal reserved display can be displayed;
When the hold memory is stored, the normal hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a normal start mode, a normal completion mode, and a plurality of normal intermediate modes including a normal pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the normal completion mode,
When the reserved memory is stored, the special reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a special start mode, a special completion mode, and a plurality of special intermediate modes including a special pre-completion mode which is the mode immediately before the special completion mode,
The reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display can be moved from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to the position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the number of reserved memories N, which is a variable display in a situation where N number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed stepwise from the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changed to the normal completion mode over the predetermined period, and the normal hold display is displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the special start mode is gradually changed to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then the special hold display is changed to the special completion mode, and this change is carried out over the predetermined period to display the special hold display;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the normal start mode to a normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, and when the next variable display is started in a situation where the normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, the display is changed to the normal completion mode based on that timing and the normal hold display is displayed,
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the special start mode to a special midway mode different from the special pre-completion mode, and when the next variable display is started in a situation where the special midway mode different from the special pre-completion mode, the display is changed to the special completion mode based on that timing and the special hold display is displayed,
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing comes for the next variable display to start in the normal start mode, the normal hold display is changed to the normal completion mode based on that timing and the normal hold display is displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing comes for the next variable display to start in the special start mode, the special hold display is changed to the special completion mode based on that timing and the special hold display is displayed;
When the variable display of the number of reserved memories N is finished and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the normal reserved display is displayed by starting the normal reserved display at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number in the normal start mode, gradually changing from the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changing to the normal completion mode over the predetermined period, and displaying the normal reserved display;
When the variable display of the number of reserved memories N is finished and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, and the special reserved display is displayed, the special reserved display is started in the special start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and is changed stepwise from the special start mode to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changed to the special completion mode, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the special reserved display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a reserved memory stored during a variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state, thereby preventing subsequent movement of the reserved display position and preventing misidentification of the number of reserved memories. Furthermore, by distinguishing whether or not a change to a completed state occurs when the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be shown the number of reserved memories and the gradual changes when a new reserved memory is stored. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual changes when a new reserved memory is stored can be more clearly shown to the player. Furthermore, for reserved memories stored at the same time as the start of the variable display, the reserved display is displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, so there is no need to change the gradual change to a completed state, allowing the player to see the gradual changes. Furthermore, even when a special reserved display is displayed, the rules for changing the gradual display to the normal completed state or the special completed state and whether or not the change is executed apply in the same way as when a normal reserved display is displayed, making it easier for the player to recognize reserved memories.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 193, Figure 196, Figure 197, Figure 199, Figure 200

[Form B15]
The gaming machine of form B15 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information about variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
When the variable display is completed, the game control means can execute the next variable display if there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means
When the reserved memory is stored, one of a plurality of types of reserved displays including a normal reserved display and a special reserved display that has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the normal reserved display can be displayed;
When the hold memory is stored, the normal hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a normal start mode, a normal completion mode, and a plurality of normal intermediate modes including a normal pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the normal completion mode,
When the reserved memory is stored, the special reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a special start mode, a special completion mode, and a plurality of special intermediate modes including a special pre-completion mode which is the mode immediately before the special completion mode,
The reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display can be moved from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to the position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the number of reserved memories N, which is a variable display in a situation where N number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed stepwise from the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changed to the normal completion mode over the predetermined period, and the normal hold display is displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the special start mode is gradually changed to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then the special hold display is changed to the special completion mode, and this change is carried out over the predetermined period to display the special hold display;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the normal start mode to a normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, and when the next variable display is started in a situation where the normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode is reached, the display is changed to the normal completion mode based on that timing and the normal hold display is displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the special start mode to a special midway mode different from the special pre-completion mode, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the special midway mode different from the special pre-completion mode, the mode is changed to the special completion mode based on that timing and the special hold display is displayed,
During the execution of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display when reserved memory is not stored,
When the period until the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is completed is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the normal reserved display is displayed, the normal reserved display is started in the normal start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is gradually changed from the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changed to the normal completion mode, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the normal reserved display,
When the period until the variable display of the number of reserved memories at 0 ends is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the special reserved display is displayed, the special reserved display is started in the special start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is gradually changed from the special start mode to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changed to the special completion mode, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the special reserved display;
When the period until the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 ends is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the normal pending display is displayed, the normal pending display is started in the normal start mode at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the normal start mode to a normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode is reached, the display is changed to the normal completion mode based on that timing and the normal pending display is displayed;
When the period until the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 ends is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the special pending display is displayed, the special pending display is started in the special start mode at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the special start mode to a special intermediate mode different from the special pre-completion mode, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the special intermediate mode different from the special pre-completion mode is reached, the display is changed to the special completion mode based on that timing and the special pending display is displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a reserved memory stored during a variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state, so that the subsequent movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and misconception of the number of reserved memories is prevented. Furthermore, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be suitably shown the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if there is not a predetermined period until the start of the next variable display when a new reserved memory is stored, the gradual change when the new reserved memory is stored is changed to a completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and misconception of the number of reserved memories is prevented, even when the number of reserved memories is 0. In addition, for reserved memories newly stored during the specific period from the start of the variable display to the movement of the reserved display position, the reserved display is displayed at the display position to which it is moved from the beginning, so there is no need to change the gradual change to a completion mode, and the player can see the gradual change. Also, when a reserved display that has already been displayed at the Nth position moves, even if a reserved display newly displayed at the Nth position is superimposed, the display area used by the newly displayed reserved display is larger, so the newly displayed reserved display is easy to see and misrecognition can be prevented. Furthermore, even when a special reserved display is displayed, the rules for the change of the gradual display to the normal completion mode or special completion mode and whether or not the change is executed are applied in the same way as when a normal reserved display is displayed, so the reserved memory is easier for the player to recognize.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 193, Figure 196, Figure 197, Figure 205, Figure 206

[Form B16]
The gaming machine of form B16 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information about variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
When the variable display is completed, the game control means can execute the next variable display if there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means
When the reserved memory is stored, one of a plurality of types of reserved displays including a normal reserved display and a special reserved display that has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the normal reserved display can be displayed;
When the hold memory is stored, the normal hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a normal start mode, a normal completion mode, and a plurality of normal intermediate modes including a normal pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the normal completion mode,
When the reserved memory is stored, the special reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a special start mode, a special completion mode, and a plurality of special intermediate modes including a special pre-completion mode which is the mode immediately before the special completion mode,
The reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display can be moved from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to the position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the number of reserved memories N, which is a variable display in a situation where N number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed stepwise from the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changed to the normal completion mode over the predetermined period, and the normal hold display is displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the special start mode is gradually changed to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then the special hold display is changed to the special completion mode, and this change is carried out over the predetermined period to display the special hold display;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the normal start mode to a normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, and when the next variable display is started in a situation where the normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, the display is changed to the normal completion mode based on that timing and the normal hold display is displayed,
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the special start mode to a special midway mode different from the special pre-completion mode, and when the next variable display is started in a situation where the special midway mode different from the special pre-completion mode, the display is changed to the special completion mode based on that timing and the special hold display is displayed,
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing comes for the next variable display to start in the normal start mode, the normal hold display is changed to the normal completion mode based on that timing and the normal hold display is displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing comes for the next variable display to start in the special start mode, the special hold display is changed to the special completion mode based on that timing and the special hold display is displayed;
When the variable display of the number of reserved memories N is finished and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the normal reserved display is displayed by starting the normal reserved display at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number in the normal start mode, gradually changing from the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changing to the normal completion mode over the predetermined period, and displaying the normal reserved display;
When the variable display of the number of reserved memories N ends and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the special reserved display is displayed. The special reserved display is started in the special start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and is gradually changed from the special start mode to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changed to the special completion mode over the predetermined period, and the special reserved display is displayed.
During the execution of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display when reserved memory is not stored,
When the period until the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is completed is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the normal reserved display is displayed, the normal reserved display is started in the normal start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is gradually changed from the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changed to the normal completion mode, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the normal reserved display,
When the period until the variable display of the number of reserved memories at 0 ends is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the special reserved display is displayed, the special reserved display is started in the special start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is gradually changed from the special start mode to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changed to the special completion mode, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the special reserved display;
When the period until the end of the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and the variable display of the number of pending memories at 0 is not immediately before the end of the variable display of the number of pending memories, if a new pending memory is stored and the normal pending display is displayed, the normal pending display is started in the normal start mode at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the normal start mode to a normal intermediate mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, and when the timing comes for the start of the next variable display in a situation where the normal intermediate mode different from the normal pre-completion mode is reached, the display is changed to the normal completion mode based on that timing and the normal pending display is displayed,
When the period until the end of the variable display of the pending memory count at 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and the variable display of the pending memory count at 0 is not immediately before the end of the variable display, if a new pending memory is stored and the special pending display is displayed, the special pending display is started in the special start mode at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the special start mode to a special intermediate mode different from the special pre-completion mode, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the special intermediate mode different from the special pre-completion mode, the mode is changed to the special completion mode based on that timing and the special pending display is displayed,
When the period until the end of the variable display of the number of reserved memories at 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and the variable display of the number of reserved memories at 0 is about to end, if a new reserved memory is stored and the normal reserved display is displayed, the normal reserved display is started in the normal start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and when the timing comes for the start of the next variable display in the normal start mode, the display is changed to the normal completion mode based on that timing and the normal reserved display is displayed;
When the period until the end of the variable display of the number of reserved memories at 0 is shorter than the predetermined period, and just before the end of the variable display of the number of reserved memories at 0, a new reserved memory is stored and the special reserved display is displayed, the special reserved display is started in the special start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and when the timing comes for the start of the next variable display in the situation where the special start mode is in effect, the special reserved display is changed to the special completion mode based on that timing and the special reserved display is displayed,
When a new reserved memory is stored and the normal reserved display is displayed immediately after the end of the reserved memory count 0 time variable display, the normal reserved display is displayed from the normal completion mode at the reserved display display position corresponding to the next variable display of the reserved memory count 0 time variable display,
When a new reserved memory is stored and the special reserved display is displayed immediately after the reserved memory number 0 time variable display is completed, the special reserved display is displayed from the special completion mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a reserved memory stored during a variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state, thereby preventing any subsequent movement of the reserved display position and preventing misconception of the number of reserved memories. Furthermore, by distinguishing whether or not a change to a completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be shown the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more clearly shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if a new reserved memory is stored within the predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when the new reserved memory is stored is changed to a completed state, thereby preventing any movement of the reserved display position and preventing misconception of the number of reserved memories, even when the number of reserved memories is 0. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit, even if a predetermined variable display ends, the reserved memories are not stored until the next variable display begins, so the gradual change for new reserved memories is not executed, allowing the player to focus on the variable display results of the completed variable display. Newly stored reserved memories during the specific period from the start of the variable display to the time the reserved display position moves are displayed at the new display position from the beginning, so there is no need to change the gradual change to a completion mode, allowing the player to see the gradual change. Furthermore, even when a reserved display that was already displayed at a predetermined number moves, even if a new reserved display displayed at the predetermined number overlaps it, the newly displayed reserved display occupies a larger display area, making it easier to see the newly displayed reserved display and preventing misidentification. Furthermore, even when a special reserved display is displayed, the rules for changing the gradual display to the normal completion mode or special completion mode and whether or not the change is executed apply in the same way as when a normal reserved display is displayed, making it easier for the player to recognize the reserved memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 193, Figure 196, Figure 197, Figure 199, Figure 200, Figures 205 to 208

[Form B17]
The gaming machine of form B17 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information about variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
When the variable display is completed, the game control means can execute the next variable display if there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means
It is possible to execute effects corresponding to a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode,
When the hold memory is stored, a plurality of types of hold displays including a first mode hold display corresponding to the first mode and a second mode hold display corresponding to the second mode can be displayed;
When a hold memory is stored during the first mode, the first mode hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a first mode start state, a first mode completion state, and a plurality of first mode mid-state states including a first mode pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the first mode completion state,
When a hold memory is stored during the second mode, the second mode hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a second mode start state, a second mode completion state, and a plurality of second mode mid-states including a second mode pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the second mode completion state,
The reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display can be moved from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to the position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the number of reserved memories N, which is a variable display in a situation where N number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if new hold memory is stored and the first mode hold display is displayed, the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed stepwise from the first mode start state to the plurality of first mode intermediate states, and then changed to the first mode completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the first mode hold display;
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the second mode hold display is displayed, the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed stepwise from the second mode start state to the plurality of second mode intermediate states, and then changed to the second mode completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the second mode hold display;
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the first mode hold display is displayed, the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the first mode start state to a first mode mid-way state different from the first mode pre-completion state, and when the timing for the next variable display to be started comes in a situation where the first mode mid-way state different from the first mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the first mode completion state based on that timing and the first mode hold display is displayed,
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the second mode hold display is displayed, the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the second mode start state to a second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, and when the timing for the next variable display to be started comes in a situation where the second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the second mode completion state based on that timing and the second mode hold display is displayed,
When the first mode is in progress and the N-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is completed, and a new reserved memory is stored between the reserved shift start timing and the specified period has elapsed, and the first mode reserved display is displayed, the first mode reserved display is displayed at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number in the first mode start state, and is gradually changed from the first mode start state to the plurality of first mode intermediate states, and then changed to the first mode completion state, and this change is carried out over the specified period, thereby displaying the first mode reserved display;
During the second mode, when the N-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is finished and a new reserved memory is stored between the reserved shift start timing and the specified period has elapsed, the second mode reserved display is started in the second mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and is changed stepwise from the second mode start state to the plurality of second mode intermediate states, and then changed to the second mode completion state, and this change is executed over the specified period to display the second mode reserved display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a pending memory stored between the start of a variable display and the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state, thereby preventing any subsequent movement of the pending display position and preventing misidentification of the number of pending memories. Furthermore, by distinguishing whether or not a change to a completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be shown the number of pending memories and the gradual changes that occur when a new pending memory is stored. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual changes that occur when a new pending memory is stored can be more clearly shown to the player. Furthermore, for newly stored pending memories during the specific period from the start of the variable display to the movement of the pending display position, the pending display is displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, eliminating the need to change the gradual change to a completed state, allowing the player to see the gradual changes. Furthermore, the same rules regarding the gradual change of the gradual display to a completed state apply regardless of the presentation mode, making it easier for the player to recognize pending memories.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 196 to 198, Figure 216
In this embodiment,
The "first mode" corresponds to the "presentation mode A" in this embodiment,
The "second mode" corresponds to the "presentation mode B" in this embodiment,
The "first mode pending display" corresponds to the "cube pending display in performance mode A" in this embodiment.
The "second mode hold display" corresponds to the "octahedron hold display in performance mode B" in this embodiment,
The "first mode start mode" corresponds to the "hold display displayed as the image of the first frame of the appearance animation in the performance mode A" in this embodiment,
The "first mode completion mode" corresponds to the "hold display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation in the performance mode A" in this embodiment.
The "second mode midway state" corresponds to the "hold display displayed as the image of the second frame to the nineteenth frame of the appearance animation in the performance mode B" in this embodiment.
The "second mode start mode" corresponds to the "hold display displayed as the image of the first frame of the appearance animation in the performance mode B" in this embodiment,
The "second mode completion mode" corresponds to the "hold display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation in the performance mode B" in this embodiment.
The "second mode midway state" corresponds to the "hold display displayed as images from the second frame to the nineteenth frame of the appearance animation in presentation mode B" in this embodiment.

[Form B18]
The gaming machine of form B18 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information about variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
When the variable display is completed, the game control means can execute the next variable display if there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means
It is possible to execute effects corresponding to a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode,
When the hold memory is stored, a plurality of types of hold displays including a first mode hold display corresponding to the first mode and a second mode hold display corresponding to the second mode can be displayed;
When a hold memory is stored during the first mode, the first mode hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a first mode start state, a first mode completion state, and a plurality of first mode mid-state states including a first mode pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the first mode completion state,
When a hold memory is stored during the second mode, the second mode hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a second mode start state, a second mode completion state, and a plurality of second mode mid-states including a second mode pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the second mode completion state,
The reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display can be moved from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to the position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the number of reserved memories N, which is a variable display in a situation where N number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if new hold memory is stored and the first mode hold display is displayed, the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed stepwise from the first mode start state to the plurality of first mode intermediate states, and then changed to the first mode completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the first mode hold display;
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the second mode hold display is displayed, the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed stepwise from the second mode start state to the plurality of second mode intermediate states, and then changed to the second mode completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the second mode hold display;
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the first mode hold display is displayed, the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the first mode start state to a first mode mid-way state different from the first mode pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the next variable display to be started in a situation where the first mode mid-way state different from the first mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the first mode completion state based on that timing and the first mode hold display is displayed,
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the second mode hold display is displayed, the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the second mode start state to a second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the next variable display to be started in a situation where the second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the second mode completion state based on that timing and the second mode hold display is displayed,
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the first mode hold display is displayed, the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing comes for the next variable display to start in the first mode start mode, the display is changed to the first mode completion mode based on the timing and the first mode hold display is displayed;
In the second mode, when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the second mode hold display is displayed, the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing comes for the next variable display to start in the second mode start mode, the display is changed to the second mode completion mode based on the timing and the second mode hold display is displayed;
In the first mode, when the variable display for the number N of reserved memories is finished and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the first mode reserved display is started in the first mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the first mode reserved display is changed stepwise from the first mode start state to the plurality of first mode intermediate states, and then changed to the first mode completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the first mode reserved display;
In the second mode, when the variable display when the number of reserved memories is N ends and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display starts, the second mode reserved display is started in the second mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the second mode reserved display is changed stepwise from the second mode start state to the plurality of second mode intermediate states, and then changed to the second mode completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the second mode reserved display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a pending memory stored during a variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state. This prevents subsequent changes to the pending display position and prevents misidentification of the number of pending memories. Furthermore, by distinguishing whether or not a change to a completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be shown the number of pending memories and the gradual changes when a new pending memory is stored. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual changes when a new pending memory is stored can be more clearly shown to the player. Furthermore, for a newly stored pending memory that is simultaneously stored with the start of the variable display, the pending display is displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, eliminating the need to change the gradual changes to a completed state, allowing the player to see the gradual changes. Furthermore, the same rules regarding the gradual change to a completed state apply regardless of the presentation mode, making it easier for the player to recognize pending memories.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 196, Figure 197, Figure 199, Figure 200, Figure 216

[Form B19]
The gaming machine of form B19 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information about variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
When the variable display is completed, the game control means can execute the next variable display if there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means
It is possible to execute effects corresponding to a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode,
When the hold memory is stored, a plurality of types of hold displays including a first mode hold display corresponding to the first mode and a second mode hold display corresponding to the second mode can be displayed;
When a hold memory is stored during the first mode, the first mode hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a first mode start state, a first mode completion state, and a plurality of first mode mid-state states including a first mode pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the first mode completion state,
When a hold memory is stored during the second mode, the second mode hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a second mode start state, a second mode completion state, and a plurality of second mode mid-states including a second mode pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the second mode completion state,
The reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display can be moved from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to the position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the number of reserved memories N, which is a variable display in a situation where N number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if new hold memory is stored and the first mode hold display is displayed, the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed stepwise from the first mode start state to the plurality of first mode intermediate states, and then changed to the first mode completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the first mode hold display;
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the second mode hold display is displayed, the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed stepwise from the second mode start state to the plurality of second mode intermediate states, and then changed to the second mode completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the second mode hold display;
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the first mode hold display is displayed, the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the first mode start state to a first mode mid-way state different from the first mode pre-completion state, and when the timing for the next variable display to be started comes in a situation where the first mode mid-way state different from the first mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the first mode completion state based on that timing and the first mode hold display is displayed,
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the second mode hold display is displayed, the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the second mode start state to a second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, and when the timing for the next variable display to be started comes in a situation where the second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the second mode completion state based on that timing and the second mode hold display is displayed,
During the execution of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display when reserved memory is not stored,
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is completed is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the first mode reserved display is displayed, the first mode reserved display is displayed at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display in the first mode start state, and is gradually changed from the first mode start state to the plurality of first mode intermediate states, and then changed to the first mode completion state, and this change is carried out over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the first mode reserved display;
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is completed is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the second mode reserved display is displayed, the second mode reserved display is started in the second mode start state at the reserve display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the second mode reserved display is changed stepwise from the second mode start state to the plurality of second mode intermediate states, and then changed to the second mode completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the second mode reserved display;
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 is completed is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the first mode pending display is displayed, the first mode pending display is started in the first mode start state at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the first mode start state to a first mode midway state different from the first mode pre-completion state, and when the timing for starting the next variable display comes when the first mode midway state different from the first mode pre-completion state is reached, the state is changed to the first mode completion state based on that timing and the first mode pending display is displayed,
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 is completed is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the second mode pending display is displayed, the second mode pending display is started in the second mode start state at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the second mode start state to a second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, and when the timing for starting the next variable display comes when the second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state is reached, the state is changed to the second mode completion state based on that timing and the second mode pending display is displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a reserved memory stored during a variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state, so that the subsequent movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and misconception of the number of reserved memories is prevented. Furthermore, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be suitably shown the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if there is not a predetermined period until the start of the next variable display when a new reserved memory is stored, the gradual change when the new reserved memory is stored is changed to a completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and misconception of the number of reserved memories is prevented, even when the number of reserved memories is 0. In addition, for reserved memories newly stored during the specific period from the start of the variable display to the movement of the reserved display position, the reserved display is displayed at the destination display position from the beginning, so there is no need to change the gradual change to a completed state, and the player can see the gradual change, and even if the reserved display that was already displayed at the Nth position moves and the newly displayed reserved display is superimposed on it, the newly displayed reserved display uses a larger display area, making it easier to see and preventing misidentification.In addition, even if the presentation mode is different, the same rules regarding the change of the gradual display to the completed state are applied, making it easier for the player to recognize the reserved memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 196, Figure 197, Figure 205, Figure 206, Figure 216

[Form B20]
The gaming machine of form B20 is
A gaming machine that can perform variable display and control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information about variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
When the variable display is completed, the game control means can execute the next variable display if there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means
It is possible to execute effects corresponding to a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode,
When the hold memory is stored, a plurality of types of hold displays including a first mode hold display corresponding to the first mode and a second mode hold display corresponding to the second mode can be displayed;
When a hold memory is stored during the first mode, the first mode hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a first mode start state, a first mode completion state, and a plurality of first mode mid-state states including a first mode pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the first mode completion state,
When a hold memory is stored during the second mode, the second mode hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a second mode start state, a second mode completion state, and a plurality of second mode mid-states including a second mode pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the second mode completion state,
The reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display can be moved from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display starts to the position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the number of reserved memories N, which is a variable display in a situation where N number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if new hold memory is stored and the first mode hold display is displayed, the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed stepwise from the first mode start state to the plurality of first mode intermediate states, and then changed to the first mode completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the first mode hold display;
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the second mode hold display is displayed, the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed stepwise from the second mode start state to the plurality of second mode intermediate states, and then changed to the second mode completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the second mode hold display;
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the first mode hold display is displayed, the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the first mode start state to a first mode mid-way state different from the first mode pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the next variable display to be started in a situation where the first mode mid-way state different from the first mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the first mode completion state based on that timing and the first mode hold display is displayed,
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the second mode hold display is displayed, the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the second mode start state to a second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the next variable display to be started in a situation where the second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the second mode completion state based on that timing and the second mode hold display is displayed,
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the first mode hold display is displayed, the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing comes for the next variable display to start in the first mode start mode, the display is changed to the first mode completion mode based on the timing and the first mode hold display is displayed;
In the second mode, when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the second mode hold display is displayed, the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing comes for the next variable display to start in the second mode start mode, the display is changed to the second mode completion mode based on the timing and the second mode hold display is displayed;
In the first mode, when the variable display for the number N of reserved memories is finished and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the first mode reserved display is started in the first mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the first mode reserved display is changed stepwise from the first mode start state to the plurality of first mode intermediate states, and then changed to the first mode completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the first mode reserved display;
In the second mode, when the variable display for the number of reserved memories N is finished and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the second mode reserved display is displayed at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number by starting the second mode reserved display in the second mode start state, gradually changing from the second mode start state to the plurality of second mode intermediate states, and then changing to the second mode completion state over the predetermined period, and the second mode reserved display is displayed;
During the execution of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display when reserved memory is not stored,
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is completed is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the first mode reserved display is displayed, the first mode reserved display is displayed at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display in the first mode start state, and is gradually changed from the first mode start state to the plurality of first mode intermediate states, and then changed to the first mode completion state, and this change is carried out over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the first mode reserved display;
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is completed is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the second mode reserved display is displayed, the second mode reserved display is started in the second mode start state at the reserve display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the second mode reserved display is changed stepwise from the second mode start state to the plurality of second mode intermediate states, and then changed to the second mode completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the second mode reserved display;
During the first mode, when the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is not immediately preceding the end of the variable display when a new reserved memory is stored and the first mode reserved display is displayed, the first mode reserved display is started in the first mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the first mode start state to a first mode midway state different from the first mode pre-completion state, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display comes when the first mode midway state different from the first mode pre-completion state is reached, the state is changed to the first mode completion state based on that timing and the first mode reserved display is displayed,
During the second mode, when the period until the end of the variable display of the number of reserved memories at 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and the end of the variable display of the number of reserved memories at 0 is not immediately preceded, if a new reserved memory is stored and the second mode reserved display is displayed, the second mode reserved display is started in the second mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the second mode start state to a second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display comes when the second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state is reached, the state is changed to the second mode completion state based on that timing and the second mode reserved display is displayed,
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the end of the 0-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is shorter than the predetermined period and the end of the 0-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is imminent, if a new reserved memory is stored and the first mode reserved display is displayed, the first mode reserved display is started in the first mode start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display occurs in the first mode start mode, the display is changed to the first mode completion mode based on the timing and the first mode reserved display is displayed;
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the end of the 0-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is shorter than the predetermined period and the end of the 0-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is imminent, if a new reserved memory is stored and the second mode reserved display is displayed, the second mode reserved display is started in the second mode start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display occurs in the second mode start mode, the display is changed to the second mode completion mode based on the timing and the second mode reserved display is displayed;
When the first mode is in progress and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the end of the variable display of the reserved memory count at 0, the first mode reserved display is displayed at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display of the variable display of the reserved memory count at 0, and the first mode reserved display is displayed from the first mode completion state.
When the second mode is in progress and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the end of the variable display of the reserved memory number at 0, the second mode reserved display is displayed, and the second mode reserved display is displayed at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display of the variable display of the reserved memory number at 0 from the second mode completion state.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a reserved memory stored during a variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state, thereby preventing any subsequent movement of the reserved display position and preventing misconception of the number of reserved memories. Furthermore, by distinguishing whether or not a change to a completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be shown the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more clearly shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if a new reserved memory is stored within the predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when the new reserved memory is stored is changed to a completed state, thereby preventing any movement of the reserved display position and preventing misconception of the number of reserved memories, even when the number of reserved memories is 0. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories reaches its upper limit, even if a predetermined variable display ends, the reserved memory is not stored until the next variable display begins, so the gradual change for the new reserved memory is not executed, allowing the player to focus on the variable display result of the completed variable display. Newly stored reserved memories during the specific period from the start of the variable display to the time the reserved display position moves are displayed at the new display position from the beginning, so there is no need to change the gradual change to a completed state, allowing the player to see the gradual change. Furthermore, even if a reserved display that was already displayed at a predetermined number moves and a new reserved display that is displayed at the predetermined number overlaps it, the newly displayed reserved display occupies a larger display area, making the newly displayed reserved display easier to see and preventing misidentification. Furthermore, even if the presentation mode is different, the same rules regarding the change to the completed state of the gradual display apply, making it easier for the player to recognize the reserved memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 196, Figure 197, Figure 199, Figure 200, Figures 205 to 208, Figure 216

[Form B21]
The gaming machine of form B21 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
a storage means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light-emitting means include a game control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the game control means and a performance control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area as an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information about variable display of specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of changing the state of the performance control means side light emitting means based on information regarding variable display of specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The game control means
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the start area, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and thereafter, when the variable display of specific identification information corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the variable display memory area is completed, the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area,
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area, and thereafter, when the memory of the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved memory area,
When the storage means does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, even if the game medium passes through the starting area and information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is not changed to a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved storage area, but is maintained in a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved storage area,
The performance control means
When information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the hold display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the hold memory area can be moved from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a hold display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information about variable display of N number of specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the hold display;
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation where the intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the reserved memory number N is finished and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored between the reserved shift start timing and the specified period has elapsed, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and is gradually changed from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and this change is executed over the specified period to display the reserved display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a reserved memory stored during a variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state, so that subsequent movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and misidentification of the number of reserved memories is prevented. Also, by distinguishing whether or not the state changes to a completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be suitably shown the number of reserved memories and the gradual changes when a new reserved memory is stored. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual changes when a new reserved memory is stored can be more suitably shown to the player. Furthermore, particularly in a situation where variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, in the processing of the game control means, information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information due to passing through the starting area is stored in the memory area in which information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the information is moved to the variable display memory area by a shifting process.At this time, by changing the state of the light-emitting means on the game control means side from a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 1 to a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 0, the reserved memory number will momentarily change to a state in which 1 is displayed, which prevents the display state from becoming cumbersome and causing discomfort to the player, and as a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 163, Figures 196 to 198
In this embodiment,
The "performance control means" corresponds to the "performance control CPU 120" in this embodiment.
The "storage means" corresponds to the "RAM 102, particularly the game control data storage area 001SG150" in this embodiment.
The "specific identification information" corresponds to the "eight LEDs constituting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B" in this embodiment,
The "game control means side light emitting means" corresponds to the "LEDs constituting the special chart unit 201, in particular the LEDs constituting the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B" in this embodiment, and the "performance control means side light emitting means" corresponds to the "LEDs constituting the first sub-hold indicator 151A and the second sub-hold indicator 151B" in this embodiment,
The "variable display memory area" corresponds to the "entry (storage area) of the reserved number "0" in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A or the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B" in this embodiment.
The "first reserved memory area" corresponds to the "entry (storage area) of reserved numbers "1 to 4" in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A and the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B" in this embodiment.
The "starting area" corresponds to the "first starting winning port (winning ball device 6A) and the "second starting winning port (variable winning ball device 6B)" in this embodiment.

[Form B22]
The gaming machine of form B22 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
a storage means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light-emitting means include a game control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the game control means and a performance control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area as an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information about variable display of specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of changing the state of the performance control means-side light emitting means based on information regarding variable display of specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The game control means
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the start area, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and thereafter, when the variable display of specific identification information corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the variable display memory area is completed, the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area,
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area, and thereafter, when the memory of the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved memory area,
When the storage means does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, even if the game medium passes through the starting area and information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is not changed to a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved storage area, but is maintained in a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved storage area,
The performance control means
When information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the hold display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the hold memory area can be moved from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a hold display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information about variable display of N number of specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the hold display;
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation where the intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed,
If the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in the start mode, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the reserved memory number N is finished and information on the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the next specific identification information is started, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and is changed stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changed to the completion mode, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a reserved memory stored during a variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state, so that subsequent movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and misidentification of the number of reserved memories is prevented. Also, by distinguishing whether or not the state changes to a completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be suitably shown the number of reserved memories and the gradual changes when a new reserved memory is stored. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual changes when a new reserved memory is stored can be more suitably shown to the player. Furthermore, particularly in a situation where variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, in the processing of the game control means, information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information due to passing through the starting area is stored in the memory area in which information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the information is moved to the variable display memory area by a shifting process.At this time, by changing the state of the light-emitting means on the game control means side from a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 1 to a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 0, the reserved memory number will momentarily change to a state in which 1 is displayed, which prevents the display state from becoming cumbersome and causing discomfort to the player, and as a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 163, Figure 196, Figure 197, Figure 199, Figure 200

[Form B23]
The gaming machine of form B23 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
a storage means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light-emitting means include a game control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the game control means and a performance control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area as an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information about variable display of specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of changing the state of the performance control means-side light emitting means based on information regarding variable display of specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The game control means
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the start area, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and thereafter, when the variable display of specific identification information corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the variable display memory area is completed, the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area,
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area, and thereafter, when the memory of the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved memory area,
When the storage means does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, even if the game medium passes through the starting area and information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is not changed to a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved storage area, but is maintained in a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved storage area,
The performance control means
When information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the hold display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the hold memory area can be moved from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a hold display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information about variable display of N number of specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the hold display;
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation where the intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed;
When the reserved memory number 0 variable display, which is a variable display of specific identification information when information regarding specific identification information is not stored in the reserved memory area, is executed,
When the period until the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is completed is longer than the predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and is changed stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changed to the completion mode, and the hold display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is ended is shorter than the predetermined period, and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and is changed from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and when the timing comes for the variable display of the next specific identification information to be started in a situation where the intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode is reached, the reserved display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a reserved memory stored during a variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state, so that the subsequent movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and misconception of the number of reserved memories is prevented. Furthermore, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be suitably shown the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if there is not a predetermined period until the start of the next variable display when a new reserved memory is stored, the gradual change when the new reserved memory is stored is changed to a completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and misconception of the number of reserved memories is prevented, even when the number of reserved memories is 0. Furthermore, particularly in a situation where variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, in the processing of the game control means, information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information due to passing through the starting area is stored in the memory area in which information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the information is moved to the variable display memory area by a shifting process.At this time, by changing the state of the light-emitting means on the game control means side from a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 1 to a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 0, the reserved memory number will momentarily change to a state in which 1 is displayed, which prevents the display state from becoming cumbersome and causing discomfort to the player, and as a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 163, Figure 196, Figure 197, Figure 205, Figure 206

[Form B24]
The gaming machine of form B24 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
a storage means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light-emitting means include a game control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the game control means and a performance control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area as an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information about variable display of specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of changing the state of the performance control means side light emitting means based on information regarding variable display of specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The game control means
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the start area, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and thereafter, when the variable display of specific identification information corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the variable display memory area is completed, the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area,
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area, and thereafter, when the memory of the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved memory area,
When the storage means does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, even if the game medium passes through the starting area and information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is not changed to a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved storage area, but is maintained in a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved storage area,
The performance control means
When information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the hold display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the hold memory area can be moved from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a hold display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information about variable display of N number of specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the hold display;
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation where the intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed,
If the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in the start mode, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the Nth reserved memory time is finished and information relating to the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the next specific identification information is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and this change is carried out over the predetermined period to display the reserved display,
When the reserved memory number is 0 and the variable display of the specific identification information is executed in a situation where information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in the reserved memory area,
When the period until the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is completed is longer than the predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and is changed stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changed to the completion mode, and the hold display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the end of the variable display of the pending memory count at 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and when the variable display of the pending memory count at 0 is not immediately before being ended, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the pending display is started in the start mode at the pending display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and is changed from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation where the intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode is reached, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed,
When the period until the end of the variable display of the pending memory count at 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately before the end of the variable display of the pending memory count at 0, the pending display is started in the start mode at the pending display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and when the variable display of the next specific identification information is started in the start mode, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When information relating to the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the reserved memory number at 0 is completed, the reserved display is displayed from the completion state at the reserved display position corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information next to the variable display of the reserved memory number at 0.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a reserved memory stored during a variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state, thereby preventing any subsequent movement of the reserved display position and preventing misconception of the number of reserved memories. Furthermore, by distinguishing whether or not a change to a completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be shown the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more clearly shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if a new reserved memory is stored within the predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when the new reserved memory is stored is changed to a completed state, thereby preventing any movement of the reserved display position and preventing misconception of the number of reserved memories, even when the number of reserved memories is 0. Furthermore, particularly in a situation where variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, in the processing of the game control means, information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information due to passing through the starting area is stored in the memory area in which information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the information is moved to the variable display memory area by a shifting process.At this time, by changing the state of the light-emitting means on the game control means side from a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 1 to a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 0, the reserved memory number will momentarily change to a state in which 1 is displayed, which prevents the display state from becoming cumbersome and causing discomfort to the player, and as a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 163, Figure 196, Figure 197, Figure 199, Figure 200, Figures 205 to 208

[Form B25]
The gaming machine of form B25 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
a storage means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
the plurality of light-emitting means include a game control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area as an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information about variable display of specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The effect control means can cause the display means to display a reserved ball number display indicating the number of pieces of information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the storage means,
The game control means
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the start area, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area;
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, and when the game medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
The performance control means
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, when the gaming medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the gaming control means side changes to a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the state of the reserved ball count display changes to a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
When information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the hold display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the hold memory area can be moved from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a hold display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information about variable display of N number of specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the hold display;
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation where the intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the reserved memory number N is finished and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored between the reserved shift start timing and the specified period has elapsed, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and is gradually changed from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and this change is executed over the specified period to display the reserved display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a reserved memory stored during a variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state, thereby preventing subsequent movement of the reserved display position and preventing misidentification of the number of reserved memories. Furthermore, by distinguishing whether or not the change to a completed state occurs when the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be shown the gradual changes in the number of reserved memories and the storage of new reserved memories. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual changes in the storage of new reserved memories can be more clearly seen by the player. Furthermore, by making the light-emitting means on the game control means visible first and then making the display means' reserved ball count display visible, the number of reserved memories can be recognized using multiple means. In particular, by first executing control of the game control means, which controls the game, such as the awarding of game value, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 196 to 198, Figure 212, Figure 213
In this embodiment,
The "display means" corresponds to the "image display device 5" in this embodiment.
The "reserved ball count display" corresponds to the "reserved display displayed in the reserved memory display area 5U" in this embodiment.

[Form B26]
The gaming machine of form B26 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
a storage means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
the plurality of light-emitting means include a game control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area as an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information about variable display of specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The effect control means can cause the display means to display a reserved ball count display indicating the number of pieces of information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the storage means,
The game control means
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the start area, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area;
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, and when the game medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
The performance control means
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, when the gaming medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the gaming control means side changes to a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the state of the reserved ball count display changes to a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
When information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the hold display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the hold memory area can be moved from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a hold display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information about variable display of N number of specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the hold display;
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation where the intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed,
If the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in the start mode, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the reserved memory number N is finished and information on the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the next specific identification information is started, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and is changed stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changed to the completion mode, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a reserved memory stored during a variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state, thereby preventing subsequent movement of the reserved display position and preventing misidentification of the number of reserved memories. Furthermore, by distinguishing whether or not the change to a completed state occurs when the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be shown the gradual changes in the number of reserved memories and the storage of new reserved memories. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual changes in the storage of new reserved memories can be more clearly seen by the player. Furthermore, by making the light-emitting means on the game control means visible first and then making the display means' reserved ball count display visible, the number of reserved memories can be recognized using multiple means. In particular, by first executing control of the game control means, which controls the game, such as the awarding of game value, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 196, Figure 197, Figure 199, Figure 200, Figure 212, Figure 213

[Form B27]
The gaming machine of form B27 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
a storage means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
the plurality of light-emitting means include a game control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area as an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information about variable display of specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The effect control means can cause the display means to display a reserved ball count display indicating the number of pieces of information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the storage means,
The game control means
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the start area, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area;
When the variable display memory area stores information about the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information about the variable display of specific identification information, and when the game medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to the information about the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
The performance control means
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, when the gaming medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the gaming control means side changes to a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the state of the reserved ball count display changes to a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
When information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the hold display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the hold memory area can be moved from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a hold display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information about variable display of N number of specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and the hold display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation where the intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed;
When the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display of specific identification information when information regarding specific identification information is not stored in the reserved memory area, is executed,
When the period until the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is completed is longer than the predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and is changed stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changed to the completion mode, and the hold display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is ended is shorter than the predetermined period, and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and is changed from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and when the timing comes for the variable display of the next specific identification information to be started in a situation where the intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode is reached, the reserved display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a reserved memory stored during a variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state, so that the subsequent movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and misconception of the number of reserved memories is prevented. Furthermore, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be suitably shown the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if there is not a predetermined period until the start of the next variable display when a new reserved memory is stored, the gradual change when the new reserved memory is stored is changed to a completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and misconception of the number of reserved memories is prevented, even when the number of reserved memories is 0. Furthermore, by making the light-emitting means on the game control means visible first, and then making the number of reserved balls displayed on the display means visible, the number of reserved memories can be recognized using multiple means, and in particular, by first executing the control of the game control means that controls the game, such as the allocation of game value, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 196, Figure 197, Figure 205, Figure 206, Figure 212, Figure 213

[Form B28]
The gaming machine of form B28 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
a storage means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
the plurality of light-emitting means include a game control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area as an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information about variable display of specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The effect control means can cause the display means to display a reserved ball number display indicating the number of pieces of information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the storage means,
The game control means
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the start area, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area;
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, and when the game medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
The performance control means
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, when the gaming medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the gaming control means side changes to a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the state of the reserved ball count display changes to a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
When information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the hold display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the hold memory area can be moved from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a hold display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information about variable display of N number of specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the hold display;
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation where the intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed,
If the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in the start mode, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the Nth reserved memory time is finished and information relating to the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the next specific identification information is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and this change is carried out over the predetermined period to display the reserved display,
When the reserved memory number is 0 and the variable display of the specific identification information is executed in a situation where information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in the reserved memory area,
When the period until the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is completed is longer than the predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and is changed stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changed to the completion mode, and the hold display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the end of the variable display of the pending memory count at 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and when the variable display of the pending memory count at 0 is not immediately before being ended, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the pending display is started in the start mode at the pending display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and is changed from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation where the intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode is reached, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed,
When the period until the end of the variable display of the pending memory count at 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately before the end of the variable display of the pending memory count at 0, the pending display is started in the start mode at the pending display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and when the variable display of the next specific identification information is started in the start mode, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When information relating to the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the reserved memory number at 0 is completed, the reserved display is displayed from the completion state at the reserved display position corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information next to the variable display of the reserved memory number at 0.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a reserved memory stored during a variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state, thereby preventing any subsequent movement of the reserved display position and preventing misconception of the number of reserved memories. Furthermore, by distinguishing whether or not a change to a completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be shown the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more clearly shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if a new reserved memory is stored within the predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when the new reserved memory is stored is changed to a completed state, thereby preventing any movement of the reserved display position and preventing misconception of the number of reserved memories, even when the number of reserved memories is 0. Furthermore, by making the light-emitting means on the game control means visible first, and then making the number of reserved balls displayed on the display means visible, the number of reserved memories can be recognized using multiple means, and in particular, by first executing the control of the game control means that controls the game, such as the allocation of game value, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 196, Figure 197, Figure 199, Figure 200, Figures 205 to 208, Figure 212, Figure 213

[Form B29]
The gaming machine of form B29 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
a storage means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light-emitting means include a game control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the game control means and a performance control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area as an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
the game control means is capable of switching the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side from an initial state to a final state when executing variable display of specific identification information, and is capable of executing the switching multiple times;
The game control means
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means
When variable display of specific identification information is executed, a specific display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means,
In a situation where information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the storage means, when a gaming medium passes through a start area, the display of the specific indication is started during the period from when the state of the light emitting means on the gaming control means side becomes the initial state to when it becomes the final state,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is not being executed, when information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing among a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the hold display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the hold memory area can be moved from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a hold display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information about variable display of N number of specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the hold display;
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation where the intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the reserved memory number N is finished and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored between the reserved shift start timing and the specified period has elapsed, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and is gradually changed from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and this change is executed over the specified period to display the reserved display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a reserved memory stored during a variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state. This prevents subsequent movement of the reserved display position and prevents misidentification of the number of reserved memories. Furthermore, by distinguishing whether or not the change to a completed state occurs when the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be shown a gradual change in the number of reserved memories and the storage of new reserved memories. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the player can be shown a gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored more effectively. Furthermore, by executing the variable display of specific identifiers and then starting the specific display on the presentation control means, multiple means can be used to recognize that the variable display has started in response to the gaming medium passing through the start area. Among these, by starting the display of the specific display corresponding to the variable display between the time when the variable display of specific identifiers becomes the initial state and the time when it becomes the final state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling as if only the variable display of specific identifiers is being performed, thereby providing a more comfortable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 196 to 198, Figure 209
In this embodiment,
The "light emitting means on the game control means side" in this embodiment refers to the "LEDs constituting the special symbol unit 201, particularly the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B."
The "initial state" corresponds to the "state in which the first LED among the LEDs constituting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B is lit" in this embodiment.
The "final state" corresponds to the "state in which the eighth LED among the LEDs constituting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B is lit" in this embodiment.
The "specific display" corresponds to the "active display" in this embodiment.

[Form B30]
The gaming machine of form B30 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
a storage means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light-emitting means include a game control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the game control means and a performance control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area as an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
the game control means is capable of switching the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side from an initial state to a final state when executing variable display of specific identification information, and is capable of executing the switching multiple times;
The game control means
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means
When variable display of specific identification information is executed, a specific display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means,
In a situation where information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the storage means, when a gaming medium passes through a start area, the display of the specific indication is started during the period from when the state of the light emitting means on the gaming control means side becomes the initial state to when it becomes the final state,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is not being executed, when information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing among a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the hold display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the hold memory area can be moved from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a hold display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information about variable display of N number of specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the hold display;
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation where the intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed,
If the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in the start mode, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the reserved memory number N is finished and information on the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the next specific identification information is started, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and is changed stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changed to the completion mode, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a reserved memory stored during a variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state. This prevents subsequent movement of the reserved display position and prevents misidentification of the number of reserved memories. Furthermore, by distinguishing whether or not the change to a completed state occurs when the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be shown a gradual change in the number of reserved memories and the storage of new reserved memories. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the player can be shown a gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored more effectively. Furthermore, by executing the variable display of specific identifiers and then starting the specific display on the presentation control means, multiple means can be used to recognize that the variable display has started in response to the gaming medium passing through the start area. Among these, by starting the display of the specific display corresponding to the variable display between the time when the variable display of specific identifiers becomes the initial state and the time when it becomes the final state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling as if only the variable display of specific identifiers is being performed, thereby providing a more comfortable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 196, Figure 197, Figure 199, Figure 200, Figure 209

[Form B31]
The gaming machine of form B31 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
a storage means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light-emitting means include a game control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the game control means and a performance control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area as an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
the game control means is capable of switching the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side from an initial state to a final state when executing variable display of specific identification information, and is capable of executing the switching multiple times;
The game control means
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means
When variable display of specific identification information is executed, a specific display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means,
In a situation where information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the storage means, when a gaming medium passes through a start area, the display of the specific indication is started during the period from when the state of the light emitting means on the gaming control means side becomes the initial state to when it becomes the final state,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is not being executed, when information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing among a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the hold display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the hold memory area can be moved from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a hold display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information about variable display of N number of specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and the hold display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation where the intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed;
When the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display of specific identification information when information regarding specific identification information is not stored in the reserved memory area, is executed,
When the period until the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is completed is longer than the predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and is changed stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changed to the completion mode, and the hold display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is ended is shorter than the predetermined period, and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and is changed from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and when the timing comes for the variable display of the next specific identification information to be started in a situation where the intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode is reached, the reserved display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a reserved memory stored during a variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state, so that the subsequent movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and misconception of the number of reserved memories is prevented. Furthermore, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be suitably shown the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if there is not a predetermined period until the start of the next variable display when a new reserved memory is stored, the gradual change when the new reserved memory is stored is changed to a completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and misconception of the number of reserved memories is prevented, even when the number of reserved memories is 0. Furthermore, by executing the variable display of the specific identification information and then starting the specific display on the presentation control means side, it is possible to make multiple means recognize that the variable display has started in response to the game medium passing through the starting area, and by starting the display of the specific display corresponding to the variable display between the time when the variable display of the specific identification information reaches its initial state and the time when it reaches its final state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling as if only the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, and as a result, a suitable game environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 196, Figure 197, Figure 205, Figure 206, Figure 209

[Form B32]
The gaming machine of form B32 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
a storage means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light-emitting means include a game control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the game control means and a performance control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area as an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
the game control means is capable of switching the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side from an initial state to a final state when executing variable display of specific identification information, and is capable of executing the switching multiple times;
The game control means
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means
The performance control means
When variable display of specific identification information is executed, a specific display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means,
In a situation where information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the storage means, when a gaming medium passes through a start area, the display of the specific indication is started during the period from when the state of the light emitting means on the gaming control means side becomes the initial state to when it becomes the final state,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is not being executed, when information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing among a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the hold display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the hold memory area can be moved from the hold display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the hold shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a hold display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information about variable display of N number of specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the hold display;
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation where the intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed,
If the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in the start mode, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the Nth reserved memory time is finished and information relating to the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the next specific identification information is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states, and then changed to the completion state, and this change is carried out over the predetermined period to display the reserved display,
When the reserved memory number is 0 and the variable display of the specific identification information is executed in a situation where information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in the reserved memory area,
When the period until the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is completed is longer than the predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and is changed stepwise from the start mode to the plurality of intermediate modes, and then changed to the completion mode, and the hold display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the end of the variable display of the pending memory count at 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and when the variable display of the pending memory count at 0 is not immediately before being ended, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the pending display is started in the start mode at the pending display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and is changed from the start mode to an intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation where the intermediate mode different from the pre-completion mode is reached, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on that timing and displayed,
When the period until the end of the variable display of the pending memory count at 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately before the end of the variable display of the pending memory count at 0, the pending display is started in the start mode at the pending display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and when the variable display of the next specific identification information is started in the start mode, the pending display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When information relating to the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the reserved memory number at 0 is completed, the reserved display is displayed from the completion state at the reserved display position corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information next to the variable display of the reserved memory number at 0.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if a reserved memory stored during a variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an incomplete state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state, thereby preventing any subsequent movement of the reserved display position and preventing misconception of the number of reserved memories. Furthermore, by distinguishing whether or not a change to a completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the player can be shown the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more clearly shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if a new reserved memory is stored within the predetermined period before the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when the new reserved memory is stored is changed to a completed state, thereby preventing any movement of the reserved display position and preventing misconception of the number of reserved memories, even when the number of reserved memories is 0. Furthermore, by executing the variable display of the specific identification information and then starting the specific display on the presentation control means side, it is possible to make multiple means recognize that the variable display has started in response to the game medium passing through the starting area, and by starting the display of the specific display corresponding to the variable display between the time when the variable display of the specific identification information reaches its initial state and the time when it reaches its final state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling as if only the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, and as a result, a suitable game environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 196, Figure 197, Figure 199, Figure 200, Figure 205 to Figure 209

[Form B33]
The gaming machine of form B33 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
a storage means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light-emitting means include a game control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the game control means and a performance control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
As an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, there are a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area,
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on the execution of variable display of specific identification information,
The performance control means is capable of changing the state of the performance control means-side light emitting means based on the execution of variable display of specific identification information,
In the case where the storage means does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the light emitting means on the game control means changes to a state corresponding to the execution of the variable display of specific identification information before the light emitting means on the performance control means changes to a state corresponding to the execution of the variable display of specific identification information.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the light-emitting means on the game control means side visible first, and then making the light-emitting means on the presentation control means side visible, it is possible to make the player aware that variable display of specific identification information is being performed using multiple means, and in particular, by first executing control of the game control means that controls the game, such as the allocation of game value, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 209
In this embodiment,
The "plurality of reserved memory areas including the first reserved memory area" corresponds to the "first special pattern buffer 001SG151A and second special pattern buffer 001SG151B" in this embodiment.

[Form B34]
The gaming machine of form B34 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
a storage means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light-emitting means include a game control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the game control means and a performance control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
As an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, there are a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area,
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information about variable display of specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of changing the state of the performance control means side light emitting means based on information regarding variable display of specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The game control means
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the start area, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and thereafter, when the variable display of specific identification information corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the variable display memory area is completed, the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area,
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area, and thereafter, when the memory of the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved memory area,
When the storage means does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, even if the game medium passes through the starting area and information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is not changed to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved storage area, but is maintained in a state corresponding to information relating to the non-storage of information relating to the variable display of specific identification information in the reserved storage area.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, particularly in a situation where variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, in the processing of the game control means, information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information due to passing through the starting area is stored in the memory area in which information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the information is moved to the variable display memory area by a shifting process.At that time, by changing the state of the light-emitting means on the game control means side from a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 1 to a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 0, the reserved memory number will momentarily change to a state in which 1 is displayed, which prevents the display state from becoming cumbersome and causing the player to feel uncomfortable, and as a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 163

[Form B35]
The gaming machine of type B35 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
a storage means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light-emitting means include a game control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the game control means and a performance control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
As an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, there are a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area,
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information about variable display of specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of changing the state of the performance control means side light emitting means based on information regarding variable display of specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The game control means
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the start area, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and thereafter, when the variable display of specific identification information corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the variable display memory area is completed, the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area,
The performance control means
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, the state of the light emitting means on the performance control means side is changed to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area, and thereafter, the state of the light emitting means on the performance control means side is changed to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved memory area based on the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area being moved to the variable display memory area,
When the storage means does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, even if the gaming medium passes through the starting area and information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the state of the light emitting means on the performance control means side is not changed to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved storage area, but is maintained in a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved storage area.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, particularly in a situation where variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, in the processing of the game control means, information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information due to passing through the starting area is stored in the memory area in which information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the information is moved to the variable display memory area by a shifting process.At that time, by changing the state of the light-emitting means on the presentation control means side from a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 1 to a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 0, the reserved memory number will momentarily change to a state in which 1 is displayed, which prevents the display state from becoming cumbersome and causing the player to feel uncomfortable, and as a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 207, Figure 209

[Form B36]
The gaming machine of form B36 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
a storage means,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
As an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, there are a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area,
The performance control means
The display means can display a reserved ball count display indicating the number of pieces of information related to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the storage means,
If the reserved memory area does not store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, it is possible to display the reserved ball count display in a manner corresponding to the fact that the reserved memory area does not store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
When information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, it is possible to display the reserved ball count display in a manner corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
The game control means
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display is completed, if information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the start area, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and thereafter, when the variable display of specific identification information corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the variable display memory area is completed, the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area,
The performance control means
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, when the gaming medium passes through the starting area, the reserved ball count display is displayed in a manner corresponding to the first reserved memory area storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, and then the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area, and based on this, the reserved ball count display is displayed in a manner corresponding to the reserve memory area not storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information,
When the storage means does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, even if the gaming medium passes through the starting area and information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the reserved ball count display is not displayed in a manner corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved storage area, and the display of the reserved ball count display is maintained in a manner corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved storage area.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, particularly in a situation where variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, in the processing of the game control means, information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information due to passing through the starting area is stored in the memory area in which information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the information is moved to the variable display memory area by a shifting process.At that time, by changing the reserved ball count display of the display means from a display where the reserved memory number is 1 to a display where the reserved memory number is 0, the reserved memory number will momentarily display as 1, which prevents the reserved ball count display from becoming annoying and causing discomfort to the player, and as a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 224

[Form B37]
The gaming machine of form B37 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
a storage means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light-emitting means include a game control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the game control means and a performance control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information when the gaming medium passes through the starting area,
As an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, there are a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area,
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information about variable display of specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of changing the state of the performance control means side light emitting means based on information regarding variable display of specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The game control means
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the start area, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area;
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, and when the game medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, and when the gaming medium passes through the starting area, the effect control means changes the state of the light emitting means on the gaming control means side to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area, and then changes the state of the light emitting means on the effect control means side to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the light-emitting means on the game control means side visible first, and then making the light-emitting means on the presentation control means side visible, the number of reserved memories can be recognized using multiple means, and in particular, by first executing control of the game control means that controls the game, such as the allocation of game value, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 205, Figure 206

[Form B38]
The gaming machine of form B38 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
a storage means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
the plurality of light-emitting means include a game control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
As an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, there are a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area,
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information about variable display of specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The effect control means can cause the display means to display a reserved ball count display indicating the number of pieces of information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the storage means,
When information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, the game control means can change the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side to a state corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
When information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, the presentation control means can display the manner of the reserved ball count display in a manner corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
The game control means
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the start area, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area;
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, and when the game medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, and when the gaming medium passes through the starting area, the performance control means changes the state of the light emitting means on the gaming control means side to a state corresponding to the first reserved memory area storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, and then changes the state of the reserved ball count display to a state corresponding to the first reserved memory area storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by first making the light-emitting means on the game control means visible, and then making the display of the number of reserved balls on the display means visible, the number of reserved memories can be recognized using multiple means, and in particular, by first executing the control of the game control means that controls the game, such as the allocation of game value, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 212, Figure 213

[Form B39]
The gaming machine of form B39 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
a storage means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
the plurality of light-emitting means include a game control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
As an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, there are a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area,
the game control means is capable of switching the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side from an initial state to a final state when executing variable display of specific identification information, and is capable of executing the switching multiple times;
the performance control means is capable of causing the display means to display a specific display when information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored;
The game control means
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information related to the variable display of the specific identification information, and the gaming medium passes through the start area, the performance control means starts displaying the specific indication during the period from when the state of the light emitting means on the gaming control means side becomes the initial state to when the state of the light emitting means on the gaming control means side becomes the final state.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by executing the variable display of the specific identification information and then starting the specific display on the presentation control means side, it is possible to make multiple means recognize that the variable display has started in response to the gaming medium passing through the starting area, and by starting the display of the specific display corresponding to the variable display between the time when the variable display of the specific identification information reaches its initial state and the time when it reaches its final state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling as if only the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, and as a result, it is possible to provide a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 209

[Form B40]
The gaming machine of form B40 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
a storage means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
the plurality of light-emitting means include a game control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
As an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, there are a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area,
the game control means is capable of switching the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side from an initial state to a final state when executing variable display of specific identification information, and is capable of executing the switching multiple times;
the performance control means is capable of causing the display means to display a variable display of decorative identification information in response to the variable display of specific identification information;
The game control means
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information related to the variable display of the specific identification information and the game medium passes through the start area, the effect control means starts the variable display of the decorative identification information during the period from when the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side becomes the initial state to when the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side becomes the final state.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by executing the variable display of specific identification information and then executing the variable display of decorative identification information, it is possible to make the player recognize through multiple means that the variable display has begun in response to the gaming medium passing through the starting area, and by starting the variable display of decorative identification information between the time when the variable display of specific identification information reaches its initial state and the time when it reaches its final state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling as if only the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, and as a result, it is possible to provide a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 210, Figure 211

[Form B41]
The gaming machine of form B41 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
a storage means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
the plurality of light-emitting means include a performance control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
As an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, there are a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area,
The performance control means
When the variable display of the specific identification information is executed, the state of the light emitting means on the performance control means side can be switched from an initial state to a final state, and the switching can be executed multiple times;
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored, the display means can be made to display the specific display,
The game control means
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information related to the variable display of the specific identification information and the game medium passes through the start area, the effect control means starts displaying the specific display during the period from when the state of the light emitting means on the effect control means side becomes the initial state to when the state of the light emitting means on the effect control means side becomes the final state.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by switching the mode of the light-emitting means on the presentation control means side and then displaying a specific display, it is possible to make multiple means recognize that a variable display has begun in response to the gaming medium passing through the starting area, and by starting to display a specific display between the time when the display mode of the light-emitting means on the presentation control means side becomes the initial mode and the time when it becomes the final mode, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling as if only a switch in the mode of the light-emitting means on the presentation control means side is being performed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.

[Form B42]
The gaming machine of form B42 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
a storage means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
the plurality of light-emitting means include a performance control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
As an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, there are a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area,
The performance control means
When the variable display of the specific identification information is executed, the state of the light emitting means on the performance control means side can be switched from an initial state to a final state, and the switching can be executed multiple times;
The display means can display a variable display of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of specific identification information,
The game control means
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information related to the variable display of the specific identification information and the game medium passes through the starting area, the effect control means starts the variable display of the decorative identification information during the period from when the state of the light emitting means on the effect control means side becomes the initial state to when the state of the light emitting means on the effect control means side becomes the final state.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by switching the mode of the light-emitting means on the presentation control means side and then performing variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to make multiple means recognize that variable display has begun in response to the gaming medium passing through the starting area, and by starting variable display of the decorative identification information between the time when the display mode of the light-emitting means on the presentation control means side becomes the initial mode and the time when it becomes the final mode, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling as if only switching the mode of the light-emitting means on the presentation control means side is being performed, and as a result, it is possible to provide a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 210, Figure 211

[Form B43]
The gaming machine of form B43 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
a storage means, and the performance control means
It is possible to display moving images by switching images according to a switching cycle.
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a first storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the start area, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means
When information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area, the image corresponding to the specific display is moved from a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area to a display position corresponding to the variable display memory area by switching the image corresponding to the specific display a special number of times according to the switching period,
when the variable display of specific identification information corresponding to information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the variable display memory area is terminated, the image corresponding to the specific display is switched a specific number of times less than the special number of times in accordance with the switching cycle to terminate the display of the image corresponding to the specific display displayed at the display position corresponding to the variable display memory area;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by creating an impression of a moving image that moves an image corresponding to a specific display that is executed in response to the start of a variable display, rather than a moving image that switches an image corresponding to a specific display displayed at a display position corresponding to the variable display area that is executed in response to the end of the variable display a special number of times, it is possible to create an impression of the gaming medium passing through the starting area, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 176, Figures 205 to 208
In this embodiment,
The "switching period" corresponds to the "image update period of 33 ms" in this embodiment.
The "special number of times" corresponds to "10 times (number of times corresponding to the shift animation) corresponding to the number of frames (10 frames) of the shift animation" in this embodiment,
The "specific number of times" corresponds to "five times (number of times corresponding to the end animation) corresponding to the number of frames (five frames) of the end animation" in this embodiment.

[Form B44]
The gaming machine of form B44 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
a storage means, and the performance control means
It is possible to display moving images by switching images according to a switching cycle.
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
As an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, there are a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area,
The game control means
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the start area, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means
In a situation where information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area and information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the reserved memory area, when a game medium passes through the start area, an image corresponding to the specific display is switched a predetermined number of times in accordance with the switching cycle, and the image corresponding to the specific display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area;
when the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the information on the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display storage area is terminated, the image corresponding to the specific display displayed at the display position corresponding to the variable display area is switched a specific number of times less than the predetermined number of times in accordance with the switching cycle, and the display of the image corresponding to the specific display is terminated;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by creating a moving image by switching a predetermined number of times an image corresponding to a specific display displayed at a display position corresponding to the first pending memory area in response to the gaming medium passing through the starting area, rather than a moving image by switching a specific number of times an image corresponding to a specific display displayed at a display position corresponding to the variable display area in response to the end of the variable display, it is possible to create a more impressive impression of the gaming medium passing through the starting area, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 176, Figure 196, Figure 197
In this embodiment,
The "predetermined number of times" corresponds to "20 times (number of times corresponding to the number of frames of the appearance animation)" in this embodiment.

[Form B45]
The gaming machine of form B45 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
a storage means, and the performance control means
It is possible to display moving images by switching images according to a switching cycle.
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a first storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the start area, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means
In a situation where information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area and information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the memory means, when a game medium passes through the starting area, an image corresponding to the specific display is switched a predetermined number of times in accordance with the switching cycle to display the image corresponding to the specific display at a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area, and when information regarding the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display area, the image corresponding to the specific display is switched a predetermined number of times less than the predetermined number in accordance with the switching cycle to move and display the image corresponding to the specific display from the display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area to the display position corresponding to the variable display memory area.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, rather than a moving image that moves an image corresponding to a specific display that is executed in response to the start of a variable display, a moving image that switches a predetermined number of times between images corresponding to a specific display that is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first pending memory area that is executed in response to the gaming medium passing through the starting area can be more impressive, thereby making it possible to provide a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 176

[Form B46]
The gaming machine of form B46 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
a storage means, and the performance control means
It is possible to display moving images by switching images according to a switching cycle.
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a first storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means
When information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, an image corresponding to the specific display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first reserved storage area by switching the image according to the switching period N times (N≧30) as one period,
When information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display area, the image corresponding to the specific display is moved and displayed from a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area to a display position corresponding to the variable display memory area by switching the image corresponding to the specific display a number of times less than N in accordance with the switching period.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since players have many opportunities to view moving images in which an image corresponding to a specific display displayed at a display position corresponding to the first pending memory area is displayed N times, a smooth moving image can be created by increasing the number of switches according to the switching cycle, and since players have few opportunities to view moving images that move an image corresponding to a specific display executed in response to the start of a variable display, a sense of speed can be conveyed while conveying the movement by reducing the number of switches according to the switching cycle, thereby providing a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 176 and modified examples

[Form B47]
The gaming machine of form B47 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
a storage means, and the performance control means
It is possible to display moving images by switching images according to a switching cycle.
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a first storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means
When information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, an image corresponding to the specific display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first reserved storage area by switching the image according to the switching period N times (N≧30) as one period,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is not being executed and information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in the storage means, when the game medium passes through the start area, the image corresponding to the specific indication is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first reserved storage area by switching the image corresponding to the specific indication a number of times less than N times in accordance with the switching period.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the technician has many opportunities to view the moving image, which has N times of images corresponding to a specific display displayed at a display position corresponding to the first pending memory area, by increasing the number of switches according to the switching cycle, a smooth moving image can be produced; and since the technician has few opportunities to view the moving image, which is generated by switching images corresponding to a specific display displayed at a display position corresponding to the first pending memory area in response to the game medium passing through the starting area, by reducing the number of switches according to the switching cycle, a sense of speed can be created while conveying that a new specific display is being displayed, thereby providing a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 176 and modified examples

[Form B48]
The gaming machine of form B48 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
a storage means, and the performance control means
It is possible to display moving images by switching images according to a switching cycle.
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a first storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display storage area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means
When information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, an image corresponding to the specific display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first reserved storage area by switching the image according to the switching period N times (N≧30) as one period,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is terminated, the image corresponding to the specific display is switched less than N times in accordance with the switching cycle, thereby terminating the display of the image corresponding to the specific display displayed at the display position corresponding to the variable display memory area.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since players have many opportunities to view moving images, each cycle consisting of N times of an image corresponding to a specific display displayed at a display position corresponding to the first pending memory area, a smooth moving image can be created by increasing the number of switches according to the switching cycle; and since players have few opportunities to view moving images resulting from switching of images corresponding to a specific display displayed at a display position corresponding to the variable display area in response to the end of the variable display, by reducing the number of switches according to the switching cycle, a sense of speed can be created while conveying that the display has ended, thereby providing a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 176 and modified examples

[Form B49]
The gaming machine of form B49 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
a storage means,
The performance control means is capable of controlling the display means to display a specific display when information regarding variable display of specific identification information is stored,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
As an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, there are a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area,
The game control means
When the storage means does not store information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the start area, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the start area, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area;
The performance control means
If the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the game medium passed through the starting area, the display of the specific indication is displayed in a manner with low transmittance at the display position corresponding to the first reserved storage area, and the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area, thereby moving the specific indication displayed at the display position corresponding to the first reserved storage area to the display position corresponding to the variable display storage area,
When information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, after the predetermined period of time has elapsed since the game medium passed through the starting area, the specific display is started to be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area in a manner with high transparency, and then the specific display is displayed by executing an appearance animation that changes the transparency from the high transparency to the low transparency.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in a situation where a variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, the display mode of the specific display is set to a display mode with low transmittance that is easy to recognize in order to quickly convey that the gaming medium has passed through the starting area, and in a situation where there is no reserved memory but the variable display is being executed, attention is also being paid to the variable display, so in order to prevent it from being difficult to understand that the specific display has been made by suddenly displaying it, the display is made to be gradually displayed, so that the passing of the gaming medium through the starting area by the appearance animation can be conveyed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 178, Figure 179, Figure 182, Figure 183, Figure 189

[Form B50]
The gaming machine of form B50 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
a storage means, and the performance control means
It is possible to display moving images by switching images according to a switching cycle.
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
It is possible to display a demonstration display,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means
When the storage means does not store information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the start area, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means
When the storage means does not store information related to the variable display of the specific identification information, the demonstration display can be displayed,
When the game medium passes through the start-up area while the demonstration display is being displayed, the display of the demonstration display is terminated, and the specific display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area, and a moving animation is started from the next switching cycle in which the specific display is displayed, in which the specific display is moved to a display position corresponding to the variable display memory area.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the demonstration display is cleared and the specific display is temporarily displayed at a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area, and then moved to a display position corresponding to the variable display memory area, thereby making it easier to communicate that the gaming medium has passed through the starting area during the demonstration display, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 210, Figure 211
In this embodiment,
The "demonstration display" corresponds to the "demonstration display effect" in this embodiment.

[Form B51]
The gaming machine of form B51 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
a storage means, and the performance control means
It is possible to display moving images by switching images according to a switching cycle.
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
It is possible to display guidance displays regarding performance settings,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means
When the storage means does not store information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the start area, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the guidance display can be displayed,
When the game medium passes through the starting area while the guidance display is being displayed, the display of the guidance display is terminated, and the specific display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first reserved storage area, and a moving animation is started from the next switching cycle in which the specific display is displayed, for moving the specific display to a display position corresponding to the variable display storage area.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by clearing the guidance display and temporarily displaying the specific display at a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area, and then moving it to a display position corresponding to the variable display memory area, it becomes easier to communicate that the gaming medium has passed through the starting area while the guidance display is being displayed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 214, Figure 215
In this embodiment,
The "guidance display" corresponds to the "menu guidance display" in this embodiment.

[Form B52]
The gaming machine of form B52 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
a storage means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light-emitting means include a game control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the game control means and a performance control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
the storage means has a plurality of storage areas, each of which stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, including the variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area, which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information about variable display of specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of changing the state of the performance control means-side light emitting means based on information regarding variable display of specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
When the game medium passes through the start area while the game control means is executing the variable display of the specific identification information, the game control means stores information about the variable display of the specific identification information in the reserved memory area, transmits a specific command corresponding to the stored information to the performance control means, and then executes a process to update the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side,
The performance control means executes a process of updating the mode of the performance control means side light emitting means based on the received specific command.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the game control means first sends a specific command to the presentation control means, and then performs a process to update the state of the game control means side light-emitting means controlled by the game control means itself, thereby preventing too much gap between changes in the state of the game control means side light-emitting means even when changes are made sequentially, thereby providing a suitable game environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 166, Figure 196 to Figure 200
In this embodiment, the "specific command" corresponds to the "reserved memory number notification command" in this embodiment.

[Form B53]
The gaming machine of form B53 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
a storage means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light-emitting means include a game control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the game control means and a performance control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
the storage means has a plurality of storage areas, each of which stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, including the variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area, which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information about variable display of specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of changing the state of the performance control means side light emitting means based on information regarding variable display of specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The game control means
When the game medium passes through a start area while the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved memory area, and then, based on the start of the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the passage, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the passage is moved to the variable display memory area, a specific command corresponding to the movement is transmitted to the performance control means, and a process is executed to update the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side;
The performance control means executes a process of updating the mode of the performance control means side light emitting means based on the received specific command.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the game control means first sends a specific command to the presentation control means, and then performs a process to update the state of the light-emitting means on the game control means side that is controlled by the game control means itself.This makes it possible to prevent too much of a gap between changes in the state of the light-emitting means on the game control means side in response to a decrease in the number of reserved memories, and as a result, it is possible to provide a suitable game environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 166, Figure 196 to Figure 200
In this embodiment, the "specific command" corresponds to the "reserved memory number notification command" in this embodiment.

[Form B54]
The gaming machine of form B54 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
a main status indicator light;
a storage means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
the plurality of light-emitting means include a game control means-side light-emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information when the gaming medium passes through the starting area,
As an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, there are a plurality of storage areas including the variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information relating to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area,
The game control means
When variable display of specific identification information is executed, the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side is updated;
If the storage means does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, when the gaming medium passes through the starting area, information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the storage means based on the passing of the gaming medium, and then a variable display period setting process is performed to set a variable display period for the variable display of specific identification information based on the passing of the gaming medium, and then the state of the light emitting means on the gaming control means side is updated, and then a subtraction process is started to subtract the variable display period of the specific identification information set in the variable display period setting process.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a mode that first indicates the execution of the variable display, and then the variable display period is subtracted, so that the variable display period can be subtracted while showing the player that the variable display is being performed, thereby providing a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 166, Figure 196 to Figure 200

(Correspondence between the present invention and this embodiment)
In this embodiment, the "jackpot game state" corresponds to the "advantageous state" of the present invention, the "CPU 103" corresponds to the "game control means" of the present invention, the "performance control CPU 120" corresponds to the "performance execution means" of the present invention, the "first special symbol buffer 001SG151" and the "second special symbol buffer 001SG151B" correspond to the "reserved storage means" of the present invention, the "number of first special symbol reserved memories and the number of second special symbol reserved memories being four" corresponds to the "predetermined number" of the present invention, and the "reserved display displayed as the image of the first frame of the appearance animation" corresponds to the "start mode" of the present invention. Furthermore, the "hold display displayed as the image of the 20th frame of the appearance animation and the image of the 1st frame of the shift animation" corresponds to the "completion mode" of the present invention, the "hold display displayed as the images of the 2nd to 19th frames of the appearance animation" corresponds to the "intermediate mode" of the present invention, the "shift animation" corresponds to the "hold shift" of the present invention, the "330 ms which is the display execution period of the shift animation" corresponds to the "specific period" of the present invention, and the "660 ms which is the display execution period of the appearance animation" corresponds to the "predetermined period" of the present invention.

Furthermore, "the timing less than 33 ms before the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 ends" corresponds to "immediately before the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 ends" in this invention, and "the timing less than 33 ms after the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 ends" corresponds to "immediately after the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 ends" in this invention.

Furthermore, the "flash effect when winning" corresponds to the "winning effect" of this invention.

In addition, the "white hold display due to a decision not to execute a hold change effect" corresponds to the "normal hold display" of the present invention, the "blue and red hold displays due to a decision to execute a hold change effect" corresponds to the "special hold display" of the present invention, the "white hold display displayed as the image of the first frame of the appearance animation due to a decision not to execute a hold change effect" corresponds to the "normal start mode" of the present invention, the "hold display displayed as the image of the 20th frame of the appearance animation and the image of the first frame of the shift animation due to a decision not to execute a hold change effect" corresponds to the "normal completion mode" of the present invention, and the "white hold .... The "hold display displayed as the image of the 19th frame" corresponds to the "normal midway mode" of the present invention, the "blue or red hold display displayed as the image of the first frame of the appearance animation when it is decided to execute a hold change effect" corresponds to the "special start mode" of the present invention, the "blue or red hold display displayed as the image of the 20th frame of the appearance animation and the image of the first frame of the shift animation when it is decided to execute a hold change effect" corresponds to the "special completion mode" of the present invention, and the "blue or red hold display displayed as the images of the second to 19th frames of the appearance animation when it is decided not to execute a hold change effect" corresponds to the "special midway mode" of the present invention.

Furthermore, "presentation mode A" corresponds to the "first mode" of the present invention, "presentation mode B" corresponds to the "second mode" of the present invention, "cube hold display in presentation mode A" corresponds to the "first mode hold display" of the present invention, "regular octahedron hold display in presentation mode B" corresponds to the "second mode hold display" of the present invention, "hold display displayed as the image of the first frame of the appearance animation in presentation mode A" corresponds to the "first mode start mode" of the present invention, "hold display displayed as the image of the 20th frame of the appearance animation and the image of the first frame of the shift animation in presentation mode A" corresponds to the "first mode completion mode" of the present invention, and "presentation mode B" corresponds to the "first mode completion mode" of the present invention. "The hold display displayed as the image of the second to nineteenth frames of the appearance animation in presentation mode A" corresponds to the "second mode in progress" of the present invention, "the hold display displayed as the image of the first frame of the appearance animation in presentation mode B" corresponds to the "second mode start" of the present invention, "the hold display displayed as the image of the 20th frame of the appearance animation and the image of the first frame of the shift animation in presentation mode B" corresponds to the "second mode completion" of the present invention, and "the hold display displayed as the image of the second to nineteenth frames of the appearance animation in presentation mode B" corresponds to the "second mode in progress" of the present invention.

In addition, the "performance control CPU 120" corresponds to the "performance control means" of the present invention, the "RAM 102, particularly the game control data holding area 001SG150" corresponds to the "storage means" of the present invention, the "eight LEDs constituting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B" correspond to the "specific identification information" of the present invention, the "LEDs constituting the special pattern unit 201, particularly the LEDs constituting the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B" correspond to the "game control means side light emitting means" of the present invention, and the "LEDs constituting the first sub-hold indicator 151A and the second sub-hold indicator 151B" correspond to the "specific identification information" of the present invention. ED" corresponds to the "performance control means side light emitting means" of the present invention, the "entry (storage area) for reserved number "0" in the first special pattern buffer 001SG151A and the second special pattern buffer 001SG151B" corresponds to the "variable display memory area" of the present invention, the "entry (storage area) for reserved numbers "1-4" in the first special pattern buffer 001SG151A and the second special pattern buffer 001SG151B" corresponds to the "first reserved memory area" of the present invention, and the "first start winning port (winning ball device 6A) and the second start winning port (variable winning ball device 6B)" correspond to the "start area" of the present invention.

Furthermore, the "image display device 5" corresponds to the "display means" of the present invention, and the "reserved ball display displayed in the reserved memory display area 5U" corresponds to the "reserved ball count display" of the present invention.

In addition, the "LEDs that make up the special symbol unit 201, particularly the LEDs that make up the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B" correspond to the "game control means side light emitting means" of the present invention, the "state in which the first LED among the LEDs that make up the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is lit" corresponds to the "initial state" of the present invention, the "state in which the eighth LED among the LEDs that make up the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is lit" corresponds to the "final state" of the present invention, and the "active display" corresponds to the "specific display" of the present invention.

Furthermore, the "first special symbol buffer 001SG151A and the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B" correspond to the "multiple reserved memory areas including the first reserved memory area" of the present invention.

In addition, the "image update cycle of 33 ms" corresponds to the "switching cycle" of the present invention, "10 times (number of times corresponding to the shift animation) corresponding to the number of frames of the shift animation (10 frames)" corresponds to the "special number of times" of the present invention, "5 times (number of times corresponding to the end animation) corresponding to the number of frames of the end animation (5 frames)" corresponds to the "specific number of times" of the present invention, and "20 times (number of times corresponding to the appearance animation) corresponding to the number of frames of the appearance animation (20 frames)" corresponds to the "predetermined number of times" of the present invention.

Furthermore, the "demo display effect" corresponds to the "demonstration display" of the present invention, the "menu guide display" corresponds to the "guidance display" of the present invention, and the "reserved memory count notification command" corresponds to the "specific command" of the present invention.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
Figure 125 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is broadly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls as gaming media are shot into this gaming area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

A special symbol unit 201 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 125, at the lower left of the game area). As shown in Figure 142 (A), the special symbol unit 201 is composed of a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B, a first reserve indicator 25A and a second reserve indicator 25B, a normal symbol display device 20, a normal symbol reserve indicator 25C, a round number indicator 26, a win indicator light 27, a right-hit indicator light 28, and a status indicator light 29.

(Special pattern display device)
The first special pattern display device 4A is composed of eight LEDs, and the second special pattern display device 4B is also composed of eight LEDs. Each of the eight LEDs is called specific identification information (special pattern). Furthermore, a group of eight LEDs is called multiple types of specific identification information (multiple types of special patterns). The first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B are devices that variably display multiple types of special patterns when a win occurs in the first start winning slot or the second start winning slot (when the start condition is met), and indicate a "jackpot" or a "loss" when the combination of special patterns (combination of the eight LEDs turning on and off) becomes a combination predetermined by the pachinko gaming machine 1.

(Variable display of special symbols)
The "variable display" of the special symbols indicates the period until the special symbol combination appears by turning on and off the eight LEDs according to a predetermined rule. Note that the variable display may also be expressed as a fluctuating display or fluctuation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also referred to as the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also referred to as the "second special pattern." Also, a special pattern game using the first special pattern is also referred to as the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also referred to as the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays special patterns.

(Hold indicator)
The first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B are each composed of two LEDs. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first reserved special symbols by the number and lighting state of the lit LEDs, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second reserved special symbols by the number and lighting state of the lit LEDs. For example, the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B indicate that the number of reserved special symbols is one by lighting only the first LED, that the number of reserved special symbols is two by lighting the first and second LEDs, that the number of reserved special symbols is three by flashing the first LED while flashing the second LED, and that the number of reserved special symbols is four by flashing both the first and second LEDs.

(Normal pattern display)
The normal symbol display 20 is made up of four LEDs and displays a variety of normal symbols as normal identification information different from the special symbols. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

The regular game reserve indicator 25C is composed of, for example, two LEDs, and displays the regular game reserve memory count, which is the number of regular games reserved for execution, by the number and lighting pattern of the LEDs. For example, the regular game reserve indicator 25C indicates that the regular game reserve memory count is 1 by lighting only the first LED, indicates that the regular game reserve memory count is 2 by lighting the first and second LEDs, indicates that the regular game reserve memory count is 3 by flashing the first LED while lighting the second LED, and indicates that the regular game reserve memory count is 4 by flashing both the first and second LEDs.

(Round number indicator)
The round number indicator 26 is composed of five LEDs, and the combination of these LEDs being on and off indicates the number of rounds in a jackpot gaming state, which will be described later. The win indicator light 27, right-hit indicator light 28, and status indicator light 29 are each one LED. The win indicator light 27 is an LED that lights up during the jackpot gaming state, which will be described later. The right-hit indicator light 28 is an LED that lights up during the time-saving state, the probability variable state, and the jackpot gaming state, which will be described later. The status indicator lights are LEDs that light up during the time-saving state and the probability variable state, which will be described later.

(Image display device)
As shown in Fig. 125, an image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) display, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, a variable display of multiple types of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers, etc.) as decorative identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that the special symbol games and variable display of decorative symbols that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with display areas (hold memory display area 5U, active display area 5F) for displaying hold displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are currently being executed. The hold displays and active displays are collectively referred to as variable display-compatible displays corresponding to variable displays. In this embodiment, a hold memory display area 5U is provided that is common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, a first special symbol hold memory display area that displays a first hold display representing a variable display whose execution of the first special symbol is pending, and a second special symbol hold memory display area that displays a second hold display representing a variable display whose execution of the second special symbol is pending may also be provided separately. In this embodiment, the hold memory display area 5U is a display area that displays a hold display corresponding to the first special symbol when the game state is normal, and a display area that displays a hold display corresponding to the second special symbol when the game state is time-saving or probability variable. Furthermore, the active display area 5F is a display area that displays an active display corresponding to the first special symbol when the game state is in the normal state, and is a display area that displays an active display corresponding to the second special symbol when the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability variation state.

(winning ball device)
A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning opening, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started. In this embodiment, the winning ball device 6A is positioned so that game balls shot by the player that flow down the area to the left of the image display device 5 (left game area) can win a prize.

The variable prize ball device 6B (a standard electric device) forms a second start prize opening that changes between a closed and an open state due to the solenoid 81 (see Figure 126). The variable prize ball device 6B, for example, comprises an electric device with a movable piece that can be opened and closed. When the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece is in an upright position, thereby creating a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the second start prize opening (also referred to as the second start prize opening being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable piece of the variable prize ball device 6B is in a tilted position, thereby creating an open state in which game balls can enter the second start prize opening (also referred to as the second start prize opening being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start prize opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three) are paid out and the second special game can be initiated. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above, as long as it can change between a closed state and an open state.

Normal winning holes 10 are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 125, three locations at the bottom left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), and are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a ball enters one of the normal winning holes 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 with a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 126), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door (for the special electric device) is in the off state, the large prize door closes the large prize door, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) the large prize door. On the other hand, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door is in the on state, the large prize door opens the large prize door, making it easier for game balls to enter the large prize door.

When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, 14) are paid out as prize balls. When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a gaming ball enters, for example, the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the regular prize opening 10.

When a gaming ball enters each winning port, including the normal winning port 10, it is also referred to as "winning." In particular, winning a winning port at a starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also referred to as a starting winning. In this embodiment, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged so that, of the gaming balls shot by the player, those that flow down the area to the right of the image display device 5 (right playing area) can win, and those that flow down the area to the left of the image display device 5 (left playing area) cannot or have difficulty winning.

(passing gate)
A passing gate 41 through which the gaming ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. When the gaming ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is executed.

(Outlet)
In addition to the above configuration, a windmill that changes the direction and speed of the game balls and numerous obstacle nails are provided on the surface of the game board 2. At the bottom of the game area, an outlet is provided to take in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

(Other production equipment)
Speakers 8L, 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and side lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area, and a button lamp 9e is provided below the gaming board 2. The main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and button lamps 9e provided on the gaming machine frame 3 are also referred to as "frame lamps."

A movable body 32 that operates in response to the effects is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming board 2 (above the image display device 5 in Figure 125), and a movable body lamp 9d is provided on the movable body 32. An attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2, and a decorative lamp 9f is provided on the left side of the gaming board 2. The attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, and decorative lamp 9f provided on the gaming board 2 are also referred to as "board lamps." The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f are sometimes collectively referred to as the game effect lamps 9. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f are each composed of an LED (see Figure 126). The various lamps will be described later.

A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. The ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is operated by the player or the like to launch gaming balls toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

A ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) separate from the upper tray, from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the play area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operation of the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see Figure 126).

Push buttons 31B are provided at predetermined positions on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, allowing players to issue specific commands by pressing them. Operations on the push buttons 31B are detected by push sensors 35B (see Figure 126).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 while the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on that passage cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on that passage is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed, the normal symbol display result will be "normal winning." On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the normal symbol display result will be "normal losing." When a "normal winning" occurs, opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when a special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on that start winning cannot be played immediately), the execution of the special game based on that entry will be suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In special game games, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol will vary depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot," and if a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "miss."

Once the display result in the special game shows "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, which is advantageous for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls entering the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. This predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and will hereinafter be referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times, 2 times, etc.) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can win prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is advantageous to the player. The more rounds played in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot slot (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, probability variable state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set accordingly. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may enter a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variable display time (the period during which the special symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning slot by shortening the average normal symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the normal symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state and by increasing the probability of a "normal symbol hit" in the normal symbol game compared to the normal state. The time-saving state is advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of fluctuation of special symbols (especially the second special symbol).

In the probability variable state (probability variable state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for players, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuations but also makes it easier to achieve a "jackpot." Details will be provided later, but the probability variable state in this embodiment is a gaming state in which the average special symbol variable display time is shorter than in the time-saving state.

In other words, the normal state in this embodiment is a gaming state in which the first special symbol is variably displayed mainly by the player shooting a gaming ball toward the gaming area on the left side of the image display device 5 (left gaming area), and the time-saving state and probability variable state in this embodiment are gaming states in which the second special symbol is variably displayed mainly by the player shooting a gaming ball toward the gaming area on the right side of the image display device 5 (right gaming area). Furthermore, the jackpot gaming state in this embodiment is a gaming state in which the player can obtain a large number of prize balls by shooting a gaming ball toward the gaming area on the right side of the image display device 5 (right gaming area) and causing the gaming ball to enter the jackpot opening.

The time-saving state or the probability variation state will continue until one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined number of special games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. A state in which the condition for the special game to end is played a predetermined number of times is also called a count-cut state (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability variation state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a gaming state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot gaming state that are advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability variable state. It is a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability that the displayed result in a normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the displayed result in a special game will be a "jackpot," is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified recovery process is not executed after power is turned on).

A state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and a state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. A high probability state and a low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

In this embodiment, the normal state is a game state in which a player can shoot a game ball mainly toward the left game area, causing the game ball to win in the first start winning slot, but it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to win in the second start winning slot. In this embodiment, the time-saving state and probability variable state are game states in which a player can shoot a game ball mainly toward the right game area, causing the game ball to win in the second start winning slot, but it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to win in the first start winning slot.

The game state may also change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within the jackpot opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special state after the jackpot game state.

(Progression of the production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (such as notifying the progress of the game or adding excitement to the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. These effects are described below. Note that these effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of these displays, they may also be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, the turning on and off of the game effect lamp 9, the movement of the movable body 32, or as effects using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 begin to display variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. At the timing when the display result (also called the confirmed special symbol) in the first or second special symbol game is statically displayed, the confirmed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols is also statically displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins to when it ends, the variable display of the decorative symbols may assume a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, as described below.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach mode is reached during the variable display of decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. Pachinko gaming machine 1 executes multiple types of reach effects, with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the effect mode. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot," a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is displayed stopped and aligned on a predetermined effective line in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" where the game state is controlled to a probability jackpot after the jackpot gaming state ends, odd-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line-up, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (regular jackpot)" where the game state is not controlled to a probability jackpot after the jackpot gaming state ends, even-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line-up. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (regular symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot."

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. Other effects, such as preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability, are executed during the variable display of decorative symbols. Preview effects include preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the currently executing variable display, and pre-read preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is reserved). Pre-read preview effects may be executed that change the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode that is different from normal.

In addition, the image display device 5 may temporarily stop the decorative symbols while they are being displayed in a variable manner, and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo-consecutive effect that makes a single variable display appear as multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot gaming state, a jackpot effect is executed to notify the player of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot effect may include an effect to notify the number of rounds or an upgrade effect to indicate that the value of the jackpot gaming state is increasing.

Also, for example, when a special game or the like is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Figures 126 and 127. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source, such as an external power source like a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a serial communication circuit 106.

The CPU 103 executes the program stored in ROM 101 to control the progress of the game (processing that realizes the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in ROM 101 (such as data on variation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) is used, and RAM 102 is used as the main memory. RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM, where the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if part or all of the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or part of the program stored in ROM 101 may be deployed to RAM 102 and executed on RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specified computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes an input port 105a to which various signals from, for example, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the normal winning port switch 24, and a magnetic sensor, radio wave sensor, proximity sensor, and frame proximity sensor (not shown) for detecting errors are input via a switch circuit 110, and an output port 105b to which signals for controlling (driving) the solenoids 81, 82 and the various displays, display devices, and indicator lights that make up the special chart unit 201 are output (transmitted) via an output circuit 111.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the normal winning port switch 24, and transmits them to the input port 105a. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

In this embodiment, the gate switch 21 is a switch for detecting that a game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the first start gate switch 22A is a switch for detecting that a game ball has entered the first start entry gate, the second start entry gate switch 22B is a switch for detecting that a game ball has entered the second start entry gate, the count switch 23 is a switch for detecting that a game ball has entered the large entry gate, and the regular entry gate switch 24 is a switch for detecting that a game ball has entered the regular entry gate 10.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal that stops control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal turns off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and turns on when the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value for a period of time that exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal turns on, for example, in response to pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on solenoid 81 or solenoid 82) from the output circuit 111 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The serial communication circuit 106 communicates serially with the CPU (performance control CPU 120 in the case of the performance control board 12) of each control board (for example, a payout control board or performance control board 12, not shown) using full-duplex, asynchronous, and standard NRZ (non-return-to-zero) encoding data format. The serial communication circuit 106 includes a transmitter that transmits various data (for example, a payout signal (prize ball number command) or performance control command) to the microcomputer of each control board, and a receiver that receives various data (for example, a prize ball ACK command) from the microcomputer of each control board.

In this embodiment, the main board 11 is also provided with an external RAM 107 for temporarily storing data to be processed by the game control microcomputer 100. Furthermore, although not specifically shown, the main board 11 is also connected to a setting key switch for switching the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a setting value setting state where they can be set, a setting changeover switch that functions as a touch switch for changing setting values such as the jackpot probability (ball payout rate) described below in the setting value setting state, a door/frame open switch for detecting the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, and a display monitor that can display base values and the like for this pachinko gaming machine. The setting key switch, setting changeover switch, and display monitor are located on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 so that they cannot be operated by the player.

A payout control board (not shown) is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The payout control board is connected to a payout device that is driven to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 3, 5, 10, 15, etc.) to a player based on the receipt of a payout signal, and a game ball detection sensor provided in a payout passage (not shown) through which the game balls paid out by the payout device pass. The payout device can be stopped depending on the state of the game ball detection signal received from the game ball detection sensor.

The payout control board is also connected to a handle sensor for detecting the amount of operation by the player and a touch ring (touch sensor) for detecting whether the player is gripping the ball-hitting operation handle 30. Based on signals input from these sensors, the payout control board controls the launching device that can launch game balls onto the game board 2. A signal indicating whether the touch ring has been detected and a signal indicating that a game ball has been launched by the launching device are input from the payout control board to the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11.

As part of its control of the game's progress, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the game's progress, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. These presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various decisions made by the main board 11 (e.g., the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable patterns used when executing the special game (details will be described later)), the game status (e.g., the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot slot, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, error notifications, and notifications of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes programs stored in ROM 121, and performs processing to execute performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). During this processing, various data (such as data from various tables) stored in ROM 121 is used, and RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute an effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the operation content). The push button 31B also includes a vibration motor 36. The vibration motor 36 is connected to the effect control board 12 and can be driven by receiving a drive signal from the effect control CPU 120. In other words, the push button 31B in this embodiment may vibrate when the vibration motor 36 is driven.

Furthermore, a performance display unit 202 is provided at the lower right position of the image display device 5. As shown in Figure 142 (C), the performance display unit 202 is composed of a first performance indicator light 152A and a second performance indicator light 152B, a first sub-hold indicator 151A and a second sub-hold indicator 151B, and a right-hit lamp 153.

The first effect indicator light 152A is a display device that allows the player to recognize that the variable display of the first special symbol is currently being executed, and the second effect indicator light 152B is a display device that allows the player to recognize that the variable display of the second special symbol is currently being executed. Each of these is composed of a single LED.

The first sub-hold indicator 151A is an indicator that makes it possible to identify the number of first special symbol reserved memories, and the second sub-hold indicator 151B is an indicator that makes it possible to identify the number of second special symbol reserved memories. Each of these is composed of two LEDs, and the number of first special symbol reserved memories or the number of second special symbol reserved memories can be displayed depending on the number and lighting pattern of these LEDs. For example, the first sub-hold indicator 151A or the second sub-hold indicator 151B indicates that the number of special symbol reserved memories is one by lighting only the first LED, indicates that the number of special symbol reserved memories is two by lighting both the first and second LEDs, indicates that the number of special symbol reserved memories is three by flashing the first LED while lighting the second LED, and indicates that the number of special symbol reserved memories is four by flashing both the first and second LEDs.

The right-hit lamp 153 is a single LED that lights up during the time-saving mode, the probability variation mode, and the jackpot game mode.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes presentations based on instructions to execute presentations from the presentation control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display device 5 by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. It also performs display processing to output image data from the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and drawing area switch for each V blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area assigned as the drawing area in one V blank, and then switched to the display image creation area in the next V blank, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output, while drawing continues in the other area during that time.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 128, the display control unit 123 generates images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (compositing) multiple layers, and therefore the VRAM area is provided with a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (compositing) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area. Furthermore, each layer image drawing area is classified into upper, middle, and lower levels, with images in higher layer image drawing areas being set with a higher display priority on the image display device 5, and images in lower layer drawing areas being set with a lower display priority on the image display device 5.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 129, the VRAM area includes an active display image drawing area for drawing and arranging the active display in the active display area 5F and the first pending display that moves as a shift animation from the pending memory display area 5U toward the active display area 5F, a first pending display image drawing area for drawing and arranging the first pending display in the pending memory display area 5U according to the game status and the second pending display that moves as a shift animation toward the display position of the first pending display in the pending memory display area 5U, and a second pending display image drawing area for drawing and arranging the second pending display in the pending memory display area 5U according to the game status. a second hold display image drawing area for drawing and placing a hold display in accordance with the game status in the hold memory display area 5U and a third hold display that moves as a shift animation toward the display position of the second hold display in the hold memory display area 5U; a third hold display image drawing area for drawing and placing a third hold display in accordance with the game status in the hold memory display area 5U and a fourth hold display that moves as a shift animation toward the display position of the third hold display in the hold memory display area 5U; and a fourth hold display image drawing area for drawing and placing a fourth hold display in accordance with the game status in the hold memory display area 5U.

In this embodiment, in addition to the images drawn and arranged in the active display image drawing area, the first pending display image drawing area to the fourth pending display image drawing area, it is possible to generate images to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 by superimposing images drawn and arranged in a background image drawing area for drawing and arranging background images, a decorative pattern image drawing area for drawing and arranging decorative pattern images, etc. Also, as shown in FIG. 129, in the active display image drawing area and the first hold display image drawing area to the fourth hold display image drawing area, the display priority of the image drawn in the active display image drawing area is set to the highest, the image drawn in the first hold display image drawing area is set to a lower display priority than the image drawn in the active display image drawing area, the image drawn in the second hold display image drawing area is set to a lower display priority than the image drawn in the first hold display image drawing area, the image drawn in the third hold display image drawing area is set to a lower display priority than the image drawn in the second hold display image drawing area, and the image drawn in the fourth hold display image drawing area is set to a lower display priority than the image drawn in the third hold display image drawing area.

In other words, of the images related to the hold display and active display, the image displayed in the display position of the fourth hold display is the image displayed at the lowest level, the image displayed in the display position of the third hold display and the image of the fourth hold display moving toward the display position of the third hold display are images displayed at a higher level (priority display) than the image displayed in the display position of the fourth hold display, and the image displayed in the display position of the second hold display and the image of the third hold display moving toward the display position of the second hold display are images displayed at a higher level (priority display) than the image displayed in the display position of the third hold display and the image of the fourth hold display moving toward the display position of the third hold display. The image displayed in the display position of the first hold display and the image of the second hold display moving toward the display position of the first hold display are images displayed (displayed with priority) above the image displayed in the display position of the second hold display and the image of the third hold display moving toward the display position of the second hold display, and the image displayed in the display position of the active display (active display area 5F) and the image of the first hold display moving toward the display position of the active display are images displayed (displayed with priority) above the image displayed in the display position of the first hold display and the image of the second hold display moving toward the display position of the first hold display.

In this embodiment, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area is set to 0% so that when superimposed, the upper image makes the overlapping area of the lower image invisible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area may be set higher than 0%, and images may be displayed transparently on the display screen of the image display device 5 or temporarily hidden.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal that designates the lamp on/off state) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal that operates the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to the drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the on/off of the lamp.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to perform control of audio output, turning on/off of lamps (such as supplying sound designation signals and lamp signals), and control of the movable body 32 (such as supplying signals to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (performance random numbers) used to execute various performances. The performance random numbers may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, sound control board 13, and lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 130(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this embodiment. A performance control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "0", and the first bit of the EXT data is always set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 130(A) is just one example, and other command formats may also be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in Figure 130 (A), command 8001H is a first variable display start specification that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start specification that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions given by the performance control command. Note that the variation pattern specification command sets different EXT data depending on the specified variation pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, and is a presentation control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. With the variable display result specification command, as shown in Figure 130 (B), for example, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (pre-determined result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot," and the determination result of which of several types of jackpot type will be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

For example, as shown in FIG. 130(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result will be a "miss." Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be a "variable jackpot A." Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be a "variable jackpot B." Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the predetermined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be a "variable jackpot C." Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot."

Command 8F00H is a symbol determination command that specifies the stopping (determining) of the decorative symbol variation in each of the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low-probability, low-base state, normal state), command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low-probability, high-base state, time-saving state), and command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and probability variable control are performed (high-probability, high-base state, probability variable state). Furthermore, the high probability, high base state may simply be referred to as the "high probability state."

Command A0XXH is a start-of-jackpot command (also known as a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-opening notification command that notifies players that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end-of-jackpot command that specifies the display of a presentation image at the end of a jackpot game.

In the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result, for example by setting the same EXT data as in the variable display result designation command. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set depending on the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state (e.g., "0" to "10"), as described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies that the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been met, based on the occurrence of a start prize (first start prize) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the first start port formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been met, based on the occurrence of a start prize (second start prize) when a gaming ball that has passed through (entered) the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first special symbol reserved memory count notification command that notifies the first special symbol reserved memory count so that the number of special symbol reserved memories can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second special symbol reserved memory count notification command that notifies the second special symbol reserved memory count so that the number of special symbol reserved memories can be specified. The first special symbol reserved memory count notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a first start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the first start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second special symbol reserved memory count notification command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a second start port entry designation command is sent, for example, based on the second start condition being met when a gaming ball passes (enters) the second start port. Additionally, the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command and the second special symbol reserved memory count notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special symbol game when either the first or second start condition is met (when the reserved memory count decreases).

Commands C4XXH and C6XXH are presentation control commands (prize-winning result specification commands) that indicate the content of the winning judgment result. Of these, command C4XXH is a pattern specification command that indicates the result of the winning judgment, whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot (probable hit, non-probable hit, or sudden jackpot). Command C6XXH is a miss presentation pattern command that indicates the result of the winning judgment, whether the winning judgment result will be a reach in a losing variable display (whether a reach presentation will be executed) and what type of reach will be executed (whether a normal reach reach presentation or a super reach reach presentation will be executed).

Instead of the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command or the second special symbol reserved memory count notification command, a total reserved memory count notification command may be sent to notify the total number of reserved memories. In other words, the total reserved memory count notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total reserved memory count.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 130 (A) are just examples, and some of these commands may not be included, different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to identify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each winning slot, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of variable display times for which the probability change control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 131 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11. As shown in Figure 131, on the main board 11 side, the following numerical data are controlled to be countable: random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result; random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot; random number value MR3 for determining a miss effect; random number value MR4 for determining the type of variation pattern; random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern; random number value MR6 for determining the normal symbol display result; and random number value MR7 for determining the initial values of the above-mentioned random number values MR1 and MR6. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be configured to count the numerical data representing some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR7. The CPU 103 may also count the numerical data representing some of the random number values MR1 to MR7 by updating various numerical data using software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 001SG154 described below.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to treat the variable display result of a special symbol or other game in a special symbol game as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot gaming state, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type when the variable display result is a "jackpot" as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot", and can take a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining a miss effect is a random number value used to determine in advance whether a reach will occur when the variable display is a miss, and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example. The random number value MR4 for determining the type of variation pattern is a random number value used to determine in advance whether a normal reach will occur or a super reach will occur when the variable display is a miss and a reach will occur, and the type of super reach that will be executed, and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special and decorative patterns, as one of several pre-prepared types, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR6 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss," and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536," for example. The random number value MR7 for determining the initial value is a random number value used to determine the initial value of the random number value MR1 and random number value MR7 described above, and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536," for example.

Figure 131 shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to treat the variable display result as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot game state before the determined special pattern that will be the variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using the second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on the random number value MR1 used to determine the special pattern display result.

In the display result determination table, a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 used to determine the special symbol display result is assigned to the special symbol display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is normal state, time-saving state (low probability state), or special symbol state (high probability state).

In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is the determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to treat the special symbol display result as a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state. In display result determination table 22, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values are assigned to the "jackpot" special symbol display result than when the gaming state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). This increases the probability (approximately 1/30 in this embodiment) of determining that the special symbol display result will be treated as a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot gaming state when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a time-saving state (low probability state) and controlling it to a jackpot gaming state (approximately 1/30 in this embodiment). In other words, in the display result determination table, determination data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of determining that it will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 133 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, the jackpot type determination table is a table that is referenced to determine one of multiple jackpot types based on the jackpot type determination random number value MR2 when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and that the jackpot game state should be controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, the number (determination value) compared with the jackpot type determination random number value MR2 is assigned to multiple jackpot types, such as "non-variable jackpot," "variable jackpot A," "variable jackpot B," and "variable jackpot C," depending on whether the special symbol variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game using the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game using the second special symbol display device 4B).

Here, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained using Figure 133 (B). In this embodiment, the jackpot types are "Probable jackpot A," "Probable jackpot B," and "Probable jackpot C," in which probability variable control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot gaming state ends, resulting in a transition to a high-probability, high-base state, and "Non-probable jackpot," in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot gaming state ends, resulting in a transition to a low-probability, high-base state.

The jackpot gaming state resulting from a "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed ten times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the jackpot gaming state resulting from a "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot gaming state resulting from a "probable jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed two times (so-called 2 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the jackpot gaming state resulting from a "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, "Probable jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) probable jackpot, "Probable jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probable jackpot, and "Probable jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) probable jackpot.

The probability variable control and time-saving control that begin after the jackpot gaming state of probability variable jackpot A through probability variable jackpot C ends are terminated on the condition that control is entered into the jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, the time-saving control that begins after the jackpot gaming state of a non-probability variable jackpot ends is terminated on the condition that 100 variable displays are completed or that control is entered into the jackpot gaming state before the 100 variable displays are completed. Therefore, if a recurring jackpot is one of probability variable jackpot A through probability variable jackpot C, probability variable control and time-saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state, in which the jackpot gaming state occurs continuously without an intermediate normal state. In other words, the probability variable state in this embodiment is a gaming state that continues until the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of variable displays, while the time-saving state in this embodiment is a gaming state that is controlled to the normal state by executing 100 variable displays if the variable display result is not a jackpot. For this reason, the time-saving state is also the game state that is controlled when a winning streak may end.

In the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 133 (A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot A," "Probable jackpot B," "Probable jackpot C," and "Non-probable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In other words, when the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C," which have fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special symbol is the second special symbol, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C." This setting allows for different rates of determining the jackpot type as a "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C," which have fewer rounds, depending on whether the jackpot type is determined based on the first start condition being met to start a special game using the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second start condition being met to start a special game using the second special symbol displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B. In particular, in special games using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is never determined to be a "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C," which results in fewer rounds. Therefore, for example, in game states where game balls are likely to enter the second start entry slot formed by the variable prize ball device 6B due to high-opening control associated with time-saving control, frequent jackpot states with fewer prize balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in game interest.

In addition, in the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 133 (A), the allocation of determination values for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart.

As mentioned above, just as the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the first special chart or the second special chart, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether the game is the first special chart or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A," which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, even in the case of a special game with a second special symbol, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of a special game with a first special symbol may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C." For example, in the case of a special game with a second special symbol, fewer judgment values may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probable jackpot B" and "Probable jackpot C" compared to a special game with a first special symbol. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is a special game with a first special symbol or a second special symbol, the jackpot type may be determined by referencing common table data.

Figure 134 shows an example of the configuration of a miss effect determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, the miss effect determination table is a table that is referenced when the special chart display result is determined to be a "miss," to determine whether the miss effect should be non-reach or reach, based on the random number value MR3 used for miss effect determination, that is, to determine whether to execute a reach effect in the variable display. For example, if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 85, the miss effect is determined to be non-reach (reach effect is not executed), and if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 86 to 100, the miss effect is determined to be reach (reach effect is executed).

Figures 135(A) to 135(C) show example configurations of variation pattern type determination tables stored in ROM 101. The variation pattern type determination table is a table for determining whether the reach (variation pattern type) to be executed will be normal reach, super reach α, super reach β, or super reach γ when the miss effect determination table determines that the miss effect is a reach (executing a reach effect). In this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table selected varies depending on the game state.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 135 (A) to 135 (C), when the gaming state is normal (low probability low base state), the fluctuation pattern type is determined based on the fluctuation pattern type determination table A and the value of the random number value MR4; when the gaming state is time-saving (low probability high base state), the fluctuation pattern type is determined based on the fluctuation pattern type determination table B and the value of the random number value MR4; and when the gaming state is high probability state (high probability high base state), the fluctuation pattern type is determined based on the fluctuation pattern type determination table C and the value of the random number value MR4. Furthermore, determining the variation pattern type to be normal reach means determining that a normal reach reach effect will be executed during variable display and result in a miss, determining the variation pattern type to be super reach α means determining that a super reach α reach effect will be executed during variable display and result in a miss, determining the variation pattern type to be super reach β means determining that a super reach β reach effect will be executed during variable display and result in a miss, and determining the variation pattern type to be super reach γ means determining that a super reach γ reach effect will be executed during variable display and result in a miss.

For example, as shown in FIG. 135(A), when the gaming state is normal (low-probability, low-base state), if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 1 to 80, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be normal reach; if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 81 to 95, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be super reach α; and if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 96 to 100, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be super reach β. Also, as shown in FIG. 135(B), when the gaming state is time-saving (low-probability, high-base state), if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 1 to 80, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be normal reach; and if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 81 to 100, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be super reach γ. Also, as shown in FIG. 135(C), when the gaming state is probability variable (high-probability, high-base state), if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 1 to 100, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be normal reach.

Figures 136(A) to 136(C) show the variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, when the game state is the normal state (low-probability, low-base state), the time-saving state (low-probability, high-base state), or the probability variable state (high-probability, high-base state), and when the variable display result is a "miss," multiple variation patterns are prepared in advance to correspond to the cases where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach," respectively, and to correspond to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot." Note that the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is referred to as the non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as the "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach" is referred to as the reach variation pattern (also referred to as the "reach miss variation pattern"). In addition, non-reach fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns are included in miss fluctuation patterns corresponding to when the variable display result is a "miss." A fluctuation pattern corresponding to when the variable display result is a "jackpot" is called a jackpot fluctuation pattern.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns: normal reach fluctuation patterns, in which the reach effect of a normal reach is executed, and super reach fluctuation patterns, in which the reach effect of a super reach is executed.

In this embodiment, when the game state is normal (low probability, low base state), as shown in Figure 136 (A), there are various patterns of variation (PA1-1) where the special chart variable display time is 12,000 ms and the result is a non-reach miss, (PA1-2) where the special chart variable display time is 5,750 ms and the result is a non-reach miss, (PA1-3) where the special chart variable display time is 3,750 ms and the result is a non-reach miss, (PA2-1A) where the special chart variable display time is 20,000 ms and the result is a normal reach miss, and (PA2-1B) where the special chart variable display time is 25,000 ms and the decorative pattern is displayed during the variable display. A variation pattern (PA2-1B) in which a pseudo consecutive performance including a temporary stop and a re-variable display is executed once, and then a normal reach is missed; a variation pattern (PA2-2A) in which the special chart variable display time is 60,000 ms, and then a pseudo consecutive performance is executed once, and then a normal reach is passed and a super reach α is missed; a variation pattern (PA2-2B) in which the special chart variable display time is 65,000 ms, and then a pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice, and then a normal reach is passed and a super reach α is missed; a variation pattern (PA2-3) in which the special chart variable display time is 70,000 ms, and then a pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice, and then a normal reach is passed and a super reach A variation pattern where the special chart variable display time is 75,000 ms and the pseudo consecutive performance is executed three times followed by a normal reach and then a super reach β miss (PA2-3A), a variation pattern where the special chart variable display time is 75,000 ms and the pseudo consecutive performance is executed three times followed by a normal reach and then a super reach β miss (PA2-3B), a variation pattern where the special chart variable display time is 20,000 ms and the normal reach jackpot is won (PB1-1A), a variation pattern where the special chart variable display time is 25,000 ms and the pseudo consecutive performance is executed once followed by a normal reach and then a normal reach jackpot (PB1-1B), a variation pattern where the special chart variable display time is 60,000 ms and the pseudo consecutive performance is executed once followed by a normal reach and then a super reach There are various variation patterns available, including a variation pattern (PB1-2A) where the special chart variable display time is 65,000 ms, where pseudo consecutive performances are executed twice, followed by a normal reach, resulting in a Super Reach α jackpot; a variation pattern (PB1-2B) where the special chart variable display time is 70,000 ms, where pseudo consecutive performances are executed twice, followed by a normal reach, resulting in a Super Reach β jackpot; and a variation pattern (PB1-3B) where the special chart variable display time is 75,000 ms, where pseudo consecutive performances are executed three times, followed by a normal reach, resulting in a Super Reach β jackpot.

Also, when the game state is in the time-saving state (low probability high base state), as shown in Figure 136 (B), there are variation patterns where the special chart variable display time is 7000 ms and the result is a non-reach miss (PA1-4), a variation pattern where the special chart variable display time is 2000 ms and the result is a non-reach miss (PA1-5), a variation pattern where the special chart variable display time is 10000 ms and the result is a normal reach miss (PA2-4A), a variation pattern where the special chart variable display time is 10000 ms and the result is a normal reach miss after one pseudo-consecutive performance (PA2-4B), a variation pattern where the special chart variable display time is 30000 ms and the result is a pseudo-consecutive performance after one pseudo-consecutive performance, which results in a super reach γ miss via a normal reach (PA2-5A), a variation pattern where the special chart variable display time is 35000 There are various variation patterns available, including a variation pattern where the special chart variable display time is 10,000 ms and the pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice, followed by a normal reach and a miss on the Super Reach Gamma (PA2-5B); a variation pattern where the special chart variable display time is 10,000 ms and the normal reach jackpot is achieved (PB1-4A); a variation pattern where the special chart variable display time is 15,000 ms and the pseudo consecutive performance is executed once, followed by a normal reach jackpot (PB1-4B); a variation pattern where the special chart variable display time is 30,000 ms and the pseudo consecutive performance is executed once, followed by a normal reach and a Super Reach Gamma jackpot (PB1-5A); and a variation pattern where the special chart variable display time is 35,000 ms and the pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice, followed by a normal reach and a Super Reach Gamma jackpot (PB1-5B).

Furthermore, when the game state is in a probability state (high probability, high base state), as shown in Figure 136 (C), there are variation patterns (PA1-6) where the special chart variable display time is 3000 ms and results in a non-reach miss, (PA1-7) where the special chart variable display time is 500 ms and results in a non-reach miss, (PA2-6) where the special chart variable display time is 5000 ms and results in a normal reach miss, and (PB1-6) where the special chart variable display time is 5000 ms and results in a normal reach jackpot.

In this embodiment, the probability of a jackpot being the variable display result becoming a "jackpot" is set higher in the order of Super Reach, Normal Reach, and Non-Reach, so the longer the special chart variable display time is in the normal reach variation pattern and Super Reach variation pattern, the higher the probability of a jackpot being expected. Furthermore, when the game state is in the normal state, the probability of a jackpot being the variable display result becoming a "jackpot" is set higher for Super Reach β than for Super Reach α.

In addition, in this embodiment, these fluctuation patterns are determined using the random number value MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern, as well as the random number value MR3 for determining a miss effect and the random number value MR4 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation pattern may be determined using two or fewer random number values including the random number value MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern, or may be determined using four or fewer random number values including the random number value MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern.

Figures 137-16 are explanatory diagrams of the method for determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display being executed, the number of reserved memories, the game status, the miss effect, the variation pattern type, etc.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 137(A) to 137(F), when the game state is normal (low base state) and the variable display result is a miss, if the miss effect is not reach and the number of reserved memories of special symbols that execute variable display (number of reserved memories of the same type) is one or less, the variable pattern is determined based on the value of the miss variable pattern determination table A and the random number value MR5. If the miss effect is not reach and the number of reserved memories of special symbols that execute variable display is two, the variable pattern is determined based on the value of the miss variable pattern determination table B and the random number value MR5. If the miss effect is not reach and the number of reserved memories of special symbols that execute variable display is three, the variable pattern is determined based on the value of the miss variable pattern determination table B and the random number value MR5. determines the fluctuation pattern based on the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C and the value of the random number value MR5; if the miss effect is a reach and the fluctuation pattern type is a normal reach, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D and the value of the random number value MR5; if the miss effect is a reach and the fluctuation pattern type is a super reach α, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the miss fluctuation pattern determination table E and the value of the random number value MR5; and if the miss effect is a reach and the fluctuation pattern type is a super reach β, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the miss fluctuation pattern determination table F and the value of the random number value MR5.

Also, as shown in Figures 138 (A) to 138 (D), when the game state is the time-saving state (low probability high base state) and the variable display result is a miss, if the miss effect is not a reach and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display (number of reserved memories of the same type) is one or less, the variation pattern is determined based on the miss variation pattern determination table G and the value of the random number value MR5; if the miss effect is not a reach and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display is two or more, the variation pattern is determined based on the miss variation pattern determination table H and the value of the random number value MR5; if the miss effect is a reach and the variation pattern type is a normal reach, the variation pattern is determined based on the miss variation pattern determination table I and the value of the random number value MR5; and if the miss effect is a reach and the variation pattern type is a super reach γ, the variation pattern is determined based on the miss variation pattern determination table J and the value of the random number value MR5.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 139 (A) to 139 (C), when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability high base state) and the variable display result is a miss, if the miss effect is not a reach and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display (number of reserved memories of the same type) is one or less, the variable pattern is determined based on the miss variable pattern determination table K and the value of the random number value MR5; if the miss effect is not a reach and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display (number of reserved memories of the same type) is two or more, the variable pattern is determined based on the miss variable pattern determination table L and the value of the random number value MR5; and if the miss effect is a reach and the variable pattern type is a normal reach, the variable pattern is determined based on the miss variable pattern determination table M and the value of the random number value MR5.

As shown in Figures 140(A) to 140(C), when the gaming state is normal (low probability low base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A and the value of random number value MR5; when the gaming state is time-saving state (low probability high base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B and the value of random number value MR5; and when the gaming state is probability variable state (high probability high base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C and the value of random number value MR5.

For example, as shown in Figures 137(A) to 137(F), when loss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, if the value of the random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1); when loss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, if the value of the random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2); when loss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, if the value of the random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3); when loss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, if the value of the random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1A); If the value of value MR5 is within the range of 901 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1B); if miss fluctuation pattern determination table E is selected, if the value of random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2A); if the value of random number value MR5 is within the range of 901 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2B); if miss fluctuation pattern determination table F is selected, if the value of random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3A); and if the value of random number value MR5 is within the range of 901 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3B).

Also, as shown in Figures 138(A) to 138(D), if loss fluctuation pattern determination table G is selected, if the value of random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4); if loss fluctuation pattern determination table H is selected, if the value of random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-5); if loss fluctuation pattern determination table I is selected, if the value of random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 920, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-6). is determined to be the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-4A), and if the value of random number MR5 is within the range of 921 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-4B).If miss fluctuation pattern determination table J is selected, if the value of random number MR5 is within the range of 1 to 950, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach gamma miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-5A), and if the value of random number MR5 is within the range of 951 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach gamma miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-5B).

Also, as shown in Figures 139(A) to 139(C), when loss fluctuation pattern determination table K is selected, if the value of random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-6); when loss fluctuation pattern determination table L is selected, if the value of random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-7); and when loss fluctuation pattern determination table M is selected, if the value of random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-6).

Also, as shown in Figure 140 (A), if jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 30, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1A), if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 31 to 80, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1B), and if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 81 to 170, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach alpha jackpot fluctuation pattern. If the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 171 to 320, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2B); if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 321 to 600, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3A); and if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 601 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3B).

Also, as shown in Figure 140 (B), when jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 90, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-4A); if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 91 to 280, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-4B); if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 281 to 580, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-5A); and if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 581 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-5B).

Also, as shown in Figure 140 (C), if jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern will be determined to be the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-6).

In this embodiment, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variable pattern is determined at a rate of 1 regardless of the type of jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination rate of multiple variable patterns for jackpots may differ depending on the type of jackpot. This allows the player to focus on which variable display variable pattern resulted in a jackpot, increasing the player's interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 141, the normal state in this embodiment is a gaming state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, and the rate at which the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state based on the variable display per time (jackpot probability) is lower than in the special variable state, and is also a gaming state in which the average variable display time of the special symbol is the longest among the normal state, time-saving state, and special variable state. Also, the time-saving state in this embodiment is a gaming state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, and the rate at which the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state based on the variable display per time (jackpot probability) is lower than in the special variable state, and is also a gaming state in which the average variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than in the normal state and longer than in the special variable state among the normal state, time-saving state, and special variable state. In this embodiment, the probability variable state is a gaming state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, and the rate at which the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state based on the variable display per time (jackpot probability) is higher than in the normal state or the time-saving state, and is the gaming state in which the average variable display time of the special symbol is the shortest among the normal state, time-saving state, and probability variable state.

Now, we will explain the variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B in this embodiment. As shown in Figure 142 (B), the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are provided with eight LEDs as described above, and these LEDs make up the special symbols. In the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, the LED to be lit is switched one by one every 40 ms, and 40 ms after the eighth LED begins to light up, the first LED begins to light up again. In other words, in this embodiment, the process of the LED to be lit changing from the first to the second, third, ... eighth LED is defined as one cycle, and the variable display of special symbols is performed by repeatedly cyclically lighting up these LEDs.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 142 (D), the first performance indicator light 152A and the second performance indicator light 152B are each provided with one LED, and these LEDs form the sub-patterns. In the first performance indicator light 152A and the second performance indicator light 152B, the LEDs are switched on and off every 60 ms. In other words, in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, one cycle is when the LED is turned on for 240 ms and then turned off for 240 ms, and the cyclical lighting of these LEDs is repeatedly executed to variable display of the sub-patterns.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 126 may be a backup RAM, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on a specified power supply board. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will be preserved for a specified period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply discharges and the backup power supply is no longer able to supply power). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game status, i.e., the control status of the game control means (such as a special chart process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid balls should be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control status of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control status to the state before the power outage, etc., based on that data, when power is restored after a power outage, etc. Furthermore, the data corresponding to the control status and the data indicating the number of unpaid balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

This RAM 102 has a game control data holding area 001SG150, as shown in FIG. 143, which is an area for holding various data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area 001SG150 shown in FIG. 143 includes a first special symbol buffer 001SG151A, a second special symbol buffer 001SG151B, a regular symbol reserve memory unit 001SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 001SG152, a game control timer setting unit 001SG153, a game control counter setting unit 001SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 001SG155.

The first special symbol buffer 001SG151A stores the pending data of special symbol games (special symbol games using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A) in order of winning, in which a game ball has passed (entered) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A, resulting in a start winning (first start winning), but which have not yet started.

The second special symbol buffer 001SG151B stores the pending data of special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in order of winning, in which a game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, resulting in a start winning (second start winning), but which have not yet started.

As an example, the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A associates the order of winning (the order of detection of the gaming balls) at the first start entry port with a reserved number, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining a miss effect, the random number value MR4 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and the random number value MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern, extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the establishment of the first start condition when the gaming ball passes (enters), as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The second special symbol buffer 001SG151B associates the order of winning (the order of detection of the gaming balls) at the second start entry port with a reserved number, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining a miss effect, the random number value MR4 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and the random number value MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern, extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the establishment of the second start condition when the gaming ball passes (enters), as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The numerical data for reserved number 0 in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A and the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B is data corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol currently being executed, and the numerical data for reserved numbers 1 to 4 is data (reserved data) corresponding to the variable display of special symbols that have not yet been executed.

In this way, the reserved data stored in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A and the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B indicates that the execution of a special symbol game using the first special symbol or a special symbol game using the second special symbol is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will occur based on the variable display results (special symbol display results) in these special symbol games.

In this embodiment, when hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition when the gaming ball passes through (enters) the first start entry port, and hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start entry when the gaming ball passes through (enters) the second start entry port are stored in separate hold memory units in association with hold numbers, the variable display based on the second hold memory information is executed in priority over the variable display based on the first hold information.

The normal symbol reserve memory unit 001SG151C stores reserve information for normal symbol games in which a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21 but which have not yet been started by the normal symbol display device 20. For example, the normal symbol reserve memory unit 001SG151C associates game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR6 for determining the normal symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the game ball, as reserve data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

In addition, the numerical data for reserve number 0 in the regular symbol reserve memory unit 001SG151C is data corresponding to the variable display of the regular symbol currently being executed, and the numerical data for reserve numbers 1 to 4 is data (reserved data) corresponding to the variable display of regular symbols that have not yet been executed.

The game control flag setting unit 001SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 001SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 001SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 001SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 001SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for calculating count values used to control the progress of play in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 001SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 001SG154 may be provided with a random counter that counts some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them using software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 001SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, such as numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly in accordance with the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software that updates the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or software that updates the random count value by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 001SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of games on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 001SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 001SG155 is provided with a random number buffer 001SG155A for determining special chart display results, which temporarily stores the value of random number MR1; a random number buffer 001SG155B for determining the type of jackpot, which temporarily stores the value of random number MR2; a random number buffer 001SG155C for determining miss effects, which temporarily stores the value of random number MR3; a random number buffer 001SG155D for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, which temporarily stores the value of random number MR4; and a random number buffer 001SG155E for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, which temporarily stores the value of random number MR5.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 126 stores not only performance control programs but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared so that the performance control CPU 120 can make various judgments, decisions, and settings, as well as pattern data constituting various performance control patterns.

As an example, the ROM 121 stores a presentation control pattern table that contains multiple presentation control patterns that the presentation control CPU 120 uses to control presentation operations by various presentation devices (e.g., the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, decorative LEDs, presentation models, etc.). The presentation control patterns correspond to various presentation operations executed according to the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content of those operations. The presentation control pattern table may store, for example, presentation control patterns for when special charts are variable displayed, preview presentation control patterns, and various other presentation control patterns.

Figure 144 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit allocation for input port 105a. As shown in Figure 144, in input port 0, signals from the count switch 23 are input to bit 1, the discharge port switch (not shown) to bit 2, the specific area switch to bit 3, and the normal prize entry port switch 24 to bit 6. In input port 1, out confirmation switch signal 1 is input to bit 2, out confirmation switch signal 2 is input to bit 3, the magnet sensor signal is input to bit 5, and the frame radio wave sensor signal is input to bit 7. Also, in input port 2, a board proximity sensor error signal is input to bit 2, a frame proximity sensor error signal is input to bit 3, a setting key switch is input to bit 4, a touch switch is input to bit 5, a door/frame open switch is input to bit 6, and a clear switch is input to bit 7. Also, in input port 3, a signal from the first start port switch 22A is input to bit 1, a second start port switch 22B is input to bit 2, and a gate switch 21 is input to bit 3. Also, a power supply confirmation signal is input to bit 6, and a prize ball control signal RX0 is input to bit 7.

Figure 145 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit allocation for output port 105b. As shown in Figure 145, bits 1 to 8 of output port DG1 output signals to each LED that constitutes the first special symbol. Bits 1 to 8 of output port DG2 output signals to each LED that constitutes the second special symbol.

In addition, at output port DG3, bit 1 outputs a signal to the start gate winning memory count indicator light 2 for the first special symbol (the second LED among the LEDs that make up the first hold indicator 25A), bit 2 outputs a signal to the start gate winning memory count indicator light 2 for the second special symbol (the second LED among the LEDs that make up the second hold indicator 25B), bit 3 outputs a signal to the gate passing memory count indicator light 2 (the second LED among the LEDs that make up the normal symbol indicator 20), bit 4 outputs a signal to the start gate winning memory count indicator light 1 for the first special symbol (the first LED among the LEDs that make up the first hold indicator 25A), bit 5 outputs a signal to the start gate winning memory count indicator light 1 for the second special symbol (the first LED among the LEDs that make up the second hold indicator 25B), and bit 6 outputs a signal to the gate passing memory count indicator light 1 (the first LED among the LEDs that make up the normal symbol indicator 20). Finally, at output port DG4, bits 1 to 4 output signals to each of the LEDs that make up the normal symbol.

In addition, at output port DG5, bits 0 to 4 output signals to the LEDs that make up the round count indicator 26, bit 5 outputs a signal to the LED that makes up the win indicator light 27, bit 6 outputs a signal to the LED that makes up the right-hit indicator light 28, and bit 7 outputs a signal to the LED that makes up the status indicator light 29.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 126 has an area for storing various data used to control performance operations, such as a performance control data storage area 001SG190 as shown in Figure 146 (A). The performance control data storage area 001SG190 shown in Figure 146 (A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 001SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 001SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 001SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 001SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 001SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated in response to performance operation states, such as the display state of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, and performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 001SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 001SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 001SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 001SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 001SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 001SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 001SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 001SG194A shown in FIG. 146 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 001SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 001SG194A has a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum total number of reserved memories for the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4"), and a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being variably displayed. Furthermore, the start winning time receiving command buffer 001SG194A has a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum total number of reserved memories for the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4"), and a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being variably displayed. When a start win occurs at the first start win slot or the second start win slot, a set of four commands is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12: a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command), a reserved memory count notification command (first special symbol reserved memory count notification command or second special symbol reserved memory count notification command), a designation command, and a loss effect pattern command. The storage areas corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory and the second special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 001SG194A have storage areas (entries) reserved for associating the start win designation command, reserved memory count notification command, designation command, and loss effect pattern command and storing them separately as the first special symbol reserved memory and the second special symbol reserved memory.

When the start conditions are met and the variable display of the top-level reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, the contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one by one, as described below. Furthermore, the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0," which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start conditions are met, are cleared during the special drawing hit waiting process, which is executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the start winning reception command buffer 001SG194A has a memory area reserved for each storage area (entry) so that a hold display flag, to which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold memory display is set, and a winning flash effect flag, to which a flag value indicating whether or not the winning flash effect described below is set, can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special symbol hold memory and the second special symbol hold memory.

Incidentally, if the execution of a hold change effect is not determined in the hold change effect determination process described below, the hold display flag is set to "0," which corresponds to the normal hold display display pattern. However, if the execution of a hold change effect is determined, a "1" (blue) or "2" (red) is set, which corresponds to a hold memory display pattern that is a special mode (e.g., blue or red) that differs from the normal display mode. After the hold change effect determination process is executed, the hold appearance animation process, dwell animation process, shift animation process, etc., described below, are executed, causing the active display and hold display to be displayed in a display mode corresponding to each hold display flag (for example, if the hold display flag value is "0," a white color corresponding to the game status is displayed; if the hold display flag value is "1," a blue color corresponding to the game status is displayed; and if the hold display flag value is "2," a red color corresponding to the game status is displayed).

When a start win occurs in the first start win slot, the effect control CPU 120 stores commands starting from the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 001SG194A. When a start win occurs in the second start win slot, the effect control CPU 120 stores commands starting from the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 001SG194A. When a start win occurs, the start win slot designation command, reserved symbol number notification command, symbol designation command, and loss effect pattern command are sent sequentially. Therefore, when commands are received, the start win slot designation command, reserved symbol number notification command, symbol designation command, and loss effect pattern command are stored sequentially in the storage areas corresponding to the last digits "0" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory or the second special symbol reserved memory.

Whenever the variable display of a decorative symbol begins, the commands stored in the start winning time receive command buffer 001SG194A shown in FIG. 146(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents of the entries corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to begin (the entry with buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents of the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to begin are shifted. For example, when the variable display of a decorative symbol in the first special symbol reserved memory ends in the storage state shown in FIG. 146(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "0" are shifted to buffer number "0," the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "0," and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3." Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is currently being variably displayed.

In this embodiment, when the game state is normal, an active display is displayed in the active display area 5F based on the data stored in buffer number "1-0," and a reserved display is displayed in the reserved memory display area 5U based on the data stored in buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4." Furthermore, when the game state is time-saving or probability variable, an active display is displayed in the active display area 5F based on the data stored in buffer number "2-0," and a reserved display is displayed in the reserved memory display area 5U based on the data stored in buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4."

(operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main board 11)
First, we will explain the main operations on the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up and game control main processing is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 147 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main processing shown in FIG. 147, the CPU 103 first disables interrupts (step S1). Next, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). These initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and making the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are met (step S3). The recovery conditions can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example, is pressed, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery conditions are not met. The backup data only needs to be able to be saved in RAM 102, which serves as backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery conditions can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (Step S3: Yes), it is determined whether the setting value confirmation condition is met based on whether the gaming machine frame 3 is open, the state of the setting key switch, etc. (Step S4). If the setting value confirmation condition is met (Step S4: Yes), the currently set setting value is displayed on the display monitor as a setting value confirmation process (Step S5).

Then, after the setting value confirmation process is executed, or if the setting value confirmation condition is not met (step S4; No), the recovery process (step S6) is executed, followed by the random number circuit setting process (step S12). The recovery process of step S8 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the power supply was stopped.

If the recovery condition is not met (Step S3; No), it is determined whether the setting value setting condition is met based on whether the gaming machine frame 3 is open, the state of the setting key switch, etc. (Step S7). If the setting value setting condition is met (Step S7; Yes), a setting value setting process is executed (Step S8). In the setting value setting process of this embodiment, for example, the setting value set by operating the touch switch and the setting key switch can be set.

After the setting value setting process is executed, or if the setting value setting condition is not met (step S7; No), a determination is made as to whether the setting value confirmation condition is met, and the setting value confirmation process is executed (steps 9 and 10), similar to steps S4 and S5. After the setting value confirmation process is executed, or if the setting value confirmation condition is not met (step 9; No), an initialization process (step S11) is executed, followed by a random number circuit setting process (step S12).

The initialization process in step S11 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and by executing the clearing process, initial values are set in the working area.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S12), the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time interval (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S13), and enables the interrupt (step S14). Then, a loop process is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 4 ms), allowing the CPU 103 to periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

After executing this game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of Fig. 148. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in Fig. 148 starts, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, count switch 23, and normal winning port switch 24, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, a timer subtraction process (step S22) is executed to subtract various timer values related to the game (for example, the values of the normal symbol process timer, the start port 2 or more winning error invalid timer, the security information timer, the information output extension timer, and the illegal winning notification invalid timer), and then a start port 2 abnormal winning monitoring process (step S23) is executed to monitor whether an abnormal winning has occurred in the second start winning port, and a winning designation command based on the game ball having won in the various winning ports or an error command indicating the abnormal winning based on the occurrence of the abnormal winning is sent to the performance control board 12. By executing a prize winning notification process (step S24) to notify the occurrence of a prize winning error, a magnet error notification process (step S25) to notify the occurrence of a magnet error, a radio wave error notification process (step S26) to notify the occurrence of a radio wave error, a switch error notification process (step S27) and a switch abnormality error notification process (step S28) to check for broken or missing wiring in various switches, and a discharged ball error notification process (step S29) to notify the occurrence of a discharged ball error, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 can be performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary depending on the diagnosis results. After this, a random number update process (step S30) is performed to update at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR6 for determining the normal symbol display result, an initial value determination random number update process (step S31) to update the random number value MR7 for determining the initial value of the random number value MR1 and the random number value MR6, a special symbol process process (step S32) to perform variable display of the special symbol and control to the jackpot game state, a normal symbol process process (step S33) to perform variable display of the normal symbol, a role solenoid control process (step S 34), an information output process (step S35) that outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached) that is supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1, a prize ball process (step S36) that awards prize balls according to winnings in each winning slot, a display process (step S37) that sets data for lighting the LEDs that make up the first reserve indicator 25A, the second reserve indicator 25B, and the normal reserve indicator 25C, and a test terminal process (step S38) that outputs a test signal that enables the control status of the game machine to be checked outside the game machine. 8), an output process for outputting the contents relating to the connection signal in the RAM area of output port 0 and the contents relating to the solenoid to the output port (step S39), a special symbol display control process for setting special symbol display control data to an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data in accordance with the value of the special symbol process flag (step S40), a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data to an output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data in accordance with the value of the normal symbol process flag (step S41), a command in which information indicating an error state of the gaming machine, etc. is set to display an error state of the gaming machine, etc. The process executes a frame status output process (step S42) that sends the data to the performance control board 12, a display control process (step S43) that controls the lighting of the LEDs that make up the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, first hold indicator 25A, second hold indicator 25B, normal symbol display 20, normal hold indicator 25C, etc. based on the data set in the output buffer, a setting key confirmation process (step S44) that confirms the status of the setting key switch, and a performance display monitor control process (step S45) that displays base values, etc. on the display monitor provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and then allows an interrupt (step S46), before terminating the game control timer interrupt process.

(Switch processing)
Next, the switch processing (step S21) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. In this embodiment, if the on state of the detection signal of each switch related to winning detection or gate passage continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that the switch is indeed on, and processing corresponding to the switch on is initiated. Figure 149 is an explanatory diagram showing each 2-byte buffer formed in RAM 102 used in switch processing. The previous port buffer is a buffer in which the result of the previous switch on/off determination (e.g., 4 ms ago) is stored. The port buffer is a buffer in which the contents of port 3 input this time are stored. The switch on buffer is a buffer in which the corresponding bit is set to 1 when a switch on is detected, and the corresponding bit is set to 0 when a switch off is detected.

Figure 150 is a flowchart showing an example of the switch processing in step S21. In the switch processing, the CPU 103 first inputs the data input to input port 3 (step S51) and sets the input data in the port buffer (step S52).

Next, the initial value of the wait counter formed in RAM 102 is set (step S53), and the value of the wait counter is decremented by one until the value of the wait counter becomes 0 (steps S54 and S55).

When the wait counter value reaches 0, data is again input to input port 3 (step S56), and a bit-by-bit logical AND is taken between the input data and the data set in the port buffer (step S57). The result of the logical AND is then set to the port buffer (step S58). Through the processing of steps S53 to S58, of the two input data pieces input from input port 0, separated by a time interval of approximately [initial value of the wait counter × (processing time of steps S104 and S105)], only bits that were set to "1" both times become "1" in the port buffer. In other words, if the switch detection signal remains on for a predetermined period of [initial value of the wait counter × (processing time of steps S54 and S55)], the corresponding bit in the port buffer becomes "1."

The CPU 103 then performs an exclusive OR on each bit between the data previously set in the port buffer and the data currently set in the port buffer (step S59). In the result of the exclusive OR operation, bits corresponding to switches for which the previous switch on/off determination result (e.g., 4 ms ago) and the current switch on/off determination result differ are set to "1." The CPU 103 then performs a logical AND on each bit between the result of the exclusive OR operation and the data currently set in the port buffer (step S60). As a result, of the bits (based on the result of the exclusive OR operation) corresponding to switches for which the previous switch on/off determination result and the current switch on/off determination result differ, only the bit (based on the logical AND operation) corresponding to the switch currently determined to be on remains as "1."

Then, the CPU 103 sets the result of the logical AND operation in step S60 in the switch-on buffer (step S61), and sets the contents of the port buffer in which the operation result in step S108 is set in the previous port buffer (step S62).

As a result of the above processing, among the switches that have been continuously in the on state for a predetermined period, the bits corresponding to the switches whose previous on/off determination result (for example, 4 ms ago) was off, i.e., the switches that changed from the off state to the on state, are set to "1" in the switch-on buffer.

(Random number update process)
Next, the random number update process (step S30) in the timer interrupt process will be described. Figure 151 is a flowchart showing an example of the random number update process. In the random number update process, the CPU 103 first determines the value of the random number counter for determining the special picture display result (the value of the random number value MR1) (step 71), and determines whether the value of the random number counter for determining the special picture display result has reached its maximum value (step S72). If the value of the random number counter for determining the special picture display result has not reached its maximum value (step S72; N), the value of the random number counter for determining the special picture display result is incremented by 1 and the process proceeds to step S75 (step S73). If the value of the random number counter for determining the special picture display result has reached its maximum value (step S72; Y), the value of the random number counter for determining the special picture display result is set to the minimum value of 1 and the process proceeds to step S75 (step S74).

In step S75, the CPU 103 compares the current value of the random number counter for determining the result of a special graphic display with the initial value of the random number counter for determining the result of a special graphic display (step S75). It then determines whether the current value of the random number counter for determining the result of a special graphic display and the initial value of the random number counter for determining the result of a special graphic display are the same (step S76). If the current value of the random number counter for determining the result of a special graphic display and the initial value of the random number counter for determining the result of a special graphic display are the same (step S76; Y), it extracts the value of the random number counter for determining the result of a special graphic display, i.e., the random number value MR7 value, which is a random number used to determine the initial value of the random number value MR1 for determining the result of a special graphic display (step S77), sets the extracted random number value MR7 value to the random number counter for determining the result of a special graphic display (step S78), and stores the extracted random number value MR7 value as the initial value of the random number counter for determining the result of a special graphic display (step S79).

After executing step S79, or if the current value of the random number counter for determining the special map display result and the initial value of the random number counter for determining the special map display result are not the same (step S76; N), the CPU 103 determines the value of the random number counter for determining the normal map display result (the value of random number value MR6) (step S80) and determines whether the value of the random number counter for determining the normal map display result has reached its maximum value (step S81). If the value of the random number counter for determining the normal map display result has not reached its maximum value (step S81; N), the value of the random number counter for determining the normal map display result is incremented by 1 and the process proceeds to step S84 (step S82). If the value of the random number counter for determining the normal map display result has reached its maximum value (step S81; Y), the value of the random number counter for determining the normal map display result is set to the minimum value of 1 and the process proceeds to step S84 (step S83).

In step S84, the CPU 103 compares the current value of the random number counter for determining the normal map display result with the initial value of the random number counter for determining the normal map display result (step S84). It then determines whether the current value of the random number counter for determining the normal map display result and the initial value of the random number counter for determining the normal map display result are the same (step S85). If the current value of the random number counter for determining the normal map display result and the initial value of the random number counter for determining the normal map display result are the same (step S85; Y), it extracts the value of the random number counter for determining the normal map display result, i.e., the random number value MR7 value, which is a random number used to determine the initial value of the random number value MR6 for determining the normal map display result (step S86), sets the extracted random number value MR7 value to the random number counter for determining the normal map display result (step S87), and stores the extracted random number value MR7 value as the initial value of the random number counter for determining the normal map display result (step S88), thereby terminating the random number update process. Furthermore, if the current value of the random number counter for determining the result of the map display is not the same as the initial value of the random number counter for determining the result of the map display (step S85; N), the random number update process ends without executing steps S86 to S88.

In this embodiment, the random number value MR1 for determining the result of the special map display and the random number value MR6 for determining the result of the normal map display both take values between 1 and 65536, so in the above-mentioned step S74, the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special map display is set to 1, and in the above-mentioned step S83, the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal map display is set to 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of possible values for the random number value MR1 for determining the result of the special map display and the random number value MR6 for determining the result of the normal map display may be set to 0 between 0 and 65535, and in the above-mentioned step S74, the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special map display may be set to 0, and in the above-mentioned step S83, the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal map display may be set to 0.

(Special pattern processing)
Fig. 152 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S32 shown in Fig. 148. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first determines whether a gaming ball has entered either the first start winning slot or the second start winning slot, that is, whether a start winning has occurred, by referring to the input port 3 shown in Fig. 144 (step S100). If a gaming ball has entered either the first start winning slot or the second start winning slot (step S100; Y), a start slot switch passing process is executed (step S101).

The start port switch passing process detects the occurrence of a start winning, stores the pending information in a specified area of RAM 102, and updates the number of pending memories. When a start winning occurs, a random number value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern, and stored as pending information. A process may also be executed to predict the display result and fluctuation pattern based on the extracted random number value. Furthermore, when the pending information and number of pending memories are stored, a presentation control command is sent to the presentation control board 12 to specify the results of the judgment, such as the occurrence of a start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prediction judgment.

After executing the start gate switch passing process in step S101, or if a game ball has not entered either the first start gate or the second start gate (step S100; N), the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S116 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag stored in RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S116), a presentation control command corresponding to that step is sent to the presentation control board 12.

The normal special symbol processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special symbol processing, a determination is made as to whether to start the first or second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. Furthermore, in the normal special symbol processing, whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is to be a "jackpot" and, if so, the type of jackpot, is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed based on a random number value for determining the display result. Furthermore, in the normal special symbol processing, a fixed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "1," and the normal special symbol processing ends. In this embodiment, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also known as special symbol 2 priority consumption). Additionally, the order in which game balls enter the first and second starting winning slots may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision value compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

In addition, during the normal special symbol processing, a random number value for determining the variation pattern is used to determine one of several variation patterns (variation pattern setting), based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "jackpot" or not.

The variable pattern specifies the execution time of the special symbol game (variable special symbol display time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol change process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "1". This special symbol change process includes processes for making settings to change the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and processes for measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol variable display time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change reaches the special symbol variable display time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", and the special symbol change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol stop process includes a process for stopping the variation of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and setting the device to stop displaying (derive) the confirmed special symbol that will result in the display of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and if the display result is a "miss", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "miss", the game state is also updated if the game is in a time-saving state or a special probability state and the end of the number-cutting period is confirmed. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the large prize opening in step S113 is executed when the value of the special prize process flag is "3." This pre-opening process for the large prize opening includes processing to start the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and set the large prize opening to an open state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot." When the large prize opening is set to an open state, a solenoid drive signal is supplied to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door. At this time, the maximum open period for the large prize opening to be set and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set, depending on, for example, the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special prize process flag is updated to "4," and the pre-opening process for the large prize opening ends.

The jackpot opening process of step S114 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "4." This jackpot opening process includes processes such as measuring the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state, processes such as stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door are executed, after which the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5," and the jackpot opening process ends.

The post-jackpot release process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "5". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of rounds that open the jackpot entry port has been executed has reached the set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. If the number of rounds executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", while if the number of rounds executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "6". Once the value of the special symbol process flag has been updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This jackpot end process includes processes such as waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation, which serves as a presentation operation to notify players of the end of the jackpot game state, is executed, and making various settings to initiate variable rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

(Start switch passing process)
FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the start gate switch passing process (S101) shown in FIG. 152. In the start gate switch passing process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the first start gate switch 22A, which corresponds to the first start gate formed by the winning ball device 6A, is on based on a detection signal from the switch (001SGS101). If the switch 22A is on (001SGS101; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the first special symbol reserved memory count, which is the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "4") (001SGS102). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved first special symbols by, for example, reading the first special symbol reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the first special symbol reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 001SG154. When the number of reserved memories for the first special chart in 001SGS102 is not the upper limit value (001SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 001SG155 is set to "0" (001SGS103).

When the first start opening switch 22A is off in 001SGS101 (001SGS101; N) or when the number of reserved first special symbols has reached the upper limit in 001SGS102 (001SGS102; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second start opening switch 22B, which corresponds to the second start opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is on (001SGS104) based on a detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B. If the second start opening switch 22B is on (001SGS104; Y), a determination is made as to whether the second special symbol reserved number, which is the number of reserved symbols for the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "4" as the upper limit) (001SGS105). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved second special symbols by, for example, reading the second special symbol reservation count value, which is the stored value of the second special symbol reservation count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 001SG154. When the second special symbol reservation count is not the upper limit value in 001SGS105 (001SGS105; N), for example, the value stored in the start buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 001SG155 is set to "2" (001SGS106).

After executing either of the processes 001SGS103 or 001SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the value stored in the start port buffer, is updated by adding 1 (001SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0," the first reserved special symbol memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2," the second reserved special symbol memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved special symbol memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first start entry port and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is met. Furthermore, the second reserved special symbol memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the gaming ball passes (enters) the second start entry port and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is met. At this time, the total reserved special symbol memory count is also updated to increase by 1 (001SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 001SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the processing of 001SG108, the CPU 103 extracts a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, a random number value MR3 for determining the type of variation pattern, a random number value MR4 for determining the type of variation pattern, and a random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 001SG154, and uses the extracted random number value MR1 as the special chart display result determination. The extracted random number value MR2 is stored in the fixed random number buffer 001SG155A, the extracted random number value MR2 is stored in the jackpot type determination random number buffer 001SG155B, the extracted random number value MR3 is stored in the miss effect determination random number buffer 001SG155C, the extracted random number value MR4 is stored in the fluctuation pattern type determination random number buffer 001SG155D, and the extracted random number value MR5 is stored in the fluctuation pattern determination random number buffer 001SG155E (001SGS109-001SGS118).

The CPU 103 also sets the transfer destinations for the random number values MR1-MR5 in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A and the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B based on the start port buffer value and the pending memory count value corresponding to the start port buffer value (001SGS119). Then, the CPU 103 transfers the random number values MR1-MR5 stored in the special symbol display result determination random number buffer 001SG155A, the jackpot type determination random number buffer 001SG155B, the miss effect determination random number buffer 001SG155C, the variation pattern type determination random number buffer 001SG155D, and the variation pattern determination random number buffer 001SG155E to the transfer destinations set in step 001SGS19 (001SGS120).

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot." The random number value MR3 for determining a miss, the random number value MR4 for determining the type of variation pattern, and the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern are used to determine the variation pattern, including the variable display time, of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 001SGS109 to 001SGS120, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display results of the special symbol or decorative symbol and the variable display mode, including the variable display time, and stores this as reserved information (reserved memory).

In other words, in the start port switch passing processing of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 217 (A), the CPU 103 extracts the values of random number values MR1 to MR5 based on the occurrence of a winning entry into the first start port, and temporarily stores these extracted random number values MR1 to MR5 in the random number buffer 001SG155A for determining the special chart display result, the random number buffer 001SG155B for determining the type of jackpot, the random number buffer 001SG155C for determining the miss effect, the random number buffer 001SG155D for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and the random number buffer 001SG155E for determining the fluctuation pattern within the game control buffer setting unit 001SGS155. Then, as shown in FIG. 217 (B), the CPU 103 transfers the random number values MR1 to MR5 stored in the special symbol display result determination random number buffer 001SG155A, the jackpot type determination random number buffer 001SG155B, the miss effect determination random number buffer 001SG155C, the fluctuation pattern type determination random number buffer 001SG155D, and the fluctuation pattern determination random number buffer 001SG155E to the top of the empty entries among the entries with reserved numbers "1" to "4" in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A, and stores them as reserved memory.

In the example of Figure 217, the storage and transfer of random number values MR1 to MR5 when a win occurs in the first starting gate was explained. However, when a win occurs in the second starting gate, the random number values MR1 to MR5 stored in the special symbol display result determination random number buffer 001SG155A, the jackpot type determination random number buffer 001SG155B, the miss effect determination random number buffer 001SG155C, the variation pattern type determination random number buffer 001SG155D, and the variation pattern determination random number buffer 001SG155E are simply transferred to the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B, so further explanation will be omitted.

In FIG. 153, after executing the winning effect processing (001SGS122), the CPU 103 sends a pending memory count notification command to the effect control board 12 (001SGS123), for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory count notification command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the start port buffer value is "0" (001SGS124). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "0" (001SGS124; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (001SGS126), and processing proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (001SGS124; N), the start port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (001SGS125), and the start winning processing ends. This ensures that processing based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect valid game ball start winnings.

(Winning performance processing)
FIG. 154 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 001SGS122 of FIG. 153 as a winning effect process. When the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol is initiated, a determination is made by the normal special symbol process (described later) as to whether the special symbol display result (the variable display result of the special symbol) should be set as a "jackpot" and the game should be controlled to a jackpot game state. Furthermore, a variable pattern setting process (described later) determines a variable pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. Separately from these determinations, when the game ball is detected in the start winning slot (first starting winning slot or second starting winning slot), the CPU 103 executes the winning effect process of step 001SGS112 to determine whether a jackpot symbol should be displayed as a static special symbol display result, and whether the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be a predetermined display mode accompanied by a super reach. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of a game ball entering the starting winning hole begins, that is, before it is decided whether or not a jackpot will be reached at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether the special symbol display result will be a "jackpot" and which of the variable display modes of the decorative symbols will result in a miss performance pattern, and based on this determination result, the performance control CPU 120 or the like will execute a preview performance such as a pre-reading preview performance, as will be described later.

In the winning effect processing shown in FIG. 154 (A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, by checking the state of the time-saving flag or the probability variable flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 001SG152 (step 001SGS131). The processing of step 001SGS131 may, for example, determine whether the setting value is set to a normal value (e.g., "1"). Furthermore, if an abnormal value is set as the setting value, the CPU 103 may execute processing to output a command to the outside indicating that the abnormal value has been set.

Following the processing of step 001SGS131, the CPU 103 selects and sets a special symbol display result judgment table (step 001SGS132). It then determines whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result extracted in step 001SGS109 of FIG. 153 is within a predetermined jackpot judgment range (step 001SGS133). The jackpot judgment range is set with individual judgment values assigned to the special symbol display result of "jackpot" in the special symbol display result judgment table selected by the processing of step 001SGS132, and the CPU 103 can determine whether or not there is a judgment value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing the random number value MR1 with each judgment value one by one. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) judgment values included in the jackpot judgment range can be set, and the CPU 103 can compare the random number value MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot judgment range to determine whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range. In this case, if it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including that random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot."

If step 001SGS133 determines that the result is not within the jackpot determination range, i.e., if it is determined that the variable display will not result in a jackpot (step 001SGS133; N), the first symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "miss," is transmitted (step 001SGS134), and the miss effect determination table shown in Figure 134 is selected (step 001SGS135). Then, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for miss effect determination extracted in step 001SGS113 of Figure 153 is within the non-reach determination range (step 001SGS136). If the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 is within the non-reach determination range (step 001SGS136; Y), a miss effect pattern designation command corresponding to the non-reach state (see FIG. 154 (B)) is sent and the winning effect processing is terminated (step 001SGS144). If the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 is outside the non-reach determination range (step 001SGS136; N), it is determined whether the probability variable flag is set, that is, whether the game state is a probability variable state (high probability, high base state) (step 001SGS137).

If the probability variable flag is set (step 001SGS137; Y), set the fluctuation pattern type determination table C shown in Figure 135 (C) and proceed to step 001SGS142 (step 001SGS141), if the probability variable flag is not set (step 001SGS137; N), further determine whether the time-saving flag is set, that is, whether the game state is a time-saving state (low probability high base state) (step 001SGS138). If the time-saving flag is not set (step 001SGS138; N), set the fluctuation pattern type determination table A shown in Figure 135 (A) and proceed to step 001SGS142 (step 001SGS139),
If the time-shortening flag is set (step 001SGS138; Y), the fluctuation pattern type determination table B shown in Figure 135 (B) is set and the process proceeds to step 001SGS142 (step 001SGS140).

In step 001SGS142, the CPU 103 determines a loss presentation pattern based on the variation pattern type determination table set in any of steps 001SGS139 to 001SGS141 and the numerical data of random number value MR4 (step 001SGS42). If the numerical data of random number value MR4 is within the range of the determination values for normal reach, it sends a loss presentation pattern command corresponding to normal reach. If the numerical data of random number value MR4 is within the range of the determination values for super reach α, super reach β, or super reach γ, it sends a loss presentation pattern command corresponding to super reach (see Figure 154 (B)) to the presentation control board 12, and the winning presentation processing ends (step 001SGS143).

Furthermore, if the numerical data of the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range in step 001SGS133 (step 001SGS133; Y), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the numerical data of the random number value MR2 and the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 133 (A) (step 001SGS145), and sends a design specification command corresponding to the determined jackpot type to the presentation control board 12, thereby terminating the winning presentation processing (step 001SGS146).

(Normal processing of special patterns)
155 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in S110 of FIG. 152 as the normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in FIG. 155, the CPU 103 first determines whether the number of reserved second special symbols is "0" (step 001SGS151). The number of reserved second special symbols is the number of reserved special symbols for the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 001SGS151, the second special symbol reserved number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit is read, and it is determined whether the read value is "0".

If the number of reserved second special charts is other than "0" in step 001SGS151 (step 001SGS151; N), the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 001SGS153), and then the process proceeds to step 001SGS157.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special symbols is "0" (step 001SGS151; Y), it is further determined whether the number of reserved first special symbols is "0" (step 001SGS154). The number of reserved first special symbols is the number of reserved special symbol games using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the processing of step 001SGS154, the count value of the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the game control counter setting unit is read, and it is determined whether the read value is "0".

If the number of reserved first special symbols is other than "0" in step 001SGS154 (step 001SGS154; N), the variable special symbol designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special symbol designation buffer, is updated to "1" (step 001SGS156), and then processing proceeds to step 001SGS157. As a result, the special symbol game using the second special symbol will be started in priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol.

Note that the special symbol game using the second special symbol is not limited to being executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol; for example, the special symbol game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first or second start winning port and a start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winnings occurred, and it may be possible to determine from the stored data whether to start the special symbol game using the first or second special symbol.

In the processing of step 001SGS157, the count value of the number of reserved special charts corresponding to the variable special chart designation buffer value is decremented by 1. For example, if the variable special chart designation buffer value is "1", the count value of the number of reserved first special charts is decremented by 1, and if the variable special chart designation buffer value is "2", the count value of the number of reserved first special charts is decremented by 1.

Then, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol determination process (step 001SGS158) to determine whether the variable display result will be a jackpot or a miss, and a variation pattern setting process (step 001SGS159) to determine the variation pattern, and then updates the special symbol process flag value to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process and terminates the normal special symbol processing (step 001SGS160).

If the number of reserved first special symbols is 0 in step 001SGS154 (step 001SGS154; Y), the CPU 103 executes settings and sends commands (for example, a demo display effect designation command) to execute a demo display effect, and ends the normal special symbol processing (step 001SGS161). If the CPU 103 executes settings and sends commands to execute a demo display effect in step 001SGS61, the variable display of special symbols is executable, but the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols are 0, so the machine enters a customer waiting state in which the variable display of special symbols is not executed.

(Special pattern determination process)
156 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol determination process shown in FIG. 155. In the special symbol determination process, the CPU 103 first executes a special symbol buffer shift process (step 001SGS171). The special symbol buffer shift process determines whether the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", that is, whether the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 157 (step 001SGS181).

If the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "1" (step 001SGS181; Y), the entry contents for reservation number "1" in the first special pattern buffer 001SG151A shown in FIG. 143 are overwritten with the entry contents for reservation number "0" (step 001SGS182). Furthermore, the contents of the entry for reserve number "2" in the first special pattern buffer 001SG151A are overwritten with the contents of the entry for reserve number "1" (step 001SGS183), the contents of the entry for reserve number "3" in the first special pattern buffer 001SG151A are overwritten with the contents of the entry for reserve number "2" (step 001SGS184), the contents of the entry for reserve number "4" in the first special pattern buffer 001SG151A are overwritten with the contents of the entry for reserve number "3" (step 001SGS185), and the contents of the entry for reserve number "4" in the first special pattern buffer 001SG151A are cleared (step 001SGS186).

In this way, by executing the processing of steps 001SG182 to 00SG186, the higher-order entries in the reserved memory in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A are shifted.

Then, a first special symbol reserved memory count notification command corresponding to the number of entries in which the numerical data of random numbers MR1 to MR5 are stored in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A is sent to the performance control board 12, and the special symbol buffer shift process is terminated (step 001SGS187).

On the other hand, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "2" (step 001SGS181; N), the entry contents for reservation number "1" in the second special pattern buffer 001SG151B shown in FIG. 143 are overwritten with the entry contents for reservation number "0" (step 001SGS188). Furthermore, the contents of the entry for reserved number "2" in the second special pattern buffer 001SG151B are overwritten with the contents of the entry for reserved number "1" (step 001SGS189), the contents of the entry for reserved number "3" in the second special pattern buffer 001SG151B are overwritten with the contents of the entry for reserved number "2" (step 001SGS190), the contents of the entry for reserved number "4" in the second special pattern buffer 001SG151B are overwritten with the contents of the entry for reserved number "3" (step 001SGS191), and the contents of the entry for reserved number "4" in the second special pattern buffer 001SG151B are cleared (step 001SGS192).

In this way, by executing the processing of steps 001SG188 to 00SG192, the higher-ranking entries in the reserved memory in the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B are shifted.

Then, a second special symbol reserved memory count notification command corresponding to the number of entries in which the numerical data of random numbers MR1 to MR5 are stored in the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B is sent to the performance control board 12, and the special symbol buffer shift process is terminated (step 001SGS193).

In other words, in the special symbol buffer shift process in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 218(A) to 218(E) and Figures 219(A) to 219(F), the CPU 103 first performs a process of copying the contents of the entry with reserve number "1" to the entry with reserve number "0" in the special symbol buffer (first special symbol buffer 001SG151A in the examples shown in Figures 218 and 219), regardless of the number of reserved memories stored. Next, the CPU 103 sequentially performs a process of copying the contents of the entry with reserve number "2" to the entry with reserve number "1", a process of copying the contents of the entry with reserve number "3" to the entry with reserve number "2", and a process of copying the contents of the entry with reserve number "4" to the entry with reserve number "3".

As shown in Figure 219 (E), if the special symbol buffer process is executed when the number of reserved memories is four, executing the process of copying the contents of the entry with reserved number "4" to the entry with reserved number "3" will result in the same data being present in the entry with reserved number "3" and the entry with reserved number "4" (the data of the entry with reserved number "4" before the special symbol buffer process was executed is stored in both the entry with reserved number "3" and the entry with reserved number "4"). For this reason, in the special symbol buffer process of this embodiment, the number of reserved memories is reduced by finally erasing (clearing) the contents of the entry with reserved number "4".

Furthermore, in the special pattern buffer shift process in this embodiment, if the number of reserved memories is four, a situation will arise in which the same data exists in the entry for reserved number "3" and the entry for reserved number "4", as shown in Figure 219 (E), so it is necessary to execute a process to erase the memory contents of the entry for reserved number "4".However, as shown in Figure 218, if the number of reserved memories is three or less, there is no need to execute a process to erase the memory contents of the entry for reserved number "4". However, if the processing content of the special symbol buffer shift process were to vary depending on the number of reserved memories stored, the amount of data required to execute the special symbol buffer shift process would increase. Therefore, in this embodiment, the same processing is executed regardless of the number of reserved memories stored (processing to copy the storage contents of the entry with reserved number "2" to the entry with reserved number "1", processing to copy the storage contents of the entry with reserved number "3" to the entry with reserved number "2", processing to copy the storage contents of the entry with reserved number "4" to the entry with reserved number "3", and processing to erase the storage contents of the entry with reserved number "4"), thereby suppressing the increase in the amount of data required to execute the special symbol buffer shift process.

Returning to the special symbol determination process of FIG. 156, the CPU 103 reads the random number values MR1 to MR5 from the entry for reserved number "0" in the special symbol buffer corresponding to the variable special symbol designation buffer value (step 001SGS172). The CPU 103 then identifies the set value (step 001SGS173), selects a display result determination table corresponding to the set value (step 001SGS174), and determines whether the read random number value MR1 is within the range of jackpot determination values in the selected display result determination table (step 001SGS175). Note that in the processing of step 00SGS175, if the game state is normal or time-saving, it determines whether the random number value MR1 is within the range of jackpot determination values for the normal or time-saving state. If the game state is a special probability state, it determines whether the random number value MR1 is within the range of jackpot determination values for the special probability state.

If the value of random number value MR1 is within the range of the large value judgment value, the variable display result is deemed to be a jackpot, and the jackpot flag is set to ON (step 001SGS176). At this time, the jackpot type judgment table shown in FIG. 133(A) is selected and set as the table to be used to determine one of several jackpot types (step 001SGS177). By referencing the jackpot type judgment table set in this way, the jackpot type to be determined is determined based on whether the numerical data indicating the read random number value MR2 for jackpot type judgment matches one of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type in the jackpot type judgment table: "non-variable jackpot," "variable jackpot A," "variable jackpot B," or "variable jackpot C" (step 001SGS178).

By determining the jackpot type in step 001SGS178, the game state after the jackpot game state ends—either a time-saving state (low probability, high base state) or a probability variable state (high probability, high base state), which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state—is determined before the fixed special symbol is derived as a variable display result. Corresponding to the jackpot type thus determined, the determined jackpot type is stored by, for example, setting a jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of a jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 001SGS179). For example, if the jackpot type is a "non-probability variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value can be set to "0," if it is a "probability variable A" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot A, "0" if it is a "probability variable B" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot B, "2," and if it is a "probability variable C" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot C, "3."

Furthermore, if the value of the random number value MR1 is not within the range of the jackpot determination value after execution of step 001SGS179 or in step 001SGS175, i.e., if it is determined to be a "miss" (step 001SGS175; N), the CPU 103 sets a fixed special symbol in response to the pre-determined result of whether to control the game to a jackpot game state (whether the jackpot flag is set to the ON state) and the determined result of the jackpot type if the game is to be a jackpot game state, and terminates the special symbol determination process (step 001SGS180). In the processing of step 001SGS180, for example, in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss," it may determine to light up the two upper and lower LEDs located at the left end of the special symbol display device, and in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot," it may determine to light up the eight LEDs that make up the special symbol display device in different combinations depending on the jackpot type (excluding the above-mentioned "miss" combination).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 001SGS159 of FIG. 155 as the variable pattern setting process. In the variable pattern setting process shown in FIG. 158, the CPU 103 first determines whether the variable display result is a jackpot (step 001SGS201). If the variable display result is not a jackpot, that is, a miss (step 001SGS201; N), the CPU 103 selects the miss effect determination table shown in FIG. 134 (step 001SGS202a), and determines whether a miss effect (whether or not a reach effect is to be performed) based on the random number value MR3 read in step 001SGS172 of FIG. 156 and the selected miss effect determination table (step 001SGS202b). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a reach effect is to be performed (step 001SGS202c).

If a reach effect is not executed as the miss effect, that is, if a non-reach fluctuation pattern is used (step 001SGS202c; N), proceed to step 001SGS202f. If a reach effect is executed as the miss effect, that is, if a normal reach or super reach fluctuation pattern is used (step 001SGS202c; Y), select a fluctuation pattern type determination table (see Figure 135) according to the game state (step 001SGS202d). For example, if the game state is normal, select fluctuation pattern type determination table A; if the game state is time-saving, select fluctuation pattern type determination table B; and if the game state is probability variable, select fluctuation pattern type determination table C.

Then, the fluctuation pattern type (the reach effect to be executed) is determined based on the random number value MR4 read in step 001SGS172 of Figure 156 and the selected fluctuation pattern type determination table, and the process proceeds to step 001SGS202f (step 001SGS202e).

In step 001SGS202f, the CPU 103 selects a loss fluctuation pattern determination table (see Figures 137 to 139) based on the above-mentioned loss effects, fluctuation pattern type, game status, number of reserved memories, etc., and proceeds to step 001SGS203 (step 001SGS202f).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a jackpot (step 001SGS201; Y), the jackpot variation pattern determination table (see Figure 140) corresponding to the game status is selected and the process proceeds to step 001SGS203.

Then, in processing step 001SGS203, the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern based on the random number value MR5 read in step 001SGS172 of FIG. 156 and the selected fluctuation pattern determination table.

After the variation pattern is determined in step 001SGS203, settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so that either a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started, depending on the variable special symbol designation buffer value (step 001SGS204). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the processing of step 001SGS204, various commands are sent when the special symbol starts to change (step 001SGS205). For example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sequentially sends a game status designation command, a first variable display start designation command, a variable pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, and a first special symbol reserved memory count notification command from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sequentially sends a game status designation command, a second variable display start designation command, a variable pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, and a second special symbol reserved memory count notification command from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12.

After executing the processing of step 001SGS205, the variable pattern setting process is terminated by setting the special symbol variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the result of the variable pattern determination (step 001SGS206). The special symbol variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the confirmed special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is displayed stationary.

(Special pattern variation processing)
Fig. 159 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol variation process executed in step S111 of Fig. 152. In the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 decrements the variable display time timer value by 1 (step 001SGS207) and determines whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 001SGS208a). If the variable display time timer has not timed out (step 001SGS208a; N), the special symbol variation process is terminated. If the variable display time timer has timed out (step 001SGS208a; Y), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process, and the special symbol variation process is terminated (step 001SGS208b).

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S112 of FIG. 152. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referenced in the special symbol change process in step S113, ending the special symbol change, and controls the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to display the stopped symbols (step 001SGS211). If the special symbol change buffer value is "1," indicating the first special symbol, the first special symbol change is terminated. If the special symbol change buffer value is "2," indicating the second special symbol, the second special symbol change is terminated (step 001SGS212). The CPU 103 then transmits a symbol determination command to the performance control board 12 (step 001SGS212). It then determines whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 001SGS213).

If the jackpot flag is on (step 001SGS213; Y), and if the probability variable flag or time-saving flag is on, the CPU 103 clears the probability variable flag and time-saving flag to turn them off (step 001SGS214), and sends to the performance control board 12 one of the following commands depending on the type of jackpot stored: jackpot start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), jackpot start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), jackpot start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C), or jackpot start 4 designation command (non-probability variable jackpot) (step 001SGS215).

Furthermore, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state to the performance control board 12 (step 001SGS216).

Then, the jackpot display timer is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (the time for which a jackpot is notified, for example, on the image display device 5, that a jackpot has occurred) (step 001SGS217). The number of times the jackpot opening counter has been opened (for example, 10 times for a non-variable jackpot or variable jackpot A, 5 times for variable jackpot B, and 2 times for variable jackpot C) is set (step 001SGS218). The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "4," which corresponds to the pre-jackpot opening process (step S113), and the special symbol stop process is terminated (step 001SGS219).

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off (step 001SGS213; N), step 001SGS220 determines whether the time-saving flag is on (step 001SGS220). If the time-saving flag is off (step 001SGS220; N), proceed to step 001SGS25. If the time-saving flag is on (step 001SGS220; Y), determine whether the value of the time-saving count counter is "0" (step 001SGS221). If the value of the time-saving count counter is "0" (step 001SGS221; Y), proceed to step 001SGS225.

On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving count counter is not "0" (step 001SGS221; N), that is, if the time-saving count is remaining and the high base state is in effect, the value of the time-saving count counter is decremented by 1 (step 001SGS222). It is then determined whether the value of the time-saving count counter after decrement is "0" (step 001SGS223). If it is not "0" (step 001SGS223; N), proceed to step 001SGS225. If the value of the time-saving count counter is "0" (step 001SGS223; Y), the time-saving flag is cleared to the OFF state to terminate time-saving control, and proceed to step 001SGS225 (step 001SGS224).

In step 001SGS225, a game state designation command is sent according to the state of the probability variation flag and time-saving flag. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "0," which corresponds to normal special symbol processing, and the special symbol stop processing is then terminated (step 001SGS226).

(Jackpot end processing)
Figure 161 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S116 of Figure 152 as jackpot termination processing.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is running, i.e., whether the timer is counting (step 001SGS231). If the jackpot end display timer is not running (step 001SGS231; N), the CPU 103 sets the jackpot end display timer to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time for which the jackpot end display is displayed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 001SGS232), and ends the processing.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is running (step 001SGS231; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 001SGS233). The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 001SGS234). If it has not elapsed, processing ends.

If the jackpot end display time has passed (step 001SGS234; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 001SGS235).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-probability jackpot (step 001SGS235; N), the probability jackpot flag and time-saving flag are turned on (step 001SGS237, step 001SGS238). The time-saving counter is also set to "0" (step 001SGS239), and the process proceeds to step 001SGS242.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 001SGS235; Y), steps 001SGS240 and 001SGS241 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set the time-saving counter to "100", after which the program proceeds to step 001SGS242.

In step 001SGS242, the jackpot flag is turned off and a jackpot end command corresponding to the type of jackpot is sent (step 001SGS243). Then, after sending a game status designation command to notify the performance control board 12 of the game status based on the ON probability variable flag and time-saving flag (step 001SGS244), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which corresponds to normal special symbol processing, and the jackpot end processing is terminated (step 001SGS245).

(Display processing)
162 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S37 of FIG. 148 as the display process. In the display process, the CPU 103 first specifies the start port buffer value and the special symbol process flag value (steps 001SGS251 and 001SGS252). The CPU 103 also specifies the first special symbol reserved memory count value and the second special symbol reserved memory count value, i.e., the first special symbol reserved number and the second special symbol reserved number (step 001SGS253). Then, the CPU 103 sets the lighting data of the LEDs in the first reserved indicator 25A and the second reserved indicator 25B according to the specified contents.

For example, as shown in FIG. 163(A), when the start port buffer value is 1, the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0, the special symbol process flag value is 0, and the number of first special symbol reserved memories is 1, even if the LED of the first reserved indicator 25A is lit in a manner corresponding to the number of reserved memories being 1, the LED will be turned off (all LEDs constituting the first reserved indicator 25A will be turned off) when the next interrupt occurs as a result of the variable display based on that reserved memory being started, as shown in FIG. 163(A), data is set so that the LED of the first reserved indicator 25A will not be lit. When the special symbol process flag value is 0-6 and the number of first special symbol reserved memories is 2-4, even if the variable display based on the first first special symbol reserved memory is started when the next interrupt occurs, one of the LEDs constituting the first reserved indicator 25A will be lit, as shown in FIG. 163(A), data is set so that the LED of the first reserved indicator 25A is lit in a manner corresponding to the total number of reserved memories.

Also, as shown in Figure 163 (B), when the start port buffer value is 1 and the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 or more, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority, so data is set to light up the LED of the first reserved indicator 25A in a manner corresponding to the total number of reserved memories, regardless of the special symbol process flag value or the number of first special symbol reserved memories.

Also, as shown in FIG. 163 (C), when the start port buffer value is 2, the special pattern process flag value is 0, and there is one second special pattern reserved memory, even if the LED of the second reserved indicator 25B is lit in a manner corresponding to one reserved memory, the LED will be turned off (all LEDs constituting the second reserved indicator 25B will be turned off) when the variable display based on that reserved memory begins at the next interrupt, as shown in FIG. 163 (C), data is set so that the LED of the second reserved indicator 25B will not be lit. Also, when the special pattern process flag value is 0-6 and there are two to four second special pattern reserved memories, even if the variable display based on the first second special pattern reserved memory begins at the next interrupt, one of the LEDs constituting the second reserved indicator 25B will be lit, as shown in FIG. 163 (C), data is set so that the LED of the second reserved indicator 25B is lit in a manner corresponding to the total number of reserved memories.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the LED lighting data on the regular map reserve display 25C according to the number of regular map reserves stored (step 001SGS255).

In addition, to set the data to light up the LEDs of the first hold indicator 25A, second hold indicator 25B, and general hold indicator 25C, in output port DG3 shown in Figure 145, simply set the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned on to "1" and the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off to "0."

The CPU 103 then identifies the game status and, if the identified game status is a jackpot game status, identifies the type of jackpot (step 001SGS256). Then, depending on the identified game status and jackpot type, it sets the lighting data for each LED in the round count indicator 26, win indicator light 27, right-hit indicator light 28, and status indicator light 29, and ends the display process (step 001SGS257).

In addition, to set the data for lighting up the LEDs of the round number indicator 26, win indicator light 27, right-hit indicator light 28, and status indicator light 29, in output port DG5 shown in Figure 145, simply set the bit corresponding to the LED to be lit to "1" and the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off to "0."

(Special symbol display control process)
164 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S40 of FIG. 148 as the special symbol display control process. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 1, that is, whether any special symbol is being variably displayed (step 001SGS261). If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 1 (step 001SGS261; N), the special symbol display control process is terminated. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 1 (step 001SGS261; Y), the variable special symbol designation buffer value, that is, whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being executed, is determined (step 001SGS262), and the value of the variable display time timer is determined (step 001SGS263). Then, the LED lighting data in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B is set according to the specified variable special pattern designation buffer value and variable display time timer value, and the special pattern display control process is terminated (step 001SGS264).

In addition, to set the data for lighting up the LEDs of the first special pattern display device 4A and second special pattern display device 4B, the bits corresponding to the LEDs to be lit can be set to "1" and the bits corresponding to the LEDs to be turned off can be set to "0" in output port DG1 and output port DG2 shown in Figure 145.

Although not specifically shown, the normal symbol display control process (step S41) sets the LED lighting data in the normal symbol display device 20 based on whether or not variable normal symbol display is being performed and the value of the variable normal symbol display time timer (in output port DG4 shown in FIG. 145, the bit corresponding to the LED to be lit is set to "1" and the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off is set to "0").

(Display control process)
165 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S43 of FIG. 148 as the display control processing. The display control processing is a processing for lighting each LED constituting the special drawing unit 201 based on the data created in the above-mentioned display processing and special drawing display control processing ("1" or "0" set in the bit of each output port DG shown in FIG. 145). In the display control processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether the DG counter value is 4, which is the maximum value (step 001SGS271). Furthermore, the DG counter is a counter for selecting which of the output ports shown in Figure 145, output port DG1, output port DG2, output port DG3, and output port DG4, the LED corresponding to which will be turned on, that is, a counter for determining which of the LEDs constituting the first special pattern display device 4A, the LED constituting the second special pattern display device 4B, the LEDs constituting the first reserve indicator 25A, the second reserve indicator 25B, and the normal reserve indicator 25C, and the LED constituting the normal pattern display device 20 will be turned on.

If the DG counter value is 4 (step 001SGS271; Y), the DG counter value is set to 1 and processing proceeds to step 001SGS274 (step 001SGS272); if the DG counter value is other than 4 (step 001SGS271; N), the DG counter value is incremented by 1 and processing proceeds to step 001SGS274 (step 001SGS273).

In step 001SGS274, the CPU 103 determines whether the DG counter value is 1. If the DG counter value is 1 (step 001SGS274; Y), the CPU 103 stops outputting the drive signal from output port DG5 (step 001SGS275), and starts outputting the drive signal from output port DG1, terminating the display control process (step 001SGS276). In other words, if the DG counter value is 1, the CPU 103 outputs a drive signal from output port DG1, thereby controlling the illumination of the LEDs (LEDs constituting the first special pattern display device 4A) corresponding to each bit of output port DG1.

Furthermore, if the DG counter value is not 1 (step 001SGS274; N), it is further determined whether the DG counter value is 2 (step 001SGS277). If the DG counter value is 2 (step 001SGS277; Y), the output of the drive signal from output port DG1 is stopped (step 001SGS278), and the output of the drive signal from output port DG2 is started, ending the display control process (step 001SGS279). In other words, if the DG counter value is 2, a drive signal is output from output port DG2, thereby controlling the illumination of the LEDs (LEDs constituting the second special pattern display device 4B) corresponding to each bit of that output port DG2.

Furthermore, if the DG counter value is not 2 (step 001SGS277; N), it is further determined whether the DG counter value is 3 (step 001SGS280). If the DG counter value is 3 (step 001SGS280; Y), the output of the drive signal from output port DG2 is stopped (step 001SGS281), and the output of the drive signal from output port DG3 is started, ending the display control process (step 001SGS282). In other words, if the DG counter value is 3, a drive signal is output from output port DG3, thereby controlling the illumination of the LEDs corresponding to each bit of output port DG3 (the LEDs constituting the first hold indicator 25A, second hold indicator 25B, and general hold indicator 25C).

Furthermore, if the DG counter value is not 3 (step 001SGS280; N), it is further determined whether the DG counter value is 4 (step 001SGS283). If the DG counter value is 4 (step 001SGS283; Y), the output of the drive signal from output port DG3 is stopped (step 001SGS284), and the output of the drive signal from output port DG4 is started, ending the display control process (step 001SGS285). In other words, if the DG counter value is 4, the drive signal is output from output port DG4, thereby controlling the illumination of the LEDs (LEDs that make up the normal pattern display 20) corresponding to each bit of that output port DG4.

Also, if the DG counter value is not 4 (step 001SGS283; N), the DG counter value is deemed to be 5, and the output of the drive signal from output port DG4 is stopped (step 001SGS286), and the output of the drive signal from output port DG5 is started, ending the display control process (step 001SGS287). In other words, if the DG counter value is 5, a drive signal is output from output port DG5, thereby controlling the illumination of the LEDs corresponding to each bit of output port DG5 (the LEDs that make up the round number indicator 26, win indicator light 27, right-hit indicator light 28, and status indicator light 29).

In other words, in this embodiment, the LEDs that make up the first special symbol display device 4A, the LEDs that make up the second special symbol display device 4B, the LEDs that make up the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the regular hold indicator 25C, the LEDs that make up the regular symbol display 20, and the LEDs that make up the round count indicator 26, win indicator light 27, right-hit indicator light 28, and status indicator light 29 are configured to periodically repeat a 16 ms off state and a 4 ms on state by changing the LEDs that are to be illuminated every 4 ms, which is the interrupt period of the CPU 103.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a start winning occurs by executing the game control timer interrupt process shown in Figure 148, as shown in Figure 166 (A), the start winning occurrence is determined in the start port switch passing process and a command corresponding to the start winning occurrence (start port winning designation command) is sent, and then display processing and display control processing are executed, thereby starting the illumination control of the hold indicator (first hold indicator 25A or second hold indicator 25B) corresponding to the start winning.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, as shown in Figure 166 (B), the special symbol determination process and buffer shift process are executed within the normal special symbol processing, and the reserved memory number notification command is sent, and then the display process and display control process are executed, so that in response to the start of the variable display, the reserved indicator begins to control the illumination in the state after the reserved memory number has been subtracted.

In addition, when the variable display of a special symbol is executed, as shown in Figure 166 (C), the special symbol display control process and the display control process are executed, thereby starting light emission control of the special symbol display device in accordance with the variable display, and then the special symbol variation process starts decrementing the variable display time (variable display time timer).

In this embodiment, the CPU 103 sends a pending memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120, which can identify the number of pending memories including the new pending memory, based on the occurrence of a new pending memory while the variable display of a special pattern is being executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 may also send a command indicating the occurrence of the new pending memory (for example, a pending memory number increase notification command) to the performance control CPU 120. In addition, based on receiving the above-mentioned pending memory number notification command or pending memory number increase notification command, the performance control CPU 120 may light up the first sub-pending indicator 151A or the second sub-pending indicator 151B in a manner corresponding to the number of pending memories.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an example has been given in which the CPU 103 sends a pending memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the start of the variable display of the special pattern, which is capable of identifying the number of pending memories after the start of the variable display of the special pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 may also send a command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the start of the variable display of the special pattern simply indicating that the number of pending memories has decreased (for example, a pending memory number decrease notification command). Furthermore, based on receiving the above-mentioned pending memory number notification command or pending memory number decrease notification command, the performance control CPU 120 may simply light up the first sub-pending indicator 151A or the second sub-pending indicator 151B in a manner corresponding to the number of pending memories after the start of the variable display of the special pattern.

(Major operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, we will explain the main operations of the performance control board 12. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 167. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 167 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S151), clearing RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting registers for the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12, etc.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S153). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example, based on the register settings of the CTC. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (step S153; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns on. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 automatically disables the interrupt. However, if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable command (DI command). In response to the interrupt due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a specified command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, the performance control command is captured from a specified input port included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The captured performance control command is stored in a performance control command reception buffer, for example, provided in RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then enables interrupts and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S153 (step S153; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S154), and a command analysis process is executed (step S155). In the command analysis process, for example, various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read effect control commands are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a specified area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 may be turned on, so that the effect control process process can confirm which effect control command was received and the content specified by the effect control command. Furthermore, if the effect control command specifies the game status, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game status.

After executing the command analysis process in step S155, the performance control process is executed (step S156). The performance control process controls the operation of various performance devices, such as the display of performance images on the display screen of the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving of the movable body 32. In addition, the control content of performance operations using the various performance devices is judged, determined, and set in accordance with the performance control commands sent from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process of step S156, an effect random number update process is executed (step S157), and at least a portion of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. Furthermore, after the effect random number value update process (step S157), a demo effect control process (step S158) for executing a demo effect on the pachinko gaming machine 1, an operation reception control process (step S158a) for receiving operation of the push button 31B or stick controller 31A, and a background display update process (step S159) for updating the background display displayed on the image display device 5 to another background display are executed. Then, processing returns to step S153. Other processing may be executed before returning to processing of step S73.

In the demo display control process, the performance control CPU 120, upon receiving a command to execute a demo display performance from the CPU 103 (for example, a demo display performance designation command), executes control to display a guidance display on the image display device 5 on the condition that 30 seconds (3000 ms) have passed without any new pending memory being generated, and further executes control to display an image of the demo display performance on the image display device 5 on the condition that 30 seconds (3000 ms) have passed without any new pending memory being generated. Furthermore, if a new pending memory is generated while a guidance display or demo display performance image is being displayed, control to stop the display of the guidance display or demo display performance image may be executed.

Furthermore, during the operation acceptance process, the performance control CPU 120 displays a menu screen on the image display device 5 based on accepting operation of the push button 31B or stick controller 31A when the number of first special symbol reserved memories and the number of second special symbol reserved memories are 0 and no variable display of any special symbol is being performed, and by accepting operation of the push button 31B or stick controller 31A while the menu screen is being displayed, it can execute control to change the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R and the brightness of the game effect lamp 9.

In addition, the background display update process in this embodiment can execute control to update the background image displayed on the image display device 5 based on changes in the game state or the decision to change the presentation mode at the start of variable display.

In the demo performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer, such as a customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer, until the customer waiting demo performance begins based on receiving a customer waiting demo designation command, and may start the customer waiting demo performance when the timer expires without the variable display starting. If the variable display starts while the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer is operating or while the customer waiting demo performance is being executed, the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer may be cleared, the customer waiting demo performance may be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

(Performance control process)
Fig. 168 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S156 of Fig. 167 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in Fig. 167, the effect control CPU 120 first performs an effect mode determination process (step S160) for determining the effect mode when a variable display is executed, a hold change effect determination process (step S161) for determining the display mode of the hold display to be displayed in the hold memory display area 5U and the active display to be displayed in the active display area 5F, a win time flash effect process (step S162) for executing an entry time flash effect that continuously indicates that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state based on the occurrence of a start win by emitting light from the game effect lamp 9, a button vibration effect process (step S163) for executing a button vibration effect that drives the push button 31B by the vibration motor 36, a button vibration effect process (step S164) for executing a button vibration effect that causes the hold display to appear in the hold memory display area 5U, and a button vibration effect process (step S165) for executing a button vibration effect that causes the hold display to appear in the hold memory display area 5U. The system executes the following: an appearance animation process (step S164) for displaying the pending display in the pending memory display area 5U and the active display in the active display area 5F; a stay animation process (step S165) for displaying the pending display in the pending memory display area 5U in a stay state; a shift animation process (step S166) for shifting the pending display displayed in the pending memory display area 5U to the previous display position in the pending memory display area 5U or toward the active display area 5F; an end animation process (step S167) for ending the display of the active display in the active display area 5F; and a sub-hold indicator lighting control process (step S168) for controlling the lighting of the LEDs constituting the first sub-hold indicator 151A and the second sub-hold indicator 151B based on the number of pending memories. The sub-hold indicator lighting control process also executes a process for updating the display of the first special symbol pending memory number and the second special symbol pending memory in the display area 5S, which will be described later. After the end animation process is executed, one of the following steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed, depending on the value of a performance process flag set in RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". This variable display start setting process determines the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (confirmed decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various effects such as reach effects and various preview effects will be executed, their mode, and the start timing of execution, based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) that reflects the determined results is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing of step S172 is executed when the effect process flag value is "2." In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to perform various effects control operations during the variable display of decorative symbols, such as displaying an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, driving the movable body 32, outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 to output audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs. In addition, the variable display effect processing in this embodiment also controls the lighting of the LEDs that make up the first effect indicator light 152A and the second effect indicator light 152B. After performing this type of effect control, the final decorative pattern, which is the result of the decorative pattern display, is displayed in a static state, for example, in response to reading an end code from the effect control pattern indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, or receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the static display of the final decorative pattern. When the static display of the final decorative pattern is completed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect processing ends. Note that the processing of step 172 in this embodiment also performs processing to execute the variable display of small patterns in the display area 5S, which will be described later.

The special symbol win wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special symbol win wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether a presentation control command specifying the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. When a presentation control command specifying the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Furthermore, if a command specifying the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving said command has elapsed, the display result in the special symbol game is determined to be a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to its initial value of "0". Once the value of the presentation process flag has been updated, the special symbol win wait process ends.

The jackpot presentation processing of step S174 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "4". In this jackpot presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern, etc., corresponding to the presentation content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. Furthermore, in the jackpot presentation processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the end of the jackpot gaming state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which corresponds to the ending presentation processing, and the jackpot presentation processing ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "5". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. The presentation process flag value is then updated to its initial value of "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Performance mode)
As shown in FIG. 169, in this embodiment, presentation modes A to D are provided, where presentation modes A and B are presentation modes that can be selected when the game state is in a normal state, presentation mode C is a presentation mode that can be selected when the game state is in a time-saving state, and presentation mode D is a presentation mode that can be selected when the game state is in a special state.

In the presentation mode determination process, when the game state is normal, the presentation mode is set to presentation mode A at the start of the first variable display in the normal state. Furthermore, at the start of the second or subsequent variable display in the normal state, if the set presentation mode is presentation mode A, the presentation mode is set to presentation mode B by lottery, and if the set presentation mode is presentation mode B, the presentation mode is set to presentation mode A by lottery.

In addition, in the presentation mode determination process, when the jackpot game state ends, the presentation mode is set to presentation mode C based on the reception of a game state designation command from CPU 103 indicating a time-saving state, and the presentation mode is set to presentation mode D based on the reception of a game state designation command from CPU 103 indicating a probability variable state.

As will be described in more detail below, in this embodiment, presentation modes A to D each have different background images displayed on the image display device 5, variable display modes for decorative symbols, and display modes for active and pending displays.

(Hold change effect determination process)
170 shows the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display and active display in the hold change effect determination process shown in FIG. 168. In the hold change effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first refers to the start winning time reception command buffer 001SG194A shown in FIG. 146 (B) and identifies whether or not there is an entry for which the hold display flag is not set. If there is an entry for which the hold display flag is not set, the variable display result is identified from the pattern designation command in that entry, and the miss effect is identified from the miss effect pattern command in that entry, and based on these identified variable display results and miss effects, the presence or absence of the hold change effect and the effect pattern, i.e., the display mode of the hold display and active display, are determined.

For example, as shown in FIG. 170, if the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a 5% chance that the hold change presentation will not be performed, a 25% chance that the hold change presentation will be performed using presentation pattern A, and a 70% chance that the hold change presentation will be performed using presentation pattern B. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the miss presentation pattern is a non-reach, there is a 95% chance that the hold change presentation will not be performed, a 5% chance that the hold change presentation will be performed using presentation pattern A, and a 0% chance that the hold change presentation will be performed using presentation pattern B. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the miss presentation pattern is a normal reach, there is a 75% chance that the hold change presentation will not be performed, a 20% chance that the hold change presentation will be performed using presentation pattern A, and a 5% chance that the hold change presentation will be performed using presentation pattern B. Additionally, if the variable display result is a miss and the miss presentation pattern is a super reach, there is a 65% chance that the hold change presentation will not be performed, a 25% chance that presentation pattern A of the hold change presentation will be performed, and a 10% chance that presentation pattern B of the hold change presentation will be performed.

After determining whether or not to execute the hold change effect and the effect pattern as described above, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the hold display flag for that entry to "0" if it has been determined that the hold display preview effect will not be executed, sets the value of the hold display flag for that entry to "1" if it has been determined that the hold display preview effect will be executed using effect pattern A, and sets the value of the hold display flag for that entry to "2" if it has been determined that the hold display preview effect will be executed using effect pattern B.

In this embodiment, the hold change effect determination process illustrates an example in which the decision on whether to execute a hold change effect and the decision rate for the hold change effect's presentation pattern differ depending on whether the symbol designation command, i.e., the variable display result, indicates a jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the symbol designation command indicates a jackpot, the decision rate for whether to execute a hold change effect and the decision rate for the presentation pattern for the hold change effect may differ depending on whether the jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, or non-probability variable jackpot. Alternatively, the decision rate for whether to execute a hold change effect and the decision rate for the presentation pattern for the hold change effect may differ depending on whether the game is controlled to a probability variable state after the jackpot play ends. This makes it easier for players to focus their attention on whether a hold change effect will be executed and which presentation pattern the hold change effect will be executed with.

In this embodiment, as described above, the hold display flag corresponding to each entry in the start winning reception command buffer 001SG194A is set to a value between 0 and 2, and then the performance control CPU 120 executes the appearance animation process (step S164), dwell animation process (step 165), and shift animation process (step S166) described below.When the hold display flag is set to the value "0," the hold display or active display corresponding to the hold display flag is displayed in white in a shape appropriate to the performance mode; when the hold display flag is set to the value "1," the hold display or active display corresponding to the hold display flag is displayed in blue in a shape appropriate to the performance mode; and when the hold display flag is set to the value "2," the hold display or active display corresponding to the hold display flag is displayed in red in a shape appropriate to the performance mode.

With these settings, when the hold display or active display is displayed in blue in display pattern A or red in display pattern B, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state (expected jackpot probability) is higher than when the hold display or active display is displayed in white, and when the hold display or active display is displayed in red in display pattern B, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state (expected jackpot probability) is higher than when the hold display or active display is displayed in blue in display pattern A. This allows the player to pay attention to the display mode of these hold displays and active displays, i.e., whether or not a hold change effect is executed and the effect pattern.

(Flash effect processing when winning)
171 is a flowchart showing the winning flash effect processing shown in FIG. 168. In the winning flash effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first references the start winning receive command buffer 001SG194A shown in FIG. 146(B) and determines whether there is a reserved memory in which the winning flash effect flag is not set (step 001SGS301). If there is a reserved memory in which the winning flash effect flag is not set (step 001SGS301; N), it further determines whether there is a reserved memory in which the winning flash effect flag is already set to "1," that is, whether a winning flash effect has already been executed for another reserved memory (step 001SGS302).

If there is no pending memory with the winning flash effect flag set to "1", it is determined whether or not to execute the winning flash effect based on the symbol designation command and loss effect pattern command stored as pending memory with the winning flash effect flag not set (step 001SGS303).

For example, as shown in FIG. 172, if the symbol designation command indicates a jackpot, there is a 40% chance that the winning flash effect will not be executed, and a 60% chance that the winning flash effect will be executed. Furthermore, if the symbol designation command is a miss and the miss effect pattern command is a non-reach, there is a 100% chance that the winning flash effect will not be executed, and a 0% chance that the winning flash effect will be executed. Furthermore, if the symbol designation command is a miss and the miss effect pattern command is a normal reach, there is a 100% chance that the winning flash effect will not be executed, and a 0% chance that the winning flash effect will be executed. Furthermore, if the symbol designation command is a miss and the miss effect pattern command is a super reach, there is an 80% chance that the winning flash effect will not be executed, and a 20% chance that the winning flash effect will be executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has decided to execute a flash effect when a prize is won (step 001SGS304). If it has decided to execute a flash effect when a prize is won (step 001SGS304; Y), it sets the flash effect flag for the reserved memory to "1" and proceeds to step 007SGS307 (step 001SGS305). If it has decided not to execute a flash effect when a prize is won (step 001SGS304; N), it sets the flash effect flag for the reserved memory to "0" and proceeds to step 001SGS307 (step 001SGS306).

If there is no pending memory in which the winning flash effect flag is not set (step 001SGS301; N) or after executing steps 001SGS305 and 001SGS306, the start-up winning reception command buffer 001SG194A shown in FIG. 146(B) is referenced to determine whether there is a pending memory in which the winning flash effect flag is set to "1" (step 001SGS307). If there is a pending memory in which the winning flash effect flag is set to "1" (step 001SGS307; Y), it is determined whether a variable display corresponding to a pending memory in which the winning flash effect flag is set to "1" is in progress, that is, whether a pending memory in which the winning flash effect flag is set to "1" is stored in the entry for buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" in the start-up winning reception command buffer 001SG194A (step 001SGS308). If the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory in which the flash effect flag for winning is set to "1" is not in progress (step 001SGS308; N), proceed to step 001SGS310. If the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory in which the flash effect flag for winning is set to "1" is in progress (step 001SGS308; Y), the process further determines whether the variable display is occurring before the reach (step 001SGS309) by referencing the process table for the variable display in progress. If the variable display is occurring before the reach (step 001SGS309; Y), proceed to step 001SGS310.

Then, in the processing of step 001SGS310, the flashing control of the game effect lamp 9 is executed in a manner corresponding to the winning flash effect, and the winning flash effect processing is terminated (step 00SGS310). Note that if there is no pending memory of the winning flash effect flag being "1" (step 001SGS307; N) or if the variable display is at a timing after the reach (step 001SGS309; N), the winning flash effect processing is terminated without executing the processing of step 001SGS310.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a starting win occurs, the game effect lamp 9 is illuminated as a flash effect when a win occurs, indicating that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Multiple light-emitting patterns and colors of the game effect lamp 9 as a flash effect when a win occurs may be provided, and the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (expected jackpot probability) may be varied depending on the light-emitting pattern and color of the game effect lamp 9.

Furthermore, while this embodiment exemplifies a form in which the game effect lamp 9 is illuminated as a flash effect when a prize is won, the present invention is not limited to this. A lamp other than the game effect lamp 9 (for example, a lamp dedicated to the flash effect when a prize is won) may be provided, and the lamp other than the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated as a flash effect when a prize is won.

(Button vibration effect processing)
173 is a flowchart showing the button vibration effect processing shown in FIG. 168. In the button vibration effect, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether a button vibration effect execution flag, indicating that the button vibration effect is being executed, is set (step 001SGS321). If the button vibration effect execution flag is not set (step 001SGS321; N), it determines whether the game state is normal (step 001SGS322). If the game state is normal (step 001SGS322; Y), it further determines whether a first start port winning designation command has been received (step 001SGS323). If the command to designate the first starting port winning has not been received (step 001SGS323; N), the button vibration effect processing is terminated, and if the command to designate the first starting port winning has been received (step 001SGS323; Y), the number of first special charts reserved is identified by referring to the start winning reception command buffer 001SG194A shown in Figure 146 (B) (step 001SGS324).

On the other hand, if the game state is not the normal state (step 001SGS322; N), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability variable state (step 001SGS325). If the game state is neither the time-saving state nor the probability variable state, that is, if the game state is the jackpot game state (step 001SGS325; N), the button vibration presentation processing is terminated. If the game state is the time-saving state or the probability variable state (step 001SGS325; Y), it further determines whether a second start port winning designation command has been received (step 001SGS326). If the second start gate winning designation command has not been received (step 001SGS326; N), the button vibration effect processing is terminated; if the second start gate winning designation command has been received (step 001SGS326; Y), the start gate winning time reception command buffer 001SG194A shown in FIG. 146 (B) is referenced to identify the number of second special charts reserved (step 001SGS327).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the number of reserved memories identified in step 001SGS324 or step 001SGS327 is three or more (step 001SGS328). That is, in step 001SGS328, if the game state is normal, it determines whether the number of first special symbol reserved memories is three or more. If the game state is time-saving or probability variable, it determines whether the number of second special symbol reserved memories is three or more. If the identified number of reserved memories is two or less (step 001SGS328; N), the button vibration effect processing is terminated. If the identified number of reserved memories is three or more (step 001SGS328; Y), the button vibration effect execution flag is set (step 001SGS39), the button vibration effect execution timer is set, and the button vibration effect processing is terminated (step 001SGS330).

If the button vibration effect execution flag is set (step 001SGS321; Y), the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration motor control process (step 001SGS331) to drive the vibration motor 36, i.e., to vibrate the push button 31B by driving the vibration motor 36, and decrements the value of the button vibration effect execution timer by 1 (step 001SGS332). It then determines whether the button vibration effect execution timer has timed out (step 001SGS333). If the button vibration effect execution timer has not timed out (step 001SGS323; N), the button vibration effect processing is terminated. If the button vibration effect execution timer has timed out (step 001SGS323; Y), the button vibration effect execution flag is cleared and the button vibration effect processing is terminated (step 001SGS334). In other words, the button vibration effect in this embodiment is an effect that notifies users that the number of reserved memories is approaching the upper limit of four by vibrating the push button 31B for a predetermined period of time (for example, five seconds) when the number of reserved memories for the first special symbol reaches three in normal mode, or when the number of reserved memories for the second special symbol reaches three in time-saving mode or special probability mode.

In this embodiment, when the game state is a time-saving state or a probability variable state, a button vibration effect is executed based on the number of second special symbols reserved in memory reaching three or more, thereby notifying the player that the number of second special symbols reserved in memory is approaching the upper limit of four. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and since the time-saving state and probability variable state are game states in which the game ball frequently enters the starting winning slot, the button vibration effect may not be executed in these time-saving states or probability variable states.

(Sub-hold indicator lighting control processing)
Figure 174 is a diagram showing the lighting control mode of the first sub-hold display 151A and the second sub-hold display 151B for each situation in which the performance control CPU 120 receives a start winning designation command in the sub-hold display lighting control process (step S168) shown in Figure 168. In the sub-hold display lighting control process, whether or not to light up the LEDs constituting the first sub-hold display 151A and the second sub-hold display 151B is determined depending on the received start winning designation command and the number of hold memories.

For example, as shown in FIG. 174 (A), when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 when the first start port winning designation command is received, if the presentation process flag value is 0, that is, if the game is not in a jackpot game state and variable display of decorative symbols is not being executed, and there are no reserved memories other than the first special symbol reserved memory based on a new winning entry into the first start port, the presentation control CPU 120 will immediately execute variable display of decorative symbols based on the first special symbol reserved memory, and will not execute control to light up a number of LEDs in the first sub-reservation display 151A according to the number of first special symbol reserved memories (control to light up only one LED in the first sub-reservation display 151A). On the other hand, if the effect process flag value is 0 and the number of first special symbol reserved memories is 2 to 4, i.e., when the game is not in a jackpot game state and variable display is not being executed but there are first special symbol reserved memories other than those based on a new start winning, or if the effect process flag value is 1 to 7 and the number of first special symbol reserved memories is 1 to 4, i.e., regardless of the number of reserved memories, during variable display of decorative symbols, including when variable display start setting processing is being executed, or during jackpot gameplay, control is executed to light up a number of LEDs in the first sub-reserved display device 151A according to the number of first special symbol reserved memories.

Also, as shown in FIG. 174 (B), when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 or more when the first start hole entry designation command is received, that is, when a game ball newly enters the first start hole and the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 or more, the performance control CPU 120 executes control to light up a number of LEDs in the first sub-reservation display 151A according to the number of first special symbol reserved memories, regardless of the performance process flag value or the number of first special symbol reserved memories, since the next variable display of the decorative symbol to be executed is based on the variable display of the second special symbol.

Also, as shown in Figure 144 (C), when a command to designate a second start entry is received, that is, when a game ball newly enters the second start entry port regardless of the number of first special symbol reserved memories, if the presentation process flag value is 0, the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1, that is, the game is not in a jackpot game state and variable display is not being executed, and there are no second special symbol reserved memories other than those based on the new start entry, the presentation control CPU 120 will immediately execute variable display of the decorative pattern based on the second special symbol reserved memory, and will not execute control to light up a number of LEDs in the second sub-reservation display 151B according to the number of second special symbol reserved memories (control to light up only one LED in the second reserve display 25B). On the other hand, if the effect process flag value is 0 and the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 2 to 4, i.e., when the game is not in a jackpot game state and variable display is not being executed but there are second special symbol reserved memories other than those based on a new start win, or if the effect process flag value is 1 to 7 and the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 to 4, i.e., regardless of the number of reserved memories, during variable display of decorative symbols, including when variable display start setting processing is being executed, or during jackpot gameplay, control is executed to light up a number of LEDs in the second sub-reserved display 151B according to the number of second special symbol reserved memories.

(Variable display start setting process)
175 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 168. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start designation reception flag is on (step 001SGS341). If the first variable display start designation reception flag is on (step 001SGS341; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special symbol reserved memory in the start winning reception command buffer 001SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 001SGS342). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so they are erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" in the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0," the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" in the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1," the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" in the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2," and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" in the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3."

Furthermore, if the first variable display start designation reception flag is OFF in step 001SGS341 (step 001SGS341; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start designation reception flag is ON (step 001SGS343). If the second variable display start designation reception flag is OFF (step 001SGS343; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated. If the second variable display start designation reception flag is ON (step 001SGS343; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special symbol reserve memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 001SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 001SGS344). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0," the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1," the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2," and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3."

After executing step 001SGS342 or step 001SGS344, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 001SGS345).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (i.e., the received display result specification command) (step 001SGS346). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this feature section 001SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to a probability variable jackpot A, the presentation control CPU 120 determines, for example, a decorative pattern combination (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols form a "7" as the stopping symbol. Also, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to a probability variable jackpot B or the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to a probability variable jackpot C, the stopping symbol is determined from multiple combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (e.g., decorative pattern combinations such as "111," "333," "555," and "999"). Also, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the presentation control CPU 120 determines, for example, a decorative pattern combination (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols form an even-numbered symbol as the stopping symbol. Furthermore, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a loss, the system determines a combination of three mismatched symbols as the stopping symbols, or a combination that results in a reach loss (loss symbol) such as "767" according to the variation pattern.

To determine these stopping symbols, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number to determine the stopping symbols, and determine the stopping symbols of the decorative symbols using a stopping symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols are associated with numerical values. In other words, the stopping symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative symbols that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

After executing step 001SGS346, the performance control CPU 120 selects a performance control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern specification command (step 001SGS347) and starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 001SGS348).

In addition, the process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, all of which are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) in accordance with the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 001SGS349). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the on/off of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the audio control board 13 to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display so that decorative patterns are variably displayed according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern specification command, but the performance control CPU 120 may also select a variation pattern to use from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern specification command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern specification command (step 001SGS350). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 001SGS351). The predetermined time is, for example, 33 ms. Each time the predetermined time elapses, the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display status of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to VRAM. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display performance processing (step S172) (step 001SGS352).

(Period related to processing by the CPU 103 and the performance control CPU 120)
Here, the period of processing executed by the CPU 103 and the presentation control CPU 120 (and the display control unit 123) in this embodiment will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 176(A), the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 148 every 4 ms. That is, the CPU 103 in this embodiment executes a determination of whether a start winning has occurred, a special symbol process processing, a normal symbol process processing, a command control processing, etc., every 4 ms. In addition, the CPU 103 sets the 500 ms period after the variable display of the special symbol as a symbol determination period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed. Furthermore, the CPU 103 executes the on/off control of the LEDs constituting the special symbol at 40 ms intervals, with one cycle being 320 ms, separate from the periodic 12 ms off state and 4 ms on state in the display control processing (step S43) (see FIG. 142(A)).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 176(A), the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance control main processing shown in FIG. 150 every 2 ms. In other words, in this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 103 (command analysis processing), and executes performance control process processing, performance random number update processing, demo performance control processing, background display update processing, etc. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control to switch the LEDs that make up the first performance indicator light 152A and the second performance indicator light 152B on and off at 240 ms intervals, with one cycle being 480 ms (see FIG. 142(B)).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display control unit 123 requires a period of 33 ms to draw an image (image drawing period), and the period for updating the image displayed on the image display device 5 with a new image (image update period) is 33 ms. In other words, in this embodiment, the image displayed on the image display device 5 is updated approximately 30 times per second (30 FPS).

(Details of the performance mode)
Next, we will explain presentation modes A to D. As described above, presentation modes A and B are presentation modes that can be set when the game state is a normal state (low probability, low base state), presentation mode C is a presentation mode that is set when the game state is a time-saving state (low probability, high base state), and presentation mode D is a presentation mode that is set when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability, high base state). In each presentation mode in this embodiment, the display mode of the pending display and active display displayed on the image display device 5, and the execution period and whether or not various animations are executed differ.

For example, as shown in Figure 176 (B), the animation for the appearance of the hold display is executed over 660 ms (20 frames) in presentation mode A and presentation mode B, over 165 ms (5 frames) in presentation mode C, and over 99 ms (3 frames) in presentation mode D. Note that these animations for the appearance of the hold display may be shortened, as described below.

In addition, the pause animation for the pending display and active display is repeatedly executed in 2970 ms (90 frames) cycles in presentation modes A and B, but is not executed in presentation modes C and D.

The ending animation for the active display is executed at 165 ms (5 frames) in all presentation modes A to D.

(Display mode for each performance mode)
177(A1), in presentation mode A, decorative symbols for a low base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a first background image 001SG081 depicting a daytime cityscape is displayed as a background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in FIG. 177(A2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed by a scroll display (first scroll display) that moves linearly from top to bottom in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Specifically, each decorative symbol is displayed frame-in downward from the top edge of the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, or 5R, then moves downward in a straight line, and then frame-out downward from the bottom edge of the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, or 5R. Furthermore, when the preceding decorative symbol (e.g., the "3" decorative symbol) displayed frame-in passes the decorative symbol stopping position set in the vertical center of the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, or 5R, the succeeding decorative symbol (e.g., the "4" decorative symbol) is displayed frame-in and moves downward. In other words, while the preceding "3" decorative symbol passes its stopping position, the preceding "2" decorative symbol and the succeeding "4" decorative symbol are not visible, but after the preceding "3" decorative symbol passes its stopping position, the preceding "3" decorative symbol and the succeeding "4" decorative symbol become visible. In this way, the decorative symbols increase in number in the order "0," "1," "2," "3," etc., returning to "0" after "9," and then repeatedly updating and displaying "0" through "9." In other words, the decorative symbols are displayed in a loop of "0" through "9" in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, resulting in a scrolling display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, the display area 5S located in the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the number of reserved first special symbols, the number of reserved second special symbols, and small symbols, while the reserved symbol display area 5U and active symbol display area 5F located in the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 display reserved symbols corresponding to variable symbols whose execution is on hold and active symbols corresponding to variable symbols currently being executed. These reserved symbols and active symbols are displayed as cubes containing letters (for example, "P" for the active symbol, "W" for the first reserved symbol, "F" for the second reserved symbol, "L" for the third reserved symbol, and "II (Roman numeral 2)" for the fourth reserved symbol) (see Figure 191 (A)).

In this embodiment, each time a new reserved memory is generated, the character displayed in the new reserved display changes regularly from P → W → F → L → II → P → W... For example, if there are 0 reserved memories and four new reserved memories are generated consecutively during the variable display of special patterns, if the character in the active display is "P", then in the reserved memory display area 5U, the character in the first reserved display will be "W", the character in the second reserved display will be "F", the character in the third reserved display will be "L", and the character in the fourth reserved display will be "II". Furthermore, in this situation, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the variable display of a new special symbol ends, the reserved display containing the letter "W" shifts to the active display in active display area 5F, and in reserved memory display area 5U, the reserved display containing the letter "F" shifts to the display position of the first reserved display, the reserved display containing the letter "L" shifts to the display position of the second reserved display, and the reserved display containing the letter "II" shifts to the display position of the third reserved display. Furthermore, if a new reserved memory (fourth reserved memory) occurs in this state, a reserved display containing the letter "P" is displayed in the display position of the fourth reserved display in reserved memory display area 5U.

In this embodiment, as described above, the letters "P," "W," "F," "L," and "II" are displayed in the active display and the pending display in the order in which the pending memories were created. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if there is one or more pending memories when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from a power outage, the letters in the active display and the pending display may be displayed in a predetermined order (e.g., "P," "W," "F," "L," and "II") regardless of the order of letters in the active display and the pending display immediately before the power outage (e.g., "F," "L," "II," "P," "W" or "II," "P," "W," "F," and "L"). Note that the first special symbol pending memory count, second special symbol pending memory count, small symbol, pending memory display area 5U, and active display area 5F are displayed in common to all presentation modes, and therefore will not be described below.

As shown in Figure 177 (B1), in presentation mode B, decorative symbols for a low base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a second background image 001SG082 depicting a daytime wilderness landscape is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in Figure 177 (B2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed using a scrolling display (second scrolling display) that moves in a curved pattern from the back to the front of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In more detail, the left and right decorative patterns are displayed frame-in from the upper left side of the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the upper right side of the right decorative pattern display area 5R, moving closer to the center of the screen, then moving downward and away from the left and right sides of the screen, and then frame-out from the lower left side of the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the lower right side of the right decorative pattern display area 5R. The middle decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed from the back of the screen in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, moving closer to the front, and then frame-out.

In addition, when the leading decorative symbol (e.g., a "2" decorative symbol) displayed in frame passes the stop position of the decorative symbol, which is set in the vertical center of the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, the following decorative symbol (e.g., a "3" decorative symbol) is displayed in frame and moves toward the center of the screen. In other words, while the leading "2" decorative symbol passes near the stop position, the leading "2" decorative symbol and the following "3" decorative symbol are visible, but after the leading "2" decorative symbol passes the stop position, the following "3" decorative symbol and the following "4" decorative symbol become visible. In this way, the decorative symbols increase in number from "0," "1," "2," "3," etc., returning to "0" after "9," and the display is updated repeatedly from "0" to "9." In other words, the decorative symbols "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, resulting in a scrolling display of the decorative symbols.

The pending memory display area 5U and active display area 5F provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 display pending displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending, and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are currently being executed. These pending displays and active displays are displayed as regular octahedrons containing characters (for example, "P" for the active display, "W" for the first pending display, "F" for the second pending display, "L" for the third pending display, and "II" for the fourth pending display) (see Figure 191 (A)).

As shown in Figure 177 (C1), in presentation mode C, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a third background image 001SG083 depicting an evening cityscape is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in Figure 177 (C2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R by rotating around an axis of rotation facing up and down.

In more detail, the decorative symbols in presentation mode C have a first side and a second side, which is the opposite side of the first side, and the preceding decorative symbol (for example, a decorative symbol "3") is displayed on the first side. On the other hand, when the first side is facing forward, it is not possible to determine whether the subsequent decorative symbol (for example, a decorative symbol "4") is displayed on the second side.

The decorative symbols can also be rotated in one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from above), and as they rotate from the first side, to the second side, to the first side, to the second side, etc., the numbers increase in the order "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., returning to "0" after "9", and then repeatedly updating and displaying numbers from "0" to "9". In other words, the decorative symbols are displayed in a loop of "0" to "9" in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, thereby rotating the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, when the first side is rotated approximately 90 degrees or more from a state in which it faces forward and the second side is displayed, the second side displays a decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative "4") subsequent to the decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative "3") displayed on the first side. Next, although not specifically shown, when the second side 5b is rotated approximately 90 degrees or more from a state in which it faces forward and the first side is displayed, the first side displays a decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative "5") subsequent to the decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative "4") displayed on the second side 5b.

In addition, a right-hit notification image 001SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right hit" is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage the player to perform a right-hit operation, and a time-saving remaining display 001SG202 (in this example, the words "XX times remaining", where XX = 0 to 100) indicating the remaining number of times the time-saving control will be executed is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

The pending memory display area 5U and active display area 5F provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 display pending displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending, and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are currently being executed. These pending displays and active displays are displayed as spheres containing letters (for example, "P" for the active display, "W" for the first pending display, "F" for the second pending display, "L" for the third pending display, and "II" for the fourth pending display) (see Figure 191 (A)).

As shown in Figure 177 (D1), in presentation mode D, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a fourth background image 002SG084 depicting a nighttime cityscape is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in Figure 177 (D2), the decorative symbols are displayed in a scrolling display (third scrolling display) that moves linearly from top to bottom in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Specifically, each decorative symbol is displayed frame-in downward from the top edge of the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, or 5R, then moves downward in a straight line, and then frame-out downward from the bottom edge of the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, or 5R. Furthermore, when a leading decorative symbol (e.g., a "3" decorative symbol) displayed frame-in passes the decorative symbol stopping position set in the vertical center of the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, or 5R, the following decorative symbol (e.g., a "4" decorative symbol) is displayed frame-in and moves downward. In other words, while the leading "3" decorative symbol passes its stopping position, the leading "2" decorative symbol and the following "4" decorative symbol are not visible, but after the leading "3" decorative symbol passes its stopping position, the leading "3" decorative symbol and the following "4" decorative symbol become visible. In this way, the decorative symbols increase in number in the order of "0," "1," "2," "3," etc., returning to "0" after "9," and repeating the increase from "0" to "9." In other words, the decorative symbols from "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, resulting in a scrolling display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, a right-hit notification image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right hit" is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage the player to perform a right-hit operation.

The pending memory display area 5U and active display area 5F provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 display pending displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending, and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are currently being executed. These pending displays and active displays are displayed as spheres containing letters (for example, "P" for the active display, "W" for the first pending display, "F" for the second pending display, "L" for the third pending display, and "II" for the fourth pending display) just like in presentation mode C, but differ in that the color scheme inside these spheres is reversed from the color scheme of the letters they contain (see Figure 191 (A)).

(Appearance animation)
Next, the appearance animation of the pending display in each presentation mode will be described. Note that in this embodiment, "animation" refers to, for example, a dynamic display (moving image display) that gives movement by changing the visibility of at least a portion of the image compared to the image one frame earlier, and the visibility can be changed by changing at least one of the position, size, color, and transmittance of the displayed image from the image one frame earlier. In other words, "animation" includes not only displays that involve image displacement, such as "moving display,""rotatingdisplay,""enlargeddisplay,""reduceddisplay," and "frame-in display," but also displays that do not involve image displacement but change the display mode, such as color tone, such as "fade-out display" and "fade-in display."

In this embodiment, the "appearance animation" refers to an animation for displaying a hold display corresponding to the occurrence of a hold memory at a position corresponding to the number of hold memories in the hold memory display area 5U when a game ball enters the start winning slot and a new hold memory is generated. As shown in Figures 178 and 191 (B), if a start winning occurs in presentation mode A and a hold change presentation is not determined based on the start winning, i.e., if the hold display is displayed in white, the new hold display moves from a lower position on the front side of the hold memory display area 5U toward an upper position in the hold memory display area 5U based on the occurrence of the start winning. Then, when the hold display reaches the upper position of the hold memory display area 5U, it descends toward a position corresponding to the number of hold memories in the hold memory display area 5U, and is finally displayed at a position corresponding to the number of hold memories in the hold memory display area 5U. In other words, if a start winning occurs in presentation mode A and a hold change presentation is not determined based on the start winning, the hold display moves in a parabolic arc from a lower position on the front side of the hold memory display area 5U.

At this time, as shown in Figure 180, the pending display moves in a parabolic arc with its apex at a position higher than the active display and pending display that are already displayed, so the appearance animation of the white pending display in presentation mode A is an animation that is executed over a wider area than the dwell animation of the active display and pending display.

Also, as shown in Figure 180, in the appearance animation when a start winning occurs in presentation mode A and the execution of a hold change presentation is not decided based on that start winning, the hold display is displayed at a high transparency in the first frame image (for example, the transparency of the hold display in the first frame image is 90%), and as the appearance animation progresses, the transparency of the hold display gradually decreases to 80%, 60%, 40%, etc. Then, in the 20th frame image of the appearance animation, the hold display reaches its final state with a transparency of 0%, and is displayed at a position in the hold memory display area 5U according to the number of hold memories.

As shown in Figures 179 and 191 (B), when a start winning occurs in presentation mode A and a decision is made to execute a hold change presentation based on the start winning, i.e., when the hold display is displayed in blue or red, an effect is displayed at the top of the hold memory display area 5U based on the start winning, and the effect descends toward the hold memory display area 5U. At this time, the effect becomes invisible (transparency increases) as it descends, while a blue or red hold display gradually descends toward the hold memory display area 5U in place of the effect, decreasing its transparency. In other words, both the effect and the hold display descend toward the hold memory display area 5U. Then, when the effect completely disappears, the hold display is displayed at a position in the hold memory display area 5U according to the number of hold memories.

In addition, when it is decided to execute a hold change effect in effect mode A, the animation for the appearance of the hold display starts by displaying the hold display at a size larger than the active display or hold display already displayed, and gradually reduces the size of the hold display as it moves (descends).

Although not specifically shown, the blue and red hold displays and effects in presentation mode A start to appear from a higher position than the active and hold displays already displayed and move (down) toward the hold memory display area 5U, so the appearance animation of the blue and red hold displays in presentation mode A is an animation that is executed over a wider area than the dwell animation of the active and hold displays.

As shown in Figures 182 and 191 (B), when a start winning occurs in presentation mode B and it is determined that the hold change presentation will not be executed based on the start winning, i.e., when the hold display is displayed in white, an effect is displayed at the top of the hold memory display area 5U based on the start winning, and the effect descends toward the hold memory display area 5U. At this time, the effect becomes invisible (transparency increases) as it descends, while a white hold display gradually decreases in transparency in place of the effect and descends toward the hold memory display area 5U. In other words, both the effect and the hold display descend toward the hold memory display area 5U. Note that the effect in this appearance animation disappears five frames from the start of the animation, but the hold display continues to descend even after the effect disappears. Then, after a predetermined period of time (15 frames in this animation) has elapsed since the effect disappeared, the hold display is displayed in a position in the hold memory display area 5U according to the number of hold memories.

Although not specifically shown, the white hold display and effects in presentation mode B start displaying from a higher position than the active display and hold display already displayed and move (down) toward the hold memory display area 5U. Because of this movement, the appearance animation of the white hold display in presentation mode B is an animation that is executed over a wider area than the dwell animation of the active display and hold display.

As shown in Figures 183 and 191 (B), when a start winning occurs in presentation mode B and a decision is made to execute a hold change presentation based on that start winning, i.e., when the hold display is displayed in blue or red, just as when a decision is made to execute a hold change presentation in presentation mode A, an effect is displayed at the top of the hold memory display area 5U based on the start winning, and the effect descends toward the hold memory display area 5U. At this time, the effect becomes invisible (transparency increases) as it descends, while a blue or red hold display gradually descends toward the hold memory display area 5U in place of the effect, decreasing its transparency. In other words, both the effect and the hold display descend toward the hold memory display area 5U. Then, when the effect completely disappears, the hold display is displayed at a position in the hold memory display area 5U according to the number of hold memories.

In addition, when it is decided to execute a hold change effect in effect mode B, the animation for the hold display to appear is an animation in which the hold display starts out larger than the active display or hold display already displayed, and gradually reduces in size as the hold display moves (descends).

Although not specifically shown, the blue and red hold displays and effects in presentation mode A start to appear from a higher position than the active and hold displays already displayed and move (down) toward the hold memory display area 5U, so the appearance animation of the blue and red hold displays in presentation mode A is an animation that is executed over a wider area than the dwell animation of the active and hold displays.

As shown in Figures 179 and 183, when a blue or red hold display is displayed in presentation mode A or presentation mode B (when a hold change presentation is executed), an effect is displayed at the upper position of the hold memory display area 5U as the image of the first frame of the appearance animation, allowing the player to recognize that the hold display that will be displayed soon is the hold display that is the target of the hold change presentation, that is, that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when a white hold display is displayed. Furthermore, until the ninth frame of the appearance animation, the transparency of the hold display is set to a high level so that the player cannot tell whether the display color of the hold display is blue or red, making it possible to draw the player's attention to whether the display color of the hold display is blue or red, that is, how high the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 179 and 183, when a blue or red hold display is displayed in presentation mode A or presentation mode B (when a hold change presentation is executed), a common effect is displayed as the appearance animation in images of frames 1 to 19. In other words, a common effect is displayed in a total of four appearance animations: when a blue hold display is displayed in presentation mode A, when a red hold display is displayed in presentation mode A, when a blue hold display is displayed in presentation mode B, and when a red hold display is displayed in presentation mode B. Therefore, when the hold display is displayed in blue or red in presentation mode A or presentation mode B, the image data used as these appearance animations can be standardized, and the amount of data required to execute the appearance animation can be reduced.

As shown in Figures 184, 185, and 191, when a new start winning occurs in presentation mode C and presentation mode D, an effect is first displayed in a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U based on the start winning. The effect becomes invisible (transparency increases) as the appearance animation progresses. Then, in place of the effect, the pending display is enlarged and displayed with reduced transparency at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U. Then, when the effect has completely disappeared, the reduction in transparency and enlargement of the pending display also ends.

As shown in Figures 184 and 185, the appearance animation in presentation mode C takes a longer time from the start of the effect display until it disappears than the appearance animation in presentation mode D, and the time required from the start of the pending display display until it finishes expanding is also set to be longer.

(Stay animation)
Next, the pause animation of the reserved display and active display in each presentation mode will be explained. In this embodiment, the "pause animation" is an animation that includes an animation that operates the active display in the active display area 5F in a manner corresponding to the presentation mode (rotation in presentation mode A, rotation in presentation mode B, non-operation in presentation modes C and D) during the variable display of the special symbol, and an animation that operates the reserved display in the reserved memory display area 5U in a manner corresponding to the presentation mode (rotation in presentation mode A, rotation in presentation mode B, non-operation in presentation modes C and D) when there is one or more reserved memories.

As shown in Figures 186 (A) and 191 (B), the dwell animation in presentation mode A is an animation that rotates the pending display or active display clockwise around a vertical axis when viewed from the front. The dwell animation in presentation mode A is executed repeatedly, with one cycle consisting of 90 frames. Furthermore, in the dwell animation in presentation mode A, the text within the pending display or active display also rotates in accordance with the rotation of the pending display or active display.

Also, as shown in Figures 186 (B) and 191 (B), the dwell animation in presentation mode B is an animation that rotates the pending display or active display alternately clockwise and counterclockwise around a vertical axis when viewed from the front. The dwell animation in this presentation mode has one cycle of 90 frames, and in the first 45 frames, the pending display or active display rotates counterclockwise around a vertical axis when viewed from the front, and in the last 45 frames, the pending display or active display rotates clockwise around the vertical axis when viewed from the front. Also, in the dwell animation in presentation mode B, the text within the pending display or active display also rotates in accordance with the rotation of the pending display or active display.

In this embodiment, in presentation modes C and D, i.e., the time-saving state and the probability variable state, the time required for each variable display is set to be shorter than in the normal state in which the hold display and active display are displayed in presentation modes A and B. Therefore, the hold animation for the hold display and active display is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold animation for the hold display and active display may also be executed in presentation modes C and D.

In this embodiment, the dwell animation is an animation displayed at a cycle of 90 frames (2970 ms), or approximately 30 frames per second (frame rate of approximately 30 FPS). Because the dwell animation is viewed by the player for a longer period of time than the appearance animation or the end animation, the idea is to make the movement of the hold display appear more relaxed. Furthermore, creating the appearance animation at a frame rate of approximately 30 FPS not only makes it easier to develop gaming machines, but also makes it easier for developers to visualize the actual movement of the hold display. For these reasons, the dwell animation in this embodiment is created as an animation with a frame rate of 30 FPS, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the dwell animation may be an animation with a frame rate lower or higher than 30 FPS.

(Ending animation)
Next, the ending animation of the active display in each presentation mode will be explained. In this embodiment, the "ending animation" is an animation that ends the display of the active display corresponding to the variable display (makes the active display disappear from the active display area 5F) when the variable display of the special symbol ends (stops). As shown in Figures 187(A) to 187(D) and 191(B), the ending animation in each presentation mode is an animation executed in the active display area 5F, in which the transparency of the active display corresponding to the ended variable display gradually increases until it completely disappears from the active display area 5F in the fifth frame.

In this embodiment, the ending animation is exemplified as being executed in a common manner in each presentation mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. The execution period of the ending animation may be the same in each presentation mode, but different weekly rainfall animations may be executed in each presentation mode.

(shift animation)
Next, the shift animation of the reserved display in each performance mode will be explained. In this embodiment, the "shift animation" refers to an animation that moves the reserved display displayed at a position corresponding to the first reserved memory in the reserved memory display area 5U toward the active display area 5F in response to the start of variable display of a new special symbol, an animation that moves the reserved display displayed at a position corresponding to the second reserved memory in the reserved memory display area 5U toward the position corresponding to the first reserved memory in the reserved memory display area 5U in response to the start of variable display of a new special symbol, an animation that moves the reserved display displayed at a position corresponding to the third reserved memory in the reserved memory display area 5U toward the position corresponding to the second reserved memory in the reserved memory display area 5U in response to the start of variable display of a new special symbol, and an animation that moves the reserved display displayed at a position corresponding to the fourth reserved memory in the reserved memory display area 5U toward the position corresponding to the third reserved memory in the reserved memory display area 5U in response to the start of variable display of a new special symbol.

As shown in Figures 188, 190 and 191 (B), the shift animation is an animation that is executed when the active display in the active display area 5F disappears (the display ends) due to the end animation described above, and the pending display displayed in the position corresponding to the first pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U is simultaneously moved (shifted) to the active display area 5F as the next active display, the pending display displayed in the position corresponding to the second pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U is simultaneously moved to the position corresponding to the first pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U, the pending display displayed in the position corresponding to the third pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U is simultaneously moved to the position corresponding to the second pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U, and the pending display displayed in the position corresponding to the fourth pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U is simultaneously moved to the position corresponding to the third pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U.

As shown in FIG. 189, if a new pending memory is generated when there are zero pending memories and no variable display is being executed, the pending display (the pending display in its final state in the appearance animation) is first displayed at the position corresponding to the first pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U without any appearance animation being executed. From this state, the only shift animation executed is to move (shift) the pending display displayed at the position corresponding to the first pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F.

As shown in FIG. 181, the positions corresponding to the first pending memory in the active display area 5F and the pending memory display area 5U are separated by a length L1, and in the pending memory display area 5U, the positions corresponding to the first pending memory and the second pending memory, the positions corresponding to the second pending memory and the third pending memory, and the positions corresponding to the third pending memory and the fourth pending memory are each separated by a length L2 (L1 > L2) that is shorter than length L1. For this reason, in the shift animation of this embodiment, the pending display that shifts into the active display area 5F as the active display corresponding to the next variable display shifts faster than the other pending displays.

As shown in Figures 188, 189, and 190, in this embodiment, the shift animations for presentation mode A and presentation mode B have been explained, but the shift animations for presentation mode C and presentation mode D are the same as those for presentation mode A and presentation mode B, so explanations will be omitted. Furthermore, Figure 189 is an explanatory diagram of when a shift animation is executed when there is one reserved memory in presentation mode A, but the shift animation is also executed in the same way when there is one reserved memory in presentation mode B.

(Regarding the display mode of the hold display when a new hold memory occurs)
Next, the display mode of the reserved display when a new reserved memory is generated by the entry of a game ball into the start winning slot will be explained for each situation. Note that the following forms will be explained regarding whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is executed when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed when the game state is in the normal state (low probability low base state), the number of first special symbol reserved memories, and the reserved display based on these first special symbol reserved memories, but the following forms also apply to whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the number of second special symbol reserved memories, and the reserved display based on these second special symbol reserved memories when the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability variable state.

(Details of shortened appearance animation)
Next, we will explain how to shorten (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "skip") the animation of the reserved display. Note that the following explanation is mainly based on the animation of the effect pattern A, but the animations of the effect patterns B to D are omitted because they differ only in execution period.

As shown in Figures 192 (A) and 192 (B), if a new pending memory occurs when the number of pending memories is 1 or more, and it is decided not to execute the pending change presentation based on that pending memory, the presentation control CPU 120 will receive a pending memory number notification command based on the occurrence of that pending memory, causing the display control unit 123 to begin drawing the first frame of the appearance animation. Then, once the drawing of the first frame of the appearance animation is complete, the image display device 5 will begin displaying the appearance animation of the new pending display from the next image update timing.

Here, as shown in Figure 192 (A), if the period from the start of the appearance animation to the start of the next variable display is 660 ms or longer, images of all frames are displayed in which the pending display moves in a parabolic arc over 660 ms (20 frames) toward a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U, and the pending display is finally displayed in its final form at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U. Then, when the next variable display starts, the performance control CPU 120 receives a command based on the start of the variable display (variable display start command), causing the display control unit 123 to begin drawing the image of the first frame of the shift animation. Then, when drawing the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the shift animation begins to be displayed on the image display device 5 from the next image update timing.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 192 (B), if the period from the start of the appearance animation to the start of the next variable display is less than 660 ms, the image of an intermediate frame (the image of the 14th frame in Figure 192 (B)) will still be displayed as the appearance animation at the start of the next variable display. Also, when the next variable display starts, the performance control CPU 120 receives a command based on the start of the variable display (variable display start command), causing the display control unit 123 to begin drawing the image of the first frame of the shift animation. Then, when the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image display device 5 will begin displaying the shift animation at the next image update timing, replacing the appearance animation that had been running up until then.

At this time, images that were not displayed as part of the appearance animation (images from frames 16 to 20 in Figure 192 (B)) will not remain displayed, and the display of the shift animation will begin. The pending display displayed as the first frame of the shift animation is the same as the final state of the pending display displayed as part of the appearance animation (the pending display displayed as the 20th frame image at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U). For this reason, when a new variable display begins while an appearance animation is being performed, the player will see that the pending display that had been displayed moving in a parabolic arc as part of the previous appearance animation suddenly shifts to a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U, and that the shift animation is beginning to appear.

Note that Figures 192(A) and 192(B) explain the case where a new pending memory is generated when the number of pending memories is 1 or more, and a decision is made based on that pending memory not to execute a pending change effect. However, as shown in Figures 193(A) and 193(B), even when a new pending memory is generated when the number of pending memories is 1 or more, and a decision is made to execute a pending change effect based on that pending memory, similar to Figures 192(A) and 192(B) above, if the effect control CPU 120 does not receive a variable display start command during the execution period of the appearance animation, the appearance animation of the blue or red pending display is executed for 660 ms, but if the effect control CPU 120 receives a variable display start command during the execution period of the appearance animation, the appearance animation of the blue or red pending display is interrupted (skipped) and a shift animation of the blue or red pending display is started in place of the appearance animation.

Also, as shown in Figure 194 (A), when the number of pending memories is 0 and a new pending memory occurs just before the end of the pattern determination period for a variable display that has already ended, that is, within 33 ms before the pattern determination period ends (when the number of pending memories is 0 and a new pending memory occurs just before the next variable display), the performance control CPU 120 receives a pending memory number notification command based on the occurrence of the pending memory, and the display control unit 123 begins drawing the image of the first frame of the appearance animation. Then, when the drawing of the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is completed, the image display device 5 begins displaying the appearance animation of the new pending display from the next image update timing.

However, in the example shown in Figure 194 (A), variable display based on new reserved memory is started while the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is being drawn, so when the variable display is started, the performance control CPU 120 receives a command based on the start of the variable display (variable display start command), causing the display control unit 123 to start drawing the image of the first frame of the shift animation. Then, when the image drawing of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the display of the shift animation begins on the image display device 5 from the next image update timing.

For this reason, when the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is displayed on the image display device 5, the images of frames 2 to 20 of the appearance animation are not displayed, and instead the first pending display in the pending memory display area 5U (a pending display of the same form as the pending display displayed as the image of frame 20 of the appearance animation) is displayed as a shift animation image, shifting toward the active display area 5F as the active display of the variable display.

Also, as shown in Figure 194 (B), if the number of pending memories is 0 and a new pending memory occurs immediately after the end of the variable display pattern determination period that has already ended, in other words, if a new pending memory occurs within 33 ms after the end of the pattern determination period, the performance control CPU 120 will receive a pending memory number notification command and a variable display start command almost simultaneously based on the occurrence of the pending memory. This causes the display control unit 123 to prioritize drawing the shift animation image over the appearance animation image.

As a result, the image display device 5 does not display the appearance animation image, but instead displays the first hold display in the hold memory display area 5U as a shift animation image (a hold display of the same form as the hold display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation) as an image that shifts toward the active display area 5F as the active display of the variable display.

Also, as shown in Figure 195, if the number of pending memories is 0 and sufficient time has passed since the end of the variable display pattern determination period that has already ended, in other words, if a new pending memory occurs more than 33 ms after the end of the pattern determination period, the performance control CPU 120 will almost simultaneously receive a pending memory number notification command and a variable display start command based on the occurrence of the pending memory. This causes the display control unit 123 to prioritize drawing the shift animation image over the appearance animation image.

As a result, the image display device 5 does not display the appearance animation image, but instead displays the first hold display in the hold memory display area 5U as a shift animation image (a hold display of the same form as the hold display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation) as an image that shifts toward the active display area 5F as the active display of the variable display.

In a conventional pachinko gaming machine 1, if the number of reserved memories is N (3≧N≧1) and a new reserved memory (the N+1th reserved memory) is generated just before the variable display of a special symbol ends, the appearance animation of the reserved display corresponding to the new reserved memory will begin at a position corresponding to the N+1th reserved memory in the reserved memory display area 5U. If the variable display of a new special symbol begins while the appearance animation is being executed, a shift animation of the reserved display corresponding to the Nth reserved memory is executed in the reserved memory display area 5U. However, since the appearance animation of the reserved display corresponding to the new reserved memory is still in progress at this time, it is possible to either continue the appearance animation while shifting the reserved display corresponding to the new reserved memory (execute the shift animation) (hereinafter referred to as the first option), or not shift the display until the appearance animation is complete (hereinafter referred to as the second option).

Here, in the first proposal above, the movement of the pending display corresponding to the new pending memory and the appearance animation proceed simultaneously, which creates the problem that both the movement of the pending display corresponding to the new pending memory and the appearance animation are difficult for the player to see. Furthermore, in the second proposal above, a situation arises in which the pending display is not displayed between the pending display whose movement has already been completed and the pending display corresponding to the new pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U. Furthermore, if the new pending memory is the fourth pending memory, the pending display does not begin moving from the position corresponding to the fourth pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U until the appearance animation is complete. This could lead to the player mistakingly believing that the number of pending memories is still at the maximum of four, even though the variable display of a new special symbol has begun, which could cause the player to temporarily stop playing.

For the above reasons, in this invention, if a new pending memory occurs while the pending display appearance animation is running, the appearance animation is interrupted (skipped), thereby ensuring the visibility of the pending display shift animation and appearance animation while reducing the risk of the player misinterpreting the number of pending displays displayed in the pending memory display area 5U.

The following explains the display mode of the image display device 5, the lighting control of each reserve indicator, and the sending and receiving of commands according to the timing when a new reserved memory is generated, based on Figures 196 to 209. Note that Figures 196 to 209 illustrate a state in which the game state is normal, the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not being executed. However, for states in which the game state is time-saving or probability variable, or the number of first special symbol reserved memories is 0, and the variable display of the first special symbol is not being executed, only the target special symbol for variable display is different, and the display mode of the image display device 5, the lighting control of each reserve indicator, and the sending and receiving of commands are the same, so they will not be explained here.

(When a new reserved memory occurs during a variable display with 1 to 3 reserved memories, and the appearance animation starts more than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display)
196, when the number of first special symbol reserved memories is N (3≧N≧1) and a new first special symbol reserved memory occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved memories including the new first special symbol reserved memory. Also, the CPU 103 transmits a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 at the timing when the new reserved memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process as that which determined the occurrence of the new first special symbol reserved memory).

Then, when the variable display and the 500 ms pattern determination period based on that variable display end, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the number of reserved first special symbols and controls the illumination of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved symbols after the subtraction. Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), and, based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol, sends a first variable display start command and a first special symbol reserved symbol number notification command to the performance control CPU 120.

Since the execution cycle of interrupt control is 2 ms, the performance control CPU 120 receives the first reserved memory notification command up to 2 ms after the CPU 103 sends the command. When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command, it identifies the first special symbol reserved memory count from the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command and controls the illumination of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified first special symbol reserved memory count.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an appearance animation of the pending display based on the occurrence of a new first special symbol pending memory. When the drawing of the first frame image of the appearance animation is complete, the first frame image of the appearance animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the appearance animation begins. Note that the appearance animation begins by moving the pending display toward a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N+1 in the pending memory display area 5U.

Here, as shown in Figure 196, if the appearance animation starts when there is a period of 660 ms or more until the start of the next variable display, the drawing of the appearance animation image and the appearance animation display period will end before the start of the next variable display, and instead the drawing of the dwell animation image and the dwell animation of the pending display displayed by the appearance animation will begin.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start specification and the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command, it identifies the first special symbol reserved memory count from the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command and controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified first special symbol reserved memory count. The performance control CPU 120 also controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing a shift animation image in place of the dwell animation image. Once the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is complete, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

(When there are 1 to 3 reserved memories and a new reserved memory is generated, and the appearance animation starts less than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display)
Next, as shown in Figure 197, we will explain the case where a new first special chart reserved memory is generated when the number of first special chart reserved memories is N (3≧N≧1), and the appearance animation starts less than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display.

For example, if a new first special symbol reserved memory is generated during the pattern determination period after the variable display of the number of first special symbol reserved memories reaches N (3 ≥ N ≥ 1), the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved memories including the new first special symbol reserved memory. Furthermore, the CPU 103 transmits a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 at the time the new reserved memory is generated (the same game control timer interrupt process that determined the generation of the new first special symbol reserved memory).

Then, when the pattern determination period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the number of reserved first special symbols and controls the illumination of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved symbols after the subtraction. Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), and, based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol, sends a first variable display start command and a first special symbol reserved symbol number notification command to the performance control CPU 120.

Since the execution cycle of interrupt control is 2 ms, the performance control CPU 120 receives the first reserved memory notification command up to 2 ms after the CPU 103 sends the command. When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command, it identifies the first special symbol reserved memory count from the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command and controls the illumination of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified first special symbol reserved memory count.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing the appearance animation of the pending display based on the occurrence of a new first special chart pending memory.

Here, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start specification and the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command during the period in which the first frame image of the appearance animation is being drawn, it identifies the first special symbol reserved memory count from the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command and controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified first special symbol reserved memory count. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to begin drawing an image of the shift animation in place of the image of the appearance animation. Once the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is complete, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

In other words, in this case, a new variable display is started while the appearance animation is being executed, a shift animation is started in place of the appearance animation, and the new variable display is started within a period of less than 33 ms after the new pending memory is generated, so that the pending display begins to be displayed as the final state of the appearance animation at a position corresponding to the number N of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U without the appearance animation being executed. Also, in this case, the shift animation only needs to shift the pending display excluding the newly started pending display.

Here, the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start command and the first special chart reserved memory count notification command during the display period of the appearance animation, so the performance control CPU 120 controls the lighting of the first sub-reservation display 151A, and the display control unit 123 begins drawing the shift animation image. Once the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is complete, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

At this time, as shown in Figure 192 (B), the pending display appearance animation ends midway to the player, and the pending display suddenly appears in the pending memory display area 5U in the same format as the final format of the appearance animation, appearing as if a shift animation is being executed.

(When a new reserved memory occurs during the shift animation after the variable display of 1 to 3 reserved memories has finished and the next variable display has started)
Next, as shown in Figure 198, we will explain the case where the number of first special pattern reserved memories is N (3≧N≧1) and a new first special pattern reserved memory occurs during the shift animation after the variable display of the first special pattern has ended and the next variable display has begun.

First, when the symbol determination period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the number of reserved first special symbols and controls the illumination of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved symbols after the subtraction. Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), and based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol, sends a first variable display start command and a first special symbol reserved symbol number notification command to the performance control CPU 120.

When a new reserved memory is generated during execution of the variable display, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved memories, including the new first special symbol reserved memory. Furthermore, at the timing when the new reserved memory is generated (the same game control timer interrupt process as when the generation of the new first special symbol reserved memory was determined), the CPU 103 sends a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start command and the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command, it identifies the first special symbol reserved memory count from the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command and controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified first special symbol reserved memory count. The performance control CPU 120 also controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is complete, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

Here, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received a first special symbol reserved memory count notification command based on the occurrence of a new reserved memory while the shift animation is being executed, it identifies the number of first special symbol reserved memories from the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command and controls the illumination of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified number of first special symbol reserved memories. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to begin drawing an image of the appearance animation. Once the drawing of the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is complete, the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the appearance animation begins. Incidentally, the appearance animation begins by moving the reserved display toward a position according to the number of reserved memories N in the reserved memory display area 5U.

In this case, since the shift animation has already started before the appearance animation, there is a period during which the appearance animation and the shift animation are executed in parallel. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 192 (A), the appearance animation involves the pending display moving over a period of 660 ms, and the pending display is displayed in its final form at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N in the pending memory display area 5U.

(When a new reserved memory occurs within 33 ms after the variable display of 1 to 3 reserved memories has ended and the next variable display has started)
Next, as shown in Figure 199, we will explain the case where the number of first special pattern reserved memories is N (3≧N≧1) and after the variable display of the first special pattern has ended, a new first special pattern reserved memory occurs within 33 ms after the start of the next variable display.

First, when the symbol determination period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the number of reserved first special symbols and controls the illumination of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved symbols after the subtraction. Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), and based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol, sends a first variable display start command and a first special symbol reserved symbol number notification command to the performance control CPU 120.

When a new reserved memory is generated during execution of the variable display, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved memories, including the new first special symbol reserved memory. Furthermore, at the timing when the new reserved memory is generated (the same game control timer interrupt process as that which determined the generation of the new first special symbol reserved memory), the CPU 103 sends a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start command and the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command, it identifies the first special symbol reserved memory count from the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command and controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified first special symbol reserved memory count. The performance control CPU 120 also controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is complete, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

Here, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received a first special symbol reserved memory count notification command based on the occurrence of a new reserved memory, it identifies the number of first special symbol reserved memories from the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command and controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified number of first special symbol reserved memories. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the appearance animation. Once the drawing of the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is complete, the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the appearance animation begins. Incidentally, the appearance animation begins by moving the reserved display to a position according to the number N of reserved memories in the reserved memory display area 5U.

In this case, since the shift animation has already started before the appearance animation, there is a period during which the appearance animation and the shift animation are executed in parallel. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 192 (A), the appearance animation involves the pending display moving over a period of 660 ms, and the pending display is displayed in its final form at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N in the pending memory display area 5U.

(When a new reserved memory occurs less than 33 ms after the variable display of reserved memory numbers 1 to 3 has ended and the next variable display begins)
Next, as shown in Figure 200, we will explain the case where the number of first special pattern reserved memories is N (3≧N≧1) and after the variable display of the first special pattern has ended, a new first special pattern reserved memory occurs less than 33 ms before the start of the next variable display.

First, as shown in Figure 200, when a new first special symbol reserved memory is generated during the pattern determination period after the variable display of the number of first special symbol reserved memories reaches N (3 ≥ N ≥ 1), the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved memories including the new first special symbol reserved memory. Furthermore, at the time the new reserved memory is generated (the same game control timer interrupt process as when the generation of the new first special symbol reserved memory was determined), the CPU 103 sends a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120.

Then, if the pattern determination period ends within 33 ms from the occurrence of a new reserved memory, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the number of first special symbol reserved memories and controls the illumination of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved memories after the subtraction. Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the new special symbol (first special symbol), and, based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol, sends a first variable display start command and a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120.

Since the execution cycle of interrupt control is 2 ms, the performance control CPU 120 receives the first reserved memory notification command up to 2 ms after the CPU 103 sends the command. When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command, it identifies the first special symbol reserved memory count from the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command and controls the illumination of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified first special symbol reserved memory count.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing the appearance animation of the pending display based on the occurrence of a new first special chart pending memory.

Here, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start specification and the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command during the period in which the first frame image of the appearance animation is being drawn, it identifies the first special symbol reserved memory count from the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command and controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified first special symbol reserved memory count. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to begin drawing an image of the shift animation in place of the image of the appearance animation. Once the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is complete, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

In other words, in this case, by starting a new variable display within less than 33 ms after a new pending memory is generated, the pending display will begin displaying as the final state of the appearance animation at a position corresponding to the number N of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U without the appearance animation being executed. Also, in this case, the shift animation only needs to shift the pending display excluding the newly started pending display.

(If a new start win occurs while the number of reserved memories is variable and displayed as 4)
Next, as shown in Figure 201, we will explain what happens when a new start winning (winning into the first start winning slot) occurs while the number of first special chart reserved memories is variable displayed as four.

As shown in Figure 201, if a new start win occurs during a variable display where the number of first special symbol reserved memories is four, no new first special symbol reserved memories will be generated because the number of first special symbol reserved memories is already at the maximum of four. Therefore, when the variable display and symbol determination period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the number of first special symbol reserved memories and controls the lighting of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved memories after the subtraction (three). Furthermore, it starts the variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), and, based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol, sends a first variable display start command and a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start command and the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command, it identifies the first special symbol reserved memory count from the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command and controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified first special symbol reserved memory count (3). The performance control CPU 120 also controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is complete, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

(When a new reserved memory occurs during the shift animation of the next variable display after the number of reserved memories has changed to four)
Next, as shown in Figure 202, we will explain the case where a new first special pattern reserved memory occurs during the shift animation after the variable display of the first special pattern with four first special pattern reserved memories has ended and the next variable display has begun.

First, when the pattern determination period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the number of reserved first special symbols and controls the illumination of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved symbols (3) after the subtraction. Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), and based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol, sends a first variable display start command and a first special symbol reserved symbol number notification command to the performance control CPU 120.

When a new reserved memory is generated during execution of the variable display, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved memories, including the new first special symbol reserved memory. Furthermore, at the timing when the new reserved memory is generated (the same game control timer interrupt process as that which determined the generation of the new first special symbol reserved memory), the CPU 103 sends a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start command and the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command, it identifies the first special symbol reserved memory count from the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command and controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified first special symbol reserved memory count (3). The performance control CPU 120 also controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is complete, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

Here, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received a first special symbol reserved memory count notification command based on the occurrence of a new reserved memory while the shift animation is being executed, it identifies the number of first special symbol reserved memories from the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command and controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified number of first special symbol reserved memories (4). The performance control CPU 120 also controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to begin drawing an image of the appearance animation. Once the drawing of the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is complete, the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the appearance animation begins. Incidentally, the appearance animation begins by moving the reserved display toward a position in the reserved memory display area 5U according to the number of reserved memories, which is four.

In this case, since the shift animation has already started before the appearance animation, there is a period during which the appearance animation and the shift animation are executed in parallel. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 192 (A), the appearance animation involves the pending display moving over a period of 660 ms, and the pending display is finally displayed at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories, which is four, in the pending memory display area 5U.

(If a new start win occurs during the pattern determination period after the pending memory number has changed to 4)
Next, as shown in Figure 203, we will explain what happens when a new start winning (winning into the first start winning slot) occurs during the pattern determination period after the number of first special pattern reserved memories has been variable displayed as four.

As shown in Figure 203, during the pattern determination period after the variable display of the first special symbol reserved memory count of four, the state of four first special symbol reserved memory count is maintained. Furthermore, since the maximum number of first special symbol reserved memory counts is four, even if a new start winning (a win at the first start winning slot) occurs during the pattern determination period, a new first special symbol reserved memory will not be generated. Therefore, when the pattern determination period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the first special symbol reserved memory count and controls the illumination of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved memories after the subtraction (three). Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), and, based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol, sends a first variable display start command and a first special symbol reserved memory count notification command to the performance control CPU 120.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start command and the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command, it identifies the first special symbol reserved memory count from the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command and controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified first special symbol reserved memory count (3). The performance control CPU 120 also controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is complete, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

(When a new reserved memory occurs within 33 ms of the start of the next variable display after the number of reserved memories has reached four.)
Next, as shown in Figure 204, we will explain the case where a new first special chart reserved memory occurs within 33 ms after the start of the next variable display after the variable display of four first special chart reserved memories has ended.

First, when the pattern determination period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the number of reserved first special symbols and controls the illumination of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved symbols (3) after the subtraction. Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), and based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol, sends a first variable display start command and a first special symbol reserved symbol number notification command to the performance control CPU 120.

When a new reserved memory is generated during execution of the variable display, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved memories (four) including the new first special symbol reserved memory. Furthermore, at the timing when the new reserved memory is generated (the same game control timer interrupt process as when the generation of the new first special symbol reserved memory was determined), the CPU 103 sends a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start command and the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command, it identifies the first special symbol reserved memory count from the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command and controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified first special symbol reserved memory count (3). The performance control CPU 120 also controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is complete, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

Here, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received a first special symbol reserved memory count notification command based on the occurrence of a new reserved memory, it identifies the number of first special symbol reserved memories from the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command and controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified number of first special symbol reserved memories (four). The performance control CPU 120 also controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to begin drawing an image of the appearance animation. Once the drawing of the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is complete, the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the appearance animation begins. Incidentally, the appearance animation begins by moving the reserved display toward a position in the reserved memory display area 5U according to the number of reserved memories, which is four.

In this case, since the shift animation has already started before the appearance animation, there is a period during which the appearance animation and the shift animation are executed in parallel. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 192 (A), the appearance animation involves the pending display moving over a period of 660 ms, and the pending display is finally displayed at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories, which is four, in the pending memory display area 5U.

(When a new reserved memory occurs during a variable display with 0 reserved memories, and the appearance animation starts more than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display)
Next, as shown in Figure 205, we will explain the case where a new reserved memory occurs during a variable display where the number of reserved memories for the first special chart is 0, and the appearance animation starts more than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display.
First, as shown in Fig. 205, when a new first special symbol reserved memory occurs while the number of first special symbol reserved memories is variably displayed as 0, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved memories (1) including the new first special symbol reserved memory. Also, the CPU 103 transmits a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 at the timing when the new reserved memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process as that which determined the occurrence of the new first special symbol reserved memory).

Then, when the variable display and the 500 ms pattern determination period based on that variable display end, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the number of reserved first special symbols and controls the illumination of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved symbols after the subtraction (0). Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), and, based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol, sends a first variable display start command and a first special symbol reserved symbol number notification command to the performance control CPU 120.

Since the execution cycle of interrupt control is 2 ms, the performance control CPU 120 receives the first reserved memory notification command up to 2 ms after the CPU 103 sends the command. When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command, it identifies the first special symbol reserved memory count from the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command and controls the illumination of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified first special symbol reserved memory count (1).

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an appearance animation of the pending display based on the occurrence of a new first special symbol pending memory. When the drawing of the first frame image of the appearance animation is complete, the first frame image of the appearance animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the appearance animation begins. Note that the appearance animation begins by moving the pending display towards a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U, one.

Here, as shown in Figure 205, if the appearance animation starts when there is a period of 660 ms or more until the start of the next variable display, the drawing of the appearance animation image and the appearance animation display period will end before the start of the next variable display, and instead, the drawing of the dwell animation image and the dwell animation of the pending display displayed by the appearance animation will begin.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start specification and the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command, it identifies the first special symbol reserved memory count from the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command and controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified first special symbol reserved memory count (0). The performance control CPU 120 also controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing a shift animation image in place of the dwell animation image. Once the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is complete, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

(When the number of reserved memories is 0 and a new reserved memory is generated, and the appearance animation starts less than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display)
Next, as shown in Figure 206, we will explain the case where a new first special chart reserved memory is generated when the number of first special chart reserved memories is 0, and the appearance animation starts less than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display.

For example, if a new first special symbol reserved memory occurs during the pattern determination period after the variable display ends when the number of first special symbol reserved memories is 0, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved memories (1) including the new first special symbol reserved memory. Furthermore, the CPU 103 sends a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 at the time the new reserved memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process that determined the occurrence of the new first special symbol reserved memory).

Then, when the symbol determination period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the number of reserved first special symbols and controls the illumination of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved symbols after the subtraction (0). Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), and, based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol, sends a first variable display start command and a first special symbol reserved symbol number notification command to the performance control CPU 120.

Since the execution cycle of interrupt control is 2 ms, the performance control CPU 120 receives the first reserved memory notification command up to 2 ms after the CPU 103 sends the command. When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command, it identifies the first special symbol reserved memory count from the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command and controls the illumination of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified first special symbol reserved memory count (1).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing the appearance animation of the pending display based on the occurrence of a new first special chart pending memory.

Here, the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start command and the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command during the display period of the appearance animation, so the performance control CPU 120 controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the first special symbol reserved memory count (0), and the display control unit 123 begins drawing the shift animation image. Once the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is complete, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

At this time, as shown in Figure 192 (B), the pending display appearance animation ends midway to the player, and the pending display suddenly appears in the pending memory display area 5U in the same format as the final format of the appearance animation, appearing as if a shift animation is being executed.

(If a new reserved memory occurs within 33 ms after the end of the pattern determination period for a variable display with 0 reserved memories)
Next, as shown in Figure 207, we will explain the case where a new first special pattern reserved memory occurs less than 33 ms after the end of the pattern determination period for the variable display of the first special pattern when the number of first special pattern reserved memories is 0.

First, when a new first special symbol reserved memory is generated less than 33 ms after the symbol determination period, the CPU 103 does not control the lighting of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved memories including the new first special symbol reserved memory, but instead adds 1 to the number of first special symbol reserved memories and then subtracts 1 from the number of first special symbol reserved memories, and starts the variable display of the new special symbol (first special symbol). Based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol, the CPU 103 sends a first variable display start command and a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start command and the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command, it does not control the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the first special symbol reserved memory count, but instead controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing the shift animation image. Once the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is complete, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

In other words, in this case, the pending display is not moved (appearance animation) toward a position corresponding to one pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U, but rather the pending display begins displaying as the final mode of the appearance animation at a position corresponding to one pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U. Then, immediately after display begins, the pending display is moved (shifted) toward the active display area 5F.

(If a new reserved memory occurs within 33 ms of the end of the pattern determination period for a variable display with 0 reserved memories)
Next, as shown in Figure 208, we will explain the case where a new first special pattern reserved memory occurs less than 33 ms until the end of the pattern determination period for the variable display of a first special pattern when the number of first special pattern reserved memories is 0.

First, as shown in FIG. 208, if a new first special symbol reserved memory occurs during the pattern determination period after the variable display ends when the number of first special symbol reserved memories is 0, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved memories (1) including the new first special symbol reserved memory. Furthermore, at the timing when the new reserved memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process as when the occurrence of the new first special symbol reserved memory was determined), the CPU 103 sends a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120.

Then, if the pattern determination period ends within 33 ms from the occurrence of a new reserved memory, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the number of first special symbol reserved memories and controls the illumination of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved memories after the subtraction (0). Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the new special symbol (first special symbol), and, based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol, sends a first variable display start command and a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120.

Since the execution cycle of interrupt control is 2 ms, the performance control CPU 120 receives the first reserved memory notification command up to 2 ms after the CPU 103 sends the command. When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command, it identifies the first special symbol reserved memory count from the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command and controls the illumination of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified first special symbol reserved memory count (1).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing the appearance animation of the pending display based on the occurrence of a new first special chart pending memory.

Here, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start specification and the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command during the period in which the first frame image of the appearance animation is being drawn, it identifies the first special symbol reserved memory count from the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command and controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified first special symbol reserved memory count. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to begin drawing an image of the shift animation in place of the image of the appearance animation. Once the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is complete, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

In other words, in this case, the new variable display begins less than 33 ms after the new pending memory is generated, and the pending display begins displaying as the final state of the appearance animation at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories (1) in the pending memory display area 5U without the appearance animation being executed. Also, in this case, the shift animation shifts the newly displayed pending display toward the active display area 5F.

(When a new reserved memory occurs at a timing when 33 ms or more have passed since the end of the pattern determination period of the variable display with 0 reserved memories)
Next, as shown in Fig. 209, a case will be described in which a new first special symbol reserved memory occurs at a timing when 33 ms or more have passed since the end of the pattern determination period for the variable display of the first special symbol when the number of first special symbol reserved memories is 0. First, as shown in Fig. 209, when a new first special symbol reserved memory occurs at a timing when 33 ms or more have passed since the end of the pattern determination period for the variable display when the number of first special symbol reserved memories is 0, the CPU 103 adds 1 to the number of first special symbol reserved memories and then subtracts 1 from the number of first special symbol reserved memories, and starts the variable display of the new special symbol (first special symbol) without executing the lighting control of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved memories (1) including the new first special symbol reserved memory, and based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol, a first variable display start designation and a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command are transmitted to the performance control CPU 120.

As mentioned above, the variable display of the first special pattern in this embodiment involves lighting one of the eight LEDs that make up the first special pattern display device 4A for 40 ms, then changing the LED to be lit at 40 ms intervals, with one cycle (320 ms) being repeated until all eight LEDs have been lit.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start command and the first special symbol reserved memory count notification command, it starts the variable display of the sub-symbols while not controlling the lighting of the first sub-reserved indicator 151A according to the first special symbol reserved memory count, and controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

In other words, in this case, the pending display (appearance animation) is not moved toward a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U, but the pending display begins to be displayed as the final state of the appearance animation at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U.

As mentioned above, the variable display of the sub-patterns in this embodiment involves repeatedly turning on and off the LEDs that make up the first display lamp 152A at 240 ms intervals (one cycle: 480 ms).

In other words, in this embodiment, when the number of first special symbol reserved memories is 0 and variable display is not being executed, and a demo movie display is being displayed as a guide display for adjusting the effects, as shown in Figures 210(A) to 210(C), when a new reserved memory is generated by a game ball entering the first start port, variable display of the first special symbol is first initiated. At this time, the CPU 103 updates the count value of the number of first special symbol reserved memories from 0 to 1 in the start port switch passing process, and also updates the count value of the number of first special symbol reserved memories from 1 to 0 in the normal special symbol processing executed in the same interrupt as the start port switch passing process, so the LED constituting the first reserve indicator 25A does not light up (it does not light up in a manner indicating that the number of first special symbol reserved memories is 1).

Furthermore, during the start port switch passing process, the CPU 103 sends to the performance control CPU 120 a pending memory count notification command indicating that the number of first special symbol pending memories is 1. However, during the special symbol buffer shift process, which is executed in the same interrupt as the start port switch passing process, the CPU 103 sends a pending memory count notification command indicating that the number of first special symbol pending memories is 0. Therefore, the performance control CPU 120 receives, in the same interrupt, both the pending memory count notification command indicating that the number of first special symbol pending memories is 1 and the pending memory count notification command indicating that the number of first special symbol pending memories is 0. As a result, the LED constituting the first sub-pending indicator 151A does not light up (it does not light up in a manner indicating that the number of first special symbol pending memories is 1), and further, the display of the number of first special symbol pending memories in the display area 5S is not updated.

Then, as shown in Figure 210 (C), the CPU 103 sets special pattern display control data for variable display of special patterns in the special pattern display control process in the output buffer for setting special pattern display control data (setting each bit of output port DG1 shown in Figure 145 to "1" or "0"), thereby starting the variable display of special patterns.

Next, as shown in Figures 211(D) to 211(F), when the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received a variation pattern designation command or a first variable display start designation, it begins controlling the lighting and extinguishing of the LEDs that make up the first performance indicator light 152A as variable displays of the sub-pattern. The variation pattern designation command and the first variable display start designation are commands that the CPU 103 sends to the performance control CPU 120 during the variation pattern setting process.

When 33 ms to 66 ms have elapsed since the performance control CPU 120 received the variable pattern specification command or the first variable display start specification, the demo movie display fades out and then disappears, and the normal background image and decorative pattern are displayed. In addition, the pending display corresponding to the variable display is displayed in a completed state in the pending memory display area 5U without going through the appearance animation (see Figure 211 (E)).

Next, as shown in Figure 211 (F), the pending display begins moving to the active display area 5F as a shift animation in the pending memory display area 5U. Also, as the shift animation begins, the variable display of small symbols begins, and the scrolling display of decorative symbols begins. While not shown in detail, once the scrolling display begins, the decorative symbols begin to move downward at a slow speed, and then as the moving display speed increases to medium and high speeds, the transparency gradually increases and the symbols fade out.

In this embodiment, an example has been given in which the scrolling display of the decorative symbols begins after the variable display of the small symbols has begun, but the present invention is not limited to this. The decorative symbols may not start scrolling until the shift animation ends after the variable display of the small symbols has begun, and instead the decorative symbols may start changing (not shown). The change start action may be, for example, a pre-action in which a character displayed in the decorative symbols moves, or the decorative symbols move upwards before moving downwards.

As shown in Figures 212(G) to 212(I), when a new reserved memory is generated by the game ball entering the first start port during the variable display of the first special symbol following Figures 210 and 211, the CPU 103 updates the first special symbol reserved memory count value to 1 during the start port switch passing process. Note that, since the CPU 103 does not update the first special symbol reserved memory count value to 0 during the same interrupt as the start port switch passing process, the CPU 103 sets bit 0 of output port DG3 shown in Figure 145 to 0 and bit 3 to 1 during the display process. This causes the LEDs constituting the first reserved indicator 25A to start lighting up (in a manner indicating that the number of first special symbol reserved memories is 1) based on the generation of a new reserved memory. At this time, the CPU 103 also sends a first special symbol reserved memory count notification command to the performance control CPU 120, indicating that the number of first special symbol reserved memories is 1.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that it has received a first special symbol reserved memory count notification command from CPU 103 corresponding to the number of first special symbol reserved memories being one, it lights up the LEDs constituting the first sub-reserved indicator 151A in a manner corresponding to the number of first special symbol reserved memories being one. Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the number of first special symbol reserved memories in the display area 5S to "1." In other words, in this embodiment, when a new reserved memory is generated, the display of the number of first special symbol reserved memories in the display area 5S is updated at a timing later than the timing at which the LED of the first reserve indicator 25A is lit. Therefore, the player can visually confirm the display of the number of first special symbol reserved memories in the display area 5S after confirming that a game ball has won, making it easy to understand that the number of reserved memories has increased.

Then, as shown in Figures 213 (J) to (L), the image display device 5 starts an animation of the pending display appearing in response to the newly generated pending memory.

As described above, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 216, it is possible to execute a hold change effect, a win flash effect, a button vibration effect, and an appearance animation based on the occurrence of a new hold memory. Of these, the hold change effect is an effect that is executed from the occurrence of a hold memory until the timing when the variable display of the pre-read target (variable display based on that hold memory) stops, the win flash effect is an effect that is executed from the occurrence of a hold memory until the timing when the variable display of the pre-read target (variable display based on that hold memory) reaches its target, the button vibration effect is an effect that is executed for a certain period of time (e.g., 3000 ms) from the occurrence of a hold memory, and the appearance animation is an effect that is executed for up to 600 ms from the occurrence of a hold memory.

Each of these effects can be executed regardless of the effect mode, from effect mode A to effect mode D. Furthermore, the hold change effect, the win flash effect, and the button vibration effect are all effects that will not be interrupted even if the effect control CPU 120 receives a variable display start command, while the appearance animation is an effect that is interrupted when the effect control CPU 120 receives a variable display start command.

In other words, the pending change effect, winning flash effect, and button vibration effect are effects that will be executed to the end without being interrupted by the effect control CPU 120 receiving a variable display start command, etc., regardless of whether the timing at which a new pending memory occurs during the variable display of special symbols with a pending memory count of N (3≧N≧1) is more than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display, which is the display execution period of the appearance animation, or less than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display, which is the display execution period of the appearance animation, or whether the timing at which the variable display of special symbols with a pending memory count of N has ended is within 330 ms from the start of the shift animation, which is the display execution period of the shift animation.

In the above, as shown in Figure 210(B), an example of presentation operation was described in which a new reserved memory is generated by a game ball entering the first start slot when the number of first reserved memory is 0, the variable display is not being executed, and a demo movie display is being displayed as a guide display for adjusting the presentation, as shown in Figure 210(B).However, the same applies to presentation operation examples in which a new reserved memory is generated by a game ball entering the first start slot when the number of first reserved memory is 0, the variable display is not being executed, and the menu guide display and volume/light intensity guide display are being displayed during the period before the demo movie display starts, as shown in Figures 214(A) to 214(C) and 215(D) to 215(E).

(Mode of superimposed display of hold display)
Next, based on Figure 220, we will explain the reserved display in performance modes C and D when a new first special pattern reserved memory occurs within 33 ms after the pattern determination period for the variable display of the first special pattern when the number of first special pattern reserved memories is four has ended.

As shown in Figure 220 (A), during the variable display, the active display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and the reserved display is displayed in the first to fourth display positions in the reserved memory display area 5U. Next, as shown in Figure 220 (B), when the variable display ends, an animation for ending the active display is executed during the pattern determination period, and the active display fades out and disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 220(C), when a new variable display corresponding to the hold display displayed in the first display position in the hold memory display area 5U begins, a shift animation display begins in which the hold display displayed in the first display position in the hold memory display area 5U moves to the active display area 5F as the next active display, the hold display displayed in the second display position in the hold memory display area 5U moves to the first display position in the hold memory display area 5U, the hold display displayed in the third display position in the hold memory display area 5U moves to the second display position in the hold memory display area 5U, and the hold display displayed in the fourth display position in the hold memory display area 5U moves to the third display position in the hold memory display area 5U.

Here, as shown in Figure 220 (D), if a new pending memory occurs immediately after a new variable display is started, for example, before 33 ms have elapsed since the new variable display was started, an animation of the pending display corresponding to the new pending memory will begin appearing at the fourth display position in the pending memory display area 5U.

Here, the shift animation of the fourth hold display moving towards the display position of the third hold display in the hold memory display area 5U is drawn in the third hold display image drawing area, while the appearance animation of the new hold display appearing at the fourth display position in the hold memory display area 5U is drawn in the fourth hold display image drawing area, which has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the third hold display image drawing area.

In other words, when a hold display that is already displayed in the fourth display position in the hold memory display area 5U and has begun to move toward the third display position is superimposed on a hold display that is newly displayed in the fourth display position in the hold memory display area 5U, the hold display that is the subject of the shift animation is displayed with priority over the hold display that is the subject of the appearance animation, so it is possible to recognize that the hold display has moved from the fourth display position to the third display position due to the shift animation.

Then, as shown in Figure 220 (E), as the hold display moves from the fourth display position to the third display position due to the shift animation, the overlapping area with the new hold display becomes smaller, and the appearance animation of the new hold display becomes visible.

In addition, Figure 220 explains the mode of the reserved display when a new first special symbol reserved memory occurs within 33 ms from the end of the pattern determination period for the variable display of the first special symbol when the number of first special symbol reserved memories is four in presentation modes C and D. However, as shown in Figure 221, the mode of the reserved display when a new first special symbol reserved memory occurs within 33 ms from the end of the pattern determination period for the variable display of the first special symbol when the number of first special symbol reserved memories is three in presentation modes C and D differs only in the display position where the new reserved display is displayed; other display modes are essentially the same, so a detailed description will be omitted.

In addition, although not specifically shown, in presentation modes C and D, if a new first special symbol reserved memory occurs within 33 ms after the pattern determination period for the variable display of first special symbols when the number of first special symbol reserved memories is one or two has ended, the only difference is the display position where the new reserved display is displayed; other display modes are essentially the same, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, in performance modes C and D, the reserved display will be explained based on Figure 222 when the pattern determination period for the variable display of a first special pattern with three reserved first special patterns has ended and a new reserved first special pattern memory is generated less than 33 ms before the start of the next variable display.

As shown in Figure 222 (A), during the variable display, the active display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and the reserved display is displayed in the first to third display positions in the reserved memory display area 5U. Next, as shown in Figure 222 (B), when the variable display ends, an animation for ending the active display is executed during the pattern determination period, and the active display fades out and disappears.

Here, if a new first special symbol reserved memory occurs just before the end of the symbol determination period, that is, less than 33 ms before a new variable display corresponding to the reserved display displayed in the first display position in the reserved memory display area 5U begins, the reserved display corresponding to the new first special symbol reserved memory will not be displayed until the new variable display begins.

Then, as shown in Figure 222 (C), a shift animation display is initiated in which the hold display displayed in the first display position in the hold memory display area 5U moves to the active display area 5F as the next active display, the hold display displayed in the second display position in the hold memory display area 5U moves to the first display position in the hold memory display area 5U, and the hold display displayed in the third display position in the hold memory display area 5U moves to the second display position in the hold memory display area 5U. At the same time, a hold display corresponding to the new hold memory is displayed in the third display position in the hold memory display area 5U. In this case, the hold display is displayed in its final form in the appearance animation without executing the appearance animation.

Here, the shift animation of the third hold display moving towards the display position of the third hold display in the hold memory display area 5U is drawn in the second hold display image drawing area, while the new hold display appearing at the third display position in the hold memory display area 5U is drawn in the third hold display image drawing area, which has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the second hold display image drawing area.

In other words, when a hold display that is already displayed in the third display position in the hold memory display area 5U and has begun to move toward the second display position is superimposed on a hold display that is newly displayed in the third display position in the hold memory display area 5U, the hold display that is the subject of the shift animation is displayed with priority over the newly appearing hold display, so it is possible to recognize that the hold display has moved from the third display position to the second display position due to the shift animation.

Then, as shown in Figures 222 (D) and (E), as the hold display moves from the third display position to the second display position through the shift animation, the overlapping area with the new hold display becomes smaller, and the new hold display becomes visible.

Although embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention are also included in the present invention.

For example, in the above embodiment, the mode of appearance animation was described when one game ball enters one of the start ports and a new reserved memory is generated when the number of reserved memories is N (3≧N≧1) and a variable display is being executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example, as shown in FIG. 223, when two game balls consecutively enter the start ports, the first and second new reserved memories are generated just before the end of the variable display, and if the appearance animation of the reserved display based on these reserved memories starts less than 600 ms before the start of the next variable display, the appearance animation is executed at a position corresponding to the number of reserved memories N+1 in the reserved memory display area 5U based on the first reserved memory, and the reserved display is changed to the final mode based on the presentation control CPU 120 receiving the variable display start command, and the appearance animation is executed at a position corresponding to the number of reserved memories N+2 in the reserved memory display area 5U based on the second reserved memory, and the reserved display is changed to the final mode based on the presentation control CPU 120 receiving the variable display start command.

Furthermore, if the first and second new pending memories occur immediately after the start of the variable display, and the appearance animation of the pending display based on these pending memories begins more than 600 ms before the start of the next variable display, the appearance animation is executed based on the first pending memory at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N+1 in the pending memory display area 5U, and the pending display is changed to its final state based on the end of the appearance animation, and the appearance animation is executed based on the second pending memory at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N+2 in the pending memory display area 5U, and the pending display is changed to its final state based on the end of the appearance animation.

Furthermore, if the first new pending memory occurs just before the end of the variable display, and the pending display appearance animation based on that pending memory begins less than 600 ms before the start of the next variable display, and the second new pending memory occurs after the start of the next variable display, the appearance animation is executed based on the first pending memory at a position corresponding to the number N+1 pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U, and the pending display is changed to its final state based on the performance control CPU 120 receiving a variable display start command, and the appearance animation is executed based on the second pending memory at a position corresponding to the number N+1 pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U, and the pending display is changed to its final state based on the end of the appearance animation.

In addition, in the above embodiment, when there are zero pending memories and a new pending memory occurs when the variable display of special symbols is not being executed, a pending display based on the new pending memory is first displayed in the pending memory display area 5U, and the pending display is shifted (activated) to the active display area 5F by executing a shift animation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example, as shown in Figures 224 (A) and 224 (B), when there are zero pending memories and a new pending memory occurs when the variable display of special symbols is not being executed, the pending display may be designated to be displayed directly in the active display area 5F as the active display of the variable display, without executing the appearance animation or shift animation.

In addition, in the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 176 (B), an example was given in which the display period for one cycle of the pause animation for the hold display is 2970 ms, the display period for the shift animation for the hold display is 330 ms, and the display period for the end animation for the active display is 165 ms. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a variant, the display period for one cycle of the pause animation for the hold display may be an integer number of seconds (for example, 3000 ms, 6000 ms, etc.).

In addition, while the above embodiment exemplifies a configuration in which the display periods for both the hold display shift animation and the active display end animation are less than 1000 ms, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display period for at least one of the hold display shift animation and the active display end animation may be 1000 ms or longer.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but this is not limited to spherical gaming media and may also be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which a jackpot gaming state in which gaming balls are able to enter the jackpot entry port and more prize balls are paid out than when gaming balls enter the starting entry port or the normal entry port 10 is considered to be an advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a time-saving state or a probability variable state may also be considered to be an advantageous state as long as it is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as making it easier for gaming balls to enter the entry port than in a normal state or making it easier to control the game into a jackpot gaming state.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines and slot machines that contain enclosed gaming media and award points based on winning. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows games to be played, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and can also be a general gaming machine.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 2 Game board 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 9 Game effect lamp 11 Main board 12 Performance control board 31B Push button 31B
32 Movable body 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a transmitting means for transmitting start information corresponding to a variable display pattern including a specific variable display pattern;
receiving means for receiving the start information;
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
Reserved storage means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
A movable body and
a movable body control means,
the movable body control means is capable of performing a confirmation operation control to operate the movable body by an operation to confirm that the movable body operates normally when power is turned on,
the effect execution means is capable of performing an action prompting effect that prompts a player to take an action during variable display based on the specific variable display pattern;
The specific variable display pattern is
A first part until the action prompting performance is executed;
A second part is executed after the first part, and a result of the action prompting performance is notified.
The invention comprises:
The movable body control means
The confirmation operation control can be performed using a first operation control pattern that operates the movable body for a first period and a second operation control pattern that operates the movable body for a second period that is shorter than the first period,
a first movable body control pattern for performing the confirmation operation control using the first operation control pattern when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display, and then the power is turned on and the receiving means does not receive start information corresponding to the specific variable display pattern;
a second movable body control pattern that, when a power outage occurs immediately before the end of a predetermined variable display and then the power is turned on and the receiving means receives start information corresponding to the specific variable display pattern , controls the movable body so that the confirmation operation control is performed with the second operation control pattern during execution of the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern and the confirmation operation control is completed before the second part is started;
The confirmation operation control can be performed in a plurality of patterns including
The performance execution means
During the variable display, it is possible to execute a movable body effect using the movable body, and to display an effect display corresponding to the movable body effect,
When the variable display that executes the movable body performance is started while the confirmation operation control is being performed, the confirmation operation control is continued, and the movable body performance is restricted during the confirmation operation control to display the effect display,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information about variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
When the variable display is completed, the game control means can execute the next variable display if there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means
When the reserved memory is stored, a reserved memory performance can be executed,
When the reserved memory is stored, one of a plurality of types of reserved displays including a normal reserved display and a special reserved display that has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the normal reserved display can be displayed;
When the hold memory is stored, the normal hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a normal start mode, a normal completion mode, and a plurality of normal intermediate modes including a normal pre-completion mode which is a mode immediately before the normal completion mode,
When the reserved memory is stored, the special reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a special start mode, a special completion mode, and a plurality of special intermediate modes including a special pre-completion mode which is the mode immediately before the special completion mode,
The reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display can be moved from the position where it was displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to the position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the number of reserved memories N, which is a variable display in a situation where N number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed stepwise from the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changed to the normal completion mode over the predetermined period, and the normal hold display is displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the special start mode is gradually changed to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then the special hold display is changed to the special completion mode, and this change is carried out over the predetermined period to display the special hold display;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the normal start mode to a normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, and when the next variable display is started in a situation where the normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode is reached, the display is changed to the normal completion mode based on that timing and the normal hold display is displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the special start mode to a special midway mode different from the special pre-completion mode, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the special midway mode different from the special pre-completion mode is reached, the mode is changed to the special completion mode based on that timing and the special hold display is displayed ,
In either case, when a new reserved memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than a predetermined period, or when a new reserved memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than a predetermined period, the reserved memory performance can be executed over a special period,
The display area used for the change in which the normal hold display is started in the normal start mode, gradually changed from the normal start mode to the normal midway mode, and then changed to the normal completion mode is larger than the display area used for displaying the normal hold display during the period from when the normal hold display is displayed in the normal completion mode to when the hold shift starts,
The display area used for the change in which the special hold display is started in the special start mode, gradually changed from the special start mode to the special intermediate mode, and then changed to the special completion mode is larger than the display area used for the display of the special hold display during the period from when the special hold display is displayed in the special completion mode to when the hold shift starts.
A gaming machine characterized by: